AVEVA P&ID 12.1.

SP1
User Guide
AVEVA Solutions Ltd

Disclaimer
1.1 AVEVA does not warrant that the use of the AVEVA software will be uninterrupted, error-free or free from
viruses.

1.2 AVEVA shall not be liable for: loss of profits; loss of business; depletion of goodwill and/or similar losses; loss of
anticipated savings; loss of goods; loss of contract; loss of use; loss or corruption of data or information; any
special, indirect, consequential or pure economic loss, costs, damages, charges or expenses which may be
suffered by the user, including any loss suffered by the user resulting from the inaccuracy or invalidity of any data
created by the AVEVA software, irrespective of whether such losses are suffered directly or indirectly, or arise in
contract, tort (including negligence) or otherwise.

1.3 AVEVA's total liability in contract, tort (including negligence), or otherwise, arising in connection with the
performance of the AVEVA software shall be limited to 100% of the licence fees paid in the year in which the user's
claim is brought.

1.4 Clauses 1.1 to 1.3 shall apply to the fullest extent permissible at law.

1.5 In the event of any conflict between the above clauses and the analogous clauses in the software licence under
which the AVEVA software was purchased, the clauses in the software licence shall take precedence.

Copyright
Copyright and all other intellectual property rights in this manual and the associated software, and every part of it
(including source code, object code, any data contained in it, the manual and any other documentation supplied
with it) belongs to, or is validly licensed by, AVEVA Solutions Limited or its subsidiaries.

All rights are reserved to AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. The information contained in this document
is commercially sensitive, and shall not be copied, reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted without
the prior written permission of AVEVA Solutions Limited. Where such permission is granted, it expressly requires
that this copyright notice, and the above disclaimer, is prominently displayed at the beginning of every copy that is
made.

The manual and associated documentation may not be adapted, reproduced, or copied, in any material or
electronic form, without the prior written permission of AVEVA Solutions Limited. The user may not reverse
engineer, decompile, copy, or adapt the software. Neither the whole, nor part of the software described in this
publication may be incorporated into any third-party software, product, machine, or system without the prior written
permission of AVEVA Solutions Limited, save as permitted by law. Any such unauthorised action is strictly
prohibited, and may give rise to civil liabilities and criminal prosecution.

The AVEVA software described in this guide is to be installed and operated strictly in accordance with the terms
and conditions of the respective software licences, and in accordance with the relevant User Documentation.
Unauthorised or unlicensed use of the software is strictly prohibited.

Copyright 1994 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. AVEVA shall not
be liable for any breach or infringement of a third party's intellectual property rights where such breach results from
a user's modification of the AVEVA software or associated documentation.

The AVEVA P&ID user interface is based on the Microsoft® Office Fluent™ user interface.

Trademark
AVEVA and Tribon are registered trademarks of AVEVA Group plc or its subsidiaries. AVEVA product names are
trademarks or registered trademarks of AVEVA Solutions Limited or its subsidiaries. Unauthorised use
oftrademarks belonging to AVEVA Group plc or its subsidiaries is strictly forbidden.

Fluent is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation and the Fluent user interface is licensed from Microsoft Corporation.

AVEVA Solutions Ltd, High Cross, Madingley Road, Cambridge, CB3 0HB, United Kingdom.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide

AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide

Contents Page

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:1
About this User Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:1
Overview of AVEVA P&ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:2
Interfaces with other Applications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:2
Features of AVEVA P&ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:3

Project Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:1

Upgrading Pipes and Symbols from old Projects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:1
Upgrading the Symbol Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:1
Upgrading Symbols and Pipes on Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:2
Project Options Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:5
AVEVA P&ID Project Administration Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:6
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:6
Project Configuration Category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:13
VPE Workbench Configuration Category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:16
Project Database Configuration Category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:26
P&ID Reports Configuration Category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:28
Drawing Configuration Category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:31
Item Types Configuration Category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:43
Label Types Configuration Category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:47
Text Styles Configuration Category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:51
Symbols Configuration Category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:52
List of Values Configuration Category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:63
Pipes Configuration Category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:68
Signal Styles Configuration Category. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:90
Tracing Configuration Category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:92

© Copyright 1994 to current year. i 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide

Instruments Configuration Category. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:94

Equipment Configuration Category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:113
Valves Configuration Category. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:128
Line Fittings Configuration Category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:145
Nozzles Configuration Category. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:149
Offsheet Connector Configuration Category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:152
Miscellaneous Configuration Category. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:156
Excel Interface Configuration Category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:170
Spec Driven Configuration Category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:172
User Defined Attributes Configuration Category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:183
User Access Configuration Category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:191
PDMS Integration Configuration Category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:192
AI Integration Configuration Category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:194
AVEVA NET Configuration Category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:195
AE Integration Configuration Category. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:200
Document Manager Configuration Category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:201
Changing Units on a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:202
Associated Project Configuration Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:202
Defining Project Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:203
Creating a New Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:203
Upgrading Symbols from Old Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:203
Avoiding Problems when using Client Symbology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:203
Symbol Utility Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:204
Defining a New Pipe Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:207
Defining a New Signal Line Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:207
Defining a New Tracing Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:213
Customisation Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:213
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:213
Start-up Routines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:213
Explorers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:216
Right Click Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:217
Toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:217
Menus ............................................................ 2:217
Adding Custom Lisp Routines to AVEVA P&ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:218
Adding new multi line styles in AVEVA P&ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:218
Running AVEVA P&ID in "Save To Model Mode" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:219
Auto Save Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:221
Project Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:222
Complex Linetypes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:222

© Copyright 1994 to current year. ii 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide

Customising the AVEVA P&ID Tool Palette. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:223

Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:223
Grouping Palettes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:224
Creating New Groups and Palettes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:228
Adding Signal and Process Lines to the Tool Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:229
Adding Symbols to the Tool Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:233

Principles and Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:1

Good Drawing Practice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:1
Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:2
Automatic Drawing Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:2
Pipes and Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:2
Categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:2
Pipe Creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:3
Inserting Symbols. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:4
Validation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:4

The Graphical User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:1

Explorer Display Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:1
Engineering Explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:3
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:3
Equipment, Instrument and Pipes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:4
Unassigned Items. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:6
Context Sensitive Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:8
Searching for Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:9
Symbol Explorer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:10
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:10
Using the Symbol Explorer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:11
Symbol Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:15
Logging On. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:15
Accessing the Symbol Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:15
New Symbol Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:16
Using the Symbol Editor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:17
Closing the Symbol Editor and Updating the Drawing Symbol Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:21
Updating Edited Symbols on Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:22
P&ID Data Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:23
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:23
Viewing P&ID Drawing Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:25

© Copyright 1994 to current year. iii 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide

Assigning Unassigned Items to a Drawing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:25

Assigning Sources/Destinations to Page Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:26
Viewing and Assigning AVEVA Instrumentation and AVEVA Electrical Data . . . . . . . . . . 4:26
Importing, Viewing and Exporting data to and from PDMS Schematics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:29
Importing and Viewing data from AVEVA Engineering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:30
Processing Deleted Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:35
Zooming into an item on the Drawing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:35
Labelling the Drawing with Data from the P&ID Data Grid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:35
Configuring the Grid Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:36
Exporting the Grid to an Excel Spreadsheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:42
Viewing Item Datasheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:42
AVEVA P&ID Tool Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:44
The Drawing Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:45
Viewing Pipe and Inline Item Properties. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:45
Drawing Page Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:46
Properties Dialogs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:51
Modal Properties Dialogs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:51
Non-Modal Properties Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:56
AVEVA P&ID Tabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:58
Home Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:58
Data Management Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:68
Utilities Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:72

Upgrading AutoCAD Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:1
AutoCAD Drafting Guidelines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:1
Upgrading AutoCAD Lines to AVEVA P&ID Pipes, Process Links and Signal Lines. . . . . . 5:1
Upgrading AutoCAD Blocks to AVEVA P&ID Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:2
Upgrading AutoCAD Text to AVEVA P&ID Labels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:2
Viewing Upgraded and Un-upgraded Entities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:2
AutoCAD Drafting Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:3
AVEVA P&ID Drawing Upgrade Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:4
Starting the AVEVA P&ID Drawing Upgrade Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:4
Assigning P&ID Item Types and Symbol Data to AutoCAD Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:6
Assigning P&ID Symbol Names to AutoCAD Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:8
Assigning P&ID Pipe Types to AutoCAD Line Types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:11
Assigning P&ID Signal Line Types to AutoCAD Line Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:11
Upgrade Procedures in AVEVA P&ID. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:13
Upgrading Lines to Pipes and Signal Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:13

© Copyright 1994 to current year. iv 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide

Upgrading Blocks to Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:18

Upgrading Text to Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:21
Viewing Upgraded Entities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:25

Drawing P&IDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:1

Quick Guide to Drawing P&IDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:1
Creating a New Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:4
Starting and Exiting AVEVA P&ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:5
Titling a Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:5
Inserting Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:6
Inserting Unassigned P&ID Database Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:7
Inserting Unassigned VPE Workbench Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:7
Drawing Pipes and Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:8
Drawing Pipes and Process Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:8
Drawing Signal Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:10
Tracing Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:10
Indicating Pipe Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:11
Selecting Multiple Drawing Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:11
Labelling Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:11
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:11
Setting Text Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:12
Labelling/Editing Non-AVEVA P&ID Text. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:13
Label Inheritance from Owning Pipes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:13
Labelling Equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:14
Labelling General Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:15
Labelling Inline Fittings (Special Piping Items). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:16
Labelling Pipe Destination Fittings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:16
Labelling Port Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:16
Labelling Instrument Valves (Control Valves) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:16
Labelling General Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:17
Labelling General Instruments - Using Instrument Pattern Labels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:19
Labelling General Instruments - Panel Reference Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:20
Labelling System I/O Connections, Interlocks and Logic Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:20
Labelling I/O Rockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:20
Labelling Nozzles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:21
Labelling Miscellaneous Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:21
Labelling Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:21
Labelling Clouds. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:21

© Copyright 1994 to current year. v 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide

Labelling Pipe Flags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:21

Labelling Revision Triangles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:22
Setting Properties Sheet fields to inherit previously entered values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:22
Setting Labels to Inherit Values from Drawing Sheet Attributes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:23
Inserting Symbols with Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:24
Automatic Tagging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:24
Labelling Pipes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:25
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:25
Label Display Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:27
Labelling Pipes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:29
Labelling Pipes with Reducers and Reducing Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:30
Labelling Pipes with Breaks and Inline Breaks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:30
Adding Pipe Destination Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:31
Modifying Pipe Label Fields and Cascading Changes Through a Pipe Run . . . . . . . . . . . 6:31
Setting Properties Sheet fields to inherit previously entered values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:32
Setting Labels to Inherit Values from Drawing Sheet Attributes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:32
Inserting Symbols with Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:33
Automatic Tagging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:33
Adding User-Defined Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:34
Label Validation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:35
Label Validation against Lists of Valid Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:36
Label Format Validation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:37
Label Uniqueness Validation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:37
Label Validation across all Project P&IDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:37
Label Validation against Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:40
Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:40
Typical Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:41
Validation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:42
Sheet-to-Sheet Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:42
Unique identifiers in VPE Workbench . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:43
Typical Item Flag in AVEVA P&ID Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:43
Typical Items in VPE Workbench . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:43
Associated Project Configuration Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:43
Dynamic Labelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:43
Item Labels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:43
Design Data Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:44
Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:44
General Editing, Notes and Revision Clouds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:44

© Copyright 1994 to current year. vi 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide

Deleting Items. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:45

Detecting Corrupted Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:46
Saving Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:46

Data Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:1

Integration with an AVEVA P&ID Reports Database. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:1
Exporting Data for an AVEVA P&ID Reports Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:1
Updating AVEVA P&ID with changes in an AVEVA P&ID Reports Database . . . . . . . . . . . 7:2
Transferring Data to and from AVEVA Instrumentation and AVEVA Electrical 7:3
Exporting to AVEVA Instrumentation and AVEVA Electrical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:3
Importing from AVEVA Instrumentation and AVEVA Electrical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:3
Integration with PDMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:4
Integration with PDMS Schematics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:4
Integration with AVEVA Engineering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:4
Importing VPE Workbench Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:5
Importing Instrument Tag/Loop Numbers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:5
Importing Equipment Design Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:6
Importing I/O Address Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:7
Exporting Data to a VPE Workbench Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:7
Data Validation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:8
Points to Note. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:8
Exporting Data to AVEVA NET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:10
Exporting to an ISO 15926 File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:10
Transferring Data to and from Excel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:11

AVEVA P&ID Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:1

Preliminary Procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:1
Specifying Project Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:1
Creating Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:1
Upgrading AutoCAD Drawings to AVEVA P&ID Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:1
Upgrading Items from old Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:1
Opening a Drawing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:2
Adding a Title to a Drawing and entering Drawing Sheet Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:2
Implementing Configuration Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:6
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:6
Updating Equipment Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:7
Updating PipeTags. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:8
Updating Spec Driven Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:9

© Copyright 1994 to current year. vii 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide

Updating Pipe Style Colours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:10

Convert Project Label Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:10
Changing AVEVA P&ID Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:12
Turning Automatic Flow Arrows On and Off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:12
Turning Automatic Tracing On and Off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:12
Turning Automatic Breaks On and Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:13
Turning the Display of Ports On and Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:14
Selecting the Style of New Pipes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:14
Selecting the Tracing Style of New Pipes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:15
Selecting the Style of New Signal Lines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:15
Inserting Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:16
Inserting Symbols - General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:16
Inserting Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:18
Inserting Electrical Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:20
Inserting Nozzles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:22
Inserting Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:24
Inserting Instrument Valves (Control Valves) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:26
Inserting Inline Fittings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:30
Inserting Instruments (Balloons). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:33
Inserting Flow Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:36
Inserting Miscellaneous Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:38
Inserting Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:41
Inserting Unassigned P&ID Database Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:43
Inserting Unassigned VPE Workbench Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:44
Drawing Pipes and Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:48
Drawing Pipes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:48
Inserting Unassigned P&ID Database Pipes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:49
Drawing Process Links. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:51
Changing Pipe Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:56
Applying Tracing to Pipes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:56
Drawing Signal Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:57
Changing Signal Line Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:58
Breaking Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:58
Merging Pipes, Branches and Signal Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:59
Splitting Pipes and Signal Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:60
Splitting off Branches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:61
Reversing Pipe and Signal Line Flows. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:62
Adding Pipe and Signal Line Segments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:63
Merging Pipe Segments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:64

© Copyright 1994 to current year. viii 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide

Deleting Pipe and Signal Line Segments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:65

Changing the Length of Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:65
Adding Elbows to a Line. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:66
Changing Pipes to Branches and Branches to Pipes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:68
Changing the Owning Pipes of Branches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:69
Connecting Pipes to Nozzles and Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:70
Disconnecting Pipes from Nozzles and Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:71
Labelling Symbols and Pipes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:72
Labelling - General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:72
Labelling Using the Non-Modal Properties Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:74
Labelling Equipment (with or without Trim) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:76
Labelling Electrical Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:81
Adding Equipment Headers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:85
Labelling Nozzles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:86
Labelling General Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:90
Labelling Port Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:96
Labelling Inline Fittings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:98
Labelling Pipe Destination Fittings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:101
Creating Instrument Loops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:103
Labelling General Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:104
Labelling System I/O Connections, Interlocks and Logic Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:110
Labelling I/O Rockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:112
Labelling Revision Triangles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:115
Creating Pipe Groups. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:119
Labelling Pipes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:121
Labelling and Connecting Pipe Flags. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:127
Labelling Reducers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:132
Labelling Breaks and Inline Breaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:136
Adding Pipe Destination Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:139
Labelling with Data from the P&ID Data Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:142
Refreshing P&ID Data Grid Labels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:145
Editing Non-AVEVA P&ID Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:145
Labelling Typical Items. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:146
Replacing Tags with Tags in the Automatic Tag Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:148
Setting a Pipe Label as the Main Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:149
Changing the Association of a Pipe Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:151
Adding Notes to Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:152
Globally Editing Labels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:153
Setting Symbols to Inherit Label Data from a Manually Selected Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:156
Switching off Label Data Inheritance from Pipes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:157

© Copyright 1994 to current year. ix 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide

Labelling Items with UDAs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:157

Removing UDAs from Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:159
Modifying Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:161
Copying Drawing Objects and Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:161
Moving Drawing Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:167
Mirroring Drawing Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:169
Stretching Drawing Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:170
Rotating Drawing Objects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:172
Deleting Drawing Objects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:173
Exchanging Individual Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:174
Exchanging Symbols Globally . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:176
Moving Items to the Non-Plot Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:176
Drawing Revision Clouds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:177
Changing the Colours of Multiple Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:178
Data Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:191
Checking for Corrupted Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:191
Exporting Data to a P&ID Reports and/or AVEVA Engineering Database. . . . . . . . . . . . 8:191
Connecting to a P&ID Reports Database. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:195
Opening a P&ID Reports Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:196
Issuing Drawings for Document Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:197
Synchronising Data with a VPE Workbench Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:198
Synchronising Multiple Drawing Data with VPE Workbench . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:207
Connecting to a VPE Workbench Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:209
Disconnecting from a VPE Workbench Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:210
Labelling with VPE Workbench Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:210
Inserting Tables of VPE Workbench Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:212
Refreshing VPE Workbench Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:213
Transferring Data from AVEVA Instrumentation and AVEVA Electrical. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:214
Transferring Data to PDMS Schematic Databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:217
Publishing Data to AVEVA NET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:218
Exporting Data to ISO 15926 Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:219
Exporting Data to Excel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:221
Editing P&ID Data in an Excel Spreadsheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:225
Importing Data from Excel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:229
Exporting Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:234
Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:236
Creating Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:236
Resetting Label Text to its Default Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:238
Regenerating the Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:239

© Copyright 1994 to current year. x 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide

Creating Item Associations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:239

Show Associations between Items. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:240
List Item Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:241
Assigning a New Branch Id to a Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:242
Viewing and Editing Pipe Entity Sequences. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:243
Deleting Error Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:245
Clearing Duplicate Values with Null Drawing IDs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:246
Clearing Duplicate Values with Specified Drawing IDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:246
Viewing a Drawing’s History. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:246
Running a Command for a Batch of Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:247

AVEVA P&ID Document Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:1

Opening the AVEVA P&ID Document Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:1
Opening a Project. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:3
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:3
Graphics Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:3
Report Compare Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:4
P&ID Compare Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:4
Viewing Revision Details. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:5
Refreshing Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:6
Viewing Revisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:6
Comparing Revisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:8
Simultaneous Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:10
Exporting Revisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:11
Exporting Drawing Revisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:11
Exporting Report Revisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:11
Restoring Drawing Revisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:11
Deleting Revisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:12
Closing Projects and Exiting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:12

Appendices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:1
AVEVA P&ID Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:1
PID.MLN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:1
Output File Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:8
Drawing Details - .drg file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:8
Equipment Information - .equ file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:9
Nozzle Information - .noz file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:10
Instrument Loops - .ilp file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:10

© Copyright 1994 to current year. xi 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide

In-Line Non-Valves - .inv file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:10

Process Connected Instrument Information - .ipc file. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:12
Remote Instrument Information - .irm file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:13
In-Line Valves Information - .ivl file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:14
System Output Information - .isy file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:15
Pipe Information - .pip file. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:16
Pipe Item Information - .pit file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:16
Notes Information - .nte file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:17
Link Connectivities Information - .con file. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:17
User-Defined Attributes Information - .usd file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:17
Valve Port Information - .por file. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:18
Monitor File - .mon file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:18
AVEVA P&ID Item Types and Label Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:19
Pipes, Trim and Process Links Item Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:19
Signal Line Item Types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:19
Tracing Item Types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:19
Symbol Item Types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:19
Label Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:21
AutoCAD Defaults set by AVEVA P&ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:25
The ISO15926 (Version 3.2.0) Schema Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:26
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:26
XML Model Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:26
Shared Attribute Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:29
Element Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:32
The ISO15926 (Version 3.3.3) Schema Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:95
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:95
Model Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:95
Shared Attribute Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:101
Element Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:103
Format of the Excel Interface Spreadsheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:175
The Spreadsheet Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:175
Item Worksheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:175
Drawing Data Worksheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:176
NEW Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:176
Insertable and Updateable Fields. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:176
Validated Rows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:177
Setting up AVEVA P&ID to Connect with VPE Workbench . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:178
Installing the VPE Middle Tier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:178
Configuring the AVEVA P&ID Client . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:181

© Copyright 1994 to current year. xii 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide

Synchronising. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:182
Batch Loading data to VPE Workbench . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:183
Setting up PDMS Schematics to Connect with P&ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:184
Setting up AVEVA P&ID to Connect with AVEVA Engineering . . . . . . . . . . 10:185
AVEVA Reports Service Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:185
Integration Data Source Queries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:187
Integration with AVEVA Engineering: Setup and Import Procedures in AVEVA
Engineering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:189
Basic Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:189
Connecting to AVEVA P&ID. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:197
Importing from AVEVA P&ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:197
Copying Project Databases and Datasets from Project to Project . . . . . . . 10:201
Exporting and Importing tables from one Database to another (for Datasets) . . . . . . . . 10:201
Copy a Project from one site to another. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:220
SQL Server Roles for AVEVA P&ID Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:224
AVEVA P&ID SQL Server User Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:224
Procedure to Assign Permissions/Roles in SQL Server. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:226
Project Setup - Sequence of Activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:229
System Administrator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:229
Project Administrator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:230
PID Power User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:231
PID User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:232

© Copyright 1994 to current year. xiii 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide

© Copyright 1994 to current year. xiv 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Overview

1 Overview

1.1 About this User Guide

This user guide is for AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1.
The sections of the guide, and their content, are as follows:
Overview
An overview of this user guide and of AVEVA P&ID.
Project Configuration
Information on the configuration requirements at the start of a project, and those that
may be necessary from time to time during the project.
Principles and Concepts
Recommended drawing practices and background information on the operation of
AVEVA P&ID.
The Graphical User Interface
Information on the Engineering and Symbol Explorers, drawing page features,
toolbars, menus and other aspects of the GUI.
Upgrading AutoCAD Drawings
Procedures for using the AVEVA P&ID Drawing Upgrade Utility and AVEVA P&ID
facilities to upgrade “dumb" AutoCAD drawings to "intelligent" AVEVA P&ID drawings.
Drawing P&IDs
A guide to the generating P&IDs, with links to the appropriate detailed procedures.
Data Transfer
Information on transferring data to and from AVEVA P&ID.
AVEVA P&ID Procedures
Step-by-step instructions on carrying out AVEVA P&ID procedures for creating,
editing, and exporting data from P&IDs.
AVEVA P&ID Document Manager
Describes the AVEVA P&ID Document Manager, used to view and compare revisions
of P&IDs and P&ID reports.
Appendices
Data on commands, file formats, item and label types, and the AutoCAD defaults used
by AVEVA P&ID.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 1:1 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Overview

1.2 Overview of AVEVA P&ID

AVEVA P&ID is an AutoCAD 2011 (64-bit) based application that enables the creation of
intelligent P&IDs quickly and accurately. As a user inserts engineering symbols, and draws
flow lines in AVEVA P&ID engineering intelligence is embedded in the AutoCAD drawing
that identifies the items and the connectivity between them. Engineering tag information or
labels, such as Equipment, Pipeline and Instrument identifiers can be added as the items
are created, or later to suit the progressive development of P&IDs and the engineering data
available at the time.
The AVEVA P&ID Graphical User Interface (GUI) comprises a project explorer displaying
lists of the Lines, Equipment and Instruments on the drawing, plus symbol libraries,
customised menus and toolbars and properties dialog style dialog boxes for entering
engineering tags or labels, which integrate smoothly with the AutoCAD display and
software.
Information is validated online as it is entered into AVEVA P&ID by a conformance check
against validation lists.

1.2.1 Interfaces with other Applications

• AVEVA P&ID Reports is an engineering database fully integrated with P&ID. Item data
can be exported to AVEVA P&ID Reports from P&ID drawings. AVEVA P&ID Reports
can be used to add to, edit and manage this data between imports from AVEVA P&ID,
use this data to create custom reports and queries in Excel, and to manage pipes that
span multiple P&IDs. Data in a P&ID Reports database can be viewed in the P&ID Data
Grid and used to label drawings.
• AVEVA P&ID can export instrument data and electrical equipment data to AVEVA
Instrumentation (AI) and AVEVA Electrical (AE), and drawings containing the
exported data can be viewed in the AI and AE core applications. A stockpile of
Instruments created in AI and equipment created in AE can be viewed in the P&ID Data
Grid and can be inserted into the P&ID drawings, and item data used to label drawings.
• Data can also be imported from AVEVA Engineering. The content of an Engineering
database can be viewed in the P&ID Data Grid and the data used to label drawings, in
the same way as data from AI and AE. P&ID data may also be imported into an AVEVA
Engineering database using the AVEVA Engineering Tags Module.
• Data can be saved directly into PDMS Schematic databases in the AVEVA PDMS
Schematic Model Manager. Feedback from such PDMS load activities is captured
and displayed in the P&ID user interface. The content of a Schematic database can be
viewed in the P&ID Data Grid and the data used to label drawings.
• Engineering tag information and connectivity from each drawing can be synchronised
with data in AVEVA VPE Workbench, where the engineering items are automatically
created or revised.
As data is transferred from the P&IDs to VPE Workbench a logical Plant Connectivity
Model (PCM) is created and maintained automatically, that identifies all the Lines,
Equipment and Instruments on the project and the Line connectivity between items and
the ownership implied by the P&ID connections. Once the PCM has been populated
engineers can review the P&ID changes and Issue this information for detailed
engineering, where the P&ID data forms the basis of their engineering datasheets,
project reports, and schematics.
Once detailed engineering design data has been entered into VPE Workbench and
Released by other groups of engineers, this data can be referenced, displayed on the
P&ID and automatically updated when it changes. This ensures data consistency
between the design information and the drawings.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 1:2 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Overview

1.3 Features of AVEVA P&ID

AVEVA P&ID provides the designer with a flow diagram development system which has the
following features:
• A Graphical User Interface (GUI) that includes and supports the Microsoft Office 2010
Fluent User Interface. Familiarity with the GUI enables users to concentrate on the
features provided and hence reduce the learning periods.
• Fast Performance and Graphical Creation. When each entity is placed on a flow
diagram by AVEVA P&ID, it is assigned an engineering type reference which
determines its 'behaviour' (new items are assigned a type reference at the outset).
• Both object driven (select object(s) then select command to apply to object(s), and
command driven (select command then object(s) to which the command is to be
applied) methods of drawing can be utilised.
• Intelligent 'labels' as engineering item tags are overlaid on graphics. The 'labels' can be
added to items as they are created or later when project data becomes available,
hence preventing bottlenecks in flow diagram production.
• Online validation of intelligent labels as they are placed on the flow diagram from
project data entered into VPE Workbench and exported, or by manually created project
validation lists. It is possible to export the validation files from VPE Workbench if the
flow diagram data is to be loaded back into that database.
• Project specific configuration including layer/level, line styles, symbol sets, tag formats
and colour, allows conformity to client standards.
• Items that logically reside together (for example, items of equipment with nozzles) are
associated together when placed by AVEVA P&ID.
• Data security is provided through AutoCAD's extensive programming capabilities and
cannot be accessed without an application to do so.
• AVEVA P&ID can co-exist with AutoCAD with no change to the setup parameters for
the underlying CAD software.
• Data can be transferred from P&ID drawings into AVEVA P&ID Reports databases
where it can be edited and managed, and used to produce a range of reports in Excel
format. Data in a P&ID Reports database can be viewed in the P&ID Data Grid and
used to label drawings.
• Data can be saved directly into PDMS Schematic databases in the AVEVA PDMS
Schematic Model Manager. The content of a Schematic database can be viewed in the
P&ID Data Grid and the data used to label drawings.
• The content of an AVEVA Engineering database can also be viewed in the P&ID Data
Grid and the data used to label drawings. P&ID data may also be imported into an
AVEVA Engineering database using the AVEVA Engineering Tags Module.
• AVEVA P&ID can export instrument data to AVEVA Instrumentation (AI), and drawings
containing the exported instrument data can be viewed in AI. Instruments created in AI
can be viewed in the P&ID Data Grid and can be inserted into the P&ID drawings, and
instruments data used to label drawings.
• AVEVA P&ID can export electrical equipment data to AVEVA Electrical (AE), and
drawings containing the exported equipment data can be viewed in AE. Electrical
equipment created in AE can be viewed in the P&ID Data Grid and can be inserted into
the P&ID drawings, and equipment data used to label drawings
• Ability to work online with the VPE Workbench for two-way data transfers enabling flow
diagram information to be exported to VPE Workbench and Pipeline, Instruments and
selected Equipment design information can be referenced from the database onto the
flow diagram for display and data consistency.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 1:3 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Overview

• Ability to work offline with the VPE Workbench database. P&IDs can be edited offline
from the database and synchronized back into the project by connecting to VPE
Workbench at any time.
• Data can be transferred automatically to an SQL database when it is entered or edited,
or “manually” synchronized.
• Data can be exported to Microsoft Excel spreadsheets, where it can be edited. The
edited data can then be imported back into AVEVA P&ID.
• Easy substitution of client symbols with no naming restrictions.
• Ability to read in client drawings/designs or to scan them for use as backgrounds.
• Ability, in conjunction with the AVEVA P&ID Drawing Upgrade Utility, to upgrade "dumb"
AutoCAD lines and blocks to "intelligent" AVEVA P&ID pipes and symbols.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 1:4 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

2 Project Configuration

2.1 Upgrading Pipes and Symbols from old Projects

A revised version of pipe lines that improved the performance and usability of the
application considerably was introduced with AVEVA VPE P&ID 7.2 SP3.
For projects developed using previous versions of AVEVA P&ID, an upgrade of the pipes
and symbols on the project drawings is required before the drawings can be used in AVEVA
VPE P&ID 7.2 SP3 or AVEVA P&ID 12.0 or later.
It is mandatory to verify that all the pipes are valid in 7.2 SP2 (or previous 7.2 versions)
before executing the upgrade process. This validation process can be executed by using
the command “net validate all”.
It is also mandatory to Synchronise (see 8.8.6: Synchronising Data with a VPE Workbench
Database) each of the legacy drawings to be upgraded, using the legacy version machine.
This process must be successful and the output files generated must be kept in the Project
Area (e.g. …\Vantage\...).
All the project files must then be copied to the 12.0 or later machine where the upgrade
process will be continued.
Once the files are copied to the 12.0 or later machine, the project must be upgraded using
the Project Wizard in the normal way. This process does not upgrade the pipes and the
symbols but it upgrades the project from the legacy versions to the latest version.
The next steps are to upgrade the symbol library, and then run the AVEVA Legacy Project
Upgrade Utility to upgrade the symbols and pipes on the project drawings.

2.1.1 Upgrading the Symbol Library

The upgrade procedure for symbols in the project symbol library is as follows:
1. In 7.2 SP3 and 12.0 or later, all symbols in the symbol must have ports. To upgrade the
symbols in the symbol library by adding ports, access the Symbol Explorer, right-click
on the lower pane and select the Upgrade Ports from the menu that is then displayed.
Each project symbol is then upgraded in turn. Wait until the process is finished.
Note: Only the symbol files located in the \PMETSYM (Metric projects) or \PIMPSYM
(Imperial projects) symbol folders, or in sub-folders in these folders, are included in
the upgrade.

Note: If single connection symbols are included in the upgrade, it is recommended that
they are checked afterwards to ensure that ports have been placed on the correct
sides of the symbols. It is not always possible for the upgrade routine to detect which
this is.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:1 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

2. A log file is created in the project symbol folder that contains lists the symbols that were
correctly upgraded, any errors that occurred, and warnings that single connection
symbols were upgraded (and therefore should be checked). For example:
[C:\Aveva\P&ID\PROJECT\IPE\Autocad\Pmetsym\NV.DWG] [VLV]
successfully upgraded
Error: Symbol not found in project area [WEVA]
Warning: Symbol with single insertion point
[C:\Aveva\P&ID\PROJECT\IPE\Autocad\Pmetsym\Line
Fittings\FLAG2.DWG] [PFL]
The log files are best viewed in WordPad.
3. To manually upgrade symbols, use the Symbol Editor.

2.1.2 Upgrading Symbols and Pipes on Drawings

1. Once the symbol library has been upgraded, the existing symbols and pipes on the
projects can be upgraded from the revised symbol library. This is done using the
AVEVA P&ID Upgrade Utility.
Note:
• If upgrading symbols in a legacy project, the drawings must first be synchronised
(see 8.8.6: Synchronising Data with a VPE Workbench Database).
The output files generate by the synchronisation process must be available in the
AVEVA Data Path directory.
• The project .PRJ file must be available for selection (see below).
• The INST.VAL, EQUIP.VAL and PID.SYM must be available in the Validation
directory.
• It is recommended that the upgraded symbols are tested in an empty drawing
before proceeding to edit real project drawings.
Select AVEVA > P&ID > AVEVA P&ID Upgrade Utility > AVEVA P&ID Project Upgrade
from the Programs menu.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:2 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

The AVEVA Legacy Project Upgrade dialog is then displayed.

2. In the Select Input Folder field, enter the folder in which the drawings to be upgraded
are located, or press the Browse button and browse for the location. The full location
and file name of each AVEVA P&ID drawing in the selected input folder is the listed in
the dialog.
3. In the Select P&ID Project File field, enter the location and file name of the
configuration file (.PRJ) of the P&ID project associated with the drawings, or press the
Browse button and browse for the file.
4. In the Select Output Folder field, enter the folder in which the upgraded drawings are
to be placed, or press the Browse button and browse for the location.
5. The utility may optionally be used to export data from drawings to XML files in ISO
15928 format. This data can subsequently be imported into AVEVA PDMS using
Schematic Model Manager.
If this is required, check the ISO 15926 checkbox.
6. In the Select ISO Output Folder field, enter the folder in which the XML files are to be
placed, or press the Browse button and browse for the location.
7. Select ISO 15926 schema version to be used, either 3.2 or 3.3.
8. If all the P&ID drawings found in the input folder are to be upgraded (and optionally
have data exported from), select the Select All checkbox. If only certain drawings are
to be upgraded and exported from, check or uncheck the Select File checkboxes for
the individual drawings as required.
9. Select the Process button. The upgrade operation then takes place.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:3 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

10. When a drawing has been processed successfully, a green tick is displayed in its
Progress field. A red cross is displayed if the drawing is processed with errors.
11. To stop the operation, select the Cancel button.
12. Once a drawing has been processed, details of errors and warnings an be viewed by
selecting its View Log File button.
13. Close the utility by selecting the Exit button.
Once the symbols have been upgraded the next step is to upgrade pipes and process links.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:4 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

2.2 Project Options Overview

AVEVA P&ID can be configured to suit project requirements by means of project options.
These options are contained within the project catalogue file, <project>.prj, which resides in
the working directory of the current project. The options in this catalogue are modified using
the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration Program.
Project specific configurations can be established for directory paths, project numbers and
units, pipe thickness and styles, and many others.
Most changes in the project configuration are applied to an existing drawing when it is
loaded into the drawing editor, or when the Refresh Settings option in the AVEVA P&ID
Group of the Home Tab is selected. See 8.2: Implementing Configuration Changes.
Some configuration changes, those that would significantly slow down the opening of
drawings, must be triggered by the user after the drawing has opened.
Theoretically, changes can be made to the project catalogue configuration right up to the
point of data synchronisation with VPE Workbench although this is undesirable. If several
drawings have been created and such a change occurs, it is advisable to write a simple
script file which loads each drawing, saves it, and unloads it.

Warning: Changes made to project options should be authorised in advance and the
details documented, as these affect all other AVEVA P&ID users and can also
affect work already completed.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:5 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

2.3 AVEVA P&ID Project Administration Program

2.3.1 Introduction
AVEVA P&ID can be configured to suit project requirements by means of various options set
using the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program. See 2.2: Project Options Overview
for an overview of the use and impact of these options.
Most changes in the project configuration are applied to an existing drawing when it is
loaded into the drawing editor, or when the Refresh Settings option in the AVEVA P&ID
Group of the Home Tab is selected. See 8.2: Implementing Configuration Changes.
The AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program is a separate application from AVEVA
P&ID. It can be opened from the Project Administrator option in the AVEVA P&ID Group
of the Home Tab, or from a shortcut on the Programs menu (e.g. AVEVA Plant > Engineer >
P&ID 12.1.SP1 > Projects > [Project Name] > Project Administrator [Project Name]), or from
a desktop shortcut:

The LogIn dialog is displayed:

Enter the project login details for accessing the Administration program and press the OK
button (these are set when the project is installed/upgraded but can be amended using the
Project Database Configuration Category).
The password used if the Login as Administrator with password (SQL Server Security)
option is selected is set using the User Access Configuration Category of the Administration
program.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:6 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

The following is then displayed:

The File menu consists of the following options:

• Save: Saves project file settings for the current project. A toolbar button is also
available to perform this function.
• Open: Used to browse for and open another project. Project settings are stored in files
with a suffix of .PRJ. A toolbar button is also available to perform this function. If a
project is already open it must be closed by using the Close option.
• Close: Closes the settings dialogs for the current project.
• Recent: Displays a list of recently opened projects. Double-click on a project to switch
to it. If a project is already open it must be closed by using the Close option.
• Help: Opens a sub-menu from which the online help and "About" information can be
opened.
• Application Event Log: Displays a dialog in which application events are listed.
• Exit: Exits the application.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:7 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

• Project Catalogue Editor Dialog

Display the settings of a project by clicking the File tab (click on the File tab again to return
to the File menu). The following is then displayed:

The dialog box consists of two distinct sections:

• The Explorer
• Configuration Category application pane

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:8 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

The Explorer is used to navigate to the different Configuration Categories for which settings
and data are to be configured.
Each Configuration Category is concerned with a different aspect of the project
configuration. For example, Item Types, Signal Styles, Equipment, etc.
For some Configuration Categories, e.g. Drawing, information sub-categories are available,
e.g. Grid, Labels and Layers etc. Expand or close a Configuration Category by clicking on
the +/- boxes. For example:

As well as by using the Explorer, Configuration Categories may be selected from a menu
accessed by clicking the title of the current Configuration Category.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:9 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

Following selection of a Configuration Category, the relevant data and configuration

parameters are displayed in the application pane.

The fields, checkbox etc in the application panes are used to change project settings. The
majority of displayed data may be amended, and is validated on data entry where
applicable.
Tables of data associated with a Configuration Category are displayed in grids. Grids are
provided with standard facilities for grouping data by columns, pinning rows, re-ordering
columns and filtering the displayed data (similar to those of the P&ID Data Grid - see 4.5.11:
Configuring the Grid Layout).
A set of toolbars buttons is also provided to manage data in grids:

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:10 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

These buttons provide the following functions:

• To create a new record in a grid, use the button. A dialog is then displayed in
which the unique identifier of the record must be entered. The new record is then
added to the grid.

• To move up and down the list of rows in order to edit existing entries, use the and

buttons.

• To delete a row, scroll to the row in question and select the button.

• To copy a row, scroll to the row in question and select the button. As each record
must have a unique identifier, a dialog is then displayed in which the unique identifier
for the record copy must be entered. The copied record is then added to the grid as a
new row.

• To rename a row, scroll to the row in question and select the button. A dialog is
then displayed in which the new unique identifier of the record must be entered.
Not all these button are active for every grid. Some are not applicable for some grids and
are disabled.
The Configuration Categories are as follows:
• Project Configuration Category
• VPE Workbench Configuration Category
• Project Database Configuration Category
• P&ID Reports Configuration Category
• Drawing Configuration Category
• Item Types Configuration Category
• Label Types Configuration Category
• Text Styles Configuration Category
• Symbols Configuration Category
• List of Values Configuration Category
• Pipes Configuration Category
• Signal Styles Configuration Category
• Tracing Configuration Category
• Instruments Configuration Category

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:11 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

• Equipment Configuration Category

• Valves Configuration Category
• Line Fittings Configuration Category
• Nozzles Configuration Category
• Offsheet Connector Configuration Category
• Miscellaneous Configuration Category
• Excel Interface Configuration Category
• Spec Driven Configuration Category
• User Defined Attributes Configuration Category
• User Access Configuration Category
• PDMS Integration Configuration Category
• AI Integration Configuration Category
• AVEVA NET Configuration Category
• AE Integration Configuration Category
• Document Manager Configuration Category

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:12 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

2.3.2 Project Configuration Category

The Project Configuration Category is configured using a single application pane:

The application pane is divided into seven sections:

• Project Number Section

The Project Number field is used to set the identifier of the project, and is established when
the project is generated using the project wizard but can be changed if required. The project
number provides security when a synchronisation with VPE Workbench procedure
performed and prevents accidental transfers to the wrong project within VPE Workbench.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:13 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

• Project Units Section

This section is used to specify two settings:
• The Drawing Units field displays the drawing units specified by the project wizard.
Drawing units should never be changed once the project is under way, as they affect
the size of drawings, line thicknesses, symbols etc in AutoCAD, and so the field is
read-only.
• Select either the Metric or Imperial Label Units button. This setting controls whether
sizes entered as part of item labels are in metric or imperial units, and which list of
values file is used to validate the entries. Label units may be changed part way through
a project as required. Drawings will be automatically updated with the new units when
they are reloaded.
Note: Changes to drawings resulting from the label units being changed are not
automatically implemented when project drawings are loaded. The user must trigger
these changes "manually" in each drawing after it has loaded. See 8.2.6: Convert
Project Label Units.

• Project Paths Section

During the procedure for installing AVEVA P&ID, directory paths are set up. These can be
edited using the fields in the Project Paths section. The Browse buttons adjacent to each
field may be used to search for a new file path.
• The P&ID Installation Path field is used to specify the directory into which the AVEVA
P&ID software was installed.
• The AVEVA Data Path field is used to specify the output directory into which drawing
output files are saved. AVEVA P&ID also imports instrument loop numbers from VPE
Workbench via this directory, if the project is configured to do so.
• The Validation Directory Path field is used to specify the location of the files that contain
on-line validation data (lists of valid values against which item labels are checked on
entry). These validation files can be exported from VPE Workbench, in which case they
should not be edited locally.
• The Project Tag Data Path field is used to specify the location of the Access database
to which data could be exported in previous versions of AVEVA P&ID. This path is used
when upgrading a project to the current version.
• The Standard Metric Symbol Pat is used to specify displays the directory in which
standard metric symbols are located.
• The Project Metric Symbol Path field is used to specify the directory in which project
symbols are located.
• The Standard Imperial Symbol Path field is used to specify the directory in which
standard imperial symbols are located.
• The Project Imperial Symbol Path field is used to specify the directory in which project
imperial symbols are located.
• The Helpfile Path field is used to specify the location of the Online Guide.
• The Monitor File Path field is used to specify the location of the monitor file generated
each time an export takes place.
• The Drawing Location field is used to specify the directory in which project drawings
are located. Drawings can only be opened from this folder and from sub-folders in this
folder.
• The Assemblies Path field is used to specify the directory in which assemblies are
located.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:14 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

• When P&ID data is transferred to VPE Workbench, a copy of the P&ID drawing may be
made available for use by AVEVA Model Management, AVEVA Instrumentation and
AVEVA Electrical. In the Save Path field, specify the interface directory into which the
copies of the P&IDs are to be saved
If the project is set to use Metric drawing units, the Standard Imperial Symbol Path and the
Project Imperial Symbol Path fields will be 'greyed out'. If the project is set to use Imperial
drawing units, the Standard Metric Symbol Path and the Project Metric Symbol Path fields
will be 'greyed out'.

• Symbol Search Priority Section

It is possible to create a project symbol with the same name as a standard symbol supplied
with the installation. If this occurs, it is necessary to determine which directory, and which
version of the symbol, is to be searched for first and be the preferred version for the project.
See the 2.3.10: Symbols Configuration Category topic for details of symbol creation.
Select either the Project or Standard button to determine the symbol search priority. The
search priority also affects which directory any assemblies are created under, either
standard or project.
It is recommended that in normal circumstances the search priority is set to Project so that
project assemblies are created in the project directories.

• Update Graphical Changes Automatically on Start Up Section

If drawings are to be automatically updated when opened for the first time after changes
have been made to graphical Project Administration settings, check the Update checkbox.
If the user is to prompted to choose whether or not the changes are to be implemented
when opening the drawings, uncheck the checkbox.
The checkbox controls how changes to the followings settings are implemented:
Pipe Tags
Equipment Tags
Pipe Styles
Signal Styles
Item Type properties changes (Layers and Colours)

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:15 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

2.3.3 VPE Workbench Configuration Category

The VPE Workbench Configuration Category using the main VPE Workbench Configuration
Category pane and the Tables sub-category:
• VPE Workbench Configuration Category Pane
• Tables Sub-Category

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:16 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

• VPE Workbench Configuration Category Pane

Note: See also 10.8: Setting up AVEVA P&ID to Connect with VPE Workbench.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:17 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

The application pane is divided into four sections.

- Synchronise Settings Section

In the VPE Config File field, specify the location of the .INI configuration file of the VPE
Workbench installation with which the AVEVA P&ID project is to interface. This may be a
copy of the original file located on the VPE Workbench middle tier server.
In the VPE Service Path, enter the path to the EngAPIService component that will handle
the transfer of data to VPE Workbench. This should be located on the VPE Workbench
middle tier server. This path must include the port (which must be open) to be used for data
transfers. The default port is 8080.

- Explore Database Unassigned Settings Section

If the unassigned items in the VPE Workbench Database, i.e. those that have not yet been
included on a project P&ID, are to be displayed in the Engineering Explorer check the Show
Unassigned Items in Explorer checkbox.

- VPE Settings Section

In the Publisher Folder field, specify the folder into which drawings are published when
loading to the selected VPE Workbench project.
In the Database Project field, select the VPE Workbench project with which the AVEVA
P&ID project is to interface. The list of projects available in this field is taken from the
specified .INI file (see above).
The Export to VPE Workbench checkbox is used to set the default setting (checked or
unchecked) of the Export Data to Publishing Area checkbox on the Synchronise dialog (see
Synchronising Data with a VPE Workbench Database).
When a drawing is loaded to a VPE Workbench 5.8 or later project, e-mails can be sent to
users of that project to inform them of this. Enter the user names and e-mail addresses of
the VPE Workbench project users in the grid at the bottom of the section.

If a new e-mail recipient is to be entered, use the button to create a new row. Enter the
user name of the new recipient in the dialog that is then displayed:

User names cannot be edited. The user name row must be deleted and re-entered with a
new user name.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:18 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

- Batch Load to Workbench Section

This section is used to load/publish data from multiple drawings into a VPE Workbench
database.
The Select Drawings to Publish pane lists all the drawings that were either individually
synchronised using the Synchronising Data with a VPE Workbench Database procedure, or
had output files generated using the Synchronising Multiple Drawing Data with VPE
Workbench procedure.
The procedure for loading/publishing depends on whether drawing data is being exported to
a VPE Workbench 5.8 (or later) project, or a VPE Workbench 5.6 or 5.7 project.

Note: If the Add P&ID Drawing Details to Database checkbox of the P&ID Reports
Configuration Category is checked, copies of the drawing files themselves are also
exported to the VPE Workbench database when a load takes place (see VPE
Workbench Configuration Category Pane).

Loading/Publishing to VPE Workbench 5.8 or later Projects

Note that drawings can optionally be loaded/published to a VPE Workbench 5.8 project as
part of the Synchronise procedure.
If the project is a VPE Workbench 5.8 or later project, select the drawings to be loaded in the
Select Drawings to Publish pane and load/publish them by pressing the > button. The
drawings are moved to the Publishing Area pane and loaded into the VPE Workbench
project.
A message is displayed in the messages pane at the bottom of the section to indicate the
successful loading of the drawing data to the publishing area, for example: "905675 File
Successfully Loaded to Staging Area".
Use the >> button to load/publish all the listed drawings.
Loading/Publishing to VPE Workbench 5.6 or 5.7 Projects
If the project is a VPE Workbench 5.6 or 5.7 project, check the Using Workbench Legacy
Version (5.6/5.7) checkbox.
A connection to the VPE Workbench Database must then be established, if this has not
already been done. Press the Login button. The VPE Workbench Log In dialog is then
displayed.

For information on the use of this dialog and other options for connecting the a VPE
Workbench database see the Connecting to a VPE Workbench Database procedure.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:19 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

Once the connection has been made, select the drawings to be loaded in the Select
Drawings to Publish pane and use the > button to move them to the Publishing Area pane.
Use the >> button to select all the listed drawings for loading.
Start the load by pressing the Load button.
Progress, error and warning messages are displayed in the message pane at the bottom of
the section. Once loaded, the drawings are removed from the Publishing Area pane.
To view the log file of messages generated while loading/publishing, press the View Log
button. The file then opens in Notepad.
To delete all the drawings currently in the publishing area, press the Clear button. A
message is then displayed requesting that the deletion be confirmed. Press Yes to continue
with the deletion.

• Tables Sub-Category
The Tables pane is used create and maintain the definitions of tables of VPE Workbench
data that can be placed on AVEVA P&ID drawings:

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:20 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

- Existing Tables Section

This section lists all existing table definitions.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:21 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

To create a new table, select the Add Table button. Enter the name of the new table in the
dialog that is then displayed:

The name of the new table definition is then added to the list. Continue by entering the
settings of the table definition in the Table Details Section (see below). Note that the Table
Details Section will initially be populated with the settings entered for the previous table
definition, or if no table definition has been created previously, with default settings.
• To delete a table definition, select it and the Delete Table link.
• To rename a table definition, select it and the Rename Table link. Enter the new name
of the table definition in the dialog that is then displayed, and press the OK button.
• To edit an existing table definition, select it from the list. The current settings for the
selected table definition are then displayed in the Table Details Section and may be
changed as required.

- Table Details Section

Specifying the Appearance of a Table:
1. The Colour field defines the colour of the table (both the table borders and the table
text).
2. The Browse button adjacent to the Colour field is used to select the colour. On
selection of the button, the colour selection dialog box is displayed:

The colour can be selected by the following three methods:

• By selection of one of the colours shown in the palette.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:22 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

• By double clicking the Assume Owner Colour hyperlink. Not applicable for tables.
• By double-clicking on the Assume By Layer hyperlink. Tables will automatically
assume the colours of the layers they are inserted into, as set on the Layers Sub-
Category the Drawing Configuration Category.
• By manually entry into the Colour Code field
Following selection, press OK. The selected colour code will then be displayed in
Colour field.
3. The X and Y fields are used to specify the coordinates that the table will be placed at on
drawings.
4. The Text Style field is used to specify the style of the table text. Select the required style
from the list. Text styles are set up using the Text Styles pane. The default will be the
ROMANS style, which is supplied with the product and does not need to be set up.
5. The Row Height field is used to specify the height of the table rows.
6. The Text Height field is used to specify the height of text in the table.
Specifying the Type of Data a Table will display:
The API Group Set, API Group and API Group Set Argument fields are used to specify the
type of data that is to appear in the table:
1. Select the API Lookup button. If a connection to the project database has not been
established, the AVEVA P&ID Logon dialog is then displayed:

2. Complete the Username and Password fields, and select the required project from the
drop-down list in the Project field.
3. Select the OK button. The API Group Lookup dialog is then displayed.
4. If a connection to the database has already been established in this session, this dialog
is displayed when the API Lookup button is selected.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:23 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

5. Select the API Group and the Group Set which contain the required data, and press the
Set button.
6. The API Group Set and API Group fields in the Table Details Section are then
populated with the selected Group and the Group Set.
By default, tables will only be populated with data relating to items that are on the drawing
on which the tables are placed. Alternatively, the table or tables that data is to be extracted
can be specified in the API Group Set Argument field.
For example, if the following is entered:
Drawing_ID="9999"
Data will be extracted from the project drawing with the ID of 9999. If data is to be extracted
from multiple drawings, multiple arguments may be entered.
Setting up Table Columns:
Once the type of data has been specified, the columns that the table is to consist of, and the
data that is to populate these columns is set up using the grid section.
Adding a Column:
1. To add a column, select the button and enter the column name in the dialog that is
then displayed. A new row is then added to the grid. Each row in the grid is used to set
up one table column.
2. The Column field displays the number of each column. These numbers control the
order in which columns are displayed in the table, i.e. the column with the lowest
number will be the first column on the left.
The Column field is read-only. To change the order of columns, use the copy and delete
facilities.
3. In the Caption field, enter the text that is to appear as the heading for the column.
4. In the Designator field, select the required designator. When the table is placed on a
drawing, the designator is replaced with the appropriate value. The list of designators is
restricted to those in the selected API Group and the Group Set.

5. In the Width field, enter the width of the column.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:24 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

6. The Text Align field is used to specify the alignment of the text in the column. Enter the
appropriate code (1 to 9):
1 = Top Left
2 = Top Centre
3 = Top Right
4 = Middle Left
5 = Middle Centre
6 = Middle Right
7 = Bottom Left
8 = Bottom Centre
9 = Bottom Right
If no value is entered, the alignment defaults to Middle Left.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:25 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

2.3.4 Project Database Configuration Category

The Project Database Configuration Category is configured using the Settings sub-
category:

- SQL Server Settings Section

Project data is stored in an SQL database. This section is used to enter details of the SQL
server the project database is to use. These details are initially specified when a project is
installed or upgraded, but they may subsequently be amended here.
Enter a valid server name in the Server Name field.
Depending on whether the database is to be logged into using Windows Authentication or
SQL Server Authentication, select either the Use Windows Integrated Security (Windows
Authentication) option or the Login as Administrator with password (SQL Server Security)
option.
If the second option is selected, enter the login details in the Admin Login Name and
Password fields. This login must be a valid SQL Server Administrator account login.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:26 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

Test that the entered details are valid by selecting the Test Connection button. A message
will then be displayed indicating whether or not the connection details are valid. For
example:

- Online Editing Section

If label data is to be saved automatically to an SQL database when it is entered, check the
Save to database on Update checkbox. The saved data is used when validating the
uniqueness of tags in a project. See 6.13.4: Label Validation across all Project P&IDs
When a project is upgraded, in order for Spec Driven data and functionality to be available
(see 2.3.23: Spec Driven Configuration Category), the project database schema must be
updated by selecting the Upgrade Specdriven Database Schema - Upgrade button.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:27 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

2.3.5 P&ID Reports Configuration Category

The P&ID Reports Configuration Category is configured using the main P&ID Reports
Configuration Category pane and the Settings sub-category:
• P&ID Reports Configuration Category Pane
• Settings Sub-Category

• P&ID Reports Configuration Category Pane

A P&ID Reports database is supplied with the product (PidReports). By default, AVEVA
P&ID will be set to export data to this database. To create a new, blank P&ID Reports
database, press the Create button. A new database will then be created.
The filename of the new database will be "PidReports_<project name>_<incremented
number>.
The P&ID Reports Server Name field displays the name of the SQL server, as specified on
the Project Database Configuration Category.
The P&ID Reports Database field displays the name of the current P&ID Reports database.
Select a different database from the list available from this field if required. The list consists
of all P&ID Reports databases created for the project.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:28 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

• Settings Sub-Category

- P&ID Reports Settings

UDA values are displayed in AVEVA P&ID Reports on the UDA tab. If UDA values are also
to be displayed on the same tabs as the items they are associated with (assuming there are
fields available for them to be displayed in), check the Merge UDA Values checkbox.
The Update P&ID Reports after Synchronize checkbox controls the default setting of the
Export to PID Reports checkbox on the Synchronise dialog. If the Update P&ID Reports
after Synchronize checkbox is checked, then the default setting of the Export to PID Reports
checkbox is checked, and vice versa.
The Update and Consolidate P&ID Reports Database after Synchronize checkbox controls
the default setting of the Export & Consolidate Database checkbox on the Synchronise
dialog. If the Update and Consolidate P&ID Reports Database after Synchronize checkbox
is checked, then the default setting of the Export & Consolidate Database checkbox is
checked, and vice versa.
If the Add P&ID Drawing Details to Database checkbox is checked:
• drawing records may be added to the AVEVA P&ID Document Manager, depending on
the settings of the Document Manager Configuration Category.
• the comments regarding an export that may be entered in the Description dialog during
the export process are added to the P&ID Reports database.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:29 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

• copies of drawing files are saved to the VPE Workbench database when a load to VPE
Workbench takes place.

- Line Consolidation Section

This section is used to select which line properties are to be compared when attempting to
consolidate lines which are present on multiple P&IDs when they are transferred into P&ID
Reports. Both the properties of lines and the properties of the components on the ends of
lines may be compared.
As required, check the checkboxes in the First / Last component fields and/or Line fields
sections.
Note that the unique pipe validation fields specified in the P&ID project settings are
compared regardless of these settings.
When the fields of two lines with unique pipe validation tag do not match, the lines are not
consolidated and warning message is displayed in log tab of P&ID Reports.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:30 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

2.3.6 Drawing Configuration Category

The Drawing Configuration Category is divided into six sub-categories:

• Grid Sub-Category
• Labels Sub-Category
• Layers Sub-Category
• Settings Sub-Category
• Validation Sub-Category
• Drawing List Sub-Category

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:31 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

• Grid Sub-Category

The fields in the Grid application pane are used to set up the dimensions and other
elements of the drawing grid.
The application pane is divided into two sections.

- Drawing Frame Settings Section

This section contains the following settings:
• Drawing Length and Height fields. These fields specify the length and height of the
drawing.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:32 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

• Horizontal Start, Mid and End Distance fields are used to specify the horizontal
dimensions of the drawing frame grid.
• The Horizontal Start field is used to set the distance from the left-hand edge (0,0) of the
sheet to the left-hand edge of the frame.
• The Horizontal Mid field is used to set the length of AVEVA P&ID grid squares within
the frame.
• The Horizontal End field is used to set the distance from the right-hand edge of the
frame to the right-hand edge of the sheet.
• The Vertical Start, Mid and End Distance fields are used to specify the vertical
dimensions of the drawing frame grid.
• The Vertical End field is used to set the distance from the top edge of the sheet to the
top edge of the frame.
• The Vertical Mid field is used to set the height of AVEVA P&ID grid squares within the
frame.
• The Vertical Start field is used to set the distance from the bottom edge of the frame
(0,0) to the bottom edge of the sheet.
Only objects within the limits of drawings, as specified here using Drawing Length and
Height fields, will be validated.

- Grid Settings Section

This section contains the following settings:
• Vertical Grid Direction. This is a group of two buttons - Up and Down. It is only possible
to have one button selected at a time. Depending on the button selected, the grid will
increment from the top or the bottom along the Y-axis.
• Horizontal Grid Direction. This is a group of two buttons - Left and Right. It is only
possible to have one button selected at a time. Depending on the button selected, the
grid will increment from the left or from the right along the X-axis.
• Vertical and Horizontal Grid Type. This is a group of two buttons - Letters and
Numbers. It is only possible to have one button select at a time. Depending on the
button selected, the X and Y-axes are assigned either letters or numbers.
• Grid Spacing field. This field is used to specify the size of the AutoCAD grid spaces.
Note that the AutoCAD grid is a separate feature from the AVEVA P&ID grid (see
below).
• Snap Spacing field. This field is used to specify the size of the snap spacing. Usually,
the snap spacing is set first and then the grid spacing is set to match the snap spacing.
AVEVA P&ID grid and snap definitions will override AutoCAD settings so snap and grid
settings must always be defined in the project configuration to suit the symbol set in
use.
• Grid Letters to Ignore field. This field is used to specify the grid letters to ignore, for
example I and O, which may be confused with one and zero. List the letters to be
excluded, using commas as separators, or enter NONE.
The AutoCAD drawing grid, and the AVEVA P&ID drawing grid are two distinct features. The
AutoCAD drawing grid is a standard AutoCAD feature switched on by pressing the GRID
button at the bottom of the P&ID drawing pane. The AutoCAD drawing grid is a grid of dots
laid over the P&ID as a drawing aid. The Grid Spacing field described above is used to
specify the size of the grid squares.
The AVEVA P&ID drawing grid is used to give each item on a P&ID a location identifier
derived from the letters and/or numbers of the grid axes e.g. G5. When P&ID data is
transferred to VPE Workbench, the location identifier of each item is also transferred. This is
to help VPE Workbench users find items more easily if they have to refer back to a P&ID.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:33 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

Please note that all grid calculations performed by AVEVA P&ID assume that the border
sheet has its bottom left corner at the 0,0 AutoCAD coordinate. If this is not the case grid
references will not be correct, and some items could report to be off of the grid.

• Labels Sub-Category

The Labels sub-category is used to configure how project drawings themselves (as opposed
to items on these drawings) are labelled with a drawing title.
The Labels application pane is divided into two sections.

- Drawing Labels Section

This section contains the following settings:
• If the design area of drawings is required as part of the drawing title label, and is also to
be used as a prefix for instrument/equipment labels, check the Design Area from Title
Block used for Instrument Label Field 1 checkbox.
• If the project number is to be part of the drawing title label, check the Place Project
Number Label as part of Drawing Title checkbox.
• Number of Design Area Labels to place, Number of Drawing Number Labels to place
and Number of Project Number Labels to place. Several labels may be placed for
Drawing Area, Drawing Number and Project Number when using the Adding a Title to a
Drawing and entering Drawing Sheet Attributes procedure. Enter the number of labels
required for each in the three fields provided.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:34 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

- VPE Drawing Attributes Section

The VPE Drawing Attributes section is used to select VPE Workbench data with which to
label drawings in the project, for example information regarding systems that items on the
drawings are allocated to.
The section contains Default X Pitch and Default Y Pitch fields and a grid with three columns
- Designator, Default X Pitch and Default Y Pitch. Enter or edit the Designator name in the
first field, the Default X Pitch value in the second field and the Default Y Pitch value in the
third field.
The X and Y pitch values control the spacing between VPE Workbench attribute data where
there is more than one such attribute labelling a drawing. Change the default values as
required.

- Creating a new VPE Drawing Attribute

If a VPE Drawing Attribute is to be created, select the button. The following dialog box
is then displayed:

Enter a unique value for the VPE Drawing Attribute designator and press the OK button.
The dialog box will be closed and the entered value will be displayed in the Designator
column. The Default X Pitch and Default Y Pitch will automatically default to the values
entered in the corresponding fields above the grid.

To edit a designator name, select the button and enter the new value in the dialog that
is then displayed.
To edit the Default X Pitch and Default Y Pitch values scroll to the row in question and click.
This will activate the cursor within the selected row, and the value may then be edited.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:35 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

• Layers Sub-Category

AVEVA P&ID is supplied with layers already set up for pipes, equipment, instruments, labels
and a non-plotting layer. The Layers application pane is used to edit these layers and to add
new layers as required.

- Creating a new Drawing Layer

If a layer is to be created, select the button. The following dialog box is then displayed:

Enter a unique value for the drawing layer and press the OK button.
The dialog box will be closed and the entered new value will be displayed in the Drawing
Layer column. The colour code will be set automatically to the default value, but may be
amended. See below for details

To edit a drawing layer name, select the button and enter the new value in the dialog
that is then displayed.

- Entering a Colour Code

Scroll to the row in question. The colour box dialog button is displayed:

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:36 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

On selection of the button, the colour selection dialog box is displayed:

The Colour Code can be selected by the following methods:

• Selection of one of the colours shown in the palette
• By manually entering the Colour Code field
The Assume Owner Colour and Assume ByLayer options are not applicable in this case.
Following selection, press OK. The selected colour code will then be displayed in the grid.
If the colour of an existing layer is changed, drawings will be updated with the new colour
when they are reloaded.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:37 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

• Settings Sub-Category

The Settings application pane is divided into two sections.

The pane also includes the Entity selected is added to the current selection set checkbox.
This checkbox is used to specify the method used to select multiple objects on drawings.
If the checkbox is unchecked (the default setting), to select multiple drawing objects, press
the Shift key while selecting each of the objects. If the Shift key is not pressed when an
object or objects are selected, any previously selected objects are de-selected.
If the checkbox is checked, it is not necessary to press Shift in order to select multiple
objects. Each object is added to the set of selected objects as it is selected. To remove
objects from the set of selected objects, press Shift and select them.

- User Defined Sheet Attributes Section

This section is used to enter the field names for the Sheet Attribute fields on the Advanced
Drawing Properties sheet. These fields are used to enter drawing sheet properties in
addition to those of the drawing title.
As required, enter meaningful field titles in the ten fields provided.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:38 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

The first field on the Advanced Drawing Properties sheet will always display the Design
Area attribute, though the field name may still be changed if required.
The attributes entered in the Advanced Drawing Properties sheet are not used to label the
drawing sheet themselves, but the values entered may be properties that are common to
many items on the drawing, for example the design area, and may be "inherited" into label
fields of these items. This inheritance is set up for each category of item (e.g. equipment)
using the appropriate Configuration Category pane.

- Drawing History Settings

Check the Show Drawing History checkbox if the Description dialog is to be displayed
automatically when saving changes to a drawing and during the Synchronisation process.
The dialog is used to enter comments regarding changes to the drawing.

- Drawing Labels Settings

This section is used to specify the positions of labels that may be used to label the drawing.
The grid lists all the label types of the drawing properties under the Label Type heading. The
description of each of the label types is displayed under the Description heading. Label
types and descriptions cannot be edited.
If a label is to be placed in its default position on the drawing, select N from the list in the Fix
Position field. If a label is to be placed at specified coordinates, select Y.

Note: Some drawing properties are not placed on drawings by default, for example
minimum and maximum line and loop numbers. However, if coordinates are entered
for them, they will be placed at these coordinates.

Enter the X and Y coordinates of the label in the X and Y fields.

For the drawing title label type (XDT) an Y offset may also be entered. This is because
drawing title label may consist of multiple lines (up to 5). The Y offset specifies the vertical
gap between each line. If any drawing title is to consist of more than one line, enter a
number in the Y Offset (XDT Only) field. Note that the offset number should be negative, as
second and subsequent lines should be placed below the first line.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:39 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

• Validation Sub-Category

This sub-category is used to specify the permitted format of entries into selected drawing
properties fields.
In the fields provided, enter the following characters as required:

Code Description
A Upper Case Alpha Character [A-Z]
a Lower Case Alpha Character [a-z]
M Mixed Case Alpha Character [A-Z, a-z]
F Upper Case Free Character [A-Z, 0-9, white space]
f Lower Case Free Character [a-z, 0-9, white space]
X Mixed Case Free Character [A-Z, a-z, 0-9, white space]
N Numeric Character [0-9]

For example, if AaN is entered for the Design area Attribute field, when a user is completing
this field in the Drawing Properties dialog, the first character must be an uppercase letter,
the second a lower case letter, and the third a number.
The Advanced Format Options dialog is available from the button adjacent to each field.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:40 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

To test how the validation will work in practice, make an entry in the Test Data field of the
Test tab, and press the Test button. A message will be displayed indicating whether or not
the test data would be a valid entry.
To directly edit the regular expression that comprises the validation entry, select the
Advanced tab. The expression is displayed in the Regular Expression field and may be
amended as required. For help on editing Regular Expressions, click on the help link
displayed on this tab.

• Drawing List Sub-Category

The Drawing List sub-category is used to define the ranges of incremental numbers that are
to be used in the automatic tagging of valves (see 6.10.25: Automatic Tagging). An
exclusive range of numbers may be defined for each project drawing.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:41 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

To automatically populate the grid will all project drawings, select the Scan Drawings button.
All the project drawings will then be listed under the Drawing + Sheet heading.

Alternatively, select the button. The following dialog box is then displayed:

Enter the drawing and drawing sheet numbers and press the OK button. The dialog box will
be closed and the entered drawing number will then be listed in the grid.
Enter the range of valve tag numbers for each listed drawing in the Tag Range Min and Tag
Range Max fields. These ranges cannot overlap. If no range is specified for a drawing,
automatic valve tags on that drawing will not be assigned incremented numbers.

To edit a drawing number, select the button and enter the new value in the dialog that is
then displayed.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:42 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

2.3.7 Item Types Configuration Category

The Item Types Configuration Category is divided into two sub-categories:

• Standard Sub-Category
• Signal Sub-Category

• Standard Sub-Category

This sub-category is used to set default drawing layers and colours for item types other than
signal line item types. These are edited using the Signal sub-category. When an item is
inserted into a drawing, it will be placed on the default layer in the default colour, unless
another layer and colour are specified for that particular item as it is inserted. Layers are
configured on the Drawing - Layers Sub-Category.
If the item type of an item is not in the list on this pane, it will be placed on the current layer,
in the default colour of that layer. The item colour will also be set to the default colour of the
layer it is placed on if no colour is specified when the item is inserted. Item types that break
into lines can alternatively be set to have a colour entry of 300. Such items will automatically
assume the colour of the line that they are being inserted into. If the colour of an item is
required to default to the drawing layer colour, set the colour to 256.
The application pane consists of a grid with four columns - Item Type, Drawing Layer, Colour
and Description. The Item Type and Description are not editable; edit the Drawing Layer
name in the second field, and the colour of the layer in the third field.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:43 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

- Changing a Drawing Layer

If a Drawing Layer is to be changed, scroll to the row in question and double click. The
following list of values selection box will then be displayed:

Choose the required value from the list and press Enter to save the selection.

- Entering a Colour Code

Scroll to the row in question. The colour box dialog button is displayed:

On selection of the button, the colour selection dialog box is displayed:

The Colour Code can be selected by the following four methods:

• Selection of one of the colours shown in the palette
• By double clicking the Assume Owner Colour hyperlink. Items will automatically
assume the colours of the owning items, e.g., the colours of the lines they are inserted
into. When there is no owning item, they will be set to the default colour.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:44 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

• By double-clicking on the Assume By Layer hyperlink. Items will automatically assume

the colours of the layers they are inserted into, as set on the Layers Sub-Category the
Drawing Configuration Category.
• By manually entering the Colour Code field
Following selection, press OK. The selected colour code will then be displayed in the grid.

• Signal Sub-Category

This sub-category is used to set default drawing layers (levels) and colours for signal line
item types. It can also be used to create new signal line item types.
To change the drawing layer or colour of a signal line item type, proceed as described above
for standard item types.

To add a new signal line item type, select the button. The following dialog box is then
displayed:

All signal line item type identifiers are three-letter codes beginning with "S". The "S" is added
automatically to the beginning of the entered identifier. Enter the second and third
characters and press OK.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:45 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

The dialog box will be closed and the new item type will be displayed in the grid. Select a
default drawing layer and change the default colour as required.
Signal item types identifiers cannot be edited. The item type row must be deleted and re-
entered with a new identifier.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:46 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

2.3.8 Label Types Configuration Category

The Label Types application pane is used to set up the default layers, colours, text height
and other text options of types of labels.

The application pane is divided into two sections.

• Label Details Section

This section contains the following settings:
• Select either the Metric or Imperial Label Units button. Labelling units may be changed
part way through a project; drawings will be automatically updated with the new units
when they are reloaded (these buttons perform the same function as those on the
Project pane).
• The Label Null Character field is used to choose the null character which is used during
item labelling. During labelling, if data is not yet known, the null character, for example
a question mark, may be put in its place. This may then be replaced with the "real" data
at a later stage. If the null character is changed, the next time a drawing including the
null character is loaded, the previous null character will be replaced with the new one.
• If text styles are not in use on the project (see below), the Label Font field is used to
specify the font of all labels. The default font is ROMANS, a standard AutoCAD font,
but any other available font may be entered. The label font may be changed part way
through a project. Drawings will be automatically updated with the new font when they
are reloaded.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:47 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

• If text styles are to be used, check the Use Text Style checkbox. Select the default style
in the Default Text Style field. Text styles are set up using the Text Styles pane. The
initial default will be the ROMANS style which is supplied with the product and does not
need to be set up.
• If unlabelled nozzles are to result in a warning being displayed during synchronisation,
the Nozzle Error-Balloon Placement checkbox must be checked.
• If unlabelled reducers are to result in an error being displayed during synchronisation,
check the "Reducer Not Labelled' Error-Balloon Placement checkbox.
• If unlabelled ports on port valves are to result in an error being displayed during
synchronisation, check the Port Error-Balloon Placement checkbox. Port valves are
valves that have ports whose sizes are inherited from attached pipes or may be
individually labelled with their sizes if they are connected to a process link.

• Label Types Grid Section

This section is used to set up the default layers, colours, text height and other text options of
types of labels.
• The default justification and/or rotation of text can be overridden when a label is placed.
If the label type of a label is not in the list in this section, it will be placed on the current
layer/level, in the default colour of that layer/level, with a text height of 2.5mm or 1/8".
• If a label is given a colour entry of 300 it will assume the colour of the owning item.
• This section consists of a grid that includes the following columns - Label Type,
Drawing Layer, Text Height, Text Options and Description. The Label Type and
Description are not editable. Edit the Drawing Layer name in the second field, the Text
Height in the third field, and the colour of the layer in the fourth field. See below for
details on setting up these options.
• The Text Options field is used to specify the justification of the label, and whether or not
prompts will be received to specify text height and rotation when the label is inserted.
See below for details on setting up these options.
• If text styles are to be used, select text styles for labels from the list in the Text Style
field, or leave set to the default style selected in the Default Text Style field (see above).

• Changing a Drawing Layer

If a Drawing Layer is to be changed, scroll to the row in question and double click. The
following list of values selection box will then be displayed:

Choose the required value from the list and press Enter to save the selection.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:48 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

• Entering a Colour Code

Scroll to the row in question. The colour box dialog button is displayed:

On selection of the button, the colour selection dialog box is displayed:

The Colour Code can be selected by the following three methods:

• Selection of one of the colours shown in the palette
• By double clicking the Assume Owner Colour hyperlink. Labels will automatically
assume the colours of the owning items. When there is no owning item, they will be set
to the default colour.
• By double-clicking on the Assume By Layer hyperlink. Labels will automatically assume
the colours of the layers they are inserted into, as set on the Layers Sub-Category the
Drawing Configuration Category.
• By manually entering the Colour Code field
Following selection, press OK. The selected colour code will then be displayed in the grid.

• Editing Text Options

Scroll to the row in question. The label options box dialog button is displayed:

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:49 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

The Label Options selection dialog box is then displayed:

Select the required options and press OK. The selected options will then be displayed in the
grid as comma delimited text e.g. M, N, N. The first letter indicates the justification setting,
the second to the user-defined height setting, and the third letter the rotation setting.
If Y is entered in the User Defined Height field, the text height is specified by the user when
labels of this type are inserted.
If Y is entered in the Rotation field, the text rotation is specified by the user when labels of
this type are inserted.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:50 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

2.3.9 Text Styles Configuration Category

The Text Styles application pane is used to set up text styles. These styles are subsequently
applied to label types using the Label Types application pane. When an item is labelled, the
label uses the text style applied to the label type.

• Adding a Style

If a style is to be added, select the button. The following dialog box is then displayed:

Enter a style name and press the OK button. The dialog box will be closed and the entered
new style name will be displayed in the grid.
Style names cannot be edited. The style row must be deleted and re-entered with a new
name.

• Defining Text Styles

1. Allocate a type face for each new text style.
2. If a font file is to be used, enter Y in the Use Font File column, and select the file in the
Font File column.
3. If a "Big Font" is to be used, enter Y in the Use Big Font column, and select the file in
the Big Font File column.
4. Only fonts available to the AutoCAD installation may be selected. To check the
available fonts, check the available font files, for example at C:\Program Files\AutoCAD
2008\Fonts.
5. If the text style is to be bold or italic, enter Y as required in the Bold and/or Italic
columns.
6. As required, enter the width of the text in the Text Width column.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:51 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

2.3.10 Symbols Configuration Category

The Symbols pane is used to update the definitions of all the symbols that can be inserted
into a AVEVA P&ID drawing.

• When the product is installed, a standard set of symbols is installed with it. Also
installed is a default project. This includes symbol data as part of the project catalogue
which includes settings that define the behaviour of all the standard symbols. A copy of
symbol data is automatically copied into the directory structure of a new project
whenever a new project is generated.
• A project can be granted access to the standard set of symbols via the appropriate
Standard Symbol Path, as displayed on the Project pane of the Administration
program. In this way, a common set of symbols can be made available to all projects.
• The standard symbol set can be changed simply by redrawing or replacing the
standard symbols using AutoCAD. The default symbol data should also be changed to
reflect this by the use of this screen in the administrator, replacing the symbol names of
the supplied set with those of the replacement set.
• If project specific symbols are required in addition to the standard symbol set, these
can either be drawn in AutoCAD or preferably by using the Symbol Editor facility, and
placed as appropriate in the project symbol directory.
• The symbols grid of the Symbols pane provides facilities for adding definitions of
project symbols to the project, and for editing them as required. These new definitions
are added to the project copy of the symbol data in the project catalogue.
• The pane in fact provides facilities for editing the settings of all symbols that are
available to the project, including standard symbols. Since these changes are saved
and stored in the project catalogue, changes made to the settings of standard symbols
for a project do not change the default settings for these symbols as stored in the
default project.
The application pane is divided into four sections.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:52 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

• Import Symbols Section

This section contains two hyperlinks - Import/Re-Import ALL Standard Symbols and Import/
Re-Import ALL Project Symbols.
On selection of Import/Re-Import ALL Standard Symbols, the following dialog box is called:

On selection of Import/Re-Import ALL Project Symbols, the following dialog box is called:

Select the Yes or No buttons as required.

These options are used to replace the standard or project symbols currently listed in the
symbols grid with those that are actually currently stored in the standard and project symbol
directories respectively.
This may be required if, for example:
• The standard symbols set has been changed since the project was created, and the
project needs to be updated to reflect this.
• A large number of new project specific symbols have been placed in the project symbol
directory and need to be made available to the project. Usually it would be quicker to
individually add definitions of new project symbols using the facilities available from the
symbols grid, but if there are enough new symbols, it might be quicker to use the import
facility.
After an import takes place, the settings of the imported symbols will have to be entered in
the symbols grid, as the only fields that will be completed with anything other than default
settings will be the Symbol Name fields.
See below for details of completing the symbol grid and its facilities.

• Symbol Viewer Section

This section contains two hyperlinks - Open Symbol Viewer Window… and Close Symbol
Viewer Window…

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:53 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

On selection of Open Symbol Viewer Window…, a window is opened in which the symbol
currently selected in the symbol grid is graphically displayed. The Symbol Viewer is
refreshed with the appropriate symbol if another symbol is selected from the symbol grid.

The window can be moved and 'docked' within the application pane.
On selection of Close Symbol Viewer Window…, the viewer window is closed.

Note: If using AutoCAD 2009, the AutoCAD background colour must be set to black in
order to correctly display symbols in the Symbol Viewer Window. To do this, open the
Symbol Editor Window (see below), and from the Tools menu, "Options Display" and
then the "Colours" icon. Set the background colour to black, then save the Symbol
Editor Window and close it.

• User Defined Attributes Section

After User-Defined Attributes (UDAs) have been added to symbols or edited using the
Symbol Editor, in order to implement these changes to all project drawings, or to a selection
of project drawings, the Refresh UDAs facility must be used.
Click the Upgrade UDAs In Drawings hyperlink. The Refresh UDAs dialog is then opened.
See below for more details.

• Symbol Grid Section

The Symbols grid is used to manage the properties of symbols.
See below for guidance on entering symbol data.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:54 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

• Adding a New Symbol

If a symbol definition is to be added to the project, select the button. The following file
dialog box is then displayed:

• If a new symbol definition is to be created and added to the project, press the New
button. Enter the name of the new symbol in the Symbol Name field. Select a P&ID
type and enter a description in the PID Type and Symbol Description fields. Browse for
the location for the new symbol file via the button adjacent to the File/Directory path
field.
Note: In the case of pipe flags (off-sheet connectors), the symbol name must end with
either -IN or -OUT depending on whether the flag symbol is intended to represent a
connector into drawings or out of drawings.

• If an existing symbol definition is to be added to the project, one that has already been
drawn, perhaps in another project, press the Existing button. Then browse for the
appropriate symbol drawing file using the button adjacent to the File/Directory path
field. Select a P&ID type and enter a description in the PID Type and Symbol
Description fields.
When all details of the symbol have been entered, press OK. The dialog box will be closed
and the values of the added symbol will be displayed in the grid. New symbols can now be
drawn using the Symbol Editor, and Existing symbols edited.
Symbol names cannot be edited. The symbol row must be deleted and re-entered with a
new name.

• Entering Symbol Data

• Column 1: Symbol Name
• Column 2: P&ID Type
• Column 3: Fixed Size or User Defined
• Column 4: Insertion in Pipes, Links and Signal Lines
• Column 5: Symbol Length
• Column 6: Break Offset

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:55 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

• Column 7: Number of Insert Points

• Column 8: Graphical Creation Angle
• Column 9: Graphical Trace Around
• Column 10: Trace Width
• Column 11: Item Type
• Column 12: Valve Type
• Column 13: Valve Actuator Type
• Column 14: Instrument Location
• Column 15: PDMS Type
• Column 16: PDMS Sub Type
Note: In the case of port valves, most of the data described below is derived automatically
from the physical attributes of the symbol drawing. The only attribute that may need
to be set is the Number of Insert Points.

- Column 1: Symbol Name

The column may contain a maximum of 32 characters and holds the name of the block
defined by the user.

- Column 2: P&ID Type

Decide which AVEVA P&ID item type the new block falls into. If in doubt, look at the default
blocks provided with the installation. Once decided, enter the 3 character type in this column
in capital letters e.g. VLV-valve. The AVEVA P&ID type dictates the block's behaviour and
labelling capabilities in the drawing. If uncertain, leave the symbol out and do this later.
Establish whether it will appear in the instrument or valve list, if not, leave the symbol off the
drawings completely. Do not insert it as a Miscellaneous item type otherwise it may be
necessary to remove it, purge the drawing, reinsert the correct symbol and label it.

- Column 3: Fixed Size or User Defined

This setting determines whether the block can be re-sized or not. The only items which can
be re-sized are equipment items of AVEVA P&ID types EQU, EQV and EQE
Select 1 for Fixed or 2 for User Defined for these types only. Set to 0 for all other types.

- Column 4: Insertion in Pipes, Links and Signal Lines

This setting governs whether a block may break into a pipe, signal line or process link. Enter
1 for No or 2 for Yes. Take extra care when creating new symbols such as reducers and
insulation; some only need to overlay the pipe and some actually need to break into a pipe
in order to be exported correctly.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:56 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

- Column 5: Symbol Length

Any block that is connected to or breaks into a line needs a length to be defined for it. This is
because AVEVA P&ID needs to know the length of the corresponding break to be made in
the line. Enter the length of the block, if applicable, as a decimal number e.g. 8.0. If 1 was
the entry in column 4, enter 0.0 for null. Avoid entering lengths which divide by 2 to give an
odd number, as this then forces the user to have a snap spacing of 1, which is too small to
be workable.

- Column 6: Break Offset

The distance from the insert point of the block to the start of the break in the line, pipe etc.
Enter 0.0 for null if the entry in Column 4 was 1 (No). Alternatively, enter the offset as a
decimal number, e.g. 2.0. If the offset is not half the length, AVEVA P&ID will allow the
picking of an offset distance moving in a left to right direction.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:57 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

- Column 7: Number of Insert Points

The block may have one or more insert points depending on what it consists of e.g. spec
break, reducer, handwheel. Enter 1 if the block should assume the angle of the pipe into
which it is breaking or 0 degrees. Enter 2 if the program should ask the user for a second
point to show the angle.

Note: The number of insertion points is significant when upgrading project symbols
developed before AVEVA VPE P&ID 7.2 SP3. Symbols with single insertion points
may have to be upgraded manually. Refer to 2.1: Upgrading Pipes and Symbols from
old Projects for details.

- Column 8: Graphical Creation Angle

The graphical creation angle must be taken into account when creating blocks.
The basic rule is that AVEVA P&ID subtracts the graphical creation angle from the angle of
the pipe so that the group always aligns itself with the pipe upon insertion and hence looks
"correct".

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:58 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

A graphical creation must be stated when creating 2-way, 3-way, or angled valves
dependent on the insertion point.

Enter the graphical creation angle if applicable, as a decimal figure e.g. 90.0. This number
can easily be changed using the Project Administration program if it is discovered that on
insertion the angle is incorrect. Often the easiest way of understanding this requirement is to
change the angle and make an insertion; go back to the Project Administration program and
keep altering it until the desired result is achieved.

- Column 9: Graphical Trace Around

Enter 2 if the block is an inline item and should be traced around. Enter 1 if the symbol
should not be traced around.

- Column 10: Trace Width

Enter a decimal number to denote the width of the tracing. Enter 0.0 for null.

- Column 11: Item Type

This prompt is shown when a symbol is inserted. It is a description of the block which may
be up to 32 characters in length.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:59 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

- Column 12: Valve Type

For instruments only, the type of valve e.g. globe. Enter up to 32 characters or NONE if this
column does not apply.

- Column 13: Valve Actuator Type

For instruments only, the type of actuator on a valve e.g. diaphragm. Enter up to 32
characters or NONE if this column does not apply.

- Column 14: Instrument Location

For instruments only, the location of the instrument e.g. panel, rack etc. Enter up to 32
characters and NONE if this column does not apply.

- Column 15: PDMS Type

Field used by AVEVA Model Management and PDMS.

- Column 16: PDMS Sub Type

Field used by AVEVA Model Management and PDMS.

• Updating UDAs
After User-Defined Attributes (UDAs) have been added to symbols or edited using the
Symbol Editor, in order to implement these changes to all project drawings, or to a selection
of project drawings, the Refresh UDAs facility must be used.
Click the Upgrade UDAs In Drawings hyperlink. The Refresh UDAs dialog is then opened.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:60 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

In the Select Drawing Folder field, select the folder in which the drawings to be updated are
located, or press the Browse button to browse for the required folder.
All the AVEVA P&ID drawings in the selected folder are then listed.

To select a drawing to be updated with the UDA changes, check the appropriate Select File
checkbox. To select all drawings, check the Select All checkbox.
When the required drawings have been selected, select the Process button. A warning
message is then displayed advising the user to ensure that none of the drawings selected
are currently being edited. Assuming that this is the case, select the OK button. The
selected drawings are then updated with the UDA changes.
The Progress field will indicate the progress of the operation.

To cancel the process, select the Quit button.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:61 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

To view details of the process once it is complete, press the View Log button. The log of the
process will then be displayed in Notepad.

The log will list for each selected drawing, which UDAs have been added or deleted and the
symbols to they have been added/deleted to/from.
To close the Refresh UDAs dialog, select the Exit button.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:62 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

2.3.11 List of Values Configuration Category

The List of Values set application pane is used to edit the lists of values available when
labelling items. A default set of lists of values is provided with the product. If online validation
is active (as described later in the Miscellaneous Configuration Category topic), data
entered during labelling is checked against these lists, with only values in these lists being
valid. User-defined lists can also be created.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:63 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

The application pane includes a drop down list:

Select the required validation data set from this list. The content of the data set is then
displayed in the grid below and may be edited as required. For more information see
Principle and Concepts - Validation.
The list also includes any user-defined lists of values. See below for the procedure for
creating user-defined lists of values.
The list also includes the AlphaNumeric/Numeric equivalent Size list. This is used to specify
the numeric equivalents of alphanumeric size values, to be used when data is exported, for
example to a Schematic database.

In the above example, the alphanumeric size value of 20A has a numeric equivalent of 20.
As a result, when size values of 20A are exported, they will automatically be converted to
20.

• Adding a Value

If a value is to be added, select the button. The following dialog box is then displayed:

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:64 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

Enter a value and press the OK button. The dialog box will be closed and the entered new
value will be displayed in the grid.

Note: The value must be unique, except in the case of equipment and instrument type
letters.

Enter a description in the adjacent Description field.

To edit a value, select the button and enter the new value in the dialog that is then
displayed.

Note: In order for reducers to automatically change orientation, so that the wide end is
always connected to the larger pipe size and the narrow end is always connected to
the smaller pipe size, the list of values for sizes used on the project (Metric Sizes or
Imperial Sizes) must set up sorted from smallest size to largest size.

• Editing Pipe Styles

Data entered on this application pane includes the pipe styles that are valid for the project.
Select Pipe Styles from the drop down list. Update existing values, or add new pipe styles as
required. If the style of a pipe that exists on a drawing is changed, the drawing will be
updated with the new style when it is reloaded.
1. In the Multi-Line (Y/N) field enter Y if the new style is to consist of multiple lines,
otherwise enter N. For further details on creating multi-lines, refer to AutoCAD
documentation.
2. In the Line Type field, select the AutoCAD line type that the new style is to be based on.
3. Enter a meaningful description in the Description field.
4. If the change the drawing layer that pipes of a pipe style are to be placed on, double
click on the appropriate field. Choose the required value from the list of values that is
then displayed and press Enter to save the selection.
5. To change the colour of a pipe style, double click on the appropriate field. The colour
box dialog button is displayed:

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:65 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

On selection of the button, the colour selection dialog box is displayed:

The Colour Code can be selected by the following three methods:

• Selection of one of the colours shown in the palette
• By double clicking the Assume Owner Colour hyperlink. Items will automatically
assume the colours of the owning items. When there is no owning item, they will be set
to the default colour.
• By double-clicking on the Assume By Layer hyperlink. Labels will automatically assume
the colours of the layers they are inserted into, as set on the Layers Sub-Category the
Drawing Configuration Category.
• By manually entering the Colour Code field
Following selection, press OK. The selected colour code will then be displayed in the grid.

• Creating User-Defined Lists of Values

To create a user-defined list of values, select this button in the User-Defined List of Values

section of the pane: .

The following dialog box is then displayed:

Enter the name of the new list of values and press the OK button. The dialog box will be
closed and the name of the list will be displayed in the grid in the User-Defined List of Values
section. Note that the application automatically prefixes the names of user-defined lists of
values with "USERLOV_".

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:66 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

The LOV File Name field displays the filename of the list. This is automatically generated
and cannot be changed.
Once a list of values has been created, it can be selected from the list of list of values at the
top of the pane. The values that comprise the list can then be entered as described above.
The toolbar buttons in the User-Defined List of Values section work in the same way as
those in the upper section, as described above. Use these to rename lists of values, sort the
lists in the grid, delete lists etc.

To edit a list of values name, select the button and enter the new value in the dialog
that is then displayed.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:67 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

2.3.12 Pipes Configuration Category

The Pipes Configuration Category is divided into four sub-categories:

• Settings Sub-Category
• Labels Sub-Category
• Validation Sub-Category
• Automatic Tag Format Sub-Category

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:68 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

• Settings Sub-Category

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:69 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:70 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

The fields in this application pane are used to set up the configuration properties of pipes.
The application pane is divided into thirteen sections.

- Settings Section
If items are to inherit some of their properties from the pipe that they are owned by, the
Inherit Item Labels from Owner Pipe checkbox must be checked.
If pipe connection size data is to be output when synchronising with a VPE Workbench
database, ensure that the Pipe Size Connection Output checkbox is checked.
Also, if the Pipe Size Connection Output checkbox is checked, the process owners of
components on pipes will be recorded (e.g. in AVEVA P&ID Reports) as the pipe segments
to which they belong. If it is not checked, the process owners of components on pipes will be
recorded as the main pipes they belong to, instead of one of its segments.
Select the default style of process links in the Default Process Link Style field.
Select the default style of instrument process links (also known as "Legacy" process links) in
the Default Instrument Process Link Style field.

- Breaks Section
This section contains the following settings:
• The 'Automatic Breaks ON' checkbox governs whether pipes break automatically or not
when crossed by another pipe. If the checkbox is not checked, warnings are given that
junctions have not been formed when pipes cross each other. If the checkbox is
checked, pipelines drawn crossing other pipes will be drawn with breaks positioned
according to the setting of the Break Pipe Direction field (see below).
• The Break Distance field is used to set the width of the gap created in the pipe when it
is broken by another. This distance separates the break symbols.
• Depending on which Break Pipe Direction button is selected, Horizontal and Vertical,
pipes will either break vertically or horizontally, assuming the Automatic Breaks ON
checkbox has been checked.
• The Symbol Name field is used to specify the break symbol inserted when a pipe is
broken, e.g. LBRK. The symbol name is selected from a drop down list.
• The Symbol Layer field is used to specify the layer on which the break symbols reside.
The layer name is selected from a drop down list.
• The Symbol Colour field defines the colour of the break symbol inserted when a pipe is
broken.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:71 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

The Browse button adjacent to the Symbol Colour field is used to select the colour. On
selection of the button, the colour selection dialog box is displayed:

The Colour Code can be selected using the following methods:

• Selection of one of the colours shown in the palette
• By double clicking the Assume Owner Colour hyperlink. Items will automatically
assume the colours of the owning items, e.g., the colours of the lines they are
inserted into. When there is no owning item, they will be set to the default colour.
• By double-clicking on the Assume By Layer hyperlink. Items will automatically
assume the colours of the layers they are inserted into, as set on the Layers Sub-
Category the Drawing Configuration Category.
• By manually entering the Colour Code field
Following selection, press OK. The selected colour code will then be displayed in the
Symbol Colour field.

- Flow Arrows Section

This section contains the following settings:
• The Automatic Arrows checkbox governs the presence or absence of flow arrows at
the direction change points of pipes.
• The Symbol Name field specifies which flow arrow symbol is used. The symbol name is
selected using the drop down list.

- Dual Flow Arrows Section

This section contains the following settings:
• The Offset Distance field is used to set the distance between the symbols used to
indicate dual flow on pipes.
• The Symbol Name field specifies which flow arrow symbol is used for arrows indication
dual flow. The symbol name is selected using the drop down list.

- Values to Remember from Last Pipe Edit Section

The section contains fifteen checkboxes - Size, Fluid/Service, Number, Area, Specification,
Insulation (Table), Insulation (Index), Insulation (Condition), Paint Code, Tracing (Number),
Tracing (Size), Tracing (Type), Project Field 1, Project Field 2 and Project Field 3.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:72 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

A project can be configured so that a value entered in a field in a Properties dialog is

"remembered" by the same field when that Properties dialog is accessed again when
labelling another, previously unlabelled, item of that type.
If, for example, the functionality is switched on for the pipe Number field, and a pipe is
labelled with a value of "001". The next time a pipe is labelled for the first time, when the
Properties dialog for this item is opened, the Number field will automatically be completed
with the value "001". This can be replaced by another value if required. This new value will
then be the "remembered" value for the pipe Number field.
This functionality is switched on and off for individual Properties dialog fields by checking
and unchecking the checkboxes in this section.

- Label Validation Across P&IDs Section

The project may be set to check that all pipe labels in all P&IDs in a project are unique.
• Select the Prevent button if users are to be prevented from entering project duplicate
pipe labels. If this is attempted, an error message is displayed and the duplicate label
may not be placed on the P&ID.
• Select the Warn button if users are to be warned if they enter project duplicate pipe
labels. The entry of duplicate labels is permitted in this case, but an error message will
be displayed on the P&ID, and will accompany the pipe label data when transferred to
VPE Workbench.
• If no uniqueness validation of pipe labels across P&IDs is required, select Ignore
button. Duplicate pipe labels may be entered in different P&IDs in this case. Duplicate
pipe labels are still not permitted in the same P&ID.
Duplicate pipe labels are not regarded as duplicates if the pipes in question are connected
with cross-sheet connectors.
Note that if the Prevent or Warn options are set, a connection to the VPE Workbench
database must be established before labels can be edited. This is because in order to check
the uniqueness of labels across a project, AVEVA P&ID refers to the VPE Workbench
database.

- Size Consistency Section

If the synchronisation process is to check that nozzle and pipe sizes match and to report any
mismatches as errors, check the Enforce Nozzle and Pipe Size Match checkbox.
If this checkbox is checked, any such mismatches must be corrected before the nozzles and
pipes in question can be successfully synchronised.

- Populate Specification in Database Section

If specification values are not going to be entered into the P&IDs, but populated in VPE
Workbench instead, check the Populate Spec in Database checkbox.

- Inheritance Section
The values of pipe attributes may be inherited from the sheet attributes entered on the
Advanced Drawing Properties sheet. The values entered for these sheet attributes may be
values that are common to many items on the drawing, for example the design area. The
inheritance facility enables all items to inherit these common values. The attributes of items
that do not share these common values may subsequently be edited manually using their
properties sheets.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:73 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

The Inheritance section is used to select which pipe attributes are to inherit values from
which sheet attributes. As required, select for each pipe attribute the sheet attribute field
from which values are to be inherited.
Sheet attribute field names are set up using the Drawing Information - Settings Sub-
Category.

- Reducer Setting Section

From the Reducer Label Format list, select the direction in which reducer labels are to be
orientated.
If "Flow Direction" is selected, the first part of the label (i.e. the first diameter) is positioned
on the upstream side of the reducer and the second part of the label on the downstream
side of the reducer, e.g.:

If "Largest size first" is selected, the first part of the label is placed on the wider side of the
reducer, the second part on the narrower side:

If "Smallest size first" is selected, the first part of the label is placed on the narrower side of
the reducer, the second part on the wider side:

Note: In order for this functionality to work correctly, the list of values for sizes used on the
project (Metric Sizes or Imperial Sizes) must set up sorted from smallest size to
largest size. Lists of values are set up using the List of Values Configuration
Category.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:74 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

- Cascade Settings Section

By default, when the properties of parent pipe label are edited, any changes to these
properties may immediately be reflected in the labelling of the branches off that pipe.
If required, this cascading of changes may be disabled for selected properties. If this is
required, check the Disabled Cascading in Branches checkbox.
To select the property fields to be excluded from cascading, select the Browse button
adjacent to the Select Fields to Disable field. The Select Fields to Disable Cascading dialog
box is then displayed:

Select the fields to be disabled from the list of values and then select the OK button. The
Select Fields to Disable field will then list the numbers representing the selected fields.

Note: Fields specified for unique validation (see the Labels Sub-Category below) will still
be cascaded regardless of these settings.

- Legacy Settings Section

Check the Use Legacy Process Link checkbox if the pre-AVEVA VPE P&ID 7.2 SP3 type of
process links are to be used (PLK item type). These are known as "Legacy" or instrument
process links.
If this checkbox is not checked (default setting), process links are drawn as pipes (i.e. as
branches between main pipes and offline items - PMA item type) in the process link pipe
style.

- Synchronise warning settings or unconnected items Section

If, when a drawing is synchronised, a warning message is to be displayed on the drawing for
“unconnected” items, i.e. items for which owner details are not available, check the Display
owner warning checkbox.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:75 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

• Labels Sub-Category

(continued over)

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:76 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

The fields in this application pane are used to set up the pipe label configuration format.
The application pane is divided into eleven sections.

- Main Pipe Label Colour Section

The Main Pipe Label Colour field defines the colour of the pipe label that is selected in the
pipe label set to represent the main values of the pipe.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:77 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

The Browse button adjacent to the field is used to select the colour. On selection of the
button, the colour selection dialog box is displayed:

The Colour Code can be selected using the following methods:

• Selection of one of the colours shown in the palette
• By double clicking the Assume Owner Colour hyperlink. Labels will automatically
assume the colours labelled items. When there is no owning item, they will be set to the
default colour.
• By double-clicking on the Assume By Layer hyperlink. Labels will automatically assume
the colours of the layers they are inserted into, as set on the Layers sub-category of the
Drawing Configuration Category.
• By manually entering the Colour Code field
Following selection, press OK. The selected colour code will then be displayed in the Main
Pipe Label field.

- Default Reporting Label Format Section

A pipe may be labelled with labels in various formats. One of these labels may be set as the
default label, i.e. the label that will be used to identify the pipe in the database. If required,
such labels may be highlighted on drawings by having them displayed in a different colour.
If this is required, check the Default Reporting Label Format checkbox.
To select the colour, select the Browse button adjacent to the Default Reporting Label
Colour field, and select the colour from the Colour dialog (see above). The number code of
the selected colour is then displayed in the field.

- Source and Destination Formats Section

A different display format from the normal display format (see below) may be used for pipe
source and destination labels on a drawing, where the sources and/or destinations are
different pipes. This section is used to switch on this facility and to define the required
formats.
Check the Source Label Format and/or Destination Label Format checkboxes as required to
switch on this facility for source/and or destination formats.
The buttons next to the Select Source Label Format and Select Destination Label Format
are used to open the Tag Format Editor field in which the required format may defined.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:78 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

See the Display Label Format section below for details.

- Pipe Label Format Section

This section contains the following settings:
• When using the properties dialog for pipe labelling, it is possible to toggle between
standard and single-field pipe labelling. The Fixed Pipe Label Format checkbox
determines which the default setting is. If fixed (i.e. standard) pipe labelling is on, the
whole of a pipe label must be placed on the drawing. If switched off, the option is
available to place individual fields of the pipe label on the drawing.
• The Pipe Label Format fields are used to select the fields included in pipe labels, and
the order in which they are displayed. Pipe labels may consist of up to fifteen fields and
must include Size, Number and Specification (unless the 'Populate Spec in Database'
checkbox is set) as a minimum.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:79 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

The Browse button adjacent to the field is used to select the format. On selection of the
button, the Pipe Label Format dialog box is displayed:

The Pipe Label Format can be selected by using the drop down lists. A field cannot be
selected twice.
Following selection, press OK. The selected Pipe Label Format will then be shown in
the Pipe Label Format field as a set of values separated by commas, e.g. 1,3,5,6,10.
The numbers represent label fields are follows:
1. Size
2. Fluid/Service
3. Number
4. Area
5. Specification
6. Insulation (Table)
7. Insulation (Index)
8. Insulation (Condition)
9. Paint Code
10. Tracing (No of Tracers)
11. Tracing (Size)
12. Tracing (Type)
13. Project1 (Project definable)
14. Project2 (Project definable)

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:80 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

15. Project3 (Project definable)

- Display Label Format Section

This section contains the following settings:
• The Display Label Format fields are used to select the types of data displayed in pipe
labels, and the order in which they are displayed. Fields may appear in a different order
from those of the "actual" pipe label, and fields that are in the "actual" pipe label may be
left out, though additional fields may not be included.
At least one display label format must be set up.
Multiple display label formats may set up, one of which will be set as the default. When
labelling pipes, the label will default to this format, but another format may be selected
if required.
The Browse button adjacent to the field is used to select the format. On selection of the
button, the Select a Tag Format dialog is displayed:

The dialog lists the existing display formats.

To set a format as the default, select if from the list and select the Set as Default button.
The current default format is indicated by the word "True" in the IsDefault column.
To edit a format, select it and then select the Edit button. The Tag Format Editor dialog
is then displayed. Edit the format as described below.
To delete a format, select it and then select the Delete button.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:81 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

To create a new format, select the New button. The Tag Format Editor dialog is then
displayed.

The Tag Format field cannot be edited. It displays the current display label format
configuration (i.e. the selected fields and delimiters).
Enter a description of the format in the Description field. If required, enter any
additional information in the Remarks field.
The format is selected by using the drop down lists below these fields. A field cannot be
selected twice.
Unlike the "actual" pipe label format, which uses the delimiter entered in the Delimiter
field (see below) for every part of the label, the display format may have different
delimiters displayed after each label component. Enter a delimiter for each label field
used, or leave blank if no delimiter is required.
When the new display label format has been set up, select the Save button. The new
format is then added to the list in the Select a Tag Format dialog. If required, set it as
the default display label format as described above.
Press OK. The default display label format will then be shown in the Pipe Label Format
field, e.g. 1,-,2,-,3,/,4,-,5,. Refer to the previous section (above) for the meanings of
these numbers.
• The Delimiter field defines the delimiter separating the Pipe Label Format fields. The
use of a '|' character is restricted as this is the delimiter used in the transfer files to VPE
Workbench.
Delimeters consisting of multiple characters may be selected.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:82 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

• The Unique Validation field is used to specify which combination of fields in pipe labels
are to be checked for uniqueness.
The Browse button adjacent to the field is used to select the values. On selection of the
button, the Unique Validation dialog box is displayed:

The Unique Validation fields can be selected by using the drop down lists. Following
selection, press OK, and the selected Unique Validation values will be shown in the
Unique Validation field. e.g. 2, 9, 11.
• The Typical Fields field is used to set which fields are to be available when labelling
typical pipes.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:83 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

The Browse button adjacent to the field is used to select the values. On selection of the
button, the Select Fields for Typical dialog box is displayed:

The dialog is used in the same way as the Unique Validation dialog box (above).
• The Trim Label Prefix field is used to specify the text prefix to the trim identifier in a trim
label. Whenever a trim label is created on a vessel, this word appears in front of the
main label. If no prefix is required, change the setting to NONE.
• If a delimiter is required after an area code, the Delimiter After Area Field checkbox
must be checked if display label format is not being used.
• If a delimiter is not required after an area code, the program needs to know how many
characters are allowed for the Area field. Complete the Number of Characters fields
with this value.
Note: Changes to drawings resulting from changes to the Display Label Format settings
are not automatically implemented when project drawings are loaded. The user must
trigger these changes "manually" in each drawing after it has loaded. See 8.2.3:
Updating PipeTags.

- Project Definable Fields Section

The fields in the Project Definable Fields section specify the boilerplate text for the three
project definable fields, which appear on the pipe labelling Properties dialog. These fields
are not validated within AVEVA P&ID.
The values in these fields are exported, so the field titles should match those set-up for the
Line Tag in VPE Workbench. The fields may be validated during the Issue to Engineering
operation into VPE Workbench.
If required, from the adjacent drop-down lists, select lists of values that entries in these fields
must be chosen from. If this is not required, select the <NONE> value from the list (this is
the default entry). Lists of values are set up on the List of Values Configuration Category of
the Administration program.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:84 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

- Split Format Section

It is possible to place some fields of a pipe label above the pipe and the remainder below the
pipe. This is termed Split Pipe Labelling and is controlled by the three fields in the Split
Format section.
The Split After Field field is used to indicate which field in the pipe format to split on. The
number entered here determines how many fields to count from the left of the pipe label
before the split occurs.
The Y offset above line and Y offset below line fields are used to specify the positions of the
two parts of the label as follows:
• If a pipe label symbol (see below) is not placed with a split label, the Y offset above line
value is not used. The first part of the label is placed at the position specified by the
user.
• If a pipe label symbol is placed with a split label, the first part of the label is offset by the
amount specified in the Y offset above line field from the insertion point of the pipe label
symbol, plus the offset specified in the Symbol X Offset and Symbol Y fields in the Pipe
Label Symbols section (see below). It is recommended that 0 is entered in this field.
• Whether or not a pipe label symbol is placed, the second part of the label is then offset
from the first part of the label by the amount specified in the Y offset below line field.
Note: The Y offset above line setting will be overridden by the Offset Distance setting (see
below) if the Fix pipe label position checkbox is checked.#

- Define Split labels and offset for symbol Section

If split label formatting (see above) is to be used and a pipe labels symbol (see above) is to
be used, up to four label fields may be placed before the split in the selected label symbol.
This section is used to select which fields will be placed in the symbol and their to define
their positions in the symbol.
Select the required fields from the list of values in the Label Type field. Select <NONE> from
the list where no field is required. Select the position of each field relative to the insertion
point of the label symbol in the Offset X and Offset Y fields.

- Display Object Labels at Pipe Destination Section

This section contains the following settings:
• In the Display Instrument Labels at Pipe Destination Section, if the Pipe Instrument
Labelling checkbox is checked, instrument labels will be used for a pipes source or
destination.
• The Instruments Allowing Labelling field is used to enter the list of instrument types
which will be used as valid pipe sources or destinations. Enter a list of item types, for
example: IRA,IR3,IR4,IRV,IBD.
• Valid destination objects for pipes are:
• Pipe Flags
• Joins (start node connected to end node)
• Tees
• Nozzles
• Equipment
• Pipe destination fittings (“PDF” must be added in Administrator) like blind flange,
caps
• It its recommend that instrument valves types such as pressure safety valves are
added when their tags are to be sources or destinations

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:85 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

• Annotation on start and end nodes

• Secondary connections for 3 or 4 way fittings
• Invalid destination scenarios for pipes are:
• VLV
• LFI
Note: Pipe destinations will be blank at pipe ends with no continuation ahead.

Note: After changing this setting in the Project Administrator, the user must Synchronise all
drawings.

- Pipe Label Symbols Section

This section contains the following settings:
• If the Pipe Label Symbol checkbox is checked, a symbol will be placed with fixed pipe
labels. For example, a box may be placed around the labels.
• The Symbol Name field is used to select the name of the symbol that will be placed
with the pipe labels.
• The Symbol X Offset and Symbol Y fields control the offset of the labels in relation to
the point selected when placing pipe symbols. Note that for split labels, the label
insertion point may be further adjusted by the entry in the Y offset above line field (see
above).

- Fix Single Pipe Label from owner segment

If the Fix pipe label position checkbox is checked, pipe labels subsequently placed will
automatically be placed a fixed distance from the pipe segments they are labelling. This
does not change the positioning of labels placed before the checkbox was checked.
Enter the distance that labels are to be placed from pipe segments in the Offset Distance
field.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:86 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

• Validation Sub-Category

This section is used to specify the permitted format of entries into selected pipe label fields.
In the fields provided, enter the following characters as required:

Code Description
A Upper Case Alpha Character [A-Z]
a Lower Case Alpha Character [a-z]
M Mixed Case Alpha Character [A-Z, a-z]
F Upper Case Free Character [A-Z, 0-9, white space]
f Lower Case Free Character [a-z, 0-9, white space]
X Mixed Case Free Character [A-Z, a-z, 0-9, white space]
N Numeric Character [0-9]

For example, if AaN is entered for the Number field, when a user is completing this field in
the Pipe labelling Properties dialog, the first character must be an uppercase letter, the
second a lower case letter, and the third a number.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:87 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

The Advanced Format Options dialog is available from the button adjacent to each field.

To test how the validation will work in practice, make an entry in the Test Data field of the
Test tab, and press the Test button. A message will be displayed indicating whether or not
the test data would be a valid entry.
To directly edit the regular expression that comprises the validation entry, select the
Advanced tab. The expression is displayed in the Regular Expression field and may be
amended as required. For help on editing Regular Expressions, click on the help link
displayed on this tab.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:88 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

• Automatic Tag Format Sub-Category

If pipes are to be tagged automatically, the format of pipe tags is defined using this sub-
category.

If automatic tagging is to be used, check the Apply Auto Tagging checkbox.

Place the cursor in the Tag Expression field, and select the Insert Counter button. The
counter is added like so: [Counter].
Select the length of the counter number from the list in the Format field. Enter the number
that the counter is to be incremented by in the Increment By field.
A separate count may be applied for each value of a specific pipe property. For example, a
separate count for each pipe specification.
If this is required, check the Based on Counter Field checkbox, and select the property from
the Counter Reset Field field.
To clear the Tag Expression field, select the Clear button.
The counter may be reset to 0 for the project by selecting the Reset Counter button.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:89 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

2.3.13 Signal Styles Configuration Category

The Signal Styles application pane is used to configure signal styles for the project.

The first section of the application pane consists of a Default Signal Line Style field, which
has a drop down list for selecting the default Signal Style.

• Creating New Signal Line Styles

If a signal line style is to be created, select the button. The following dialog box is then
displayed:

Enter a unique value for the signal line style and press the OK button.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:90 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

The dialog box will be closed and the entered new value will be displayed in the Signal
Name column.
Once a signal line style has been added its layer and colour must be configured in the Item
Types - Signal Sub-Category.
For the complete procedure for creating new signal line styles, see 2.7: Defining a New
Signal Line Type.

• Editing Signal Styles

When editing an existing signal line style, you can select a P&ID Type from a list of values,
select the base AutoCAD line style from the Line Type field, and add or change the
description in the Type field.
When defining a new signal style, a new P&ID type has to be created. This is achieved by
assigning a unique type value of three characters, starting with 'S'. AVEVA P&ID will then
recognize this as a new signal line type. Then select the base AutoCAD line style from the
Line Type field, and add or change the description in the Type field.

To edit a signal style name, select the button and enter the new value in the dialog that
is then displayed.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:91 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

2.3.14 Tracing Configuration Category

The Tracing application pane is used to configure tracing styles for the project.

The application pane is divided into two sections.

The first section contains the following settings:
• In the Offset field, enter the distance between pipe lines and the tracing lines on project
P&IDs. Must be at least 1mm or 0.075".
• From the Default field select the default graphical tracing style from the list of available
styles (e.g. ELEC).
• From the Select Trace File field, select the tracing file that you wish to edit. The
contents of the selected file are then displayed in the grid section. There are four
tracing files.
• The Graphical Tracing Style file controls the appearance of the different tracing styles
on project P&IDs, while the others are lists of values used when tracing is defined in
pipe label fields.
Two default graphical styles, ELEC and STEAM, are supplied with the product. These styles
may be edited, and new styles added as required.
The other three files contain the lists of values available from the fields on the Pipe
Properties dialog used for defining the tracing properties of pipes: Code, Size and Type.
The second section of the application pane consists of a grid. This grid is used to edit the
selected trace file.
When defining a new graphical tracing style, or editing an existing one, you can select the
base AutoCAD line style from the Line Type field, and add or change a descriptive name in
the Trace Type field.
When editing one of the other files, you can add, change or delete values as required.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:92 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

• Creating a new Tracing Style or Value

If a tracing style or value is to be created, select the button. The following dialog box is
then displayed:

Enter a unique name for the tracing style, or a new value as appropriate, and press the OK
button.
The dialog box will be closed and the entered new entry will be displayed in the grid.

To edit a tracing style name, select the button and enter the new value in the dialog that
is then displayed.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:93 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

2.3.15 Instruments Configuration Category

The Instruments Configuration Category is divided into five sub-categories:

• Settings Sub-Category
• Labels Sub-Category
• Patterns Sub-Category
• Validation Sub-Category
• Automatic Tag Format Sub-Category

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:94 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

• Settings Sub-Category

This application pane is used to set up the configuration properties of instruments.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:95 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

The application pane is divided into seven sections.

- Number of TAG fields Section

If four tag fields are to be used for project instruments (Prefix, Type, Number, Suffix), select
the 4 Tag Fields option.
If six tag fields are to be used for project instruments (Block, Function, Prefix, Type, Number,
Suffix), select the 6 Tag Fields option.

Note: Two extra tag fields (block and Function) were introduced with AVEVA VPE P&ID 7.2
SP1. Before a project can use these two new fields, the project database schema
must be updated by selecting the Upgrade Database Schema - Upgrade button on
the VPE Workbench Configuration Category.

- Values to Remember from Last Instrument Edit Section

This section contains a number of checkboxes - Block, Function, Prefix, Type, Number,
Suffix, Descriptor, Pattern Reference, Alarm 1, Alarm 2, Alarm 3, Alarm 4, Size and
Specification.
Note that the Block and Function checkboxes are only active if the 6 Tag Fields option in the
Number of Tag fields section is selected.
A project can be configured so that a value entered in a field in a Properties dialog is
"remembered" by the same field when that Properties dialog is accessed again when
labelling another, previously unlabelled, item of that type.
If, for example, the functionality is switched on for the instrument Prefix field, and an
instrument is labelled with a value of "20". The next time an instrument is labelled for the first
time, when the Properties dialog for this item is opened, the Prefix field will automatically be
completed with the value "20". This can be replaced by another value if required. This new
value will then be the "remembered" value for the instrument Prefix field.
This functionality is switched on and off for individual Properties dialog fields by checking
and unchecking the checkboxes in this section.

- Instrument Panel Dialog Labels Section

This section contains four fields, which are used to specify the boilerplate text to replace the
defaults of Prefix, Tag, Number and Suffix in the Instrument Panel Reference Properties
dialog and other dialogs.

- Instrument Dialog Labels and List of Values Section

This section contains four or six active fields, depending on the setting in the Number of Tag
fields section.
They are used to specify the boilerplate text to replace the defaults of Block, Function,
Prefix, Tag, Number and Suffix in the Label Instrument Properties dialog and other dialogs.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:96 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

The first two fields are not active if the 4 Tag Fields option in the Number of Tag fields
section is selected, i.e.:

In the Delimiter After Field 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 fields, enter the delimiters used to separate the
fields.
Note that these delimiters are not displayed on P&IDs or in the Engineering Explorer. They
are used to ensure tag format consistency when exporting to PDMS via the ISO15926/P&ID
Manager interface.
If required, from the drop-down lists next to each field, select the list of values against which
entries in a tag field are to be validated: Area Code, Block Code, Function Code or
Instrument Type.
• Area Code
• Block Code
• Equipment Type
• Function Code
• Imperial Size
• Instrument Type Letter
• Insulation Table
• Insulation Condition
• Insulation Index
• Metric Size
• Paint Code
• Service/Fluid Code
• Specification Code
• Valve Code
• Valve Closure
A list cannot be selected more than once. Lists of values are set up on the List of Values
Configuration Category of the Administration program.

Note: List of values validation takes priority over both pipe label inheritance and sheet
attribute inheritance (see below).

- Inheritance Section
This section contains the following settings:
• If instrument properties are to be inherited from owner pipes the Inherit Item Labels
from Owner Pipes checkbox must be checked. Note the Inherit Item Labels from
Owner Pipes checkbox on the Miscellaneous - Settings Sub-Category must also be
checked, as this activates the pipe label inheritance feature for the project as a whole.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:97 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

Note: If an instrument label field is set to be validated against a list of values its Fields from
Pipes field will not be accessible. List of values validation takes priority over pipe
label inheritance. However, pipe label inheritance takes priority over sheet attribute
inheritance (see below).

• If item labels are to be inherited from owner pipes, the fields to be inherited from for
each label are specified in the Instrument Prefix, Type, Number and Suffix fields, plus
the Block and Function fields if the 6 Tag Fields option in the Number of Tag fields
section is selected.
• The Browse button adjacent to these fields is used to select the fields to be inherited
from. On selection of the button, the following dialog box is displayed:

The fields required are selected using the drop down lists. Following selection, press
OK. The selected fields will then be displayed in the Instrument Prefix, Type, Number
and Suffix fields, plus the Block and Function fields if the 6 Tag Fields option in the
Number of Tag fields section is selected.
• The values of instrument labels may be inherited from the sheet attributes entered on
the Advanced Drawing Properties sheet. The values entered for these sheet attributes
may be values that are common to many items on the drawing, for example the design
area. The inheritance facility enables all items to inherit these common values. The
labels of items that do not share these common values may subsequently be edited
manually using their properties sheets.
The Fields from Sheet Attribute fields are used to select which instrument label fields
are to inherit values from which sheet attributes. As required, select for each instrument
label field the sheet attribute field from which values are to be inherited.

Note: If an instrument label field is already set to inherit from the owning pipe, or is set to be
validated against a list of values (see above), its Fields from Sheet Attribute field will
not be accessible. Both list of values validation and Pipe label inheritance take
priority over sheet attribute inheritance.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:98 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

Sheet attribute field names are set up using the Drawing Information - Settings Sub-
Category.
• Instrument label fields that inherit values from sheet attributes can be hidden, i.e.
though they are part of instrument labels and will be included in any exports of P&ID
data, they are not displayed on P&IDs. To hide an inherited instrument label field, check
the checkbox next to the field in question. The Type and Number fields cannot be
hidden.
Note: Changing these settings will not change the appearance existing item labels. Only
the appearance of labels subsequently added to a drawing will be affected.

- Label Validation Across P&IDs Section

The project may be set to check that all instrument labels in all P&IDs in a project are
unique.
• Select the Prevent button if users are to be prevented from entering project duplicate
instrument labels. If this is attempted, an error message is displayed and the duplicate
label may not be placed on the P&ID.
• Select the Warn button if users are to be warned if they enter project duplicate
instrument labels. The entry of duplicate labels is permitted in this case, but an error
message will be displayed on the P&ID, and will accompany the instrument label data
when transferred to VPE Workbench.
• If no uniqueness validation of instrument labels across P&IDs is required, select Ignore
button. Duplicate instrument labels may be entered in different P&IDs in this case.
Duplicate instrument labels are still not permitted in the same P&ID.
Note that if the Prevent or Warn options are set, a connection to the VPE Workbench
database must be established before labels can be edited. This is because in order to check
the uniqueness of labels across a project, AVEVA P&ID refers to data that is extracted from
the VPE Workbench database.

- Instrument Loop Tag Section

This section is used to define which fields are used to identify instrument loops, and which of
these fields are inherited by instruments in loops.
This section contains four or six pairs of checkboxes, depending on the setting in the
Number of Tag fields section.
• As required, check the Block, Function, Prefix and/or Suffix checkboxes to define which
fields are to be used to identify instrument loops.
• The Type and Number checkboxes are checked automatically and cannot be
unchecked. Type and Number are the minimum fields required to identify instrument
loops.
• If instruments within a loop are to inherit values from the loop they are in, check the
appropriate Inherit Field to Instrument checkbox. For example, if instruments in a loop
are to inherit the function of the loop, check the Inherit Function to Instrument
checkbox.
• If an Inherit Field to Instrument checkbox is checked, the adjacent loop field checkbox
is checked automatically. For example if the Inherit Function to Instrument checkbox is
checked, the Function checkbox is checked automatically.
• The Inherit Type to Instrument checkbox is unchecked automatically and cannot be
changed. The instrument type cannot be inherited.
• The Inherit Number to Instrument checkbox is checked automatically and cannot be
changed. The instrument type is always inherited.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:99 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

• The Display Label Format Fields field is used to select the types of data displayed in
instrument loop labels, and the order in which they are displayed. Fields may appear in
a different order from those of the "actual" label, and fields that are in the "actual" label
may be left out, though additional fields may not be included.
The Browse button adjacent to the field is used to select the format. On selection of the
button, the Display Label Format dialog box is displayed:

Use the lists of values to select which fields are to be displayed, and the order that they
are to be displayed in. For example, if Type is to appear first, select Type from the list of
values in the Field 1 field.
A field will not be available for selection unless its checkbox has been checked to
specify that it will be part of instrument loop tags, as described above. The number of
active fields in the dialog depends on the number of checkboxes checked.
As required, enter a delimiter character in the field adjacent to each field selection list.
For example, if the Type part of an instrument loop display label is to be separated from
the next field in the label by a “-”, enter that symbol in the field next to the field in which
Type is selected.
Following selection, press OK. The selected Display Label Format will then be shown
in the Display Label Format Fields field, e.g. 1,-,2.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:100 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

• Labels Sub-Category

The fields in this application pane are used to set up the label configuration properties of
instruments.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:101 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

The application pane is divided into six sections:

- Label Options Section

This section contains the following settings:
• The setting of the Loop Numbers from VPE Workbench checkbox determines whether
the instrument loop is imported from VPE Workbench or not. If this checkbox is
checked, a temporary loop number is assigned to each instrument when data is
exported to VPE Workbench and the loop numbers are then edited in VPE Workbench
and exported back to P&ID. When the P&ID is subsequently opened the loop numbers
are revised accordingly. If this checkbox is checked the loop numbers are read only in
P&ID.
• If instrument prefixes are required for the project, ensure that the Prefix Label Required
checkbox is checked.
• If instrument labels are to be rotated when the symbol they are associated with is
rotated, ensure that the Rotate Labels with Symbol checkbox is checked.

- Label Balloon Section

This section contains the following settings:
• In the Label Balloon Symbol field, select the symbol name of the Instrument Label
Balloon symbol from the drop down list.
• If all link lines between instruments and their balloons are to be switched off, then
ensure that the Label Balloon Link Lines Off checkbox is checked. This setting will not
update existing instruments when the drawing is reloaded.

- Instrument Label Position Section

The fields in this section govern the positions of the different elements that make up an
instrument label, relative to the insert point of the labelled instrument. In the fields provided,
enter the X and Y coordinates for the instrument labels components.
The number of fields in which positions can be entered depends on the option selected in
the Number of Tag fields section of the Settings pane. If the 4 Tag fields option is selected,
the first two fields (Block and Function) will not be active.
If different label positions are needed for different types of instrument balloons, the default
positioning can be overridden by selecting the Instrument Label Positional data option in the
List of Values Configuration Category.

- Unique Tags Section

The Unique Validation field is used to specify which combination of fields in instrument
labels are to be checked for uniqueness.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:102 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

The Browse button adjacent to the field is used to select the values. On selection of the
button, the Select Unique Identifier(s) dialog box is displayed:

The fields can be selected by using the drop down lists. A field cannot be selected twice.
Following selection, press OK, and the numbers of the selected Unique Validation fields will
be shown in the Unique Validation field. e.g. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6.
The numbers represent label fields are follows:
1. Block
2. Function
3. Prefix
4. Tag
5. Number
6. Suffix
For example, if PREFIX, SUFFIX, NUMBER, TYPE was selected, the field would display:
3,6,5,4.
Note that if the 4 Tag fields option in the Number of Tag fields section of the Settings pane is
selected, the first two lists will not be active.
Note that, although <NONE> can be selected from the drop down lists, all fields must be
selected. If <NONE> is selected for any field, the format will reset to the default format of
1,2,3,4.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:103 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

- Instrument Panel Label Position Section

The fields in this section govern the positions of the different elements that make up a panel
label, relative to the insert point of the instrument panel reference symbols. In the fields
provided, enter the X and Y coordinates for the Prefix, Letters, Number and Suffix parts of
the instrument panel labels.
Panel reference label positioning does not automatically update on reload of the drawing if
these settings have been changed.

- I/O Label Position Section

This section contains the following settings:
• If I/O labels are to be placed on the Non-plot layer, ensure that the Labels on Non-Plot
Layer checkbox is checked.
• I/O labels must be automatically positioned in the same place for each I/O symbol and
the X, Y offsets in the Offset from Symbol Origin fields control the automatic positioning
of the I/O Address, Card Type, Signal/Area Code and Remarks.
• The four components of I/O Symbol labels may be individually rotated as they are
brought in from VPE Workbench. Check the appropriate Rotate with Symbol
checkboxes to activate the rotation. Ensure the checkboxes are unchecked to have the
labels placed at zero degrees to the symbol angle.

• Patterns Sub-Category

The Pattern application pane is used to edit the definitions of project instrument patterns.
The application pane consists of three sections. The first section of the application pane is
used to add, amend and delete pattern definitions.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:104 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

- Existing Patterns Section

The first section contains a list of existing patterns and three tools for managing patterns -
Add Pattern, Delete Pattern and Rename Pattern.

- Adding a New Pattern

If a new pattern is to be created, select the Add Pattern…. hyperlink. The following dialog
box is then displayed:

Enter a unique value for the pattern name and press the OK button
The dialog box will be closed and the new value is displayed in the Existing Patterns list box.

- Deleting a Pattern
If a pattern is to be deleted, select the Deleted Pattern…. hyperlink. The following dialog box
is then displayed:

To proceed with the deletion select Yes. If the value is not to be deleted select No.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:105 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

If Yes is selected the dialog box will be closed and the pattern deleted from the Existing
Patterns list box. All associated pattern property data is deleted.

- Renaming a Pattern
If a pattern is to be renamed, select the Rename Pattern…. hyperlink. The following dialog
box is then displayed:

Enter a unique value for the pattern name and press the OK button
The dialog box will be closed and the amended name is displayed in the Existing Patterns
list box.

- Pattern Style Section

If the Substitute Master Instrument Tag checkbox is checked, if an instrument is made the
master instrument for a pattern, when synchronized and exported to P&ID Reports its tag
label is replaced by the tag label defined in the pattern assigned to it (it will remain
unchanged on the drawing).

- Patterns Components Section

The second section contains a grid, which is used to manage the components of a pattern.
See below for guidance on entering pattern component data.

• Entering Instrument Pattern Labels

A pattern definition must consist of two types of items, a single substitute instrument (which
is the item shown on the drawing), and the component instruments that it represents.
The substitute item can appear on any row; it does not have to be positioned first within the
pattern listing.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:106 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

Create a new row is created by selecting the button. The following dialog box is then
displayed:

Enter the sequence number of the new row. The new row then is created at the bottom of
the grid.
Pattern labels details are entered in the following fields:
• Field 1: Sequence No
• Field 2: Tag Label
• Field 3: Suffix Label
• Field 4: Symbol Name
• Field 5: P&ID Substitute Item
• Field 6: Instrument Alarms
• Field 7: Instrument Desc
• Field 8: Process Links
• Field 9: Signal Lines
• Field 10: No of Signal Line Types

- Field 1: Sequence No
Normally the item handle forms the unique identifier for an instrument exported to VPE
Workbench. However, component pattern items do not posses such a handle.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:107 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

To overcome this lack, the handle of the substitute item is used together with an asterisk and
the sequence number of the component item, e.g., AB*1, where AB is the substitute
instrument handle, and 1 is the sequence number of the component instrument.

If there are no sequence numbers in the file, an error will occur on output.
If pattern instrument data has been loaded into VPE Workbench and the pattern is then
changed on the P&ID, the existing sequence numbers should be maintained. For example,
if the sequence was 1, 2, 3, and 2 was removed - the new sequence should be 1, 3, not 1, 2.
This is to avoid inconsistencies which would occur if the pattern was reloaded into VPE
Workbench.
Sequence numbers cannot be edited in the grid. The sequence number row must be
deleted and re-entered with a new name.

- Field 2: Tag Label

• Substitute Instrument: It is possible to label the substitute instrument with a
concatenated label, e.g., FEIT to indicate that it consists of an FE (the substitute item),
an FI and an FT. However, the substitute item must appear in the IPT file with its valid
name, i.e., FE.
• Component Instruments: The tag part of the instrument label must be entered here for
component items, e.g., FI, FE, FT.

- Field 3: Suffix Label

• Substitute Instrument: If the substitute instrument has a suffix in its label, enter it here.
• Component Instruments: If two or more pattern items are to be labelled identically
when the records are created on export, make sure that the suffices are entered in this
column to prevent exact duplicates occurring.

- Field 4: Symbol Name

• Substitute Instrument: This field has its data inherited from the P&ID, and must be left
blank.
• Component Instruments: Enter the symbol names here for component items. Symbol
names can be identified using the Symbols Configuration Category of the AVEVA P&ID
Project Administration program or from the item Properties dialogs.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:108 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

- Field 5: P&ID Substitute Item

A pattern can consist of any number of component items, but only one inline substitute item
is permitted.
The substitute item is denoted by an asterisk, *. If an attempt is made to export with two or
more asterisks in any one pattern listing, an error message will be received.
The substitute item can appear on any row; it does not have to be positioned first within the
pattern listing.

- Field 6: Instrument Alarms

• Substitute Instrument: This field has its data inherited from the P&ID, and must be left
blank.
• Component Instruments: Enter any alarms here separating them with commas, e.g., H,
HH. All other restrictions such as maximum of 4 alarms still apply.

- Field 7: Instrument Desc

• Substitute Instrument: This field has its data inherited from the P&ID, and must be left
blank.
• Component Instruments: The description is used within VPE Workbench. When
assigning VPE Workbench item types to incoming instruments from AVEVA P&ID, for
example, a description of Vortex, Magnetic FLOW, Coriolis, or Turbine could be used to
specifically differentiate between different types of FLOW transmitters. A more
restricted choice of item types will be available than if the descriptor for the instrument
were left blank.

- Field 8: Process Links

• Substitute Instrument: The substitute item will either be inline or process connected.
Place an asterisk in this column if the substitute item is process connected. Leave
blank if the instrument is inline.
• Component Instruments: Put an asterisk in this column if the pattern item is to appear
as process connected in the export file.
Note: If component instruments are both process and signal connected, the process
connection takes precedence.

- Field 9: Signal Lines

• Substitute Instrument: This field has its data inherited from the P&ID, and must be left
blank.
• Component Instruments: Enter the number of signal lines here if the instrument is to be
signal connected, i.e., would have been attached to one or more signal lines if actually
drawn on the P&ID.
Note: If instruments are BOTH process and signal connected, the process connection
takes precedence.

- Field 10: No of Signal Line Types

• Substitute Instrument: This field has its data inherited from the P&ID, and must be left
blank.
• Component Instruments: Enter the number of signal line types which are to be
connected to the component instrument. On output the signal line types are checked
for validity against the signal line validation file.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:109 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

• Validation Sub-Category

This pane is used to specify the permitted format of entries into selected instrument and
panel reference label fields.
Note that if the 4 Tag fields option in the Number of Tag fields section of the Settings pane is
selected, the first two fields in the Instrument Label Field Validation section (Block and
Function) will not be active.
In the fields provided, enter the following characters as required:

Code Description
A Upper Case Alpha Character [A-Z]
a Lower Case Alpha Character [a-z]
M Mixed Case Alpha Character [A-Z, a-z]
F Upper Case Free Character [A-Z, 0-9, white space]
f Lower Case Free Character [a-z, 0-9, white space]
X Mixed Case Free Character [A-Z, a-z, 0-9, white space]
N Numeric Character [0-9]

For example, if AaN is entered for the Prefix Field field, when a user is completing this field
in the Instruments labelling Properties dialog, the first character must be an uppercase
letter, the second a lower case letter, and the third a number.
The Advanced Format Options dialog is available from the button adjacent to each field.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:110 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

To test how the validation will work in practice, make an entry in the Test Data field of the
Test tab, and press the Test button. A message will be displayed indicating whether or not
the test data would be a valid entry.
To directly edit the regular expression that comprises the validation entry, select the
Advanced tab. The expression is displayed in the Regular Expression field and may be
amended as required. For help on editing Regular Expressions, click on the help link
displayed on this tab.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:111 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

• Automatic Tag Format Sub-Category

If Instruments are to be tagged automatically, the format of instruments tags is defined using
this sub-category.

If automatic tagging is to be used, check the Apply Auto Tagging checkbox.

Place the cursor in the Tag Expression field, and select the Insert Counter button. The
counter is added like so: [Counter].
Select the length of the counter number from the list in the Format field. Enter the number
that the counter is to be incremented by in the Increment By field.
A separate count may be applied for each value of a specific instrument property. For
example, a separate count for each instrument type.
If this is required, check the Based on Counter Field checkbox, and select the property from
the Counter Reset Field field.
To clear the Tag Expression field, select the Clear button.
The counter may be reset to 0 for the project by selecting the Reset Counter button.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:112 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

2.3.16 Equipment Configuration Category

The Equipment Configuration Category is divided into four sub-categories:

• Settings Sub-Category
• Labels Sub-Category
• Validation Sub-Category
• Automatic Tag Format Sub-Category

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:113 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

• Settings Sub-Category

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:114 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

The fields in this application pane are used to set up the configuration properties of
equipment.
The application pane is divided into eight sections.

- Number of TAG fields Section

If four tag fields are to be used for project equipment (Prefix, Type, Number, Suffix), select
the 4 Tag Fields option.
If six tag fields are to be used for project equipment (Block, Function, Prefix, Type, Number,
Suffix), select the 6 Tag Fields option.

Note: Two extra tag fields (block and Function) were introduced with AVEVA VPE P&ID 7.2
SP1. Before a project can use these two new fields, the project database schema
must be updated by selecting the Upgrade Database Schema - Upgrade button on
the VPE Workbench Configuration Category.

- Equipment Classification Section

If, when equipment is exported (e.g. to AVEVA P&ID Manager), the descriptions of
equipment in the equipment type validation files are to be used instead of the descriptions
associated with the equipment symbol types, check the Use Equipment Type Specification
checkbox

- Equipment Data from VPE Workbench Section

This section contains the following settings:
• The item type of EDL enables a chosen symbol to be placed on a P&ID and associated
with a piece of equipment. When an import of equipment data is carried out from VPE
Workbench, an EDL file is created. When the P&ID is loaded and AVEVA P&ID
initialised with the Import Equipment Data checkbox checked, the exported data from
the file will attach itself to the correct EDL symbol and appear on the P&ID.
• The first piece of data is placed on the insert point of the symbol. The Column X Offsets
and Row Y Offsets fields control the offsetting of successive items of equipment
information relative to the EDL symbol. The numbers represent relative distances
between the pieces of information and are separated by the "pipe" character: |. It is
possible to arrange information in a table format using the X and Y offset distances.
• The Browse button adjacent to the Column X Offsets field is used to select the value for
thus field. On selection of the button, the Equipment X Offsets dialog box is displayed:

Following selection press OK. The selected Equipment X Offsets will then be displayed
in the Equipment X Offsets field as a set of values separated by a delimiter.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:115 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

- Dialog Box Field Labels and List of Values Section

This section contains four or six active fields, depending on the setting in the Number of Tag
fields section.
They are used to specify the boilerplate text to replace the defaults of Block, Function,
Prefix, Tag, Number and Suffix in Equipment properties sheets.
The first two fields are only active if the 6 Tag Fields option in the Number of Tag fields
section is selected, i.e.:

If required, from the drop-down lists next to each field, select the list of values against which
entries in a tag field are to be validated: Area Code, Block Code, Function Code or
Equipment Type.
• Area Code
• Block Code
• Equipment Type
• Function Code
• Imperial Size
• Instrument Type Letter
• Insulation Table
• Insulation Condition
• Insulation Index
• Metric Size
• Paint Code
• Service/Fluid Code
• Specification Code
• Valve Code
• Valve Closure
A list cannot be selected more than once. List of values are set up on the List of Values
Configuration Category of the Administration program.

- Values to Remember from Last Equipment Edit Section

This section contains a number of checkboxes - Block, Function, Prefix, Type, Number,
Suffix, Size and Specification.
Note that the Block and Function checkboxes are only active if the 6 Tag Fields option in the
Number of Tag fields section is selected.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:116 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

A project can be configured so that a value entered in a field in a Properties dialog is

"remembered" by the same field when that Properties dialog is accessed again when
labelling another, previously unlabelled, item of that type.
If, for example, the functionality is switched on for the equipment Prefix field, and an
equipment item is labelled with a value of "20". The next time an equipment item is labelled
for the first time, when the Properties dialog for this item is opened, the Prefix field will
automatically be completed with the value "20". This can be replaced by another value if
required. This new value will then be the "remembered" value for the equipment Prefix field.
This functionality is switched on and off for individual Properties dialog fields by checking
and unchecking the checkboxes in this section.

- Values to Remember from Last In-Line Equipment Edit Section

The checkboxes in this section are used in the same way as those in the Values to
Remember from Last Equipment Edit Section but for inline equipment Properties dialog
fields.

- Label Validation Across P&IDs Section

The project may be set to check that all equipment labels in all P&IDs in a project are
unique.
• Select the Prevent button if users are to be prevented from entering project duplicate
equipment labels. If this is attempted, an error message is displayed and the duplicate
label may not be placed on the P&ID.
• Select the Warn button if users are to be warned if they enter project duplicate
equipment labels. The entry of duplicate labels is permitted in this case, but an error
message will be displayed on the P&ID, and will accompany the equipment label data
when transferred to VPE Workbench.
• If no uniqueness validation of equipment labels across P&IDs is required, select Ignore
button. Duplicate equipment labels may be entered in different P&IDs in this case.
Duplicate equipment labels are still not permitted in the same P&ID.
Note that if the Prevent or Warn options are set, a connection to the VPE Workbench
database must be established before labels can be edited. This is because in order to check
the uniqueness of labels across a project, AVEVA P&ID refers to data that is extracted from
the VPE Workbench database.

- Equipment Inheritance Section

The values of equipment labels may be inherited from the sheet attributes entered on the
Advanced Drawing Properties sheet. The values entered for these sheet attributes may be
values that are common to many items on the drawing, for example the design area. The
inheritance facility enables all items to inherit these common values. The labels of items that
do not share these common values may subsequently be edited manually using their
properties sheets.
The Fields from Sheet Attribute fields are used to select which equipment label fields are to
inherit values from which sheet attributes. As required, select for each equipment label field
the sheet attribute field from which values are to be inherited.
Sheet attribute field names are set up using the Drawing Information - Settings Sub-
Category.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:117 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

Equipment label fields that inherit values from sheet attributes can be hidden, i.e. though
they are part of equipment labels and will be included in any exports of P&ID data, they are
not displayed on P&IDs. To hide an inherited equipment label field, check the checkbox next
to the field in question. The Type and Number fields cannot be hidden.

Note: Changing these settings will not change the appearance existing item labels. Only
the appearance of labels subsequently added to a drawing will be affected.

- In-line Equipment Inheritance Section

This section contains the following settings:
• If item labels are to be inherited from owner pipes, the fields to be inherited from for
each label are specified in the Prefix, Type, Number and Suffix fields, plus the Block
and Function fields if the 6 Tag Fields option in the Number of Tag fields section is
selected.
• The Browse button adjacent to these fields is used to select the fields to be inherited
from. On selection of the button, the following dialog box is displayed:

The fields required are selected using the drop down lists. Following selection, press
OK. The selected fields will then be displayed in the Prefix, Type, Number and Suffix
fields, plus the Block and Function fields if the 6 Tag Fields option in the Number of Tag
fields section is selected.
• The values of inline equipment labels may be inherited from the sheet attributes
entered on the Advanced Drawing Properties sheet. The values entered for these
sheet attributes may be values that are common to many items on the drawing, for
example the design area. The inheritance facility enables all items to inherit these
common values. The labels of items that do not share these common values may
subsequently be edited manually using their properties sheets.
The Fields from Sheet Attribute fields are used to select which inline equipment label
fields are to inherit values from which sheet attributes. As required, select for each

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:118 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

inline equipment label field the sheet attribute field from which values are to be
inherited.
Note that if an inline equipment label field is already set to inherit from the owning pipe
(see above), this Fields from Sheet Attribute field will not be accessible. Pipe label
inheritance takes priority over sheet attribute inheritance.
Sheet attribute field names are set up using the Drawing Information - Settings Sub-
Category.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:119 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

• Labels Sub-Category

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:120 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

The fields in this application pane are used to set up the equipment label configuration
format.
The application pane is divided into seven sections.

- Label Format Section

This section contains the following settings:
• Delimiter After Field 1 to 5. These checkboxes control the type and the presence or
absence of a delimiter after the Block, Function, Prefix, Type and Number fields when a
fixed equipment label format is being used. For example, if a delimiter is to be placed
after the first field, check the Delimiter after Field 1 checkbox.
Depending on the set-up of the project options, delimiters will appear automatically when
the equipment label is placed. Trailing delimiters will not occur if parts of the equipment label
are not used.

- Equipment Label Position Section

This section contains the following settings:
• The Use Fixed Equipment Label Format and Use Fixed In-Line Equipment Label
Format checkboxes are used to specify whether or not equipment and in-line
equipment labels are to be placed as a single text string (fixed formatting), or if the
individual components of such labels are to be placed at specified X and Y coordinates
from the label insertion point. Uncheck the checkbox if label components are to be
placed at specified X and Y coordinates.
• The Block, Function, Prefix, Type Letter, Number, and Suffix Position fields are used to
set the X and Y coordinates of equipment and in-line equipment label components
when fixed formatting is not in use. These fields are disabled if the Use Fixed
Equipment Label Format checkbox is checked.
The number of fields in which positions can be entered depends on the option selected in
the Number of Tag fields section of the Settings pane. If the 4 Tag fields option is selected,
the first two fields (Block and Function) will not be active.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:121 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

- Equipment Label Format Section

The Equipment Label Format fields are used to specify the format of equipment labels, i.e.
the order in which equipment label fields are displayed.
The Browse button adjacent to the field is used to select the format. On selection of the
button, the Select Unique Identifiers dialog box is displayed:

The Equipment Label Format can be selected by using the drop down lists.
Following selection, press OK, and the numbers of the selected Unique Validation fields will
be shown in the Unique Validation field. e.g. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6.
The numbers represent label fields are follows:
1. Block
2. Function
3. Prefix
4. Tag
5. Number
6. Suffix
For example, if PREFIX, SUFFIX, NUMBER, TYPE was selected, the field would display:
3,6,5,4.
Note that if the 4 Tag fields option in the Number of Tag fields section of the Settings pane is
selected, the first two lists will not be active.
Note that, although <NONE> can be selected from the drop down lists, all fields must be
selected. If <NONE> is selected for any field, the format will reset to the default format of
1,2,3,4.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:122 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

Note: Changes to drawings resulting from changes to the Equipment Label Format settings
are not automatically implemented when project drawings are loaded. The user must
trigger these changes "manually" in each drawing after it has loaded. See 8.2.2:
Updating Equipment Tags.

- Unique Tags Section

The Unique Validation field is used to specify which combination of fields in equipment
labels are to be checked for uniqueness.
The Browse button adjacent to the field is used to select the values. On selection of the
button, the Select Unique Identifier(s) dialog box is displayed:

The fields can be selected by using the drop down lists. A field cannot be selected twice.
Following selection, press OK, and the numbers of the selected Unique Validation fields will
be shown in the Unique Validation field. e.g. 1, 2, 3, 4. Refer to the previous section (above)
for the meanings of these numbers.

- Equipment Label Symbol Section

This section contains the following settings:
• Equipment Label Symbol. If this checkbox is checked a symbol will be placed with
equipment labels. For example, a box may be placed around the labels.
• Symbol Name. This field is used to select the name of the symbol that will be placed
with the equipment labels.
• Symbol X Offset. The X offset to the equipment type letters label.
• Symbol Y Offset. The Y offset to the equipment type letters label.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:123 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

- In-Line Equipment Label Position Section

This section contains the following settings:
• Use Fixed In-Line Equipment Label Format. This checkbox is used to specify whether
or not in-line SPP equipment labels are to be placed as a single line (fixed formatting),
or if the individual components of such labels are to be placed at specified X and Y
coordinates from the label insertion point. Uncheck the checkbox if label components
are to be placed at specified X and Y coordinates.
• Block, Function, Prefix, Type Letter, Number, and Suffix Position. The fields in this
section are used to set the X and Y coordinates of in-line SPP equipment label
components when fixed formatting is not in use. These fields are disabled if the Use
Fixed In-Line Equipment Label Format checkbox is checked.
The number of fields in which positions can be entered depends on the option selected in
the Number of Tag fields section of the Settings pane. If the 4 Tag fields option is selected,
the first two fields (Block and Function) will not be active.

- In-Line Equipment Label Symbol Section

This section contains the following settings:
• In-Line Equipment Label Symbol. If this checkbox is checked a symbol will be placed
with in-line equipment labels. For example, a box may be placed around the labels.
• Symbol Name. This field is used top select the name of the symbol that will be placed
with the in-line equipment labels.
• Symbol X Offset. The X offset to the in-line equipment type letters label.
• Symbol Y Offset. The Y offset to the in-line equipment type letters label.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:124 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

• Validation Sub-Category

This pane is used to specify the permitted format of entries into selected equipment and in-
line equipment label fields.
Note that if the 4 Tag fields option in the Number of Tag fields section of the Settings pane is
selected, the first two fields in both sections (Block and Function) will not be active.
In the fields provided, enter the following characters as required:

Code Description
A Upper Case Alpha Character [A-Z]
a Lower Case Alpha Character [a-z]
M Mixed Case Alpha Character [A-Z, a-z]
F Upper Case Free Character [A-Z, 0-9, white space]
f Lower Case Free Character [a-z, 0-9, white space]
X Mixed Case Free Character [A-Z, a-z, 0-9, white space]
N Numeric Character [0-9]

For example, if AaN is entered for the Prefix Field field, when a user is completing this field
in the Equipment labelling Properties dialog, the first character must be an uppercase letter,
the second a lower case letter, and the third a number.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:125 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

The Advanced Format Options dialog is available from the button adjacent to each field.

To test how the validation will work in practice, make an entry in the Test Data field of the
Test tab, and press the Test button. A message will be displayed indicating whether or not
the test data would be a valid entry.
To directly edit the regular expression that comprises the validation entry, select the
Advanced tab. The expression is displayed in the Regular Expression field and may be
amended as required. For help on editing Regular Expressions, click on the help link
displayed on this tab.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:126 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

• Automatic Tag Format Sub-Category

If equipment is to be tagged automatically, the format of equipment tags is defined using this
sub-category.

If automatic tagging is to be used, check the Apply Project based Auto Tagging checkbox.
Place the cursor in the Tag Expression field, and select the Insert Counter button. The
counter is added like so: [Counter].
Select the length of the counter number from the list in the Format field. Enter the number
that the counter is to be incremented by in the Increment By field.
A separate count may be applied for each value of a specific equipment property. For
example, a separate count for each equipment type.
If this is required, check the Based on Counter Field checkbox, and select the property from
the Counter Reset Field field..
To clear the Tag Expression field, select the Clear button.
The counter may be reset to 0 for the project by selecting the Reset Counter button.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:127 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

2.3.17 Valves Configuration Category

The Valves Configuration Category is divided into five sub-categories:

• Settings Sub-Category
• Labels Sub-Category
• Validation Sub-Category
• Automatic Tag Format Sub-Category
• Patterns Sub-Category

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:128 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

• Settings Sub-Category

The fields in this application pane are used to set up the configuration properties of valves.
The application pane is divided into five sections.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:129 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

- Valve Settings Section

This section contains the following settings:
• If the labels of valve tags are to automatically be placed in a fixed position relative to
valve symbols when valves are labelled, check the Valve Tag in Fixed Location
checkbox. The location is specified in the Valve Tag Offset from Symbol Location
Section (see below).
• If valve tag labels are to be automatically rotated to match the orientation of the valves
they are associated with, check the Rotate Valve Tag with Symbol checkbox.
• If valve labels are to inherit data from owning pipes the Inherit Item Labels from Owner
Pipes checkbox must be checked. Note the Inherit Item Labels from Owner Pipes
checkbox on Miscellaneous - Settings Configuration Category pane must also be
checked, as this activates the pipe label inheritance feature for the project as a whole.
• The Valve Tag field is used to specify the pipe label fields to be inherited by the valve
tag.
Note: If automatic valve tagging is to be used (see 6.10.25: Automatic Tagging), do not set
up inheritance to the Tag field.

• The Browse button adjacent to the field is used to select the fields to be inherited from.
On selection of the button, the following dialog box is displayed:

The fields required are selected using the drop down lists. Following selection, press
OK. The selected field numbers will then be displayed in the Valve Tag field.

- Valve Tag Offset from Symbol Location Section

This section contains the following settings to enable valve tag labels to be placed in a fixed
position relative to valve symbols. Complete the X and Y fields with the appropriate
coordinates.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:130 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

The Use Valve code checkbox controls whether the valve code field is present on the Valve
Properties dialog.
The Add Valve Code label checkbox controls whether valve codes will be added as labels
for valves on drawings.

- Values to Remember from Last Valve Edit Section

This section contains nine checkboxes - Tag, Size, Closure, Code, Specification, SPP
Prefix, SPP Type, SPP Number and SPP Suffix.
A project can be configured so that a value entered in a field in a Properties dialog is
"remembered" by the same field when that Properties dialog is accessed again when
labelling another, previously unlabelled, item of that type.
If, for example, the functionality is switched on for the valve Tag field, and a valve is labelled
with a value of "V-0001". The next time a valve is labelled for the first time, when the
Properties dialog for this item is opened, the Tag field will automatically be completed with
the value "V-0001". This can be replaced by another value if required. This new value will
then be the "remembered" value for the valve Tag field.
This functionality is switched on and off for individual Properties dialog fields by checking
and unchecking the checkboxes in this section.

- Label Validation Across P&IDs Section

The project may be set to check that all valve labels in all P&IDs in a project are unique.
• Select the Prevent button if users are to be prevented from entering project duplicate
valve labels. If this is attempted, an error message is displayed and the duplicate label
may not be placed on the P&ID.
• Select the Warn button if users are to be warned if they enter project duplicate valve
labels. The entry of duplicate labels is permitted in this case, but an error message will
be displayed on the P&ID, and will accompany the valve label data when transferred to
VPE Workbench.
• If no uniqueness validation of valve labels across P&IDs is required, select Ignore
button. Duplicate valve labels may be entered in different P&IDs in this case.
Separate sets of buttons are provided for normal valves and for valves which are special
pipe items.
Note that if the Prevent or Warn options are set, a connection to the VPE Workbench
database must be established before labels can be edited. This is because in order to check
the uniqueness of labels across a project, AVEVA P&ID refers to data that is extracted from
the VPE Workbench database.

- Inheritance Section
This section contains the following settings:
• If item labels are to be inherited from owner pipes, the fields to be inherited from for
each label are specified in the Tag, Prefix, Type, Number and Suffix fields.
Note: If automatic valve tagging is to be used (see 6.10.25: Automatic Tagging), do not set
up inheritance to the Tag field.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:131 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

• The Browse button adjacent to these fields is used to select the fields to be inherited
from. On selection of the button, the following dialog box is displayed:

The fields required are selected using the drop down lists. Following selection, press
OK. The selected fields will then be displayed in the Tag, Prefix, Type, Number and
Suffix fields.
• The values of valve labels may be inherited from the sheet attributes entered on the
Advanced Drawing Properties sheet. The values entered for these sheet attributes may
be values that are common to many items on the drawing, for example the design area.
The inheritance facility enables all items to inherit these common values. The labels of
items that do not share these common values may subsequently be edited manually
using their properties sheets.
The Fields from Sheet Attribute fields are used to select which valve label fields are to
inherit values from which sheet attributes. As required, select for each valve label field
the sheet attribute field from which values are to be inherited.
Note that if a valve label field is already set to inherit from the owning pipe (see above),
this Fields from Sheet Attribute field will not be accessible. Pipe label inheritance takes
priority over sheet attribute inheritance.
Sheet attribute field names are set up using the Drawing Information - Settings Sub-
Category.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:132 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

• Labels Sub-Category

The fields in this application pane are used to set up the label properties of valves.
The application pane is divided into three sections:

- Valve Labels Section

This section contains the following settings:
• If the valve code is to be automatically positioned on P&IDs, uncheck the Manual
Placement checkbox.
• If port sizes for port valves are to be placed on the drawing by default, ensure that the
Place Port Sizes checkbox is checked.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:133 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

- Code Offset from Symbol Origins Section

To specify the position in which automatic placement of the valve code takes place, enter
coordinates in the Code Offset from Symbol Origins X and Y fields. These coordinates
represent the X and Y distances from the insert point of the valve.

- Valve Settings Section

This section contains the following settings:
• If valve size labels are to automatically be placed in a fixed position relative to valve
symbols when valves are labelled, check the Valve Size in Fixed Location checkbox.
The location is specified in the Valve Size Offset from Symbol Location Section (see
below).
• If valve size labels are to be automatically rotated to match the orientation of the valves
they are associated with, check the Rotate Valve Size with Symbol checkbox.

- Valve Size Offset from Symbol Location Section

This section contains the following settings to enable valve size labels to be placed in a fixed
position relative to valve symbols. Complete the X and Y fields with the appropriate
coordinates.

- Dialog Box Field Labels Section

This section contains four fields, which are used to specify the boilerplate text to replace the
defaults of Prefix, Tag, Number and Suffix in the Valve Properties dialog.
These fields are only completed if the valve is a Special Piping Item (SPP). The
Miscellaneous - Validation Sub-Category is used to specify validation rules for entries into
SPP properties fields of both valves and line fittings.

- Valve Label Symbol Section

This section contains the following settings:
• Valve Label Symbol. If this checkbox is checked a symbol will be placed with
equipment labels. For example, a box may be placed around the labels.
• Symbol Name. This field is used to select the name of the symbol that will be placed
with the valve labels.
• Symbol X Offset. The X offset to the equipment type letters label.
• Symbol Y Offset. The Y offset to the equipment type letters label.

- Display Label Format Section

Check the Apply Regular Expression for Label checkbox if a regular expression is to be
applied to displayed valve labels.
Enter the required expression in the Regular Expression for Label field. For example, an
expression may be entered that limits the label to a maximum number of characters,
meaning that characters in a valve label exceeding this number will not be included in valve
labels when they are displayed on drawings.
The regular expression is applied to valve labels whether or not automatic valve tagging is
in use.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:134 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

The Advanced Format Options dialog is available from the button adjacent to the field.

To test how the regular expression will be applied in practice, make an entry in the Test Data
field of the Test tab, and press the Test button. A message will be displayed indicating
whether or not the test data would be a valid entry.
To directly edit the regular expression, select the Advanced tab. The expression is displayed
in the Regular Expression field and may be amended as required. For help on editing
Regular Expressions, click on the help link displayed on this tab.

• Validation Sub-Category

This section is used to specify the permitted format of entries into the Tag field of valve
labels.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:135 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

In the fields provided, enter the following characters as required:

Code Description
A Upper Case Alpha Character [A-Z]
a Lower Case Alpha Character [a-z]
M Mixed Case Alpha Character [A-Z, a-z]
F Upper Case Free Character [A-Z, 0-9, white space]
f Lower Case Free Character [a-z, 0-9, white space]
X Mixed Case Free Character [A-Z, a-z, 0-9, white space]
N Numeric Character [0-9]

For example, if AaN is entered, when a user is completing Tag field in the Valves labelling
Properties dialog, the first character must be an uppercase letter, the second a lower case
letter, and the third a number.
The Advanced Format Options dialog is available from the button adjacent to the field.

To test how the validation will work in practice, make an entry in the Test Data field of the
Test tab, and press the Test button. A message will be displayed indicating whether or not
the test data would be a valid entry.
To directly edit the regular expression that comprises the validation entry, select the
Advanced tab. The expression is displayed in the Regular Expression field and may be
amended as required. For help on editing Regular Expressions, click on the help link
displayed on this tab.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:136 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

• Automatic Tag Format Sub-Category

If valves are to be tagged automatically (see 6.10.25: Automatic Tagging), the format of
valve tags is defined using this sub-category.

Note: Do not set up automatic valve tagging if inheritance to the valve tag field is to be used
(see above).

If the incremental numbers that are to be used in the automatic tagging of valves are to be
derived from the ranges of numbers set up for each drawing in the Drawing - Drawing List
Sub-Category, check the Apply Project based Auto Tagging checkbox.
The format of automatic valve tags is defined in the Tag Expression field. A preview of a tag
using the current definition is displayed in the Sample Tag Valve field.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:137 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

1. In the Tag Expression field, enter any fixed values such as prefixes and delimiters (e.g.
V-).
2. If valve tags are to include valve properties, select the property from the list in the
Available Data Properties field, then place the cursor where the property is to be
located in the expression and select the Insert Property button. The list of properties is
taken from the attributes of a DataSet defined for this purpose (see below).
The selected property is added to the expression like so: [name of property].
3. If valve tags are to include owner pipe properties, select the property from the list in the
Available Pipe Properties field, then place the cursor where the property is to be
located in the expression and select the Insert Property button.
The selected property is added to the expression like so: [name of property].
4. If valve tags are to include an automatically incrementing number, place the cursor in
the expression where this number is to be located, and select the Insert Counter
button.
The counter is added to the expression like so: [Counter].
5. Select the length of the counter number from the list in the Format field. Enter the
number that the counter is to be incremented by for each valve in the Increment By
field.
6. A separate count may be applied for each value of a specific valve property. For
example, a separate count for each valve specification.
If this is required, check the Based on Counter Field checkbox, and select the property
from the Counter Reset Field field.
7. To clear the Tag Expression field, select the Clear button.
If a counter is in use, it may be reset to 0 for the project by selecting the Reset Counter
button.

- Defining Valve Tag Properties for Automatic Valve Tagging

Valve tag properties can be created for automatic valve tagging either using the the User
Defined Attributes - DataSet Sub-Category of the Administrator (see Defining Valve Tag
Properties for Automatic Valve Tagging).
Alternatively, they can be created from the current sub-category, as follows:
1. Selecting the Create Dataset Property button.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:138 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

The Add New Attribute dialog is then displayed.

8. In the Attribute Name field, enter the name of the attribute. This name will be the title of
the field used to enter the value for the attribute on the Properties dialogs of items that
meet the DataSet criteria.
9. From the Data Type list field, select the required type from long, double or string.
10. If the attribute is to constructed from other dataset attributes, a “Tag Expression”, check
the Use Tag Expression checkbox.
Note: If the Use Tag Expression checkbox is checked, the Attribute-Units Pair checkbox
and associated fields are disabled. If the Attribute-Units Pair checkbox is checked
the Use Tag Expression checkbox and associated button are disabled.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:139 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

11. Press the Set Tag Expression button. The Select a Tag Format dialog is then displayed:

12. The other attributes in the dataset are listed in the Available Data Properties field. To
add an attribute to the tag expression, select it from the list and press Insert Property.
The attribute is then displayed in the Tag Expression field.
Repeat as required to construct the tag expression.
Press Clear to clear the Tag Expression field.
13. When the tag expression has been constructed, press the Ok button to close the Select
a Tag Format dialog.
14. If the values for this attribute are to be selected from a list of values, select this list from
the LOV field. Lists of values are set up on the List of Values Configuration Category of
the Administration program.
15. If the Properties dialog field for the attribute is to be automatically completed with a
default value from the select list of values, select it from the Default Value field list.
16. If the attribute is to have a unit of measure, check the Attribute-Units Pair checkbox.
From the list in the Units LOVs, select the list of values from which the unit of measure
is to be selected.
From the Units Default list, select the unit itself.
17. Select the Save button to save changes and close the Add New Attribute dialog. The
new dataset is added to the Available Data Properties field.
18. To close the dialog without saving any changes, select the Cancel button.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:140 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

• Patterns Sub-Category

The Pattern application pane is used to edit the definitions of project valve patterns.
The application pane consists of two sections. The first section of the application pane is
used to add, amend and delete pattern definitions.

- Existing Patterns Section

The first section contains a list of existing patterns and three tools for managing patterns -
Add Pattern, Delete Pattern and Rename Pattern.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:141 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

- Adding a New Pattern

If a new pattern is to be created, select the Add Pattern…. hyperlink. The following dialog
box is then displayed:

Enter a unique value for the pattern name and press the OK button
The dialog box will be closed and the new value is displayed in the Existing Patterns list box.

- Deleting a Pattern
If a pattern is to be deleted, select the Deleted Pattern…. hyperlink. The following dialog box
is then displayed:

To proceed with the deletion select Yes. If the value is not to be deleted select No.
If Yes is selected the dialog box will be closed and the pattern deleted from the Existing
Patterns list box. All associated pattern property data is deleted.

- Renaming a Pattern
If a pattern is to be renamed, select the Rename Pattern…. hyperlink. The following dialog
box is then displayed:

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:142 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

Enter a unique value for the pattern name and press the OK button
The dialog box will be closed and the amended name is displayed in the Existing Patterns
list box.

- Patterns Components Section

The second section contains a grid, which is used to manage the components of a pattern.

Create a new row is created by selecting the button. The following dialog box is then
displayed:

Enter the sequence number of the new row. The new row then is created at the bottom of
the grid.
The first valve specified will be the substitute item. All other items will be component items.
Only a single valve can be specified. All other items must be line fittings.
• Sequence No Field
Normally the item handle forms the unique identifier for an item exported to VPE
Workbench. However, component pattern items do not posses such a handle. To
overcome this lack, the handle of the substitute item is used together with an asterisk
and the sequence number of the component item, e.g., AB*1, where AB is the
substitute valve handle, and 1 is the sequence number of the component item.
If there are no sequence numbers in the file, an error will occur on output.
If pattern valve data has been loaded into VPE Workbench and the pattern is then
changed on the P&ID, the existing sequence numbers should be maintained. For
example, if the sequence was 1, 2, 3, and 2 was removed - the new sequence should
be 1, 3, not 1, 2. This is to avoid inconsistencies which would occur if the pattern was
reloaded into VPE Workbench.
Sequence numbers cannot be edited in the grid. The sequence number row must be
deleted and re-entered with a new name.
• Symbol Name Field
Substitute Item: Enter the symbol name of the valve that is to be the substitute item.
Only a single valve may be specified in a valve pattern.
Component Item: Enter the symbols names here for component line fitting items.
Symbol names can be identified using the Symbols Configuration Category of the
AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program or from the item Properties dialogs.
• P&ID Substitute Item Field

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:143 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

A pattern can consist of any number of component items, but only one substitute item
is permitted. This is automatically the first valve defined. The substitute item is denoted
by a "Yes" in this field.
• Description Field
Enter a description of each item as required.
• Valve Code Field
Enter the valve code of each item as required.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:144 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

2.3.18 Line Fittings Configuration Category

The Line Fittings Configuration Category consists of the Settings sub-category:

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:145 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:146 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

The application pane is divided into five sections.

• Line Fittings Symbol Section

This section contains the following settings:
• Line Fittings Label Symbol. If this checkbox is checked a symbol will be placed with line
fittings labels. For example, a box may be placed around the labels.
• Symbol Name. This field is used to select the name of the symbol that will be placed
with the line fitting labels.
• Symbol X Offset. The X offset to the line fitting type letters label.
• Symbol Y Offset. The Y offset to the line fitting type letters label.

• Line Fittings Label Position Section

The Prefix, Type Letter, Number, and Suffix Position fields in this section are used to set the
X and Y coordinates of line fitting label components.

• Inheritance Section
This section contains the following settings:
• If item labels are to be inherited from owner pipes, the fields to be inherited from for
each label are specified in the Prefix, Type, Number and Suffix fields.
• The Browse button adjacent to these fields is used to select the fields to be inherited
from. On selection of the button, the following dialog box is displayed:

The fields required are selected using the drop down lists. Following selection, press
OK. The selected fields will then be displayed in the Prefix, Type, Number and Suffix
fields.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:147 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

• The values of line settings labels may be inherited from the sheet attributes entered on
the Advanced Drawing Properties sheet. The values entered for these sheet attributes
may be values that are common to many items on the drawing, for example the design
area. The inheritance facility enables all items to inherit these common values. The
labels of items that do not share these common values may subsequently be edited
manually using their properties sheets.
The Fields from Sheet Attribute fields are used to select which line settings label fields
are to inherit values from which sheet attributes. As required, select for each line
settings label field the sheet attribute field from which values are to be inherited.
Note that if a line settings label field is already set to inherit from the owning pipe (see
above), this Fields from Sheet Attribute field will not be accessible. Pipe label
inheritance takes priority over sheet attribute inheritance.
Sheet attribute field names are set up using the Drawing Information - Settings Sub-
Category.

• Label Validation Across P&IDs Section

The project may be set to check that all special piping item line fitting labels in all P&IDs in a
project are unique.
• Select the Prevent button if users are to be prevented from entering project duplicate
line fitting labels. If this is attempted, an error message is displayed and the duplicate
label may not be placed on the P&ID.
• Select the Warn button if users are to be warned if they enter project duplicate line
fitting labels. The entry of duplicate labels is permitted in this case, but an error
message will be displayed on the P&ID, and will accompany the valve label data when
transferred to VPE Workbench.
• If no uniqueness validation of line fitting labels across P&IDs is required, select Ignore
button. Duplicate line fitting labels may be entered in different P&IDs in this case.
Note that if the Prevent or Warn options are set, a connection to the VPE Workbench
database must be established before labels can be edited. This is because in order to check
the uniqueness of labels across a project, AVEVA P&ID refers to data that is extracted from
the VPE Workbench database.

• Code Settings Section

The Code Label checkbox controls whether the line fitting code field is present on the Line
Fitting Properties dialog.
The Add Code Label checkbox controls whether line fitting codes will be added as labels for
line fittings on drawings.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:148 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

2.3.19 Nozzles Configuration Category

The Nozzles Configuration Category is divided into three sub-categories:

• Settings Sub-Category
• Labels Sub-Category
• Validation Sub-Category

• Settings Sub-Category

If nozzle sizes are to cascaded onto connecting pipes, check the Cascade Nozzle to Pipe
checkbox.

• Labels Sub-Category

If nozzles are to be labelled using an automatically incrementing number, check the

Increment Nozzle Sequence checkbox.
If nozzles labels are to automatically include a prefix, enter this prefix in the Nozzle Prefix
field. If no prefix is required, enter <NONE> (the default entry).
The Increment Nozzle Sequence checkbox is disabled if <NONE> is entered in the Nozzle
Prefix field, or if the field is blank.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:149 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

• Validation Sub-Category

This section is used to specify the permitted format of entries into the Tag field of nozzle
labels.
In the fields provided, enter the following characters as required:

Code Description
A Upper Case Alpha Character [A-Z]
a Lower Case Alpha Character [a-z]
M Mixed Case Alpha Character [A-Z, a-z]
F Upper Case Free Character [A-Z, 0-9, white space]
f Lower Case Free Character [a-z, 0-9, white space]
X Mixed Case Free Character [A-Z, a-z, 0-9, white space]
N Numeric Character [0-9]

For example, if AaN is entered, when a user is completing Tag field in the nozzles labelling
Properties dialog, the first character must be an uppercase letter, the second a lower case
letter, and the third a number.
The Advanced Format Options dialog is available from the button adjacent to the field.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:150 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

To test how the validation will work in practice, make an entry in the Test Data field of the
Test tab, and press the Test button. A message will be displayed indicating whether or not
the test data would be a valid entry.
To directly edit the regular expression that comprises the validation entry, select the
Advanced tab. The expression is displayed in the Regular Expression field and may be
amended as required. For help on editing Regular Expressions, click on the help link
displayed on this tab.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:151 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

2.3.20 Offsheet Connector Configuration Category

The Offsheet Connector Configuration Category is divided into two sub-categories:

• Setting Sub-Category
• Labels Sub-Category

• Setting Sub-Category

If, when drawings are opened, warnings are to be displayed on them to indicate
unconnected Offsheet Connectors, check the Display Warning for disconnected flags
checkbox.
If the checkbox is checked, such warnings are also issued when drawings are
Synchronized.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:152 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

• Labels Sub-Category

The application pane is divided into four sections.

- Display Label Format

The Display Label Format Fields field is used to select order in which pipe flag label field are
displayed. Fields may appear in a different order from those of the "actual" label.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:153 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

The Browse button adjacent to the field is used to select the format. On selection of the
button, the Display Label Format dialog box is displayed:

Using the drop-down lists, select the order in which the parts of pipe flag fields are to be
displayed. If required, enter a delimiter to be displayed between the two label components in
the other field.
Click OK. The selected format is then displayed in the Display Label Format Fields field.
If pipe flag fields are to be "fixed", i.e. the two parts are to displayed concatenated as single
strings that cannot be split on a drawing, check the Fix Label Format checkbox.
Check the Apply Regular Expression for Label checkbox if a regular expression is to be
applied to the drawing number component of pipe flag fields.
Enter the required expression in the Regular Expression for Label field. For example, an
expression may be entered that limits drawing number label components to a maximum
number of characters (e.g. the first six or last five), meaning that characters in a drawing
number exceeding this number will not be included in pipe flag labels.
The Advanced Format Options dialog is available from the button adjacent to the field.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:154 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

To test how the regular expression will be applied in practice, make an entry in the Test Data
field of the Test tab, and press the Test button. A message will be displayed indicating
whether or not the test data would be a valid entry.
To directly edit the regular expression, select the Advanced tab. The expression is displayed
in the Regular Expression field and may be amended as required. For help on editing
Regular Expressions, click on the help link displayed on this tab.

- Flags Section
The Flags Positioned at field defines the default arrangement of pipe flags that are
positioned on pipes as they are drawn. From the drop down list, select the value that
corresponds to the required value (none -0, start only -1, end only -2, or at both ends -3).

- Default Off-Sheet Connector for Pipe End Styles

These fields set the default flag style (symbol type PFL) for flags positioned at the start and
end of pipes. Select the symbol type from the drop down lists.

- Connector Label Settings

This grid is used to specify the default insertion points for the different label types that may
be used to label pipe flags, relative to the pipe flag symbols they are labelling.
If labels of a type are to be placed in a fixed position, enter Y in the Fix Position field.
Enter the label type positions relative to pipe flag symbols in the X and Y fields.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:155 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

2.3.21 Miscellaneous Configuration Category

The Miscellaneous Configuration Category is divided into three sub-categories:

• Settings Sub-Category
• Labels Sub-Category
• Validation Sub-Category

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:156 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

• Settings Sub-Category

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:157 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

The application pane is divided into seven sections.

- User Defined Directives Section

This section is used to set up the names and values of directives to be used in user-defined
VBA macros.
Enter the names and values of each directive in the grid fields.

If a directive is to be added, select the button. The following dialog box is then
displayed:

Enter a unique name and press the OK button. The dialog box will be closed and the
entered new directive will be displayed in the grid.

To edit a directive name, select the button and enter the new value in the dialog that is
then displayed.
The following directives are predefined to serve the following purposes and may be set as
required:

Name Values Notes

USER_ASSIGNINSNUMBERS Yes/No Enter Yes if instruments exported
to P&ID Reports with no numbers
are to be automatically assigned
unique incremented numbers.
USER_ASSIGNLINENUMBERS Yes/No Enter Yes if lines exported to
P&ID Reports with no numbers
are to be automatically assigned
unique incremented numbers.
USER_AUTOCAD_SAVEAS Yes/No By default, when a P&ID drawing
is “saved as”, all tag values that
are checked for project
uniqueness are “nulled”. Enter
No if this is not required. These
values are then copied to the
“saved as” copies of the
drawings. Note that this will have
implications for the uniqueness of
tags in the project.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:158 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

Name Values Notes

USER_COMMANDNAME Command Name Enter the name of an AVEVA
P&ID command.
This command can then be run
on a batch of selected project
drawings. Refer to 8.9.13:
Running a Command for a Batch
of Drawings for details.
USER_CONNECTINSTUSINGSIG Yes/No Enter Yes if instruments in signal
NALLINESTOPROCESSOWNER lines are to be assigned the pipes
they are connected to as process
owners. If set to No, instruments
in signal lines are not assigned
process owners.
USER_DAINST Yes/No Enter Yes if the project design
area is to be appended
automatically to the prefixes of
instruments that have not been
placed on the drawing.
USER_Drawing1 Name of If a foreign language version of
“Drawing1.DWG” AutoCAD is being used, the
name of “Drawing1.DWG” in that
language must be specified here.
USER_EXPORTDESIGNATORS Yes/No When exporting to Excel, if
designators for values from other
databases are also be exported,
enter Yes.
USER_EXPORTDESIGNATORVA Yes/No When exporting to Excel, if
LUES values from other databases are
also be exported, enter Yes.
USER_PIDVERSION P&ID version If data is to be exported to
No., e.g. 12.1 AVEVA Electrical, enter the
AVEVA P&ID version number
against this directory.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:159 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

Name Values Notes

USER_PIPINGNETWORKSYSTE Pipe tag field Used to define the “Piping
MFORMAT identifiers and Network System Format”, i.e. the
separators format of pipe labels output to
ISO 15926 format XML files.
Enter the numbers corresponding
to the required pipe label fields,
plus the required separator
characters or spaces, all
separated by commas. For
example:
2,-,13,,3
If no space or separator is
required between two
components, indicate this by
leaving no space between the
commas, as in the above
example.
USER_PRESERVEASMTAGS Yes/No When an assembly is created, all
tag values of the items that were
selected to form that assembly
that are checked for project
uniqueness are "nulled". Enter
Yes if this is not required. Such
values will then be placed every
time assemblies are placed. Note
that this will have implications for
the uniqueness of tags in the
project.
USER_PROMPTTOPROPAGATE Yes/No If set to Yes, when the properties
of a pipe are changed, the user
will be prompted to choose
whether or not these changes will
be propagated to other pipes
connected to it via pipe flags (i.e.
off-sheet or page connectors). If
set to No, properties must be
propagated manually.
USER_REMOVETOOLTIP Yes/No If set to Yes, the tooltip that
appears when the mouse cursor
is hovered over items in drawings
will not be displayed.
If set to No, tooltips will be
displayed.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:160 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

Name Values Notes

USER_REPLACEPROCESSOWN Yes/No If set to Yes, pattern instruments
ERFORIPCX will be assigned the same owner
as the master instrument of the
pattern, i.e. the owning pipe.
If set to No, pattern instruments
will be assigned the master
instrument as their owner.
USER_ROTATEREDUMANUALLY Yes/No If set to “YES” , reducers will
NOT rotate automatically (i.e. so
that the smaller reducer symbol
ends are orientated with the
smaller pipe size).
If set to “NO”, reducers will rotate
automatically.
When directive does not exist,
reducers will rotate automatically.
USER_ROUTEINSTLINKSFROM Yes/No If the USER_CONNECTINST
SAMEGROUP USINGSIGNALLINESTOPROCE
SSOWNER directive (see above)
is set to Yes, instruments on
signal lines are assigned
connected pipe groups as their
process owners.
If the USER_ROUTEINSTLINKS
FROMSAMEGROUP directive is
also set to Yes, where a choice of
pipe groups is available as an
owner for a series of offline
instruments (for example, where
several instruments are placed
on series of linked signal lines
that are connected to more than
one pipe), then all those
instruments will be assigned the
same pipe group as their process
owners.
If the directive is set to No, such
instruments may be assigned
different owners.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:161 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

Name Values Notes

USER_SIGNALWIDTH Number If different signal line widths from
those used by default, enter the
required scale difference here.
For example:
If 2 is entered, line widths
will be multiplied by 2.
If 0.5 is entered, they will be
half the size.
USER_STOPUPDATEANNOT Yes/No If set to Yes, stops intelligent
COLOUR entities from having their colours
reset to match changes to project
settings in the Administrator.

In addition, the following default directives should be set if data is to be exported from
drawings to XML files in ISO15926 format:

Name Values Notes

USER_BACKCOLOUR BLACK or WHITE Specifies the background colour
of drawings in SVG files
USER_LINEWEIGHTFACTOR Number Specifies the relative line width of
lines in the SVG files compared
to lines in AVEVA P&ID.
For example:
If 2 is entered, line widths
will be multiplied by 2 in the
SVG files compared to those
in the AVEVA P&ID files.
If 0.5 is entered, they will be
half the size.
USER_PRESENTATION File path Specifies the location of the
Presentation mapping file
USER_SCHEMAVERSION 3_2 or 3_3 Specifies the ISO15926 XML
schema to be used, 3.2.0 or
3.3.3.
3.3.3 should only be used if
exporting to version 12.0 SP5 of
PDMS or later.

- Miscellaneous Settings Section

This section contains the following settings:
• If data from other databases is placed on a drawing is to be automatically refreshed
whenever a connection to that database is made, the Auto Refresh checkbox must be
checked.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:162 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

• If item labels are to inherit data from owning pipes the Inherit Item Labels from Owner
Pipes checkbox must be checked. Checking this checkbox enables this facility for the
entire project. Inheritance details are specified using the appropriate AVEVA P&ID
Administrator Configuration Category, i.e. Instruments, Equipment (for inline
equipment), Valves or Line Fittings.
• Select the non-plotting layer from the Non-Plotting Layer Name field. The list will
consist of the names of layers as set up using the Drawing – Layers Sub-Category.
• From the Error Symbol Name field, select the name of the symbol which will indicate
errors on project P&IDs.

- Text Position from Origin Section

In the Text position from origin fields, enter the X and Y coordinates that specify the position
that error message text is placed in, relative to the error symbol.

- Setting Colour for Display During Synchronize

This section is used to specify the text colours of the error and warning messages that may
be displayed on drawings when they are synchronized.
The Browse buttons adjacent to the Colour for warning and Colour for errors fields are used
to select the colour.
On selection of the button, the colour selection dialog box is displayed:

The Colour Code can be selected using the following methods:

• Selection of one of the colours shown in the palette
• By double clicking the Assume Owner Colour hyperlink. Messages will automatically
assume the colours of the item they are associated with
• By double-clicking on the Assume By Layer hyperlink. Messages will automatically
assume the colours of the layers they are on.
• By manually entering the Colour Code field
Following selection, press OK. The selected colour code will then be displayed in the
Symbol Colour field.

- Values to Remember from Last Nozzle Edit Section

This section contains two checkboxes - Tag and Size.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:163 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

A project can be configured so that a value entered in a field in a Properties dialog is

"remembered" by the same field when that Properties dialog is accessed again when
labelling another, previously unlabelled, item of that type.
If, for example, the functionality is switched on for the nozzle Tag field, and a nozzle is
labelled with a value of "N-0001". The next time a nozzle is labelled for the first time, when
the Properties dialog for this item is opened, the Tag field will automatically be completed
with the value "N-0001". This can be replaced by another value if required. This new value
will then be the "remembered" value for the nozzle Tag field.
This functionality is switched on and off for individual Properties dialog fields by checking
and unchecking the checkboxes in this section.

- Default OSnap Section

If the default object snap setting of the project is that snapping should be to the nearest
point, ensure that the Nearest button is pressed.
If "smart" snapping is to be the default, ensure that the Smart button is pressed. Snapping
will then default to End, Intersection, Perpendicular etc as appropriate.
If snapping is to be off by default, ensure that the Osnap Off button is pressed.

- Auto Save Section

This section is used to control the AutoCAD Auto Save facility.
To enable or disable this facility check or uncheck the AutoSave checkbox as required.
In the Save Interval field enter the interval between the automatic saves. This may also be
set for individual users in the user start up routine (see 2.9: Customisation Guide).

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:164 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

• Labels Sub-Category

The application pane is divided into four sections.

- Auto-Labelling Section
If pipe labels and routes are to be validated automatically after they are drawn, ensure the
Auto-Validate checkbox is checked.
The rest of the auto-labelling checkboxes control whether the properties sheets used for
labelling items are to be automatically displayed or not after an item in a particular category
of items is drawn or placed on a P&ID.
For example, if the Properties dialog for labelling pipes is to be automatically displayed after
a pipe is drawn, check the Auto-Label Piping checkbox.

- Revision Symbols Section

The Label Offset from Symbol Origin fields on this pane define the X and Y coordinates
which specify the position that revision triangles are placed in, relative to the insert point of
the revised symbol.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:165 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

If grid references of revised symbols are to be placed on P&IDs, ensure that the Place Grid-
Reference of each Symbol checkbox is checked. Note that these grid references are not
updated if revised symbols are subsequently moved.

- Typical Labelling Section

This section contains the following settings:
• The Typical Labelling checkbox is used to enable or disable the typical items function.
If it is checked, Typicals options will be enabled on item shortcut menus.
• If typical data is already on a P&ID and the checkbox is unchecked, then the data will
remain on the P&ID, but the Typicals options will remain greyed out. The data will also
be ignored when an output is performed from the P&ID with a warning message being
displayed to indicate that typical data exists, but is not exported.
• The colours of typical pipes, pipe flags, instruments, equipment, SPPs, valves and
nozzles are set in the following fields provided.
• Pipe Typical Colour.
• Pipe Flag Typical Colour.
• Instrument Typical Colour.
• Equipment Typical Colour.
• SPP Typical Colour.
• Valve Typical Colour.
• Nozzle Typical Colour.
When labelled as typical, the item labels will change to these colours. If these colours
are changed at a later date, after typical data has been entered onto the drawing, the
colours will be updated when AVEVA P&ID is re-loaded.
• The Browse button adjacent to the typical colour fields is used to select the colour this
field.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:166 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

On selection of the button, the colour selection dialog box is displayed:

The Colour Code can be selected using the following methods:

• Selection of one of the colours shown in the palette
• By double clicking the Assume Owner Colour hyperlink. Items will automatically
assume the colours of the owning items, e.g., the colours of the lines they are
inserted into. When there is no owning item, they will be set to the default colour.
• By double-clicking on the Assume By Layer hyperlink. Items will automatically
assume the colours of the layers they are inserted into, as set on the Layers Sub-
Category the Drawing Configuration Category.
• By manually entering the Colour Code field
Following selection, press OK. The selected colour code will then be displayed in the
grid.

- Dialog Box Field Labels Section

The Dialog Box Field Labels section contains four fields, which are used to specify the
boilerplate text to replace the defaults of Prefix, Tag, Number and Suffix on the Properties
dialog for labelling Special Piping Items.
In the Delimiter After Field 1, 2 and 3 fields, enter the delimiters used to separate the fields.
Note that these delimiters are not displayed on P&IDs or in the Engineering Explorer. They
are used to ensure tag format consistency when exporting to PDMS via the ISO15926/P&ID
Manager interface.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:167 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

• Validation Sub-Category

- Nozzle and Special Piping Items Label Field Validation Sections

These sections are used to specify the permitted format of entries into selected nozzle and
SPP label fields.
In the fields provided, enter the following characters as required:

Code Description
A Upper Case Alpha Character [A-Z]
a Lower Case Alpha Character [a-z]
M Mixed Case Alpha Character [A-Z, a-z]
F Upper Case Free Character [A-Z, 0-9, white space]
f Lower Case Free Character [a-z, 0-9, white space]
X Mixed Case Free Character [A-Z, a-z, 0-9, white space]
N Numeric Character [0-9]

For example, if AaN is entered for the Prefix Field field, when a user is completing this field
in the SPP labelling Properties dialog, the first character must be an uppercase letter, the
second a lower case letter, and the third a number.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:168 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

The Advanced Format Options dialog is available from the button adjacent to each field.

To test how the validation will work in practice, make an entry in the Test Data field of the
Test tab, and press the Test button. A message will be displayed indicating whether or not
the test data would be a valid entry.
To directly edit the regular expression that comprises the validation entry, select the
Advanced tab. The expression is displayed in the Regular Expression field and may be
amended as required. For help on editing Regular Expressions, click on the help link
displayed on this tab.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:169 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

2.3.22 Excel Interface Configuration Category

The Excel Interface Configuration Category consists of the Settings sub-category:

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:170 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

• Export to Excel - excelout Section

This section is used to select the format of Excel spreadsheets exported from AVEVA P&ID:
Item Type or Item Group.
If a spreadsheet is in the Item Type format, data for each item type that was exported is
displayed on its own worksheet.
If a spreadsheet is in the Item Group format, item type data is grouped into item categories:
pipes, instruments, equipment, valves, line fittings, reducers, nozzles and off-sheet
connectors. There is a worksheet for each category.

• Import to P&ID - excelin Section

This section is used to select the item types imported from Excel spreadsheets into AVEVA
P&ID, e.g. drawing attributes, equipment, pipes etc, are to have data imported from the
NEW columns on the spreadsheets.

• Filter for Excel - excelfiler Section

This section is used to select the default types of items to be exported to Excel
spreadsheets from AVEVA P&ID, e.g. drawing attributes, equipment, pipes etc. If required, a
different set of item types from these defaults can be selected for each individual export
procedure.

• Specify the location for Excel In/Out Section

In the Excel Location field, specify where the Excel spreadsheets are to be exported to and
imported from.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:171 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

2.3.23 Spec Driven Configuration Category

The Spec Driven Configuration Category is used to control which symbols can be inserted
into pipes based on the specification of those pipes.

Note: When a project is upgraded, in order for Spec Driven data and functionality to be
available, the database schema must be updated by selecting the Upgrade
Specdriven Database Schema - Upgrade button in the Project Database
Configuration Category.

The Spec Driven Configuration Category is divided into three sub-categories:

• Symbols Sub-Category
• Add/Edit Specs Sub-Category
• Assign Specs Sub-Category
The Symbols sub-category is used to specify valid pipe specifications for individual symbols.
The Add/Edit and Assign Specs sub-categories are used to specify valid pipe specifications
to groups of symbols.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:172 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

• Symbols Sub-Category

For example, it may be specified that Ball Valve symbols may only be inserted into pipes
with a specification of AAA3, and an inlet bore size of 20 and an outlet bore size of 20.
Multiple combinations of pipe specs and sizes may be specified as compatible with the
insertion of a symbol. If no specs or sizes are specified for a symbol, insertion of this symbol
is unrestricted.
Spec/size insertion restrictions may be set up for Valves, Instrument Valves and Reducers.
Currently, only restrictions for 2-way symbols may be specified, but not symbols inserted at
pipe junctions such as 3-way and 4-way valves.

Note: Changes to drawings resulting from changes to Spec Driven settings are not
automatically implemented when project drawings are loaded. The user must trigger
these changes "manually" in each drawing after it has loaded. See 8.2.4: Updating
Spec Driven Data.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:173 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

- Specifying the Valid Specs and Pipe Sizes for the Insertion of a Symbol

Note: Valid specification and size data can be imported from an AVEVA PDMS project. See
PDMS Cats and Specs Import below.

To specify the specs and sizes of pipes that a symbol may be inserted into:
1. From the list of values at the top of the application pane, select the symbol.

2. From the list of values below this, select the symbol.

The selected symbol is displayed next to the list.

Note: Symbols are set up using the Symbols Configuration Category.

3. From the bore sizes grid, select the inlet and outlet size by clicking on the cell at the
intersection of these values. The vertical axis displays the inlet size, the horizontal axis
displays the outlet size. The selected cell is displayed with a blue background.

Note that only light grey cells can be selected.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:174 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

In the case of Valves and Instrument Valves, only those cells at the intersection of
identical bore size values can be selected, as valves have the same inlet and outlet
sizes.
In the case of Reducers, only those cells at the intersection of different bore size values
can be selected, as reducers must have different inlet and outlet sizes.

Note: The list of sizes is set up using the List of Values Configuration Category.

4. From the list of pipe spec codes, select the code or codes. To select a code from the
list, click on it. The spec code is then highlighted with a blue background. Multiple
codes can be selected.

To de-select a spec code, click on it again. The code will no longer be highlighted in the
list, and will be removed from the cell in the table.
Spec codes can be copied and pasted from one cell to another. To copy the contents of
a cell, right-click and select the Copy option from the menu that is then displayed.

To paste into a cell, right-click on the cell and select the Paste option from the menu.

Note: The list of pipe spec codes is set up using the List of Values Configuration Category.

5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each valid combination of spec and bore sizes for the symbol.
6. To populate all cells with every code from the list of spec codes, select the Set as
Default button. Individual codes may then be de-selected if required for each cell, as
described above.
7. To clear every cell in the grid of codes, select the Clear button.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:175 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

- Insertion Options
These settings control what happens when symbols are inserted into pipes with specs and/
or sizes that the symbols are not valid for. These settings are applicable to all symbols that
are subject to this functionality, not just the one selected at the top of the application pane.
• Select the Prevent button if users are to be prevented from inserting a symbol into a
pipe with a spec and/or size that the symbol is not valid for. If this is attempted, an error
message is displayed and the symbol is not placed on the P&ID.
• Select the Warn button if users are to be warned if they insert an invalid symbol. The
insertion of the symbol is permitted in this case, but an error message will be displayed
on the P&ID, and will accompany the symbol when transferred to VPE Workbench.
Invalid symbols are displayed on the P&ID in a specific colour (see below)
• If the specs and sizes of pipes are to be ignored when inserting symbols, select Ignore
button.
The Out of Spec Symbol Warning Colour at P&ID field is used to specify the colour of
symbols that are not valid for the spec and/or size of the pipe that they are inserted into (see
the Warn option above).
To select a colour, press the green button next to the field. On selection of the button, the
colour selection dialog box is displayed:

The Colour Code can be selected by selection of one of the colours shown in the palette, or
by manually entering the Colour Code field.
Following selection, press OK. The selected colour code will then be displayed in the grid.

- PDMS Cats and Specs Import

Valid specs and sizes can be imported from a PDMS project.
In the Paragon Module of PDMS, a report must be run on the specifications in question (see
Spec Driven Data Import from PDMS - PML Function and Report).
The contents of this report can then be imported into the project settings of an AVEVA P&ID
project.
1. Press the green button next to the Spec Report Location field, and browse for the
PDMS report. By default, the report will be called spco.report and will be located in the
c:/temp folder.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:176 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

2. Check the Use Report to Populate Specification List of Values checkbox.

3. Press the Import Spec Report to Database button.
4. The import then takes place. The grid in the Symbols pane is then automatically
populated with valid symbol spec and size data from the PDMS project. Existing
settings are replaced.

• Spec Driven Data Import from PDMS - PML Function and Report
A PML function can be adapted by a customer to filter the Specification data. The order in
which the data is listed must as described below as the code to import the data into P&ID
relies on this. The correct order is:
Specification Name, Symbol Name, Catalogue Reference, Bore
1, gtype, bore2
These must be delimited by a one space character. The PML for this is:
!temp = !spec & ' ' & !name & ' ' & !catref & ' ' & !bore
& ' ' &!gtype & ' ' & !bore2
Where ‘!temp’ is a temporary string.
AVEVA P&ID will display the report correctly only if the names from the report (from PDMS)
correspond to the symbol names configured at the P&ID Project Administrator. Verify that
the report is correctly imported by revising the P&ID project database at the Project Projmet
folder, e.g.:
C:\AVEVA\P&ID\Project\IPE\Autocad\Projmet\IPE.mdb
Below is a sample PML function report:
/A1A /A1A/RE500x400:500_400 /AARE2001Y 500 REDU 400
/A1A /A1A/XER:500_400 /XAARE2001Y 500 REDU 400
/A1A /A1A/RC500x450:500_450 /AARC2001Z 500 REDU 450
/A1A /A1A/RE500x450:500_450 /AARE2001Z 500 REDU 450
/A1A /A1A/XER:500_450 /XAARE2001Z 500 REDU 450
/A1A /A1A/RC600x400:600_400 /AARC2003Y 600 REDU 400
/A1A /A1A/RE600x400:600_400 /AARE2003Y 600 REDU 400
/A1A /A1A/XER:600_400 /XAARE2003Y 600 REDU 400
/A1A /A1A/RC600x450:600_450 /AARC2003Z 600 REDU 450
/A1A /A1A/RE600x450:600_450 /AARE2003Z 600 REDU 450
/A1A /A1A/XER:600_450 /XAARE2003Z 600 REDU 450
/A1A /A1A/RC600x500:600_500 /AARC20031 600 REDU 500
/A1A /A1A/RE600x500:600_500 /AARE20031 600 REDU 500
/A1A /A1A/XER:600_500 /XAARE20031 600 REDU 500
/A1A /A1A/RE600x550:600_550 /AARE20032 600 REDU 550
/A1A /A1A/XER:600_550 /XAARE20032 600 REDU 550
/A1A /A1A/KT15 /A0KD330D0 15 CAP 0
/A1A /A1A/KD15 /A0KD530D0 15 CAP 0

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:177 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

/A1A /A1A/KT20 /A0KD330E0 20 CAP 0

/A1A /A1A/KD20 /A0KD530E0 20 CAP 0
/A1A /A1A/KC65 /AAKC200K0 65 CAP 51
/A1A /A1A/KC80 /AAKC200L0 80 CAP 64
/A1A /A1A/KC100 /AAKC200N0 100 CAP 76
/A1A /A1A/KC150 /AAKC200R0 150 CAP 102
/A1A /A1A/KC200 /AAKC200T0 200 CAP 127
/A1A /A1A/KC250 /AAKC200V0 250 CAP 152
/A1A /A1A/KC300 /AAKC200W0 300 CAP 178
/A1A /A1A/KD25 /A0KD330F0 25 CAP 0
/A1A /A1A/KD40 /A0KD330H0 40 CAP 0
/A1A /A1A/KD50 /A0KD330J0 50 CAP 0
/A1A /A1A/KM15 /ABKM600D0 15 PCOM 0
/A1A /A1A/KM20 /ABKM600E0 20 PCOM 0
/A1A /A1A/VG15 /A0VG3X0DD 15 VALV 45
/A1A /A1A/VH15 /A0VH3X0DD 15 VALV 33
/A1A /A1A/VC15 /A0VC3X0DD 15 VALV 60
/A1A /A1A/GA-1117:15 /VGVG5XRDD 15 VALV 21
/A1A /A1A/GL-1132:15 /VGVH5XRDD 15 VALV 28
/A1A /A1A/CK-1429:15 /A0VJ5X0DD 15 VALV 26
/A1A /A1A/VG20 /A0VG3X0EE 20 VALV 56
/A1A /A1A/VH20 /A0VH3X0EE 20 VALV 38
/A1A /A1A/VC20 /A0VC3X0EE 20 VALV 64
In the generated report care must be taken to remove (if apply) the preceding “/” from the
symbol names. The names must correspond to the P&ID Project Administrator symbol
names. Please note these values can be also changed at project SQL database.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:178 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

• Add/Edit Specs Sub-Category

The Add/Edit Specs sub-category is used to create specifications which are groups of piping
specification codes links to an item type or an item group (Instrument Valves, Reducers or
Valves).
Specific symbols within the item type or item group can then be assigned to the specification
using the Assign Specs Sub-Category.
To create a specification:
1. Select the Create Specification Template button. The Add Specifications dialog is then
displayed:

2. If the specification is to be for an item type, select the Item Type button. If it is to be for
an item group, select the Item Group button.
3. Enter the name of the specification in the Spec Name field.
4. From the list in Item Type field, select the item type of item group that the specification
is for.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:179 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

5. Click OK to save the spec.

6. The dialog remains open so that further specs can be created if required, as described
in steps 2 to 5. Click Done to close the dialog.
7. From the bore sizes grid, select the inlet and outlet size by clicking on the cell at the
intersection of these values. Then, from list of pipe spec codes, select the code or
codes. See the description of the Symbols Sub-Category for details.
8. Select the Save button to save the specification. Specific symbols can now be assigned
to the specification using the Assign Specs Sub-Category.
To edit an existing specification, select the specification from the list available from the
Select Specifications field and then edit the bore sizes/pipe spec codes as required.

To delete a specification, open it as described above, then select the Delete button.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:180 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

• Assign Specs Sub-Category

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:181 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

The Assign Specs sub-category is used to assign symbols to specifications created using
the Add/Edit Specs sub-category.
To edit an existing specification, select the specification from the list available from the
Select Specification Template field and then edit the bore sizes/pipe spec codes as required.
The grid beneath the Spec Name field then displays the valid bore size/pipe specification
associations set using the Add/Edit Specs sub-category. They cannot be edited here.

- Assigning Symbols to Specifications

The grid beneath the bore size/pipe specification associations grid displays all the symbols
of the item type or item group of the specification. The name and description of each symbol
is listed. To assign a symbol to the spec, check its Select checkbox.
To assign all the listed symbols, check the Select All Symbols checkbox. The Select
checkbox for every symbol is then checked.
When all the required symbols have been selected, select the Assign button to complete the
procedure.

- Insertion Options
The Spec Driven Symbols and Out of Spec Symbol Warning Colour at P&ID controls are
used to control what happens when symbols are inserted into pipes with specs and/or sizes
that the symbols is not valid for. These settings are applicable to all symbols that are subject
to this functionality.
See the description of the Symbols Sub-Category for details.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:182 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

2.3.24 User Defined Attributes Configuration Category

The User Defined Configuration Category is divided into two sub-categories:

• UDA List of Values Sub-Category
• DataSet Sub-Category
Each sub-category is concerned with one of the two types of User Defined Attributes
(UDAs) that may be used in AVEVA P&ID:
• Attributes added to symbols and pipes using the standard AutoCAD Attribute Definition
dialog, accessed from the Symbol Editor. Lists of valid values for these attributes can
then be selected using the UDA List of Values sub-category.
• DataSet UDAs are groups of attributes that are set up for types of items or symbols that
meet user-defined criteria. They are defined using the DataSet sub-category.

• UDA List of Values Sub-Category

The UDA List of Values application pane is divided into two sections.
The upper section is used to scan the symbols in the projects for UDAs. These are then
listed in the lower section, which is used to select which lists of values are to be used when
entering values for these UDAs on project drawings.
To scan for UDAs, check the Project Symbol Path and/or the Standard Symbol Path
checkboxes to specify which project symbol directories are to be scanned. Select the Scan
button.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:183 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

All detected UDAs are then displayed in the lower section of the pane (all UDAs previously
scanned by the Project Administrator will already be listed).
To specify a list of values, select it from the list in the appropriate LOV Name field. The
default selection is <NONE>, i.e. no list of values is selected.

Lists of values are set up on the List of Values Configuration Category of the Administration
program.

• DataSet Sub-Category

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:184 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

- Creating a DataSet
1. To create a new DataSet, select the Create New DataSet button. The Add New
DataSet dialog is then displayed.

2. Enter the name of the new DataSet in the DataSet Name field.
3. The Criteria section is used to define the criteria that will specify which item the
DataSet will be applied to. For example, for a particular type of equipment, or for
equipment in general.
From the Item Type list, specify whether or not the criterion will be applied to an item
class name, item group or symbol name.

4. From the Criteria list, select the required operator, e.g. equal to (=) etc,

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:185 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

5. From the Item Value list, select the required class name, item group or symbol name.

6. The Condition list is used if multiple criteria are to be used. Select AND to specify that
the DataSet is to be applied to items that meet both criteria.
7. When the required settings for the first criterion have been defined, select the Add
button. The details of the criterion are then displayed in the lower of the dialog.

8. If another criterion is to be defined, change the settings in the Criteria fields as required
and select the Add button again. The second criterion is then added to the list of
criteria.
In this example, the DataSet will be applied to all items that are in either the Equipment
or Instrument item groups.

9. To delete a criterion, select it from the list and press the Delete button.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:186 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

10. When all required criteria have been defined, select the Save button to save changes
and close the dialog. The DataSet name and criterion are displayed in the DataSet List
and Criterion fields on the DataSet Sub-Category pane.
To close the dialog without saving any changes, select the Cancel button.

- Defining DataSet Attributes

To define the attribute or attributes that comprise a DataSet, first select the DataSet from the
DataSet List field. The item selection criteria of the DataSet (see above) are then displayed
in the Criterion field.
1. Attributes are defined and displayed in the grid in the lower part of the DataSet Sub-
Category pane. To add an attribute, select this button from the toolbar above the grid:

.
The Add New Attribute dialog is then displayed.

2. In the Attribute Name field, enter the name of the attribute. This name will be the title of
the field used to enter the value for the attribute on the Properties dialogs of items that
meet the DataSet criteria.
3. From the Data Type list field, select the required type from long, double or string.
4. If the attribute is to constructed from other dataset attributes, a “Tag Expression”, check
the Use Tag Expression checkbox.
Note: If the Use Tag Expression checkbox is checked, the Attribute-Units Pair checkbox
and associated fields are disabled. If the Attribute-Units Pair checkbox is checked
the Use Tag Expression checkbox and associated button are disabled.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:187 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

5. Press the Set Tag Expression button. The Select a Tag Format dialog is then displayed:

6. The other attributes in the dataset are listed in the Available Data Properties field. To
add an attribute to the tag expression, select it from the list and press Insert Property.
The attribute is then displayed in the Tag Expression field.
Repeat as required to construct the tag expression.
Press Clear to clear the Tag Expression field.
7. When the tag expression has been constructed, press the Ok button to close the Select
a Tag Format dialog.
8. If the values for this attribute are to be selected from a list of values, select this list from
the LOV field. Lists of values are set up on the List of Values Configuration Category of
the Administration program.
9. If the Properties dialog field for the attribute is to be automatically completed with a
default value from the select list of values, select it from the Default Value field list.
10. If the attribute is to have a unit of measure, check the Attribute-Units Pair checkbox.
From the list in the Units LOVs, select the list of values from which the unit of measure
is to be selected.
From the Units Default list, select the unit itself.
11. Select the Save button to save changes and close the Add New Attribute dialog. The
attribute details are then displayed in the grid.
12. To close the dialog without saving any changes, select the Cancel button.
Repeat the above procedure for each attribute required for the DataSet.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:188 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

- Null Characters in Tag Expressions

If, where the attribute values that tag expressions are constructed from are unavailable,
such missing values are to be replaced on drawings by the project label null character (see
2.3.8: Label Types Configuration Category), check the Use Null Label Character in Tag
Expression checkbox.
If such values are to be left blank, the checkbox should be unchecked.

- Editing and Deleting DataSets

To edit or delete a DataSet, select the DataSet from the DataSet List field. The item
selection criteria of the DataSet (see above) are then displayed in the Criterion field.
To edit the DataSet, select the Edit Criterion button. The Edit DataSet Criterion dialog is then
displayed with the existing properties of the DataSet displayed. Edit them as required as
described above.
Attribute names cannot be edited. The attribute row must be deleted and re-entered with a
new name.
To delete the DataSet, select the Delete DataSet button.

- Defining Valve Tag Properties for Automatic Valve Tagging

If valves are to be tagged automatically (see 6.10.25: Automatic Tagging), the format of
valve tags is defined on the Automatic Tag Format Sub-Category of the Valves
Configuration Category. The list of valve properties that are available for selection when
defining this format are taken from a DataSet which must be set up for this purpose, as
follows:
• The DataSet name must be "VALVES" (not “Valves” or “valves)
• The DataSet criteria must be "Item_Group = Valve"
• Attributes may then be defined as required
For example:

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:189 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

The DataSet may be set up from the Automatic Tag Format Sub-Category of the Valves
Configuration Category, in which case the above properties (name and criteria) are set
automatically.
Note that if the DataSet is not set up, or no attributes are defined for it, automatic valve
tagging may still be used, but the valve tags cannot include any of the attributes of the
valves.

- Defining the Pipe Groups DataSet

If pipes are to be allocated to groups for reporting purposes, the names and optionally the
default values associated with these groups must be specified in a DataSet.
The DataSet must be defined as follows:
• The DataSet name must be "PIPE_GROUPS"
• The DataSet criteria must be "Item_Group = Pipes"
Specify the name of each pipe group in the Attribute Name fields. If required, enter the
default user-defined attribute to be assigned to each pipe group in the Default_Value fields.
For example:

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:190 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

2.3.25 User Access Configuration Category

The User Access Configuration Category consists of the User Access Settings sub-
category:

The sub-category is used to change the password required to access the Administration
program if the Login as Administrator with password (SQL Server Security) option is
selected in the Project Database Configuration Category.
In the Password field enter the current password.

Note: The default password is "Admin".

In the Enter New Password field enter the new password.

In the Confirm New Password field enter the new password again.
Select the Change button to implement the new password.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:191 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

2.3.26 PDMS Integration Configuration Category

The PDMS Integration Configuration Category is configured using the main PDMS
Integration Category pane and the Schematics and Engineering sub-categories:
• PDMS Integration Category Pane
• Schematics Sub-Category
• Engineering Sub-Category

• PDMS Integration Category Pane

Select the location of PDMS installation that the AVEVA P&ID project is to interface with in
the PDMS Version (Installation Location) field.

Note: The earliest version of PDMS that AVEVA P&ID can interface with is 12.0.SP5.

• Schematics Sub-Category

If the AVEVA Schematic Database node is not to be displayed in the P&ID Data Grid, check
the Hide Schematic Database Node in P&ID checkbox.
The Project Name and Database Name field are used to specify the default entries for the
Project and MDB fields in the PDMS Login dialog.

Note: Configuration is also required in PDMS Schematics to set up the interface between
AVEVA P&ID and PDMS Schematics. See 10.9: Setting up PDMS Schematics to
Connect with P&ID for details.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:192 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

• Engineering Sub-Category

If the AVEVA Engineering Database node is not to be displayed in the P&ID Data Grid,
check the Hide Engineering Node in P&ID checkbox.
The Project Name and Database Name field are used to specify the default entries for the
Project and MDB fields in the PDMS Login dialog.

Note: Configuration is also required in AVEVA Engineering and using the AVEVA Reports
service to set up the interface between AVEVA P&ID and AVEVA Engineering. See
10.10: Setting up AVEVA P&ID to Connect with AVEVA Engineering and 10.11:
Integration with AVEVA Engineering: Setup and Import Procedures in AVEVA
Engineering for details.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:193 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

2.3.27 AI Integration Configuration Category

The AI Integration Configuration Category is used to specify settings for the integration of
AVEVA P&ID and AVEVA Instrumentation. It consists of the AI Settings sub-category:

If the AVEVA Instrumentation node is not to be displayed in the P&ID Data Grid, check the
Hide AI Node in P&ID checkbox.
In the Derive Instrument AREA from field, if required, select the AVEVA P&ID Instrument tag
field which will be populated with the Area values of instruments imported from AVEVA
Instrumentation (AI).
In the Derive Loop AREA from field, if required, select the AVEVA P&ID Loop tag field which
will be populated with the Area values of loops imported from AVEVA Instrumentation (AI).

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:194 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

2.3.28 AVEVA NET Configuration Category

The AVEVA NET Configuration Category is divided into four sub-categories:

• Configurations Sub-Category
• Mappings Sub-Category
• Setting Sub-Category
• Advanced Options Sub-Category

• Configurations Sub-Category

The Settings sub-category is used to specify general settings for the AVEVA NET interface,
relating to the format of the files generated by the export from AVEVA P&ID.
For detailed information, refer to the AVEVA NET Schematic Gateway Configuration Guide.

• Mappings Sub-Category

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:195 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

The mappings between AVEVA P&ID format data and AVEVA NET Portal format data are
stored in sets of three XML files, one for each of the following types of mapping:
• Presentation Mapping
• Attribute Mapping
• Class Mapping
This sub-category is used to select the mapping files to be used.
For detailed information, refer to the AVEVA NET Schematic Gateway Configuration Guide.

• Setting Sub-Category

The Settings sub-category is used to specify general settings for the AVEVA NET interface,
relating to the format of the files generated by the export from AVEVA P&ID.
For detailed information, refer to the AVEVA NET Schematic Gateway Configuration Guide.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:196 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

• Advanced Options Sub-Category

The Advanced sub-category is used is to export data to a remote location, and to export
data from multiple project drawings.

- AVEVA NET Service Section

Drawing data already generated by an AVEVA NET export may be transferred to a remote
location, for example a shared network folder, using an AVEVA NET server service.
If this facility is to be used, check the Transfer files to Remote AVEVA NET Server
checkbox.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:197 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

In the AVEVA NET Service Path field, enter the location of the AVEVA NET server service.
Select the Test button to test that the location of a functional service has been entered. If so,
message is displayed to confirm this:

In the Remote Server Publishing Location field, enter the remote folder into which output
files are to be copied.
Select the Transfer button to copy all the files currently in the local staging area (as specified
on the Configurations sub-category) to the remote location. A message is displayed once
the transfer is complete.

- Batch Publish option to AVEVA NET Section

The Project drawings available list displays all those project drawings from which data can
exported.
To select a drawing to export data from, select it and select the > button.
To select multiple drawings to export data from, select them and select the >> button.
To select all available drawings to export data from, select the button with the green arrow
on it.
Selected drawings are moved from the Project drawings available list to the Drawings
selected for publish list.
Use the < and << buttons to de-select single or multiple drawings and move them back to
the Project drawings available list.
Select the button with the red cross button on it to de-select all selected drawings.
When all required drawings have been selected, select the Apply button.
Carry out the export using facilities available in the Log Options section.

- Log Options Section

To generate export files from the drawings selected in the Batch publish option to AVEVA
NET section, select the Start button.
The export then takes place. The progress of the export is indicated by a progress bar.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:198 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

Details of the export or displayed in the log window below it.

To stop the export, select the Stop button.

To clear the log window, select the Clear button.
To view the log in the log file generated as part of the export, select the View Log button.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:199 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

2.3.29 AE Integration Configuration Category

The AE Integration Configuration Category is used to specify settings for the integration of
AVEVA P&ID and AVEVA Electrical. It consists of the AE Settings sub-category:

If the AVEVA Electrical node is not to be displayed in the P&ID Data Grid, check the Hide AE
Node in P&ID checkbox.
In the Derive Equipment AREA from field, if required, select the AVEVA P&ID Equipment tag
field which will be populated with the Area values of equipment imported from AVEVA
Electrical (AE).

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:200 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

2.3.30 Document Manager Configuration Category

The Document Manager Configuration Category is used to specify settings related to the
AVEVA P&ID Document Manager, and to access the Document Manager of It consists of
the Settings sub-category:

Note: Drawing records are only saved to the Document Manager if the Add P&ID Drawing
Details to Database checkbox in the P&ID Reports - Settings Sub-Category of the
AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program is checked.

If, when a drawing is synchronised the minor revision number of the drawing in the
document manager is to be increased, check the Increase Revision number every time the
drawing is synchronised checkbox (the major revision number will remain unchanged
regardless).
If a new revision of a drawing in document manager is to be created when a drawing is
saved, check the Save to database every time a drawing is saved checkbox.
If the revision number of the drawing has been changed (or if the drawing has not been
saved before at the current revision with this checkbox checked), a new major revision will
be created. If not, a new minor revision will be created.
To open the Document Manager, select the Open Document Manager button. Refer to 9:
AVEVA P&ID Document Manager for details.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:201 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

2.4 Changing Units on a Project

If, in mid-project, it is decided that a units change must occur, either from metric to imperial
or vice versa, a change must be made to the labelling units setting in the project
configuration file using the Project Configuration Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project
Administration program.

Note: Changing the project drawing units is not possible.

Set labelling units to metric or imperial on the Project pane of the AVEVA P&ID Project
Administration program. AVEVA P&ID should not be loaded while this file is being edited.
The units on existing drawings will only be converted on reload into AVEVA P&ID.

Note: ONLY the labelling units will change and NOT the physical size of the graphical
symbols.

Note: Changes to drawings resulting from the label units being changed are not
automatically implemented when project drawings are loaded. The user must trigger
these changes "manually" in each drawing after it has loaded. See 8.2.6: Convert
Project Label Units.

If an attempt is made to insert metric symbols into an imperial drawing, they will be inserted
25.4 times bigger than intended due to the 25.4 mm:1" ratio. To correct this it is necessary to
edit the symbol lengths using the Symbols Configuration Category of the AVEVA P&ID
Project Administration program.
In order to carry out these conversions, AVEVA P&ID uses a file located in the validation
directory, named CONV.UNI. An excerpt from this file is shown below:
3 = 1/8"
6 = 1/4"
10 = 3/8"
25.4 = 1" etc
Comment lines to begin with a * character. Sizes shown are in <mm>=<inches>.

2.4.1 Associated Project Configuration Options

• Specify the size of the snap spacing using the Snap Spacing field on the Drawing - Grid
Sub-Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program.
• Specify the size of grid spacing using the Grid Spacing field.
• The drawing and label units used on the project are set using the buttons on the Project
Configuration Category pane. These should not be changed once the project has
begun.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:202 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

2.5 Defining Project Symbols

2.5.1 Creating a New Symbol

Symbols can be drawn and edited using the Symbol Editor.
See Symbol Editor for a description of this facility.
To create a new symbol without using this facility, proceed as follows:
1. If running AVEVA P&ID on a networked setup, ensure that AVEVA P&ID is not in use
anywhere on the network. Without initialising AVEVA P&ID, load an existing AVEVA
P&ID drawing and locate an existing item of similar size and AVEVA P&ID type to the
new symbol. Measure its length and width to get some idea of scale.
2. Using AutoCAD drawing commands, draw the new item at the required size on a new
AVEVA P&ID drawing dialog, again without AVEVA P&ID being initialised. Make the
item into a block, carefully picking an insertion point which is at the centre of a
symmetrical object or at the left hand end of a non-symmetrical one. For angled, 3 way
and 4 way valves, the insertion point should be at the centre, not at the bottom, or the
pipes will not break correctly.
3. There are no restrictions on linestyles, colours or naming conventions during symbol
creation. However, when AVEVA P&ID inserts a symbol, the colours may alter
according to layer/level settings in the project configuration file. Symbols can be
manipulated after insertion, for example, rotated, or mirrored. This reduces the required
number of standard symbols in a library.
4. Ensure that the block is available to all users, i.e., by using WBLOCK in AutoCAD, and
place in the \PMETSYM or \PIMPSYM project symbol directory or import using the
Symbols Configuration Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program.
Enter the properties of the new symbol in the Symbols pane.
5. Attempt to insert the symbol in order to test the new item with AVEVA P&ID now
initialised (see Inserting Symbols - General Information). Check the correct insertion
point has been selected when creating the block and that the graphical creation angle
is correct. If any errors occur, edit the symbol using the Administration program, re-load
the drawing, initialise AVEVA P&ID again and retest.
6. If a metric symbol is inserted into an imperial drawing or an imperial symbol into a
metric drawing, it will be inserted at the wrong scale. To correct this, edit the symbol
length in the Symbols pane.

2.5.2 Upgrading Symbols from Old Projects

For projects developed before AVEVA VPE P&ID 7.2 SP3, an upgrade of the symbols on
the project drawings is required.
Refer to 2.1: Upgrading Pipes and Symbols from old Projects.

2.5.3 Avoiding Problems when using Client Symbology

A client will often specify the symbols which are to be employed when drawing P&IDs for a
project. In these instances, the standard symbol library may not be acceptable. The
following points should be addressed situation:
• Check to see if an AVEVA P&ID symbol library, together with its AVEVA P&ID file,
exists for the client elsewhere. This library can then be used without having to set up a
completely new set of symbols, and therefore can save time and effort.
• If an AVEVA P&ID symbol library does not exist for the client, the client may still have
their symbols in AutoCAD drawings as blocks. These can then converted to symbols

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:203 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

using one of several utilities available for this purpose. These utilities are obtainable by
calling AVEVA P&ID Technical Support. Their functionality is detailed in the Symbol
Utility Programs section. AutoCAD block colours should be set to BYBLOCK prior to
them becoming AVEVA P&ID symbols.
• If the client symbols exist only on paper or in an untranslatable graphics format, they
will have to be redrawn in AutoCAD.

2.5.4 Symbol Utility Programs

The following AutoLISP programs described below:
• CLEANATT.LSP
• CREATSYM.LSP
• REMATTS.LSP
However, they have not been issued as part of the AVEVA P&ID installation kit. To request
installation contact AVEVA P&ID Technical Support.

• CLEANATT.LSP
Used to remove all existing attribute values from all blocks on an existing AutoCAD drawing.
Attributes must be removed from blocks before they are converted to symbols. This utility
may be needed from time to time to remove client attributes before relabelling using AVEVA
P&ID. The blocks remain intact and a prompt is still received for new attribute values if new
insertions are performed.

- Syntax:
Enter: CLEANATT
This will remove all attribute values.
The Command prompt will display:

Are you sure <Y/N>:

Enter Y
A regeneration is performed and the command ends.

• CREATSYM.LSP
Project symbol data is stored in the PID.SYM file. This utility is used to append information
from existing AutoCAD blocks to an existing AVEVA P&ID PID.SYM file or to create a new
correctly formatted PID.SYM.

- Syntax:
Enter: CS
The first block highlights and is panned to the centre of the screen.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:204 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

The Command prompt will display:

Add symbol to sym file Y/N:

If N is entered, the next symbol is highlighted and panned to the centre of the screen.
If the symbol is already in the PID.SYM file, it will be missed out automatically.
Enter Y for Yes.
The prompt will then display

AVEVA P&ID type e.g. VLV:

Enter a valid item type.

The Command prompt will then display:

Does symbol break pipe Y/N:

Enter Y for Yes.

The Command prompt will then display:

Symbol size - 1st point:

Pick 2 points to show the width of the symbol.

The Command prompt will then display:

2nd point: Offset point:

The insertion point is found by AVEVA P&ID - pick one of the width points.
The Command prompt will then display:

How many insert points 1/2:

Enter 1 or 2.
The Command prompt will then display:
Creation angle <0.0>:
Enter angle.
The Command prompt will then display:

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:205 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

Graphical Tracing <Y>/N:

Enter Y.
The Command prompt will then display:

Tracewidth point:

Pick a point above the object where tracing should be placed.

The Command prompt will then display:

Description:

Enter Test Valve.

The command then moves onto the next block.

• REMATTS.LSP
Used to explode existing AutoCAD blocks, remove all attributes completely and remake the
block under the same name.

- Syntax:
Enter: REMATTS
The Command prompt will display.

Select object:

Pick existing block.

The command finishes.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:206 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

2.6 Defining a New Pipe Style

Pipe styles can be created and edited by selecting the Pipe Styles option on the List of
Values Configuration Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program.

2.7 Defining a New Signal Line Type

Simple signal line styles can be created and edited using the Signal Styles Configuration
Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program.
More complex line styles can be created using the following procedure.
This procedure is based on the AutoCAD functionality for defining complex Line Styles. For
more information please see the AutoDesk website:
http://usa.autodesk.com/adsk/servlet/item?siteID=123112&id=2671814&linkID=9240615
1. The first step is to open a project drawing and draw the shape that is going to be used
in the new line type (by using AutoCAD geometries: circles, lines, arcs, etc.). For
instance:

2. Next, use the “MKSHAPE” command to convert the geometry into a Shape object. The
application will ask for the location to save the file. Specify the Bin directory at:
C:\...........\Aveva\P&ID\Install\AutoCad\Bin

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:207 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

Type the name of the file, in this example “Twocir”, and click Save:

At the command prompt, the application will ask for the name of the shape and other
parameters:
• “Enter the name of the Shape: TCI” - (e.g. “TCI”).
• “Enter resolution <128>:” - “Enter” to select the default option.
• “Specify the insertion point:” - select at the screen the insertion point, for
instance the west quadrant of the circle.
• “Select Objects:” - select the circle and the line and press “Enter”.
The command prompt will display “Shape "TCI" created. Use the SHAPE
command to place shapes in your drawing".
3. The next step is to insert the previously defined shape in the drawing area by using the
SHAPE command. After the command is entered the application will display:
“Enter Shape name or [?]” - in this case enter TCI. Press “Enter”.
“Insertion point” - select any point in the drawing area.
”Specify height <1.0000>” - press “Enter” to use the default value.
“Specify rotation angle <0>:” - press “Enter” to use the default value.
4. Once the Shape is inserted into the drawing area, the next step is to use the command
“MKLTYPE” to define the parameters of the line type in a “.lin file”. In this case save the
.lin file at the “Projmet” folder at (in this example under the IPE project):
C:\........\Aveva\P&ID\Project\IPE\Autocad\Projmet

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:208 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

For example:

The command prompt will then display:

• “Enter linetype name: LTN” - e.g. LTN.
• “Enter Linetype description: Circle and Line” - e.g. Circle and Line.
• “Specify starting point for line definition:” - e.g. at the screen left
end, west quadrant of the circle.
• “Specify ending point for line definition:” - e.g. select any point
near to the right end point of the line. For example:

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:209 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

• "Select Objects:” -select the previously inserted shape and press Enter.
The command prompt will the display “Linetype "LTN" created and
loaded".
5. Delete from the drawing area the previously inserted geometries and shape and save
and close the P&ID application.
6. The Style Lines used by each project are defined in the “acad.lin” file at:
C:\Aveva\P&ID\Project\IPE\Autocad\Projmet
For example:

Next, open the next “.lin” files located at the “Projmet” folder by using Notepad:
• “acad.lin”
• “TST.lin” previously defined
Copy (Ctrl-C) all the lines from the “TST.lin”:

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:210 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

Paste them at the end of the “acad.lin” file:

Save the “acad.lin” file and close it.

7. The next step is to configure the new Signal Style using the Project Administrator. In
the Signal sub-category of the Item Types Configuration Category (see Signal Sub-
Category), create a new Signal Type by selecting the “insert row” button.

Then define:
• The name of the new Signal Type, in this case “STS”
• The Drawing layer: for instance “AS_INST”
• The colour: for instance “2”
• Description: for instance “Signal Line (demo)”.
Save the Project Administrator.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:211 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

8. The next step is to define the Signal Style using the Signal Styles Configuration
Category. Insert a new Signal Style by using the “Insert row" button and enter the signal
name, for instance “CIRDEMO”:

9. The next step is to define the parameters of the new Signal Style:
• In the “P&ID type” field, select the previously configured STS Signal Type
• In the “Line Type” field select the previously configured LTN Line Type
• Finally, in the “Signal Type” field enter the name displayed in the “Signal Styles”
dropdown menu in the P&ID application, for instance “DEMO”. See below:

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:212 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

10. Finally save the Project Administrator, open the P&ID application and test the new
Signal Style in a drawing. It will be available for selection from the list of signal styles in
the Signal Line Group of the Home Tab.

2.8 Defining a New Tracing Style

Tracing styles can be created and edited using the Tracing Configuration Category of the
AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program.

2.9 Customisation Guide

2.9.1 Introduction
The graphical user interface in AVEVA P&ID is fully customisable. Users can alter the
toolbars, right click menus, pull down menus and add start up routines to suit their project
needs.
• Start-up Routines
• Explorers
• Right Click Menus
• Toolbars
• Menus
• Adding Custom Lisp Routines to AVEVA P&ID
• Adding new multi line styles in AVEVA P&ID
• Running AVEVA P&ID in "Save To Model Mode"
• Auto Save Settings
• Project Profiles
• Complex Linetypes
See also:
• 2.10: Customising the AVEVA P&ID Tool Palette

2.9.2 Start-up Routines

Taking advantage of the AutoCAD VBA interface, AVEVA P&ID automatically loads a VBA
routine called "UserStartUp" located in the Users module.
By altering the start up routine users can easily modify toolbars and menus, and control
whether the Engineering Explorer loads automatically or not. To access this routine, after
AVEVA P&ID has been loaded, type VBAIDE at the command prompt.
In the VBA editor go to the VBA project explorer and double click the module Users" and
select "UserStartUp".
Note that when a project is upgraded, by default, the users.dvb module is overwritten.
However, the upgrade wizard includes an option to preserve it.
Listed below is an example of the start up routine:
Public Sub UserStartUp()
'' This macro will start up automatically with the application.
'' WARNING: Any routine placed here will be run every time a drawing loads...

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:213 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

Dim UsersClass As UserUtils

Dim BatchFile As String
Dim defdir As String
Dim SaveToModelFlag As Boolean
Dim UserPreferences As AcadPreferencesUser
Dim USerName As String
Dim Password As String
Dim Connection As String
Dim PlotfileName As String
Dim ErrorMode As Boolean
Dim FreezeNonPlotLayer As Boolean
Dim PrinterName As String
Dim f As Long
Dim Utils As Object
Dim AutoSave As String
Dim AutoSaveFlag As String

On Error Resume Next

' Get an instance of Public Class UserUtils
Set UsersClass = New UserUtils
' Set User preferences for right click menu, disable AutoCAD short cut menus...
Set UserPreferences = ThisDrawing.Application.Preferences.User
UserPreferences.ShortCutMenuDisplay = False
' Get ruth of Project directory using Directive DATDIR
defdir = UsersClass.GetDefaultDirectory
' Find out if there is a savetoModel bath file to run in batch mode...
If Right(defdir, 1) = "\" Then
BatchFile = defdir & "SaveToModel.Bat"
PlotFile = defdir & "PidPlot.Bat"
BatchConfig = defdir & "pidplot.txt"
Else
BatchFile = defdir & "\SaveToModel.Bat"
PlotFile = defdir & "\PidPlot.Bat"
BatchConfig = defdir & "\pidplot.txt"
End If
If UsersClass.FileExists(PlotFile) Then
'' User must set default values here...
PlotfileName = ""
PrinterName = ""
NumberOfCopies = 1

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:214 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

ErrorMode = False
FreezeNonPlotLayer = True
'' PlotConfig = defdir & "HP LaserJet 5Si.pc3"
PlotConfig = ""
BatchPlot.Show
If Len(PlotConfig) > 3 And InStr(UCase(PlotConfig), "PC3") <> 0 Then
UsersClass.PlotActiveDrawing PlotfileName, PlotConfig, NumberOfCopies,
ErrorMode, FreezeNonPlotLayer, PlotPrinter
Set UsersClass = Nothing
Application.ActiveDocument.Close False
Application.Quit
Exit Sub
End If
End If
'' If save To Model Batch File exist then
'' Application will run in Save To Model Mode....
If UsersClass.FileExists(BatchFile) Then
' Save To Model -- SAVE TO DB SET TO: TRUE
' Create Output Files Only SET TO FALSE
SaveToModelFlag = False
'' USERNAME, PASSWORD AND CONNECTION STRING MUST BE SET
HERE
If SaveToModelFlag Then
USerName = "SPROC"
Password = "SPROC"
Connection = "vpe53dev1"
End If
UsersClass.SaveToModelInBatchMode USerName, Password, Connection,
SaveToModelFlag
Else
''Enable Right Click menu -- Default
UsersClass.EnableRightClickMenu
'' Load Explorer
Application.ActiveDocument.SendCommand "ASEXPLORER" & vbCr
DoEvents
'' Delete VPE P&ID 2nd Toolbar Row
''Application.ActiveDocument.SendCommand "ASDELTOOLBARS" & vbCr
''DoEvents
'' LOADS VPE P&ID 2nd Toolbar Row
''Application.ActiveDocument.SendCommand "ASLOADTOOLBARS" & vbCr
''DoEvents

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:215 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

'' Modify Toolbars ans rearreange P&ID Menus

'' UsersClass.ModStandardTBar
'' Modify Standard menus
''UsersClass.ModStandardMenu
' Set Right Click Menu Status...
'' Disable Rigth click Menu
''UsersClass.DisableRightClickMenu
'' Set return Key to Right Click Menu
''UsersClass.SetRightClickToReturnKey
'' Audit and fix errors in drawing as they are loaded...
''UsersClass.AuditActiveDrawing
'' Validate all pipes mark as invalid (RED) in the explorer
'' Could take a long time in "heavy" drawings...
''UsersClass.ValidateAllPipes
'' Set Drawing LImits to match Project setting for Drawing Length and Height
UsersClass.SetDrawingLimits
'' Set AutoSaveIntervals from project settings
UsersClass.SetProjectAutoSaveTimeSettings
End If

2.9.3 Explorers
The following options are available for the Project and Symbol Explorers:
1. Do not display Engineering Explorer on start up
Remove or "comment out" (i.e. add a quotation mark at the start of the line) the
following line from the "UserStartUp" routine.
Application.ActiveDocument.SendCommand "ASEXPLORER" & vbCr
Whether or not the Symbol Explorer is displayed on start up is controlled at project
level.
2. Display Project and Symbol Explorers in Floating Mode on start up
If the default display mode of the Explorers is to be floating, proceed as above, but then
"comment in" (i.e. remove the quotation mark) from the following line:
Application.ActiveDocument.SendCommand "ASEXPLORERFLOAT" & vbCr
3. Display Project and Symbol Explorers in Docking Mode on start up
If the default display mode of the Explorers is to be docking, no changes are required.
Note that the above only apply the first time a user starts a project session.
Subsequently, the Explorers are automatically displayed in the position and mode they
were in at the end of the user's previous session.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:216 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

2.9.4 Right Click Menus

The following options are available for right click menus:
1. Disable AVEVA P&ID default right click menus
To disable AVEVA P&ID default right click menu, just "comment in" in the following line
from the "UserStartUp" routine.
"UsersClass.DisableRightClickMenu
When the AVEVA P&ID right click menu is disabled the standard AutoCAD right click
behaviour will be active instead.
2. Set Right click button to return key
To the right click button press in AVEVA P&ID to act as the return key just comment in
the following line from the "UserStartUp" routine.
"UsersClass.SetRightClickToReturnKey
3. Enable right click menu (default)
No changes required.
To customise right click menus programmatically, use the "BeginRightClick" event of the
"AcadDocument" object.
Private Sub AcadDocument_BeginRightClick(ByVal PickPoint As Variant)
‘ Write your mouse right click event here….
End Sub
See the AutoCAD customisation guide for more details on customising right click menus.

2.9.5 Toolbars
The "ModStandardTBar" method of the "UserUtils" class in the "UserStartUp" routine
controls the display of the toolbars first loaded when AVEVA P&ID is opened.
It is possible to modify standard behaviour of toolbars during the loading process by altering
this method.
Commenting out this method will allow users to control toolbars by editing the menu files
(PID.MNU, ACAD.MNU).
See the AutoCAD customisation guide for more details on customising MNU files.

Note: The second toolbar is critical to the application and therefore can not be altered or
disabled by users.

2.9.6 Menus
The "ModStandardMenu" method of the "UserUtils" class controls the display of the pull
down menus loaded by the application.
It is possible to modify standard behaviour of pull down menus during the loading process
by altering this method.
Commenting out this method will allow users to control pull down menus from the menu files
(PID.MNU, ACAD.MNU).
See the AutoCAD customisation guide for more details on customising MNU files.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:217 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

2.9.7 Adding Custom Lisp Routines to AVEVA P&ID

Lisp routines can be added to "acaddoc.lsp" located at the Bin folder of the standard
installation.
Below is an example of a lisp routine supplied with version 6.1.0.16 that creates the
command "ai_selall" which selects every entity in the active drawing.
;;;----------------------------------------------------------------------------
; New "Select All" function. Cannot be called transparently.
(defun c:ai_selall ( / ss old_error a b old_cmd old_hlt)
(setq a "CMDECHO" b "HIGHLIGHT"
old_cmd (getvar a) old_hlt (getvar b)
old_error *error* *error* ai_error)
(if (ai_notrans)
(progn
(princ "Selecting objects...")
(setvar a 0)
(setvar b 0)
(command "_.SELECT" "_ALL" "") ; Create Previous SS
(setvar a old_cmd)
(setvar b old_hlt)
(setq ss (ssget "_P"))
(sssetfirst ss ss) ; Non-gripped, but selected (someday!)
(princ "done.\n")
)
)
(setq *error* old_error old_error nil ss nil)
(princ)
)
Some sample lisp programs are supplied in the BIN folder of the standard installation.

Warning: Lisp routines that modify intelligent entities in AVEVA P&ID drawings could
potentially corrupt entities and drawings as a consequence.

2.9.8 Adding new multi line styles in AVEVA P&ID

Multi line styles are stored in a file called PID.MLN. A copy of this file is supplied with AVEVA
P&ID which includes a number of default multi lines styles. This file loads automatically
when AVEVA P&ID is loaded.
To provide a set of specific multi-lines styles for a project you must add a new path to the
Support File Search Path A copy of this file must be placed at this location.
To achieve this, use command preferences and access the "Support File Search Path" node
of the "Files" tab.
The path priority is set from top to bottom.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:218 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

Below there is a sample of a multi-line style set in the PID.MLN supplied with version
6.1.0.16.
MLSTYLE
2
MULTI-MAIN
70
0
3

62
6
51
90.00000000000000
52
90.00000000000000
71
2
49
1.5000000000000000
62
6
6
BYLAYER
49
-1.5000000000000000
62
6
6
BYLAYER
0
See the AutoCAD customisation guide for more details on creating new multi line styles.
See also AVEVA P&ID Files - PID.MLN.

2.9.9 Running AVEVA P&ID in "Save To Model Mode"

In order to run Save to Model (see 8.8.6: Synchronising Data with a VPE Workbench
Database) on multiple drawings in a project use the supplied "MakeSaveToModelBatch"
routine.
Before running the routine some editing may be required (see sections in bold below). To
access the routine, type VBAIDE at the command prompt. In the VBA editor go to the VBA
project explorer and double click the "Users" module node, and select
"MakeSaveToModelBatch". Run or edit the routine as required.
The routine can also be edited and run by selecting the Make Synch Batch File option from
the .AVEVA Integration Group of the Data Management Tab.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:219 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

Below is an example of the routine supplied with version 6.1.0.16.

Public Sub MakeSaveToModelBatch()
'' Create Batch File to run SaveToModel in multiple drawings located at one folder....
'' After batch file is created, exit the application and run batch file from command prompt.

Dim AcadLocation As String

Dim AcadProfile As String
Dim AcadConfig As String

'' Please Specify Location of ACAD.EXE in your system

AcadLocation = "C:\Program Files\AutoCAD 2002\acad.exe"
'' Specify Active Configuration file
AcadConfig = "C:\Program Files\AutoCAD 2002\acad2002.cfg"
'' P&ID Profile
AcadProfile = "PID61"

On Error Resume Next

Dim Uclass As UserUtils
Set Uclass = New UserUtils
Uclass.CreateSaveToModelBatchFile AcadLocation, AcadConfig, AcadProfile,
Application.ActiveDocument.FullName
Set Uclass = Nothing

End Sub
Below is an example of the batch file generated by this routine.
CD "C:\Projects\RUYTER"
"C:\Program Files\AutoCAD 2002\acad.exe" /c "C:\Program Files\AutoCAD
2002\acad2002.cfg" "C:\Projects\RUYTER\Flowsheets\SaveToModel\144-000-PR-PID-
0005.dwg" /p PID61
"C:\Program Files\AutoCAD 2002\acad.exe" /c "C:\Program Files\AutoCAD
2002\acad2002.cfg" "C:\Projects\RUYTER\Flowsheets\SaveToModel\144-000-PR-PID-
0011.dwg" /p PID61
"C:\Program Files\AutoCAD 2002\acad.exe" /c "C:\Program Files\AutoCAD
2002\acad2002.cfg" "C:\Projects\RUYTER\Flowsheets\SaveToModel\144-000-PR-PID-
0012.dwg" /p PID61
"C:\Program Files\AutoCAD 2002\acad.exe" /c "C:\Program Files\AutoCAD
2002\acad2002.cfg" "C:\Projects\RUYTER\Flowsheets\SaveToModel\144-000-PR-PID-
0013.dwg" /p PID61
"C:\Program Files\AutoCAD 2002\acad.exe" /c "C:\Program Files\AutoCAD
2002\acad2002.cfg" "C:\Projects\RUYTER\Flowsheets\SaveToModel\144-000-PR-PID-
0014.dwg" /p PID61
DEL "C:\Projects\RUYTER\SaveToModel.Bat"
The first line must point to the root of the project folder where the PID.PRJ (project
catalogue) file is located.
Additional changes must be made to the routine “UserStartUp” to match the project
requirements.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:220 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

To Save the drawing data to a project database the flag “SaveToModelFlag” must be set to
True. Also, the username, password and connection string must be set to match the user
database.
' Save To Model -- SAVE TO DB SET TO: TRUE
' Create Output Files Only SET TO FALSE
SaveToModelFlag = True
'' USERNAME, PASSWORD AND CONNECTION STRING MUST BE SET HERE
If SaveToModelFlag Then
USerName = "SPROC"
Password = "SPROC"
Connection = "vpe53dev1"
End If
Note: After the routine ends the file will be automatically deleted. To ensure AVEVA P&ID
will run in editing mode ensure the file “SaveToModel.Bat” is deleted from the root of
the project folders.

2.9.10 Auto Save Settings

By default, the AutoCAD Auto Save interval for a user, and whether this facility is active, is
derived from the project configuration settings. See the 2.3.21: Miscellaneous Configuration
Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program for details.
In order to override these project settings for an individual user, the following code in the
“UserUtils” macro can be edited: The macro is accessible from Users” module of the VBA
editor as described above.
Public Function SetProjectAutoSaveTimeSettings()

'' Set Autosave intervals according to value set in the project

Dim Value As String

Dim AutoSaveFlag As String
Dim SaveIntervals As String
Dim Pref As AcadPreferences

On Error Resume Next

Set Pref = Application.Preferences

AutoSaveFlag = "AUTOSAVE"
SaveIntervals = "SAVEINTERVAL"

Value = UCase(GetProjectDirective(AutoSaveFlag))

If Trim(Value) = "YES" Then

Value = UCase(GetProjectDirective(SaveIntervals))
Pref.OpenSave.AutoSaveInterval = CInt(Value)

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:221 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

Else
Pref.OpenSave.AutoSaveInterval = 0
End If

Err.Clear
End Function
Edit the highlighted line as required, e.g.
Pref.OpenSave.AutoSaveInterval = 40

2.9.11 Project Profiles

When the project wizard is run it will create a profile, the name of which matches project
name, which contains project specific information. In the unlikely event that the project
name needs to be changed, the project wizard Upgrade an Existing Project, or the Install
Project Shortcut Only option must be run in order to create new a project profile. An error
will result if the project profile name does not match project name as displayed in the Project
Configuration Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program.
Customisation of project profiles, such as the changing of background colours, will only
affect the current project and not the software in general.

2.9.12 Complex Linetypes

Customisation can be applied by creating complex linetypes for use by project pipes, signal
lines etc.
See:
http://usa.autodesk.com/adsk/servlet/item?siteID=123112&id=2671814&linkID=9240615

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:222 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

2.10 Customising the AVEVA P&ID Tool Palette

• Introduction
• Grouping Palettes
• Creating New Groups and Palettes
• Adding Signal and Process Lines to the Tool Palette
• Adding Symbols to the Tool Palette

2.10.1 Introduction
The AutoCAD Tool Palette has been customised to give users another way of creating and
inserting symbols and intelligent lines, and to execute various other AVEVA P&ID
commands.
The functionality is available with AVEVA VPE P&ID 6.2 patch 14. After this patch is
installed, to make the AVEVA P&ID palette available, the Project Wizard upgrade routine
must be run.
Once the project is upgraded, the palette can be accessed from the drawing editor either by
pressing CTRL+3, by entering TOOLPALETTES at the command line, or by selecting the
option Tool Palettes Window from the AutoCAD Tools pull down menu.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:223 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

2.10.2 Grouping Palettes

When the project is first loaded after the upgrade, the sample palette that is distributed with
the patch will be displayed in a single group called All Palettes:

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:224 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

The set of distributed palettes match AVEVA P&ID standard project configuration. To make
the palettes easy to navigate through, it is advisable to group them. To group tool palettes,
select the Customize… option from the Tool Palette right-click menu:

The AutoCAD Customize dialog box will then be displayed:

A sample group is provided, located in the folder:

\\Aveva\P&ID\Install\AutoCad\Bin\palettes

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:225 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

The folder contains a group file called Standard.xpg, which can be loaded by right-clicking at
the palette group list box and selecting the Import option:

Browse to the indicated location and select the standard.xpg file:

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:226 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

After the group file has been loaded it, the Palette Groups displayed in the Customize
dialog box will look like this:

Palettes have been allocated to sub-groups to facilitate navigation around the tool palette:

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:227 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

Close the Customize dialog box and access the Tool Palette right-click menu. The groups
will now be accessible:

2.10.3 Creating New Groups and Palettes

To add new groups, right-click and select the Customise… option, then and right-click in the
Palette Groups pane and select the New Groups option. See the AutoCAD development
guide documentation for more details.
To add new palettes, navigate to the group in which the palette is to be created, right-click
and select New Palette:

The new palette must then be given a valid name. See the AutoCAD development guide
documentation for more details.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:228 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

2.10.4 Adding Signal and Process Lines to the Tool Palette

Navigate to the Lines sub group using the right-click menu:

Each of the icons displayed on the tool palettes are called Tools. Right-click on one of the
tool icons and select Copy:

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:229 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

Then paste the icon into the same palette, or into any other as required:

Then right-click and select the Properties option of the new tool icon. The Tool Properties
dialog is then displayed:

Enter a name and a description.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:230 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

Right-click on the image and select Specify Image to browse for a 32x32 bitmap to
represent the new tool (this step is optional).

In the case of signal lines, in the Command string field enter:

^C^C(c:asdrawsignal "Signal Description")
Where:
^C^C cancels any ongoing operation in AutoCAD.
ASDRAWSIGNAL is a command that is used to insert signal lines.
"Signal Description" is the name of the signal line to be inserted.
The signal line is then available for insertion from the Tool Palette.
Note that the signal must exist in the project. The list of valid signal lines can be viewed in
the Signal Line Group of the Home Tab:

In the case of process lines, in the Command string field enter:

^C^C(c:asdrawpipe "Pipe Style Description")
Where:
^C^C cancels any ongoing operation in AutoCAD.
ASDRAWPIPE is a command that is used to insert pipes.
"Pipe Style Description" is the name of the pipe to be inserted.
Pipes in the new style are then available for insertion from the Tool Palette (see 8.5.1:
Drawing Pipes).

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:231 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

Note that the pipe style must exist in the project. The list of valid pipe styles can be viewed
in the Pipeline Group of the Home Tab:

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:232 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

2.10.5 Adding Symbols to the Tool Palette

It is recommended that new symbols be assigned new pictures. To add a picture to the Tool
Palette, drag and drop an existing symbol from a drawing (for instance from a legend dialog)
into the Picture Catalogue palette:

The symbol must have been present in the drawing prior to the last drawing save.
To add a new symbol, copy and paste a tool icon from any of the existing symbol palettes
(e.g. the Picture Catalogue palette) into the palette in which the new symbol tool icon is to
be located.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:233 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

Then access the Properties dialog for the tool.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:234 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

Enter a name and a description, and optionally select a representative image:

In the Command string field enter either:

^C^C(c:ASMINSERT "Symbol Name")
or
^C^C(c:ASINSERT "Symbol Name")
Where:
^C^C cancels any ongoing operation in AutoCAD.
ASMINSERT and ASINSERT are commands used to insert symbols.
ASMINSERT is used to insert multiple instances of the same symbol.
ASINSERT is used to perform a single symbol insert.
"Symbol Name" is the name of the symbol to be inserted.
The symbol is then available for insertion from the Tool Palette (see 8.4.1: Inserting Symbols
- General Information).
The symbol name must exist in the project symbol catalogue. Refer to the Project
Administrator symbol catalogue or the AVEVA P&ID Symbol Explorer to view the project
symbol names and description.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:235 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Project Configuration

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 2:236 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Principles and Concepts

3 Principles and Concepts

3.1 Good Drawing Practice

The following points should be observed when drawing P&IDs:
• Label all instruments, equipment, pipes, bypasses, spec breaks as fully as possible.
• All Pipe On/Off flags should be labelled.
• Do not forget to label reducers in labelled pipes.
• Always ensure when editing a P&ID that the AS_NONPLOT layer is On. Stretching,
moving or editing the drawing with this layer Off will compromise drawing integrity and
may inadvertently leave Start or End nodes online labels in the wrong position. Do not
stretch pipes with the NON PLOTTING layer turned Off.
• Always use the correct symbol. Incorrect symbols will be seen as a different item to the
one intended in the validation. If the correct symbol is not available, a new one should
be made.
• Some LISP files contain AutoCAD commands and therefore should not be used.
Consult AVEVA P&ID technical support for guidance on this subject. Ensure that all
nozzles are associated with equipment items.
• Equipment items should be used for the purpose intended, or pipe source and
destination information will be lost during the AVEVA P&ID load.
• Where appropriate Process Links should be used instead of pipes for the case where a
branch does not need to be labelled, or a connection to an off-line instrument is
required.
• Colours: (these comments are subject to whatever project configuration has been
setup)
• If the project has configured in-line items to be the same colour as the pipe then
items which are not the same colour as the pipe they are associated with have been
incorrectly inserted.
• Line fittings should be the same colour as the pipe they were inserted into. If they
are not, the symbol has not been inserted correctly the first time or was created on
that P&ID.
• Do not place symbols between start and end nodes, or they will not appear in a pipe for
any subsequent export of data.
• Process links can be created in any available pipe style defined for the project. Take
care to ensure that only branches that are not being labelled are created using the
Process Link command or toolbar button.
• Avoid cross associated labels between pipes, i.e. place the label on the pipe which
possesses the associated start and end nodes. Use the Show Associations between
Items procedure to determine the association.
• Always use destination text if a pipe does not end at a symbol, e.g. if it is expelling
steam to the atmosphere or connected to a package item.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 3:1 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Principles and Concepts

• Prepare drawing borders at the start of a project in the required drawing sizes and
initialize AVEVA P&ID on them, so that when new drawing are created the application
will start-up automatically.
• Always be aware of the sequencing in the pipe labels, especially when adding
reducers.
• Drawing numbers and pipe flag labels should not have spaces in them.

3.2 Templates
AutoCAD templates are basic drawings that provide project standard layouts and styles of
drawings, for example drawing sizes, layers, title blocks, borders etc, on which project
drawings can be based.
Create the required templates and load the AVEVA P&ID menu into each one. Other users
can then copy and open these templates, and start AVEVA P&ID from the attached AVEVA
menu. Any changes to network file locking or running untested applications (normally written
in C) or LISP routines is not advised. Subsequent problems are unlikely to be supported by
the AVEVA P&ID support hotline.

3.3 Automatic Drawing Configuration

When AVEVA P&ID is opened for a drawing, AVEVA P&ID compares the current project
configuration with the drawing configuration. If differences are found, the drawing is
automatically revised to suit.
For details see Project Configuration - 2.2: Project Options Overview.

3.4 Pipes and Symbols

3.4.1 Categories

• Pipes
AVEVA P&ID supports an unlimited number of project defined pipe styles. The product ships
with defaults of Main, Subsidiary and Process Link defined. On the Pipe toolbar the pipe
style can be selected independent of the create pipe or link option buttons. This means that
both pipes and links can be created using any of the pipe styles. Users must ensure that any
branches that need labelling are created with the Create Pipe option.

• Symbols
All symbols consist of AutoCAD blocks, and the available categories are:
• Valves
• Equipment
• Electrical equipment
• Line fittings
• Instrument valves (control valves)
• Instruments (balloons)
• Flow elements
• Nozzles

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 3:2 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Principles and Concepts

• Miscellaneous
• Assemblies Non-AVEVA P&ID blocks

3.4.2 Pipe Creation

Note: For projects developed using versions of AVEVA P&ID older than AVEVA VPE P&ID
7.2 SP3, an upgrade of the pipes on the project drawings is required. See 2.1:
Upgrading Pipes and Symbols from old Projects.

The main points governing the creation of pipes using the Drawing Pipes procedure are as
follows:
• A pipe run can be defined freely as a network with many starts and ends and can be
drawn in any pipe style. These multiple origins and destinations are included in the
connectivity data transferred to the VPE Workbench and are then available for the line
list. A pipe can also be created with off-sheet connectors by selecting the required end
style on the pipe toolbar before creating the pipe.
• Branches may be drawn in any pipe style. When a branch is connected to another pipe
section a tee point is automatically created. If a branch is deleted, the parent connected
pipe automatically remakes itself into one line.
• Trim pipes are usually supplied by a vessel vendor and when labelled, are associated
with the vessel. Adding trim is achieved by selecting the vessel and clicking the right
mouse button, when a menu is displayed showing the trim options.
• Tracing can be added only to pipes and process links but not to signal lines. By means
of appropriate commands, tracing can be added to existing pipes, or automatically
included when new pipes are drawn. If tracing is required when a pipe is created a
check box exists on the pipe toolbar to enable it.
• Pipelines do not show a two-way flow, but, in such cases, the VPE Workbench line list
contains destinations read from connected graphical elements, with an appropriate
comment, for example 'bi-directional'.
• To manually break pipelines i.e.: when they cross vessels, use of the AVEVA P&ID
symbol insert facility is required to insert break symbols. The break symbols, for
example small crosses, are placed by default on the non-plotting layer, but are visible
on the screen.
• Where the flow line does not receive a line number, for example, a pressure indicator
connected to a pipe or equipment item, process links are used to establish connections
between instruments and process items. Where the connecting line is not a signal line,
process links are also used for instrument-to-instrument connections. Process links
can be drawn in any project defined line style. When data is transferred to VPE
Workbench, AVEVA P&ID determines pipe, equipment or instrument owners for
connected instruments.
• Pipes when created can be automatically labelled by selecting the auto label pipes
checkbox on the label toolbar. When a pipe's graphical route is completed, and the
prompt for a new or branch pipe is answered pipe start and end nodes are placed
automatically and the label Properties dialog is displayed to define the label.
• Branches can be added to an existing labelled pipe by selecting the pipe label and
clicking the right mouse button to display a menu that shows the Add Branch option.
• A default set of signal lines is provided. The set is to ISA standards and consists of
signal lines for electrical, pneumatic, hydraulic, electromagnetic, sonic, unidentified
signals, and for capillary tubes.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 3:3 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Principles and Concepts

3.4.3 Inserting Symbols

Note: For projects developed using versions of AVEVA P&ID older than AVEVA VPE P&ID
7.2 SP3, an upgrade of the symbols on the project drawings is required. See 2.1:
Upgrading Pipes and Symbols from old Projects.

Items can be placed on a AVEVA P&ID drawing either by selecting and inserting the
required item from Symbol Explorer or from the AVEVA P&ID Tool Palette. See the 8.4.1:
Inserting Symbols - General Information procedure for further details.
Every graphical item on a P&ID or flow diagram is classified by a AVEVA P&ID TYPE
reference. For example, VLV - Pipe valve. See the 10.3: AVEVA P&ID Item Types and
Label Types topic for details. The type reference is assigned automatically on insertion,
provided that the symbol is listed in the Symbols Configuration Category of the AVEVA P&ID
Project Administration program. The type reference is vital because it allows all AVEVA
P&ID commands to recognize each symbol, and to react accordingly.
Alternatively symbols can be inserted by using Copy and Paste by selecting the required
symbol in the drawing, and clicking the right mouse button, where the options will be seen
on the menu. This can also be achieved by the use of shortcut keys CTRL-C for copy, and
CTRL-V for paste. In-line fittings when pasted into a drawing must be pasted over a flow line
where they will insert into the line.
The Insert key on the keyboard opens the Symbol Explorer.

3.5 Validation
When drawing a P&ID, two forms of validation must be considered:
• Online (label data) validation, which takes place when P&ID graphics are labelled.
See Drawing P&IDs - 6.13: Label Validation.
• Drawing integrity validation, which takes place when the synchronising procedure is
carried out (see 8.8.6: Synchronising Data with a VPE Workbench Database or 8.8.2:
Exporting Data to a P&ID Reports and/or AVEVA Engineering Database). This
procedure can be used either to validate the data or to both validate and transfer the
data to another application such as VPE Workbench.
See also 7.5: Exporting Data to a VPE Workbench Database.
The List Item Details procedure is another validation tool. It can be used to identify the item
type of an object and confirm the sequence ID of labels in a pipe.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 3:4 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
The Graphical User Interface

4 The Graphical User Interface

4.1 Explorer Display Options

The AVEVA P&ID graphical user interface includes two Explorers - the Engineering Explorer
and the Symbol Explorer. Each is displayed on a tab in the AVEVA P&ID Explorer pane.
The Explorer pane may be displayed in two modes: docking and floating. The docking
version may be dragged and "docked" to any edge of the drawing window or may be
positioned anywhere within the drawing window. The floating version is designed to be used
primarily on dual screen monitors, as it can be dragged to any position on the screen (or
screens), not just within the drawing window, so that is does not obscure any part of a
drawing.
Docked - Engineering Explorer displayed:

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 4:1 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
The Graphical User Interface

Floating - Symbol Explorer displayed:

The default starting position and mode of the Explorer pane is docked on the left-hand edge
of the drawing page, although this may be changed by editing the user's start-up routine
(see 2.9: Customisation Guide). When a user initializes a session, it is displayed in the
position and mode it was in when the user’s previous session ended.
Continue at:
4.2: Engineering Explorer
4.3: Symbol Explorer

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 4:2 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
The Graphical User Interface

4.2 Engineering Explorer

• Introduction
• Equipment, Instrument and Pipes
• Unassigned Items
• Context Sensitive Menus
• Searching for Items

4.2.1 Introduction
The Engineering Explorer provides a hierarchical view of items within the currently open
drawings. Details of all open drawings within the current project can be displayed
simultaneously. Deleting, adding or modifying an item on a drawing will cause the
Engineering Explorer to update accordingly.

You can control the amount of information displayed in the explorer by expanding and
contracting the levels using the +/- boxes at the left of each list item.
If an item is selected on the drawings, it is automatically selected in the Engineering
Explorer as well.
The Engineering Explorer may be displayed in two modes: docking and floating. For further
details, refer to 4.1: Explorer Display Options.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 4:3 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
The Graphical User Interface

4.2.2 Equipment, Instrument and Pipes

For each drawing, items are grouped under one of three headings: Equipment, Instrument
Loop and Pipes.
• The Equipment heading groups together all equipment items. Equipment items can in
turn be collections of items, and this is represented in the Engineering Explorer that
displays the hierarchy of items within an equipment collection. The nozzles, trim, trim
branches, electrical equipment associated with a top-level equipment item are
displayed.

• Under the Instrument Loops heading is a list of the instrument loops on the drawing.
Instruments are listed under the appropriate loop node. Instruments that are not in a
loop are grouped under a node called "UNNAMED". Instruments can be assigned to
loops by dragging and dropping between loop nodes.

• The Pipes heading groups together all the pipes on the drawing, plus the hierarchy of
all the branches of each pipe. Inline piping components are not currently represented.
Note that pipes will not be displayed in the Engineering Explorer until they have been
labelled.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 4:4 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
The Graphical User Interface

• The part of the pipe that has been labelled as the "main" pipe label is displayed at the
top of the hierarchy of a pipe and its branches (see 4.7: The Drawing Page for details).
If no main pipe label has been set, the pipe start node properties assume this position
by default.

• Under the Pipes heading, beneath the list if pipes, pipe groups may be specified for
reporting purposes (see 8.6.16: Creating Pipe Groups). Pipes may be assigned to
these groups by dragging them from the list of pipes dropping them into the appropriate
group.

• Where the label or tag of an item is displayed in red, this indicates that the item is
invalid in some way. This occurs when the label of the item has not been sufficiently
completed, or in the case of nozzles, not labelled at all.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 4:5 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
The Graphical User Interface

• The labels of typical items may also be displayed in distinct colours, as specified in the
project settings. For example, typical instrument labels may be set to be green in
colour. This colour is used for the label both on the drawing, and in the Explorer.

4.2.3 Unassigned Items

Beneath the drawing nodes, an Unassigned node may be displayed:

• Whether or not this node is displayed is controlled by an option on the VPE Workbench
Configuration Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program.
• Beneath this node are listed items in the VPE Workbench database that have not yet
been placed on a project P&ID.
• The list is divided into Equipment and Instruments. Items in the Equipment list are sub-
divided by discipline (Electrical, Mechanical and Process), then by item type. Items in
the Instruments list are sub-divided by item type only (as they are all of the Instruments
discipline).
• The list of unassigned items is extracted from the VPE Workbench database when a
connection to the database is established (see 8.8.8: Connecting to a VPE Workbench
Database). After this has taken place, the connection may be discontinued, and the list
derived from a snapshot of the database stored in an XML file.
• Once an item is placed on a project drawing, it is automatically removed from the
Unassigned list, and moved to the appropriate position on the drawing item hierarchy
as described above.
• By default, all unassigned items are included in the unassigned items list. However, the
list may be filtered if required. To set up a filter, select this button: .

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 4:6 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
The Graphical User Interface

The Filter unassigned items dialog is then displayed:

The dialog displays a node for each item type, discipline (e.g. Electrical, Process) and
category (i.e. Equipment and Instruments) of item. To exclude an item type, discipline
or category, uncheck the checkbox next to its node.
Re-check a checkbox to include the associated items in the list again.
Select the OK button to apply the filter.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 4:7 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
The Graphical User Interface

4.2.4 Context Sensitive Menus

When selected, items and folders in the Engineering Explorer have shortcut (right-button)
menus.

• Drawing Menus
• Every menu includes a Sort option that sorts all the engineering items displayed in the
Engineering Explorer according to their labels.
• All menus except the top-level Equipment, Instrument and Pipes menus include a
Refresh option which regenerates the Explorer hierarchy.
• The Project menu includes options to open new and existing project drawings, and to
connect and disconnect to and from a VPE Workbench project database.
• The VPE Login and Logout options are also available on the Drawing menu (see 8.8.8:
Connecting to a VPE Workbench Database and 8.8.9: Disconnecting from a VPE
Workbench Database). In addition, this menu includes options to close the drawing, to
save it (this options opens a Save Drawing As dialog), to print it, and to synchronise
drawing data with data in an external database (VPE Workbench or SQL), assuming
that a connection has been established (see 8.8.6: Synchronising Data with a VPE
Workbench Database).
• The Drawing menu also includes Close, Save, Synchronise, Print, VPE Logon, VPE
Logoff and Insert Symbol options.
• The Synchronise option is used to validate and export data on the drawing to VPE
Workbench (see 8.8.6: Synchronising Data with a VPE Workbench Database). The
VPE Logon and VPE Logoff options are used to connect and disconnect from the VPE
Workbench database (see 8.8.8: Connecting to a VPE Workbench Database and
8.8.9: Disconnecting from a VPE Workbench Database).
• The Insert Symbol option opens the Symbol Explorer, from which the required symbol
can then be inserted (see 8.4.1: Inserting Symbols - General Information).
• The Drawing menu and all the menus for engineering items include a Properties option.
This option opens the Properties dialog for the selected item, which can be used to
enter the labels and other details of the drawing or item. See 4.8: Properties Dialogs.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 4:8 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
The Graphical User Interface

• Every engineering item menu has four common options: Find, Move, Copy and Delete.
When the Find option is selected, the selected item will be zoomed to on the drawing. If
the drawing display does not currently show the item (i.e. if the item is not within the
current drawing view window, the drawing view window will change accordingly.
• The Move, Copy and Delete options can be used to perform these actions on individual
items, or on collections of items. For example, these options can be used to move,
copy or delete a single branch, or an entire pipe collection including of the branches of
the pipe.
• The Instrument Loop node menu includes a New Loop options, used to create new
instrument loops. See 8.6.11: Creating Instrument Loops.
• The Pipes node menu includes a New Group option, used to create new pipe groups.
See 8.6.16: Creating Pipe Groups.

• Unassigned Menus
• Every menu includes a Refresh option that is used to refresh the list of unassigned
items with any changes that have been made to the database (if a connection is
present) and to update the list with any drawing changes that it is not yet reflecting.
• The item menus also include Insert and Properties options. The Insert option is used to
add items to the current drawing (see 8.4.1: Inserting Symbols - General Information).
• The Properties option opens the Properties dialog for the selected item, on which the
details of the item can be viewed. See 4.8: Properties Dialogs. While an item is
unassigned, no changes may be made to these details except to assign a Symbol
Name, if that has not yet been recorded for the item in the database.

4.2.5 Searching for Items

• To search for items, select this button: .
• The Search pane is then displayed:

• Enter all or part of the item tag in the Find What field. Press Enter and select the Find
button. The first item that matches the search criteria is then highlighted in the
Engineering Explorer and on the drawing. Select the button again to find additional
matches.
• As the search criteria are being typed in, items with tags that start with characters
entered so far are automatically listed below the field.
• Note that when search for a nozzle, a concatenation of tag of the owning equipment
followed by the nozzle number must be entered in the Find What field.
• To select an item from the list, scroll to it using the up and down keyboard buttons and
press Enter.

• Press the button again to close the Search pane.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 4:9 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
The Graphical User Interface

4.3 Symbol Explorer

4.3.1 Introduction
The Symbol Explorer is used to select symbols and place them on a drawing. It is also used
to access the Symbol Editor, used to create and edit symbols, and to upgrade existing
symbols by adding ports to them.

The Symbol Explorer may be displayed in two modes: docking and floating. For further
details, refer to 4.1: Explorer Display Options

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 4:10 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
The Graphical User Interface

4.3.2 Using the Symbol Explorer

• The top section of the pane displays lists of both Project and Standard groups of
symbols, for example valves or nozzles. If a group of symbols is selected, the content
of the group is displayed in the section below.
• The content of a group may be displayed either as icons:

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 4:11 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
The Graphical User Interface

Or as details:

• Select the required format from this drop-down menu:

• When the pane is in Icons view mode, details of the currently selected symbol are
displayed below the symbol icons. When the pane is in Details view mode, a preview
image of the selected symbol is displayed below the symbol details.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 4:12 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
The Graphical User Interface

• To refresh the images of symbols, for example if a symbol has been edited or a new
symbol has been created using the Symbol Editor (see below), right-click and select
the Refresh option.

• To search for a symbol, select this button:

The Symbol Search pane is then displayed:

Enter all or part of the symbol name in the Find What field, and select either Symbol
Name or Symbol Description from the Find In field. Press Enter. The first symbol that
matches the search criteria is then highlighted in the Symbol Explorer. Select the
button again to find additional matches.
As the search criteria are being typed in, symbols descriptions that start with characters
entered so far are automatically listed below the field. For example, if "GAT" is typed,
"Gate Valve" will be listed, plus any other symbol descriptions that start with "GAT".
To select a symbol description from the list, scroll to it using the up and down keyboard
buttons and press Enter. The mouse cannot be used for this due to an AutoCAD
limitation.

Select the button again to close the Symbol Search pane.

• Once the required symbol has been selected it may be inserted by right-clicking on it,
and selecting the Insert option, by double-clicking on it, or by dragging and dropping it
from the Symbol Explorer onto the drawing page. See 8.4.1: Inserting Symbols -
General Information.
• Symbols may also be inserted as "unintelligent" AutoCAD blocks, instead of as
intelligent VPE symbols, by right-clicking on the symbol in question and selecting Insert
Block.
• When assemblies are created (see 8.9.1: Creating Assemblies), they are automatically
placed in the Assemblies sub-folder of the Project folder.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 4:13 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
The Graphical User Interface

• When symbols are exported from a drawing (see 8.8.20: Exporting Symbols), they are
automatically placed in the ExportSymbols sub-folder of the Project folder.

• Creating and Editing Symbols

Symbols are created and edited using the Symbol Editor, which is accessed from the Create
Symbol and Edit Symbol right-click menu options. Before the Symbol Editor is accessed,
the user must login as a Project Administrator (using the same password used to access the
AVEVA P&ID Project Administration Program), by selecting the Admin Login menu option
(the Admin Login option is replaced by Admin Logout if the user has already logged in).
Click here for details of the Symbol Editor.

• Upgrading Symbols
The Symbol Explorer includes a facility to upgrade existing symbols by adding ports to
them.

Note: This procedure must be carried out to upgrade all symbols on project drawings to
AVEVA VPE P&ID 7.2 SP3 or AVEVA P&ID 12.0 or later standard.

To upgrade symbols, right-click on the Symbol Explorer and select the Upgrade Ports option
from the menu that is then displayed. Each project symbol is then upgraded in turn.

Note: Only the symbol files located in the \PMETSYM (Metric projects) or \PIMPSYM
(Imperial projects) symbol folders, or in sub-folders in these folders, are included in
the upgrade.

A log file is created in the project symbol folder that contains lists the symbols that were
correctly upgraded, any errors that occurred, and warnings that single connection symbols
were upgraded (and therefore should be checked). For example:
[C:\Aveva\P&ID\PROJECT\IPE\Autocad\Pmetsym\NV.DWG] [VLV]
successfully upgraded
Error: Symbol not found in project area [WEVA]
Warning: Symbol with single insertion point
[C:\Aveva\P&ID\PROJECT\IPE\Autocad\Pmetsym\Line
Fittings\FLAG2.DWG] [PFL]
The log files are best viewed in WordPad.

Note: If single connection symbols are included in the upgrade, it is recommended that
they are checked afterwards to ensure that ports have been placed on the correct
sides of the symbols. It is not always possible for the upgrade routine to detect which
this is.

Note: After the upgrade process is complete it is recommended that before using the
upgrade symbols they are inspected using the Symbol Editor, to check that the ports
have been added correctly.

Ports can also be added to symbols manually, using the Symbol Editor.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 4:14 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
The Graphical User Interface

4.4 Symbol Editor

New project symbols can be created, and existing symbol edited using the Symbol Editor.
New symbols can be created using the Symbol Editor by:
• Drawing an entirely new symbol
• Selecting an existing symbol from a symbol library and editing it
• Selecting entities on a drawing, either "dumb" AutoCAD blocks or "intelligent" AVEVA
P&ID symbols, and editing them

4.4.1 Logging On
Before the Symbol Editor can be accessed, the user must login to the Administrator. Right-
click on a symbol in the Symbol Explorer and select Admin Login from the menu that is then
displayed. The Login dialog is then displayed. Enter the required login details (see the
AVEVA P&ID Project Administration Program).

To logout, right-click and select the Admin Logout option instead (the Login option is
replaced by this when the user has logged in).

4.4.2 Accessing the Symbol Editor

The Symbol Editor can then be accessed by:
• right-clicking on a symbol in the Symbol Explorer and selecting either the Create
Symbol or Edit Symbol option from the menu that is then displayed, or
• selecting the Create Symbol option from The Drawing Page shortcut menus or the
Non-Intelligent Entities Upgrade Group of the Utilities Tab. The Symbol Editor then
opens within the AVEVA P&ID window.
Note that only one symbol can be created or edited at a time.
If the Edit Symbol option was selected, the symbol right-clicked on in the Symbol Explorer is
opened for editing in the Symbol Editor.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 4:15 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
The Graphical User Interface

4.4.3 New Symbol Options

If the Create Symbol option was selected, the following file dialog box is then displayed:

• If a new symbol definition is to be created and added to the project, select the New
option. Enter the name of the new symbol in the Symbol Name field. Select a P&ID
type and enter a description in the PID Type and Symbol Description fields. Browse for
the location for the new symbol file via the button adjacent to the File/Directory path
field.
Note: In the case of pipe flags (off-sheet connectors), the symbol name must end with
either -IN or -OUT depending on whether the flag symbol is intended to represent a
connector into drawings or out of drawings.

• If an existing symbol definition is to be added to the project, one that has already been
drawn, perhaps in another project, press the Existing button. Then browse for the
appropriate symbol drawing file using the button adjacent to the File/Directory path
field. Select a P&ID type and enter a description in the PID Type and Symbol
Description fields.
• If a symbol is being created from entities on the drawing, select the From Drawing
option.
Note: If the dialog was accessed from the drawing page menu option, only this option is
available.

Enter the name of the new symbol in the Symbol Name field. Select a P&ID type and
enter a description in the PID Type and Symbol Description fields. Browse for the
location for the new symbol file via the button adjacent to the File/Directory path field.
• If the dialog was opened from the Symbol Explorer, or was accessed from drawing
page shortcut menu with nothing selecting on the drawing, the entities on the
drawing that are to form the basis of the new symbol must be selected on the
drawing.
• If the dialog was opened from drawing page shortcut menu with an entity selected,
this is not required. The selected entity or entities will form the basis of the new
symbol.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 4:16 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
The Graphical User Interface

Note: When a symbol is created by selecting entities from a drawing, make sure that
AutoCAD limits are checked, to ensure that the graphical components of the symbol
are within the drawing limits before the base point is set.

The command to check and change drawing limits is “Limits”.

• When all details of the symbol have been entered, press OK. The dialog box will be
closed and the Symbol Editor will open. New symbols can now be drawn using the
Symbol Editor, and Existing symbols or drawing entities edited to create the new
symbol.

4.4.4 Using the Symbol Editor

The Symbol Editor is an AutoCAD based application. Symbols are drawn and edited using
standard AutoCAD and AVEVA P&ID drawing facilities. Additional controls are provided to
enable the user to create valid AVEVA P&ID symbols, such as port valves (see below).

• Adding Insertion Points

Every AVEVA P&ID symbol must have an insertion point. This is specified in the Symbol
Editor by right-clicking and selecting the Set Base Point option from the menu that is then
displayed.

Select the insertion point by clicking on the required point on the symbol. The insertion point
is marked with a yellow circle.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 4:17 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
The Graphical User Interface

• Adding Ports to Symbols

To add ports to a symbol, right-click on it and select the Insert Port option from the menu that
is then displayed, and then place the ports at the required positions.
Once all the ports have been placed, they may be named. Select the Edit Port Identities
option from the right-click menu. The following dialog is then displayed:

As required, in the Port ID fields enter the identifiers of each port. Port identifiers can be
alpha or numeric, or any combination, but must be unique on the valve.
These IDs will be displayed for these ports on the Properties dialogs used to label port
valves of the current type, and will be exported to VPE Workbench as the port identifiers,
and appear on datasheets as appropriate.

• Creating Break Symbols

To create line break (i.e. spec break) symbols (P&ID Type of LSP), either draw a new
symbol from the start of right-click and select the Insert Spec Symbol option from the menu
that is then displayed. The Insert SpecBreak dialog is then displayed:

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 4:18 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
The Graphical User Interface

From the list of values, pick and existing symbol, and click OK. The selected symbol is then
displayed.
Set the base point in the normal way as described above.
To add the labels that are the symbol is to be labelled with, right-click and select the Add
Spec Labels option from the menu. The SpecBreak Labels dialog is then displayed:

Check the checkboxes of the required labels and select the OK button.
The user will then be prompted to place each selected label on the left side of the symbol,
and then each selected label on the right side of the symbol.
These placements will control where labels are placed when the symbols is added to a
drawing. Ensure that each label is placed on the correct side of the symbol.
By default, new break symbols will not indicate a property change. If the symbol is to
indicate a change in the properties of the lines they are placed on, right-click and select the
Split ON option from the menu and then click on the symbol.
To change a symbol back to not indicating a property change, right-click and select the Split
OFF option from the menu, and then click on the symbol.

Note: Changing this setting for a break symbol after symbols of that type have already
been placed on a drawing will not change the behaviour of those symbol. Only those
placed from that point on will be affected.

• Adding User Defined Attributes

To add user defined attributes to symbols:
1. Select the symbol in question and open the Symbol Editor as described above.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 4:19 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
The Graphical User Interface

2. Enter the ATTDEF command at the command line. The Attribute Definition dialog is
then displayed.

3. Check the Preset checkbox. Check the other checkboxes, e.g. the Invisible checkbox
as required. Refer to AutoCAD documentation for guidance.
4. Enter the name of the attribute in the Tag field.
5. Enter the default value of the attribute in the Default field.
6. Press the OK button. The dialog then closes.
7. Unless the insertion point of the new attribute was specified in the dialog, the following
prompt will then be displayed: "Specify start point:”. Specify the insertion point of the
attribute in the main Symbol Editor window, i.e. where the attribute value is to be
displayed relative to the symbol when the symbol is labelled.
Once defined for a symbol type, user-defined attribute values can be entered using the
AVEVA P&ID Properties dialogs (see 4.8: Properties Dialogs). They will be grouped under a
node called User Defined Attributes.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 4:20 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
The Graphical User Interface

Note: If a new attribute has been defined for a symbol of a type which already has labelled
instances on a drawing, to add the new attribute to the labels of these symbols, enter
UDAS at the command line, and select one of the symbols on the drawing. All the
symbols of that type will then labelled with default value of the new attribute.

To update all project drawings or selected project drawings with new or changed
attributes, use the Refresh UDAs utility (see below).
To remove all such UDAs from selected symbols on a drawing, see 8.6.34: Removing UDAs
from Symbols.

• Accessing the Dynamic Block Editor

Symbols may be made into dynamic blocks by using the AutoCAD Block Editor. This is
accessed from the Symbol Editor by selecting the Dynamic Block Editor option from the
right-click menu.

See AutoCAD documentation for details of the Block Editor.

4.4.5 Closing the Symbol Editor and Updating the Drawing Symbol Library
To close the Symbol Editor and save any changes made to the symbol being edited, select
the Done option from the right-click menu.
To load a new symbol into the drawing symbol library, select the Refresh Settings option in
the AVEVA P&ID Group of the Home Tab.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 4:21 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
The Graphical User Interface

The following message is then displayed:

Click Yes to continue.

4.4.6 Updating Edited Symbols on Drawings

When a symbol is edited, instances of that symbol already placed on drawings are not
automatically updated. To update instances of edited symbols on a drawing, enter
AVVRESETSYMBOLS at the Command prompt.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 4:22 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
The Graphical User Interface

4.5 P&ID Data Grid

4.5.1 Overview
The P&ID Data Grid is used to display details of project equipment, pipes, instruments
nozzles, valves, line fittings and unassigned sheet connectors in tabular form.
It can also be used to:
• Assign unassigned items (created in P&ID Reports) to drawings
• Assign source/destination drawing sheets to off-page connectors
• Transfer instruments from AVEVA Instrumentation and add them to drawings.
• Transfer electrical equipment from AVEVA Electrical and add them to drawings.
• Transfer data to and from PDMS Schematics and add it to drawings.
• Transfer data from AVEVA Engineering and add it to drawings.
• Label drawings with any of the data displayed in the tables.
Note that the P&ID Data Grid only displays details of drawing data that has been
Synchronised (see 8.8.6: Synchronising Data with a VPE Workbench Database).
To open the P&ID Data Grid, select the Load P&ID Grid option in the P&ID Reports Group
of the Data Management Tab. The P&ID Data Grid opens by default below the drawing
window.

To close the P&ID Data Grid, click the x button in the top-left corner.
The P&ID Data Grid consists of two main windows. The left-hand window of the P&ID Data
Grid includes hierarchical tree-view of project items, similar to that of the Engineering
Explorer.
It includes Unassigned and Assigned nodes under the AVEVA P&ID Database node. The
Assigned node lists items in the database that are on a project drawing. The Unassigned
node lists items, created in P&ID Reports, which have not been added to a project drawing,
and sheet connectors on project drawings which have no source or destination drawing
sheet defined for them.
The tree-view also lists of assigned and unassigned instruments from AVEVA
Instrumentation and of assigned and unassigned electrical equipment from AVEVA
Electrical, and lists of items in the connected PDMS Schematic database.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 4:23 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
The Graphical User Interface

The tree view is used to select an item or category of item, the details of which are in
displayed in a grid in the right-hand window.

This is used to select an item or category of item, the details of which are in displayed in a
grid in the right-hand window.

Note that the layout of the data as displayed in the right-hand section may be configured.
Columns may be added, removed, re-ordered, filtered and pinned, and data may be
grouped the values in selected columns. See below for details.
Above the windows, a number of buttons are displayed. These are used to configure the
display of data in the right-hand window, zoom into a selected item on the drawing, refresh
labels on the drawing inserted from the P&ID Data Grid, and to export the data displayed in
the right-hand windows to an Excel spreadsheet.
Continue at:
• 4.5.2: Viewing P&ID Drawing Data
• 4.5.3: Assigning Unassigned Items to a Drawing
• 4.5.4: Assigning Sources/Destinations to Page Connectors
• 4.5.5: Viewing and Assigning AVEVA Instrumentation and AVEVA Electrical Data
• 4.5.6: Importing, Viewing and Exporting data to and from PDMS Schematics

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 4:24 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
The Graphical User Interface

• 4.5.7: Importing and Viewing data from AVEVA Engineering

• 4.5.9: Zooming into an item on the Drawing
• 4.5.10: Labelling the Drawing with Data from the P&ID Data Grid
• 4.5.11: Configuring the Grid Layout
• 4.5.12: Exporting the Grid to an Excel Spreadsheet
• 4.5.13: Viewing Item Datasheets

4.5.2 Viewing P&ID Drawing Data

The P&ID Data Grid can display data either from the current drawing only, or from all project
drawings.
To view details of assigned items, i.e. items on a project drawing, select the Assigned node.
If only data from the current drawings is to be displayed, select the Current Drawing Data
option from the Drawing Selection field list. If data from all project drawings is to be
displayed, select the Project Data option.
To view details of unassigned items, i.e. items which were created in P&ID Reports and on
not yet assigned to a project drawing, select the Unassigned node.
To view details of all items in a category of item, for example all instruments, select the
appropriate node under the AVEVA P&ID Database node in the left-hand window.
To view details of a single item, expand the item category node and select the item in
question from the list of items under that node.
Details of the selected item or items are then displayed in the grid in the right-hand window.
Facilities are provided to assign a selected unassigned item to the current drawing. See
4.5.3: Assigning Unassigned Items to a Drawing.
Located under the Unassigned node, the Unassigned Page Connectors node is used to
view lists of sheet connectors which have no source or destination drawing sheet defined for
them. These nodes can be used to assign source or destination sheets to unassigned
connectors (see 4.5.4: Assigning Sources/Destinations to Page Connectors).

4.5.3 Assigning Unassigned Items to a Drawing

The Equipment, Instruments and Pipes nodes under the Unassigned node of the AVEVA
P&ID Database node is used to view items in the project database that have not been
added to a project drawing. Such items are created in AVEVA P&ID Reports (refer to AVEVA
P&ID Reports documentation for details) or imported from AVEVA Engineering using the
P&ID Data Grid (see 4.5.7: Importing and Viewing data from AVEVA Engineering) or AVEVA
P&ID Reports. They may be added to a drawing by the facilities provided by the P&ID Data
Grid.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 4:25 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
The Graphical User Interface

For details of the procedure for adding unassigned items to a drawing, see 8.4.12: Inserting
Unassigned P&ID Database Symbols, 8.5.2: Inserting Unassigned P&ID Database Pipes
and 8.6.22: Labelling with Data from the P&ID Data Grid - Linking Unassigned P&ID Data
Grid Items with Unlabelled Drawing Items.

4.5.4 Assigning Sources/Destinations to Page Connectors

The Unassigned Page Connectors node under the Unassigned node of the AVEVA P&ID
Database node is used to view lists of all the sheet connectors on project drawings which
have no source or destination drawing sheet defined for them. There are separate lists for
off-sheet and on-sheet connectors.

These nodes can be used to create connection between these unassigned connectors, and
a new or existing connector on the current drawing. See 8.6.18: Labelling and Connecting
Pipe Flags for details.

4.5.5 Viewing and Assigning AVEVA Instrumentation and AVEVA Electrical

Data
Before AVEVA Instrumentation or AVEVA Electrical data can be viewed, the appropriate
AVEVA Instrumentation or AVEVA Electrical project must first be logged onto to.
Right-click on the AVEVA Instrumentation or AVEVA Electrical node and select the Login
option from the menu that is then displayed.

Note: Whether or not these nodes are displayed is controlled on the AI Integration
Configuration Category and the AE Integration Configuration Category of the AVEVA
P&ID Project Administration program.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 4:26 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
The Graphical User Interface

From the dialog that is then displayed, click on the required project, and press the Select
button.

If an AVEVA Instrumentation project is selected, details of the instruments in the AVEVA

Instrumentation project are then listed under the Unassigned Instruments and Assigned
Instruments nodes. The Assigned Instruments node lists those instruments that have been
added to a P&ID project drawing. The Unassigned Instruments node lists those that have
not.

If an AVEVA Electrical project is selected, details of the electrical equipment in the AVEVA
Electrical project are then listed under the Unassigned Electrical Equipment and Assigned
Electrical Equipment nodes. The Assigned Electrical Equipment node lists the equipment
that has been added to a P&ID project drawing. The Unassigned Electrical Equipment node
lists those that have not.
Beneath each of these nodes is a node for each type of item. If one these nodes is selected,
details of the item of the selected type are displayed in the grid in the right-hand window.
For the procedure for assigning AVEVA Instrumentation instruments and AVEVA Electrical
equipment, see 8.8.13: Transferring Data from AVEVA Instrumentation and AVEVA
Electrical.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 4:27 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
The Graphical User Interface

To view additional properties of an instrument or the loop it is assigned to, right-click and
select the Show Instrument Detail or the Shop Loop Detail option.

To view additional properties of electrical equipment, right-click and select the Show
Equipment Detail.
A dialog will then be opened that will display all details of the instrument, loop or electrical
equipment.

Refer to AVEVA Instrumentation and AVEVA Electrical documentation for details of these
dialogs.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 4:28 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
The Graphical User Interface

4.5.6 Importing, Viewing and Exporting data to and from PDMS Schematics
Before PDMS Schematic data can be imported and viewed, the appropriate PDMS
database must first be logged onto to.
Right-click on the AVEVA Schematic Database node and select the Login option from the
menu that is then displayed.

Note: Whether or not this node is displayed is controlled on the PDMS Integration -
Schematics Sub-Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program.

The PDMS Login dialog is then displayed.

Enter the appropriate login details for the PDMS project and database, and press the OK
button.

Note: Default entries for the Project and MDB fields are set in the PDMS Integration -
Schematics Sub-Category.

Right-click on the AVEVA Schematic Database node and select the Get Work option from
the menu that is then displayed.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 4:29 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
The Graphical User Interface

Details of the offline instruments, inline instruments, equipment and pipes in the selected
database are then listed under the AVEVA Schematic Database node.

If the Current Drawing Option is selected, only items exported to the database from the
current drawing are displayed. If the Project Data option is selected, items exported from all
project drawings are displayed.
To view details of all items in a category of item, for example all offline instruments, select
the appropriate node under the AVEVA Schematic Database node in the left-hand window.
To view details of a single item, expand the item category node and select the item in
question from the list of items under that node.
To connect to a different database, right-click on the AVEVA Schematic Database node and
select the Login option again.
To export data to the Schematic database, right-click on the AVEVA Schematic Database
node and select the Save Work option. Refer to 8.8.14: Transferring Data to PDMS
Schematic Databases for details.

4.5.7 Importing and Viewing data from AVEVA Engineering

AVEVA Engineering data is imported using the P&ID Data grid. There are two methods:
• Method 1: The current content of an AVEVA Engineering database can be imported
and then viewed in the P&ID Data Grid.
The data can then placed on drawings as designators. See 8.6.22: Labelling with Data
from the P&ID Data Grid.
• Method 2: Alternately, AVEVA Engineering items can be imported into the AVEVA P&ID
database itself as unassigned items, and viewed in the P&ID Data Grid.
These unassigned items can then be placed on a drawing and assigned in the normal
way. See 8.4.12: Inserting Unassigned P&ID Database Symbols.

Method 1
Before AVEVA Engineering data can be imported and viewed, the appropriate database
must first be logged onto to.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 4:30 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
The Graphical User Interface

Right-click on the AVEVA Engineering Database node and select the Login option from the
menu that is then displayed.

Note: Whether or not this node is displayed is controlled on the PDMS Integration -
Engineering Sub-Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program.

The Engineering Login dialog is then displayed.

Enter the appropriate login details for the Engineering project and database, and press the
OK button.

Note: Default entries for the Project and MDB fields are set in the PDMS Integration -
Engineering Sub-Category.

Right-click on the AVEVA Engineering Database node and select the Get Work option from
the menu that is then displayed.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 4:31 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
The Graphical User Interface

Details of items in the selected database are then listed under the AVEVA Engineering
Database node.

A sub-node is displayed for each Engineering database table under the AVEVA Engineering
Database node in the left-hand window. To view details of all items in a table, select the
appropriate sub-node.
To view details of a single item, expand the item category node and select the item in
question from the list of items under that node.
To connect to a different database, right-click on the AVEVA Engineering Database node
and select the Logout option, then repeat the Login procedure as described above.

Method 2
Before AVEVA Engineering items can be imported into the database, mappings must be set
up between AVEVA Engineering and AVEVA P&ID fields, and the appropriate AVEVA
Engineering database must first be logged onto to.
Mapping between AVEVA Engineering and AVEVA P&ID fields is set up using facilities in
AVEVA P&ID Reports. Refer to AVEVA P&ID Reports documentation for details.

Note: The import procedure can also be carried out in AVEVA P&ID Reports.

To log onto the AVEVA Engineering database right-click on the AVEVA P&ID Database node
and select the Login option from the menu that is then displayed.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 4:32 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
The Graphical User Interface

The Engineering Login dialog is then displayed.

Enter the appropriate login details for the Engineering project and database, and press the
OK button to complete the login.
To import the AVEVA Engineering data, right-click on the AVEVA P&ID Database node and
select the Import option from the menu that is then displayed.
The Import from AVEVA Engineering Data Model dialog is then displayed:

The dialog displays the total number or items to be imported. It also displays sub-totals of
new items, items existing in the P&ID database that will be updated by the import, items
existing in the P&ID database that will not be updated by the import, and items existing in

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 4:33 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
The Graphical User Interface

the P&ID database that have been deleted in AVEVA Engineering (see 4.5.8: Processing
Deleted Items below).
To import the items individually select the Process one by one button to display the Import
Differences dialog. The grid view will display details of the first items to be imported.
To import the all items at once select the Batch process all button to display the Import
Differences dialog. The grid will display details of all the items to be imported.

Select the individual item fields to be imported by clicking their relevant checkboxes, or
choose all the records by checking the Accept all checkbox.
Select the Save button to proceed with the import.
If the Batch process all option was selected, the complete import then takes place. All
selected items are imported.
If Process one by one option was selected, the first item is imported. The dialog will then
refresh to display details of the next item. Proceed as described above until each item has
been imported.
Once the import is complete, the imported items are listed under the Unassigned node. See
4.5.3: Assigning Unassigned Items to a Drawing. In the grid items imported from AVEVA
Engineering will display “Engineering” in their DataSource fields, and unique Engineering
identifiers for each item in their Reference Key fields.
Items already existing in AVEVA P&ID which have changed in AVEVA Engineering will be
automatically updated in the grid and in drawings.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 4:34 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
The Graphical User Interface

4.5.8 Processing Deleted Items

If there are any items existing in the P&ID database that have been deleted in AVEVA
Engineering, select the Process deleted button on the Import from AVEVA Engineering
Data Model dialog to process them. Details of the deleted items are then listed:

To delete such an item in the P&ID database, check its Delete checkbox. Once the required
checkboxes are checked, select the Delete button to continue.
Once the import procedure is complete, each of the items selected for deletion in the above
dialog is marked as deleted in the AVEVA P&ID database. In P&ID the tags of such items
will be "null", i.e. they will be replaced with the project null character on drawings and
elsewhere.
Also, records of such items are assigned a record status of ‘D’ in AVEVA P&ID Reports.

4.5.9 Zooming into an item on the Drawing

To select an item on the drawing and zoom into it, select the item in the grid and either right-
click and select the Zoom-In option from the menu that is then displayed, or select this
button from the area above the grid: .

4.5.10 Labelling the Drawing with Data from the P&ID Data Grid
All of the data displayed in the tables in the right-hand window of the P&ID Data Grid may be
used to label the drawing. In this way, the drawing may be labelled with data not available
using the normal labelling procedures, i.e. with properties of items that are not included in
the standard labels.
For details of this procedure see 8.6.22: Labelling with Data from the P&ID Data Grid.
See also 8.6.23: Refreshing P&ID Data Grid Labels.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 4:35 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
The Graphical User Interface

4.5.11 Configuring the Grid Layout

• Adding, Removing and Re-Ordering Columns
• Grouping Data
• Filtering Data
• Fixing Columns and Rows

• Adding, Removing and Re-Ordering Columns

The order in which columns are displayed from left to right can be changed. To change the
position of a column, drag and drop the column heading to the required position.
The width of columns may also be changed. Place the cursor at the edge of a column
heading, hold down the left-mouse button and drag it out or in to the required width.
To add or remove columns, and to change the default order that columns are displayed in
from left to right, open the grid to be configured, and select this button from the area above
the grid: .

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 4:36 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
The Graphical User Interface

The Grid Column Settings dialog is then displayed:

The Select Type field lists each of the grids, for example the grid displaying instrument
details (INSTLIST). By default, the grid displayed when the dialog was accessed is
displayed. Select another grid type if required.
The Column Name fields list all the data columns that may be displayed in the selected grid.
To include a column in the display, check the adjacent Visibility checkbox. To remove it,
uncheck the checkbox.
To change the default order in which columns are displayed, select a column from the list
and press the up or down arrow button as appropriate. Multiple columns can be selected
and moved.
Select the Apply button to save the changes without closing the dialog.
Select the OK button to save the changes and close the dialog.
Select the Cancel button to close the dialog without saving the changes.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 4:37 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
The Graphical User Interface

• Grouping Data
The format of the display of items can be changed so that records with attribute values in
common are grouped together. For example, item records can be grouped according to their
Description or Tag.
To group data, first activate this facility by selecting this button from the area above the grid:
.
The grouping bar is then displayed above the column headings:

To group data, drag and drop the column heading of the attribute in question into the space
above the column headings.

The form then changes to display the name of each group in the following format:
<Attribute Name>: <Attribute Value> <(Number of records in the group)>.
The name of the column that records are grouped by is displayed in the grouping bar.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 4:38 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
The Graphical User Interface

To view the items within a group, click on the “+” button next to the group name. The items
are then listed under the name. Press the “-“ button to close the list.

Note that the fields within a group can be fixed, moved and filtered in the normal way.

- Grouping by Multiple Attributes

Records can be grouped by more than one attribute. For example, by Description and then
by Tag. To group by a second attribute, for example Tag, drag and drop the heading of this
attribute into the grouping bar.
If the heading of the second attribute (e.g. Tag) is dropped to the right of the first attribute
(Description), items will be grouped first by (Description), then by (Tag).
For example, each group of item records with the same Description will be sub-divided into
groups of items with the same Tag.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 4:39 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
The Graphical User Interface

If the second heading is dropped to the left of the first heading, records will be grouped the
other way round.

- Ungrouping Data
To "ungroup" data, drag and drop the column heading or heading from the grouping bar
back to the column bar.
To remove the grouping bar, select the button above the grid again.

• Filtering Data
The data displayed in a grid can be filtered so that only items that meet the criteria set in the
filter conditions are displayed.
Filters are applied using the filter row, which is located below the column headings.
A basic filter can be applied by typing a value into the filter row above the appropriate
column. The grid will then be filtered to display only those records that include a value in that
column that matches or starts with that filter value.
Alternately, hover the cursor over the filter row field for the appropriate column and click on
the button that is then displayed at the end of the field.. A list of filtering options is then
displayed.

If (Blanks) is selected the filter will restrict the data displayed to those records that do not
have a value in the selected column.
If (NonBlanks) is selected the filter will restrict the data displayed to those records that do
have a value in the selected column.
If (Custom) is selected, the Enter Filter Criteria dialog will be displayed. This is used to set
up more advanced filters (see below).
If a column value is selected from the list, only records that contain that value in the column
are displayed.

- Applying a Custom Filter

More complicated filters can be set up using the Enter filter criteria dialog. To access, select
the (Custom) option in the list. The Enter filter criteria for [name of field] dialog is then
displayed.
Two types of filter conditions can be set up using this dialog, “And” and “Or”. For data to be
displayed on a tab, it must either match all of the “And” conditions and at least one of the
“Or” conditions.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 4:40 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
The Graphical User Interface

To set up a custom filter:

1. In the Operator field, select an operator. In the Operand field, select a value.
2. To add a second condition, select the Add a condition button. Another row of fields is
then added to the form in which a filter condition can be entered as described above.
Repeat for each required filter condition.
3. Specify whether the conditions are "And" conditions or "Or" conditions by selecting
either the And condition or Or condition button.
4. To delete a condition, select it by pressing the button at the beginning of the filter
condition row, then press the Delete Condition button.
5. When all the required filter conditions have been set up, press the OK button. The filter
will then be applied to the grid.

- Removing Filtering

To remove a specific column filter click the clear filtering button for the column: .
To remove all filters from a grid, click the clear filtering button at the start of the filtering row.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 4:41 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
The Graphical User Interface

• Fixing Columns and Rows

Columns and rows can be fixed. When a column is fixed, it is moved to the left-hand edge of
the grid, and remains fixed in that position and visible when the grid is scrolled to the right.
When a row is fixed, it is moved to the top of the grid, and remains fixed in that position and
visible when the grid is scrolled to down.
To fix a column, click on the pin button in the column heading. To fix a row, click on the pin
button in area to the left of the row.

The pin button changes to indicate that the column or row is pinned. Multiple columns and
rows can be pinned at the same time.

To un-pin a column or row, press the pin button again. The column or row is no longer
pinned, but will remain in the far-left or top position.

4.5.12 Exporting the Grid to an Excel Spreadsheet

To export a grid to an Excel spreadsheet, select this button from the area above the grid:
.
A Save As dialog is then displayed. Specify the name and location of the spreadsheet to be
generated.
Press the Save button. The report spreadsheet is then generated.
The data in the spreadsheet will be displayed in the same layout as the grid in currently in.

4.5.13 Viewing Item Datasheets

To view a datasheet for an AVEVA Instrumentation instrument or AVEVA Electrical
equipment, right-click on the item in the grid and select the View DataSheet option from the
menu that is then displayed.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 4:42 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
The Graphical User Interface

The datasheet for the item is then displayed.

A datasheet number must have been assigned to item in AVEVA Instrumentation or AVEVA
Electrical. If not, an error message will be displayed.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 4:43 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
The Graphical User Interface

4.6 AVEVA P&ID Tool Palette

The AVEVA P&ID Tool Palette is a customised version of the AutoCAD Tool Palette, used to
insert intelligent symbols and lines.

See 2.10: Customising the AVEVA P&ID Tool Palette for more details.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 4:44 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
The Graphical User Interface

4.7 The Drawing Page

4.7.1 Viewing Pipe and Inline Item Properties

The properties of pipes and items can be viewed on the drawing page by hovering the
cursor over the pipe segment or symbol in question. The properties are then displayed in a
tooltip as illustrated below.

Note: The USER_REMOVETOOLTIP user-defined directive in the Miscellaneous –

Settings Sub-Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program may be
set to turn tooltips off if required.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 4:45 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
The Graphical User Interface

4.7.2 Drawing Page Menus

Items on a drawing page have shortcut menus accessed by right-clicking on the them. The
options displayed depend on the item selected. Shortcut menus are also available for the
drawing page itself.

All items on a drawing page have a number of common options:

• The Enter and Cancel options are used to complete or abort commands on the
selected item(s).
• The Repeat Last Command option is used to repeat the last selected command.
• The Copy, Paste, Delete, Rotate and Move options can be used to perform these
actions on individual items, or on collections of items (using these options on the
drawing page menu – see below). For example, these options can be used to copy
(see 8.7.1: Copying Drawing Objects and Labels), paste, delete (see 8.7.6: Deleting
Drawing Objects), rotate (see 8.7.5: Rotating Drawing Objects) or move (see 8.7.2:
Moving Drawing Objects) a single item, or a group of items selected using the mouse.
• The Properties option opens the Properties dialog for the selected item, which can be
used to enter the labels and other details of the drawing or item. See 4.8: Properties
Dialogs.
• The Typicals option is available if the Typical Items facility is enabled at project level,
and if the item has been labelled with the minimum mandatory data for the item type.
The option provides access to a dialog box for the entry, deletion and modification of
the typical data. See 8.6.25: Labelling Typical Items.
• The Create Symbol option is used to access the Symbol Editor.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 4:46 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
The Graphical User Interface

The menus for pipes, pipe start nodes, trim pipes and so on include the following additional
options:

• The Segments... option opens a sub-menu which consists of options for adding,
merging, deleting and adding elbows to pipe segments. See 8.5.13: Adding Pipe and
Signal Line Segments, 8.5.14: Merging Pipe Segments, 8.5.15: Deleting Pipe and
Signal Line Segments) and 8.5.17: Adding Elbows to a Line.

• The Pipes... option opens a sub menu which consists of options for merging pipes,
splitting a pipe into two new pipes, splitting a branch off a pipe, and reversing the flow
of a pipe. See 8.5.9: Merging Pipes, Branches and Signal Lines, 8.5.10: Splitting Pipes
and Signal Lines, 8.5.11: Splitting off Branches and 8.5.12: Reversing Pipe and Signal
Line Flows)

• The Extend option is used to change the length of a line (i.e. a pipe, process link or
signal line). See 8.5.16: Changing the Length of Lines.
• The Break option is used to manually insert a break in a pipe. See 8.5.8: Breaking
Lines.
• The Refresh Pipe Arrows option is used to redraw the automatically placed pipe
arrows (flow direction indicators) of a pipe. This may be required in case the flow
direction is changed and the arrows do not immediately re-orientate themselves
automatically.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 4:47 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
The Graphical User Interface

• The Flow Arrows ON-OFF option is used to turn the display of automatically placed
flow arrows on or off. See 8.3.1: Turning Automatic Flow Arrows On and Off.
• The Set As Main on - off option is used, in the case of pipes that have multiple labels,
to set one of these labels as the “main pipe label”. See 8.6.27: Setting a Pipe Label as
the Main Label.
• The Add Label... option is used to place additional labels on a labelled pipe (use the
Properties option to enter properties for an unlabelled pipe or to edit an existing pipe
label). See Adding Extra Labels to a Labelled Pipe.
The instruments menu also includes the Segments... option and sub-menu. In the case of
instruments, only the Add option is used, for use if a pipe segment is to be added to an
inline instrument at the end of a pipe. See 8.5.13: Adding Pipe and Signal Line Segments.
The equipment menu include the following additional options:

• The Add Trim Label... option is used to label the trim of a vessel. See Adding a Trim
Label.
• The Add Header option is used to add and edit equipment headers. See 8.6.5: Adding
Equipment Headers.
The Valves menu includes the following additional option:

• The Add Label... option is used to label a valve with valve properties inherited from the
pipe the valve is on. See Label Valves with Properties Inherited from Pipe.
The Pipe Flag menu includes the following additional options:

• The Open Target Drawing... option is used to open the drawing on which the linked
pipe flag is located, assuming the connection between the two flags has been
hyperlinked.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 4:48 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
The Graphical User Interface

• The Propagate... option is used to propagate the properties of a pipe to another pipe
via connected pipe flags. See Propagating Changes to Pipe Properties.
• The Disconnect... option is used to disconnect linked pipe flags. See Disconnecting
Pipe Flags.
The instrument label balloon menu includes the following additional options:

• The Associate Text Option is used as part of the AutoCAD drawing upgrade routine to
upgrade AutoCAD text to labels for instruments. See Upgrading Instrument Text.
• The Associate as Label Balloon option is used as part of the AutoCAD drawing
upgrade routine to associate an upgraded label balloon to an inline instrument. See
Associating Instrument Label Balloons with Inline Instruments.
The pipe label menu includes a Set as Default Label option, used to specify that a specific
pipe label is the default label by which a pipe will be identified in the database. See Setting a
Pipe Label as the Default Pipe Label.
If multiple items are selected, or if no item is selected on the drawing page, right clicking
opens the drawing page menu, which includes the following additional options:

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 4:49 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
The Graphical User Interface

• The various Zoom options and the Aerial View... option are used to change the
viewing magnification and area.
• The Regen option refreshes the drawing display.
• The Delete Error Blocks option is used to delete error blocks from the drawing after
the errors they highlight have been resolved.
• The Ports Display -on and Ports Display -off options are used to turn the display of
valve ports on and off. See 8.3.4: Turning the Display of Ports On and Off.
• The Insert Symbol... option opens the Symbol Explorer, from which the required
symbol can be selected for insertion. See 8.4.1: Inserting Symbols - General
Information.
• This menu also includes the Copy, Paste, Delete, Rotate and Move options, so that
these actions can be carried out on the multiple items selected.
• The Properties option on this menu is used to open the Properties Dialogs for the
drawing, in which the title and other general drawing details can be added or edited.
• The Upgrade Utility Commands options are used to upgrade non-intelligent "dumb"
AutoCAD pipes, symbols and text to intelligent AVEVA P&ID items and labels. See 5.4:
Upgrade Procedures in AVEVA P&ID.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 4:50 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
The Graphical User Interface

4.8 Properties Dialogs

Properties dialogs are used to add and modify the “intelligence” associated with engineering
items, such as the label (tag) and other details. Properties dialogs are also available for
entering general details of drawings, and to select default settings relating to drawing and
labelling.
There are two types of Properties dialog, modal and non-modal. There is a modal dialog for
each type of item for which properties can be viewed and entered. Only one modal dialog
can be opened at a time.
There is a single non-modal dialog which displays the details of whichever item is currently
selected. Unlike the modal dialog, other dialog can be opened and interacted with while this
dialog is open.

4.8.1 Modal Properties Dialogs

• Modal Properties dialogs can be accessed in various ways. They can be opened by
selecting an item on the drawing page or the Engineering Explorer, and then selecting
the "Properties" options on the shortcut menu for the item. Alternately, activate the
labelling command first and then select an item to be labelled. See 8.4.1: Inserting
Symbols - General Information.
• The modal Properties dialog for an item may also be displayed automatically when an
item is placed on the drawing if "auto-labelling" is on for the category of item. For
example, if auto-labelling is on for equipment, immediately after an equipment item is
placed, the modal Properties dialog for the equipment opens automatically. Auto-
labelling can be switched on and off facilities in the Pipeline Group of the Home Tab.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 4:51 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
The Graphical User Interface

• Modal Properties dialogs consist of two tabs. The Properties tab is used to enter the tag
and other essential engineering data for the item.
• It may also be used to change the layer that the item label is located on, and the line
type and line type scale of the item symbol.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 4:52 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
The Graphical User Interface

• The All Properties tab includes fields for entering all data relating to the item, for
example additional engineering data and the appearance of the item label, as well as
the fields on the Properties tab.

• Fields are grouped under headings into logical categories. The fields within a category
can be hidden or revealed by using the +/- boxes at the left of each category heading.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 4:53 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
The Graphical User Interface

• Beneath the fields, tips on how to complete each individual field are displayed as each
field is selected. A preview of how the item tag will appear on the P&ID is also
displayed, as configured in the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program.
• Many of the fields on a modal Properties dialog can be completed by selecting from a
drop-down list. These lists contain the values that are "allowed" for the particular field.
List of values can be accessed by clicking the button at the right-hand side of the field.
The lists of values display descriptions of each value.
When typing into a field that has a list of values, this list is displayed automatically after
the first character is entered. You may then select the rest of the entry from the list, or
continue to type it in. The permissible values comprising such lists are held in the
validation files for the project (see 3.5: Validation). If an invalid entry is made, the field
will replace the invalid value with a default value from the list.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 4:54 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
The Graphical User Interface

• The project can be set-up so the last value entered in a Properties dialog field
automatically populates that field that next time that Properties dialog is accessed for
an unlabelled item of that item type. This is set up using the Pipes - Settings Sub-
Category, Instruments - Settings Sub-Category, Equipment - Settings Sub-Category,
Valves - Settings Sub-Category and Miscellaneous - Settings Sub-Category of the
AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program.
• User Defined Attributes (UDAs) may be defined for project items (see 6.12: Adding
User-Defined Attributes). The Properties dialogs for these items will include the fields
required to enter values for these attributes.
Note: In the rest of this document, modal Properties dialogs are simply referred to as
"Properties dialogs".

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 4:55 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
The Graphical User Interface

4.8.2 Non-Modal Properties Dialog

• The non-modal Properties dialog is opened by select the P&ID Properties option in the
Properties Group of the Home Tab:

• The dialog displays details of whichever item is currently selected on the drawing. If no
item is selected, the drawing properties are displayed.
• The non-modal Properties dialog displays all the properties of the item, including UDAs
etc, on a single tab.
• Note that tags, pipe sizes, instrument types and other validated data cannot be entered
or changed using this dialog. A button in each tag field opens the relevant modal
Properties dialog, in which the required values must be entered:

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 4:56 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
The Graphical User Interface

The modal dialog will include a field for all the data of the item that cannot be modified
in the non-modal dialog.
• Drawings can be labelled from the non-modal dialog by hovering the mouse over the
value in the Properties dialog that the drawing is to be labelled with, then moving the
cursor over the drawing. The user will then be prompted to pick a point place the label.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 4:57 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
The Graphical User Interface

4.9 AVEVA P&ID Tabs

The first three tabs of the AVEVA P&ID ribbon menu consist of AVEVA P&ID specific
commands.
See:
• Home Tab
• Data Management Tab
• Utilities Tab

4.9.1 Home Tab

• AVEVA P&ID Group

The AVEVA P&ID group consists of a single menu:

Project Administrator
Used to open the AVEVA P&ID Project Administrator program.
See 2.3: AVEVA P&ID Project Administration Program.
Refresh Settings
Used to update the drawing with the current project settings (see 2.2: Project Options
Overview).

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 4:58 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
The Graphical User Interface

• Modify Group
The Modify group consists of the following menus:

Move
Used to move items to different locations in the drawing.
See 8.7.2: Moving Drawing Objects.
Copy
Used to copy items to different locations in the drawing.
See 8.7.1: Copying Drawing Objects and Labels.
Rotate

Used to rotate items through 90o.

See 8.7.5: Rotating Drawing Objects.
Mirror
Used to mirror AVEVA P&ID entities or groups. Operates almost identically to the
AutoCAD command except the mirrored object(s) are always retained.
See 8.7.3: Mirroring Drawing Objects.
Stretch
Operates as for the moving command (see above) but retains connections enabling
stretching to take place.
See 8.7.4: Stretching Drawing Objects.
Delete
Used to delete both AVEVA P&ID and non-AVEVA P&ID entities.
See 8.7.6: Deleting Drawing Objects.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 4:59 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
The Graphical User Interface

Change to Non-Plot Layer

Use to move items to the non-plot layer.
See 8.7.9: Moving Items to the Non-Plot Layer.
Find and Replace
Used for performing global editing on labels other than pipe labels.
See 8.6.30: Globally Editing Labels.

Add Segment
Used to add a new segment to the end of a pipe or signal line.
See 8.5.13: Adding Pipe and Signal Line Segments.
Delete Segment
Used to delete a pipe segment.
See 8.5.15: Deleting Pipe and Signal Line Segments.
Merge Segment
Used to merge two pipe segments into one.
See 8.5.14: Merging Pipe Segments.
Extend Segment
Used to change the length of a pipe.
See 8.5.16: Changing the Length of Lines.
Elbow Stretch
Used to add an elbow to a line.
See 8.5.17: Adding Elbows to a Line.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 4:60 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
The Graphical User Interface

Split To Main Pipe

Used to split a single main pipe or signal line into two separate pipes or signal lines.
See 8.5.10: Splitting Pipes and Signal Lines.
Split Branch Pipe
Used to split a section of a pipe off as a branch.
See 8.5.11: Splitting off Branches.
Main to Branch Pipe
Used to change pipes into branches.
See 8.5.18: Changing Pipes to Branches and Branches to Pipes.
Branch to Main Pipe
Used to change branches into pipes.
See 8.5.18: Changing Pipes to Branches and Branches to Pipes.
AVEVA Connect
Used to connect nozzles to pipes.
See 8.5.20: Connecting Pipes to Nozzles and Equipment.
AVEVA Disconnect
Used to disconnect nozzles from pipes.
See 8.5.21: Disconnecting Pipes from Nozzles and Equipment.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 4:61 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
The Graphical User Interface

Break
Used for manually breaking pipes, process links and signal lines where they cross
other lines.
See 8.5.8: Breaking Lines.
Merge Branch/Pipe
Used for merging two separate pipes, branches or signal lines into a single pipe,
branch or signal line.
See 8.5.9: Merging Pipes, Branches and Signal Lines.
Reverse Flow
Used to reverse the flow of a pipe.
See 8.5.12: Reversing Pipe and Signal Line Flows.

• Pipeline Group
The Pipeline Group consists of the following menus and drop-down lists:

Draw Pipeline
Used to draw pipes. The pipe will be drawn with the tracing type, pipe style and end
styles selected from the above list boxes.
See 8.5.1: Drawing Pipes.
Process Link
Used to draw process links between process and instrument items where the flow line
has no line number. Also between two instruments where the connecting line is not a
signal line.
See 8.5.3: Drawing Process Links.
Instrument Link
Used to draw process links (see above) of the instrument (or "legacy") process link
type.
See 8.5.3: Drawing Process Links.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 4:62 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
The Graphical User Interface

Used to select a pipe style.

Used to select pipe end styles.

Used to select a pipe tracing type.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 4:63 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
The Graphical User Interface

Add Label
Used to add additional labels to labelled pipes.
See Adding Extra Labels to a Labelled Pipe.
Change Style
Used to change the pipe style of an existing pipe. Select the new pipe style from list
box described above. Then select this button followed by the pipe the style of which is
to be changed.
See 8.5.4: Changing Pipe Styles.
Add Trace
Used to add tracing of a project definable style to an existing pipe. Inline fittings are
automatically traced around.
See 8.5.5: Applying Tracing to Pipes.

BREAK
Used to switch automatic pipe breaks on or off.
ARROWS
Used to switch automatic directional flow arrows on or off.
TRACE
Used to switch automatic tracing on or off.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 4:64 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
The Graphical User Interface

The PIPE, EQUIP, VALVE, NOZZLE and INSTR checkboxes are used to set whether
or not the Properties Dialogs of items in these categories will open automatically when
an item placed on a drawing, so that the item may be labelled straight away. For
example, if the Equip checkbox is checked, immediately after an equipment item is
placed, the Properties dialog for the equipment opens automatically.

• Signal Line Group

Draw Signal Line
Used to draw signal lines. The style, thickness and colour are all project definable.
See 8.5.6: Drawing Signal Lines.

Used to select a signal line style.

Change Style
Used to change the signal line style of existing signal lines.
See 8.5.7: Changing Signal Line Styles.

• Symbol Group
The Symbol group consists of the following menus:

Note
Notes may be added to any item except clouds. They may be up to 132 characters long
and appear in the output files when an export is carried out.
See 8.6.29: Adding Notes to Items.
Revision Cloud
Clouds are normally used to highlight changes from the previous revision of a drawing.
This command draws revision clouds to any size.
See 8.7.10: Drawing Revision Clouds.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 4:65 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
The Graphical User Interface

Insert UDAs
Used to label items on a drawing with their User-Defined Attribute (UDA) values,
including DataSet UDAs.
See 8.6.33: Labelling Items with UDAs.

Assembly
Groups a collection of VPE Workbench designators and values into assemblies, also
called Design Data Templates. An assembly may be repeatedly used on the same flow
diagram or on other flow diagrams.
See 8.9.1: Creating Assemblies.
Exchange Symbol
Used to exchange one type of symbol for another.
See 8.7.7: Exchanging Individual Symbols.
Global Symbol Exchange
Used for performing all symbol exchanges other than exchanges of individual symbols.
Used in conjunction with the entries in the Symbol Exchange List in the List of Values
Configuration Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program. Client
symbols may be converted using this procedure.
See 8.7.8: Exchanging Symbols Globally.
Inherit Owner Pipe Data
Used to set individual valves and instruments to inherit their label data from a selected
pipe.
See 8.6.31: Setting Symbols to Inherit Label Data from a Manually Selected Pipe.
Remove Inherit Data
Used to turn off the inheritance of pipe label data for instruments, inline equipment,
valves and line fittings.
See 8.6.32: Switching off Label Data Inheritance from Pipes.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 4:66 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
The Graphical User Interface

Assign Tags Equipment

Used to replace equipment tags with tags in the automatic tag format.
Assign Tags Instruments
Used to replace Instrument tags with tags in the automatic tag format.
Assign Tags Pipes
Used to replace pipe tags with tags in the automatic tag format.
Assign Tags Valves
Used to replace valve tags with tags in the automatic valve tag format.
See 8.6.26: Replacing Tags with Tags in the Automatic Tag Format.

• Properties Group
The Properties group consists of the following commands:
Properties
Used to place labels or 'intelligence' on the flow diagram. Also used to edit non-AVEVA
P&ID text.
See 8.6.1: Labelling - General Information.
P&ID Properties
Used to open the Non-Modal Properties Dialog.
Show Object Associations
Used to show the associations between items vessel and its nozzles. Associated items are
highlighted.
See 8.9.5: Show Associations between Items.
List AVEVA P&ID attributes
Lists the item handle, registered application name, code and ASCII string (item type) of a
selected item. The sequence id is also shown if you choose a label.
See 8.9.6: List Item Details.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 4:67 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
The Graphical User Interface

4.9.2 Data Management Tab

• P&ID Reports Group

The P&ID Reports group consists of the following commands:
P&ID Reports Launch
Used to open an AVEVA P&ID Reports database.
See 8.8.4: Opening a P&ID Reports Database.
Login
Used to login to an AVEVA P&ID Reports database.
See 8.8.3: Connecting to a P&ID Reports Database.
Load P&ID Grid
Used to open the P&ID Data Grid.
Refresh Grid
Used to refresh labels added to the drawing from the P&ID Data Grid.
See 8.6.23: Refreshing P&ID Data Grid Labels.

• AVEVA Integration Group

The AVEVA Integration group consists of the following commands:
Synchronise
Used to validate and export data on a drawing.
See 8.8.6: Synchronising Data with a VPE Workbench Database.
Login
Used to connect to a VPE Workbench database.
See 8.8.8: Connecting to a VPE Workbench Database.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 4:68 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
The Graphical User Interface

Logout
Used to disconnect from a VPE Workbench database.
See 8.8.9: Disconnecting from a VPE Workbench Database.
Properties
Used to select VPE Workbench data to associate with items on the drawing.
See 8.8.10: Labelling with VPE Workbench Data.
Refresh
Used to refresh VPE Workbench data displayed on a drawing.
See 8.8.16: Exporting Data to ISO 15926 Files.
Insert Tables
Used to place tables of VPE Workbench data on a drawing.
See 8.8.11: Inserting Tables of VPE Workbench Data.
Make Synch Batch File
Used to transfer data to VPE Workbench from a batch of drawings.
See 8.8.7: Synchronising Multiple Drawing Data with VPE Workbench.
Publish to AVEVA NET
Used to export drawing data in a format that can be imported into AVEVA NET Portal.
See 8.8.15: Publishing Data to AVEVA NET.
Save Work
Used to save data to a PDMS Schematic database.
See 8.8.14: Transferring Data to PDMS Schematic Databases.
Piping Sequence
Used to view and edit the sequence of entities in pipes.
See 8.9.8: Viewing and Editing Pipe Entity Sequences.
Delete Error Blocks
Used to delete error blocks from the drawing, for example those issued during the
Synchronising Data with a VPE Workbench Database process.
Deleting Error Blocks.

ISO 15926
Used to export data from a drawing to an XML file in ISO 15926 format.
See 8.8.16: Exporting Data to ISO 15926 Files.
ISO 15926 Batch
Used to export data from multiple drawings to XML files in ISO 15926 format.
See 8.8.16: Exporting Data to ISO 15926 Files.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 4:69 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
The Graphical User Interface

• Import/Export Group
The Import/Export group consists of the following menus and commands:
Excel Open
Used to open an exported Excel spreadsheet for editing.
See 8.8.18: Editing P&ID Data in an Excel Spreadsheet.

Excel Import
Used to import data from an Excel spreadsheet.
See 8.8.19: Importing Data from Excel.
Make Excel Import Batch File
Used to create a batch file for importing data from multiple Excel spreadsheets into
multiple drawings.
See 8.8.17: Exporting Data to Excel.

Excel Export
Used to export data to an Excel spreadsheet.
See 8.8.17: Exporting Data to Excel.
Make Excel Export Batch File
Used to create a batch file for exporting data from multiple drawings into multiple Excel
spreadsheets.
See 8.8.19: Importing Data from Excel.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 4:70 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
The Graphical User Interface

Excel Filter
Used to specify the types of data to be exported to Excel spreadsheets, e.g. drawing
attributes, equipment, pipes etc.
See 8.8.17: Exporting Data to Excel.

• Compare Group
The Compare group consists of the following commands:
Document Manager
Used to open the Document Manager.
See 9: AVEVA P&ID Document Manager.
Issue
Used to issue a drawing revision to the project database for Document Manager.
See 8.8.5: Issuing Drawings for Document Manager.
Compare With
Used to compare the current drawing with a previous revision of the drawing. See 9.5:
Comparing Revisions.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 4:71 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
The Graphical User Interface

4.9.3 Utilities Tab

• Project Configuration Group

The Project Configuration group consists of the following menus and commands:

Update Equipment Tag

Used to implement changes to equipment tags on a drawing resulting from changes to
project configuration settings.
See 8.2.2: Updating Equipment Tags.
Update Pipe Tag
Used to implement changes to pipe tags on a drawing resulting from changes to project
configuration settings.
See 8.2.3: Updating PipeTags.
Update Spec Driven Data
Used to implement changes to drawings resulting from changes to Spec Driven project
configuration settings.
See 8.2.4: Updating Spec Driven Data.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 4:72 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
The Graphical User Interface

Refresh Pipe Style

Used to implement changes to drawings resulting from changes pipe style colours.
See 8.2.5: Updating Pipe Style Colours.

Audit
Checks the drawing for corrupted items and places an error balloon at each corrupted
item insertion point.
See 8.8.1: Checking for Corrupted Items.
Drawing History
Used to view details of the history of the current drawing.
See 8.9.12: Viewing a Drawing’s History.

The options on this menu are not used.

Set Aspect Ratio
Used to set the thumbnail images of symbols that may be displayed in the Symbol Explorer.
Opens a dialog into which the X and Y values can be entered.
Convert Units
Used to implement changes to drawings resulting from changes to the project label units.
8.2.6: Convert Project Label Units.
Find Start Node using Branch Id
Used when the Synchronising Data with a VPE Workbench Database procedure reports
that pipes have duplicated Branch Id's, this option assigns new, unique, Id's to selected
pipes.
See 8.9.7: Assigning a New Branch Id to a Pipe.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 4:73 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
The Graphical User Interface

• Non-Intelligent Entities Upgrade Group

The Non-Intelligent Entities Upgrade group consists of the following menus and commands:
Create Pipe
Used when upgrading AutoCAD lines to AVEVA P&ID pipes to create a pipe from selected
line segments and symbols.
See Creating a Pipe from Line Segments and Symbols.

Create Tee
Used when upgrading AutoCAD lines to AVEVA P&ID pipes to add tees to upgraded
lines.
See Adding Tees to Upgraded Pipe Junctions.
Reverse Pipe Segment
Used to reverse the flow direction of pipe segments.
See Reversing Pipe Segments.
Add Flow Arrows to Pipe/Pipes
Used to add flow arrows to upgraded pipes.
See Adding Flow Arrows to Upgraded Lines.

Remove Pipe
Used to reverse the upgrade of a pipe.
See Undoing the Upgrade of a Line.
Remove Entity From Pipe
Used to remove a symbol or segment from a pipe.
See Removing Entities from a Pipe.
Map Block Attributes to Pipe Field
Used to map the AutoCAD attributes of a block to AVEVA P&ID pipe fields, so that the
attribute values will populate those pipe fields.
See Mapping AutoCAD Attributes to AVEVA P&ID Pipe Fields.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 4:74 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
The Graphical User Interface

View Upgraded Entities

Used to identify which drawing entities have been upgraded and which have not.
See 5.4.4: Viewing Upgraded Entities.
Create Symbol
Used to access the Symbol Editor.
Upgrade Entities
Used to upgrade lines and blocks to the pipe types, signal line types and symbols mapped
to them using the AVEVA P&ID Drawing Upgrade Utility.
See Assigning Mapped Pipe Types and Signal Types to Lines.
Export Symbols
Used to export the symbols on a drawing. It copies all the symbols on a drawing to the
ExportSymbols folder of the project. From there they may be edited, or manually copied
elsewhere, e.g. to another project.
See 8.8.20: Exporting Symbols.

• P&ID Help Group

The P&ID Help group consists of the following menus and commands:
AVEVA P&ID Help
Opens the AVEVA P&ID Online Guide.
AutoCAD Help
Opens the AutoCAD help system.

AVEVA P&ID Support

Opens the AVEVA Helpdesk website, which provides online support.
What's New
Opens the “What’s New” screen, which lists and briefly describes the main changes to
functionality in the current version AVEVA P&ID. Selecting a link on this screen will
open the help topic relevant to the improvement, where more details can be found.
About AVEVA P&ID
Opens the AVEVA P&ID "About" screen, on which general product information is
displayed.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 4:75 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
The Graphical User Interface

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 4:76 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Upgrading AutoCAD Drawings

5 Upgrading AutoCAD Drawings

5.1 Introduction
Existing "dumb" AutoCAD drawings can be upgraded to "intelligent" AVEVA P&ID drawings
by using a combination of the AVEVA P&ID Drawing Upgrade Utility and commands within
AVEVA P&ID.

5.1.1 AutoCAD Drafting Guidelines

In order for the upgrade procedure to run as smoothly as possible, it is recommenced that a
number of guidelines be followed when drafting the AutoCAD drawings to be upgraded. See
5.2: AutoCAD Drafting Guidelines for details.

5.1.2 Upgrading AutoCAD Lines to AVEVA P&ID Pipes, Process Links and
Signal Lines
AutoCAD lines may optionally be mapped to AVEVA P&ID Pipe Types and Signal Line
Types using the AVEVA P&ID Drawing Upgrade Utility.
See 5.3.4: Assigning P&ID Pipe Types to AutoCAD Line Types and 5.3.5: Assigning P&ID
Signal Line Types to AutoCAD Line Types.
If inline items are to be upgraded as part of the line upgrade procedure, they must be
mapped to an AVEVA P&ID Symbol in the project using the AVEVA P&ID Drawing Upgrade
Utility.
See 5.3.3: Assigning P&ID Symbol Names to AutoCAD Blocks.
A procedure may then be carried out in AVEVA P&ID to convert AutoCAD lines to the Pipe
and Signal Line Types they have been mapped to.
See Assigning Mapped Pipe Types and Signal Types to Lines.
No further procedures are required to upgrade AutoCAD lines to Signal Lines and Process
Links. To complete the conversion of lines to Pipes:
1. The start and end points of the line, and the entities of the line that are to be upgraded
must be specified. An AVEVA P&ID pipe is then created from the selected segments
and symbols. See Creating a Pipe from Line Segments and Symbols.
Note that lines will be upgraded to an AVEVA P&ID Pipe of the current default Pipe
Type unless a Pipe Type has already been assigned to it as described above.
2. Any entities accidentally selected for inclusion in the upgraded line can be removed
from it. See Removing Entities from a Pipe.
3. Tees must then be added to the junctions of upgraded line segments. See Adding Tees
to Upgraded Pipe Junctions.
4. Flow arrows can then be added to the upgraded line. See Adding Flow Arrows to
Upgraded Lines.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 5:1 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Upgrading AutoCAD Drawings

5. When flow arrows are added they automatically point in the direction that the pipe was
drawn in. As this may not be the flow direction, pipe segments may be reversed so that
flow arrows point in the correct direction. See Reversing Pipe Segments.
6. The label balloons and connecting leader lines of inline instruments must then be
associated with the instruments. See Associating Instrument Label Balloons with Inline
Instruments.

5.1.3 Upgrading AutoCAD Blocks to AVEVA P&ID Symbols

There are four ways of converting AutoCAD blocks to AVEVA P&ID symbols:
• In the AVEVA P&ID Drawing Upgrade Utility assign AVEVA P&ID Item Types and
symbol property data to an AutoCAD blocks and then add those blocks as a new
AVEVA P&ID Symbols to the project (see 5.3.2: Assigning P&ID Item Types and
Symbol Data to AutoCAD Blocks).
Like any other project symbols, they can then be added to a drawing, or selected to
convert AutoCAD blocks to as described below.
• Map blocks to AVEVA P&ID Symbols using the AVEVA P&ID Drawing Upgrade Utility
(see 5.3.3: Assigning P&ID Symbol Names to AutoCAD Blocks), and then upgrading
them as part of the procedure for converting AutoCAD lines into AVEVA P&ID pipes
(see Creating a Pipe from Line Segments and Symbols).
• Map blocks to AVEVA P&ID Symbols using the AVEVA P&ID Drawing Upgrade Utility
and then upgrading all mapped blocks on a drawing using a procedure in AVEVA P&ID
(see Upgrading Multiple Blocks to Symbols).
• Individually upgrading blocks in a drawing by specifying a project Symbol for them to
be converted to (see Upgrading Individual Blocks to Symbols).

5.1.4 Upgrading AutoCAD Text to AVEVA P&ID Labels

No mapping procedures in the AVEVA P&ID Drawing Upgrade Utility. A number of
commands are provided in AVEVA P&ID to convert AutoCAD text to labels for different
types of AVEVA P&ID items.
See 5.4.3: Upgrading Text to Labels.

5.1.5 Viewing Upgraded and Un-upgraded Entities

A utility is provided which can be used to easily visually identify those items on drawing
which have and have not been upgraded.
See 5.4.4: Viewing Upgraded Entities.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 5:2 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Upgrading AutoCAD Drawings

5.2 AutoCAD Drafting Guidelines

In order for the upgrade procedure to run as smoothly as possible, it is recommenced that
the following guidelines be followed when drafting the AutoCAD drawings to be upgraded:
• Use different layers for primary pipeline and secondary pipelines, e.g. draft all primary
pipelines on the “MAJOR” layer and all secondary pipelines on the "MINOR” layer.
• All blocks should be placed with their respective names, not only on the drawing but
also in the project. Avoid different names for a single block, as will commonly happen if
CTRL+C and CTRL+V are used for copying block information. A block should be
unique for a project: avoid duplicate block definitions.
• Use a block scale of “1”. Symmetrical blocks with their widths in whole numbers are
ideal as this makes the automatic port upgrade procedure (the adding ports to symbol)
more efficient, and thus less effort is required subsequently, adding ports to symbols
manually.
• Information for components such as Pipes, Instruments, and Valves etc can either
come from attributed text or from plain text in the right format. For example, dumb text
such as "10-A-250" can be used to create a pipe tag in P&ID using the associate text
facility. This information can also come from attribute definitions in AutoCAD attached
to the block. In this case, the Attribute Mapping facility can be used to create tags.
• Equipment should be placed on the “EQUIP” layer.
• Equipment components should be placed on the “EQPT” layer.
• Piping components and inline instruments should be placed on the “PID” layer.
• Offline instruments should be placed on the “INST” layer.
• Connections to process lines should be placed on the “LINK” layer.
• Electrical and pneumatic lines should be placed on the “ELEC” layer.
• Capillary lines should be placed on the “CAPILLARY” layer.
• Software lines should be placed on the “SOFT” layer.
• Attributed text information shall be placed on the “ATT-TEXT” layer.
• Use a different layer for each type of component.
• Snap should be set to “On”.
• The lines or polylines that represent a single pipe should be drawn in the same
direction (e.g. left to right).
• The drawing of leader lines for instrument label balloons is recommended.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 5:3 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Upgrading AutoCAD Drawings

5.3 AVEVA P&ID Drawing Upgrade Utility

5.3.1 Starting the AVEVA P&ID Drawing Upgrade Utility

To open the AVEVA P&ID Drawing Upgrade Utility, select AVEVA > P&ID > P&ID Drawing
Upgrade from the Programs menu.
The utility is then displayed.

To select the drawings which are to be updated, select the Project Settings option from the
menu on the File tab:

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 5:4 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Upgrading AutoCAD Drawings

In the Select Project Folder field, enter the location of the configuration file (.PRJ) of the
P&ID project, or press the Browse button and browse for the file.

In the Select Drawing Folder field, enter the folder in which the drawings are located, or
press the Browse button and browse for it.
The Drawing List pane then lists all the .DWG files in the selected folder. To select a
drawings to for upgrade, check its checkbox. To check all the checkboxes, check the Select
all Files checkbox.
When the required drawings have been selected, select the OK button.
The utility grids are then populated with lists of the block, line, symbol etc data from the
selected drawings ready for mapping to AVEVA P&ID item types, pipe types etc.
Continue at:
• 5.3.2: Assigning P&ID Item Types and Symbol Data to AutoCAD Blocks
• 5.3.3: Assigning P&ID Symbol Names to AutoCAD Blocks
• 5.3.4: Assigning P&ID Pipe Types to AutoCAD Line Types
• 5.3.5: Assigning P&ID Signal Line Types to AutoCAD Line Types
Data in the grids can be grouped and filtered, and grid rows can be pinned. These facilities
work in the same way as those in the P&ID Data Grid. Refer to P&ID Data Grid - Configuring
the Grid Layout for more information.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 5:5 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Upgrading AutoCAD Drawings

5.3.2 Assigning P&ID Item Types and Symbol Data to AutoCAD Blocks
AutoCAD blocks can be converted to AVEVA P&ID symbols in two ways:
• Using the Blocks setup grid, they can be mapped to an AVEVA P&ID Item Type, and
have AVEVA P&ID symbol data such as Size Type, Insertion, PDMS Type etc assigned
to them. When the Process button above the grid is pressed, they are converted into
intelligent AVEVA P&ID symbols as new types of Symbols. This process is described
below.
• Alternatively, in the Symbol Mapping grid (see 5.3.3: Assigning P&ID Symbol Names to
AutoCAD Blocks), they can be mapped to an existing AVEVA P&ID Symbol in the
project. Such blocks can then be converted to the selected AVEVA P&ID Symbols
using procedures within the main AVEVA P&ID application (see Upgrade Procedures in
AVEVA P&ID - 5.4.1: Upgrading Lines to Pipes and Signal Lines and 5.4.2: Upgrading
Blocks to Symbols).
Open the Blocks setup grid by clicking this button:

The grid is then displayed.

The Symbol Name column lists the blocks from the selected drawings.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 5:6 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Upgrading AutoCAD Drawings

To view a symbol, click on its entry. It is then displayed in a separate window.

In the P&ID Type column, select the P&ID Item Types to be mapped to the blocks.
If a block is to be defined as a new symbol in the P&ID project., edit the Size Type, Insertion
etc columns to define the symbol data for that block. See AVEVA P&ID Project
Administration Program - Symbols Configuration Category - Entering Symbol Data for
guidance.
The next step is to process the blocks to add intelligence to them. If a block is to be included
from this process, check its Include checkbox.
Press the UnSelect All button to uncheck all Include checkboxes. The name of the button
then changes to Select All. Press it to check all Include checkboxes.
Whether or not the symbol definitions are to be added to the catalogue of project symbols
(as displayed in the Symbols Configuration Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project
Administration Program) is controlled by the Add symbol to catalogue / Do not add
Symbol to catalogue toggle button. If the button is set to Do not add Symbol to
catalogue, blocks are not added to the symbol catalogue. If the button is set to Add
Symbol to catalogue, they are.
Whether or not symbols with the same file names are to be overwritten in the project symbol
folder is controlled by the Export all symbols / Do not export existing Symbols toggle
button. If the button is set to Do not export existing Symbols, existing symbols are not
overwritten. If the button is set to Export all symbols, they are.
Press the Process button. The blocks are then opened in AVEVA P&ID and intelligence is
added to them to convert them into AVEVA P&ID symbols. They are processed one at a
time.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 5:7 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Upgrading AutoCAD Drawings

A dialog is opened which displays each block as it is processed:

Once the process is converted, a message displays the number of symbols successfully
export.

The selected symbols are copied to ExportSymbols folder of the project, as displayed in the
message. They can be viewed by clicking on this folder in the Symbol Explorer.

Note: Ports must now be added to the new symbols. Refer 4.4: Symbol Editor for details.

To view the log file of messages generated during the process press the View Log button.
The file then opens in Notepad.

5.3.3 Assigning P&ID Symbol Names to AutoCAD Blocks

AutoCAD blocks may be added to the project as new Symbols (see 5.3.2: Assigning P&ID
Item Types and Symbol Data to AutoCAD Blocks for details).
Alternatively they may be mapped to existing project Symbols and converted to symbols of
these types using a procedure in the main AVEVA P&ID application (see 5.4.2: Upgrading
Blocks to Symbols).

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 5:8 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Upgrading AutoCAD Drawings

The mapping procedure is carried out using the Symbol mapping grid. Open the Symbol
mapping grid by clicking this button:

The grid is then displayed.

The Symbol Name column lists the names of the AutoCAD blocks.
From the Mapped Symbol column, select the AVEVA P&ID project Symbol to map to each
AutoCAD block. By default, if there is project Symbol with the same name as a block, this
will be automatically selected. However a different Symbol can be selected if required.
To delete a mapping row, select it and press the Delete button.
AutoCAD block attributes can be mapped to AVEVA P&ID properties.
Click on a symbol name. The Properties dialog is then displayed, listing all the AutoCAD
attribute names of the selected block.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 5:9 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Upgrading AutoCAD Drawings

In the MappedName fields, select AVEVA P&ID properties to map the attributes to.

The following P&ID Item Types support attribute mapping:

Instruments (INS)
All Valves types (V*)
Nozzles (NOZ)
Reducers (RDC)
Spec Breaks (LSP)
Pipe Connector Flags (PFL)
When the block is upgraded to an AVEVA P&ID symbol, the mapped AVEVA P&ID
properties will automatically be populated with the values of the AutoCAD attributes they are
mapped to.
Once all Symbol names and attributes have been mapped, press the Save button.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 5:10 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Upgrading AutoCAD Drawings

5.3.4 Assigning P&ID Pipe Types to AutoCAD Line Types

The Pipe Line mapping grid is used to map AutoCAD lines to AVEVA P&ID Pipes Types,
including process links.
AutoCAD lines are mapped to AVEVA P&ID signal lines using the Signal Line mapping grid
(see 5.3.5: Assigning P&ID Signal Line Types to AutoCAD Line Types).
To open the Pipe Line mapping grid, press this button:

The grid is then displayed.

1. Select the Add button to add a row to the grid.

2. In the Pipe Type field, select the AVEVA P&ID Pipe Type that each line is to be mapped
to.
3. In the Line, Layer, Line Type and Colour columns enter the properties of the AutoCAD
line in the selected drawings that is to be mapped to the selected AVEVA P&ID Pipe
Type.
4. If a line type represents a process link, check its IsProcessLink checkbox.
5. Repeat the above procedure for each type of AutoCAD line to be mapped.
6. To delete a mapping row, select it and press the Delete button.
7. Once the pipe types have been mapped, press the Save button to save the mappings.
A procedure can then be carried out in AVEVA P&ID to apply the mapped types to AutoCAD
lines. Further procedures can then be carried out to convert these lines into AVEVA P&ID
pipes. For details, see 5.4.1: Upgrading Lines to Pipes and Signal Lines.

5.3.5 Assigning P&ID Signal Line Types to AutoCAD Line Types

The Line-Signal Mapping grid is used to map AutoCAD lines to AVEVA P&ID Signal Line
Types.
AutoCAD lines are linked to pipe types and process links using the Pipe Line mapping grid
(see 5.3.4: Assigning P&ID Pipe Types to AutoCAD Line Types).

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 5:11 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Upgrading AutoCAD Drawings

To open the Signal Line mapping grid, press this button:

The grid is then displayed.

1. Select the Add button to add a row to the grid.

2. In the Signal Type field, select the AVEVA P&ID Signal Type that each line is to be
mapped to.
3. In the Line, Layer, Line Type and Colour columns enter the properties of the AutoCAD
line in the selected drawings that is to be mapped to the selected AVEVA P&ID Signal
Type.
4. Repeat the above procedure for each type of AutoCAD line to be mapped.
5. To delete a mapping row, select it and press the Delete button.
6. Once the Signal Types have been mapped, press the Save button to save the
mappings.
A procedure can then be carried out in AVEVA P&ID to apply the mapped types to AutoCAD
lines, converting them to AVEVA P&ID Signal Lines. For details, see 5.4.1: Upgrading Lines
to Pipes and Signal Lines.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 5:12 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Upgrading AutoCAD Drawings

5.4 Upgrade Procedures in AVEVA P&ID

5.4.1 Upgrading Lines to Pipes and Signal Lines

This procedure is used to upgrade AutoCAD lines into AVEVA P&ID pipes, process links
and signal lines, including, if required, all the inline fittings, valves etc.

Note: If it is required to generate a simple line list from AVEVA P&ID using the Synchronize
facility (see 8.8.6: Synchronising Data with a VPE Workbench Database), it is not
necessary to upgrade inline symbols. Line lists can be generated from "semi-
intelligent" drawings in which only the lines themselves have been upgraded to
pipes.

Note: If required, enter the AVVCLDATA command at the command prompt to remove any
existing XDATA attached to the entities to be upgraded. This should be used before
starting the upgrade process on a dumb drawing. Do not use this command midway
or at the end of the upgrade process.

The procedure is as follows:

1. Assign AVEVA P&ID Pipe Types and Signal Types to AutoCAD lines, as specified by
mappings setup in the AVEVA P&ID Drawing Upgrade Utility. The upgraded lines will
adopt the appearance of the specified pipe types and signal types. See Assigning
Mapped Pipe Types and Signal Types to Lines.
2. The start and end points of the line, and the entities of the line to be upgraded must be
specified. An AVEVA P&ID pipe is then created from the selected segments and
symbols. See Creating a Pipe from Line Segments and Symbols.
3. Any entities accidentally selected for inclusion in the upgraded line can be removed
from it. See Removing Entities from a Pipe.
4. Tees must then be added to the junctions of upgraded line segments. See Adding Tees
to Upgraded Pipe Junctions.
5. Flow arrows can then be added to the upgraded line. See Adding Flow Arrows to
Upgraded Lines.
6. When flow arrows are added they automatically point in the direction that the pipe was
drawn in. As this may not be the flow direction, pipe segments may be reversed so that
flow arrows point in the correct direction. See Reversing Pipe Segments.
7. The label balloons and connecting leader lines of inline instruments must then be
associated with the instruments. See Associating Instrument Label Balloons with Inline
Instruments.
8. The upgraded line should now be labelled, either by using standard labelling facilities
(see 8.6.1: Labelling - General Information), or by upgrading AutoCAD text and
associating it with the line (see Upgrading Pipe Text).
Optionally, the AutoCAD attributes of a block can be mapped to AVEVA P&ID pipe
fields. The upgraded line can then be selected, and the values of the attributes will then
automatically populate the pipe property fields they were mapped to. See Mapping
AutoCAD Attributes to AVEVA P&ID Pipe Fields.
If required, an upgraded line may be changed back into a dumb AutoCAD line. See Undoing
the Upgrade of a Line.

• Assigning Mapped Pipe Types and Signal Types to Lines

The Pipe Types and Signal Types mapped to AutoCAD lines in the AVEVA P&ID Drawing
Upgrade Utility (see 5.3.4: Assigning P&ID Pipe Types to AutoCAD Line Types and 5.3.5:

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 5:13 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Upgrading AutoCAD Drawings

Assigning P&ID Signal Line Types to AutoCAD Line Types) are applied to all the AutoCAD
lines in a drawing by:
1. Selecting the Upgrade Utility Commands > Upgrade Entities option from the
shortcut menu of The Drawing Page or the Upgrade Entities option in the Non-
Intelligent Entities Upgrade Group of the Utilities Tab.
2. All AutoCAD lines in the drawing with sets of properties mapped to AVEVA P&ID Pipe
or Signal Types are then converted to lines in the mapped types and will adopt the
appearance of these types.
Note: When lines that have not had AVEVA P&ID Pipe or Signal Types assigned to them
using this procedure are upgraded to pipes using the procedure below, they will
automatically adopt the current default Pipe Type.

Note: This procedure will also convert all AutoCAD blocks that have had AVEVA P&ID
Symbol Types mapped to them in the in the AVEVA P&ID Drawing Upgrade Utility
(see 5.3.3: Assigning P&ID Symbol Names to AutoCAD Blocks) to AVEVA P&ID
symbols of the mapped types.

No further upgrade procedures are required to convert AutoCAD lines to AVEVA P&ID
Signal Lines and Process Links. To complete the conversion of AutoCAD lines to AVEVA
P&ID Pipes (and Process Links), proceed as described below.

• Creating a Pipe from Line Segments and Symbols

1. Select the Upgrade Utility Commands > Pipe Upgrade > Create Pipe option from
the shortcut menu of The Drawing Page or the Create Pipe option in the Non-
Intelligent Entities Upgrade Group of the Utilities Tab. The Command prompt will
display:

Pick start point of the line:

Pick the start of point of the line to be upgraded.

2. The Command prompt will display:

Pick second point to determine angle:

Pick a point a little further along the line from the start point.
3. The Command prompt will display:

Pick start point of the line:

Pick the end point of the line.

4. The Command prompt will display:

Pick second point to determine angle:

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 5:14 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Upgrading AutoCAD Drawings

Pick a point a little way back along the line from the end point.
5. The Command prompt will display:

Please select entities in the correct sequence, upstream

to downstream:

Select all the segments, and if they are to upgraded, the symbols that the pipe is to
consist of from upstream to downstream. The command prompt will display a count of
the number of entities selected.
6. Press Enter. The line and all selected entities will then be upgraded.
The line will then be upgraded to an AVEVA P&ID pipe of the default Pipe Type (unless
a Pipe or Signal Type has already been assigned to it as described above).
The line will be upgraded to the type of pipe, process link or signal line specified for the
AutoCAD line type in the AVEVA P&ID Drawing Upgrade Utility (see 5.3.4: Assigning
P&ID Pipe Types to AutoCAD Line Types and 5.3.5: Assigning P&ID Signal Line Types
to AutoCAD Line Types).
Select symbols will be upgraded to the types of items and symbols specified for the
AutoCAD block in the AVEVA P&ID Drawing Upgrade Utility (see 5.3.2: Assigning P&ID
Item Types and Symbol Data to AutoCAD Blocks and 5.3.3: Assigning P&ID Symbol
Names to AutoCAD Blocks).
If no mapping has been set up for a line type or block in the AVEVA P&ID Drawing
Upgrade Utility, it will not be upgraded.

Note: The sequence of entities in a pipe can be checked and if necessary edited using the
Viewing and Editing Pipe Entity Sequences procedure. This procedure can also be
used to add and remove entities to and from a pipe.

• Removing Entities from a Pipe

1. To remove entities from an upgraded pipe, that for example may have been selected
for inclusion in a pipe by mistake in the above upgrade procedure, select the Upgrade
Utility Commands > Pipe Upgrade > Remove Entity option from the shortcut menu
of The Drawing Page or the Remove Entity From Pipe option in the Non-Intelligent
Entities Upgrade Group of the Utilities Tab. The Command prompt will display:

Select entity:

2. Select the entity to be removed from the pipe.

Press Enter. The selected entity is then removed from the pipe.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 5:15 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Upgrading AutoCAD Drawings

• Adding Tees to Upgraded Pipe Junctions

1. Select the Upgrade Utility Commands > Pipe Upgrade > Create Tee option from the
shortcut menu of The Drawing Page or the Create Tee option in the Non-Intelligent
Entities Upgrade Group of the Utilities Tab. The Command prompt will display:

Select objects:

2. Select all the objects of the pipe that is to have a tee added to end of it, and all the
objects of the pipe that it forms a junction with.
Press Enter. The tee will then be added.

• Adding Flow Arrows to Upgraded Lines

1. Select the Upgrade Utility Commands > Pipe Upgrade > Add Flow Arrows to Pipe/
Pipes option from the shortcut menu of The Drawing Page or the Add Flow Arrows To
Pipe option in the Non-Intelligent Entities Upgrade Group of the Utilities Tab. The
Command prompt will display:

Select Pipe/Pipes to add flow arrows:

2. Select the pipes to which flow arrows are to be added.

Press Enter. The flow arrows will then be added to selected pipes.

• Reversing Pipe Segments

1. Select the Upgrade Utility Commands > Pipe Upgrade > Reverse Pipe Segment
option from the shortcut menu of The Drawing Page or the Reverse Pipe Segment
option in the Non-Intelligent Entities Upgrade Group of the Utilities Tab. The Command
prompt will display:

Select Segments to reverse flow:

Select the segments the flow of which is to be reversed.

2. Press Enter. The flow direction of the selected segments is then reverse, as indicated
by the flow arrows.

• Associating Instrument Label Balloons with Inline Instruments

1. Select the Associate as Label Balloon option fromThe Drawing Page shortcut menu
of the label balloon. Note that the balloon symbol must have been upgraded. The
Command prompt will display:

Select Symbol to Associate Balloon:

Select the appropriate instrument symbol.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 5:16 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Upgrading AutoCAD Drawings

2. The Command prompt will display:

Select Leader Line for the Balloon:

Select the leader line connecting the balloon symbol to the instrument symbol.
The selected balloon and leader line are then associated with the instrument.

• Mapping AutoCAD Attributes to AVEVA P&ID Pipe Fields

1. Select the Upgrade Utility Commands > Pipe Upgrade > Map Block Attributes to
Pipe Fields option from the shortcut menu of The Drawing Page or the Map UDAs To
Pipe Field option in the Non-Intelligent Entities Upgrade Group of the Utilities Tab. The
Command prompt will display:

Select Block for Pipe Attributes:

Pick the block that attributes will be mapped from.

2. The Properties dialog will then be displayed:

The dialog displays the names and values of the block's attributes. Select the pipe
fields to map the attributes to in the Pipe Field fields. Click OK.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 5:17 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Upgrading AutoCAD Drawings

The following P&ID Item Types support attribute mapping:

Instruments (INS)
All Valves types (V*)
Nozzles (NOZ)
Reducers (RDC)
Spec Breaks (LSP)
Pipe Connector Flags (PFL)
3. The Command prompt will display:

Select Pipe/Pipes for Attribute Mapping:

Select the pipe or pipes to which the block attributes will be mapped.
4. Press Enter. The property fields of the selected pipes will then be populated with the
values of the attributes mapped to them.

• Undoing the Upgrade of a Line

1. To reverse the upgrade of a pipe, reverting the pipe and it's entities to dumb AutoCAD
lines and blocks, elect the Upgrade Utility Commands > Pipe Upgrade > Remove
Pipe option from the shortcut menu of The Drawing Page or the Remove Pipe option
in the Non-Intelligent Entities Upgrade Group of the Utilities Tab. The Command
prompt will display:

Select Pipe:

Select the pipe.

2. Press Enter. The pipe will then be converted back into an AutoCAD line and its symbols
into AutoCAD blocks.
Note that the formatting of the pipe, for example its colour and line style does not
revert. It maintains its upgraded appearance but is not longer and "intelligent" AVEVA
P&ID pipe.

5.4.2 Upgrading Blocks to Symbols

"Dumb" AutoCAD blocks may be upgraded to "intelligent" AVEVA P&ID symbols as part of
the procedure for upgrading lines to pipes. See 5.4.1: Upgrading Lines to Pipes and Signal
Lines.
Other symbols, such as offline instruments and equipment should be upgraded using the
following procedures.
All AutoCAD blocks on that drawing have been mapped to AVEVA P&ID project Symbols
using the AVEVA P&ID Drawing Upgrade Utility (see 5.3.3: Assigning P&ID Symbol Names
to AutoCAD Blocks) can be upgraded to the mapped Symbols in one go. AutoCAD blocks
that have not been mapped must be upgraded individually.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 5:18 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Upgrading AutoCAD Drawings

Note: If required, enter the AVVCLDATA command at the command prompt to remove any
existing XDATA attached to the entities to be upgraded. This should be used before
starting the upgrade process on a dumb drawing. Do not use this command midway
or at the end of the upgrade process.

• Upgrading Multiple Blocks to Symbols

To upgrade all the blocks on a drawing to the project Symbols they have been mapped to in
the AVEVA P&ID Drawing Upgrade Utility:
1. Select the Upgrade Utility Commands > Upgrade Entities option from the shortcut
menu of The Drawing Page or the Upgrade Entities option in the Non-Intelligent
Entities Upgrade Group of the Utilities Tab.
2. All AutoCAD blocks in the drawing with Symbol mapping set up for them in the AVEVA
P&ID Drawing Upgrade Utility are then converted to the mapped AVEVA P&ID
Symbols.
Note: This procedure will also upgrade all AutoCAD lines with properties that have been
mapped to an AVEVA P&ID Pipe Type or Signal Type to Pipes/Signal Lines of those
types (see 5.3.4: Assigning P&ID Pipe Types to AutoCAD Line Types and A5.3.5:
Assigning P&ID Signal Line Types to AutoCAD Line Types).

• Upgrading Individual Blocks to Symbols

If a block has not been mapped to an AVEVA P&ID Symbol, or it is not required to be
converted to the Symbol it is mapped to, upgrade it as follows:
1. Right-click on the block to be upgraded and select the Upgrade Symbol option from the
drawing page shortcut menu. The Command prompt will display:

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 5:19 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Upgrading AutoCAD Drawings

2. The Symbol List dialog is then displayed, from which the type of symbol that the block
is to be upgraded to is selected:

3. Select the category of symbol from the left-hand window, and then the name of the
symbol from the left-hand window. If the name of the symbol is known, but not its
category, enter the name of the symbol in the Find field, and click on the Find button. To
select a symbol, click on it in the right-hand window. An image of it is displayed in the
lower half of the dialog box, along with the symbol name and description. Press the OK
button.
4. The block is then converted to an AVEVA P&ID symbol of the selected type.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 5:20 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Upgrading AutoCAD Drawings

5.4.3 Upgrading Text to Labels

AutoCAD text can be upgraded to an AVEVA P&ID label by associating it with the pipe or
item that it is to label. The text then changes, if required, to reflect the properties of the
selected pipe or item, and becomes a P&ID label.
This facility is available for pipes, nozzles, valves and instruments. Continue at:
• Upgrading Pipe Text
• Upgrading Nozzle and Valve Text
• Upgrading Instrument Text
Note: If required, enter the AVVCLDATA command at the command prompt to remove any
existing XDATA attached to the entities to be upgraded. This should be used before
starting the upgrade process on a dumb drawing. Do not use this command midway
or at the end of the upgrade process.

• Upgrading Pipe Text

AutoCAD text can be upgraded either to a full pipe label, which will consist of all the
properties included in the project pipe label format, or a partial pipe label which will consist
of a single pipe property.
Multiple label formats can be configured using the Select a Tag Format For Pipe dialog (see
below). The user can then select from these when upgrading text to pipe labels, or set up a
different format.
To upgrade AutoCAD text using the pipe label format currently selected in the Select a Tag
Format For Pipe dialog, select the AutoCAD text on The Drawing Page, then select
Drawing Upgrade Associate > Associate Text > To Pipe from the shortcut menu.
The Tag Attributes List dialog is then displayed:

The dialog lists the attributes and values of the selected text. As required, in the Association
column, match values to either the Tag, Start Node or End Node of the pipe to be labelled
with the text. The selected text will form the labels of these parts of the pipe.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 5:21 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Upgrading AutoCAD Drawings

Select OK.
The following will then be displayed if the tag format does not match the format of the
selected text:

If Yes is selected, the Select a Tag Format For Pipe dialog is then displayed. Select or
create a tag format as described below. If No is selected, the commands then ends.
After a tag format has been selected, or if the tag format does match the format of the
selected text, the Command prompt will then display:

Select pipe to associate label:

Select the pipe that the selected text is to become a label of.
The text will then be changed to an AVEVA P&ID label of the selected pipe, and if required
will change to reflect the properties of the pipe.

Note: Alternately, existing pipe labels can be changed to a selected AutoCAD text value. In
this case, the AutoCAD text will remain as it is, and the labels of the selected pipe will
change to it, i.e. the pipe properties will be updated with the AutoCAD text value.
Whether or not this option is applied is dependent on the setting of the Upgrade
Label checkbox on the Select a Tag Format For Pipe dialog (see below).

If attribute values were mapped to the pipe start and/or end nodes in the Tag Attributes List
dialog, the user will be prompted to position these values as pipe destination text. For
example:

Select start node to associate label:

- Setting Up Pipe Label Format or Selecting a Different Pipe Label Format

To configure label formats for upgrading pipe text, or to select a different existing format to
apply to AutoCAD text, select AutoCAD text on The Drawing Page, then select Drawing
Upgrade Associate > Associate Text > Configure... from the shortcut menu.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 5:22 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Upgrading AutoCAD Drawings

The Select a Tag Format For Pipe dialog is then displayed.

Those formats previously set up are listed in this dialog.

To configure a new format:
1. Click the New button. The Tag Format Editor dialog is then displayed.

2. Enter a description, plus any remarks if required.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 5:23 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Upgrading AutoCAD Drawings

3. The drop-down lists in the lower part of the dialog are used to select the label format,
i.e. the properties of the pipe that are to displayed, the order that they are to be
displayed in, and the delimiters that are to separate them. Select the properties and
delimiters from the list as required.
Note: If a format with more that one property is to be configured, i.e. a full pipe label, it must
be in exactly the same format as the Display Label Format, as set up on the Pipes -
Labels Sub-Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program.

The selected format is displayed in the field at the top of the dialog.
4. Once the required format has been set up, click Save. The dialog is then closed and
the new format added to the list in the Select a Tag Format For Pipe dialog.
To edit an existing format, select it from the list and click the Edit button. The Tag Format
Editor dialog is then displayed. Edit the format as described above.
To delete a format, select it from the list and click the Delete button.
To select a format to apply to AutoCAD text, click on it in the list of formats, and click the
Select button on the toolbar (top-right corner of the dialog). Until a different format is
selected from this dialog, all text upgraded to a pipe label will adopt this format.
If, instead of AutoCAD text being upgraded to AVEVA P&ID labels, the existing labels of
pipes are to be changed to the values of the AutoCAD text, ensure that the Upgrade Label
checkbox is not checked.

• Upgrading Nozzle and Valve Text

The procedures for upgrading AutoCAD text to a nozzle label and a valve label are the
same.
AutoCAD text can be upgraded to either the tag value or the size value of a nozzle or valve.
Select AutoCAD text on The Drawing Page, then select Drawing Upgrade Associate >
Associate Text > To Nozzle > or To Valve >, then either Tag or Size as required from the
shortcut menu.
The Command prompt will then display, for example:

Select nozzle:

Select the nozzle or valve that the selected text is to become a label of.
The text will then be changed to an AVEVA P&ID label of the selected item, and if required
will change to reflect the tag or size of that item.

• Upgrading Instrument Text

AutoCAD text is upgraded to instrument labels by selecting, for each piece of text, which
instrument property that text is to become.
To upgrade AutoCAD text to an instrument label, select the instrument label balloon on The
Drawing Page, then select Associate Text from the shortcut menu.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 5:24 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Upgrading AutoCAD Drawings

The Associate Text to Instrument Label dialog is then displayed.

In the dialog, click the ... button for the instrument component, for example Alarm 1, that the
AutoCAD text is to be upgraded to.
The dialog then closes and the Command prompt will display, for example:

Select text to associate with InstrumentAlarm1:

Select the text that is to be upgraded to the selected instrument property.

The dialog is then displayed again. Repeat the above procedure for each piece of AutoCAD
text to be upgraded by association with the selected instrument.
When each piece of AutoCAD text has been associated with an instrument property, click
OK.
The AutoCAD text will then be changed to AVEVA P&ID labels displaying the selected
properties, and if required will change to reflect the values of those properties.

5.4.4 Viewing Upgraded Entities

AVEVA P&ID includes a utility which can be used to quickly identify which drawing entities
have been upgraded and which have not, using colour.
From The Drawing Page shortcut menu of a drawing, select View Upgraded Entities or
select View Upgraded Entities option in the Non-Intelligent Entities Upgrade Group of the
Utilities Tab.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 5:25 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Upgrading AutoCAD Drawings

The AVEVA Dwg Viewer dialog is then displayed.

The dialog displays the selected drawing. Standard toolbar buttons are provided to pan,
zoom in, zoom out etc.
Initially, all drawing entities are displayed in grey. To apply different colours to different types
and states (upgraded or not upgraded) of entities, select the Set Colours button.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 5:26 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Upgrading AutoCAD Drawings

The following dialog is then displayed.

To specify a colour for a type of upgraded item, for labels, errors, warning and for entities
that have not been upgraded ("Undefined Entities"), click on the colour field next to the type
of entity. Select the required colour from the dialog that is then displayed. When the required
colours have been selected, click OK.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 5:27 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Upgrading AutoCAD Drawings

To apply the colours, select the Apply Colours Settings button. The selected colours are
then applied to the drawing view.

Entities that have errors or warnings associated with them can be displayed in specific
colours, as described above. To view an error or warning, hover the mouse cursor over the
entity in question:

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 5:28 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Drawing P&IDs

6 Drawing P&IDs

6.1 Quick Guide to Drawing P&IDs

The table below lists the procedures that are undertaken in order to draw a P&ID. Alongside
the procedures are references to the most efficient way a user can make use of the AVEVA
P&ID graphical user interface in order to carry out each procedure.
To learn more about each procedure, click on 'Details'. To learn more about a part of the
graphical user interface, click on the appropriate link text. There are links from all the
pictures of the toolbar buttons.
See also 8: AVEVA P&ID Procedures.

Procedure Best use of the Graphical User Interface

Create a new drawing Create a new AVEVA P&ID drawing, plus any required
See 6.2: Creating a New templates.
Drawing.
Start to draw the P&ID in AVEVA P&ID.
Add a title and other Complete the Properties Dialogs for the drawing.
general data to the
drawing
See 6.4: Titling a Drawing.
Insert equipment, valves, Select and insert the symbols using the Symbol Explorer.
line fittings, instruments
and so on
See 6.5: Inserting
Symbols.
Insert items in project Select and insert items from the Unassigned node of the
database not yet placed on Engineering Explorer.
a P&ID
6.7: Inserting Unassigned
VPE Workbench Items.
Label the symbols with tag Complete the Properties Dialogs of the items.
and other engineering
Will activate automatically after symbol is placed if “Auto-
data.
labelling” has been turned on in the Pipeline Group of the
See 6.10: Labelling
Home Tab.
Symbols.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 6:1 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Drawing P&IDs

Procedure Best use of the Graphical User Interface

Draw the required pipes, Use the Pipeline Group of the Home Tab to choose the
branches and process required type, style, tracing style and end styles, and
links whether flow arrows, breaks and tracing are placed
See 6.8: Drawing Pipes automatically.
and Connections.
Select the Draw Pipeline option in the Pipeline Group of the
Home Tab to start drawing pipes.
Select the Process Link option in the Pipeline Group of the
Home Tab to draw process links.
To edit lines and segments use the options in the Modify
Group of the Home Tab.
Select the Add Trace option in the Pipeline Group of the
Home Tab to add pipe tracing manually
To add flow arrows manually insert an arrow symbol.
Label the pipes Complete the Properties Dialogs for the pipes, plus reducers
See 6.11: Labelling Pipes. and spec breaks
Will activate automatically after pipe is drawn if "Auto-
labelling" has been turned on in the Pipeline Group of the
Home Tab.
If required, set pipe labels as the "main" pipe labels using
The Drawing Page shortcut menus.
Set valves and instruments Select the Inherit Owner Pipe Data option in the Symbol
to inherit label data from Group of the Home Tab.
pipes
See 6.10.4: Label
Inheritance from Owning
Pipes.
Draw the required signal Use the Signal Line Group of the Home Tab to choose the
lines required signal line style.
See 6.8.2: Drawing Signal
Select the Draw Signal option in the Signal Line Group of
Lines.
the Home Tab.
Modify the style of existing Select the Change Style option in the Pipeline Group of the
pipes and signal lines Home Tab to modify pipe styles.
Select the Change Style option in the Signal Line Group of
the Home Tab to modify signal line styles.
Group together items to Select the Assembly option in the Symbol Group of the
form assemblies Home Tab.
See 6.14: Assemblies.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 6:2 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Drawing P&IDs

Procedure Best use of the Graphical User Interface

Add "Dynamic Labels" as Connect to VPE Workbench database by selecting the Login
required option in the AVEVA Integration Group of the Data
See 6.16: Dynamic Management Tab.
Labelling.
Choose VPE Workbench data to label drawing by selecting
the Properties option in the AVEVA Integration Group of the
Data Management Tab.
If the selected data is subsequently changed in VPE
Workbench, select the Refresh option in the AVEVA
Integration Group of the Data Management Tab.
Disconnect from VPE Workbench by selecting the Logout
option in the AVEVA Integration Group of the Data
Management Tab.
Add notes and revision Select the Note option in the Symbol Group of the Home
clouds Tab.
See 6.17: General Editing,
Select the Revision Cloud option in the Symbol Group of
Notes and Revision
the Home Tab.
Clouds.
Moving objects to and from Select the Change to Non-Plot Layer option in the Modify
the non-plot layer. Group of the Home Tab.
See 6.17: General Editing,
Notes and Revision
Clouds.
Edit labels and properties Access the relevant Properties Dialogs and change the
or symbols and pipes entered data as required.
To bulk edit large numbers of labels, use the Find and
Replace facility (non-pipe labels only) or the Excel Interface.
See 8.6.30: Globally Editing Labels or 7.8: Transferring Data
to and from Excel.
Perform any required To change symbols individually, select the Exchange
symbol exchange, i.e. Symbol option in the Symbol Group of the Home Tab.
swapping one symbol for
To change multiple symbols at once, select the Global
another
Symbol Exchange option in the Symbol Group of the Home
See 6.17: General Editing,
Tab.
Notes and Revision
Clouds.
General Editing - Copying Copy or move items by selecting them on The Drawing Page
and Moving and selecting the Copy and Cut options from the drawing
See 6.17: General Editing, page short cut menus. Indicate the required location(s) that
Notes and Revision the items are to be moved or copied to.
Clouds.
The Copy and Move options on the Engineering Explorer
shortcut menus can also be used to copy and move items or
collections of items.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 6:3 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Drawing P&IDs

Procedure Best use of the Graphical User Interface

General Editing - Mirroring, Mirroring: select the Mirror option in the Symbol Group of the
Stretching and Rotating Home Tab.
See 6.17: General Editing,
Stretching: select the Stretch option in the Symbol Group of
Notes and Revision
the Home Tab.
Clouds.
Rotating: Select the relevant items on the drawing and select
Rotate from the drawing page shortcut menu.
General Editing - Deleting Select the relevant items on the drawing and select Delete
See 6.18: Deleting Items. from the drawing page shortcut menu.
The Delete option on the Engineering Explorer shortcut
menus can also be used to delete items or collections of
items.
General Editing - Undoing Select Undo from the The Drawing Page shortcut menus.
changes to the drawing
See 6.17: General Editing,
Notes and Revision
Clouds.
Validate and export P&ID If exporting direct to VPE Workbench, connect to VPE
data Workbench database by selecting the Login option on the
See 7.5: Exporting Data to Engineering Explorer shortcut menu for the drawing.
a VPE Workbench
To start export, select the Synchronize with VPE
Database.
Workbench option drawing shortcut menu of the
Engineering Explorer.
Disconnect from VPE Workbench by selecting the Logout
option on the Engineering Explorer shortcut menu.

6.2 Creating a New Drawing

AVEVA P&ID drawings can be created by using one of the following methods:
• Creating and saving a new drawing in AVEVA P&ID.
• Opening an AutoCAD drawing in AVEVA P&ID, adding "intelligence", and saving.
• Upgrading an existing "dumb" AutoCAD drawing to an "intelligent" AVEVA P&ID
drawing. See Upgrading AutoCAD Drawings.
When an AVEVA P&ID drawing is opened, AVEVA P&ID will start automatically.
Before actual drawings are created, it is recommended that an administrator should create a
set of AutoCAD template drawings on which a user can base a new drawing (see 3.2:
Templates).
If an appropriate template drawing has not been generated, create a drawing in AVEVA
P&ID with the desired drawing size, and load line types and layers into it as required. Assign
colours and line types to the layers. Use Ortho/Axis Lock and Snap On to prevent pipe start/
end nodes being rotated. Starting and Exiting AVEVA P&ID

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 6:4 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Drawing P&IDs

6.3 Starting and Exiting AVEVA P&ID

Whenever a AVEVA P&ID drawing is opened in AutoCAD, AVEVA P&ID is initialised
automatically.
AVEVA P&ID can also be opened from the Programs menu e.g. AVEVA Plant > Engineer >
P&ID 12.1.SP1 > Projects > [Project Name] > AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 [Project Name]) or a
desktop shortcut:

When AVEVA P&ID is initialised, a "What's New" screen is displayed, which lists and briefly
describes the main changes to functionality in the current version AVEVA P&ID. Selecting a
link on this screen will open the help topic relevant to the improvement, where more details
can be found. If you do not want this screen to appear every time you start AVEVA P&ID,
check the Don't Show Me This Screen Again checkbox.
Note that drawings can only be opened from the folder specified in the Drawing Location
field in the Project Configuration Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration
program, and from sub-folders in that folder.
AVEVA P&ID can be closed using the standard AutoCAD methods e.g. File > Close which
leaves AutoCAD running, or File > Exit that closes both the drawing and AutoCAD, or by
selecting the drawing in the explorer, clicking the right mouse button and selecting the Close
menu command.
Multiple drawings can be opened in a single AutoCAD session. Each one will display in the
explorer. Selecting the drawing in the explorer makes it the active drawing in AutoCAD.

6.4 Titling a Drawing

Typically the first action taken when producing a drawing is to add a title and other general
drawing information. This is carried out by completing the drawing Properties dialog (see
4.8: Properties Dialogs), which can be initialised by pressing the right mouse button over the
drawing sheet, with no objects selected, and selecting the Properties option on the menu.
On completion of the Properties dialog, a title block is added to the drawing, which can be
completed as required with the drawing number, sheet number, revision, clients drawing
number and five lines of a drawing title. The drawing number is the only mandatory addition.
An advanced button exists on this Properties dialog which also adds additional sheet level
data i.e.: Last line number used. Completion of this data is optional.
It is good practice to state the AVEVA P&ID release number, somewhere on the drawing in
normal text (that is, in AutoCAD text).
It should be noted that the validation and transfer of the engineering data to VPE
Workbench cannot proceed without a drawing number.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 6:5 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Drawing P&IDs

6.5 Inserting Symbols

Note: For projects developed using versions of AVEVA P&ID older than AVEVA VPE P&ID
7.2 SP3, an upgrade of the symbols on the project drawings is required. See 2.1:
Upgrading Pipes and Symbols from old Projects.

Symbols can be inserted using the Symbol Explorer. Alternatively, symbols can be inserted
using the AVEVA P&ID Tool Palette.
Unassigned P&ID Database items can be inserted from the P&ID Data Grid. See 6.6:
Inserting Unassigned P&ID Database Items for details.
Unassigned VPE Workbench items can be inserted from the Engineering Explorer. See 6.7:
Inserting Unassigned VPE Workbench Items for details.
For further details, see:
• 8.4.1: Inserting Symbols - General Information
• 8.4.5: Inserting Valves (for example: check, process, diverter, variable inlet, manual
general, globe, 3-way)
• 8.4.2: Inserting Equipment (for example: vessel, pump, heater, fan, blower,
compressor, hoist, fork lift truck)
• 8.4.3: Inserting Electrical Equipment (for example: electric motor, agitator)
• 8.4.7: Inserting Inline Fittings (for example; concentric reducer, blind spade, duct fitting,
flame trap, end cap, expansion bellows. Note that the category includes spec break
and destination flag)
• 8.4.6: Inserting Instrument Valves (Control Valves) (for example; diaphragm-actuated,
piston actuated, pressure relief, also includes vacuum/relief devices)
• 8.4.8: Inserting Instruments (Balloons) (for example: indicator, controller, I/P converter,
PLC, logic box. Note that the category includes interlocks and I/O Rockets)
• 8.4.9: Inserting Flow Elements (for example: venturi, orifice plate, turbine)
• 8.4.4: Inserting Nozzles
• 8.4.10: Inserting Miscellaneous Symbols (items that do not fit into other categories, for
example vessel jackets, revision triangles, pigtail, hexagon. Note that the category also
includes symbols representing equipment of EDL (Equipment Data Location) item type)
• 8.4.11: Inserting Assemblies (Collections of flow diagram elements or dynamic labels
that are stored in a library)
Notes
• For a new drawing, the first symbols to be positioned are usually major equipment
items, e.g. vessels, pumps, electrical equipment etc.
• To check the association between items, where this is not apparent in the Engineering
Explorer, there is a facility provided to find out which nozzles, electrical equipment etc
are associated to a vessel, finding out which I/O Rockets are associated to which
instrument. See 8.9.5: Show Associations between Items.
• After equipment items are placed on the drawing, they can be re-positioned using the
Move options on the item's shortcut menus (on the drawing page and the Engineering
Explorer). Items can also be copied using the Copy option on the item's shortcut
menus. See 8.7.2: Moving Drawing Objects and 8.7.1: Copying Drawing Objects and
Labels.
• Unwanted items can be removed by using the Delete option on the item shortcut
menus. See 8.7.6: Deleting Drawing Objects.
• The equipment items can then be linked by pipes.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 6:6 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Drawing P&IDs

• Where an instrument valve is placed between the end node of one pipe, and the start
node of another, this valve may serve as the source and destination of these pipes, as
opposed to the pipe nodes, depending on the type of valve that it is.
• Handwheels may be inserted onto instrument valves.
• Port valves are inserted in the same way as standard general and instrument valves.
• The display of ports on port valves and other symbols can be switched on an off. See
8.3.4: Turning the Display of Ports On and Off.
• Project configuration may restrict the insertion of a valve or reducer symbol to pipes of
specified specifications and sizes. See the Symbols pane of the Spec Driven
Configuration Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program.
• Shortcut keys - the INSERT key opens the Symbol List dialog box, the DELETE key
deletes the selected objects in the drawing.

6.6 Inserting Unassigned P&ID Database Items

Unassigned P&ID database items are items (equipment, instruments and pipes) which were
created in P&ID Reports and on not yet assigned to a project drawing (refer to AVEVA P&ID
Reports documentation for details).
Details of unassigned items can be viewed by selecting the Unassigned node under the
AVEVA P&ID Database node of the P&ID Data Grid. Under this node, further nodes are
displayed: Equipment, Instruments, Pipes, Nozzles etc, beneath all unassigned items are
listed.
The P&ID Data Grid provided facilities to place such items on a project drawing, changing
them from unassigned to assigned.
The inserted items are automatically labelled with the properties set for them in AVEVA
P&ID Reports. The symbol used to represent an equipment item or instrument inserted in
this manner is also set in AVEVA P&ID.
Facilities are also provided to link unassigned items to items on a drawing that are not fully
labelled. This will result in the unassigned items becoming assigned, and their properties
labelling the selected symbols or pipes on the drawing.
See:
• Inserting Unassigned P&ID Database Symbols (for inserting unassigned equipment
and instruments)
• Inserting Unassigned P&ID Database Pipes
• Labelling with Data from the P&ID Data Grid - Linking Unassigned P&ID Data Grid
Items with Unlabelled Drawing Items

6.7 Inserting Unassigned VPE Workbench Items

Unassigned VPE Workbench items are equipment and instrument items in the associated
VPE Workbench database that have not yet been placed on a project P&ID. If this facility is
in use for a project, the items are listed under the Unassigned node in the Engineering
Explorer, from where they can be selected and inserted into drawings - see 8.4: Inserting
Symbols.
Whether or not the Unassigned node is displayed is controlled by an option on the 2.3.3:
VPE Workbench Configuration Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration
program.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 6:7 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Drawing P&IDs

The list of unassigned items is extracted from the VPE Workbench database when a
connection to the database is established (see 8.8.8: Connecting to a VPE Workbench
Database). After this has taken place, the connection may be discontinued, and the list
derived from a snapshot of the database stored in an XML file. The connection should be re-
established regularly in order to refresh this list.
Note that since not every item in the database is appropriate for placement on a P&ID,
facilities are provided in VPE Workbench to restrict the unassigned items list to consist only
of appropriate item types. An additional filter may be imposed on item types in AVEVA P&ID,
using a dialog accessed from the Engineering Explorer.
The details of unassigned items can be viewed on 4.8: Properties Dialogs While an item is
unassigned, no changes may be made to these details. The only exception is that a Symbol
Name may be selected for an item that had no Symbol Name assigned to it in the database.
This must be done when an unassigned item is inserted if it was not done beforehand.
Once an unassigned item is inserted, it is no longer unassigned and is removed from the list
of unassigned items. The properties of such an item may subsequently be edited as
required. However, if the tag of such an item is changed, the link between the item on the
drawing and the item in the database is broken. The item in the database is therefore
regarded as being unassigned again, and the item on the drawing is regarded as a new
engineering item.
Note that unassigned items, on insertion, do not inherit drawing sheet attributes (see
6.10.23: Setting Labels to Inherit Values from Drawing Sheet Attributes).

6.8 Drawing Pipes and Connections

Note: For projects developed using versions of AVEVA P&ID older than AVEVA VPE P&ID
7.2 SP3, an upgrade of the pipes on the project drawings is required. See 2.1:
Upgrading Pipes and Symbols from old Projects.

6.8.1 Drawing Pipes and Process Links

Vessels and pumps etc. can be connected with pipes (branches).
There are a number of default settings associated with drawing a pipe. The default pipe
style, tracing style and end styles can be set, along with whether or not flow arrows, pipe
breaks and tracing are to be included automatically.
All these defaults can be set using the Pipeline Group and Signal Line Group of the Home
Tab. Pipes can then be placed on the drawing using a button on the same toolbar (see
8.5.1: Drawing Pipes). These defaults can be changed while in the pipe creation process,
and the next segment created responds to the new settings.
When a pipe is drawn, the user will be prompted to identify the new pipe as a main pipe, a
branch pipe or a trim pipe. If the pipe is a branch or trim pipe, the user must indicate the
owning pipe or equipment.

• Process Links
Process links are branches that will not be labelled with a pipeline tag, for example
connections to off-line instruments, and in some cases by-passes. These can be created in
any pipe style by using the Process Links button on the pipes toolbar (see 8.5.3: Drawing
Process Links). The settings on the Pipe toolbar also affect process links.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 6:8 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Drawing P&IDs

A number of factors should be considered when drawing process links if data is to be

exported to an XML file in the ISO 15926 schema format. For details, see Guidelines for
Drawing Process Links.
When pipes or process links cross, one of the pipes or process links is automatically broken.
When a pipe crosses a process link, the process link is broken. If two pipes cross or two
process links cross, the break priority (whether the horizontal or the vertical line is broken) is
set on the Pipes Configuration Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration
program. If automatic pipe breaking is off, a warning will be received each time a pipe or link
is drawn over another.
Instrument Process Links, also known as "Legacy" Process Links, are Process Links
without the functionality introduced with AVEVA VPE P&ID 7.2 SP3 (the PLK item type) and
may be used if required. A specific style for this type of process link can be selected.
Non-"Legacy" Process Links are drawn using the pipe item type (PMA) in the process link
pipe style. In other words they will technically be branches between main pipes and offline
items. They will therefore have all the functionality of pipes and may be labelled and edited
in the same way.

• Pipe Drawing Facilities

The following facilities are also provided to help in drawing pipes and process links:
• The pipe style of an existing pipe can also be changed using facilities on the Pipe
toolbar (see 8.5.4: Changing Pipe Styles).
• Tracing can also be applied to existing pipes using a button on this toolbar. See 6.8.3:
Tracing Lines for more details.
• Pipes, and process links can be manually broken, i.e. if they cross vessels (see 8.5.8:
Breaking Lines).
• Pipes and branches may be merged into a single pipe/branch (see 8.5.9: Merging
Pipes, Branches and Signal Lines).
• Main pipes may be split into two separate main pipes (see 8.5.10: Splitting Pipes and
Signal Lines). Pipes may also be split by inserting a break symbol (see 8.4.7: Inserting
Inline Fittings).
• A parts of a main pipe may be split off as a branch of that pipe (see 8.5.11: Splitting off
Branches).
• The flow of a pipe may be reversed (see 8.5.12: Reversing Pipe and Signal Line Flows)
or set to bi-directional (see 8.6.17: Labelling Pipes).
• Pipe segments may be added, merged and deleted (see 8.5.13: Adding Pipe and
Signal Line Segments, 8.5.14: Merging Pipe Segments and 8.5.15: Deleting Pipe and
Signal Line Segments).
• The length of a pipe or process link may be changed (see 8.5.16: Changing the Length
of Lines).
• Elbows may be added to a pipe or process link (see 8.5.17: Adding Elbows to a Line).
• Pipes can be converted into branches and branches converted into pipes (see 8.5.18:
Changing Pipes to Branches and Branches to Pipes).
• A different pipe can be selected as the owner of a branch (see 8.5.19: Changing the
Owning Pipes of Branches).

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 6:9 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Drawing P&IDs

6.8.2 Drawing Signal Lines

The facilities of the Signal Line Group of the Home Tab. is used to draw signal lines. A basic
set of signal lines is provided which complies with Instrument Society of America (I.S.A.)
standards. The style, thickness and colour of signal lines are project definable.
To add or edit signal line styles, use the Signal Styles Configuration Category of the AVEVA
P&ID Project Administration program.
The default set consists of the following signal lines:
• Electrical Signal
• Pneumatic Signal
• Hydraulic Signal
• Undefined Signal
• Capillary Tube
• Electromagnetic or Sonic Signal
• Internal System Link (Software or Data Link)
The procedure for drawing signal lines is very similar to that for drawing pipes or process
links. The signal line is drawn in the currently selected signal line style. Each section of line,
from turning point to the next, is one entity. All signal lines refresh their blocks when an item
is inserted, or the signal line is stretched.
The 'current' signal line style can be set using the Signal Lines toolbar.
The Signal Lines toolbar also includes a button which can be used to change the style of
existing signal lines. See 8.5.7: Changing Signal Line Styles.
The following facilities are also provided to help in drawing pipes and process links:
• Signal lines can be manually broken (see 8.5.8: Breaking Lines).
• Signal lines may be merged into a single pipe/branch (see 8.5.9: Merging Pipes,
Branches and Signal Lines).
• Signal lines may be split into two separate signal lines (see 8.5.10: Splitting Pipes and
Signal Lines).
• The flow of a signal line may be reversed (see 8.5.12: Reversing Pipe and Signal Line
Flows).
• Signal line segments may be added and deleted (see 8.5.13: Adding Pipe and Signal
Line Segments and 8.5.15: Deleting Pipe and Signal Line Segments).
• The length of a signal line may be changed (see 8.5.16: Changing the Length of Lines).
• Elbows may be added to a signal line (see 8.5.17: Adding Elbows to a Line)

6.8.3 Tracing Lines

Tracing may be added to a pipe as it is being drawn, depending on whether or not automatic
pipe tracing is on. This is set in the Pipeline Group of the Home Tab. Changing this setting
affects pipes drawn subsequently and a pipe that is being drawn when the setting is
changed.
When switched On, tracing in the selected style will appear when a new pipe is drawn. The
style of tracing is selected by using the Pipe Toolbar.
Lines previously drawn with no tracing can have tracing applied using a button on the Pipe
toolbar. See 8.5.5: Applying Tracing to Pipes. Inline fittings are automatically traced around.
When a traced pipe is broken, the tracing is broken also.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 6:10 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Drawing P&IDs

AVEVA P&ID is supplied with two tracing styles, STEAM and ELEC. To add or edit tracing
styles, use the Tracing Configuration Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration
program.

6.8.4 Indicating Pipe Flow

Flow direction is indicated graphically by flow arrows. These may be placed as a pipe is
being drawn, depending on whether or not automatic flow arrows are on. This is set in the
Pipeline Group of the Home Tab. Changing this setting affects pipes drawn subsequently
and a pipe that is being drawn when the setting is changed.
If arrows need to be added to pipes that have already been drawn, they must be manually
inserted (block name ARROWZ - see 8.4: Inserting Symbols). At present there is no built-in
facility for rotating flow arrows so they must be rotated manually with a Rotate command.
See 8.7.5: Rotating Drawing Objects. The actual direction of flow is only established when
pipe labelling is carried out.

6.9 Selecting Multiple Drawing Objects

The method used to select multiple drawing objects depends on whether or not the Entity
selected is added to the current selection set checkbox on the Drawing Information –
Settings Sub-Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program is checked.
If the checkbox is unchecked (the default setting), to select multiple drawing objects, press
the Shift key while selecting each of the objects. If the Shift key is not pressed when an
object or objects are selected, any previously selected objects are de-selected.
If the checkbox is checked, it is not necessary to press Shift in order to select multiple
objects. Each object is added to the set of selected objects as it is selected. To remove
objects from the set of selected objects, press Shift and select them.

6.10 Labelling Symbols

6.10.1 General Information

At any time during the drawing production cycle, AVEVA P&ID graphical items may have
intelligent flow diagram data assigned to them by means of a label. See 8.6: Labelling
Symbols and Pipes. Each label consists of a text string with an AVEVA P&ID item type that
identifies the type of label it is. Labels are entered using Properties Dialogs, which can be
initialised in many ways:
• Selecting the object, clicking the right mouse button and selecting Properties from the
menu
• Selecting the Label button from the AVEVA P&ID Properties toolbar, either with an
object selected, or subsequently selecting an object.
• Selecting an item in the Explorer, clicking the right mouse button and selecting
Properties. This zooms to the item, selects it and displays the Properties dialog.
Note: The current properties of items can be viewed on the drawing page by hovering the
cursor over the symbol in question.

The labelling operation has many modes of behaviour depending on the entity/element or
group of entities/elements being labelled. It also used to edit standard CAD software text.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 6:11 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Drawing P&IDs

The command may operate automatically when a symbol is inserted. This is known as
'auto-labelling'. Auto-labelling for categories of items is switched on and off using the
facilities in the Pipeline Group of the Home Tab. Whether or not auto-labelling is on by
default is set on the Miscellaneous - Labels Sub-Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project
Administration program.
Labels are added on top of the graphics, thus allowing for maximum flexibility in graphical
layout and revision of the drawing. This method allows movement, rotation etc. of AVEVA
P&ID items to be unrestricted even after labelling has taken place. Labelling must exist for
the engineering data to be validated and transferred to VPE Workbench.
Every label has an Item Type which dictates its behaviour in a given situation. A full list of
Item Types can be found in the section 10.3: AVEVA P&ID Item Types and Label Types.
Label text is handled intelligently during rotation or reflection to ensure it retains its correct
orientation. Any revisions to labels are immediately reflected in the displayed text. Quick
rotation of labels is provided, by selecting the label, clicking the right mouse button and
selecting rotate from the menu.
The text of labels may either be in the default font select for the project, or in the text style
assigned to the label type. Text styles are defined on the Text Styles Configuration Category
of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program, and assigned to label types using the
Label Types Configuration Category.
Labels are validated as they are entered against project defined lists of allowable values.
Labels of a given type must be unique on the drawing. For example two Instrument items
cannot have the same label. For further information on validation, see 3.5: Validation.
A facility is provided to bulk edit label fields. See 8.6.30: Globally Editing Labels.

• Dynamic Labels
Symbols can also be labelled with dynamic labels which consist of selected data from a
VPE Workbench project database. See 6.16: Dynamic Labelling.

• Labelling with Data from the P&ID Grid

All of the data displayed in the tables in the right-hand window of the P&ID Data Grid may be
used to label the drawing. In this way, the drawing may be labelled with data not available
using the normal labelling procedures, i.e. with properties of items that are not included in
the standard labels.
Symbols that are not fully labelled may also be labelled by assigning unassigned items from
the grid to them.
For details of these procedures see 8.6.22: Labelling with Data from the P&ID Data Grid.
See also 8.6.23: Refreshing P&ID Data Grid Labels.

6.10.2 Setting Text Options

The text of labels may either be in the default font select for the project, or in the text style
assigned to the label type. Text styles are defined on the Text Styles Configuration Category
of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program, and assigned to label types using the
Label Types Configuration Category.
In addition, the height, justification and rotation settings of the text of a label are project
configuration options, also set using the Label Types Configuration Category.
These values can be overridden for individual labels using their Properties Dialogs.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 6:12 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Drawing P&IDs

6.10.3 Labelling/Editing Non-AVEVA P&ID Text

In order to edit text that was inserted into a drawing before it became an AVEVA P&ID
drawing, use the Labelling procedure.
See 8.6.24: Editing Non-AVEVA P&ID Text.

6.10.4 Label Inheritance from Owning Pipes

Instrument, inline equipment, valve and line fitting label data may be inherited from the label
of the owning pipe. This functionality is configured using the Instruments - Settings Sub-
Category, Equipment - Settings Sub-Category, Valves - Settings Sub-Category and Line
Fittings Configuration Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program.

If it is not clear which pipe is the owning pipe, the List Item Details should be used to identify
it.
For details of setting items to inherit pipe data, and to switch this inheritance off if required,
see 8.6.31: Setting Symbols to Inherit Label Data from a Manually Selected Pipe and
8.6.32: Switching off Label Data Inheritance from Pipes.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 6:13 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Drawing P&IDs

6.10.5 Labelling Equipment

Equipment labels must be unique for each drawing produced, i.e., unique per sheet. An
equipment label consists of up to either four or six parts, depending on project configuration:
Block
Function
Prefix
Type
Number
Suffix
The names of the parts of the Equipment label can be changed but the order cannot. Block
and Function are only used if the project is set to use 6 tag fields for equipment on the
Equipment - Settings Sub-Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program.
If the Type or Number are left blank, the project defined null character will replace that field,
e.g., V-?-2 or ?-100-2. If any null characters are present in equipment labels, the label is not
checked for uniqueness against the other equipment labels on that drawing.
Depending on the setup of the associated project configuration options, delimiters will
appear automatically when the equipment label is placed, e.g., V, 1000, A will become V-
1000-A. Trailing delimiters will be automatically prevented if parts of the equipment label are
not used.
In addition to the requirement that each equipment label must be unique on the drawing, the
project may be set to require that selected a field or a combination of fields in equipment
labels also be unique.

• Equipment With Trim

Sometimes additional piping and attached items are supplied by the vendor as being
associated with a vessel. These are known as vessel trim. They are attached directly to the
vessel at both ends, or to the vessel and a process line. AVEVA P&ID associates trim to a
vessel at the labelling stage.
The default "Trim:" prefix, which signifies that trim labelling is present, may be altered on the
Pipes - Labels Sub-Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program.
See 8.6.3: Labelling Equipment (with or without Trim).

• Electrical Equipment
Electrical equipment must be associated with an existing item of ordinary equipment. The
procedure for labelling electrical equipment is identical to that for labelling ordinary
equipment.
See 8.6.4: Labelling Electrical Equipment.

• Equipment Headers
Equipment may be labelled with a separate equipment header. The header includes the
equipment label plus any other required text as entered by the user. If an equipment label is
changed, the equipment label in an equipment header is automatically updated.
Whether or not equipment headers are to be underlined on P&IDs is specified on the
Equipment - Settings Sub-Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 6:14 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Drawing P&IDs

See 8.6.5 - Adding Equipment Headers.

6.10.6 Labelling General Valves

The labelling of general valves, e.g., ball valves, gate valves, etc., involves the placement of
a tag, and optionally, closure, valve code and size date. This tag data may be inherited from
the label of the owning pipe, as set-up on the Pipes - Settings Sub-Category of the AVEVA
P&ID Project Administration program. If it is not clear which pipe is the owning pipe, the List
Item Details procedure should be used to identify it.
Valve codes can be applied to piping valves; but not to instrument valves. The valve code
can be automatically placed according to the entries for the associated project configuration
options set in the Valves - Labels Sub-Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration
program. The code will automatically place itself in alignment with valve.
A general valve can be labelled as a Special Piping Item (SPP) by the addition of four
configurable SPP labels to the valve label.
Valve tags and SPP labels do not have to be unique; it is possible for the valve and special
piping item to have the same tag number.
When a valve is inserted into a pipe, the valve will inherit the size of the pipe into which it is
inserted. The size of a valve in a process link may be manually increased, but not the size of
a valve in a pipe.
If general valves are unlabelled, no warnings or errors are issued on output.
See 8.6.7: Labelling General Valves.
See also 8.6.8: Labelling Port Valves.

• Using Valve Pattern Labels

The “patterns” facility is used to nominate a valve record, displayed on a drawing, to act as a
representative for one or more line fitting item records, which are not displayed, but will be
exported on output along with the displayed item.
The AVEVA P&ID Item Type for a pattern label is XPR. It is a good idea to configure all
pattern labels to be a set colour, in the Item Types – Standard Sub-Category of the AVEVA
P&ID Project Administration program. All users will then instantly recognize pattern labels
on drawings that other users have worked on.
Details of valve patterns are edited using the Valve - Patterns Sub-Category of the AVEVA
P&ID Project Administration program.
The valve which has been physically drawn on the drawing is known as the substitute item
in the pattern; it is expanded on output into all its components which are detailed in this
pattern. An extra field is present in the output files. It is called Pattern Item and has an *
(asterisk) in it if the item has been defined as a pattern item.
To use the pattern facility, the pattern reference number is allocated when labelling any
valve using the Valve Properties Dialogs. See 8.6.7: Labelling General Valves.
All data is validated on output for the pattern items as if they had been drawn on the
drawing.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 6:15 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Drawing P&IDs

6.10.7 Labelling Inline Fittings (Special Piping Items)

When labelling inline fittings and SPPs (Special Piping Items) such as flame traps, duct
fittings, expansion bellows, insulation, hoses and strainers, each part of the inline fitting or
SPP label can be added or deleted independently of the other parts of the label.
See 8.6.9: Labelling Inline Fittings.
Other line labelling is covered elsewhere. See:
6.10.8: Labelling Pipe Destination Fittings
6.10.20: Labelling Pipe Flags
6.11.6: Adding Pipe Destination Text
6.11.5: Labelling Pipes with Breaks and Inline Breaks
6.11.4: Labelling Pipes with Reducers and Reducing Valves

6.10.8 Labelling Pipe Destination Fittings

Pipe destination fittings (e.g. end caps) are only labelled with a size and a specification.
See 8.6.10: Labelling Pipe Destination Fittings.

6.10.9 Labelling Port Valves

Port valves are general (piping) and instrument valves that include distinct ports to which
pipes and other symbols may be attached. Unlike the connectors on standard valves, these
ports may be labelled, and an identifier and a size allocated to them. The size may be
specified by the user, or derived automatically from connected items. Port data is included in
exports from P&IDs.
The List Item Details procedure can be used to quickly view the port id's and sizes of a port
valve.
Port valves are labelled in the same way as general and instrument valves (the main body of
the valve in the case of instrument valves), except that additional fields are provided related
to specifying the port sizes.
See 8.6.8: Labelling Port Valves.
For more information on "normal" valve labelling, see:
6.10.6: Labelling General Valves.
6.10.10: Labelling Instrument Valves (Control Valves).

6.10.10 Labelling Instrument Valves (Control Valves)

The main body of the valve and/or the balloon can be labelled. An error will be received on
output if the balloon label is not present.
Instrument valve label data may be inherited from the label of the owning pipe, as set-up on
the Pipes - Settings Sub-Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program. If it
is not clear which pipe is the owning pipe, the List Item Details procedure should be used to
identify it.
When labelling the main body of the valve, use the same labelling procedure as for general
valves except that the valve code does not apply.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 6:16 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Drawing P&IDs

See 8.6.7: Labelling General Valves.

See also 8.6.8: Labelling Port Valves.
When labelling the balloon, use the same labelling procedure as for instruments.
See 8.6.12: Labelling General Instruments.
Any changes to the instrument balloon label positions in the project configuration file will
only take effect if labels are removed and replaced. If a labelled control valve is copied, all
labelling is removed except the Item Type reference in the balloon e.g., FT.
A descriptor can be included in the label. Descriptors are used within VPE Workbench when
assigning VPE Workbench item types to incoming instruments from AVEVA P&ID. For
example, a descriptor of Vortex, Magnetic Flow, Coriolis, or Turbine could be used to
specifically differentiate between different types of flow transmitters. A restricted choice of
item types is available when the descriptor for the instrument is completed.
Instrument label balloons can be moved independently from the instrument.
There is also a facility to bulk edit instrument labels. See 8.6.30: Globally Editing Labels.

6.10.11 Labelling General Instruments

This category of symbol includes instrument indicators with or without alarms, instrument
valve balloons, instruments with I/P converters, and flow elements. General information on
the principles of labelling general instruments is given below.
Instrument label data may be inherited from the label of the owning pipe, as set-up on the
Pipes - Settings Sub-Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program. If it is
not clear which pipe is the owning pipe, the List Item Details procedure should be used to
identify it.
For instructions on labelling general instruments, see 8.6.12: Labelling General Instruments.
There is also a facility to bulk edit instrument labels. See 8.6.30: Globally Editing Labels.

• Label Format
An instrument label consists of up to either four or six parts, depending on project
configuration:
Block
Function
Prefix
Type
Number
Suffix
The names of the parts of the instrument label can be changed but the order cannot. Block
and Function are only used if the project is set to use 6 tag fields for instruments on the
Instrument - Settings Sub-Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program.

• Label Positioning
The default instrument label positioning is set in the Instrument Label Positions section of
the Instruments - Labels Sub-Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program.
If different label positions are needed for different types of instrument balloons, the default

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 6:17 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Drawing P&IDs

positioning can be overridden by selecting the Instrument Label Positional data option in the
List of Values Configuration Category.

• Descriptors
A descriptor can be included in the label. Descriptors are used within VPE Workbench when
assigning VPE Workbench item types to incoming instruments from AVEVA P&ID. For
example, a descriptor of Vortex, Magnetic Flow, Coriolis, or Turbine could be used to
specifically differentiate between different types of flow transmitters. A restricted choice of
item types is available when the descriptor for the instrument is completed.

• Label Uniqueness
Each instrument label must be unique on the drawing. In addition, the project may be set to
require that selected fields or combination of fields in instrument labels must also be unique.
Adding Alarm Labels
If the item is a remote instrument, a prompt will be received to add up to four alarm labels,
e.g., H - high and L - Low.

• Automatic Suffix Assignment for Duplicate Instrument Tags

Instruments can be assigned the same tag number, provided that separate suffixes are
attached to the tag number of each instrument. The system automatically prompts for the
assignation of these suffixes.

• Labelling Instruments with I/P Convertors

The presence of an I/P convertor on an instrument precludes the entry of a descriptor label.

• Effects of Import Allowed or Disallowed

If the project configuration has been set in the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program
(using the Loop numbers from VPE Workbench checkbox on the Instruments - Labels Sub-
Category) to allow import of loop numbers etc., the only visible difference when labelling
instruments is that a Prefix, Loop number or Suffix (or equivalent field names) cannot be
entered. They will appear greyed out in the Properties Dialogs.
If the import of loop numbers is disallowed, a prompt will be received to enter a Prefix, Loop
Number and Suffix when labelling instruments.
Refer to 7.1: Integration with an AVEVA P&ID Reports Database for information on what
happens when externally generated loop numbers and I/O information is imported into
AVEVA P&ID.

• Flow Elements
The flow element symbol category typically includes orifice plates, flow restrictions, venturi,
flow straighteners and turbine meters. They all have label balloons attached. It is not
possible to pick the flow element itself for labelling - the balloon must be chosen. Labelling is
then as for ordinary instruments. No alarm labels are permitted. There are no associated
project configuration options.
For information on further aspects of labelling instruments see 6.10.12: Labelling General
Instruments - Using Instrument Pattern Labels and 6.10.13: Labelling General Instruments -
Panel Reference Labels.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 6:18 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Drawing P&IDs

• Instrument Loops
Instrument loops may be defined, to which instruments may subsequently be added. See
Creating Instrument Loops for details.
Instruments in a loop can inherit properties from the loop they are assigned to, as set using
in the Instruments - Settings Sub-Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration
program.

6.10.12 Labelling General Instruments - Using Instrument Pattern Labels

The "patterns" facility is used to nominate an instrument record, displayed on a drawing, to
act as a representative for further instrument records, which are not displayed, but will be
exported on output along with the displayed item.
A simple example of this is a Flow Indicator (FI) which could consist of the displayed Flow
Indicator (FI) itself, which also represents a Flow Transmitter (FT) and a Flow Element (FE).

The AVEVA P&ID Item Type for a pattern label is XPR. It is a good idea to configure all
pattern labels to be a set colour, in the Item Types - Standard Sub-Category of the AVEVA
P&ID Project Administration program. All users will then instantly recognize pattern labels
on drawings that other users have worked on.
Details of patterns are edited using the Instruments - Patterns Sub-Category of the AVEVA
P&ID Project Administration program.
The instrument which has been physically drawn on the drawing is known as the substitute
item in the pattern; it is expanded on output into all its components which are detailed in this
pattern. An extra field is present in the output files. It is called Pattern Item and has an *
(asterisk) in it if the item has been defined as a pattern item.
To use the pattern facility, the pattern reference number is allocated when labelling any
instrument (including remote and instrument valves) using the Instrument Balloon
Properties Dialogs. See 8.6.12: Labelling General Instruments.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 6:19 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Drawing P&IDs

A pattern can only be created for instruments with the same tag/loop number. This is
because the tag/loop number is inherited from the substitute item. Suffixes must be used
correctly to distinguish between identically labelled instruments. The Loop Number is read
from the drawing and if no loop number has been assigned, a dummy tag, e.g., [234]34, will
be exported. The grid reference for all pattern items is the same as for the substitute item.
If VPE Workbench outputs any tag numbers (loop numbers) back to the drawing via the bi-
directional link, data on pattern instruments is automatically excluded from the transfer as
the instruments do not physically exist on the drawing.
All data is validated on output for the pattern items as if they had been drawn on the
drawing.

6.10.13 Labelling General Instruments - Panel Reference Labels

Panel Reference Labels are used when an instrument or instrument valve is to be panel
mounted rather than, for example, rack or field-mounted. Many instruments/equipment
items can be assigned to one panel reference. This instrument/panel association is
exported to VPE Workbench.
The panel reference consists of a Prefix, Type, Loop Number and Suffix. (The panel type
can be selected as instrument or equipment type.) The four components of the label are
positioned automatically according to the associated project configuration options.
The panel reference is added when labelling the instrument. See 8.6.12: Labelling General
Instruments.

6.10.14 Labelling System I/O Connections, Interlocks and Logic Boxes

System I/O Connections, Interlocks and Logic Boxes are labelled with an item reference,
but with no other data. Duplicate labels are permitted.
See 8.6.13: Labelling System I/O Connections, Interlocks and Logic Boxes.

6.10.15 Labelling I/O Rockets

I/O Rockets are used to assign single or multiple I/O (input/output) data against instruments
or equipment. When I/O rockets are being used, the I/O data entered in VPE Workbench for
those tagged items passes back onto the P&ID in a read-only form when AVEVA P&ID is
initialised. I/O rockets can either be associated with an instrument, or can themselves be
tagged as instruments.
See 8.6.14: Labelling I/O Rockets.

• Label Positioning
The default instrument label positioning is set in the Instrument Label Positions section of
the Instruments - Labels Sub-Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program.
The default positioning can be overridden by selecting the Instrument Label Positional data
option in the List of Values Configuration Category.

• Imported I/O Data

There is no project configuration option to determine whether or not I/O rockets will import I/
O address data from an external source. The data, if available, is automatically imported
when AVEVA P&ID is initialised.
See 7.1: Integration with an AVEVA P&ID Reports Database.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 6:20 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Drawing P&IDs

6.10.16 Labelling Nozzles

Nozzles are placed on vessels and on other items of equipment. When labelling a nozzle, a
nozzle tag must be placed. If no nozzle size label is applied and a pipe is attached to the
nozzle, the nozzle will inherit the pipe size on output. The nozzle may have a different size
to the pipe and hence be an enlarging or reducing nozzle.
Duplicate nozzle labels are not permitted on a vessel. An error message is displayed if this
is attempted. Duplicate nozzles are permitted on different vessels, i.e., vessel V-100 and
vessel V-200 may both have a nozzle labelled N1.
If warnings about nozzles which have labels missing are not required when performing an
output, ensure that the Nozzle error balloon placement checkbox on the Label Types
Configuration Category on the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program is checked.
If nozzle sizes are to cascaded onto connecting pipes, check the Cascade Nozzle to Pipe
checkbox on the Nozzles - Settings Sub-Category . To connect a nozzle to a pipe, so that
sizes can be cascaded, see 8.5.20: Connecting Pipes to Nozzles and Equipment. To
disconnect a nozzle from a pipe if cascading is not required for a particular pipe and nozzle,
see 8.5.21: Disconnecting Pipes from Nozzles and Equipment.
If nozzles are to be labelled using an automatically incrementing number, check the
Increment Nozzle Sequence checkbox on the Nozzles - Labels Sub-Category.
If nozzles labels are to automatically include a prefix, enter this prefix in the Nozzle Prefix
field on the Nozzles - Labels Sub-Category.
See 8.6.6: Labelling Nozzles.

6.10.17 Labelling Miscellaneous Items

Miscellaneous items include items such as Vessel Jackets. These cannot be labelled using
the normal labelling facilities. It is possible however to attach notes to them. See 8.6.29:
Adding Notes to Items.

6.10.18 Labelling Assemblies

Graphical assemblies are reduced to their component AVEVA P&ID items on insertion.
Items in an assembly should be labelled as individual items.

6.10.19 Labelling Clouds

Clouds cannot be directly labelled using the normal labelling facilities, nor can they have
notes added. Revision triangles should be inserted near the clouds (see 8.4: Inserting
Symbols). The revision triangles should be then labelled using.
See 8.6.15: Labelling Revision Triangles.

6.10.20 Labelling Pipe Flags

Labelling Pipe Flags (i.e. off-sheet or page connectors) with their correct destination
drawing number is crucial for the correct resolution of pipes across multiple P&IDs. If using
sheet numbers they must be included as part of the pipe flag label.
Pipe flags may be labelled from a list of drawings on which valid and available source/
destination pipe flags are located. If labelled in this way, a pipe flag may be hyperlinked, i.e.
Ctrl-clicking on it, or selecting the Open Target Drawing option from the flag's right-click
menu, will open the drawing on which connected pipe flag is located.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 6:21 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Drawing P&IDs

Pipe flag labels can be deleted by selecting the Delete option from The Drawing Page menu
for the label.
If a pipe flag is to be used as well as pipe destination text, the pipe destination text must be
used to record the actual destination. A note should be entered in the flag to refer to the pipe
destination text. If an attempt is made to label the pipe flag with the destination as well as
using pipe destination text, there will be two recorded destinations, leading to confusion
when data is output.
Pipe flags can also be labelled with the grid reference of the pipe flag on the source/
destination drawing.
See 8.6.18: Labelling and Connecting Pipe Flags.

6.10.21 Labelling Revision Triangles

The labelling procedure can be used to place the revision text associated with the revision
triangles. When a revision triangle is labelled, it is automatically labelled with a letter or
number which is a reference to the revision text. This number can be changed if required.
If grid referencing is on, a grid reference can be placed when a triangle is inserted, to show
the location of the actual change. This grid reference is not maintained as the drawing is
rearranged.
Revision triangle data cannot be edited once it has been placed. The revision number inside
the triangle is associated with the triangle and neither can be deleted separately. Instead,
they must be deleted as a single item by selecting the Delete option from The Drawing Page
or Engineering Explorer menus for the item.
Revision text is also be deleted as a single item.
If an attempt is made to label two revision triangles with the same revision number/letter, or
if the revision number, reviser and description are not completed, an error message will be
received.
The Label offset from symbol origin fields in the Miscellaneous - Labels Sub-Category of the
AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program determine the position of the automatic
revision label relative to the triangle symbol's insertion point.
See 8.6.15: Labelling Revision Triangles.

6.10.22 Setting Properties Sheet fields to inherit previously entered values

A project can be configured so that a value entered in a field in a Properties dialog is
"inherited" by the same field when that Properties dialog is accessed again when labelling
another, previously unlabelled, item of that type.
For example, the functionality is switched on for equipment Prefix field, and an equipment
item is labelled with a value of "20". The next time an equipment item is labelled for the first
time, when the Properties dialog for this item is opened, the Prefix field will automatically be
completed with the value "20". This can be replaced by another value if required. This new
value will then be the "inherited" value for the equipment Prefix field.
Select the Property dialog fields to which this function is applied using the Pipes - Settings
Sub-Category, Instruments - Settings Sub-Category, Equipment - Settings Sub-Category,
Valves - Settings Sub-Category and Miscellaneous - Settings Sub-Category of the AVEVA
P&ID Project Administration program.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 6:22 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Drawing P&IDs

6.10.23 Setting Labels to Inherit Values from Drawing Sheet Attributes

The values of labels may be inherited from the sheet attributes entered on the Advanced
Drawing Properties dialog. The values entered for these sheet attributes may be values that
are common to many items on the drawing, for example the design area. The inheritance
facility enables all items to inherit these common values. The labels of items that do not
share these common values may subsequently be edited manually using their properties
sheets.
Values inherited from sheet attributes can be hidden, i.e. though they are part of labels and
will be included in any exports of P&ID data, they are not displayed on P&IDs. Whether or
not a value is hidden is set up on a field-by-field basis.
Sheet attribute field names are set up using the Drawing Information - Settings Sub-
Category.
Note that sheet attribute fields can be linked to lists of values, so that only values from those
lists can be entered into the sheet attribute fields. This is also set up using the Drawing
Information – Settings Sub-Category.
Establish inheritance between item label and sheet attribute fields, and specify whether or
not inherited values are to be hidden using the Pipes - Settings Sub-Category, Instruments -
Settings Sub-Category, Equipment - Settings Sub-Category, Valves - Settings Sub-
Category and Line Fittings Configuration Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project
Administration program.
Note that if an instrument or valve label is set to inherit from the owning pipe, this takes
priority over sheet attribute inheritance.
Also note that unassigned P&ID Database items and unassigned VPE Workbench items, on
insertion, do not inherit drawing sheet attributes. See Inserting Unassigned P&ID Database
Items and 6.7: Inserting Unassigned VPE Workbench Items.
Inheritance can be switched on and off for individual items using the Inheritance fields on
their Properties Dialogs.

• Changing Inherited Values

The following points should be considered when editing inherited values both at drawing
sheet and item level:
• When sheet attribute inheritance is first activated, any existing pipe values will not be
overwritten with sheet attribute values. Existing values for non-pipe labels will be
overwritten. All null values for all item labels will be overwritten.
• If a sheet attribute value is changed, all pipe label values that match the old attribute
value are set to the new attribute value, regardless of whether that value was inherited
or entered manually. For example, if the design area sheet attribute is changed from A
to B, all pipe label fields set to inherit from this sheet attribute that were set to A are
also changed to B.
• If a sheet attribute value is changed, all non-pipe label values are changed to the new
value, as long as that value was inherited. If the value was entered manually, it will not
be subsequently affected by changes to sheet attribute values. To re-establish
inheritance for a non-pipe label that has been changed manually, delete the label and
re-label the item.
• If an item label field is re-set after inheritance to inherit from a different sheet attribute
field, any existing inherited values will behave as if the sheet attribute value had simply
been changed, as described above.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 6:23 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Drawing P&IDs

• All null values in fields that are set to inherit from sheet attributes will be updated when
sheet attribute values are changed.
• If a label field that must be populated from a list of valid values is set to inherit from a
drawing sheet attribute field, that drawing sheet attribute field must also be populated
from that same list of values.
• If a sheet attribute value that was set to be hidden is changed, those items that were
labelled with the previous value will still have that part of their labels hidden, even
though it is no longer an inherited value.
To "unhide" that part of their labels, open the Properties dialog for each item and press
the OK button.

6.10.24 Inserting Symbols with Labels

Equipment and Inline Equipment labels may automatically have a symbol placed with them
when they are inserted. For example, they may be placed in a box, or in a flag symbol.
Create the symbols required for this purpose in the normal way using AutoCAD. Ensure that
the symbol is placed in the \PMETSYM or \PIMPSYM project symbol directory as
appropriate.
This functionality is switched on and off for each item category, the required symbols
selected, and the offsets from the labels specified using the Equipment - Labels Sub-
Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program.
See 8.6.3: Labelling Equipment (with or without Trim).

6.10.25 Automatic Tagging

The tags of valves and the number components of pipe, instrument and equipment tags
may be set to be completed automatically.

Note: If this facility is in used, valve tags and the number fields of pipe, instrument and
equipment tags should not be set to (see 6.10.23: Setting Labels to Inherit Values
from Drawing Sheet Attributes).

This facility is turned on when the format for automatic valve tags is defined using the Pipes
- Automatic Tag Format Sub-Category, Instruments - Automatic Tag Format Sub-Category,
Equipment - Automatic Tag Format Sub-Category, Valves - Automatic Tag Format Sub-
Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program.
If automatic tagging is in use for pipe, instrument and equipment tags, the number
component of such items is automatically completed with an automatically incrementing
number in a format defined using the above panes. A separate count may optionally be
implement for each value of a specified item property.
Automatic valve tags may also include an automatically incremented number. The Drawing -
Drawing List Sub-Category of the Administration program is used to define the ranges of
numbers that are to be used. An exclusive range of numbers is defined for each project
drawing. If no range is specified for a drawing, automatic valve tags on that drawing will not
be assigned incremented numbers.
The automatically incremented number for a type of item may be reset to 0 for a project
using a button on the relevant AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program pane.
Automatic valve tags may include user-defined attributes of valves, as selected when the
tag format is defined. The available properties for the format are defined in a DataSet which
must be set up for this purpose (see Defining Valve Tag Properties for Automatic Valve
Tagging).

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 6:24 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Drawing P&IDs

Automatic valve tags may also include selected attributes from owner pipes.
If the facility is in use, the relevant fields on the Properties Dialogs are automatically
completed when items are labelled. These values may be replaced by manual entry if
required.
Existing items that were not automatically labelled may be re-labelled with tags in the
automatic tag format. See 8.6.26: Replacing Tags with Tags in the Automatic Tag Format.
Note that items that were automatically labelled and then manually changed are not re-
labelled by this procedure.

6.11 Labelling Pipes

6.11.1 General Information

Pipes, branches, trim pipes, reducers and breaks can all be labelled. See 8.6: Labelling
Symbols and Pipes. Several pipe labels may be placed on one pipe by a single use of this
command. It is not possible to label across equipment when labelling a pipe. Labels are
entered using Properties Dialogs.
The command may operate automatically when a pipe is drawn. This is known as auto-
labelling'. Auto-labelling for pipes is switched on and off using the facilities in the Pipeline
Group of the Home Tab.
Whether or not auto-labelling is on by default is set on the Miscellaneous - Labels Sub-
Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program.
Facilities are provided to check the association between an existing label and a pipe, if this
is not clear on the drawing. See 8.9.5: Show Associations between Items.
The pipe with which a pipe label is associated can be changed if required. See 8.6.28:
Changing the Association of a Pipe Label.

Note: The current properties of items can be viewed on the drawing page by hovering the
cursor over the symbol in question.

• Pipe Label Fields

A pipe label consists of the data entered into between three and fifteen fields, depending on
the project configuration (set using the Pipes - Labels Sub-Category of the AVEVA P&ID
Project Administration program). While the format of a label is fixed, it is possible to limit the
number of fields that are actually displayed on a drawing by switching off fixed label
formatting (see 6.11.2: Label Display Options).

• Reformatting Existing Pipe Labels

If the project configuration option dictating the order and/or number of the pipe label fields is
altered, existing labels are reformatted automatically. This takes place when AVEVA P&ID is
next initialised. Fields that have been added to the project configuration are populated with
the default null character. Fields that have been removed from the project configuration are
deleted.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 6:25 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Drawing P&IDs

• Nodes
When a pipe is labelled, 'nodes' are placed at the start and end of each pipe. All the pipe
data is held at the start node.

At any time, a pipe route may be changed by moving these nodes. Revision time is
minimised, as only the nodes need be moved and not whole associations of pipes,
equipment etc. All pipe label field data is held on the start node.

• Main Pipe Labels

In the case of pipes that have multiple labels, one of these labels may be set as the "main
pipe label". See 8.6.27: Setting a Pipe Label as the Main Label. By default, the properties of
the pipe at the start node are presented as the "main" properties of the pipe on export. This
option sets the label of another part of the pipe, which may be more representative of the
properties of the pipe as a whole, to be the "main" properties.
The main pipe label is displayed in a different colour on the P&ID, and the part of the pipe
that has been labelled as the "main" pipe label is displayed at the top of the hierarchy of a
pipe and its branches in the Engineering Explorer. If no main pipe label has been set, the
pipe start node properties assume this position by default.

• Reducer and Other Pipe Feature Labels

In addition to the labels of the pipes themselves, reducers and inline breaks can be labelled.
Examples of inline breaks include Specification Changes, Area Breaks, Insulation Breaks,
Trace Breaks and Paint Breaks.

• Dynamic Labels
Pipes can also be labelled with dynamic labels that consist of selected data from a VPE
Workbench project database. See 6.16: Dynamic Labelling.

• Labelling with Data from the P&ID Grid

All of the data displayed in the tables in the right-hand window of the P&ID Data Grid may be
used to label the drawing. In this way, the drawing may be labelled with data not available
using the normal labelling procedures, i.e. with properties of items that are not included in
the standard labels.
Pipes that are not fully labelled may also be labelled by assigning unassigned items from
the grid to them.
For details of these procedures see 8.6.22: Labelling with Data from the P&ID Data Grid.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 6:26 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Drawing P&IDs

See also 8.6.23: Refreshing P&ID Data Grid Labels.

• Label Uniqueness
Each pipe label must be unique on the drawing. In addition, the project may be set to require
that selected fields or combination of fields in pipe labels must also be unique.

• Associated Project Configuration Options

The boilerplate text labelling the three project definable fields which appear on the pipe
labelling Properties dialog are specified in the Pipes - Labels Sub-Category of the AVEVA
P&ID Project Administration program.
Pipe label format is also established in this pane.
The character used as the field delimiter in pipe labels is specified in the Delimiter field. If
this delimiter is to follow the area code field, the Delimiter after area field checkbox must be
checked, otherwise the size of the space to be left after the area code field must be
specified in the Number of characters field.
The label fields which are to be checked for uniqueness are specified in the Unique
Validation field.

6.11.2 Label Display Options

• Text Options
The text of labels may either be in the default font select for the project, or in the text style
assigned to the label type. Text styles are defined on the Text Styles Configuration Category
of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program, and assigned to label types using the
Label Types Configuration Category.
In addition, the height, justification and rotation settings of the text of a label are project
configuration options, also set using the Label Types Configuration Category.
These values can be overridden for individual labels using their Properties Dialogs.

• Non-Standard (Single Property) Label Format

Although the format of a label is fixed by the project configuration, it is possible to specify
which part of a label is actually displayed on a drawing. This is achieved by selecting single
property label formatting while labelling a pipe. For example, it may be required to have
displayed only the specification part or only the number part of a label. It is possible to
combine both fixed and non-standard label format on the same pipe, if multiple labels are
applied.
If fixed label formatting is to be used, the Fixed Pipe Label Format checkbox on the Pipes -
Labels Sub-Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program must be checked.
This controls the default setting of the Pipe Label Type field in the Pipeline Properties
Dialogs.

Note: Once a format has been chosen and the pipe label placed on the drawing, the format
cannot be modified. The label must be deleted and reapplied.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 6:27 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Drawing P&IDs

• Split Label Format

Split Label Formatting is the placing of some fields of a pipe label above the pipe and the
remainder below the pipe. Split Label Formatting is controlled by three associated project
configuration options as discussed below.

The Split After Field field on the Pipes - Labels Sub-Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project
Administration program is used to select which field in the pipe format to split on. The
number entered here determines how many fields to count from the left of the pipe label
before the split occurs.

Note: Do not confuse these numbers with the order numbers allocated to fields in the
project configuration for pipe labels.

For example, if the entry is 3, the pipe label will display with the first 3 fields above the pipe,
and the remaining fields below it.
When split label formatting is turned on, the Y offset above line and Y offset below line fields
are responsible for setting the offset from the label point picked when placing the pipe label.
If the point picked is directly on the pipe, the Y offset distances are equal and the text
justification for the pipe label is set to MC (Middle Centre), the pipe label will appear as
shown above.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 6:28 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Drawing P&IDs

Note: The pipe label justification is BC (Bottom Centre) by default in the project
configuration file.

It is possible to change the pipe label display from single label display to split pipe label
display or vice versa.

Note: If the configuration changes from single pipe label display to split pipe label display,
the split pipe label configuration options are applied using the insertion point and
display attributes of the original single pipe label as a reference. It is therefore
possible that when the original single pipe label is too far from the pipe, the second
pipe label may overlap the pipe and a manual displacement of the split pipe label
needs to take place.

• Null Characters
The default null character (e.g. ?) can be selected for all or for specific pipe label fields, if
pipe data is not yet available. The label will then appear with the null character as defined by
the project configuration. This is the only application of this facility.
For example, if the null character were used for each digit of the area number, pipe label 2"-
SW-2001-S1A-5L would appear as 2"-SW-??01-S1A-5L.
Labelling pipes with null characters and then loading them into VPE Workbench has
implications for uniqueness of pipe labels, which need to be considered. For further
information, refer to AVEVA P&ID Technical Support.

6.11.3 Labelling Pipes

Any number of labels can be placed on a pipe. Each segment of a pipe may be labelled, and
pipe labels can be placed on either side of reducers and breaks as required. All or a part of
a pipe label can be placed as required.
Changes made to pipe properties are automatically reflected by all the labels of the pipe.
For example, changes to the pipe size are automatically cascaded along the pipe flow,
updating all pipe labels upstream and downstream. Reducer and inline break properties and
labels are also automatically updated (see 6.11.4: Labelling Pipes with Reducers and
Reducing Valves and 6.11.5: Labelling Pipes with Breaks and Inline Breaks for more
information).
Nozzle sizes may automatically be cascaded onto connected pipes, depending on the
setting of the Cascade Nozzle to Pipe checkbox on the Nozzles - Settings Sub-Category of
the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program.
Owned branches are not affected by size changes of parent pipes.

• Trim Pipes
A trim pipe is a pipe which forms part of a vessel's associated group of elements. The pipe
may or may not be visibly connected to the vessel with which it is to be associated, and can
be created in any pipe style. The vessel must already be labelled with a trim label before
proceeding with the trim pipework. Trim pipes do not receive a full pipe label, simply a size,
but inherit their other fields from the Trim label. A vessel can have multiple trim labels with
trim pipes associated to each.
The Trim Label Prefix field on the Pipes - Labels Sub-Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project
Administration program is used to specify the text prefix to the trim identifier in a trim label.
Whenever a trim label is created on a vessel, this word appears in front of the main label.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 6:29 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Drawing P&IDs

See 8.6.17: Labelling Pipes.

• Pipe Groups
Pipes may be added to a pipe group created reporting purposes (see Creating Pipe
Groups). If a pipe has been added to a group, details of the group are added to the
properties of the pipe.
The pipe groups that may be created are specified in a DataSet (see Defining the Pipe
Groups DataSet) which is defined using the User Defined Attributes - DataSet Sub-
Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program.

6.11.4 Labelling Pipes with Reducers and Reducing Valves

See 8.6.19: Labelling Reducers and 8.6.7: Labelling General Valves.
If a reducer or reducing valve is inserted into a labelled pipe, both upstream and
downstream sizes are inherited from the label of the pipe segment that the symbol was
inserted into. The properties of the reducer or reducing valve must then be edited so that the
upstream and downstream sizes are different.
If reducer upstream and downstream pipe sizes are identical, and error message is
displayed. Upstream and downstream sizes may be the same for reducing valves.
If the size properties of a reducer or reducing valves are changed, the size of the pipe is
automatically changed as appropriate. For example, if the upstream size of a reducer is
changed, the size of the pipe upstream from the reducer is also changed to reflect this. If
there was a reducer upstream of the upstream pipe segment, its downstream size property
would be automatically changed as well.
In the same way, changes made to the size properties of a pipe segment are automatically
applied to reducers and reducing valves at either end of that segment. For example, if the
size of a pipe segment downstream of a reducer is changed, the downstream size property
of that reducer is also changed to reflect this.
If a reducer or reducing valve is deleted, the pipe segment that the symbol was inserted into
adopts the size of the segment that was upstream of the deleted symbol.

6.11.5 Labelling Pipes with Breaks and Inline Breaks

See 8.6.20: Labelling Breaks and Inline Breaks.
Breaks can exist either at pipe boundaries or inline, within a pipe run. A Break signifies a
change in specification, area, insulation, tracing etc from one pipe, or one segment of a
pipe, to the next.
For breaks at pipe boundaries, there will be a different line number on each side of the
break. An inline break is within a pipe, and therefore the pipe number is the same either side
of the break.
A single break symbol can be labelled with multiple labels, signifying that the symbol
represents more than one type of break, for example, where a trace break and an insulation
break occur at the same point.

• Labelling Breaks
Break symbols may be configured so that they are automatically labelled with pipe
properties on insertion. For break symbols not configured in this way, labels must be placed
"manually” by the user, as described below.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 6:30 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Drawing P&IDs

The procedure for labelling inline breaks and breaks at pipe boundaries is the same.
The upstream and downstream values of a break are initially populated with the upstream
and downstream pipe properties.
As required, enter the upstream and downstream values of the break to reflect the
change(s) in properties from one side of the break to the other. Only enter the values for
those properties that are different. Values that are left blank will not label the break.
If the properties of a break are changed, the properties of the pipe are automatically
changed as appropriate. For example, if the upstream area property of a break is changed,
the area property of the pipe upstream from the break is also changed to reflect this. If there
was a break upstream of the upstream pipe segment, its downstream area property would
be automatically changed as well.
In the same way, changes made to the properties of a pipe segment are automatically
applied to breaks at either end of that segment. For example, if the area of a pipe segment
downstream of a break is changed, the downstream area property of that break is also
changed to reflect this.
Note that deleting a break symbol will not result in the change in properties being removed.
Breaks are indicators of such changes only (unlike reducers).

6.11.6 Adding Pipe Destination Text

Pipe destination text may be added only to pipes which are already labelled. This type of
text can be used for situations such as labelling pipes which end in mid-air. For example, a
pipe expelling steam may be labelled, 'To Atmos'. Destination text may also be placed on a
start node, if desired.
It should be noted that when VPE Workbench is being used, destination text must be limited
to 32 characters. An automatic carriage return is placed at the end of each line of text and
this should be included when counting how many characters have been used.
If a pipe flag is to be used as well as pipe destination text, the pipe destination text must be
used to record the actual destination. A note should be entered in the flag to refer to the pipe
destination text. If an attempt is made to label the pipe flag with the destination as well as
using pipe destination text, there will be two recorded destinations, leading to confusion
when data is output.
See 8.6.21: Adding Pipe Destination Text.

6.11.7 Modifying Pipe Label Fields and Cascading Changes Through a Pipe
Run
Cascading preserves data consistency across pipe branch networks and over pipe
boundaries.
When the properties of parent pipe label are edited, any changes to these properties may
immediately be reflected in the labelling of the branches off that pipe.
If required, cascading to pipe branches may be disabled for specified fields on the Pipes -
Settings Sub-Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program. Note however
that fields specified for unique validation (see 6.13.3: Label Uniqueness Validation) will still
be cascaded regardless of these settings.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 6:31 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Drawing P&IDs

Changes of size or spec are also cascaded onto other pipes which are butted end-on to the
edited branches, with spec break and reducer, and reducing valves positions being taken
into account. Reducers and reducing valves behave intelligently throughout changes that
affect pipe sizes.
An alert box appears asking the users whether they wish to cascade the data change onto
the highlighted pipe. If the user accepts by selecting 'OK', the changes cascade through.
Changes to pipe properties can also be propagated to other pipes connected via linked pipe
flags. See Propagating Changes to Pipe Properties.

6.11.8 Setting Properties Sheet fields to inherit previously entered values

A project can be configured so that a value entered in a field in a Properties dialog is
"inherited" by the same field when that Properties dialog is accessed again when labelling
another, previously unlabelled, item of that type.
For example, the functionality is switched on for equipment Prefix field, and an equipment
item is labelled with a value of "20". The next time an equipment item is labelled for the first
time, when the Properties dialog for this item is opened, the Prefix field will automatically be
completed with the value "20". This can be replaced by another value if required. This new
value will then be the "inherited" value for the equipment Prefix field.
Select the Property dialog fields to which this function is applied using the Pipes - Settings
Sub-Category, Instruments - Settings Sub-Category, Equipment - Settings Sub-Category,
Valves - Settings Sub-Category and Miscellaneous - Settings Sub-Category of the AVEVA
P&ID Project Administration program.

6.11.9 Setting Labels to Inherit Values from Drawing Sheet Attributes

The values of labels may be inherited from the sheet attributes entered on the Advanced
Drawing Properties dialog. The values entered for these sheet attributes may be values that
are common to many items on the drawing, for example the design area. The inheritance
facility enables all items to inherit these common values. The labels of items that do not
share these common values may subsequently be edited manually using their properties
sheets.
Values inherited from sheet attributes can be hidden, i.e. though they are part of labels and
will be included in any exports of P&ID data, they are not displayed on P&IDs. Whether or
not a value is hidden is set up on a field-by-field basis.
Sheet attribute field names are set up using the Drawing Information - Settings Sub-
Category.
Note that sheet attribute fields can be linked to lists of values, so that only values from those
lists can be entered into the sheet attribute fields. This is also set up using the Drawing
Information – Settings pane.
Establish inheritance between item label and sheet attribute fields, and specify whether or
not inherited values are to be hidden using the Pipes - Settings Sub-Category, Instruments -
Settings Sub-Category, Equipment - Settings Sub-Category, Valves - Settings Sub-
Category and Line Fittings Configuration Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project
Administration program.
Note that if an instrument or valve label is set to inherit from the owning pipe, this takes
priority over sheet attribute inheritance.
Also note that unassigned items, on insertion, do not inherit drawing sheet attributes. See
6.7: Inserting Unassigned VPE Workbench Items.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 6:32 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Drawing P&IDs

Inheritance can be switched on and off for individual items using the Inheritance fields on
their Properties Dialogs.

• Changing Inherited Values

The following points should be considered when editing inherited values both at drawing
sheet and item level:
• When sheet attribute inheritance is first activated, any existing pipe values will not be
overwritten with sheet attribute values. Existing values for non-pipe labels will be
overwritten. All null values for all item labels will be overwritten.
• If a sheet attribute value is changed, all pipe label values that match the old attribute
value are set to the new attribute value, regardless of whether that value was inherited
or entered manually. For example, if the design area sheet attribute is changed from A
to B, all pipe label fields set to inherit from this sheet attribute that were set to A are
also changed to B.
• If a sheet attribute value is changed, non-pipe label values are not changed to the new
value, whether or not they were inherited. Changes to sheet attribute values only affect
items labelled subsequently.To re-establish inheritance for a non-pipe label that has
been changed manually, delete the label and re-label the item.
• If an item label field is re-set after inheritance to inherit from a different sheet attribute
field, any existing inherited values will behave as if the sheet attribute value had simply
been changed, as described above.
• All null values in fields that are set to inherit from sheet attributes will be updated when
sheet attribute values are changed.
• If a label field that must be populated from a list of valid values is set to inherit from a
drawing sheet attribute field, that drawing sheet attribute field must also be populated
from that same list of values.
• If a sheet attribute value that was set to be hidden is changed, those items that were
labelled with the previous value will still have that part of their labels hidden, even
though it is no longer an inherited value.
To "unhide" that part of their labels, open the Properties dialog for each item and press
the OK button.

6.11.10 Inserting Symbols with Labels

Pipe labels may automatically have a symbol placed with them when they are inserted. For
example, they may be placed in a box, or in a flag symbol.
Create the symbols required for this purpose in the normal way using AutoCAD. Ensure that
the symbol is placed in the \PMETSYM or \PIMPSYM project symbol directory as
appropriate.
This functionality is switched on and off for each item category, the required symbols
selected, and the offsets from the labels specified using the Pipes - Labels Sub-Category of
the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program.
See 8.6.17: Labelling Pipes.

6.11.11 Automatic Tagging

The tags of valves and the number components of pipe, instrument and equipment tags
may be set to be completed automatically.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 6:33 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Drawing P&IDs

Note: If this facility is in used, valve tags and the number fields of pipe, instrument and
equipment tags should not be set to (see 6.10.23: Setting Labels to Inherit Values
from Drawing Sheet Attributes).

This facility is turned on when the format for automatic valve tags is defined using the Pipes
- Automatic Tag Format Sub-Category, Instruments - Automatic Tag Format Sub-Category,
Equipment - Automatic Tag Format Sub-Category, Valves - Automatic Tag Format Sub-
Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program.
If automatic tagging is in use for pipe, instrument and equipment tags, the number
component of such items is automatically completed with an automatically incrementing
number in a format defined using the above panes.
Automatic valve tags may also include an automatically incremented number.
The automatically incremented number for a type of item may be reset to 0 for a project
using a button on the relevant AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program pane.
Automatic valve tags may include user-defined attributes of valves, as selected when the
tag format is defined. The available properties for the format are defined in a DataSet which
must be set up for this purpose (see Defining Valve Tag Properties for Automatic Valve
Tagging).
Automatic valve tags may also include selected attributes from owner pipes.
If the facility is in use, the relevant fields on the Properties Dialogs are automatically
completed when items are labelled. These values may be replaced by manual entry if
required.
Existing items that were not automatically labelled may be re-labelled with tags in the
automatic tag format. See 8.6.26: Replacing Tags with Tags in the Automatic Tag Format.
Note that items that were automatically labelled and then manually changed are not re-
labelled by this procedure.

6.12 Adding User-Defined Attributes

User-defined Attributes (UDAs) can be defined in two ways:
• Attributes may be added to symbols and pipes using the standard AutoCAD Attribute
Definition dialog, accessed from the Symbol Editor. Lists of valid values for these
attributes can then be selected using the User Defined Attributes - UDA List of Values
Sub-Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program.
To remove all such UDAs from selected symbols on a drawing, see 8.6.34: Removing
UDAs from Symbols.
• DataSet UDAs are groups of attributes that are set up for types of items or symbols that
meet user-defined criteria. They are defined using the User Defined Attributes -
DataSet Sub-Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 6:34 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Drawing P&IDs

Once defined, user-defined attribute values can be entered using the AVEVA P&ID
Properties Dialogs. They will be grouped under a node called User Defined Attributes.

Items on a drawing may be labelled with these values is required. See 8.6.33: Labelling
Items with UDAs.
Dataset UDA values may be constructed from the values of other dataset UDAs. These are
known as “Tag Expressions”. In the example below, the value of attribute V3 is constructed
from the values of V1 and V2.

Note: If using the first method described above, a new attribute has been defined for a
symbol of a type which already has labelled instances on a drawing, to add the new
attribute to the labels of these symbols, enter UDAS at the command line, and select
one of the symbols on the drawing. All the symbols of that type will then labelled with
default value of the new attribute.

Attributes may be exported from AVEVA P&ID using the standard export procedures, and
are exported in a separate output file that can be imported into AVEVA P&ID Reports. See
7.1: Integration with an AVEVA P&ID Reports Database for details.

6.13 Label Validation

When P&ID graphics are labelled, online data validation may take place. There are five
types of label validation:
• Label Validation against Lists of Valid Values
• Label Format Validation
• Label Uniqueness Validation
• Label Validation across all Project P&IDs
• Label Validation against Specifications
If possible, online validation should be left on, otherwise data is unchecked as it is entered,
equating to a complete lack of automatic quality control. Manual checking would then have
to be carried out.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 6:35 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Drawing P&IDs

6.13.1 Label Validation against Lists of Valid Values

Only valid entries may be selected when completing Properties Dialogs or entered at the
command prompt, items with invalid labels are displayed in red in the Engineering Explorer,
and drafting errors and omissions are highlighted with a balloon or symbol of the project's
choice, and detailed in an error file. Where possible, these errors should be rectified before
the data is exported to the database. Null characters may be used for pipe labels, if
information is unknown.
The following label data is validated:
Area codes
Block codes
Equipment Type Letters (equipment descriptions for each equipment type).
Fluid/Service codes
Function codes
Identical Instruments are identified by suffixes
Instrument Types (i.e. PI=Pressure Indicator)
Insulation Codes
Line Number Uniqueness
Line/Pipe Sizes
Nozzle Sizes
Nozzle Tag Uniqueness (per equipment item)
Paint Codes
Reducer Inlet and Outlet of different sizes
Specification codes
Tracing Codes
Valve Closures (failure positions)
Valve Codes
Valve Sizes (if not placed in-line)

• Validation Files
Entered data is checked against the allowable project values held in the project validation
files.
The project validation files edited using the List of Values Configuration Category of the
AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program. Alternatively, if the project is using VPE
Workbench, the validation files can be supplied by that system and are then read-only. A
directory path must be setup to VPE Workbench so that AVEVA P&ID can access these
validation files.
Online validation does not prevent the data export, as this might unnecessarily hold up a
project, when information is missing for only a small number of items.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 6:36 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Drawing P&IDs

• Typical Items
When labels of typical items are validated on input, they are not only checked against the
drawing labels but also typical labels on relevant items.
The validation process checks for duplicates. These are reported when the OK button on
the typical data entry dialog box is pressed. The dialog box remains open so that the
required changes can be made.

• Associated Project Configuration Options

If unlabelled nozzles are to result in an error message, check the Nozzle error balloon
placement checkbox. If unlabelled reducers are to result in an error message, check the
Reducer not labelled error balloon placement checkbox.
Enter the symbol used to indicate an error in the Symbol Name field. Enter the position in
which error text is displayed in the Text position from origin field.
The validation files are located in the Validation Directory identified on the Project
Configuration Category of the Administration program.

6.13.2 Label Format Validation

For certain label fields, the project may be set to check that entered labels correspond to a
specified format, in other words, that they consist of the correct type of characters in the
correct order.
For example, the equipment Prefix field may be set so that all entries in this field must begin
with an uppercase letter, followed by a lowercase letter, then a number, and so on.
These settings are made using the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program, using the
Pipes - Validation Sub-Category, Instruments - Validation Sub-Category, Equipment -
Validation Sub-Category, Valves - Validation Sub-Category, Nozzles - Validation Sub-
Category and Miscellaneous - Validation Sub-Category
If an invalid entry is made in a Properties dialog an error message is displayed, and the
invalid label may not be placed.

6.13.3 Label Uniqueness Validation

Within most categories of item, for example, pipes or instruments, a label must be unique on
a drawing. In addition, the project may be set to require that a selected field or a
combination of fields in pipe, instrument and equipment labels also be unique.
The fields that are to be checked for uniqueness are selected on the Pipes - Labels Sub-
Category, Instruments - Labels Sub-Category and Equipment - Labels Sub-Category of the
AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program.

6.13.4 Label Validation across all Project P&IDs

The project may be set to check that all labels in all P&IDs in a project are unique within a
category of item, for example, pipes or instruments.
These settings are made using the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program, using the
buttons in the Label Validation Across P&IDs sections of the Pipes - Settings Sub-Category,
Instruments - Settings Sub-Category, Equipment - Settings Sub-Category, Valves - Settings
Sub-Category and Miscellaneous - Settings Sub-Category.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 6:37 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Drawing P&IDs

If the Prevent option is selected, users are prevented from entering project duplicate labels
for that category of item. If this is attempted, an error message is displayed and the
duplicate labels may not be placed on the P&ID. The error message will identify the drawing
number of the P&ID on which the other label (that the user attempted to duplicate) is
located.
If the Warn option is selected, users are warned if they enter project duplicate labels for that
category of item. The entry of duplicate labels is permitted in this case, but a warning
message will be displayed on the P&ID, and will accompany the label data if it is transferred
to VPE Workbench. The warning message will identify the drawing number of the P&ID on
which the other label (that the user is duplicating) is located.
If the Ignore option is selected, no uniqueness validation of labels across P&IDs takes
place. Duplicate labels may be entered in different P&IDs in this case. Duplicate labels are
still not permitted in the same P&ID, except in the case of Valve and SPP labels.
If Prevent or Warn options are selected, the uniqueness of labels across a project is
checked against an external database, either a VPE Workbench database, or if VPE
Workbench is not available, an SQL database.

• Validation using a VPE Workbench Database

If checking is against a VPE Workbench database, a connection to the VPE Workbench
database should be established before labels are edited (see 8.8.8: Connecting to a VPE
Workbench Database). This is because in order to check label uniqueness, AVEVA P&ID
refers to a snapshot of the VPE Workbench database, stored in an XML file, which is
generated when the connection is made. After this has taken place, the connection may be
discontinued if required, and label data will be checked against the database snapshot.
However, entered label data cannot then be validated against label changes made in other
drawings after the disconnection.
If Prevent or Warn options are selected, the system will also check for duplicate labels when
a drawing is opened and when a connection to the VPE Workbench database is
established. If any are detected, error or warning messages are placed on the drawing as
appropriate.
If Prevent or Warn options are set, but no connection to the database has been made when
a drawing is opened, the system will check for duplicate labels against the data the in XML
snapshot file instead of the database.

• Validation using an SQL Database

The uniqueness of labels can alternatively be checked against an SQL database in a
network location available to all project users of AVEVA P&ID. The database location is
specified on the Project Configuration Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration
program.
Most label data is transferred to the database automatically when it is entered or changed if
the Save to database on Update checkbox on the VPE Workbench Configuration Category
of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program is checked. Some must be transferred
using the Synchronise process. See 8.8.6: Synchronising Data with a VPE Workbench
Database.
The table below specifies which label values will be transferred to the database
automatically and which ones will be transferred when the Synchronise process is executed.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 6:38 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Drawing P&IDs

(√ = Transferred; X = Not transferred)

Values deleted in a drawing will only be deleted in the SQL database once the Synchronise
process is executed.

• Validating Drawings Generated in other Locations

If a project is being worked on in multiple locations, the P&IDs generated in these other
locations must be sent to the office in which the validation database (either Workbench or
SQL) is located. They must then be opened in AVEVA P&ID in order for the validation check
to take place.
P&IDs can be e-mailed using the eTransmit facility (accessed from the File menu), which is
available in AVEVA P&ID. Using this facility, multiple drawings can be sent in a .zip file,
accompanied by a transmittal. A number of other options are also available.
See AutoCAD documentation for details.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 6:39 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Drawing P&IDs

• Points to Note
• Duplicate labels that include null characters (e.g. "?") in the same positions are not
validated and may be entered regardless of the project settings.
• If the Ignore option was set, but is subsequently changed to Prevent or Warn, when a
project drawing is reopened or refreshed, any duplicate labels for that category of item
are displayed with an error message if the Prevent option was selected or a warning
message if the Warn option was selected. Drawing data cannot be transferred to VPE
Workbench if error messages are present.
• Each part of an SPP label is placed separately and may be deleted separately. If a part
of an SPP label is deleted and as a result the label is now a duplicate of an SPP label
on another project drawing, an error or warning message may be displayed if the
Prevent or Warn option is selected on the Miscellaneous - Settings Sub-Category.

6.13.5 Label Validation against Specifications

Label validation against specifications is used to control which symbols can be inserted into
pipes based on the specification of those pipes.
For example, it may be specified that Ball Valve symbols may only be inserted into pipes
with a specification of AAA3, and an inlet bore size of 20 and an outlet bore size of 20. The
project may be set either to prevent the insertion of symbols into pipes that are not of the
correct specification, or to display such symbols in a specified colour.
Multiple combinations of pipe specs and sizes may be specified as compatible with the
insertion of a symbol. If no specs or sizes are specified for a symbol, insertion of this symbol
is unrestricted.
Spec/size insertion restrictions may be set up for Valves, Instrument Valves and Reducers.
Currently, only restrictions for 2-way symbols may be specified, but not symbols inserted at
pipe junctions such as 3-way and 4-way valves.
Label validation against specifications is set up using the Spec Driven Configuration
Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program.

Note: Changes to drawings resulting from changes to Spec Driven settings are not
automatically implemented when project drawings are loaded. The user must trigger
these changes "manually" in each drawing after it has loaded. See 8.2.4: Updating
Spec Driven Data.

6.14 Assemblies
Collections of elements on drawing can be grouped together to create assemblies.
Three types of assembly may be created (see 8.9.1: Creating Assemblies):
• Graphical Assemblies - pipes and symbols collected together into an AutoCAD block to
act as templates, retaining the item associations
• Design Data Templates - collections of VPE Workbench or P&ID Data Grid designators
and values used to label items. See 6.16: Dynamic Labelling for further information.
• Annotation Assemblies - there are two sub-types of Annotation Assemblies:
• Pipe: collections of pipe labels and symbols used to annotate pipes
• UDA: collections of user-defined attribute labels and symbols used to annotate
pipes, instruments and equipment.
Once an assembly is created, it is added to the Assemblies symbol folder of the project.
There is a sub-folder for each assembly type. In addition, the Annotation Assembly sub-

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 6:40 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Drawing P&IDs

folder contains sub-folders for each Annotation Assembly sub-type, and the UDA sub-type
folder contains further sub-folders for each type of UDA assembly.
It may then be inserted in the similar way to other symbols. See 8.4.11: Inserting
Assemblies.
Existing assemblies may only be removed by the AVEVA P&ID administrator.

6.15 Typical Items

The AVEVA P&ID Typical Items feature enables one item to be identified as having data that
is typical of many items. The details of the items represented by the typical item are added
to the label of the item on the P&ID, but do not appear on the P&ID. See 8.6.25: Labelling
Typical Items.
The following items can be made typical of many:
Pipes
Off-Sheet Connectors (Pipe Flags)
Instruments
Equipment
SPP Items
Valve Items
Nozzles.
When data is transferred to VPE Workbench from the drawing, the data associated with
each Typical Item is expanded into multiple sets where the items are created and revised in
VPE Workbench as appropriate.

• User Interface
For each item that can be made into a Typical Item, The Drawing Page shortcut menu
includes a Typicals option. This option is available if the Typical Item facility is enabled at
project level, and if the item has been labelled with the minimum mandatory data for the item
type. The option accesses a dialog box for the entry, deletion and modification of the typical
data.

Note: Currently, entry of typical data is available only by means of the dialog box.
Command line entry of typical data will be available in the future.

For easy recognition of Typical items on the P&ID, each typical Item label should be
displayed in a different colour to that of the equivalent non-typical label. These are selected
using the project configuration options set using the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration
program.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 6:41 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Drawing P&IDs

• Order of Typical Data

The ordering of typical data is illustrated by the following example:

Typical pipe 1001

With Typical data: 1002
1003
1024

are connected to nozzle reference 'A' on:

Typical Equipment V-1600-A

With Typical data: V-1600-B
V-1600-C
V-1600-D

This generates the following sets of destination information in the output file:

Pipeline: 1001
Connected to: Nozzle A on V-1600-A
Pipeline: 1002
Connected to: Nozzle A on V-1600-B
Pipeline: 1003
Connected to: Nozzle A on V-1600-C
Pipeline: 1024
Connected to: Nozzle A on V-1600-D

To facilitate the ordering of data, an order number is provided against each Typical data
record. This number is automatically generated on input, but can be modified manually to
enable re-ordering of the data sets. Deletion of a record in the Typical data set will
automatically re-order the data.

6.15.1 Validation
Validation of typical items is discussed in 3.5: Validation.

6.15.2 Sheet-to-Sheet Connections

Where Typical pipes are connected across drawing sheet boundaries, the following rule
applies; if a Typical pipe has a Typical flag label, it must connect to either a Typical pipe on
the connecting sheet, or to a series of drawn pipes on the connecting sheet.
This rule ensures that when data is transferred to VPE Workbench and the typical cross-
sheet connections are expanded, the transfer process can connect the pipes together
correctly across sheets.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 6:42 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Drawing P&IDs

6.15.3 Unique identifiers in VPE Workbench

Unique identifiers are maintained by the Typical items feature to ensure that VPE
Workbench does not unnecessarily flag items for secondary loading. Unique identifiers are
stored in the drawing alongside each Typical data record, so editing of the Typical data
records will not destroy the unique identifiers.

6.15.4 Typical Item Flag in AVEVA P&ID Output

Typical item flags appear in the Pipe, Pipe items and Instrument output files, to indicate
items that are typical and not drawn on the P&ID.

6.15.5 Typical Items in VPE Workbench

VPE Workbench includes a Typical item flag in all the item tables for Pipes, Pipe items and
Instruments.

6.15.6 Associated Project Configuration Options

The Typical Item feature can be turned on or off by the Typical Labelling checkbox on the
Miscellaneous - Labels Sub-Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program.
The colours of typical items, as opposed to non-typical items, are also specified on this tab.
There are fields for selecting colours for typical pipes, pipe flags, instruments, equipment,
SPPs and valves.

6.16 Dynamic Labelling

6.16.1 Item Labels

Items of equipment, instruments and lines may be labelled with dynamic labels. These
consist of detail data selected from a VPE Workbench project database or from the P&ID
Data Grid. See 8.8.10: Labelling with VPE Workbench Data and 8.6.22: Labelling with Data
from the P&ID Data Grid.
These labels consist of a value, and optionally the designator associated with the value. The
designator may be edited using the AVEVA P&ID labelling facilities (see 8.6: Labelling
Symbols and Pipes). The value should not be edited, but should be kept up-to-date by
refreshing them with the latest data from the VPE Workbench database (see 8.8.12:
Refreshing VPE Workbench Data) or from the P&ID Data Grid (see 8.6.23: Refreshing P&ID
Data Grid Labels).
The project can be set-up so that VPE Workbench values are refreshed automatically,
whenever a connection to VPE Workbench is made (see 8.8.8: Connecting to a VPE
Workbench Database).
If no value exists for a designator, a placeholder for that value may be used instead. Once a
value is defined for such a designator, the placeholder will be replaced by this value on
refresh.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 6:43 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Drawing P&IDs

6.16.2 Design Data Templates

A collection of values and designators can be grouped together to create an assembly. See
8.9.1: Creating Assemblies. The values and designators may be VPE Workbench values
and designators or any of the values and designators that a drawing may be labelled with
from the P&ID Data Grid, i.e. AVEVA P&ID, AVEVA P&ID Reports, AVEVA Instrumentation
and AVEVA Schematic Database data.
Such assemblies are known as Design Data Templates, as opposed to the standard
graphical assemblies consisting of pipes and symbols. Design Data Templates may be used
on the same drawing or inserted into another drawing after creation.
When a new Design Data Template is created, it is automatically placed in the relevant
Project Assemblies>Design Data Templates symbol folder (Instrument, Equipment, Pipe or
Drawing). Design Data Templates may then be associated with any appropriate symbol,
pipe, or with a drawing. The data they display is dynamic as described above, and will
change to reflect the values for the item or drawing they are associated with. See 8.4.11:
Inserting Assemblies.
Design Data Templates can only be removed by the AVEVA P&ID administrator.
Selecting a refresh of VPE Workbench data requires that a connection to VPE Workbench
be established. See 8.8.8: Connecting to a VPE Workbench Database.

6.16.3 Tables
Tables of VPE Workbench data may be placed on P&IDs, and subsequently refreshed with
current data. See 8.8.11: Inserting Tables of VPE Workbench Data.
The appearance, position and content of these tables is specified on the VPE Workbench -
Tables Sub-Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program.
Before tables of VPE Workbench data are placed or refreshed, a connection to VPE
Workbench must be established. See 8.8.8: Connecting to a VPE Workbench Database.

6.17 General Editing, Notes and Revision Clouds

General editing to drawings can be carried out by using the Cut, Copy, Paste, Delete and
Rotate options on the shortcut menus. Items can also be stretched and mirrored using
facilities in the Modify Group of the Home Tab.
See:
8.7.2: Moving Drawing Objects
8.7.1: Copying Drawing Objects and Labels
8.7.6: Deleting Drawing Objects
8.7.5: Rotating Drawing Objects
8.7.4: Stretching Drawing Objects
8.7.3: Mirroring Drawing Objects
Inline items such as valves and reducers may be copied or moved from one pipe or process
link to another by dropping the item onto the second pipe/process link, using the Cut/Copy,
Paste options on the shortcut menu. This will correctly break the pipe/process link in the
same way as a newly inserted item.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 6:44 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Drawing P&IDs

Whole branches and pipe networks can be copied together by selecting in the explorer and
using the shortcut menu. Note that you cannot cut or copy pipes that are flagged as 'invalid'.
They must be validated successfully first.
See 6.18: Deleting Items for more details of using the AVEVA P&ID delete facilities.
Facilities are provided to move of one or more items to the Non-Plotting Layer set in the
project configuration file. See 8.7.9: Moving Items to the Non-Plot Layer.
Symbols may be exchanged individually or globally. For the individual symbol exchange
option, you are prompted to select the new symbol from the Symbol List dialog box. The
selected symbol must be of the same AVEVA P&ID type as the one being exchanged. The
item type dictates the way AVEVA P&ID behaves when a symbol is inserted and these rules
must be maintained at the symbol exchange. All labelling, including balloons, is retained.
Undo twice to retrieve the original symbol if an error has been made, once to remove the
new symbol, once to put back the old. If multiple symbols of the same type are selected in
the drawing before the command is initialised they are all exchanged for the chosen symbol.
See 8.7.7: Exchanging Individual Symbols.
If it is required change all symbols of one type to another, for example, to change all Ball
Valves (BAVA) to Gate Valves (GAVA), global symbol exchange capabilities can be used.
This can be achieved by entering BAVA under the Old Symbol heading and GAVA under the
adjacent New Symbol heading in the Symbol Exchange List, which is accessed from the List
of Values Configuration Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program, and
by the use of the global symbol exchange facility used. This command can be used to swap
symbols on demand provided that the two symbol item types are the same. It is not possible
to swap one P&ID type for another, e.g.: Valves for Equipment. If the items do not match, an
error will be received, listing the item types that do not match, and the old symbol is left in
place. If problems are encountered, an AVEVA P&ID error balloon appears.
See 8.7.8: Exchanging Symbols Globally.
Notes may be added to items on a drawing, and changes from a previous revision may be
highlighted with revision clouds. See 8.6.29: Adding Notes to Items and 8.7.10: Drawing
Revision Clouds.

6.18 Deleting Items

To delete items from a drawing use the shortcut menus available from the Engineering
Explorer or The Drawing Page. These can be accessed after selecting single or multiple
items. See 8.7.6: Deleting Drawing Objects.
The consequences of deleting items in AVEVA P&ID vary because of the many different
situations encountered. The results deleting using the AVEVA P&ID facilities are dictated by
the item types involved and are summarised below.
In general, items associated together are deleted together.
Deleting an equipment item such as a vessel, with associated nozzles, pipe trim and
electrical equipment from the explorer, will remove everything.
• When deleting an inline item from a pipe with tracing, select the tracing around the item
as well as the item itself. Pipes are closed when inline items are deleted. Labels are
removed automatically as appropriate or can be selectively removed.
• When a labelled reducer is deleted, the line is closed and the user prompted for the
size to retain. The size of the remaining pipe is revised accordingly, and cascades
across pipe boundaries as necessary.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 6:45 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Drawing P&IDs

• Deleting an inline instrument also removes the label balloon, then closes the line and
removes labels as normal.
• Non-AVEVA P&ID entities/elements are deleted as they would be in normal AutoCAD.
• Deleting a Pipe which crosses over another pipe will only close the break in the line if
the break symbols are selected.
• Deleting an instrument also removes any associated I/O rockets.
• Nozzle labels are not automatically deleted when the label of the associated equipment
is deleted.
• If a trim label is deleted, associated trim pipe labels are also deleted.
• If the Number or Letter components of an equipment label are deleted, the rest of the
label will be deleted also.
• Each part of an SPP label is placed separately and may be deleted separately. If a part
of an SPP label is deleted and as a result the label is now a duplicate of an SPP label
on another project drawing, an error or warning message may be displayed if the
Prevent or Warn option is selected on the Miscellaneous - Settings Sub-Category of
AVEVA P&ID Administrator program.
• A title block of a drawing sheet may not be deleted if that drawing sheet has attribute
values that are inherited by items on the drawing. This is to prevent the accidental
deletion of large amounts of label data should the title block be inadvertently deleted.
Before such a title block can be deleted, the project settings must be changed to
remove the inheritance, and the previously inherited sheet attribute values set to null.

6.19 Detecting Corrupted Items

During the creation of an intelligent AVEVA P&ID drawing, it is possible that items on a
drawing will become corrupt. Facilities are available to detect and highlight such items.
Corrupted items are detected using the 8.8.1: Checking for Corrupted Items procedure.
Items which are corrupted are then indicated with an error balloon.

6.20 Saving Changes

Save changes to the drawing in the normal way using the standard AutoCAD facilities.
When changes to a drawing are saved, the following dialog may be displayed, in which
details of these changes and the current state of the drawing may be entered:

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 6:46 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Drawing P&IDs

These details can subsequently be viewed in the Drawing History window. See 8.9.12:
Viewing a Drawing’s History.
Whether or not the dialog is displayed in controlled by the setting of the Show Drawing
History dialog box on the Drawing - Settings Sub-Category of the AVEVA P&ID
Administration program.
When a drawing is saved, a record of it may be saved to the AVEVA P&ID Document
Manager. Whether or not this is the case is controlled by the setting of the Add P&ID
Drawing Details to Database checkbox on the P&ID Reports - Settings Sub-Category of the
AVEVA P&ID Administration program. Related settings are specified in the Document
Manager Configuration Category.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 6:47 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Drawing P&IDs

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 6:48 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Data Transfer

7 Data Transfer

7.1 Integration with an AVEVA P&ID Reports Database

7.1.1 Exporting Data for an AVEVA P&ID Reports Database

Data is validated and exported for AVEVA P&ID Reports using the Exporting Data to a P&ID
Reports and/or AVEVA Engineering Database procedure.
Data can be exported in three ways using this procedure:
• In unconsolidated form to an intermediate database, from where it must subsequently
be consolidated using AVEVA P&ID Reports facilities.
• In unconsolidated form to a number of output files, from where it must subsequently be
consolidated using AVEVA P&ID Reports facilities.
• Consolidated drawing data transferred directly into the AVEVA P&ID Reports database.
Refer to the AVEVA P&ID Reports documentation for more information on AVEVA P&ID
Reports facilities.
In order for data to be transferred directly into a P&ID Reports database, that database must
first be logged into. See 8.8.3: Connecting to a P&ID Reports Database.
AVEVA P&ID Reports can be launched from AVEVA P&ID, and the database to which
drawing data has been exported opened automatically. See 8.8.4: Opening a P&ID Reports
Database. Note that the database must be logged into first (see above).
Project configuration settings for the interface with P&ID Reports, such as the database to
which drawing data is exported, are specified on the P&ID Reports Configuration Category
of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program.

• Data Validation
Data validation automatically takes place when a drawing is exported. It checks the
following:
• that all nozzles are identified
• that all reducers are identified
• instrument process connections
• that all spec breaks are identified
• assembles all item data for inclusion in the output files.
Only objects within the limits of drawings, as specified on the Drawing - Grid Sub-Category
of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program, will be validated.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 7:1 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Data Transfer

• Points to Note

- Additional Process
During an export, the following additional processes may take place:
• A copy of the drawing can be made available for AVEVA Model Management. In order
for this to happen, the Save Copy checkbox on the Project Configuration Category of
the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program must be checked.
• Data can also be exported to VPE Workbench at the same time as it is exported to
AVEVA P&ID Reports. See the Synchronising Data with a VPE Workbench Database
procedure for details.

- Generating Line Lists

If it is required to generate a simple line list from AVEVA P&ID using the export facility, line
lists can be generated from "semi-intelligent" drawings, only partially upgraded from
AutoCAD drawings (see 5: Upgrading AutoCAD Drawings), in which only the lines
themselves are "intelligent" and any inline symbols are "dumb" AutoCAD blocks.

- Drawing Number
Before data is exported from a flow diagram, a drawing number must have been assigned
and added to the drawing. See 8.1.6: Adding a Title to a Drawing and entering Drawing
Sheet Attributes. It is also recommended that a Title be added. Without the drawing number,
validation and data export cannot proceed.

- Design Area
If the 'Design area from title block used for Instrument Label Field 1' checkbox on the
Drawing Labels pane is checked, and a design area is entered in the drawing Properties
dialog, any instruments or equipment without a label prefix will have the design area
exported as the prefix part of their label. For a vessel this may result in the label 20-V100,
where 20 is the design area. Pre-existing instrument or equipment prefixes will not be
overwritten. The area prefix is not visibly added to the label on the drawing; it is only added
on export.

- Specification
If the 'Populate Spec in Database' checkbox on the Pipes - Settings Sub-Category is
checked, specification attributes of items are exported. If this checkbox is not checked, the
values will be set to null in the engineering database.

7.1.2 Updating AVEVA P&ID with changes in an AVEVA P&ID Reports

Database
Facilities are provided in AVEVA P&ID Reports to add new items and to edit the values of
existing items.
Such changes are reflected in AVEVA P&ID (i.e. drawings and data in the P&ID Data Grid is
updated) when any of the following procedures is carried out:
• Drawings are opened in AVEVA P&ID.
• Project settings are refreshed.
• Drawings are Synchronised.
• Drawing data is exported to an ISO 15926 file.
• The P&ID Data Grid is refreshed.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 7:2 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Data Transfer

7.2 Transferring Data to and from AVEVA Instrumentation

and AVEVA Electrical

7.2.1 Exporting to AVEVA Instrumentation and AVEVA Electrical

When drawing data is synchronised (see 8.8.6: Synchronising Data with a VPE Workbench
Database), copies of the synchronised drawings may be created in the Save Path field on
the Project Configuration Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program.
Item data from these drawings can be imported into an AVEVA Instrumentation (AI) or
AVEVA Electrical (AE) project, and the drawings themselves viewed in AI or AE. For details
of these facilities, refer to AVEVA Instrumentation and AVEVA Electrical documentation.

7.2.2 Importing from AVEVA Instrumentation and AVEVA Electrical

Instruments from AVEVA Instrumentation and electrical equipment from AVEVA Electrical
may be imported by placing them directly on to an AVEVA P&ID drawing.
This procedure is carried out using the P&ID Data Grid. From the P&ID Data Grid, an
AVEVA Instrumentation or AVEVA Electrical project may be logged onto. The P&ID Data
Grid then lists the instruments/electrical equipment in the project which have been added to
a drawing in the AVEVA P&ID drawing in the P&ID project (Assigned Instruments and
Assigned Electrical Equipment), and those that have not (Unassigned Instruments and
Unassigned Electrical Equipment).
Instruments and electrical equipment are added to a drawing simply by dragging and
dropping from the Unassigned Instruments and Unassigned Electrical Equipment nodes
onto a drawing, and assigning a P&ID symbol type.
For details of this procedure, see 8.8.13: Transferring Data from AVEVA Instrumentation
and AVEVA Electrical.
Imported instruments are added to the UNNAMED node in the Instrument Loops section of
the Engineering Explorer.
The Derive Instrument AREA From field on the AI Integration Configuration Category of the
AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program is used to specify the AVEVA P&ID Instrument
tag field which will be populated with the Area values of instruments imported from AVEVA
Instrumentation.
The Derive Equipment AREA From field on the AE Integration Configuration Category of the
AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program is used to specify the AVEVA P&ID Equipment
tag field which will be populated with the Area values of equipment imported from AVEVA
Electrical.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 7:3 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Data Transfer

7.3 Integration with PDMS

7.3.1 Integration with PDMS Schematics

Data can be exported from the current P&ID drawing into an AVEVA PDMS Schematic
Database and imported from an AVEVA PDMS Schematic Database to the P&ID Data Grid.
The installation of PDMS that the AVEVA P&ID project is integrated with is selected on the
PDMS Integration Category Pane of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program. On
the PDMS Integration - Schematics Sub-Category a default project and database can be
selected.
Configuration is also required in PDMS to set up the interface between AVEVA P&ID and
PDMS Schematics. See 10.9: Setting up PDMS Schematics to Connect with P&ID for
details.
The database to which data is to be exported is logged into using facilities provided by the
P&ID Data Grid. The current content of the selected database can also be viewed in the
P&ID Data Grid. See 4.5.6: Importing, Viewing and Exporting data to and from PDMS
Schematics.
See 8.8.14: Transferring Data to PDMS Schematic Databases for the export procedure.

Note: Data can also be exported from single or multiple drawings to XML files in ISO 15928
format. This data can subsequently be imported into a PDMS Schematic database
using the PDMS Schematic Model Manager module. See 7.7: Exporting to an ISO
15926 File.

Note: Data cannot currently be exported to AVEVA Marine Schematic Databases using this
method.

The current content of a Schematics database can be imported and then viewed in the P&ID
Data Grid. The data can then placed on drawings as designators. See 8.6.22: Labelling with
Data from the P&ID Data Grid.

7.3.2 Integration with AVEVA Engineering

Data can be exported from the current P&ID drawing into an AVEVA Engineering Database
and imported from an AVEVA Engineering Database to the P&ID Data Grid.
The installation of PDMS that the AVEVA P&ID project is integrated with is selected on the
PDMS Integration Category Pane of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program. On
the PDMS Integration - Engineering Sub-Category a default project and database can be
selected.
Configuration is also required in AVEVA Engineering and using the AVEVA Reports Service
to set up the interface between AVEVA P&ID and AVEVA Engineering. See 10.11:
Integration with AVEVA Engineering: Setup and Import Procedures in AVEVA Engineering
and 10.10: Setting up AVEVA P&ID to Connect with AVEVA Engineering for details.
Data is exported using the Synchronization facilities. See 8.8.2: Exporting Data to a P&ID
Reports and/or AVEVA Engineering Database for details.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 7:4 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Data Transfer

• Importing AVEVA Engineering Data

AVEVA Engineering data is imported using the P&ID Data grid. See 4.5.7: Importing and
Viewing data from AVEVA Engineering. There are two methods:
• The current content of an AVEVA Engineering database can be imported and then
viewed in the P&ID Data Grid. The data can then placed on drawings as designators.
See 8.6.22: Labelling with Data from the P&ID Data Grid.
• Alternately, AVEVA Engineering items can be imported into the AVEVA P&ID database
itself as unassigned items, and viewed in the P&ID Data Grid. These unassigned items
can then be placed on a drawing and assigned in the normal way. See 8.4.12: Inserting
Unassigned P&ID Database Symbols.

7.4 Importing VPE Workbench Data

Three types of data can be imported from a VPE Workbench project database into AVEVA
P&ID. They are discussed below under the following headings:
• Importing Instrument Tag/Loop Numbers
• Importing Equipment Design Data
• Importing I/O Address Data.
In addition, drawings may be labelled with data from a VPE Workbench project database.
See 6.16: Dynamic Labelling for details.

7.4.1 Importing Instrument Tag/Loop Numbers

AVEVA P&ID imports instrument prefix, loop and suffix numbers from an external database.
The information must be present in the correct format in the file <FILENAME>.ENI, where
<FILENAME> is the filename of the flow diagram concerned. This file must be located in the
data directory specified by the project configuration file.
The data is automatically imported on initialisation or loading of the software, provided that
this facility is enabled in the project configuration file.
The limit and display position of loop information, such as prefix, loop, type etc., imported
into the flow diagram is configurable by the project options for instrument balloon details. An
exception report is created if items are not found on a flow diagram.
On initialising AVEVA P&ID, if the <FILENAME>.ENI file is found, the following message
appears:

Writing Loop Numbers from External Database, Please Wait......

After data import, the program deletes the <FILENAME>.ENI file from the data directory to
prevent reload of the information the next time that the drawing is accessed.

• Associated Project Configuration Options

If instrument prefix, loop and suffix numbers are to be imported, the Loop Numbers from
VPE Workbench checkbox on the Instruments - Labels Sub-Category of the AVEVA P&ID
Project Administration program must be checked.
The directory from which the data is imported is specified using the VPE Data Path field on
the Project Configuration Category.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 7:5 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Data Transfer

• <DRAWING FILENAME>.ENI File Format

The format of each record is:
Handle | Prefix | Type | Loop | Suffix
For example: 2045 | 23 | PI | 1001 | NONE

Note: The use of the word "NONE" in the file replaces the absence of a field (in the
example, a Suffix).

All fields may be a maximum of 32 characters in length.

The List Item Details procedure may be used to obtain the handle of an item if manually
constructing the file.

7.4.2 Importing Equipment Design Data

The EDL item type is used to associate a special symbol with a piece of equipment. The
EDL symbol may be any chosen symbol and may be placed on the non-plot layer.
When an export of equipment data is carried out from VPE Workbench, an EDL file is
created. The data is automatically imported when the P&ID is loaded and AVEVA P&ID is
initialised, provided that this facility is enabled in the project configuration file.
When imported, the data appears attached to the correct EDL symbol on the P&ID. The first
label piece of information is placed on the insert point of the symbol. The offsetting of
successive items of equipment information when the data appears on the EDL symbol is
controlled by settings in the project configuration file.

• Associated Project Configuration Options

If the EDL data is to be imported, the Import Equipment Data checkbox on the Equipment -
Settings Sub-Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program must be
checked.
The placement of successive items of such equipment information is controlled by the
Column X Offsets and Column Y offsets fields.

• <DRAWING FILENAME>.EDL File Format

The format of each record is:
Handle | Prefix | Type | Loop | Suffix
For example: 2045 | 23 | PI | 1001 | NONE

Note: The use of the word "NONE" in the file replaces the absence of a field (in the
example, a Suffix). All fields may be a maximum of 32 characters in length.
The List Item Details procedure (see 8.9.6: List Item Details) may be used to obtain
the handle of an item if manually constructing the file.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 7:6 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Data Transfer

7.4.3 Importing I/O Address Data

I/O Rockets are special symbols not supplied with the standard AVEVA P&ID set. I/O
Rockets are used to assign single or multiple I/O (input/output) data against instruments or
equipment. When I/O rockets are being used, the I/O data entered in VPE Workbench for
those tagged items passes back onto the P&ID in a read-only form when AVEVA P&ID is
initialised. The following message is received when this happens:

Writing I/O data from external database, Please wait......

I/O rocket labels may be placed on the non-plotting layer via a setting in the project
configuration file.
The labels for I/O Address, Card Type, Signal/Area Code and Remarks are automatically
positioned in the same place for each rocket and the X, Y offsets in the project configuration
options listed below control this automatic positioning with respect to the symbol insertion
point.
Once the export has occurred, the files named after the P&ID name with an IIO extension
must be placed in the \VPE Workbench directory of the AVEVA P&ID installation. This
enables automatic detection of the file the next time the P&ID is loaded.

• Associated Project Configuration Options

If I/O rocket labels are to be placed on the Non-plot layer, ensure that the Labels on Non-
plot layer checkbox on the Instruments - Labels Sub-Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project
Administration program is checked.
The X, Y offsets in the Offset from Symbol Origin fields control the automatic positioning of
the I/O Address, Card Type, Signal/Area Code and Remarks components of the labels.
The four components of labels may be individually rotated as they are brought in from VPE
Workbench. Check the appropriate Rotate with Symbol checkboxes to activate the rotation.

7.5 Exporting Data to a VPE Workbench Database

AVEVA P&ID can validate and export engineering item and connectivity data to the Plant
Connectivity Model of a VPE Workbench database. This data can then be issued to the
detailed engineering VPE Workbench modules and used as the basis for project
documentation.
The following methods for exporting data to a VPE Workbench project database are
available:
• The Synchronising Data with a VPE Workbench Database procedure, which is used to
export data from a single AVEVA P&ID drawing. This procedure generates a number of
output files. These may optionally be automatically copied to a specified publishing
area, from where they are automatically imported into the intermediate data transfer
tables of a specified VPE Workbench project.
Optionally, the output files may be transferred (or re-transferred) to the publishing area
using facilities on the VPE Workbench Configuration Category of the AVEVA P&ID
Project Administration program, as described below.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 7:7 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Data Transfer

• Facilities are provided to export data from one or more previously synchronised
drawings on the VPE Workbench Configuration Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project
Administration program. This facility transfers the output files generated from
synchronised drawings into the publishing area as described above.
• The VPE Workbench Configuration Category also provides facilities to export data from
one or more previously synchronised drawings to legacy VPE Workbench projects (i.e.
pre-VPE Workbench 5.8). Data is transferred from the output files generated from
synchronised drawings into the project database, into intermediate data transfer tables.
If exporting to a legacy project, a connection to the database in question must first be
established by following the Connecting to a VPE Workbench Database procedure.
Details of the output files can be found in 10.2: Output File Format.
The folder into which these files are transferred to when a drawing is synchronised is set on
the Project Configuration Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program.
If exporting to a non-legacy project, the project and publishing area are defined on the VPE
Workbench Configuration Category.

Note: See also 10.8: Setting up AVEVA P&ID to Connect with VPE Workbench.

7.5.1 Data Validation

Data validation automatically takes place when a drawing is synchronised. It checks the
following:
• that all nozzles are identified
• that all reducers are identified
• instrument process connections
• that all spec breaks are identified
• assembles all item data for inclusion in the output files.
Only objects within the limits of drawings, as specified on the Drawing - Grid Sub-Category
of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program, will be validated.

7.5.2 Points to Note

• Additional Process
During an export, the following additional processes may take place:
• A copy of the drawing can be made available for AVEVA Model Management. In order
for this to happen, the Save Copy checkbox on the Project Configuration Category of
the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program must be checked.
• Data can also be exported to an SQL database if a VPE Workbench database is not
available. If a suitable SQL database has been identified in the project configuration,
most data is transferred automatically as a drawing is labelled. Other data must be
transferred using the synchronisation process (see below). Data transferred to either
type of database can be used to validate the uniqueness of label data within a category
of item within a project. See 6.13.4: Label Validation across all Project P&IDs.
• Data can also be exported to AVEVA P&ID Reports at the same time as it is exported to
VPE Workbench. See the Exporting Data to a P&ID Reports and/or AVEVA
Engineering Database procedure for details.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 7:8 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Data Transfer

• Generating Line Lists

If it is required to generate a simple line list from AVEVA P&ID using the Synchronise facility,
line lists can be generated from "semi-intelligent" drawings, only partially upgraded from
AutoCAD drawings (see 5: Upgrading AutoCAD Drawings), in which only the lines
themselves are "intelligent" and any inline symbols are "dumb" AutoCAD blocks.

• Drawing Number
Before data is exported from a flow diagram, a drawing number must have been assigned
and added to the drawing. See 8.1.6: Adding a Title to a Drawing and entering Drawing
Sheet Attributes. It is also recommended that a Title be added. Without the drawing number,
validation and data export cannot proceed.

• Design Area
If the 'Design area from title block used for Instrument Label Field 1' checkbox on the
Drawing Labels pane is checked, and a design area is entered in the drawing Properties
dialog, any instruments or equipment without a label prefix will have the design area
exported as the prefix part of their label. For a vessel this may result in the label 20-V100,
where 20 is the design area. Pre-existing instrument or equipment prefixes will not be
overwritten. The area prefix is not visibly added to the label on the drawing; it is only added
on export.

• Specification
If the 'Populate Spec in Database' checkbox on the Pipes - Settings Sub-Category is
checked, specification attributes of items are exported. If this checkbox is not checked, the
values will be set to null in the engineering database.

• Exporting Items without Tag Numbers

AVEVA P&ID permits the export of items without tag numbers by using temporary tag
numbers. These numbers are automatically assigned by AVEVA P&ID at the time of export
and are unique identifiers that can be seen on the screen. They are exported to the
database and appear in square brackets, for example:
[21]
[34]
[45]
[56]
They can subsequently be edited in the database once the actual tag number is known. The
updated tag numbers from the database then dynamically update the temporary tag
numbers on the flow diagram when it is next loaded into AVEVA P&ID.
Each time an export is carried out for the same flow diagram, these temporary tag numbers
will be the same. This feature enables VPE Workbench to trace the changes since the
previous import.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 7:9 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Data Transfer

7.6 Exporting Data to AVEVA NET

Data can be exported from AVEVA P&ID drawings into files that can subsequently be
imported into AVEVA NET Portal:
• AVEVA EIWM (Engineering Information and Workflow Model) XML files containing the
engineering data
• SVG files which are used to display the AVEVA P&ID drawings in AVEVA NET Portal.
The export is configured using the AVEVA NET - Configurations Sub-Category, AVEVA NET
- Mappings Sub-Category and AVEVA NET - Setting Sub-Category of the AVEVA P&ID
Project Administration program of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program.
Data can be exported from the current drawing in AVEVA P&ID. See 8.8.15: Publishing Data
to AVEVA NET for details.
Facilities are also provided to export data from a batch of drawing in the AVEVA NET -
Advanced Options Sub-Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program.
This pane also includes facilities to export data to a remote location such as a shared folder
on a network.

7.7 Exporting to an ISO 15926 File

Drawing data can be exported to XML files in ISO15926 format. These files contain both
engineering item data and graphical data which can subsequently be imported into an
AVEVA PDMS or AVEVA Marine Schematic databases using the Schematic Model Manager
module.
Data can be exported to an ISO 15926 file either from a single drawing, or from a batch of
drawings. See 8.8.16: Exporting Data to ISO 15926 Files.

Note: Data can also be exported directly from a single drawing into a PDMS Schematic
database. See 7.3.1: Integration with PDMS Schematics.

If data is to be exported to PDMS, ensure that instrument and miscellaneous item label
delimiters are set, to ensure tag format consistency with PDMS.
These delimiters are entered using the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program, in the
Instrument Dialog Labels section of the Instruments - Settings Sub-Category and the Dialog
Box Field Labels section of the Miscellaneous - Labels Sub-Category.
If "Legacy" Process Links are to be used (PLK item type), i.e. Process Links without
the functionality introduced with AVEVA VPE P&ID 7.2 SP3, a number of factors should be
considered when drawing process links if data is to be exported to an ISO 15926 file. For
details, see Guidelines for Drawing Process Links.
If exporting data that is to be imported by the 12.0 SP5 version of PDMS or later, the 3.3.3
version of the ISO 15926 schema may be used. If exporting data to previous versions of
PDMS (e.g. 12.0 SP4), the 3.2.0 version of the ISO15926 schema must be used.
Refer to 10.5: The ISO15926 (Version 3.2.0) Schema Specification or 10.6: The ISO15926
(Version 3.3.3) Schema Specification.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 7:10 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Data Transfer

Note: All port sizes of 3-way and 4-way components are exported. The third size is
exported as the "Secondary_size_1" value in the XML file, the fourth size as
"Secondary_size_2". See the image below for an example.

7.8 Transferring Data to and from Excel

All the item and drawing data of a drawing can be exported to Microsoft Excel spreadsheets.
This data can then be edited in the spreadsheet using Excel facilities and imported back into
AVEVA P&ID to update the drawing. Data can be exported from and to a single drawing or a
batch of drawings.
See:
• 8.8.17: Exporting Data to Excel
• 8.8.18: Editing P&ID Data in an Excel Spreadsheet
• 8.8.19: Importing Data from Excel
As part of the import procedure, changed data is validated. Invalid changes are highlighted
on the spreadsheet so that they can easily be identified and corrected.
The format of the exported spreadsheet and the scope of data that is imported are specified
on the Excel Interface Configuration Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration
program.
For details of the format of the spreadsheet see 10.7: Format of the Excel Interface
Spreadsheet.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 7:11 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Data Transfer

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 7:12 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

8 AVEVA P&ID Procedures

8.1 Preliminary Procedures

8.1.1 Specifying Project Settings

• Description
AVEVA P&ID can be configured to suit project requirements by means of project options.
These are set using the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program.

• Instructions
Refer to 2.3: AVEVA P&ID Project Administration Program.

8.1.2 Creating Drawings

• Description
New AVEVA P&ID drawings can be created in a number of ways.

• Instructions
Refer to 6.2: Creating a New Drawing.

8.1.3 Upgrading AutoCAD Drawings to AVEVA P&ID Drawings

• Description
Existing "dumb" AutoCAD drawings can be upgraded to "intelligent" AVEVA P&ID drawings,
using the AVEVA P&ID Drawing Upgrade Utility and procedures within AVEVA P&ID.

• Instructions
Refer to 5: Upgrading AutoCAD Drawings.

8.1.4 Upgrading Items from old Projects

• Description
A revised version of pipe lines that improved the performance and usability of the
application considerably was introduced with AVEVA VPE P&ID 7.2 SP3.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:1 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

For projects developed using previous versions of AVEVA P&ID, an upgrade of the pipes
and symbols on the project drawings is required before the drawings can be used in AVEVA
VPE P&ID 7.2 SP3 or AVEVA P&ID 12.0 or later.

• Instructions
Refer to 2.1: Upgrading Pipes and Symbols from old Projects.

8.1.5 Opening a Drawing

• Description
AVEVA P&ID drawings can be opened in a number of ways.

• Instructions
Refer to 6.3: Starting and Exiting AVEVA P&ID.

8.1.6 Adding a Title to a Drawing and entering Drawing Sheet Attributes

• Description
This procedure is used to add or edit the drawing numbers, sheet numbers, revision
numbers, client drawing numbers and drawing titles of drawings. The command is also used
to specify a design area to be used for export purposes by instruments/equipment that do
not have an associated design area, to view the range of line and loop numbers used on a
drawing and to enter other drawing sheet attribute that may be inherited by items on the
drawing.
For details of the use of this procedure in the context of drawing P&IDs, see 6.4: Titling a
Drawing.

Note: If the drawing number is associated with a VPE Workbench project, details of that
project may be viewed. See 8.8.10: Labelling with VPE Workbench Data.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:2 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

• Example

• Errors
An error message will be received during validation if a drawing number is not associated
with a drawing.

• Associated Project Configuration Options

• If the design area is to appear in the title, ensure that the Design area from Title Block
used for Instrument Label field 1 checkbox on the Drawing - Labels Sub-Category of
the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program is checked.
• If the project number is to be part of the drawing title, check the Place Project Number
Label as part of Drawing Title checkbox.
• The numbers of drawing areas, drawing numbers and project number labels to include
in the title are specified in the 3 fields in this pane.
• Sheet attribute field names and coordinates of their labels on drawing are set up using
the Drawing - Settings Sub-Category.
• Entries into sheet attribute fields may be restricted by setting up validation rules using
the Drawing Information – Validation Sub-Category.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:3 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

• Establish inheritance between item label and sheet attribute fields using the Pipes -
Settings Sub-Category, Instruments - Settings Sub-Category, Equipment - Settings
Sub-Category, Valves - Settings Sub-Category and Line Fittings Configuration
Category.

• Instructions
1. Start the procedure by selecting the Properties option from the shortcut menu of The
Drawing Page.
2. The AVEVA P&ID Drawing properties dialog is then displayed (see 4.8: Properties
Dialogs):

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:4 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

Enter or edit the details as required.

3. To enter, edit or view Sheet Attribute and Line and Loop Number Range Data in the
fields provided:

Enter or edit data as required. Depending on project set up, the values entered in the
Drawing Sheet Attribute fields may be inherited by items on the drawing. Click on OK to
return to the AVEVA P&ID Drawing Properties dialog.
4. Once title details have been entered you will be prompted to position the data on the
drawing. For example:

Position Drawing Number:

You will only be prompted to position data from fields that you have actually completed.
While positioning title data you may be required to specify the rotation and height of the
text.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:5 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

8.2 Implementing Configuration Changes

8.2.1 Overview

• Description
Most project configuration changes are automatically implemented in a drawing when it is
opened. However there are exceptions to this, and project configuration changes may also
be implemented manually once a drawing has been opened, as described below.

• Associated Project Configuration Options

All project configuration changes are made using the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration
Program.

• Instructions
• Configuration Changes that must be implemented by the user
• Configuration Changes that may optionally be implemented
• Implementing Configuration Changes made since a drawing was opened

- Configuration Changes that must be implemented by the user

Some configuration changes are not automatically implemented when project drawings are
loaded. The user must trigger these changes "manually" in each drawing after it has loaded
using the following procedures:
• Updating Equipment Tags
• Updating PipeTags
• Updating Spec Driven Data
• Updating Pipe Style Colours
• Convert Project Label Units

- Configuration Changes that may optionally be implemented

If project configuration changes have been made to text styles or to the appearance settings
of labels, or if they have been changed in the drawing and are now different from the project
settings, the following message is displayed when a drawing is opened:

Click Yes to set the appearance of labels to those defined in the project settings.
Click No the keep the current appearance of the labels on the drawing.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:6 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

- Implementing Configuration Changes made since a drawing was opened

To implement configuration changes made since the drawing was opened, select the
Refresh Settings option in the AVEVA P&ID Group of the Home Tab. The following
message is then displayed:

Click Yes to continue. Configuration changes are then implemented with the exceptions
described above.

8.2.2 Updating Equipment Tags

• Description
Changes to drawings resulting from the Equipment Label Format project configuration
settings being changed are not automatically implemented when project drawings are
loaded. The user must trigger these changes "manually" in each drawing after it has loaded
using this procedure.

Note: As an alternative to the procedure below, if only a single label is to be updated,

opening and closing the Properties dialog (see 4.8: Properties Dialogs) of that
equipment will update its label format.

• Associated Project Configuration Options

This procedure is used to implement changes made to the Equipment Label Format settings
on the Equipment - Labels Sub-Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration
program.

• Instructions
1. Start the procedure by selecting the Update Equipment Tag option in the Project
Configuration Group of the Utilities Tab.
2. The command prompt will display:

Pick Equipment for reformatting the tags:

Select the equipment the tags of which are to be updated. When all the required
equipment has been selected, press Enter.
If all equipment tags on the drawing are to be updated, enter "all" at the command
prompt and press Enter. It is recommended that a Zoom Extents is performed before
proceeding with this option.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:7 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

3. The command prompt will display the number of selected equipment items (for
example):

5 found

The labels of the selected equipment are then updated. If many equipment items have
been selected, this may take a few moments.

8.2.3 Updating PipeTags

• Description
Changes to drawings resulting from the Display Label Format project configuration setting
beings changed are not automatically implemented when project drawings are loaded. The
user must trigger these changes "manually" in each drawing after it has loaded using this
procedure.

Note: Split pipe labels cannot be updated using this procedure.

Note: As an alternative to the procedure below, if only a single label is to be updated,

opening and closing the Properties dialog (see 4.8: Properties Dialogs) of that pipe
will update its label format.

• Associated Project Configuration Options

This procedure is used to implement changes made to the Display Label Format settings on
the Pipes - Labels Sub-Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program.

• Instructions
1. Start the procedure by selecting the Update Pipe Tag option in the Project
Configuration Group of the Utilities Tab.
2. The command prompt will display:

Pick pipe group for reformatting the tags:

Select the pipes the tags of which are to be updated. When all the required pipes have
been selected, press Enter.
If all pipe tags on the drawing are to be updated, enter "all" at the command prompt and
press Enter. It is recommended that a Zoom Extents is performed before proceeding
with this option.
3. The command prompt will display the number of selected pipes (for example):

5 found

The labels of the selected pipes are then updated. If many pipes have been selected,
this may take a few moments.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:8 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

8.2.4 Updating Spec Driven Data

• Description
Changes to drawings resulting from changes to Spec Driven Project Configuration settings
are not automatically implemented when project drawings are loaded. The user must trigger
these changes "manually" in each drawing after it has loaded using this procedure.

• Example:
Out of spec items highlighted in magenta:

• Associated Project Configuration Options

This procedure is used to implement changes made to the settings on the Spec Driven
Configuration Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program.

• Instructions
1. Start the procedure by selecting the Update Spec Driven Data option in the Project
Configuration Group of the Utilities Tab. It is recommended that a Zoom Extents is
performed before proceeding.
2. The command prompt will display:

Regenerating model.

Symbols on the drawing are then checked against the new settings and the drawing is
regenerated so that the symbols that are now "out of spec" are displayed in the colour
selected for such items in the project settings.
3. The command prompt will display then number of symbols that are out of spec, the
number of symbols which are in spec, and the colour in which out of spec symbols are
displayed, for example:

7 symbols are out of spec; 68 symbols are Ok; Symbols

highlighted in 6 color are out of spec

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:9 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

The command ends automatically.

8.2.5 Updating Pipe Style Colours

• Description
Changes to drawings resulting from the colours of pipes styles being changed in the AVEVA
P&ID Project Administration program are not automatically implemented when project
drawings are loaded. The user must trigger these changes "manually" in each drawing after
it has loaded using this procedure.

• Associated Project Configuration Options

This procedure is used to implement changes resulting from the changes to the colours set
for pipe styles in the List of Values Configuration Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project
Administration program being changed.

• Instructions
Select the Refresh Pipe Style option in the Project Configuration Group of the Utilities Tab.
The colours of pipes on the drawing are then updated to reflect the current pipe style colours
set in the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program.

8.2.6 Convert Project Label Units

• Description
Changes to drawings resulting from the label units project configuration setting being
changed are not automatically implemented when project drawings are loaded. The user
must trigger these changes "manually" in each drawing after it has loaded using this
procedure.

• Associated Project Configuration Options

This procedure is used to implement changes resulting from the Label Units setting on the
Project Configuration Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program being
changed.

• Instructions
1. Start the procedure by selecting the Convert Units option in the Project Configuration
Group of the Utilities Tab.
2. The command prompt will display:

Select objects or <select all>:

Select the labels which are to be updated. When all the required labels have been
selected, press Enter.
If all labels on the drawing are to be updated, enter "all" at the command prompt and
press Enter. It is recommended that a Zoom Extents is performed before proceeding
with this option.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:10 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

3. The command prompt will display the number of selected labels (for example):

5 found

The selected labels are then updated. If many labels have been selected, this may take
a few moments.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:11 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

8.3 Changing AVEVA P&ID Settings

8.3.1 Turning Automatic Flow Arrows On and Off

• Description
This procedure is used to switch automatic flow arrows, placed on pipes as they are drawn,
on or off. This setting only affects new pipes and not existing ones, even on reloading the
drawing.
For details of the use of this procedure in the context of drawing P&IDs, see 6.8.4: Indicating
Pipe Flow.

• Associated Project Configuration Options

• If flow arrows are to be automatically placed at direction change points, ensure that the
Automatic Arrows checkbox in the Flow Arrows section on the Pipes - Settings Sub-
Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program is checked.
• Specify the symbol to be used to indicate flow direction in the Symbol Name field of the
Flow Arrows section.
• Specify the symbol to be used to indicate dual flow in the Symbol Name field of the
Dual Flow Arrows section. Enter the distance between flow indicator symbols in the
Offset Distance field.

• Instructions
1. Start the procedure by:
• right-clicking on the label of the pipe and selecting the Flow Arrows ON-OFF
option from the shortcut menu, or
• checking or unchecking the ARROWS checkbox in the Pipeline Group of the Home
Tab.
2. Flow arrows will immediately be switched on or off.

8.3.2 Turning Automatic Tracing On and Off

• Description
This procedure is used to turn automatic tracing, placed on pipes when they are drawn, to
be turned on or off. This setting only affects new pipes and not existing ones, even on
reloading the drawing.
For details of the use of this procedure in the context of drawing P&IDs, see 6.8.3: Tracing
Lines.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:12 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

• Example

• Instructions
1. Start the procedure by checking or unchecking the TRACE checkbox in the Pipeline
Group of the Home Tab.
2. Automatic tracing will immediately be switched on or off.

8.3.3 Turning Automatic Breaks On and Off

• Description
This procedure is used to switch on or off the facility which causes a pipe or link to
automatically break another pipe or link where they cross.
For details of the use of this procedure in the context of drawing P&IDs, see 6.8.1: Drawing
Pipes and Process Links

• Example

• Associated Project Configuration Options

• If pipes are to be broken automatically when crossed, the Automatic Breaks ON
checkbox, on the Pipes - Settings Sub-Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project
Administration program must be checked.
• The break priority, i.e. whether the horizontal or vertical pipe is broken where a break
occurs, is set using the Break Pipe Direction buttons.
• The width of the gap in a broken pipe is set in the Break Distance field.
• The symbol chosen to represent the break is selected in the Symbol Name field.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:13 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

• The layer into which break symbols are placed is specified in the Symbol Layer field.
• The colour of the break symbol is set in the Symbol Colour field.

• Instructions
1. Start the procedure by checking or unchecking the BREAK checkbox in the Pipeline
Group of the Home Tab.
2. Automatic breaks will immediately be switched on or off.

8.3.4 Turning the Display of Ports On and Off

• Description
This procedure is used to switch the display of the ports on symbols on and off.
For details of the use of this procedure in the context of drawing P&IDs, see 6.5: Inserting
Symbols.

• Example

• Instructions
1. Complete the procedure by right-clicking on The Drawing Page and selecting either
Ports Display - on or Ports Display - off.
2. The display of ports will then immediately be switched on or off.

8.3.5 Selecting the Style of New Pipes

• Description
This procedure is used to select the style of new pipes/links. This procedure only affects
pipes and process links drawn subsequent to this procedure being carried out.
For details of the use of this procedure in the context of drawing P&IDs, see 6.8.1: Drawing
Pipes and Process Links.

• Example

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:14 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

• Errors
The following message indicates that the relevant AutoCAD linetypes have not been loaded
onto the drawing:
"Unable to make pipe header".

• Instructions
Complete the procedure by selecting the required style from the dropdown list in the
Pipeline Group of the Home Tab.
Once the style has been set any subsequently drawn pipes will be drawn with the new style.

8.3.6 Selecting the Tracing Style of New Pipes

• Description
This procedure sets the style of tracing to be applied to subsequently drawn pipes. Any new
tracing is drawn with the set style.
For details of the use of this procedure in the context of drawing P&IDs, see 6.8.3: Tracing
Lines.

• Associated Project Configuration Options

The distance between tracing and a line, and the default tracing style used are set in the
Offset and Default fields on the Tracing Styles pane in the AVEVA P&ID Project
Administration program.

• Instructions
Complete the procedure by selecting the required style from the dropdown list in the
Pipeline Group of the Home Tab.
Once the style has been set any subsequently tracing will be in the new style.

8.3.7 Selecting the Style of New Signal Lines

• Description
This procedure is used to select the style of new signal lines. This procedure only affects
signal lines drawn subsequent to this procedure being carried out.
For details of the use of this procedure in the context of drawing P&IDs, see 6.8.2: Drawing
Signal Lines.

• Instructions
Complete the procedure by selecting the required style from the dropdown list in the Signal
Line Group of the Home Tab.
Once the style has been set any subsequently drawn signal lines will be drawn with the new
style.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:15 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

8.4 Inserting Symbols

8.4.1 Inserting Symbols - General Information

• Description
This procedure is used to insert any available AVEVA P&ID or client symbol from the symbol
library into a drawing.
For details of the use of this procedure in the context of drawing P&IDs, see 6.5: Inserting
Symbols.

• General Points
When an item is inserted into a drawing it will be placed on the default layer, in the default
colour for the item type (see Associated Project Configuration Options below), and in the
default line type. If no default layer or colour is specified for the item type, it will be placed in
the current layer and will adopt the current layer colour.
Placing a symbol in a pipeline or signal line automatically breaks the line and orientates the
symbol accordingly.
Equipment items, including vessels and electrical equipment, can be set to be re-sizable for
a project.

• Inserting 1-point & 2-point symbols

All symbols may be classified as 1-point or 2-point. 1-point symbols e.g. pumps, have a
single insertion point and are placed with a single click of the mouse or puck.
2-point symbols e.g. reducers, spec breaks etc. have an insertion point, and a second point
which must be selected to determine the orientation or direction of the symbol. Hence two
mouse clicks are needed to correctly place a reducer.
Assume the insertion point to be at the wide end of the reducer, as seen in the example
below:

Whether a symbol is a 1-point or a 2-point symbol is determined by the setting in Column 7

on the Symbols Configuration Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program.

• Inline Equipment
Inline equipment can be inserted into a pipe and labelled as equipment. Routing through
inline equipment is as for any inline item.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:16 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

• Associated Project Configuration Options

• The locations of directories used to store standard and project symbol files, both metric
and imperial, and whether the program will search for a symbol in the project or
standard directory first, are set on the Project Configuration Category of the AVEVA
P&ID Project Administration program.
• Whether or not the Symbol Explorer is displayed is also controlled by a setting on the
Project Configuration Category.
• The list of available symbols and their properties can be viewed and edited using the
Symbols Configuration Category.
• The default drawing layers and colours for item types are set up on the Item Types -
Standard Sub-Category.
• Layers are configured on the Drawing - Layers Sub-Category.
• The specs and sizes of pipes that Valve and Reducer symbols may be restricted to are
specified using the Spec Driven Configuration Category.
• If the USER_STOPUPDATEANNOTCOLOUR user-defined directive on the
Miscellaneous – Settings Sub-Category is set to Yes, intelligent entities, including
symbols, will not have their colours changed to match changes to project settings in the
Administrator.

• Insertion Methods
These instructions provide a basic description the different methods of inserting symbols.
They are applicable for all symbol types.

• The Symbol Explorer

Symbols can be selected and inserted using the Symbol Explorer. The selected symbols
can be inserted either by dragging them onto The Drawing Page, or by selecting Insert from
the item shortcut menus. A 'ghosted' image of the selected symbol will then appear on the
cross hairs ready for 'dropping' at the required point on the drawing. Refer to the topics
regarding the insertion of different symbol types for further details.
Using the Symbol Explorer, symbols can also be inserted as AutoCAD blocks instead of as
"intelligent" AVEVA P&ID symbols.

• The AVEVA P&ID Tool Palette

Symbols can be inserted by dragging and dropping from the AVEVA P&ID Tool Palette. This
functions in the same way as the AutoCAD Tool Palette. Refer to the topics regarding the
insertion of different symbol types for further details.

• Copying and Pasting

Instead of inserting symbols using the methods described above, new symbols can be
placed on the drawing by copying and pasting existing symbols. See 8.7.1: Copying
Drawing Objects and Labels for details.

• Detailed Procedures for Symbol Types

For detailed information on selecting different types of symbols, see the appropriate topic:
• 8.4.2: Inserting Equipment
• 8.4.3: Inserting Electrical Equipment
• 8.4.4: Inserting Nozzles

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:17 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

• 8.4.5: Inserting Valves

• 8.4.6: Inserting Instrument Valves (Control Valves)
• 8.4.7: Inserting Inline Fittings
• 8.4.8: Inserting Instruments (Balloons)
• 8.4.9: Inserting Flow Elements
• 8.4.10: Inserting Miscellaneous Symbols
• 8.4.11: Inserting Assemblies
Note: Vacuum/Relief Devices are a sub-category of Instrument Valves.

8.4.2 Inserting Equipment

• Description
General points on the procedure are given in8.4.1: Inserting Symbols - General Information.
Equipment items are positioned stand-alone. All equipment items can be configured so that
they can be re-sized, using the Symbols Configuration Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project
Administration program.
Vessels have the EQV item type and all other equipment is classified as EQU.

Note: Electrical Equipment is discussed in 8.4.3: Inserting Electrical Equipment. Equipment

Data Location is discussed in 8.4.10: Inserting Miscellaneous Symbols.

For details of the use of this command in the context of drawing P&IDs, see 6.5: Inserting
Symbols.
Note: Instead of inserting symbols, new symbols can be placed on the drawing by copying
and pasting existing symbols. See 8.7.1: Copying Drawing Objects and Labels for details.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:18 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

• Example

• Associated Project Configuration Options

Equipment may be set either to be fixed size or re-sizable upon insertion. This setting is
made on the Symbols Configuration Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration
program. If an item is set to be re-sizable, a prompt will be received upon insertion for size in
both the X and Y directions after the item is inserted.

• Instructions
1. Select an equipment symbol by:
• using the Symbol Explorer, or
• using the AVEVA P&ID Tool Palette.
2. After the symbol has been selected a 'ghosted' image of the equipment will appear on
the cross hairs. The Command prompt will display:

Indicate point for <chosen equipment>:

Pick the desired position.

3. If the item type is set to be re-sizable, the Command prompt will then display:

X scale factor <1>:

Enter an X scale factor via the keyboard if required.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:19 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

4. The Command prompt will then display:

Y scale factor <default X>:

The Y scale defaults to the X scale automatically unless another value is entered.
5. The Command prompt will then display:

Rotation angle <0.000>:

Enter a rotation angle if required.

Note: You can 'show' the rotation angle by picking two points. The item is then placed.

6. The Command prompt will then display:

Indicate point for <chosen equipment>:

Place another item, or select Cancel from The Drawing Page menu or press Ctrl-C to
end the command.
If auto-labelling is on, the Labelling Equipment (with or without Trim) procedure will then
start automatically.

8.4.3 Inserting Electrical Equipment

• Description
General points on the procedure are given under 8.4.1: Inserting Symbols - General
Information.
Electrical equipment must be associated to another equipment item during insertion.
For details of the use of this command in the context of drawing P&IDs, see 6.5: Inserting
Symbols.
Note: Instead of inserting symbols, new symbols can be placed on the drawing by copying
and pasting existing symbols. See 8.7.1: Copying Drawing Objects and Labels details.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:20 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

• Example

• Errors
If an attempt is made to insert electrical equipment without forming an association with an
equipment item, an error message will be received.

• Associated Project Configuration Options

Electrical equipment may be set either to be fixed size or re-sizable upon insertion. This
setting is made on the Symbols Configuration Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project
Administration program. If an item is set to be re-sizable, a prompt will be received upon
insertion for size in both the X and Y directions after the item is inserted.

• Instructions
1. Select an electrical equipment symbol by:
• using the Symbol Explorer, or
• using the AVEVA P&ID Tool Palette.
2. When symbol has been selected the 'ghosted' image of the symbol appears on the
cross hairs. The Command prompt will then display:

Indicate point for <chosen item>:

Pick a point for the electrical equipment item.

3. The Command prompt will then display:

Indicate equipment item for association:

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:21 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

Select the equipment item with which the electrical equipment item is to be associated
with.
4. If the Electrical Equipment symbol type is set to be re-sizable, the Command prompt
will then display:

X scale factor <1>:

Enter an X scale factor via the keyboard if required.

5. The Command prompt will then display:

Y scale factor <default X>:

The Y scale defaults to the X scale automatically unless another value is entered.
6. The Command prompt will then display:

Rotation angle <0.000>:

Enter a rotation angle if required.

Note: You can 'show' the rotation angle by picking two points. The item is then placed.

7. The Command prompt will then display:

Indicate point for <chosen item>:

Pick a point for placement of another item, or select Cancel from The Drawing Page
menu or press Ctrl-C to end the command.
If auto-labelling is on, the Labelling Electrical Equipment procedure will then start
automatically.

8.4.4 Inserting Nozzles

• Description
General points on the insertion procedure are given under 8.4.1: Inserting Symbols -
General Information.
Nozzles are two point symbols and must be owned by an equipment item in order to be
inserted successfully. For example, they can be inserted onto pumps and vessels.
Nozzles can be moved around on the same vessel, but not between vessels. Nozzles can
be copied between vessels and re-association takes place automatically to the correct
vessel. An entire vessel and its attached nozzles can be copied and the correct association
will be maintained. The Show Associations between Items procedure should be used to
establish which items are associated.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:22 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

For details of the use of this command in the context of drawing P&IDs, see 6.5: Inserting
Symbols.

Note: Instead of inserting symbols, new symbols can be placed on the drawing by copying
and pasting existing symbols. See 8.7.1: Copying Drawing Objects and Labels for
details.

• Example

• Errors
An error message occurs when trying to attach a nozzle to something other than an
equipment item or when a nozzle has not attached itself physically to anything. Associate
the nozzle physically to an equipment item or pick an item for association when prompted.
Otherwise the nozzle will disappear.

• Instructions
1. Select a nozzle symbol by:
• using the Symbol Explorer, or
• using the AVEVA P&ID Tool Palette.
2. After the symbol has been selected a 'ghosted' image of the nozzle will appear on the
cross hairs. The Command prompt will then display:

Indicate point for <chosen Nozzle >:

Pick a point on an equipment item.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:23 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

3. The Command prompt will then display:

Indicate point to show angle of <chosen Nozzle >:

Pick a point to show the direction in which the nozzle is to face.

4. The Command prompt will then display:

Indicate point for <chosen Nozzle >:

Place another nozzle, or press Ctrl-C to end the command.

5. If the nozzle is not placed on an equipment item, the Command prompt will display:

Indicate Equipment item for association:

Pick the equipment item. If no item is selected the nozzle will not be inserted and will
disappear.
If auto-labelling is on, the Labelling Nozzles procedure will then start automatically.

8.4.5 Inserting Valves

• Description
General valves must be inserted into pipes, links or signal lines, otherwise an error message
will be received. This message occurs when the symbol has been defined to break into
pipes in the Symbols Configuration Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration
program, or the pipe, link or signal line was missed when trying to insert an item e.g. line
fitting or valve. Check and change the settings in the project configuration, or try to be more
accurate when inserting items.
General points on the procedure are given under 8.4.1: Inserting Symbols - General
Information.
For details of the use of this command in the context of drawing P&IDs, see 6.5: Inserting
Symbols.

Note: Instead of inserting symbols, new symbols can be placed on the drawing by copying
and pasting existing symbols. See 8.7.1: Copying Drawing Objects and Labels for
details.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:24 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

• Examples

• Associated Project Configuration Options

Valve symbols may be restricted so that they can only be inserted into pipes with specific
codes and sizes. These are specified using the Spec Driven Configuration Category.

• Instructions
1. Select a valve symbol by:
• using the Symbol Explorer, or
• using the AVEVA P&ID Tool Palette.
2. After the symbol has been selected a 'ghosted' image of the valve will appear on the
cross hairs. The Command prompt will display:

Insertion point:

Pick a point on a pipe, a process link, or a nozzle.

The valve will be inserted, will orientate itself with the pipe and will adopt the correct
colour and layer according to project configuration. 3-way valves will automatically
orientate themselves correctly when placed on 3-way pipe intersections.
3. The Command prompt will then display:

Insertion point:

Pick a point for another valve, or select Cancel from The Drawing Page menu or press
Ctrl-C to end the command.
If auto-labelling is on, the Labelling General Valves procedure will then start automatically.

Note: A Valve symbol can be converted into an Instrument Valve symbol by adding an
Actuator symbol to it. See 8.4.6: Inserting Instrument Valves (Control Valves).

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:25 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

8.4.6 Inserting Instrument Valves (Control Valves)

• Description
General points on the procedure are given under 8.4.1: Inserting Symbols - General
Information.
Instrument valves behave as for general valves except that they have a mandatory label
balloon and an optional link line attached. If necessary, the label balloon can be
independently positioned and moved after the instrument valve has been placed, and the
point at which it connects to the valve changed.
Instrument valves can be inserted in two ways:
• By inserting a symbol from the Instrument Valves symbol category consisting of a valve
body and an actuator.
• By inserting a symbol from the Valves symbol category, consisting of a valve body, then
adding an actuator symbol or symbols to it to make it an Instrument Valve.
Handwheels also fall within the Instrument Valve symbol category, and may be inserted onto
instrument valves. Only one handwheel may be placed on an Instrument Valve.
Where an instrument valve is placed between the end node of one pipe, and the start node
of another, this valve may serve as the source and destination of the labels of these pipes,
as opposed to the pipe nodes, depending on the type of valve that it is.
For details of the use of this command in the context of drawing P&IDs, see 6.5: Inserting
Symbols.

Note: Instead of inserting symbols, new symbols can be placed on the drawing by copying
and pasting existing symbols. See 8.7.1: Copying Drawing Objects and Labels for
details.

• Example
Some examples of instrument valves are shown below:

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:26 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

• Errors
An error message will be received if an attempt is made to put two handwheels on the same
control valve.

• Associated Project Configuration Options

• The block name of the instrument label balloon symbol is specified in the Label Balloon
Symbol field on the Instruments - Labels Sub-Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project
Administration program.
• The presence or absence of link lines is controlled by the Label Balloon Link-Lines Off
checkbox on the same pane.
• Instrument valve symbols may be restricted so that they can only be inserted into pipes
with specific codes and sizes. These are specified using the Spec Driven Configuration
Category.

• Instructions
• Inserting a Complete Instrument Valves Symbol
• Inserting a Valve Symbol then adding Actuator Symbols
• Adding a Handwheel

- Inserting a Complete Instrument Valves Symbol

1. To insert a symbol that consists of both a valve body and an actuator, select the
Instrument Valves symbol category by:
• using the Symbol Explorer, or
• using the AVEVA P&ID Tool Palette.
2. After the symbol has been selected a 'ghosted' image of the instrument valve will
appear on the cross hairs. The Command prompt will display:

Insertion point:

Pick a point on a pipe.

The valve will be inserted, will orientate itself with the pipe and will adopt the correct
colour and layer according to project configuration. 3-way valves will automatically
orientate themselves correctly when placed on a 3-way pipe intersection.
3. The Command prompt will then display:

Show side of Actuator:

Pick a point to indicate which side of the valve the actuator is on.
4. A 'ghosted' image of the instrument balloon will appear on the cross hairs, the
Command prompt will then display:

Insertion point:

Place 'ghosted' balloon.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:27 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

5. If link lines between instruments and balloons are on (i.e. the Label Balloon Link-Lines
Off checkbox is checked in the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program), the
command prompt will then display:

Indicate point on symbol:

Press Enter to attach the link line to the insert point of the instrument valve, or place the
connection point "manually" by clicking on the required point.
6. The Command prompt will then display:

Insertion point:

Pick another point, or press Ctrl-C to end the command.

- Inserting a Valve Symbol then adding Actuator Symbols

1. Select a valve symbol by:
• using the Symbol Explorer, or
• using the AVEVA P&ID Tool Palette.
2. After the symbol has been selected a 'ghosted' image of the valve will appear on the
cross hairs. The Command prompt will display:

Insertion point:

Pick a point on a pipe.

The valve will be inserted, will orientate itself with the pipe and will adopt the correct
colour and layer according to project configuration. 3-way valves will automatically
orientate themselves correctly when placed on 3-way pipe intersections.
3. The Command prompt will then display:

Insertion point:

Pick a point for another valve, or select Cancel from The Drawing Page menu or press
Ctrl-C to end the command.
If auto-labelling is on, the Labelling General Valves procedure will then start
automatically.
4. Select an actuator symbol by:
• using the Symbol Explorer, or
• using the AVEVA P&ID Tool Palette.
In the Symbol Explorer, actuator symbols are located in a sub-folder of the Valves
folder.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:28 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

5. After the symbol has been selected a 'ghosted' image of the actuator will appear on the
cross hairs. The Command prompt will display:

Insertion point:

Pick a valve. Note that you can add multiple actuator symbols to the same valve body
symbol.
6. If the valve has been inserted into a vertical line, the Command prompt will then
display:

Get angle:

Pick a point to indicate which side of the valve the actuator is on.
The actuator will be inserted on the selected valve, will orientate itself with the valve
and will adopt the correct colour and layer according to project configuration.
7. A 'ghosted' image of the instrument balloon will appear on the cross hairs, the
Command prompt will then display:

Insertion point:

Place 'ghosted' balloon.

8. If link lines between instruments and balloons are on (i.e. the Label Balloon Link-Lines
Off checkbox is checked in the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program), the
command prompt will then display:

Pick a point on symbol:

Press Enter to attach the link line to the insert point of the instrument valve, or place the
connection point "manually" by clicking on the required point.
9. The Command prompt will then display:

Insertion point:

Pick a valve for another actuator, or select Cancel from The Drawing Page menu or
press Ctrl-C to end the command.

- Adding a Handwheel
1. Add a handwheel to an Instrument Valve by:
• using the Symbol Explorer, or
• using the AVEVA P&ID Tool Palette.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:29 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

2. When a handwheel has been selected, the command prompt will display:

Insertion point:

Pick the instrument valve.

3. The Command prompt will then display:

Get angle:

Pick a point to indicate which side of the valve the handwheel is on.
4. The Command prompt will then display:

Insertion point:

Attach a handwheel to another valve, or select Cancel from The Drawing Page menu or
press Ctrl-C to end the command.
If auto-labelling is on, the Labelling General Instruments procedure will then start
automatically.

8.4.7 Inserting Inline Fittings

• Description
General points on the procedure are given under 8.4.1: Inserting Symbols - General
Information.
This procedure covers the insertion into the drawing of symbols for line fittings, and for inline
paint, tracing, insulation or spec breaks.
Line fittings must be placed in a line or at the end of a line, depending on the type of item.
For example, off-sheet connectors (pipe flags), end caps and spec breaks go on the end of
a line, whereas a flame trap or a reducer must be inserted into the line itself.
Descriptions of the fittings which form Pipe Destinations are included in the output file as
pipe destinations. Spec breaks must be associated with another entity at the pipe
connection point.
For details of the use of this command in the context of drawing P&IDs, see 6.5: Inserting
Symbols.

Note: Instead of inserting symbols, new symbols can be placed on the drawing by copying
and pasting existing symbols. See 8.7.1: Copying Drawing Objects and Labels for
details.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:30 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

• Example

• Errors
An error message occurs when the symbol has been defined as on that break into pipes, but
is not placed to do so.
An error message also occurs when attempting to place an item inline that should be placed
only at the ends of pipes e.g. end cap or spec break, start and end nodes etc. In either case,
check the Symbols Configuration Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration
program - insertion into pipes and links should be set to No. The item type for that item may
need to be changed to Pipe Destination Fitting (PDF).

• Off-Sheet Connectors
Off-sheet connectors (pipe flags) may be inserted automatically when a pipe is drawn, as
defined by the pipe end styles setting in the Pipeline Group of the Home Tab.
It is recommended that off-sheet connectors with symbol names ending in -IN or -OUT be
used. These can be placed on pipes drawn at any angle and drawn in any direction, and will
orientate themselves correctly. In addition, the pipe node to which they are attached will be
moved along the pipe to accommodate the connector symbol, so that the total length of the
pipe including the connector symbol remains the same.
Other off-sheet connector symbols should only be placed on pipes drawn horizontally or
vertically. Such symbols do not orientate themselves automatically, and therefore the
appropriate symbol should be used depending on the direction the pipe was drawn in (e.g.
left to right or right to left).

• Spec Breaks
Break symbols may be configured so that they automatically split a pipe when they are
inserted.
Break symbols may also be configured so that they are automatically labelled with pipe
properties on insertion.
See 4.4: Symbol Editor for details.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:31 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

• Associated Project Configuration Options

Reducer symbols may be restricted so that they can only be inserted into pipes with specific
codes and sizes. These are specified using the Spec Driven Configuration Category of the
AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program.
Specify the default positions and symbols used to represent flags (off-sheet connectors) in
the Offsheet Connector Configuration Category.

• Instructions
• Inserting an Inline Fitting - General Example
• Inserting a Spec Break which splits a Pipe

- Inserting an Inline Fitting - General Example

1. Select an inline fitting symbol by:
• using the Symbol Explorer, or
• using the AVEVA P&ID Tool Palette.
2. After the symbol has been selected a 'ghosted' image of the line fitting will appear on
the cross hairs. The Command prompt will display:

Indicate point for <chosen fitting>:

Pick a point in a line.

3. The Command prompt will then display:

Indicate point to show angle of <chosen fitting>:

If it is a two point symbol, pick a point along the line in either direction to set the angle.
4. The Command prompt will then display:

Indicate point for <chosen fitting>:

Pick another point, or select Cancel from The Drawing Page menu or press Ctrl-C to
end the command.

- Inserting a Spec Break which splits a Pipe

1. Select a break symbol by:
• using the Symbol Explorer, or
• using the AVEVA P&ID Tool Palette.
2. After the symbol has been selected a 'ghosted' image of the break symbol will appear
on the cross hairs. The Command prompt will display:

Insertion point:

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:32 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

Pick a point in a line.

3. Depending on how the break symbol is configured, the prompt may then display:

Get angle:

Enter the angle that symbol is to be inserted at.

4. If the selected break symbol has been configured to split pipes when inserted, the pipe
is then split at the insertion point of the symbol, and the Command prompt will display:

Specify which split pipe should retain Data Upstream or

Downstream:

Click either upstream or downstream of the split to select which pipe is to retain the
properties of the previously unsplit pipe.
5. The Command prompt will then display:

Insertion point:

Pick another point, or select Cancel from The Drawing Page menu or press Ctrl-C to
end the command.

8.4.8 Inserting Instruments (Balloons)

• Description
General points on the procedure are given under 8.4.1: Inserting Symbols - General
Information.
Instrument balloons are items in their own right, unlike the label balloons attached to
instrument (control) valves. They may be placed independently or inserted into pipes, signal
lines or process links.
System output boxes fall within this category, but differ in that they do not break into pipes,
signal lines or process links.
Also within the category are conditioning devices, for example, I/P Converters. These must
have an instrument owner in order to be inserted.
Logic boxes, interlocks and I/O Rockets are also categorised as instrument balloons.

Note: Pipes, signal lines and process links do not close automatically when inline
instrument balloons are deleted

For details of the use of this command in the context of drawing P&IDs, see 6.5: Inserting
Symbols.

Note: Instead of inserting symbols, new symbols can be placed on the drawing by copying
and pasting existing symbols. See 8.7.1: Copying Drawing Objects and Labels for
details.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:33 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

• Example

• Errors
An error message will be received if an attempt is made to assign more than one
conditioning device to an instrument.

• Associated Project Configuration Options

• The block name of instrument label balloon symbols is specified in the Label Balloon
Symbol field on the Instruments - Labels Sub-Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project
Administration program.
• The presence or absence of link lines is controlled by the Label Balloon Link Lines Off
checkbox. Uncheck the checkbox to turn off link lines.
• Whether or not instruments on signal lines are assigned process owners is specified
using the USER_CONNECTINSTUSINGSIGNALLINESTOPROCESSOWNER user-
defined directive on the Miscellaneous – Settings Sub-Category. If the directive is set to
Yes, instruments in signal lines are assigned the pipes they are connected to as
process owners. If set to No, instruments in signal lines are not assigned process
owners.
• If the USER_ROUTEINSTLINKSFROMSAMEGROUP user-defined directive on the
Miscellaneous – Settings Sub-Category is also set to Yes, where a choice of pipe
groups is available as an owner for a series of offline instruments (for example, where
several instruments are placed on series of linked signal lines that are connected to

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:34 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

more than one pipe), then all those instruments will be assigned the same pipe group
as their process owners. If the directive is set to No, such instruments may be assigned
different owners.

• Instructions
1. Select an instrument symbol by:
• using the Symbol Explorer, or
• using the AVEVA P&ID Tool Palette.
2. After the symbol has been selected a 'ghosted' image of the instrument balloon will
appear on the cross hairs. The prompts that follow depend on the type of balloon
selected, as shown in the following examples:

- Conditioning Devices
3. For an I/P converter, the prompts are as follows:

Select instrument owner for I/P CONVERTER:

With the symbol already on the crosshairs, click on (select) the instrument associated
with the I/P converter.
4. The Command prompt will then display:

Indicate point for I/P CONVERTER:

Pick a point for the converter itself.

Note: A guideline is dragged out to the converter from the selected point on the owner
instrument.

- Instrument Indicator
5. For an Indicator, the prompts are as follows:

Indicate point for INSTRUMENT INDICATOR:

Pick a point for the balloon.

6. The Command prompt will then display:

Indicate point for Label Balloon:

This is an optional prompt, dependent on project configuration,

Pick a point for the label balloon.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:35 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

7. The Command prompt will then display:

Indicate point for INSTRUMENT INDICATOR:

Place another balloon, or press Ctrl-C to end the command.

- I/O Rockets
8. For an I/O Rocket, the prompts will be:

Indicate point for I/O ROCKET:

Pick a point for the rocket.

9. The Command prompt will then display:

Indicate point to show angle of I/O ROCKET:

Pick another point to indicate the angle of the I/O Rocket. The ghosting will help the
final placement to be visualised.
10. The Command prompt will then display:

Indicate point for I/O ROCKET:

Place another I/O rocket, or select Cancel from The Drawing Page menu or press Ctrl-
C to end the command.
Use the Creating Item Associations procedure to associate the I/O rocket with the
chosen instrument.
If auto-labelling is on, the Labelling General Instruments procedure will then start
automatically.

8.4.9 Inserting Flow Elements

• Description
General points on the procedure are given under 8.4.1: Inserting Symbols - General
Information.
The flow elements category includes symbols such as orifice plates, flow restrictors, flow
straighteners, turbine meters etc.
All flow elements have mandatory label balloons and optional link lines. If necessary, the
label balloon can be independently positioned and moved after the flow element has been
placed, and the point at which it connects to the valve changed.
For details of the use of this command in the context of drawing P&IDs, see 6.5: Inserting
Symbols.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:36 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

Note: Instead of inserting symbols, new symbols can be placed on the drawing by copying
and pasting existing symbols. See 8.7.1: Copying Drawing Objects and Labels for
details.

• Example

• Errors
All symbols in this category must be inserted into a pipe, process link or signal line
otherwise an error message will be received.

• Associated Project Configuration Options

The presence or absence of link lines is controlled by the Label Balloon Link Lines Off
checkbox on the Instruments - Labels Sub-Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project
Administration program.

• Instructions
1. Select a flow element symbol by:
• using the Symbol Explorer, or
• using the AVEVA P&ID Tool Palette.
2. After the symbol has been selected a 'ghosted' image of the flow element will appear
on the cross hairs. The Command prompt will then display:

Indicate point for <chosen flow element>:

Pick a point for placement.

3. The Command prompt will then display:

Indicate point for label balloon:

Place the label balloon.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:37 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

4. The Command prompt will then display:

Indicate point for label balloon link line (<ret> to connect to

item insert point):

Press Enter to attach the link line to the insert point of the flow element, or place the
connection point "manually" by clicking on the required point. This is an optional
prompt, dependent on project configuration.
5. The Command prompt will then display:

Indicate point for <chosen flow element>:

Place another flow element, or select Cancel from The Drawing Page menu or press
Ctrl-C to end the command.

8.4.10 Inserting Miscellaneous Symbols

• Description
General points on the procedure are given under 8.4.1: Inserting Symbols - General
Information.
As the category name suggests, entities or elements which do not fall conveniently into the
other categories may be placed here. For example, vessel jackets, revision triangles,
electrical connections, hexagons and line termination symbols.
The category also includes equipment of the EDL (Equipment Data Location) item type.
For details of the use of this command in the context of drawing P&IDs, see 6.5: Inserting
Symbols.

Note: Instead of inserting symbols, new symbols can be placed on the drawing by copying
and pasting existing symbols. See 8.7.1: Copying Drawing Objects and Labels for
details.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:38 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

• Example

• Instructions
1. Select the symbol category by:
• using the Symbol Explorer, or
• using the AVEVA P&ID Tool Palette.
From this point on the procedure will depend on the type of miscellaneous symbol
being inserted, of which there are many. Two example procedures are given below.
Continue at:
• Example procedure (for Line Termination Symbols)
• Example procedure (for Vessel Jackets)

- Example procedure (for Line Termination Symbols)

1. After the symbol has been selected a 'ghosted' image of the symbol will appear on the
cross hairs. The Command prompt will then display:

Insertion point:

Pick where the symbol is to be inserted.

2. The Command prompt will then display:

Indicate pipe start node or end node for association:

Pick the pipe start or end node with which the termination symbol is to be associated.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:39 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

3. The Command prompt will then display:

Indicate point for Leader Line:

Pick the point on the pipe node that the symbol leader line will be connected to.
4. The Command prompt will then again display:

Indicate point for Leader Line:

Pick the point on the symbol that the leader line will be connected to.
The procedure for placing the symbol is now completed. Note that the symbol and
leader line will adopt the colour from the owning pipe node.
5. The Command prompt will then display:

Insertion point:

Place another symbol, or select Cancel from The Drawing Page menu or press Ctrl-C
to end the command.

- Example procedure (for Vessel Jackets)

1. After the symbol has been selected a 'ghosted' image of the symbol will appear on the
cross hairs. The Command prompt will then display:

Indicate point for PRESSURE VESSEL JACKET:

Place the vessel jacket around the vessel.

2. The Command prompt will then display:

X scale factor:

Enter an X scale factor, e.g. 2 for double the original size.

3. The Command prompt will then display:

Y scale factor <defaults to X>:

Press Enter to scale the jacket evenly or enter a Y scale factor.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:40 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

4. The Command prompt will then display:

Rotation Angle <0.00>:

Enter a rotation angle, if necessary.

5. The Command prompt will then display:

Indicate point for PRESSURE VESSEL JACKET:

Place another symbol, or select Cancel from The Drawing Page menu or press Ctrl-C
to end the command.

8.4.11 Inserting Assemblies

• Description
This procedure is used to insert assemblies. Three types of assembly may be created:
• Graphical Assemblies - pipes and symbols collected together into an AutoCAD block to
act as templates, retaining the item associations
• Design Data Templates - collections of VPE Workbench or P&ID Data Grid designators
and values used to label items.
• Annotation Assemblies - there are two sub-types of Annotation Assemblies:
• Pipe: collections of pipe labels and symbols used to annotate pipes
• UDA: collections of user-defined attribute labels and symbols used to annotate
pipes, instruments and equipment.
Assemblies are created using a separate procedure. See 8.9.1: Creating Assemblies.
General points on the procedure are given under 8.4.1: Inserting Symbols - General
Information.

Note: When a block drawn in one pipe style is inserted into pipes drawn in another style, all
entities change colour appropriately. Also when an assembly is used on a new
project, all layers etc. are updated automatically to suit any new conventions.

For details of the use of this command in the context of drawing P&IDs, see 6.5: Inserting
Symbols and 6.14: Assemblies.

Note: Instead of inserting symbols, new symbols can be placed on the drawing by copying
and pasting existing symbols. See 8.7.1: Copying Drawing Objects and Labels for
details.

• Instructions
• Inserting a Graphical Assembly
• Inserting a Design Data Template
• Inserting an Annotation Assembly

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:41 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

- Inserting a Graphical Assembly

1. Select the assembly by:
• using the Symbol Explorer, or
• using the AVEVA P&ID Tool Palette.
2. After the symbol has been selected a 'ghosted' image of the assembly will appear on
the cross hairs. The Command prompt will then display (for example):

Indicate point for TWO DIAPHRAGM ACTUATED VALVES:

Pick an appropriate point for insertion taking into account whether or not the assembly
breaks into pipes.
3. The Command prompt will then display:

Indicate point for TWO DIAPHRAGM ACTUATED VALVES:

Pick an insertion point for another copy of the assembly, or select Cancel from the
drawing page menu or press Ctrl-C to end the command.

- Inserting a Design Data Template

1. Select the assembly by:
• using the Symbol Explorer, or
• using the AVEVA P&ID Tool Palette.
2. After the symbol has been selected a 'ghosted' image of the assembly will appear on
the cross hairs. The Command prompt will then display (for example):

Indicate point for INS DDT 1:

Pick an appropriate point for insertion.

3. The Command prompt will then display:

Select Instrument:

Select the item that the DDT assembly is to be associated with if the DDT type is
Instrument, Pipe, or Equipment, or select the drawing if the type is Drawing. DDTs must
be associated with the appropriate entity.
The Command prompt will then display:

Indicate point for INS DDT 1:

Pick an insertion point for another copy of the assembly, or select Cancel from The
Drawing Page menu or press Ctrl-C to end the command.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:42 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

VPE Workbench values displayed as part of the DDT will automatically updated when
VPE Workbench data is refreshed to reflect the VPE Workbench properties of the item,
or project if the DDT is labelling a drawing. See 8.8.12: Refreshing VPE Workbench
Data.
Values from the P&ID Data Grid may also be refreshed. See 8.6.23: Refreshing P&ID
Data Grid Labels.
Where a DDT is linked to a drawing, and that drawing is associated with a VPE
Workbench project that includes multiple sub-projects, all sub-project data is displayed
on the drawing. The layout of this data on the P&ID is controlled in the VPE Drawing
Attributes section of the Drawing - Labels Sub-Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project
Administrator program.

- Inserting an Annotation Assembly

1. Select the assembly by:
• using the Symbol Explorer, or
• using the AVEVA P&ID Tool Palette.
2. After the symbol has been selected a 'ghosted' image of the assembly will appear on
the cross hairs. The Command prompt will then display (for example):

Specify insertion point for placing the assembly:

Pick an appropriate point for insertion.

3. The Command prompt will then display (for example):

Select the pipe segment to associate the label:

Select the pipe segment, instrument or equipment that the assembly is to annotate.
The label component of the assembly will then automatically adopt the properties of the
selected segment.

8.4.12 Inserting Unassigned P&ID Database Symbols

• Description
The Unassigned node under the AVEVA P&ID Database node of the P&ID Data Grid lists
items, either created in P&ID Reports or imported from AVEVA Engineering, that have not
been added to a project drawing. Such items may be added to a drawing using facilities
provided by the P&ID Data Grid.

Note: Unassigned pipes are also listed. For the procedure for inserting unassigned pipes,
see 8.5.2: Inserting Unassigned P&ID Database Pipes.

Note: Unassigned items can also be assigned by linking them to unlabelled items on a
drawing. See 8.6.22: Labelling with Data from the P&ID Data Grid.

For details of the use of this procedure in the context of drawing P&IDs, see 6.6: Inserting
Unassigned P&ID Database Items.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:43 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

• Instructions
1. Start the procedure by opening the P&ID Data Grid and accessing the Unassigned
node under the AVEVA P&ID Database node.
2. The nodes list all unassigned symbols by type. Select the required item so that its
details are displayed in the right-hand window of the grid interface.
3. Right-click on the record in the right-hand window and select Insert from the menu that
is then displayed:

4. The command prompt will then display:

Indicate point:

Pick an appropriate point for insertion.

5. The symbol is then placed on the drawing and labelled automatically with the
properties of the item as specified in AVEVA P&ID Reports. The symbol used will be
that specified for the item in AVEVA P&ID Reports.
The item is moved from under the Unassigned node to under the Assigned node in the
P&ID Data Grid.

8.4.13 Inserting Unassigned VPE Workbench Items

• Description
Unassigned VPE Workbench items are equipment and instrument items in the associated
VPE Workbench database that have not yet been placed on a project P&ID. If this facility is
in use for a project (see below), the items are listed under the Unassigned node in the
Engineering Explorer.
For details of the use of this procedure in the context of drawing P&IDs, see 6.7: Inserting
Unassigned VPE Workbench Items.

• Associated Project Configuration Options

Whether or not the Unassigned node is displayed is controlled by an option on the VPE
Workbench Configuration Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program.

• Instructions
1. Start the procedure by either:
• selecting the Insert option from the shortcut menu of the unassigned item in the
Engineering Explorer, or
• dragging and dropping the item from the Engineering Explorer onto The Drawing
Page.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:44 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

2. If the item has not been assigned a symbol, it must be assigned at this point. The item
may already have been assigned a symbol, either in the database or by accessing the
Properties dialog from the Engineering Explorer.
If there are symbols associated with the item type of the item, the AVEVA P&ID
Unassigned Equipment Properties dialog for the item is displayed (see 4.8: Properties
Dialogs). For example:

Select the required symbol name from the list available in the Symbol Name field and
click OK. This list consists of those symbol names previously assigned to items with the
same item type as the unassigned item.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:45 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

3. If there are no symbols assigned to the item type of the item, the Symbol List dialog box
is displayed.

Select the required symbol and click OK.

4. A 'ghosted' image of the item will appear on the cross hairs and may be placed on the
drawing as required. For further information, refer to the appropriate symbol insertion
procedure, bearing in mind that only the single symbol representing the item may be
inserted:
• 8.4.2: Inserting Equipment (start from step 2)
• 8.4.3: Inserting Electrical Equipment (start from step 2)
• 8.4.4: Inserting Nozzles (start from step 2)
• 8.4.5: Inserting Valves (start from step 2)
• 8.4.6: Inserting Instrument Valves (Control Valves) (start from step 2)

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:46 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

• 8.4.7: Inserting Inline Fittings (start from step 2)

• 8.4.8: Inserting Instruments (Balloons) (start from step 2)
• 8.4.9: Inserting Flow Elements (start from step 2)
• 8.4.10: Inserting Miscellaneous Symbols (start from step 2)

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:47 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

8.5 Drawing Pipes and Connections

8.5.1 Drawing Pipes

• Description
This procedure is used to draw pipes.
Pipes are drawn in the current style and with the current tracing and end styles. These can
be set using the Pipes toolbar. Pipe styles are created and amended by selecting the Pipe
Styles option on the List of Values Configuration Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project
Administration program.

Note: The flow direction of a pipe defaults to the direction it was drawn in. Pipe flows can
be reversed or set to dual flow if required. See 8.5.12: Reversing Pipe and Signal
Line Flows and 8.6.17: Labelling Pipes.

Note: A Process Link pipe style is available. Pipes drawn using this method will look like
Process Links but will functionally be Pipes.

For details of the use of this procedure in the context of drawing P&IDs, see 6.8: Drawing
Pipes and Connections.

• Associated Project Configuration Options

• If pipes are to be broken automatically when crossed, the Automatic Breaks ON
checkbox, on the Pipes - Settings Sub-Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project
Administration program must be checked.
• The break priority, i.e. whether the horizontal or vertical pipe is broken where a break
occurs, is set using the Break Pipe Direction buttons.
• The width of the gap in a broken pipe is set in the Break Distance field.
• The symbol chosen to represent the break is selected in the Symbol Name field.
• The layer into which break symbols are placed is specified in the Symbol Layer field.
• Layers are configured using the Drawing - Layers Sub-Category.
• The colour of the break symbol is set in the Symbol Colour field.
• If flow arrows are to be automatically placed at direction change points, ensure that the
Automatic Arrows checkbox in the Flow Arrows section.
• Specify the symbol to be used to indicate flow direction in the Symbol Name field of the
Flow Arrows section.
• Specify the symbol to be used to indicate dual flow in the Symbol Name field of the
Dual Flow Arrows section. Enter the distance between flow indicator symbols in the
Offset Distance field.
• If the USER_STOPUPDATEANNOTCOLOUR user-defined directive on the
Miscellaneous – Settings Sub-Category is set to Yes, intelligent entities, including
pipes, will not have their colours changed to match changes to project settings in the
Administrator.

• Instructions
1. Start the procedure by either:
• selecting the Draw Pipeline option in the Pipeline Group of the Home Tab, or
• dragging and dropping from the AVEVA P&ID Tool Palette.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:48 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

2. The Command prompt will then display:

Indicate point for pipe:

Place one end of the pipe.

3. The Command prompt will then display:

Indicate point for pipe:

Place other the end of the pipe or the first turning point. The length of pipe then
appears on the drawing.
If a pipe flag (off-sheet connector) was selected as the pipe end style for the beginning
of the pipe, it will be inserted and orientated automatically.
AVEVA P&ID will continue to prompt for end or turning points. Continue placing these
until the pipe is finished.
4. The Command prompt will then display:

Indicate point for pipe:

5. Press or select Enter to end the command.

If a pipe flag (off-sheet connector) was selected as the pipe end style for the end of the
pipe, it will be inserted and orientated automatically.
If auto-labelling for pipes is on, the Labelling Pipes procedure will then start automatically.
If both auto-labelling and auto-validation are on, the Labelling Pipes procedure will then start
automatically.
Pipe end styles are selected, and auto-labelling and auto-validation are switched on and off
using facilities in the Pipeline Group of the Home Tab.

8.5.2 Inserting Unassigned P&ID Database Pipes

• Description
The Unassigned node under the AVEVA P&ID Database node of the P&ID Data Grid lists
pipes, created in P&ID Reports, that have not been added to a project drawing. Such pipes
may be added to a drawing using facilities provided by the P&ID Data Grid.

Note: Unassigned symbols (e.g. equipment, instruments, nozzles etc) are also listed. For
the procedure for inserting such unassigned items, see 8.4.12: Inserting Unassigned
P&ID Database Symbols.

Note: Unassigned items can also be assigned by linking them to unlabelled items on a
drawing. See 8.6.22: Labelling with Data from the P&ID Data Grid.

For details of the use of this procedure in the context of drawing P&IDs, see 6.6: Inserting
Unassigned P&ID Database Items.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:49 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

• Instructions
1. Start the procedure by opening the P&ID Data Grid and accessing the Unassigned
node under the AVEVA P&ID Database node.
2. The Pipes nodes list all unassigned pipes. Select the required pipe so that its details
are displayed in the right-hand window of the grid interface.
3. Right-click on the record in the right-hand window and select Draw from the menu that
is then displayed:

4. The command prompt will then display:

Indicate point for Main Pipe:

Place one end of the pipe.

5. The Command prompt will then display:

Indicate point for Main Pipe:

Place other the end of the pipe or the first turning point. A preview of that segment of
the pipe then appears on the drawing.
If a pipe flag (off-sheet connector) was selected as the pipe end style for the beginning
of the pipe, it will be inserted and orientated automatically.
AVEVA P&ID will continue to prompt for end or turning points. Continue placing these
until every segment of the pipe is drawn.
6. The Command prompt will then display:

Indicate point for Main Pipe:

Press or select Enter.

7. The Command prompt will then display:

Insert pipe label:

Pick a position for the pipe label. The pipe label will then be placed, comprised of the
properties of the pipe as specified in AVEVA P&ID Reports.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:50 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

8. The Command prompt will then display:

Pick a point on Entity:

Select the pipe to complete the procedure.

The pipe is moved from under the Unassigned node to under the Assigned node in the
P&ID Data Grid.

8.5.3 Drawing Process Links

• Description
This procedure is used to draw process links between instrument items and process items,
for example, a connection between a pressure indicator and a pipe or equipment item. Such
links do not receive a line number.
For details of the use of this procedure in the context of drawing P&IDs, see 6.8: Drawing
Pipes and Connections.
If Instrument Process Links, also known as "Legacy" Process Links, are to be used (the PLK
item type), i.e. Process Links without the functionality introduced with AVEVA VPE P&ID 7.2
SP3, a number of factors should be considered when drawing process links if data is to be
exported to an XML file in the ISO 15926 schema format. For details, see Guidelines for
Drawing Process Links.

Note: If required, main pipes can be drawn using the Process Links pipe style. Pipes drawn
using this method will look like Process Links but will functionally be Pipes. See
8.5.1: Drawing Pipes for the procedure.

• Associated Project Configuration Options

The default style of Process Links is specified on the Settings Sub-Category pane of the
AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program.
If only Instrument Process Links, also known as "Legacy" Process Links, are to be used, i.e.
Process Links without the functionality introduced with AVEVA VPE P&ID 7.2 SP3, the Use
Legacy Process Link checkbox on the Pipes – Settings Sub-Category must be checked.
The default style of Instrument Process Links is specified on the Pipes – Settings Sub-
Category.

Note: Non-"Legacy" Process Links are drawn using the pipe item type (PMA) in the
process link pipe style. In other words they will technically be branches between
main pipes and offline items. They will therefore have all the functionality of pipes
and may be labelled and edited in the same way.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:51 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

• Example

• Instructions
• Drawing Process Links
• Drawing Instrument Process Links

- Drawing Process Links

Note: Before starting, ensure that the Use Legacy Process Link checkbox on the Pipes –
Settings Sub-Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program is
unchecked, otherwise Instrument Process Links, also known as "Legacy" Process
Links will be drawn.

1. Start the procedure by either:

• selecting the Process Link option in the Pipeline Group of the Home Tab, or
• dragging and dropping from the AVEVA P&ID Tool Palette.
2. The Command prompt will display:

Indicate point for Process Link:

Pick the start point for the Process Link.

3. The Command prompt will then display:

Indicate point for Process Link:

Pick the end point for the Process Link.

Keep selecting start/end points for further Process Links, or press or select Enter to
finish the command.
For process links drawn using the PMA (pipe) item type, the Labelling Pipes procedure will
NOT start automatically even auto-labelling for pipes is on. The labelling procedure for such
process links may be started manually if required.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:52 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

- Drawing Instrument Process Links

Note: If the Use Legacy Process Link checkbox on the Settings Sub-Category pane of the
AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program is checked, the above procedure may
also be used.

1. Start the procedure by selecting the Instrument Link option in the Pipeline Group of
the Home Tab.
2. The Command prompt will display:

Indicate point for Multilined Process Link:

Pick the start point for the instrument process connection.

3. The Command prompt will then display:

Indicate point for Multilined Process Link:

Pick the end point for the instrument process connection.

Keep selecting start/end points for further Process Links, or press or select Enter to
finish the command.

• Guidelines for Drawing Process Links

If "Legacy" Process Links are to be used (PLK item type), i.e. Process Links without the
functionality introduced with AVEVA VPE P&ID 7.2 SP3, a number of factors should be
considered when drawing process links if data is to be exported to an XML file in the ISO
15926 schema format.
Because of the limitations of the ISO 15926 schema not all arrangements of process links
are supported, therefore the following guidelines must be followed to ensure an accurate
layout of pipe networks is available for the 2D-3D comparison performed by the P&ID 3D
Integrator.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:53 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

- Tees or any in-line components that split the flow should not be drawn with process
links, e.g.:

In-line components that split the flow are:

• 3 way and 4 way fittings
• Valves and in-line equipment
• Port valves with more than two ports.
Instead, as in this example, the bypass should be drawn as branch of the main pipe, like so:

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:54 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

- Process links should not be connected directly to equipment:

Ideally any tubing connected to a vessel should be a branch of a trim pipe, and at the very
least they should start from a nozzle:

- Process links should not be used as leader lines or to connect any items that are not
meant to be part of a pipe network:

Signal lines or dummy lines should be used instead:

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:55 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

8.5.4 Changing Pipe Styles

• Description
This procedure is used to change pipes or process links to the current pipe/link style. Set the
pipe style required first using facilities in the Pipeline Group of the Home Tab.
For details of the use of this procedure in the context of drawing P&IDs, see 6.8: Drawing
Pipes and Connections.

• Instructions
1. To change the style of pipes to the current pipe style, start the procedure by selecting
the Change Style option in the Pipeline Group of the Home Tab.
2. The Command prompt will display:

Select Objects:

Pick the pipes or links the style of which is to be changed and press or select Enter.

8.5.5 Applying Tracing to Pipes

• Description
This procedure is used to apply tracing to existing pipes. Any inline fittings shown are
automatically traced around. Tracing is applied to entire pipes. If tracing is not required for a
segment of pipe, that segment of tracing can subsequently be deleted.
For details of the use of this procedure in the context of drawing P&IDs, see 6.8.3: Tracing
Lines.

• Instructions
1. Start the procedure by selecting the Add Trace option in the Pipeline Group of the
Home Tab.
2. The Command prompt will display:

Select pipe for trace:

The selected pipe is then traced.

3. The Command prompt will then display:

Select pipe for trace:

Select further pipes until all required tracing is in place. Press or select Enter to end the
command.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:56 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

8.5.6 Drawing Signal Lines

• Description
This procedure is used to draw signal lines. The procedure ends automatically when the
signal line reaches an instrument.
Signal lines are drawn in the current signal line style as set using facilities in the Pipeline
Group of the Home Tab.
For details of the use of this procedure in the context of drawing P&IDs, see 6.8.2: Drawing
Signal Lines.

• Example

• Associated Project Configuration Options

• The default drawing layers and colours for signal line item types are set up on the Item
Types - Signal Sub-Category.
• The default signal line style is specified in a field of that name in the Signal Styles
Configuration Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program. This pane
can also be used to configure and create the signal line styles.
• If signal lines are to be drawn in different widths from those used by default, the scale
difference may be specified using the USER_SIGNALWIDTH user-defined directive on
the Miscellaneous - Settings Sub-Category.

• Instructions
1. Start the procedure by either:
• selecting the Draw Signal option in the Signal Line Group of the Home Tab, or
• dragging and dropping from the AVEVA P&ID Tool Palette.
2. The Command prompt will display:

Indicate point for Signal Line:

Pick the start point of line.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:57 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

3. The Command prompt will then display:

Indicate point for Signal Line:

Pick a turning point or the end point. Press or select Enter to continue or press Ctrl-C or
select Cancel to finish the command.

8.5.7 Changing Signal Line Styles

• Description
This procedure is used to change the style of existing signal lines.
Before using this procedure, select the style that the signal lines are to be changed to using
facilities in the Signal Line Group of the Home Tab.
For details of the use of this procedure in the context of drawing P&IDs, see 6.8.2: Drawing
Signal Lines.

• Instructions
1. Start the procedure by selecting the Change Style option in the Signal Line Group of
the Home Tab.
2. The Command prompt will display:

Select signal line to change to XXX:

(where 'XXX' is the currently loaded style).

Select each signal line in turn to change the signal line style. The style of each line
changes dynamically as it is selected.
3. Press or select Enter to end the command.

8.5.8 Breaking Lines

Pipes, signal lines and process links may be broken automatically when crossed. However,
"manual" breaks may be entered if required using this procedure.
For details of the use of this procedure in the context of drawing P&IDs, see 6.8: Drawing
Pipes and Connections and 6.8.2: Drawing Signal Lines.

• Associated Project Configuration Options

• Whether or not pipes are to be broken automatically when crossed is controlled by the
Automatic Breaks ON checkbox on the Pipes - Settings Sub-Category of the AVEVA
P&ID Project Administration program.
• The symbol chosen to represent the break is selected in the Symbol Name field.
• The layer into which break symbols are placed is specified in the Symbol Layer field.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:58 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

• Instructions
1. Start the procedure by:
• selecting the line to be broken on The Drawing Page, then right-clicking and
selecting Break from the shortcut menu, or
• selecting the line to be broken on the drawing page, then selecting the Break option
in the Modify Group of the Home Tab.
2. The Command prompt will display:

Pick a first point on the pipeline:

Pick the point on the line where the break starts.

3. The Command prompt will then display:

Pick a second point on the same pipeline:

Pick the point on the line where the break ends

4. The line is then broken.

8.5.9 Merging Pipes, Branches and Signal Lines

• Description
This procedure is used to merge two main pipes into one main pipe, or two branches into
one branch, or to merge a branch into a main pipe, or to merge two signal lines into one
signal lines
The pipes/branches/signal lines to be merged must adjoin each other.
When pipes or branches are merged, the properties of the first pipe/branch selected (as
described below) are adopted as the properties of the merged pipe/branch.
To merge two segments of a single pipe together, see 8.5.14: Merging Pipe Segments.
For details of the use of this procedure in the context of drawing P&IDs, see 6.8: Drawing
Pipes and Connections.

• Instructions
1. Start the procedure by either:
• selecting the pipe/branch into which the other pipe/branch is to be merged on The
Drawing Page, then right-clicking and selecting Pipes>Merge from the shortcut
menu (this option is not available for signal lines), or
• selecting the Merge Branch/Pipe option in the Modify Group of the Home Tab.
2. If the second method of starting the procedure is selected, the Command prompt will
display:

Pick a pipe group to merge:

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:59 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

Pick the pipe/branch/signal line into which the other pipe/branch is to be merged.
If the first method of starting the procedure is selected, a pipe/branch will already have
been selected.
3. The Command prompt will display:

Pick a different pipe group to merge:

Pick the pipe/branch/signal line that is to be merged into the first pipe/branch selected.
4. The two selected pipe/branch/signal line are then merged. If pipes or branches are
merged, the properties of the first pipe/branch selected are adopted as the properties
of the merged pipe/branch.

8.5.10 Splitting Pipes and Signal Lines

• Description
This procedure is used to split a pipe or signal line into two separate pipes or signal lines.
In the case of pipes, the properties of the previously unsplit pipe are assigned to the new
pipe located before the split in terms of the pipe flow of the unsplit pipe. These properties
are also assigned to the new pipe after the split, except for those properties which are
required to be unique, which are replaced by the project null symbol (e.g. "?").
To split a section of a pipe of as a branch of that pipe, see 8.5.11: Splitting off Branches.
For details of the use of this procedure in the context of drawing P&IDs, see 6.8: Drawing
Pipes and Connections.

Note: Pipes may also be split by inserting a break symbol. See 8.4.7: Inserting Inline
Fittings.

• Example

The white section of the line indicates where it has been split.

• Instructions
1. Start the procedure by either:
• selecting the pipe to be split on The Drawing Page, then right-clicking and selecting
Pipes>Split to Main from the shortcut menu (this option is not available for signal
lines), or
• selecting the Split To Main Pipe option in the Modify Group of the Home Tab.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:60 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

2. If the second method of starting the procedure is selected, the Command prompt will
display:

Pick a pipe group to split:

Pick the pipe or signal line that is to be split.

If the first method of starting the procedure is selected, a pipe will already have been
selected.
3. The Command prompt will display:

Pick a point on pipe joint to split the selected pipe joint:

Pick the point on the pipe or signal line where the split is to occur. Note that a pipe must
have been labelled on both sides of the select split point.
4. The pipe or signal line is then split at the selected point into two new pipes or signal
lines.
If a pipe is split, the properties of the previously unsplit pipe are assigned to the new
pipe located before the split in terms of the pipe flow of the unsplit pipe. These
properties are also assigned to the new pipe after the split, except for those properties
which are required to be unique, which are replaced by the project null symbol (e.g.
"?").

8.5.11 Splitting off Branches

• Description
This procedure is used to split a section of a pipe off as a branch of that pipe.
The properties of the pipe are automatically assigned to the new branch.
To split a pipe into two separate pipes, see 8.5.10: Splitting Pipes and Signal Lines.
For details of the use of this procedure in the context of drawing P&IDs, see 6.8: Drawing
Pipes and Connections.

• Example

The white section of the pipe indicates where it has been split.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:61 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

• Instructions
1. Start the procedure by either:
• selecting the pipe to be split on The Drawing Page, then right-clicking and selecting
Pipes>Split to Branch from the shortcut menu, or
• selecting the Split Branch Pipe option in the Modify Group of the Home Tab.
2. If the second method of starting the procedure is selected, the Command prompt will
display:

Pick a pipe group to split:

Pick the pipe that off which a branch is to be split.

If the first method of starting the procedure is selected, this pipe will already have been
selected.
3. The Command prompt will display:

Pick a point on pipe joint to split the selected pipe joint:

Pick the point on the pipe where the split is to occur. The section of the pipe after the
split in terms of pipe flow will be the new branch. Note that the pipe must be labelled on
both sides of the select split point.
4. The branch is then split off of the pipe at the selected point.
The properties of the pipe are automatically assigned to the new branch.

8.5.12 Reversing Pipe and Signal Line Flows

• Description
This procedure is used to reverse the flow of a pipe or a signal line.
Note that reversing the flow of a pipe will not reverse the flow of a branch that loops off and
then back onto a pipe. Reversing the flow of a branch will not reverse the flow of the owning
main pipe.
Signal lines do not have flows in a process sense. The procedure is used to reverse the
direction in which a signal line is drawn.
For details of the use of this procedure in the context of drawing P&IDs, see 6.8: Drawing
Pipes and Connections.

Note: Pipes may be set to bi-directional flow using Bi-Directional Flow field on the AVEVA
P&ID Pipe Properties dialog (see 4.8: Properties Dialogs).

• Instructions
1. Start the procedure by either:
• selecting the pipe on The Drawing Page, then right-clicking and selecting
Pipes>Reverse Flow from the shortcut menu (this option is not available for signal
lines), or

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:62 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

• accessing the AVEVA P&ID Pipe Properties dialog (see 4.8: Properties Dialogs)
and selecting YES in the Reverse Flow field, or
• selecting the Reverse Flow option in the Modify Group of the Home Tab.
2. If the third method of starting the procedure is selected, the Command prompt will
display:

Pick a pipe groups to reverse flow:

Pick the pipe or signal line the flow of which is to be reversed.

If the first or second methods of starting the procedure is selected, a pipe will already
have been selected.
3. The flow of the selected pipe or signal line is then reversed. The pipe is automatically
redrawn to reflect this, i.e. the flow arrows change direction and the start and end
nodes swap ends. In the case of signal lines, any symbols that are part of the line
change direction.
Labels on either side of a spec break, both on the pipe and on the break symbol, are
also updated automatically: the pipe property that is different on either side of the break
changes from one side of the break to the other, and the labels are changed to reflect
this.
Reducers in pipes change direction if the pipe flow is reversed. However the labels of
reducers do not. They must be rotated manually.

8.5.13 Adding Pipe and Signal Line Segments

• Description
This procedure is used to add new segments to the either end of a pipe or signal line.
Segments can also be extended from ports on inline item symbols.
For details of the use of this procedure in the context of drawing P&IDs, see 6.8: Drawing
Pipes and Connections.

• Instructions
1. Start the procedure by either:
• selecting the first or last segment of the pipe that is to be have a segment added to
it on The Drawing Page, then right-clicking and selecting Segments>Add from the
shortcut menu (this option is not available for signal lines), or
• if a segment is to be extended from a port on an inline item symbol, by selecting
that symbol on The Drawing Page, then right-clicking and selecting
Segments>Add from the shortcut menu, or
• selecting the Add Segment option in the Modify Group of the Home Tab.
2. If the third method of starting the procedure is selected, the Command prompt will
display:

Select pipeline or symbol port to add segment to the end:

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:63 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

Pick the first or last segment of the pipe or signal line that is to have a segment added
to it. If a segment is to be extended from a port on an inline item symbol, select that
symbol.
If the first or second method of starting the procedure is selected, a pipe or symbol will
already have been selected.
3. The Command prompt will display:

Indicate next vertex or start point of successive pipe or port

of successive symbol for adding segment:

Select the end-point of the new segment. This can be the start of another pipe or signal
line, or the port of another inline item symbol.
4. If the start of another pipe/signal line or the port of another inline item symbol is
selected, the new segment is drawn and the command ends.
If the new segment does not end on another pipe, signal line or port, either press Enter
to draw the new segment and end the command, or add another segment by indicating
the end point of this segment as described above.
Repeat until all required segments are defined, then press Enter to draw these new
segments and end the command.

8.5.14 Merging Pipe Segments

• Description
This procedure is used to merge pipe segments into a single segment. Both segments must
be of the same pipe.
For details of the use of this procedure in the context of drawing P&IDs, see 6.8: Drawing
Pipes and Connections.

• Instructions
1. Start the procedure by either:
• selecting a segment to be merged on The Drawing Page, then right-clicking and
selecting Segments>Merge from the shortcut menu, or
• selecting the Merge Segment option in the Modify Group of the Home Tab.
2. If the second method of starting the procedure is selected, the Command prompt will
display:

Pick a segment to merge:

Pick the segment into which the other segment is to be merged.

If the first method of starting the procedure is selected, this segment will already have
been selected.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:64 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

3. The Command prompt will display:

Pick a different segment to merge:

Pick the segment that is to be merged into the first pipe/branch selected. Both
segments must be of the same pipe.
4. The two selected segments are then merged.

8.5.15 Deleting Pipe and Signal Line Segments

• Description
This procedure is used to delete a segment from a pipe or a signal line.
Note this does not result in the pipe or signal line being split into two separate entities. A
pipe or signal line with a segment deleted in this manner is still a single entity, even if it the
two parts of the line are not visibly connected.
To split a pipe or signal line into two separate pipes or signal lines, see 8.5.10: Splitting
Pipes and Signal Lines.
For details of the use of this procedure in the context of drawing P&IDs, see 6.8: Drawing
Pipes and Connections.

• Instructions
1. Start the procedure by either:
• selecting the pipe segment that is to be deleted on The Drawing Page, then right-
clicking and selecting Segments>Delete from the shortcut menu (this option is not
available for signal lines), or
• selecting the Delete Segment option in the Modify Group of the Home Tab.
2. If the first method of starting the procedure is selected, the selected pipe segment is
deleted.
If the second method of starting the procedure is selected, the Command prompt will
display:

Select pipeline segment to delete:

Pick the pipe or signal line segment to be deleted.

The selected segment is then deleted.

8.5.16 Changing the Length of Lines

• Description
This procedure is used to change the length of pipes, process links and signal lines. The
procedure may also be used to change the orientation of the last segment of a pipe, process
link or signal line.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:65 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

For details of the use of this procedure in the context of drawing P&IDs, see 6.8: Drawing
Pipes and Connections.

• Instructions
1. Start the procedure by either:
• selecting the pipe or process link to be extended on The Drawing Page, then right-
clicking and selecting Extend from the shortcut menu (this option is not available
for signal lines), or
• selecting the Extend Segment option in the Modify Group of the Home Tab.
2. If the second method of starting the procedure is selected, the Command prompt will
display:

Pick a pipeline to extend:

Pick the pipe, process link or signal line to be extended or shortened.

If the first method of starting the procedure is selected, a line will already have been
selected.
3. The Command prompt will display:

Pick a point close to the pipeline to extend:

Pick the point on the drawing to which the line is to be extended or shortened to. The
last segment of the line is then extended or shortened to that point.
If the point selected is at angle to the original orientation of the segment, the segment
will be redrawn in this direction.

8.5.17 Adding Elbows to a Line

• Description
This procedure is used to add and remove elbows to/from pipes, process links and signal
lines. This has the effect of adding a new segment to the line.
For details of the use of this procedure in the context of drawing P&IDs, see 6.8: Drawing
Pipes and Connections.

• Instructions
1. Start the procedure by either:
• selecting the pipe, process link or signal line segment to which an elbow is to be
added on The Drawing Page, then right-clicking and selecting Segments>Elbow
from the shortcut menu (this option is not available for signal lines), or
• selecting the Elbow Stretch option in the Modify Group of the Home Tab.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:66 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

2. If the second method of starting the procedure is selected, the Command prompt will
display:

Pick a pipe group to split:

Pick the pipe, process link or signal line to which an elbow is to be added.

If the first method of starting the procedure is selected, a segment will already have been
selected.
3. The Command prompt will display:

Pick a point to stretch:

Pick the point on the drawing to which the line is to be stretched to form the new elbow.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:67 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

The new elbow is then created at the point. The segment to which the elbow has been
added is now split into two segments at the elbow.

8.5.18 Changing Pipes to Branches and Branches to Pipes

• Description
This procedure is used to change main pipes into branches and branches into main pipes.
For details of the use of this procedure in the context of drawing P&IDs, see 6.8: Drawing
Pipes and Connections.

• Instructions
• Changing Pipes to Branches
• Changing Branches to Pipes

- Changing Pipes to Branches

1. Start the procedure by either:
• selecting the Main to Branch Pipe option in the Modify Group of the Home Tab, or
• selecting the pipe on The Drawing Page, selecting the Main to Branch Pipe option
in the Modify Group of the Home Tab.
2. If the first method of starting the procedure is selected, the Command prompt will
display:

Pick a main pipe to convert as branch pipe:

Note that the pipe must be selected, not its label.

This step is omitted if the second method of starting the procedure is selected, as the
pipe will already have been selected.
Select the pipe that is to be converted into a branch.
3. The Command prompt will display:

Indicate owner pipe for branch, or Trim for Trim pipe (<ret for
new pipe>):

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:68 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

Select the main pipe that is to be owner of the branch.

The pipe is then converted into a branch, with the selected pipe as its owner.
The ownership of any branches that the converted pipe owned is switched to the pipe
selected to be the owner of the converted pipe.

- Changing Branches to Pipes

1. Start the procedure by either:
• selecting the Branch to Main Pipe option in the Modify Group of the Home Tab, or
• selecting the pipe on The Drawing Page, selecting the Branch to Main Pipe option
in the Modify Group of the Home Tab.
2. If the first two methods of starting the procedure are selected, the Command prompt
will display:

Pick a branch pipe to convert as main pipe:

Note that the branch must be selected, not its label.

This step is omitted if the third or fourth methods of starting the procedure are selected,
as the branch will already have been selected.
The branch is then converted into a pipe.

8.5.19 Changing the Owning Pipes of Branches

• Description
This procedure is used to change which pipe is the owner of a branch.
For details of the use of this procedure in the context of drawing P&IDs, see 6.8: Drawing
Pipes and Connections.

• Instructions
1. Start the procedure by either:
• selecting the Change Pipe Owner option in the Modify Group of the Home Tab, or
• selecting the pipe on The Drawing Page, selecting the Change Pipe Owner option
in the Modify Group of the Home Tab.
2. If the first method of starting the procedure is selected, the Command prompt will
display:

Pick a branch pipe to change its owner pipe:

Note that the branch must be selected, not its label.

This step is omitted if the second method of starting the procedure is selected, as the
branch will already have been selected.
Select the branch that is to be allocated to another pipe.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:69 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

3. The Command prompt will display:

Indicate owner pipe for branch, or Trim for Trim pipe (<ret for
new pipe>):

Select the main pipe that is to be owner of the branch.

The ownership of the branch is then switched to the selected pipe.

8.5.20 Connecting Pipes to Nozzles and Equipment

• Description
In order for nozzles and pipes to inherit sizes from each other, they must be part of the same
pipe group.
To check whether a nozzle is part of a pipe group, hover the cursor over the nozzle on the
drawing so that it becomes highlighted. If the pipe and its components do not also become
highlighted, the nozzle is not part of the pipe group.
This procedure is used to add nozzles and other equipment to a pipe group.

Note: A facility is also available to remove nozzles and equipment from a pipe group. See
8.5.21: Disconnecting Pipes from Nozzles and Equipment.

For details of the use of this procedure in the context of drawing P&IDs, see 6.8.1: Drawing
Pipes and Process Links and 6.10.16: Labelling Nozzles.

• Associated Project Configuration Options

The Cascade Nozzle to Pipe checkbox on the Nozzles – Settings Sub-Category of the
AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program controls whether or not sizes are cascaded
between nozzles and pipes.

• Instructions
1. Start the procedure by selecting the AVEVA Connect option in the Modify Group of the
Home Tab.
2. The Command prompt will display:

Pick pipe group and equipment to connect:

Select either the nozzle or equipment, or pipe group it is to be connected to.

3. The Command prompt will then again display:

Pick pipe group and equipment to connect:

Select the other item that is to be connected. It does not matter which is selected first.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:70 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

4. Press Enter. The Command prompt will then display:

Pick point on pipeline closest to the end to which equipment to

be connected:

Select the end of the pipe to which the nozzle or equipment is to be connected.
The nozzle or equipment is now part of the pipe group, and connected to the selected
end of the pipe.

8.5.21 Disconnecting Pipes from Nozzles and Equipment

• Description
Nozzles and pipes in the same pipe group may inherit sizes from each other. If this is not
required for a particular pipe and nozzle, this procedure can be used to disconnect a pipe
from a nozzle (or from equipment), so that they are no longer in the same pipe group.
To check whether a nozzle is part of a pipe group, hover the cursor over the nozzle on the
drawing so that it becomes highlighted. If the pipe and its components also become
highlighted, the nozzle is part of the pipe group.

Note: A facility is also available to add nozzles and equipment to a pipe group. See 8.5.20:
Connecting Pipes to Nozzles and Equipment.

For details of the use of this procedure in the context of drawing P&IDs, see 6.8.1: Drawing
Pipes and Process Links and 6.10.16: Labelling Nozzles.

• Associated Project Configuration Options

The Cascade Nozzle to Pipe checkbox on the Nozzles – Settings Sub-Category of the
AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program controls whether or not sizes are cascaded
between nozzles and pipes.

• Instructions
1. Start the procedure by selecting the AVEVA Disconnect option in the Modify Group of
the Home Tab.
2. The Command prompt will display:

Pick pipe group and equipment to disconnect:

Select the nozzle or equipment to remove from the pipe group.

The nozzle or equipment is then removed from the pipe group.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:71 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

8.6 Labelling Symbols and Pipes

8.6.1 Labelling - General Information

• Description
This procedure is used for labelling placing 'Intelligence' such as tags and engineering data
for pipes and symbols onto drawings. Points to note:
• Instruments and equipment may have either 4 or 6 tag fields, depending on the
configuration of the project.
• In all cases, a '?' displayed in any of the drop-down lists used while labelling, indicates
that this project definable null character may be selected where data is not yet known.
All drop-down lists contain a list of acceptable values for that field, as defined in the
online validation files. Data entered in these fields, or at the command prompt, is
checked against these values if online validation is on.
• Item label fields may be set to inherit from drawing sheet attribute values.
See 6.10.23: Setting Labels to Inherit Values from Drawing Sheet Attributes.
• Instrument and Equipment label fields that have been set to inherit from drawing sheet
attribute values can be "hidden", i.e. they will be displayed on Properties dialogs and
included in any export of P&ID data, but will not appear on P&IDs or in the tag preview
of Properties dialogs.
See 6.10.23: Setting Labels to Inherit Values from Drawing Sheet Attributes.
• The project may be set to check that all labels in all P&IDs in a project are unique within
a category of item, for example, pipes or instruments. Depending on the project
settings, the user may be prevented from entering duplicate labels, or permitted to
enter such labels but warned that they are not unique in the project.
See 6.13.4: Label Validation across all Project P&IDs for details.
• The project may also be set to check that entries are in a valid format, and to check
entries against lists of valid values.
See 6.13.2: Label Format Validation and 6.13.1: Label Validation against Lists of Valid
Values for details.
• As well as the standard AVEVA P&ID attributes, user-defined attributes may be
assigned to pipes and symbols. See 6.12: Adding User-Defined Attributes for details.
For details of the use of this command in the context of drawing P&IDs, see 6.10: Labelling
Symbols.

Note: The current properties of pipes and items can be viewed on the drawing page by
hovering the cursor over the symbol in question.

• Procedures
The labelling procedure varies, depending on the type of item being labelled:
• 8.6.2: Labelling Using the Non-Modal Properties Dialog
• 8.6.3: Labelling Equipment (with or without Trim)
• 8.6.4: Labelling Electrical Equipment
• 8.6.6: Labelling Nozzles
• 8.6.7: Labelling General Valves
• 8.6.9: Labelling Inline Fittings

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:72 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

• 8.6.8: Labelling Port Valves

• 8.6.9: Labelling Inline Fittings
• 8.6.10: Labelling Pipe Destination Fittings
• 8.6.12: Labelling General Instruments
• 8.6.13: Labelling System I/O Connections, Interlocks and Logic Boxes
• 8.6.14: Labelling I/O Rockets
• 8.6.15: Labelling Revision Triangles
• 8.6.18: Labelling and Connecting Pipe Flags
• 8.6.17: Labelling Pipes
• 8.6.19: Labelling Reducers
• 8.6.20: Labelling Breaks and Inline Breaks
• 8.6.21: Adding Pipe Destination Text
See also:
• 8.6.22: Labelling with Data from the P&ID Data Grid
• 8.6.23: Refreshing P&ID Data Grid Labels
• 8.6.24: Editing Non-AVEVA P&ID Text
• 8.6.25: Labelling Typical Items
• 8.6.27: Setting a Pipe Label as the Main Label
• 8.6.28: Changing the Association of a Pipe Label
• 8.6.29: Adding Notes to Items
• 8.6.30: Globally Editing Labels
• 8.6.31: Setting Symbols to Inherit Label Data from a Manually Selected Pipe
• 8.6.32: Switching off Label Data Inheritance from Pipes
• 8.6.33: Labelling Items with UDAs
• 8.6.34: Removing UDAs from Symbols

• Associated Project Configuration Options

• The units used for labels (metric or imperial) are selected using the Metric or Imperial
Label Units buttons on the Project Configuration Category.
• The text of labels may either be in the default font select for the project on the Label
Types Configuration Category, or in the text style assigned to the label type, also set on
the Label Types Configuration Category.
• Text styles are defined on the Text Styles Configuration Category. The text styles
currently in use on a drawing can be viewed by accessing the AutoCAD Text Style
dialog (type STYLE at the command prompt).
• The null character is specified in the Label Null Character field of this pane.
• The default justification, height and rotation of text for labels are also specified on this
pane.
• The directory in which the validation files are maintained is specified in the Validation
Directory Path field on the Project Configuration Category.
• Sheet attribute field names are set up using the Drawing Information - Settings pane.
• The number of instrument and equipment tag fields, 4 or 6, is specified in the Number
of TAG fields sections of the Instruments - Settings Sub-Category and Equipment -
Settings Sub-Category.
• Inheritance between item label and sheet attribute fields, and whether or not inherited
values are displayed on P&IDs, is set up using the Pipes - Settings Sub-Category,

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:73 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

Instruments - Settings Sub-Category, Equipment - Settings Sub-Category, Valves -

Settings Sub-Category and Line Fittings Configuration Category.
• Label validation across a project settings are made using the buttons in the Label
Validation Across P&IDs sections of the Pipes - Validation Sub-Category, Instruments -
Validation Sub-Category, Equipment - Validation Sub-Category, Valves - Validation
Sub-Category and Miscellaneous - Validation Sub-Category.
• Label format validation settings are made using the Pipes - Validation Sub-Category,
Instruments - Validation Sub-Category, Equipment - Validation Sub-Category, Valves -
Validation Sub-Category and Miscellaneous - Validation Sub-Category
• Validation against lists of valid values is switched on and off on the Miscellaneous -
Settings Sub-Category. The files containing the lists of values are edited using the List
of Values Configuration Category.
• If the USER_STOPUPDATEANNOTCOLOUR user-defined directive on the
Miscellaneous – Settings Sub-Category is set to Yes, intelligent entities, including
labels, will not have their colours changed to match changes to project settings in the
Administrator.
• Whether or not auto-labelling is on by default is set on the Miscellaneous - Labels Sub-
Category pane.
• Typical labelling is switched on or off using the Typical Labelling checkbox of this pane.
The colours of typical pipes, pipe flags, instruments, equipment, SPPs and valves are
also selected on this pane.
• To set the last value entered in a Properties dialog field to automatically populate that
field that next time that Properties dialog is accessed for an unlabelled item of that item
type, use the Pipes - Settings Sub-Category, Instruments - Settings Sub-Category,
Equipment - Settings Sub-Category, Valves - Settings Sub-Category and
Miscellaneous - Settings Sub-Category.
• For validation purposes, label data can be automatically transferred to an SQL
database on entry if the Save to database on Update checkbox on the VPE Workbench
Configuration Category is checked. The database location is specified on the Project
Configuration Category. See 6.13.4: Label Validation across all Project P&IDs.
• DataSet UDAs are groups of attributes that are set up for types of items or symbols that
meet user-defined criteria. These may then be used to label pipes and symbols. They
are defined using the User Defined Attributes - DataSet Sub-Category.

8.6.2 Labelling Using the Non-Modal Properties Dialog

• Description
Labels can be viewed and entered using the non-modal Properties dialog.
Note that tags, pipe sizes, instrument types and other validated data cannot be directly
entered or changed using this dialog. However, modal Properties dialogs can be accessed
from the non-modal Properties dialog, in which the required values must be entered.
Other details can be entered or changed, and the drawing labelled with them.

• Instructions
1. Start the procedure by opening the non-modal Properties dialog, if it is not already
open. To open the non-modal Properties dialog, select the P&ID Properties option in
Properties Group of the Home Tab.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:74 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

2. The non-modal Properties dialog automatically displays details of whichever item is

currently selected, or details of the drawing if nothing is selected.

3. The non-modal Properties dialog displays all the properties of the item, including UDAs
etc, on a single tab.
4. Enter the required details.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:75 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

5. Tags, pipe sizes, instrument types and other validated data cannot be entered or
changed using this dialog. A button in each tag field opens a modal Properties dialog,
in which the required values must be entered.

The modal dialog will include a field for all the data of the item that cannot be modified
in the non-modal dialog.
6. Drawings can be labelled from the non-modal dialog by hovering the mouse over the
value in the Properties dialog that the drawing is to be labelled with, then moving the
cursor over the drawing. The user will then be prompted to pick a point to place the
label.

8.6.3 Labelling Equipment (with or without Trim)

• Description
The procedure can be used to label Equipment (with or without trim), or for editing an
existing equipment label.
For details of the use of this procedure in the context of drawing P&IDs, see 6.10.5:
Labelling Equipment.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:76 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

• Example

• Associated Project Configuration Options

• If equipment data is to be imported from VPE Workbench, by use of the EDL item type,
the Import Equipment Data checkbox in the Equipment Data from VPE Workbench
section of the Equipment - Settings Sub-Category must be checked. The placing of the
imported data information is specified by the Column 'X' and Row 'Y' Offsets fields in
this section.
• The number of equipment label fields, 4 or 6, is specified in the Number of TAG fields
section of the Equipment - Settings Sub-Category.
• The boilerplate text to replace the defaults of Block, Function, Prefix, Tag, Number and
Suffix in the Equipment properties dialog is specified in the Dialog Box Field labels
section of the Equipment - Settings Sub-Category.
• To set the last value entered in a Properties dialog field to automatically populate that
field that next time that Properties dialog is accessed for an unlabelled item of that item
type, use the checkboxes in the Values to Remember from Last Equipment Edit and
Values to Remember from Last In-Line Equipment Edit sections of the Equipment -
Settings Sub-Category.
• Inheritance between equipment label and sheet attribute fields, and whether or not
inherited values are displayed on P&IDs, is set up using the Equipment - Settings Sub-
Category.
• The project may be set to check that equipment labels in all P&IDs in the project are
unique using the Label Validation across P&IDs section of the Equipment - Settings
Sub-Category.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:77 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

• Whether or not delimiters are required after fields in an equipment label is specified in
the Label Format section of the Equipment - Labels Sub-Category. The delimiters to be
used are chosen in the same section.
• Whether or not fixed equipment label formatting is in use, and the coordinates of label
components if it is not, are specified in the Equipment Label Position and In-Line
Equipment Label Position sections of the Equipment - Labels Sub-Category.
• The display order of fields in equipment labels is specified in the Equipment Label
Format section of the Equipment - Labels Sub-Category.
• The project may be set to require that a selected field or a combination of fields in
equipment labels be unique (in addition to the entire label being unique). The fields that
are checked for uniqueness are selected in the Unique Tags section of the Equipment -
Labels Sub-Category.
• Equipment labels may automatically have a symbol placed with them when they are
inserted. For example, they may be placed in a box. This functionality is switched on
and off, the required symbol selected, and the offset from the label specified using the
Equipment Label Symbol and In-Line Equipment Label Symbol sections of the
Equipment - Labels Sub-Category.
• The fields that are to be checked for uniqueness are selected on the Pipes - Labels
Sub-Category, Instruments - Labels Sub-Category and Equipment Labels panes of the
AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program.
• Automatic tagging of equipment number fields (see 6.10.25: Automatic Tagging) is
switched on and formatted on the Equipment - Automatic Tag Format Sub-Category.
• If it is required that the design area is used as the prefix for the equipment, the Design
area from Title Block used for Instrument Label Field 1 checkbox has been checked in
the Drawing - Labels Sub-Category.

• Inheriting Label Data from the Owning Pipe Label

Inline equipment label data may be inherited from the label of the owning pipe, as set-up on
the Equipment - Settings Sub-Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program.
For details of setting up the inheritance, see 8.6.31: Setting Symbols to Inherit Label Data
from a Manually Selected Pipe.
If an inline equipment item has the inherited values in its label edited using the procedure
below, this will cancel the inheritance.
Inheritance can be switched on and off for an item using the Inheritance field (see below).

• Instructions
1. The procedure may start automatically if auto-labelling for equipment is on. If this is the
case, the AVEVA P&ID Equipment Properties dialog displays automatically when the
equipment is placed on the drawing (see below).
If auto-labelling is not on, or to edit an existing label, start the procedure by either:
• selecting the symbol to be labelled on The Drawing Page, then selecting
Properties from the shortcut menu, or
• selecting the symbol to be labelled in the Engineering Explorer, then selecting
Properties from the shortcut menu, or
• selecting the Properties option in Properties Group of the Home Tab.
Note: Labels can also be viewed using the Non-Modal Properties Dialog, but tags cannot
be directly entered into this dialog. Other details can be entered or changed however,
and the drawing labelled with them. See Labelling Using the Non-Modal Properties
Dialog.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:78 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

2. If either for the first two methods of starting the procedure is followed, the AVEVA P&ID
Equipment Properties dialog for the symbol is then displayed (see below).
If the other method is followed, the Command prompt will display:

Select Item to Label, or Label to Modify:

Pick the item to be labelled, or to edit an existing label, pick the item label.
To edit an existing trim label, pick the trim label and continue as described below for the
AVEVA P&ID Pipeline Properties dialog.
3. The AVEVA P&ID Equipment Properties dialog is then displayed (see 4.8: Properties
Dialogs):

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:79 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

Note: The number field may be completed automatically. See 6.10.25: Automatic Tagging.
Automatically entered number fields may be manually overwritten if required.

Enter the equipment label details and click on the OK button.

Select YES in the Inheritance field if the item is to subject to attribute inheritance from
the sheet or the owning pipe.
4. The Command prompt will display:

Position Equipment Label:

Place the label near the equipment item. If a symbol, such as a box, is set to be placed
with the label, it is inserted automatically at the same time as the label.

Note: If fixed equipment label formatting is off, the components of the label will be placed at
the coordinates from the insertion point specified using the AVEVA P&ID Project
Administration program.

5. If fixed label formatting is toggled from on to off, or visa versa, the positions of
equipment label components will automatically change to reflect this the next time the
drawing is opened.
Even if fixed label formatting is off, only the settings of the XEQ (equipment letter) label
type, text height, rotation and so on, are taken into account.
6. The Command prompt will display:

Select Item to Label, or Label to Modify:

Pick another equipment item to continue labelling, or press or select Enter to end the
command.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:80 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

• Adding a Trim Label

1. If the equipment is a vessel, a trim label may also be added. Select Add Trim Label
from The Drawing Page shortcut menu for the vessel.
The AVEVA P&ID Trim Pipe Properties dialog is displayed (see 4.8: Properties
Dialogs):

Enter details in the Fluid Service, Number, Specification and other fields that are
available according to the project line tag setup. These values are subsequently
applied to any trim pipework labelled at a later stage. A size entry cannot be made at
this stage. When entries are completed, click on the OK button.
2. The Command prompt will display:

Position Trim Label:

Place the label as required.

8.6.4 Labelling Electrical Equipment

• Description
The procedure can be used to label Electrical Equipment.
For details of the use of this procedure in the context of drawing P&IDs, see 6.10.5:
Labelling Equipment.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:81 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

• Example

• Associated Project Configuration Options

• If equipment data is to be imported from VPE Workbench, by use of the EDL item type,
the Import Equipment Data checkbox in the Equipment Data from VPE Workbench
section of the Equipment - Settings Sub-Category must be checked. The placing of the
imported data information is specified by the Column 'X' and Row 'Y' Offsets fields in
this section.
• The number of equipment label fields, 4 or 6, is specified in the Number Of TAG fields
section of the Equipment - Settings Sub-Category.
• The boilerplate text to replace the defaults of Block, Function, Prefix, Tag, Number and
Suffix in the Equipment properties dialog is specified in the Dialog Box Field labels
section of the Equipment - Settings Sub-Category.
• To set the last value entered in a Properties dialog field to automatically populate that
field that next time that Properties dialog is accessed for an unlabelled item of that item
type, use the checkboxes in the Values to Remember from Last Equipment Edit section
of the Equipment - Settings Sub-Category.
• Inheritance between equipment label and sheet attribute fields, and whether or not
inherited values are displayed on P&IDs, is set up using the Equipment - Settings Sub-
Category.
• The project may be set to check that equipment labels in all P&IDs in the project are
unique using the Label Validation across P&IDs section of the Equipment - Settings
Sub-Category.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:82 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

• Whether or not delimiters are required after fields in an equipment label is specified in
the Label Format section of the Equipment - Labels Sub-Category. The delimiters to be
used are chosen in the same section.
• Whether or not fixed equipment label formatting is in use, and the coordinates of label
components if it is not, are specified in the Equipment Label Position section of the
Equipment - Labels Sub-Category.
• The display order of fields in equipment labels is specified in the Equipment Label
Format section of the Equipment - Labels Sub-Category.
• Equipment labels may automatically have a symbol placed with them when they are
inserted. For example, they may be placed in a box. This functionality is switched on
and off, the required symbol selected, and the offset from the label specified using the
Equipment Label Symbol section of the Equipment - Labels Sub-Category.
• Automatic tagging of equipment number fields (see 6.10.25: Automatic Tagging) is
switched on and formatted on the Equipment - Automatic Tag Format Sub-Category.
• If it is required that the design area is used as the prefix for the equipment, the Design
area from Title Block used for Instrument Label Field 1 checkbox has been checked in
the Drawing - Labels Sub-Category.

• Instructions
1. The procedure may start automatically if auto-labelling for equipment is on. If this is the
case, the AVEVA P&ID Equipment Properties dialog displays automatically when the
equipment is placed on the drawing.
• If auto-labelling is not on, or to edit an existing label, start the procedure by either:
• selecting the symbol to be labelled on The Drawing Page, then selecting
Properties from the shortcut menu, or
• selecting the symbol to be labelled in the Engineering Explorer, then selecting
Properties from the shortcut menu, or
• selecting the Properties option in Properties Group of the Home Tab.
Note: Labels can also be viewed using the Non-Modal Properties Dialog, but tags cannot
be directly entered into this dialog. Other details can be entered or changed however,
and the drawing labelled with them. See Labelling Using the Non-Modal Properties
Dialog.

2. If either for the first two methods of starting the procedure is followed, the AVEVA P&ID
Equipment Properties dialog for the symbol is then displayed.
If the other method is followed, the Command prompt will display:

Select Item to Label, or Label to Modify:

Pick the item to be labelled, or to edit an existing label, pick the item label.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:83 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

3. The AVEVA P&ID Equipment Properties dialog is then displayed (see 4.8: Properties
Dialogs):

Note: The number field may be completed automatically. See 6.10.25: Automatic Tagging.
Automatically entered number fields may be manually overwritten if required.

Enter the equipment label details and click on the OK button.

Select YES in the Inheritance field if the item is to subject to attribute inheritance from
the sheet or the owning pipe.
4. The Command prompt will display:

Position Equipment Label:

Place the label near the equipment item.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:84 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

5. The Command prompt will display:

Select Item to Label, or Label to Modify:

Pick another electrical equipment item to continue labelling, or press or select Enter to
end the command.

8.6.5 Adding Equipment Headers

• Description
The procedure can be used to add headers to equipment. Headers include equipment
labels plus any other required text as entered by the user. If an equipment label is changed,
the equipment label in an equipment header is automatically updated.
For details of the use of this procedure in the context of drawing P&IDs, see 6.10.5:
Labelling Equipment.

• Example

• Associated Project Configuration Option

Whether or not equipment headers are to be underlined on P&IDs is specified on the
Equipment - Settings Sub-Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:85 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

• Instructions
1. Start the procedure by selecting Add Header from The Drawing Page shortcut menu
for the equipment.

2. Command prompt will display:

Insert Equipment Label Header:

Place the header near the equipment item. The command ends automatically.
Add any other equipment header text using standard AutoCAD facilities.

8.6.6 Labelling Nozzles

• Description
The procedure can be used to label Nozzles.
For details of the use of this procedure in the context of drawing P&IDs, see 6.10.16:
Labelling Nozzles

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:86 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

• Example

• Errors
An error message will be received if duplicate labels are placed.

• Associated Project Configuration Options

• If unlabelled nozzles are to result in a warning being displayed during validation and/or
export, the Nozzle Error-Balloon Placement checkbox on the Label Types
Configuration Category must be checked.
• If nozzle sizes are to cascaded onto connecting pipes, check the Cascade Nozzle to
Pipe checkbox on the Nozzles - Settings Sub-Category .
• If nozzles are to be labelled using an automatically incrementing number, check the
Increment Nozzle Sequence checkbox on the Nozzles - Labels Sub-Category.
• If nozzles labels are to automatically include a prefix, enter this prefix in the Nozzle
Prefix field on the Nozzles - Labels Sub-Category.
• To set the last value entered in a Properties dialog field to automatically populate that
field that next time that Properties dialog is accessed for an unlabelled item of that item
type, use the checkboxes in the Values to Remember from Last Nozzle Edit section of
the Miscellaneous - Settings Sub-Category.

• Instructions
1. The procedure may start automatically if auto-labelling for nozzles is on. If this is the
case, the AVEVA P&ID Nozzle Properties dialog displays automatically when a nozzle
is placed on the drawing.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:87 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

If auto-labelling is not on, or to edit an existing label, start the procedure by either:
• selecting the symbol to be labelled on The Drawing Page, then selecting
Properties from the shortcut menu, or
• selecting the symbol to be labelled in the Engineering Explorer, then selecting
Properties from the shortcut menu, or
• selecting the Properties option in Properties Group of the Home Tab.
Note: Labels can also be viewed using the Non-Modal Properties Dialog, but tags cannot
be directly entered into this dialog. Other details can be entered or changed however,
and the drawing labelled with them. See Labelling Using the Non-Modal Properties
Dialog.

2. If either for the first two methods of starting the procedure is followed, the AVEVA P&ID
Nozzle Properties dialog for the symbol is then displayed.
If the other method is followed, the Command prompt will display:

Select Item to Label, or Label to Modify:

Pick the nozzle.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:88 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

3. The AVEVA P&ID Nozzle Properties dialog for the object is then displayed (see 4.8:
Properties Dialogs):

Enter the nozzle tag and, if required, a nozzle size.

If the nozzle tag and the size are to be placed as labels for the nozzle, select “Yes” in
the appropriate Add Label fields.
Click on the OK button.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:89 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

4. Assuming the Tag Annotation - Add Label field is set to “Yes”, the Command prompt will
display:

Position Nozzle Tag:

Place the nozzle tag.

The nozzle currently being labelled is highlighted.
5. Assuming the Size Annotation - Add Label field is set to “Yes”, the Command prompt
will display:

Position Nozzle Size:

Place the nozzle size.

6. The Command prompt will display:

Select Item to Label, or Label to Modify:

Pick another nozzle to continue labelling, or press or select Enter to end the command.

8.6.7 Labelling General Valves

• Description
The procedure can be used to label (non-Instrument) Valves, including reducing valves.
Pattern labels can be entered. Valves can be labelled with inherited pipe properties if
required.
For details of labelling Instrument Valves see 8.6.12: Labelling General Instruments.
For details of the use of this procedure in the context of drawing P&IDs, see 6.10.6:
Labelling General Valves.

• Example

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:90 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

• Associated Project Configuration Options

• If the valve tag is to be positioned on the drawing by the program, check the Valve Tag
in Fixed Location checkbox on the Valves - Settings Sub-Category of the AVEVA P&ID
Project Administration program. Specify the position in which automatic placement
takes place by entering coordinates in the Valve Tag Offset from Symbol Location
fields.
• If valve tag labels are to be automatically rotated to match the orientation of the valves
they are associated with, check the Rotate Valve Tag with Symbol checkbox on the
Valves - Settings Sub-Category.
• Inheritance between valve label and sheet attribute fields, and whether or not inherited
values are displayed on P&IDs, is set up using the Valves - Settings Sub-Category.
• If the validated valve code field is to be enabled by default in the Valve Properties
dialog, the Use Valve code checkbox in the Valves - Settings Sub-Category must be
checked.
• If valves are to be labelled with their valve codes, the Add Valve Code label checkbox
in the Valves - Settings Sub-Category must be checked.
• The boilerplate text to replace the defaults of Prefix, Tag, Number and Suffix in the
Valve Properties dialog is also specified on this pane.
• The project may be set to check that valve labels in all P&IDs in the project are unique
using the Label Validation across P&IDs section of the Valves - Settings Sub-Category.
• If the valve code is to be positioned on the drawing by the user, check the Manual
Placement checkbox on the Valves - Labels Sub-Category. If the code is to be placed
automatically, specify the position in which automatic placement takes place by
entering coordinates in the Code Offset from Symbol Origin fields.
• If the default setting of the Place Port Size fields on Properties dialogs for Port Valves is
that port sizes should be placed, the Place Port Sizes checkbox on the Valves - Labels
Sub-Category must be checked.
• If the valve size is to be positioned on the drawing by the program, check the Valve
Size in Fixed Location checkbox on the Valves - Labels Sub-Category of the AVEVA
P&ID Project Administration program. Specify the position in which automatic
placement takes place by entering coordinates in the Valve Size Offset from Symbol
Location fields.
• If valve size labels are to be automatically rotated to match the orientation of the valves
they are associated with, check the Rotate Valve Size with Symbol checkbox on the
Valves - Labels Sub-Category.
• Valve labels may automatically have a symbol placed with them when they are
inserted. For example, they may be placed in a box. This functionality is switched on
and off, the required symbol selected, and the offset from the label specified using the
Valve Label Symbol section of the Valves - Labels Sub-Category.
• Regular expressions may be applied to valve labels as defined in the Display Label
Format section of the Valves - Labels Sub-Category.
• If unlabelled ports on port valves are to result in a warning being displayed during
validation and/or export, the Port Error-Balloon Placement checkbox on Label Types
Configuration Category must be checked.
• The boilerplate text to replace the defaults of Prefix, Tag, Number and Suffix for SPP
labels is specified on the Miscellaneous - Labels Sub-Category of the AVEVA P&ID
Project Administration program.
• Automatic valve tagging (see 6.10.25: Automatic Tagging) is switched on, and the
format of automatic valve tags defined on the Valves - Automatic Tag Format Sub-
Category.
• The ranges of valve tag numbers that may be used in automatically assigned valve tag
numbers is set on the Drawing - Drawing List Sub-Category for each project drawing.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:91 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

• Patterns are defined using the Valves – Patterns Sub-Category.

• Inheriting Label Data from the Owning Pipe Label

Valve tag data may be inherited from the label of the owning pipe, as set-up on the Valves -
Settings Sub-Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program. For details of
setting up the inheritance, see 8.6.31: Setting Symbols to Inherit Label Data from a
Manually Selected Pipe.
If a valve has the inherited values in its label edited using the procedure below, this will
cancel the inheritance.
Inheritance can be switched on and off for an item using the Inheritance field (see below).

• Instructions
• Adding or Editing a Valve Label
• Label Valves with Properties Inherited from Pipe

- Adding or Editing a Valve Label

Use this procedure to label valves with properties of valves themselves. Valves may also be
labelled with properties inherited from pipes (see Label Valves with Properties Inherited
from Pipe).
1. The procedure may start automatically if auto-labelling for valves is on. If this is the
case, the AVEVA P&ID Valve Properties dialog displays automatically when a valve is
placed on the drawing.
If auto-labelling is not on, or to edit an existing label, start the procedure by either:
• selecting the symbol to be labelled on The Drawing Page, then selecting
Properties from the shortcut menu, or
• selecting the Properties option in Properties Group of the Home Tab.
Note: Labels can also be viewed using the Non-Modal Properties Dialog, but tags cannot
be directly entered into this dialog. Other details can be entered or changed however,
and the drawing labelled with them. See Labelling Using the Non-Modal Properties
Dialog.

2. If the first method of starting the procedure is followed, the AVEVA P&ID Valve
Properties dialog for the symbol is then displayed.
If the other method is followed, the Command prompt will display:

Select Item to Label, or Label to Modify:

Pick the general valve to be labelled, or to edit an existing label, pick the item label.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:92 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

3. The AVEVA P&ID Valve Properties dialog is then displayed (see 4.8: Properties
Dialogs):

Enter the tag and any SPP labelling.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:93 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

Note: The valve tag may be completed automatically. See 6.10.25: Automatic Tagging.
Automatically entered valve tags may be manually overwritten if required. If the
number of automatically tagged valves on a drawing exceeds the range of numbers
defined for it, an error message is displayed, and the tag will placed without an
incremented number.

Enter details as dictated by the project configuration options, and specify text angles as
required.
Select YES in the Inheritance field if the item is to subject to attribute inheritance from
the sheet or the owning pipe.
4. If the valve is to be a substitute, select the pattern reference from the Pattern
Reference list.
5. If the valve is a reducing valve, select Yes from the Is Reducing Valve field. Otherwise
leave set to No.
The Upstream Size and Downstream Size fields display the current upstream and
downstream pipe sizes. When the Is Reducing Valve field is set to Yes, these values
may be edited. Pipe and reducer labels and properties upstream and downstream of
the valve location will have their sizes automatically modified to reflect these size
changes.
6. If the valve size (or sizes if the valve is a reducing valve), as inherited from the pipe, is
to be included in the label, select YES in the Add Valve Size Label field.
Note: Valve sizes can also be added using the Label Valves with Properties Inherited from
Pipe procedure (see below).

7. If the valve is a port valve, the valve ports may also need to be labelled. See 8.6.8:
Labelling Port Valves.
Click on the OK button.
8. The Command prompt will display:

Position Valve Tag:

Place the tag.

9. If applicable, the Command prompt will display:

Position Valve Closure:

Place the closure.

10. If applicable, the Command prompt will display:

Position Special Item Label Prefix:

Place the SPP prefix.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:94 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

11. If applicable, the Command prompt will display:

Position Special Item Label Type:

Place the SPP label type.

12. If applicable, the Command prompt will display:

Position Special Item Label Number:

Place the SPP label number.

13. If applicable, the Command prompt will display:

Position Special Item Label Suffix:

Place the SPP label number.

14. If the Add Valve Size Label field was set to YES the user will also be prompted to add
the valve size(s).
15. The Command prompt will display:

Select Item to Label, or Label to Modify:

Pick another valve to continue labelling, or press or select Enter to end the command.

- Label Valves with Properties Inherited from Pipe

Use this procedure to label valves with properties inherited from pipes.
1. Start the procedure by right-clicking on the valve and selecting the Add Label option
from the shortcut menu. The following menu is then displayed:

2. Select the required pipe property from the menu.

Note: If the valve is a reducing valve the Inlet Size and Outlet Size properties will be
available instead of the Valve Size property.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:95 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

Valves may also be labelled with sizes using the Adding or Editing a Valve Label
procedure (see above).

3. After the required property has been selected, the user will then be prompted to
position the label. Pick a point for the label. The label is then placed.

8.6.8 Labelling Port Valves

• Description
The procedure can be used to label Port Valves.
For details of the use of this procedure in the context of drawing P&IDs, see 6.10.9:
Labelling Port Valves.

• Example

• Associated Project Configuration Options

• If the default setting of the Place Port Size fields on Port Valves Properties dialogs is to
be "True" (port sizes to be placed), the Place Port Sizes checkbox on the Valves -
Labels Sub-Category must be checked.
• If unlabelled ports on port valves are to result in a warning being displayed during
validation and/or export, the Port Error-Balloon Placement checkbox on Label Types
Configuration Category must be checked.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:96 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

• Instructions
1. To label a port valve, proceed as described in the Labelling Valves procedure until the
AVEVA P&ID Valve Properties dialog is displayed and complete the standard fields
(see 4.8: Properties Dialogs). In addition to these standard fields, the Properties dialog
for a port valve includes a number of extra fields:

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:97 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

Assuming the display of ports is switched on (see 8.3.4: Turning the Display of Ports
On and Off), the port currently being labelled is highlighted in a different colour on the
drawing:

2. For each port, enter the name and a size. On the All Properties tab, specify whether or
not this size will be displayed on the drawing (default setting is "No"). If the size is to be
displayed, specify the drawing layer, angle, justification, height and width factor of the
size text.
Note: If a port is connected to another item (pipe, reducer etc), the size of the port will
automatically be derived from this once the drawing is validated and cannot be
changed using the Properties dialog.

3. Once the Properties dialog has been completed, click on the OK button.
You will then be prompted to place the valve label data onto the drawing as described
in the 8.6.7: Labelling General Valves procedure. If you specified that port size data
should be placed, you will also be prompted to select the insertion points for each port
label that were set to be displayed.

8.6.9 Labelling Inline Fittings

• Description
The procedure can be used to label Inline Fittings (including Special Piping Items).
For details of the use of this procedure in the context of drawing P&IDs, see 6.10.7:
Labelling Inline Fittings (Special Piping Items).

• Example

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:98 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

• Associated Project Configuration Options

• The boilerplate text to replace the defaults of Prefix, Tag, Number and Suffix in the Line
Fitting Properties dialog box is specified on the Miscellaneous - Labels Sub-Category
of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program.
• Line fitting labels may automatically have a symbol placed with them when they are
inserted. For example, they may be placed in a box. This functionality is switched on
and off, the required symbol selected, and the offset from the label specified using the
Line Fittings Symbol section of the Line Fittings Configuration Category.
• The coordinates of Line Fitting label components relative to the insertion point of the
symbol are specified in the Line Fittings Label Position section of the Line Fittings
Configuration Category.
• Inheritance between line fitting label and sheet attribute fields, and whether or not
inherited values are displayed on P&IDs, is set up using the Line Fittings Configuration
Category.
• The project may be set to check that special piping item line fitting labels in all P&IDs in
the project are unique using the Label Validation across P&IDs section of the Line
Fittings Configuration Category.
• If the line fittings code field is to be enabled by default in the Line Fitting Properties
dialog, the Code Label checkbox in the Line Fittings Configuration Category must be
checked.
• If line fittings are to be labelled with their line fitting codes, the Add Code Label
checkbox in the Line Fittings Configuration Category must be checked.

• Inheriting Label Data from the Owning Pipe Label

Line fittings data may be inherited from the label of the owning pipe, as set-up on the Line
Fittings Configuration Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program. For
details of setting up the inheritance, see 8.6.31: Setting Symbols to Inherit Label Data from a
Manually Selected Pipe.
If a line fittings has the inherited values in its label edited using the procedure below, this will
cancel the inheritance.
Inheritance can be switched on and off for an item using the Inheritance field (see below).

• Instructions
1. Start the procedure by either:
• selecting the symbol to be labelled on The Drawing Page, then selecting
Properties from the shortcut menu, or
• selecting the Properties option in Properties Group of the Home Tab.
Note: Labels can also be viewed using the Non-Modal Properties Dialog, but tags cannot
be directly entered into this dialog. Other details can be entered or changed however,
and the drawing labelled with them. See Labelling Using the Non-Modal Properties
Dialog.

2. If the first method of starting the procedure is followed, the AVEVA P&ID Line Fitting
Properties dialog for the symbol is then displayed.
If the other method is followed, the Command prompt will display:

Select Item to Label, or Label to Modify:

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:99 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

Pick the item to be labelled.

3. The AVEVA P&ID Line Fitting Properties dialog is then displayed (see 4.8: Properties
Dialogs):

Enter the optional Prefix, Type, Number, and Suffix details.

Select YES in the Inheritance field if the item is to subject to attribute inheritance from
the sheet or the owning pipe.
Click on the OK button.
4. The Command prompt will display:

Position Special Item Label Prefix:

Place the label near the item. If a symbol, such as a box, is set to be placed with the
label, it is inserted automatically at the same time as the label.

Note: If fixed inline equipment label formatting is off, the components of the label will be
placed at the coordinates from the insertion point specified using the AVEVA P&ID
Project Administration program.

Unlike equipment labels, if fixed label formatting is toggled from on to off, or visa versa,
the positions of inline equipment label components will not automatically change to
reflect this the next time the drawing is opened.
Place the SPP prefix, if applicable.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:100 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

5. The Command prompt will display:

Select Item to Label, or Label to Modify:

Pick another inline fitting to continue labelling, or press or select Enter to end the
command.

8.6.10 Labelling Pipe Destination Fittings

• Description
The procedure can be used to label pipe destination fittings.
For details of the use of this procedure in the context of drawing P&IDs, see 6.10.8:
Labelling Pipe Destination Fittings.

• Instructions
1. Start the procedure by either:
• selecting the symbol to be labelled on The Drawing Page, then selecting
Properties from the shortcut menu, or
• selecting the Properties option in Properties Group of the Home Tab.
Note: Labels can also be viewed using the Non-Modal Properties Dialog, but tags cannot
be directly entered into this dialog. Other details can be entered or changed however,
and the drawing labelled with them. See Labelling Using the Non-Modal Properties
Dialog.

2. If the first method of starting the procedure is followed, the AVEVA P&ID Line Fittings
Properties dialog for the symbol is then displayed.
If the other method is followed, the Command prompt will display:

Select Item to Label, or Label to Modify:

Pick the item to be labelled.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:101 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

3. The AVEVA P&ID Line Fittings Properties dialog is then displayed (see 4.8: Properties
Dialogs):

Enter the size, specification, Prefix, Type, Number and Suffix of the fitting as required.
Select YES in the Inheritance field if the item is to subject to attribute inheritance from
the sheet or the owning pipe.
Click on the OK button.
4. The Command prompt will display:

Position Label:

Place the label near or on the item.

5. The Command prompt will display:

Select Item to Label, or Label to Modify:

Pick another item to continue labelling, or press or select Enter to end the command.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:102 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

8.6.11 Creating Instrument Loops

• Description
This procedure is used to create instrument loops.
Once an instrument loop has been created, instruments can be assigned to them.
For details of the use of this procedure in the context of drawing P&IDs, see 6.10.11:
Labelling General Instruments.

• Associated Project Configuration Options

The fields which are used to define the properties of instrument loops, and the loop fields
from which instruments in a loop can inherit properties, are set using in Instrument Loop Tag
section of the Instruments - Settings Sub-Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project
Administration program.

• Instructions
1. Start the procedure by right-clicking on the Instrument Loop node in the Engineering
Explorer.
2. From the menu that is then displayed, select the New Loop option.
3. The AVEVA P&ID Instrument Loop Properties dialog is then displayed (see 4.8:
Properties Dialogs).

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:103 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

4. In the Type field, select the required instrument loop type from a list of values, or enter
a different type if required.
5. In the Loop field, enter the number of the loop.
6. Depending on the project configuration settings, there may be other fields to complete,
i.e. Block, Function, Prefix and/or Suffix. Complete these as required.
7. Click on the OK button. The new loop is then created is displayed under the Instrument
loop node in the Engineering Explorer.
8. To assign an instrument to the new loop either:
• Select the loop number in the Instrument Loop Number field of the instrument's
properties dialog (see 8.6.12: Labelling General Instruments), or
• In the Engineering Explorer, drag the instrument from the loop that it is currently in,
and drop it onto the node of the new loop. Instruments that are not in a loop will be
grouped under the UNNAMED node.

8.6.12 Labelling General Instruments

• Description
The procedure can be used to label Instruments, flow elements, control valve balloons, and
associated panels. Pattern labels can be entered.
When labelling flow elements, the balloons are labelled rather than the flow elements
themselves. Labelling is then as for ordinary instruments, but no alarms are permitted.
When deleting data, the following rules should be noted:
• Descriptors can be deleted individually,
• Prefix, suffix and loop number are all deleted, regardless of which is picked for deletion,
• If the type is deleted, the prefix, suffix and loop number are also deleted,
• Alarms may be deleted individually.
For details of the use of this procedure in the context of drawing P&IDs, see 6.10.11:
Labelling General Instruments, 6.10.12: Labelling General Instruments - Using Instrument
Pattern Labels and 6.10.13: Labelling General Instruments - Panel Reference Labels.

• Example General Instruments

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:104 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

• Example Flow Elements

• Example Control Valves

• Associated Project File Configuration Options

• The number of equipment label fields, 4 or 6, is specified in the Number of TAG fields
section of the Instruments - Settings Sub-Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project
Administration program.
• The boilerplate text to replace the defaults of Block, Function, Prefix, Tag, Number and
Suffix in the Instrument Balloon Properties dialog is specified in the Instrument Dialog
Labels section on the Instruments - Settings Sub-Category must be checked.
• The boilerplate text to replace the defaults of Prefix, Tag, Number and Suffix in the
Instrument Panel Reference dialog/list box is specified in the Instrument Panel Dialog
Labels section of the same pane.
• Inheritance between instrument label and sheet attribute fields, and whether or not
inherited values are displayed on P&IDs, is set up using the Instruments - Settings
Sub-Category.
• Inheritance between instrument loops and the instruments that belong to them is set up
on the Instruments - Settings Sub-Category.
• The project may be set to check that instrument labels in all P&IDs in the project are
unique using the Label Validation across P&IDs section of the Instrument - Settings
Sub-Category.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:105 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

• If the instrument prefix, loop and suffix are imported from the external database, the
Loop Numbers from VPE Workbench checkbox on the Instruments - Labels Sub-
Category.
• If instrument prefixes are required for the project, ensure that the Prefix Label Required
checkbox is checked.
• If labels are to be rotated when the symbol they are associated with is rotated, ensure
that the Rotate Labels with Symbol checkbox is checked.
• The block name of the instrument label balloon symbols is specified in the Label
Balloon Symbol field.
• The presence or absence of link lines is controlled by the Label Balloon Link-Lines Off
checkbox.
• Fields in the Instrument Label Positions section govern the positions of the different
elements that make up a label, relative to the insert point of the labelled instrument and
instrument panel reference symbols.
• The project may be set to require that a selected field or a combination of fields in
instrument labels be unique (in addition to the entire label being unique). The fields that
are checked for uniqueness are selected in the Unique Tags section of the Instrument -
Labels Sub-Category.
• Patterns are defined using the Instruments - Patterns Sub-Category.
• If the Substitute Master Instrument Tag checkbox on the Instruments - Patterns Sub-
Category is checked, if an instrument is made the master instrument for a pattern,
when synchronized and exported to P&ID Reports its tag label is replaced by the tag
label defined in the pattern assigned to it (it will remain unchanged on the drawing).
• Automatic tagging of instrument number fields (see 6.10.25: Automatic Tagging) is
switched on and formatted on the Instrument - Automatic Tag Format Sub-Category.
• Whether or not instrument valves can appear as the source and destination of pipes,
and the list of instrument valves types that are to behave in this manner, is set using the
Pipe Instrument Labelling checkbox and the Instruments Allowing Labelling fields on
the Pipes - Labels Sub-Category.
• The project design area may be appended automatically to the prefixes of instruments
that have not been placed on the drawing depending on the setting of the
USER_DAINST user-defined directive on the Miscellaneous - Settings Sub-Category.

• Inheriting Label Data from the Owning Pipe Label

Instrument label data may be inherited from the label of the owning pipe, as set-up on the
Instruments - Settings Sub-Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program.
For details of setting up the inheritance, see 8.6.31: Setting Symbols to Inherit Label Data
from a Manually Selected Pipe.
If an instrument has the inherited values in its label edited using the procedure below, this
will cancel the inheritance.
Inheritance can be switched on and off for an item using the Inheritance field (see below).

• Instructions
1. The procedure may operate automatically if auto-labelling for instruments is on. If this
is the case, the AVEVA P&ID Instrument Balloon Properties dialog displays
automatically when an instrument is placed on the drawing.
If auto-labelling is not on, or to edit an existing label, start the procedure by either:
• selecting the symbol to be labelled on The Drawing Page, then selecting
Properties from the shortcut menu, or

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:106 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

• selecting the symbol to be labelled in the Engineering Explorer, then selecting

Properties from the shortcut menu, or
• selecting the Properties option in Properties Group of the Home Tab.
Note: Labels can also be viewed using the Non-Modal Properties Dialog, but tags cannot
be directly entered into this dialog. Other details can be entered or changed however,
and the drawing labelled with them. See Labelling Using the Non-Modal Properties
Dialog.

2. If either for the first two methods of starting the procedure is followed, the AVEVA P&ID
Instrument Properties dialog for the symbol is then displayed.
If the other method is followed, the Command prompt will display:

Select Item to Label, or Label to Modify:

Pick the instrument or instrument valve balloon to be labelled.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:107 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

3. The AVEVA P&ID Instrument Properties dialog is then displayed (see 4.8: Properties
Dialogs):

Note: The number field may be completed automatically. See 6.10.25: Automatic Tagging.
Automatically entered number fields may be manually overwritten if required.

If a different balloon symbol is required, select it from the Balloon Symbol drop-down
list.
Select the instrument type from the Type drop-down list.
Enter a prefix and loop number.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:108 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

Select YES in the Inheritance field if the item is to subject to attribute inheritance from
the sheet or the owning pipe.
4. If a descriptor is required, enter its name in the Descriptor field.
5. If the instrument is to be a substitute, select the pattern reference from the Pattern
Reference list.
6. If the instrument is to be part of an instrument loop, select the loop number from the
Instrument Loop Number field. If the instrument is not to be part of an instrument loop,
leave this field set to the default "UNNAMED" setting.
An instrument can also be assigned to a loop by dragging and dropping it into a loop in
the Engineering Explorer.

Note: Loops are created using the Creating Instrument Loops procedure.

When an instrument is assigned to a loop, its Number field value is automatically

overwritten by that of the loop. This cannot be changed. The Number field is disabled.
In the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program, instruments can be set to inherit
other values from the instrument loop they belong to: Block, Function, Prefix and/or
Suffix. When an instrument is assigned to a loop, the values in fields that are inherited
from the loop are automatically overwritten by those of the loop and cannot be
changed.
7. If the instrument is a remote instrument, enter data for the four alarm labels (L, H, LL,
HH, etc).
Click on the OK button.
8. If the instrument is a remote instrument, a prompt is displayed for entry of four alarm
labels (L, H, LL, HH, etc). Enter the alarm data and click on the OK button.
9. If the instrument is panel mounted, enter details of Prefix, Type, Loop and Suffix for the
panel that the instrument or instrument valve is mounted on, and select the panel type.
Click on the OK button.
10. The Command prompt will display:

Position Descriptor Label:

Place the label near the instrument.

11. The Command prompt will display:

Select Item to Label, or Label to Modify:

Pick another instrument to continue labelling, or press or select Enter to end the
command.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:109 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

8.6.13 Labelling System I/O Connections, Interlocks and Logic Boxes

• Description
The procedure can be used to label I/O connections, interlocks and logic boxes.
These labels can be deleted individually, without affecting other labels.
For details of the use of this procedure in the context of drawing P&IDs, see 6.10.14:
Labelling System I/O Connections, Interlocks and Logic Boxes.

• Example

• Instructions
1. Start the procedure by either:
• selecting the symbol to be labelled on The Drawing Page, then selecting
Properties from the shortcut menu, or
• selecting the Properties option in Properties Group of the Home Tab.
Note: Labels can also be viewed using the Non-Modal Properties Dialog, but tags cannot
be directly entered into this dialog. Other details can be entered or changed however,
and the drawing labelled with them. See Labelling Using the Non-Modal Properties
Dialog.

2. If the first method of starting the procedure is followed, the AVEVA P&ID Instrument
Accessory Properties dialog for the symbol is then displayed.
If the other method is followed, the Command prompt will display:

Select Item to Label, or Label to Modify:

Pick the item.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:110 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

3. The AVEVA P&ID Instrument Accessory Properties dialog is then displayed (see 4.8:
Properties Dialogs):

Enter the label for the item.

Click on the OK button.
4. The Command prompt will display:

Position Label:

Place the label near or on the item.

5. The Command prompt will display:

Select Item to Label, or Label to Modify:

Pick another item to continue labelling, or press or select Enter to end the command.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:111 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

8.6.14 Labelling I/O Rockets

• Description
The procedure can be used to label an I/O rocket, or to associate a rocket with an
instrument.
For details of the use of this procedure in the context of drawing P&IDs, see 6.10.15:
Labelling I/O Rockets.

• Example

• Associated Project File Configuration Options

• If I/O rocket labels are to be placed on the Non-plot layer, ensure that the Labels on
Non-Plot Layer checkbox on the Instruments - Labels Sub-Category of the AVEVA
P&ID Project Administration program is checked.
• The X, Y offsets in the Offset from Symbol Origin fields control the automatic
positioning of the I/O Address, Card Type, Signal Type and Remarks components of
the labels.
• The four components of labels may be individually rotated as they are brought in from
VPE Workbench. Check the appropriate Rotate with Symbol checkboxes to activate
the rotation.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:112 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

• Instructions
1. Start the procedure by either:
• selecting the symbol to be labelled on The Drawing Page, then selecting
Properties from the shortcut menu, or
• selecting the Properties option in Properties Group of the Home Tab.
Note: Labels can also be viewed using the Non-Modal Properties Dialog, but tags cannot
be directly entered into this dialog. Other details can be entered or changed however,
and the drawing labelled with them. See Labelling Using the Non-Modal Properties
Dialog.

2. If the first method of starting the procedure is followed, the AVEVA P&ID Instrument
Properties dialog for the symbol is then displayed.
If the other method is followed, the Command prompt will display:

Select Item to Label, or Label to Modify:

Pick the I/O Rocket.

3. The Command prompt will display:

Select Instrument Item for Association, or <Enter> for Tag:

Either associate the rocket with an instrument (a) or enter a tag (b).
a. To associate the rocket with an instrument, pick the instrument and data point. The
instrument and rocket are now associated and the procedure is complete for the
rocket. (The association can be checked by using ASSHOW.)

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:113 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

b. To enter a tag, press or select Enter. The AVEVA P&ID Instrument Properties dialog
is then displayed (see 4.8: Properties Dialogs):

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:114 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

4. Select the instrument type from the Type drop-down list.

Enter a prefix and loop number.
Descriptors cannot be entered.
If the rocket is to be a substitute, enter the Pattern Reference field.

Note: Pattern labels are case sensitive.

5. If the instrument is panel mounted, enter details of Prefix, Type, Loop and Suffix for the
panel that the instrument is mounted on, and select the panel type
Click on the OK button.
6. The Command prompt will display:

Select Item to Label, or Label to Modify:

Pick another rocket to continue labelling, or press or select Enter to end the command.

8.6.15 Labelling Revision Triangles

• Description
The procedure can be used to label revision triangles.
For details of the use of this procedure in the context of drawing P&IDs, see 6.10.21:
Labelling Revision Triangles

• Example

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:115 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

• Errors
Error messages will be received if duplicate revision numbers are placed, or if the revision
number, the identity of the reviser or the description of the revision are not entered.

• Instructions
1. Start the procedure by either:
• selecting the symbol to be labelled on The Drawing Page, then selecting
Properties from the shortcut menu, or
• selecting the Properties option in Properties Group of the Home Tab.
Note: Labels can also be viewed using the Non-Modal Properties Dialog, but tags cannot
be directly entered into this dialog. Other details can be entered or changed however,
and the drawing labelled with them. See Labelling Using the Non-Modal Properties
Dialog.

2. If the first method of starting the procedure is followed, the AVEVA P&ID Revision
Properties dialog for the symbol is then displayed.
If the other method is followed, the Command prompt will display:

Select Item to Label, or Label to Modify:

Pick the revision triangle to be labelled.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:116 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

3. The AVEVA P&ID Revision Properties dialog is then displayed (see 4.8: Properties
Dialogs):

Enter details in the following fields:

• Project - Project number
• Number - Unique revision number or letter
• Revised - Initials of the person involved
• Line 1, Line 2 and Line 3 - information about the revision.
• Checked - Initials of the person responsible for checking the revision.
• Approved - Initials of the person responsible for approving the revision.
• Date - Date of final approval.
Click the OK button.
4. The Command prompt will display:

Position project code:

Place the project code in the appropriate position on the drawing.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:117 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

5. The Command prompt will display:

Position revision number:

Place the revision number in the appropriate position on the drawing. The revision
number is automatically placed inside the revision triangle.
6. The Command prompt will display:

Position revised code:

Place the initials of the person making the change in the appropriate position on the
drawing.
7. The Command prompt will display:

Position description line 1 (or 2) (or 3):

Place the particular line of the 'description and comment' in the appropriate position on
the drawing.
8. The Command prompt will display:

Position checked code:

Place the initials of the person checking the revision in the appropriate position on the
drawing.
9. The Command prompt will display:

Position approved code:

Place the initials of the person approving the revision in the appropriate position on the
drawing.
10. The Command prompt will display:

Position revision date:

Place the date of final approval in the appropriate position on the drawing.
11. The Command prompt will display:

Position revision number:

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:118 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

Place the revision number with the grid reference, if used.

12. The Command prompt will display:

Position grid reference:

Place the grid reference, if used.

13. The Command prompt will display:

Select Item to Label, or Label to Modify:

Select another revision triangle to label, or press or select Enter to end the command.

8.6.16 Creating Pipe Groups

• Description
This procedure is used to create pipe groups.
Once a pipe group has been created, pipes can be assigned to them.
For details of the use of this procedure in the context of drawing P&IDs, see 6.11.3:
Labelling Pipes.

• Associated Project Configuration Options

The pipe groups that may be created are specified in a DataSet which is defined using the
User Defined Attributes - DataSet Sub-Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration
program.

• Instructions
1. Start the procedure by right-clicking on the Pipes node or an existing pipe group node
in the Engineering Explorer.
2. From the menu that is then displayed, select the New Group option.
3. The AVEVA P&ID Group Properties dialog is then displayed (see 4.8: Properties
Dialogs).

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:119 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

4. In the Group Name field, select the required group name. The list is restricted to the
attribute names specified in the pipe group DataSet.
5. In the Value field, enter the user-defined attribute values associated with the group. A
default value may have been specified for the group in the DataSet definition. This may
be changed is required.
6. Click on the OK button. The new group is then created is displayed under the Pipes
node in the Engineering Explorer, beneath the list of pipes.
7. To assign a pipe to the new group drag and drop it from the list of pipes onto the group
node in the Engineering Explorer.
The Properties dialog of the pipe will then displays the group to which it is assigned.
For example:

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:120 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

Remove a pipe from a pipe group by dragging it from the pipe group node onto the
Pipes node, or onto another pipe group node.
8. To delete a pipe group, right-click on it and select Delete from the menu that is then
displayed. The group is then deleted. Pipes in the group are not deleted and are
returned to the list of pipes under the Pipes node.

8.6.17 Labelling Pipes

• Description
The procedure can be used to create and edit pipe labels. A pipe can have multiple labels.
Each segment of a pipe may be labelled, and pipe labels can be placed on either side of
reducers and breaks as required.
Note that pipes and identified as main, branch or trim pipes when they are inserted. The
procedure for labelling all types of pipe is the same
For details of the use of this procedure in the context of drawing P&IDs, see 6.11.3:
Labelling Pipes.

• Examples
Pipe with multiple labels:

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:121 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

Pipe with branch:

• Associated Project Configuration Options

• To set the last value entered in a Properties dialog field to automatically populate that
field that next time that Properties dialog is accessed for an unlabelled item of that item
type, use the checkboxes in the Values to Remember from Last Pipe Edit section of the
Pipes - Settings Sub-Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program.
• Inheritance between pipe label and sheet attribute fields is set up using the Pipes -
Settings Sub-Category.
• The project may be set to check that pipe labels in all P&IDs in the project are unique
using the Label Validation across P&IDs section of the Pipes - Settings Sub-Category.
• If required, the cascading to branches of changes to properties of the main pipe can be
disabled for specified properties using facilities in the Cascade Settings section of the
Pipes - Settings Sub-Category.
• The format of pipe labels, i.e., the components of the labels and the order in which they
are placed, are defined in the Pipe Label Format section of the Pipes - Labels Sub-
Category.
• The Fixed Pipe Label Format checkbox determines whether or not fixed (also known as
standard) labelling formatting is the default setting.
• The format in which pipe labels are displayed on a drawing, which may differ from the
actual format, is defined in the Display Label Format section of the Pipes - Labels Sub-
Category.
• The display format of source and destination labels where the source/destination is a
different pipe may be different from the normal display format. If required, this facility is
switched on an defined in the Source and Destination Formats section of the Pipes –
Labels Sub-Category.
• The delimiter is specified in the Delimiter field. If a delimiter is required after an area
code, ensure that the Delimiter After Area Field checkbox is checked. If a delimiter is
not required, the program needs to know how many characters are allowed for the
Area field. Enter this in the Number of Characters field.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:122 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

• The project may be set to require that a selected field or a combination of fields in
instrument labels be unique (in addition to the entire label being unique). The fields that
are checked for uniqueness are selected in the Unique Validation field of the
Instruments - Labels Sub-Category.
• Use the Trim Label Prefix field to specify the text prefix to the trim identifier in a trim
label.
• The names of the 3 project defined fields that may be part of pipe labels are
established in the Project Definable Fields section.
• If split labelling is required, use the Split After Field field in the Split Format section to
indicate which field in the pipe format to split on. The 'Y' Offset Above Line and 'Y'
Offset Below Line fields are used to specify the distance that the 2 parts of label are
placed above and below the line.
• Whether or not instrument valves can appear as the source and destination of pipes,
and the list of instrument valves types that are to behave in this manner, is set using the
Pipe Instrument Labelling checkbox and the Instruments Allowing Labelling fields in the
Display Instrument Labels at Pipe Destination section.
• Pipe labels in fixed label format may automatically have a symbol placed with them
when they are inserted. For example, they may be placed in a flag symbol or box. This
functionality is switched on and off, the required symbol selected, and the offset from
the label specified using the Pipe Label Symbol section.
• If split label formatting is to be used and a pipe label symbol is to be used, up to four
label fields may be positioned before the split in the selected label symbol, as defined
in the Define Split labels and offset for symbol section.
• The distance of single pipe labels from pipe segments may optionally be specified in
the Fix Single Pipe Label from owner segment section.
• If a user may specify which of a pipe's labels is the default label, which will be used to
identify it in the database, this facility is switched on in the Default Reporting Label
Format section. The colour used to highlight such labels on drawings is also set in this
section.
• Automatic tagging of pipe number fields (see 6.10.25: Automatic Tagging) is switched
on and formatted on the Equipment - Automatic Tag Format Sub-Category.
• Nozzle sizes may automatically be cascaded onto connected pipes, depending on the
setting of the Cascade Nozzle to Pipe checkbox on the Nozzles - Settings Sub-
Category .

• Instructions
• Labelling an Unlabelled Pipe
• Adding Extra Labels to a Labelled Pipe
• Setting a Pipe Label as the Default Pipe Label

- Labelling an Unlabelled Pipe

1. The procedure may operate automatically if auto-labelling for pipes is on. If this is the
case, pipes nodes are placed and the AVEVA P&ID Pipeline Properties dialog displays
automatically when the pipe is drawn (see below).
If auto-labelling is not on start the procedure by either:
• selecting the pipe to be labelled on The Drawing Page, then selecting Properties
from the shortcut menu, or
• selecting the pipe to be labelled in the Engineering Explorer, then selecting
Properties from the shortcut menu, or
• selecting the Properties option in Properties Group of the Home Tab.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:123 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

Note: Labels can also be viewed using the Non-Modal Properties Dialog, but tags cannot
be directly entered into this dialog. Other details can be entered or changed however,
and the drawing labelled with them. See Labelling Using the Non-Modal Properties
Dialog.

2. If either for the first two methods is followed, the pipe is already selected.
If the other method is followed, the Command prompt will display:

Select Item to Label, or Label to Modify:

Pick the pipe.

3. The AVEVA P&ID Pipe Properties dialog is then displayed (see 4.8: Properties
Dialogs):

Complete the entry fields with the required pipe label data.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:124 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

Select YES in the Inheritance field if the pipe is to subject to attribute inheritance from
the sheet.
Select YES in the Bi-Directional Flow field if the pipe is to be dual flow.
If the pipe is not dual flow, the flow direction can be reversed by selecting YES in the
Reverse Flow field. See also 8.5.12: Reversing Pipe and Signal Line Flows.

Note: The number field may be completed automatically. See 6.10.25: Automatic Tagging.
Automatically entered number fields may be manually overwritten if required.

Select the style of pipe, i.e. its appearance, in the Pipe Style field, or leave it set to the
default style. The default pipe style is set using facilities in the Pipeline Group of the
Home Tab.

Note: A Process Link pipe style is available. Pipes drawn using this method will look like
Process Links but will functionally be Pipes.

Note: Valve and reducer symbols may be restricted so that they can only be inserted into
pipes with specific spec codes and sizes. This is setup using the Spec Driven
Configuration Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program. When
the spec or size of a pipe is changed, the system checks whether or not the symbols
inserted into the pipe would still be valid for the new spec code or size of the pipe. If
any would not be valid, the change may be prevented, or a warning displayed,
depending on the project setup.

Note: Pipes may be added to a pipe group, created for reporting purposes. If a pipe has
been added to a group, details of the group are also displayed in the dialog. They
may not be edited. See 8.6.16: Creating Pipe Groups for further details.

4. If the pipe label is to be displayed on the drawing, select Yes in the Add Label field (this
is the default setting). If the label is not to be displayed select No. This field is not
displayed when editing a pipe that already has a label displayed
5. The Command prompt will then display:

Position pipe label:

Pick a point for the pipe label. If a symbol, such as a box, is set to be placed with the
label, it is inserted automatically at the same time as the label.
If the split pipe labelling is being used, splitting of the label occurs when the label is
placed on top of the pipe.
If the Fix pipe label position for single labels setting is in used, the pipe labels will
automatically be placed the specified distance from the owning segment, on the side of
the segment that the user clicks on.

- Adding Extra Labels to a Labelled Pipe

1. Use this procedure to add labels to a pipe that has already been labelled, e.g. to
unlabelled segments of such a pipe.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:125 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

Start the procedure by either:

• right-clicking on the label of the pipe and selecting the Add Label option from the
shortcut menu, or
• selecting the pipe to add a label to and selecting the Add Label option in Properties
Group of the Home Tab.
2. If the first method of starting the procedure is followed, the following menu is then
displayed:

If the segment is to be labelled with the entire label of the pipe, select the Full option. If
the segment is to be labelled with only a single property of the pipe, select that
properties, e.g. Size, from the menu.
Click on OK.
3. If the second method is selected, the following dialog is displayed:

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:126 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

If the segment is to be labelled with a full pipe label, in the default Display Label Format
specified in the project configuration, select the Full Label option from the top list.
If the segment is to be labelled with only a single property of the pipe, select the Single
Label option from the top list, and the property, e.g. Size, from the list below it.
If the segment is to be labelled with a different Display Label Format from the default,
select Custom Label from the top list, then select the required format from table
beneath the lists.
Click on the Add Label & Close button to add the label and finish the procedure. Click
on the Add Label button if further labels are to be added to the pipe using the dialog.
4. The Command prompt will then display:

Position pipe label:

Pick a point for the pipe label. The label is then placed.
If the Add Label & Close button was selected, the command then ends. If the Add
Label button was selected, the above dialog is displayed again. Add further labels as
described above.

- Setting a Pipe Label as the Default Pipe Label

A pipe may be labelled with labels in various formats. Depending on the project
configuration, one of these labels may be set as the default label, i.e. the label that will be
used to identify the pipe in the database.
To set a pipe label to be the default pipe label, right-click on the pipe label on the drawing
page, then select Set as Default Label from the shortcut menu.
Depending on the project configuration, the selected label may then be displayed in a
different colour.

8.6.18 Labelling and Connecting Pipe Flags

• Description
The procedure can be used to label Pipe Flags (i.e. off-sheet or page connectors) and to
establish connections between Pipe Flags. Pipe flag labels display the drawing that the
connection is to, and optionally the grid reference of the connection (another pipe flag) on
that drawing.
This topic also describes how to propagate changes made to the properties of pipes from
one drawing to another via connected pipe flags, and how to disconnect pipe flags.
For details of the use of this procedure in the context of drawing P&IDs, see 6.10.20:
Labelling Pipe Flags.

Note: Details of a connector can be viewed by hovering the cursor over the connector flag.
Details are displayed on the tooltip. The STATUS: property indicates whether or not
the connector is LINKED, in which the number of the connected drawing is also
displayed, or UNLINKED.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:127 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

If the symbol is displayed, this indicates that the connector is hyperlinked. Ctrl-
clicking on it, or selecting the Open Target Drawing option from the flag's right-click
menu, will open the drawing on which connected pipe flag is located.

• Associated Project File Configuration Options

• Whether or not warnings are to be displayed on drawings which are opened with
unconnected pipe flags on them is set on the Offsheet Connectors - Setting Sub-
Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program.
• Specify the display format and position of pipe flag labels in the Offsheet Connectors -
Labels Sub-Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program.
• Whether or not the user will be prompted to have changes to the properties of a pipe
propagated to other pipes connected to it via a pipe flag is controlled by the setting of
the USER_PROMPTTOPROPAGATE user-defined directive on the Miscellaneous –
Settings Sub-Category.

• Instructions
Pipe flags can be labelled, and connections to other pipe flags established using two
procedures:
• Labelling and Connecting using the Page Connector Properties dialog
• Labelling and Connecting using the P&ID Data Grid
Once pipes have been connected using pipe flags, changes made to the properties of pipes
can be propagated to the properties of a connected pipes on other drawings:
• Propagating Changes to Pipe Properties
To disconnect pipe flags, use the following procedure:
• Disconnecting Pipe Flags

- Labelling and Connecting using the Page Connector Properties dialog

1. Start the procedure by either:
• selecting the symbol to be labelled on The Drawing Page, then selecting
Properties from the shortcut menu, or
• selecting the Properties option in Properties Group of the Home Tab.
Note: Labels can also be viewed using the Non-Modal Properties Dialog, but tags cannot
be directly entered into this dialog. Other details can be entered or changed however,
and the drawing labelled with them. See Labelling Using the Non-Modal Properties
Dialog.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:128 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

2. If the first method of starting the procedure is followed, the AVEVA P&ID Pipe
Connector Properties dialog for the symbol is then displayed.
If the other method is followed, the Command prompt will display:

Select Item to Label, or Label to Modify:

Pick the pipe flag to be labelled, or a pipe flag label to be modified.

3. The AVEVA P&ID Page Connector Properties dialog is then displayed (see 4.8:
Properties Dialogs):

If connecting to a flag that has already been labelled, select the drawing number of the
project drawing that the connected pipe flag is on.
Note that the list of available drawings is restricted to those of unconnected flags that
match the properties and direction of the connection, i.e.:
• destination flags can only be connected to source flags, and vice versa, and
• the connected pipe flag must share the same pipe properties.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:129 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

Select the grid reference of the flag on that drawing. The list of available grid
references is restricted to those of unconnected flags that match the drawing number
and direction of the connection.
If connecting to a pipe flag that has not yet been drawn or labelled, enter a drawing
number and grid reference as required.
If the flag is to be hyperlinked, i.e. Ctrl-clicking on it will open the drawing on which
other end of the connector is located, select Yes from the Hyperlink field. Otherwise
select No.
As required, enter additional information to label the flag in the Text fields.
Click on the OK button.

Note: When connections between pipe flags are made using the Properties sheet, in order
for the link between two connected pipe flags to be established, the drawings that the
two ends of the connection are on must both be synchronised (see 8.8.6:
Synchronising Data with a VPE Workbench Database). This is not necessary when
connections are made using the P&ID Data Grid.

4. The Command prompt will then display:

Position Pipe Flag Label:

Place the label centrally inside the pipe flag.

5. If any additional label text was entered in the Text fields, the Command prompt will then
display the following for each of the fields that was entered:

Insertion point or select escape key:

Place each piece of text as required.

6. The Command prompt will display:

Select Item to Label, or Label to Modify:

Pick another pipe flag to continue labelling, or press or select Enter to end the
command.

- Labelling and Connecting using the P&ID Data Grid

1. Start the procedure by right-clicking on an unassigned connector under the Unassigned
Page Connectors node of the P&ID Data Grid, and select the Connect option from the
menu that is then displayed.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:130 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

The Off Page Reference dialog box is then displayed:

The Select Drawing Number field displays the current drawing number.
2. To connect to a new pipe on the current drawing, select the New Pipe option. To
connect to an existing pipe, select the Existing option.
3. If the connector symbol is to be hyperlinked, i.e. Ctrl-clicking on it will open the drawing
on which other end of the connector is located, check the Insert hyperlinks on
symbol(s) checkboxes.
4. Press the OK button.
5. If the New Pipe option is selected, the Drawing Pipes procedure (see 8.5.1: Drawing
Pipes) is automatically started. Draw and label the new pipe in the normal way. The
pipe connector flag will automatically be linked to the selected unassigned connector,
and labelled accordingly. The unassigned connector is removed from under the
Unassigned Page Connectors node.
6. If the Existing option is selected the Command prompt will display:

Select Object:

Select a connector on the drawing. The label is placed in the flag symbol and the
unassigned connector is removed from under the Unassigned Page Connectors node.
The selected connector must match the properties and direction of the connection, i.e.:
• destination flags can only be connected to source flags, and vice versa, and
• the connected pipe flag must share the same pipe properties.
If the selected connector does not meet these criteria, an error message is displayed,
informing the user of this.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:131 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

- Propagating Changes to Pipe Properties

If the USER_PROMPTTOPROPAGATE user-defined directive (see above) is set to Yes,
and changes are made to the properties of a pipe which is connected to other pipes via pipe
flags, the Command prompt will display:

Do you want to propagate the changes? [YES/NO]:

Enter “Y” at the prompt to propagate the changes to the connected pipes. The pipe
properties are then propagated to the other drawing(s), which are automatically opened.
If a connected drawing is already opened, or is unavailable for editing, an error message is
displayed and the propagation does not take place.
If “N” is entered at the above prompt, or if the USER_PROMPTTOPROPAGATE user-
defined directive is set to No, changes to properties can be propagated manually to a
connected pipe as follows:
1. Select the appropriate flag symbol on The Drawing Page, then select Propagate from
the shortcut menu.
2. The pipe properties are then propagated to the other drawing, which is automatically
opened.
If the connected drawing is already open, it will close and the re-open automatically,
and the propagation will then take place.
If the connected drawing is unavailable for editing, an error message is displayed and
the propagation does not take place.

- Disconnecting Pipe Flags

To disconnect a pipe flag select the flag symbol on The Drawing Page, then selecting
Disconnect from the shortcut menu.

Note: If the properties of a pipe with a connected pipe flag are changed, and those
changes are not propagated to the pipe flag on the other drawing, the pipe flags will
automatically be disconnected the next time the drawings are synchronised.

8.6.19 Labelling Reducers

• Description
The procedure can be used to label reducers.
For details of the use of this procedure in the context of drawing P&IDs, see 6.11.4:
Labelling Pipes with Reducers and Reducing Valves.

• Example

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:132 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

• Associated Project Configuration Options

• The orientation of reducer labels is specified using the Reducer Label Setting field on
the Pipes - Settings Sub-Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program.
• If an error balloon is to be placed when a reducer is not labelled, ensure that the
"Reducer Not Labelled' Error-Balloon Placement checkbox on the Label Types
Configuration Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program is checked.
• In order for reducers to automatically change orientation, so that the wide end is always
connected to the larger pipe size and the narrow end is always connected to the
smaller pipe size, the list of values for sizes used on the project (Metric Sizes or
Imperial Sizes) set up using the List of Values Configuration Category must be sorted
from smallest size to largest size.
• Whether or not reducers will be automatically rotated depends on the setting of the
USER_ROTATEREDUMANUALLY user-defined directive on the Miscellaneous –
Settings Sub-Category. If set to YES, reducers will not rotate automatically. If set to
NO, or if the directive does not exist, reducers will rotate automatically.

• Instructions
• Labelling a Reducer
• Modifying a Reducer Label

- Labelling a Reducer
1. Start the procedure by either:
• selecting the reducer on The Drawing Page, then selecting Properties from the
shortcut menu, or
• selecting the Properties option in Properties Group of the Home Tab.
Note: Labels can also be viewed using the Non-Modal Properties Dialog, but tags cannot
be directly entered into this dialog. Other details can be entered or changed however,
and the drawing labelled with them. See Labelling Using the Non-Modal Properties
Dialog.

2. If the first method of starting the procedure is followed, the reducer is already selected.
If the other method is followed, the Command prompt will display:

Select Item to Label, or Label to Modify:

Pick the reducer symbol to be labelled.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:133 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

3. The AVEVA P&ID Reducer Properties dialog is the displayed.

Both the Upstream Size and Downstream Size fields will pre-populated with the current
size of the pipe segment into which the reducer was inserted.
Note that when upstream and downstream size values are the same, or are not valid
for the pipe specification, the sizes and the tag preview are displayed in red text.
Change the upstream and/or downstream size to the required value(s). The lists of
values for the sizes indicate which sizes are valid for the pipe specification. Invalid
sizes, including those that would not form a valid combination with the other size, are
displayed in red.
4. If the reducer label is to be displayed on the drawing, select Yes in the Add Label field
(this is the default setting). If the label is not to be displayed select No. This field is not
displayed when editing a reducer that already has a label displayed
Press OK.
5. The Command prompt will then display:

Position Reducer Label:

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:134 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

Place the label. Pipe and reducer labels upstream and downstream of the reducer
location will have their sizes automatically modified to reflect the sizes of the new
reducer. If this results in another reducer having the same upstream and downstream
sizes, an error message is displayed on the drawing, e.g.:

Note that the orientation of the label i.e. which diameter is listed first, is controlled by a
project configuration setting (see above).
The orientation of a reducer symbol will change automatically so that the wide end is
connected to the larger pipe size and the narrow end is connected to the smaller pipe
size
6. If the end of the pipe is connected to the start of another pipe, the user is prompted to
cascade the size change onto the connected pipe.
If the user chooses to do this, the process continues along the connected pipe
changing sizes and warning users to change duplicate values as required.

- Modifying a Reducer Label

A reducer label can be modified by changing the size of the pipe label upstream. The
upstream part of the next reducer label will automatically change to reflect this. Reducer
labels may also be modified directly, as described below.
1. Start the procedure by either:
• selecting the reducer label on The Drawing Page, then selecting Properties from
the shortcut menu, or
• selecting the Properties option in Properties Group of the Home Tab.
Note: Labels can also be viewed using the Non-Modal Properties Dialog, but tags cannot
be directly entered into this dialog. Other details can be entered or changed however,
and the drawing labelled with them. See Labelling Using the Non-Modal Properties
Dialog.

2. If the first method of starting the procedure is followed, the AVEVA P&ID Reducer
Properties dialog for the symbol is then displayed.
If the other method is followed, the Command prompt will display:

Select Item to Label, or Label to Modify:

Pick the reducer label to be modified.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:135 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

3. The AVEVA P&ID Reducer Properties dialog is displayed.

Select the required upstream and downstream sizes from the drop down lists and click
OK.
The labels will change to show the new values.
Pipe and reducer labels upstream and downstream of the reducer location will have
their sizes automatically modified to reflect the sizes of the new reducer. If this results
in another reducer having the same upstream and downstream sizes, an error
message is displayed on the drawing (see example above).
The orientation of a reducer symbol will change automatically so that the wide end is
connected to the larger pipe size and the narrow end is connected to the smaller pipe
size.
4. If the end of the pipe is connected to the start of another pipe, the user is prompted to
cascade the size change onto the connected pipe.
If the user chooses to do this, the process continues along the connected pipe
changing sizes and warning users to change duplicate values as required.

Note: If a reducer is deleted, the pipe segment that the reducer was inserted into adopts
the size of the segment that was upstream of the deleted reducer.

8.6.20 Labelling Breaks and Inline Breaks

• Description
The procedure can be used to label breaks (at the ends of pipes) and inline (spec) breaks
(within a pipe run). The procedure labelling both types of break is the same.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:136 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

When a break symbol is created, it may be configured so that it is automatically labelled with
pipe properties when a instance of it is inserted (see 4.4: Symbol Editor). For break symbols
not configured in this way, labels must be placed “manually” by the user.
For details of the use of this procedure in the context of drawing P&IDs, see 6.11.5:
Labelling Pipes with Breaks and Inline Breaks.

• Example

• Instructions
• Labelling Breaks
• Editing Breaks

- Labelling Breaks
Break symbols may be configured so that they are automatically labelled with pipe
properties on insertion (see 4.4: Symbol Editor).
For break symbols not configured in this way, labels must be placed “manually” by the user,
as described below.
1. Start the procedure by either:
• selecting the break label (not the symbol) on The Drawing Page, then selecting
Properties from the shortcut menu, or
• selecting the Properties option in Properties Group of the Home Tab
Note: Labels can also be viewed using the Non-Modal Properties Dialog, but tags cannot
be directly entered into this dialog. Other details can be entered or changed however,
and the drawing labelled with them. See Labelling Using the Non-Modal Properties
Dialog.

2. If the first method of starting the procedure is followed, the AVEVA P&ID Spec
Properties dialog for the symbol is then displayed (see below).
If the other method is followed, the Command prompt will display:

Select Item to Label, or Label to Modify:

Pick the break symbol (not the label) to be modified.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:137 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

3. The AVEVA P&ID Specification Break Properties dialog (see 4.8: Properties Dialogs) is
displayed.

4. The dialog will display the current properties of the pipe into which the break has been
inserted. Change the upstream and/or downstream values as required. Press OK.
5. The Command Prompt will then display:

Position upstream label for Break:

Position the upstream value of the inline break, i.e. the upstream specification value.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:138 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

6. The Command Prompt will then display:

Position downstream label for Break:

Position the downstream value of the inline break.

7. If the inline break is a break of more than one property, the user will first be prompted to
place the upstream and downstream values of each of the properties that change at the
break point.
The user will not be prompted to place labels for properties with the same upstream
and downstream values.
The command then ends automatically.

- Editing Breaks
Break labels may be edited by editing the pipe labels on either side on the break. The
appropriate break labels are then updated automatically. For example, updating the
upstream pipe label will cause the upstream break label to be updated accordingly.
If a break is positioned between a pipe and an equipment nozzle, editing the trim label of
that equipment will result in the break label being updated on the equipment side of the
break.
Breaks can also be edited using the AVEVA P&ID Specification Break Properties dialog.
See Labelling Breaks for how to access and use this dialog.

8.6.21 Adding Pipe Destination Text

• Description
This procedure can be used for creating and positioning Pipe Destination text at the start or
end of pipes. The pipe must already be labelled before pipe destination text can be added.
The procedure is also use for editing existing pipe destination text.

Note: If a pipe node is labelled, when P&ID data is exported, the pipe node will be counted
as the source/destination of the pipe, rather than any item that it might be connected
to, unless that connected item is a pipe flag.

For details of the use of this procedure in the context of drawing P&IDs, see 6.11.6: Adding
Pipe Destination Text.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:139 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

• Example

• Errors
An error message is initiated by overlaying pipes or arrows at an insertion point.

• Instructions
1. Start the procedure by either:
• selecting the pipe node to be labelled on The Drawing Page, then selecting
Properties from the shortcut menu, or
• selecting the Properties option in Properties Group of the Home Tab.
Note: Labels can also be viewed using the Non-Modal Properties Dialog, but tags cannot
be directly entered into this dialog. Other details can be entered or changed however,
and the drawing labelled with them. See Labelling Using the Non-Modal Properties
Dialog.

2. If the first method of starting the procedure is followed, the AVEVA P&ID Pipe
Destination Text Properties dialog is then displayed (see below).
If the other method is followed, the Command prompt will display:

Select Item to Label, or Label to Modify:

For new text, pick the end or start node of the pipe. When editing existing text, pick the
text.

Note: When attempting to place a pipe flag and pipe destination text at a node, move the
node from the end of the pipe, place the destination text, and then carefully move the
mode back into place. This action prevents display of an error message caused by
overlaying pipes or arrows at an insertion point.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:140 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

3. The AVEVA P&ID Pipe Destination Text Properties dialog is displayed (see 4.8:
Properties Dialogs):

Enter or edit the three lines of text, and click on the OK button.

Note: If VPE Workbench is being used, restrict the text to 32 characters, including a return
at the end of each line.

4. The Command prompt will display:

Position first line of text:

Place the first line of text. If lines 2 or 3 are completed, they are automatically placed
relative to the first line.
5. The Command prompt will display:

Select Item to Label, or Label to Modify:

Pick another node for to label with destination text, or select Cancel or press Ctrl-C to
end the command.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:141 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

8.6.22 Labelling with Data from the P&ID Data Grid

• Description
This procedure is used to label the drawing with the properties of items displayed in the
P&ID Data Grid. AVEVA P&ID, AVEVA P&ID Reports, AVEVA Instrumentation, AVEVA
Electrical, AVEVA PDMS Schematic and AVEVA Engineering data may be used.
Labels can be added by dragging and dropping from the grid, or by using the Insert Property
menu option.
Labels added from the P&ID Data Grid may be refreshed by the data currently displayed in
the grid, i.e. if either the label has been edited or the data in the grid has changed. See
8.6.23: Refreshing P&ID Data Grid Labels.
Labels added from the P&ID Data Grid may be edited as Non-AVEVA P&ID text. See 8.6.24:
Editing Non-AVEVA P&ID Text.
A facility is also provided to label items on a drawing that are not fully labelled by linking
unassigned items listed in the grid to them. This will result in the unassigned items
becoming assigned, and their properties labelling the selected symbols or pipes on the
drawing.
For details of the use of this command in the context of drawing P&IDs, see 6.10: Labelling
Symbols, 6.11: Labelling Pipes and 6.6: Inserting Unassigned P&ID Database Items.

• Instructions
• Labelling with P&ID Data Grid Data by Dragging and Dropping
• Labelling with P&ID Data Grid Data by using the Insert Property menu option
• Linking Unassigned P&ID Data Grid Items with Unlabelled Drawing Items

- Labelling with P&ID Data Grid Data by Dragging and Dropping

1. Start the procedure by selecting the cell containing the data that is to be used to label
the drawing in the P&ID Data Grid.
2. Drag the data from the grid onto the drawing. The Command prompt will then display:

Pick insertion point

Pick the required point on the drawing. The data will then be added to the drawing.

- Labelling with P&ID Data Grid Data by using the Insert Property menu option
Start the procedure by selecting the grid table from which data is to be inserted
Right-click on the grid and select Insert Property from the menu that is then displayed.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:142 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

The Select designators to insert on drawing dialog is then displayed.

This displays a list of data designators that may be placed on the drawing, relevant to
type of item in the selected grid. Use the + boxes to expand the entries on the list to
display the values associated with the designators.
If the positions of designators relative to the insertion point and each other is to be
fixed, check the Fix position of designators checkbox and enter the relative position in
the X Offset and Y Offset fields.
The value in the X Offset field controls the horizontal distance between each designator
and its value. The value in the Y-Offset field controls the vertical distance between each
line of designators and values when multiple designators are selected for insertion.
By default, the Properties dialog only displays those designators that have values
defined against them. In order to have the Properties dialog display all designators,
check the Display All Designators checkbox. Designators without values display a
placeholder in the value column, for example:
<INS Altitude value>
Where “INS” indicates the relevant entity type (in this example instrument) and
“Altitude” is the designator name.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:143 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

3. Select data to place on the drawing by checking the checkboxes adjacent to the
designators and values or value placeholders. It is possible to add a value or value
placeholder to a drawing without the associated designator, but a designator may not
be placed without the associated value or value placeholder.
4. As required, select further items to label and repeat the process.
Click OK.
5. The Command prompt will then display:

Pick insertion point:

Pick the required point on the drawing for the first item of data that was selected in the
dialog. The first designator will then be added to the drawing. Repeat for all selected
designators and their values.
If the Fix position of designators checkbox was checked, all designators and values are
added in one go, their positions determined by the values in the X Offset and Y Offset
fields.

- Linking Unassigned P&ID Data Grid Items with Unlabelled Drawing Items
The Unassigned node under the AVEVA P&ID Database node of the P&ID Data Grid lists
items, either created in P&ID Reports or imported from AVEVA Engineering, that have not
been added to a project drawing. Such items may be assigned by linking them to items on a
drawing that are not fully labelled.
Unassigned instruments, equipment, pipes, nozzles and valves can be assigned using this
procedure (not currently inline items).
The following items on a drawing can be labelled using this procedure:
• Instruments and equipment with one or more of the 4 or 6 tag fields blank.
• Pipes with one or more Pipe Label Format fields blank.
• Nozzles with either one or both of the Tag and Size fields blank.
• Valves with either one or both of the Tag and Code fields blank.
Blank fields in this case include those populated by the project null character.
Procedure:
1. Start the procedure by opening the P&ID Data Grid and accessing the Unassigned
node under the AVEVA P&ID Database node.
2. The nodes list all unassigned items by type. Select the required item so that its details
are displayed in the right-hand window of the grid interface.
3. Right-click on the record in the right-hand window and select Link from the menu that
is then displayed:

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:144 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

4. The Command prompt will then display (for example):

Select Unassigned Equipment:

Select the item on the drawing to link the unassigned item to.
The item must be of the right type (e.g. equipment, a pipe etc), and meet the criteria
given above. An error message is displayed if an invalid item is selected.
5. If a valid item is selected, its properties will be completed with that of the unassigned
item. Any existing properties are overwritten.
The unassigned item becomes assigned and is moved from under the Unassigned
node to under the Assigned node in the P&ID Data Grid.

8.6.23 Refreshing P&ID Data Grid Labels

• Description
Labels added from the P&ID Data Grid may be refreshed by the data currently displayed in
the grid, i.e. if either the label has been edited or the data in the grid has changed.
Labels added from the P&ID Data Grid may be edited as Non-AVEVA P&ID text. See 8.6.24:
Editing Non-AVEVA P&ID Text.
For details of the use of this command in the context of drawing P&IDs, see 6.10: Labelling
Symbols and 6.11: Labelling Pipes.

• Instructions
Complete the procedure by either:

• clicking the button in the P&ID Data Grid, or

• selecting the Refresh Grid option in P&ID Reports Group of the Data Management
Tab.

8.6.24 Editing Non-AVEVA P&ID Text

• Description
Non-AVEVA P&ID text, i.e. text that was inserted using AutoCAD commands or labels
inserted from the P&ID Data Grid, may be edited.

• Instructions
1. Start the procedure by either:
• selecting the text to be edited on The Drawing Page, then selecting Properties
from the shortcut menu, or
• selecting the Properties option in Properties Group of the Home Tab

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:145 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

2. If the first method of starting the procedure is followed, the editor dialog for the text is
then displayed.

Edit the text and click on the OK button.

3. If the other method is followed, the Command prompt will display:

Select Item to Label, or Label to Modify:

4. Pick the appropriate text

A warning is given:

WARNING: 15 Editing Non-AVEVA P&ID Entity

5. The editor dialog box appears, with the selected text displayed.
Edit the text and click on the OK button.
6. Pick another piece of AutoCAD text to edit, or press Enter to end the command.

8.6.25 Labelling Typical Items

• Description
The AVEVA P&ID Typical Items feature enables one item to be identified as having data that
is typical of many items. The details of the items represented by the typical item are added
to the label of the item on the P&ID, but do not appear on the P&ID. The following items can
be made typical of many:
• Pipes
• Off-Sheet Connectors (Pipe Flags)
• Instruments
• Equipment
• SPP Items
• Valve Items
• Nozzles.
For further details, see 6.15: Typical Items.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:146 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

• Associated Project Configuration Options

• The Typical Item feature can be turned on or off by the Typical Labelling checkbox on
the Miscellaneous - Labels Sub-Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration
program.
• The colours of typical items and labels are also specified on this tab.
• The USER_REPLACEPROCESSOWNERFORIPCX user-defined directive on the
Miscellaneous – Settings Sub-Category controls how pattern instruments are assigned
owners. If set to Yes, pattern instruments will be assigned the same owner as the
master instrument of the pattern, i.e. the owning pipe. If set to No, pattern instruments
will be assigned the master instrument as their owner.
• The fields available when labelling typical pipes is set on the Pipes - Labels Sub-
Category.

• Instructions
1. Label the item that is to be made typical in the normal way.
2. For each item that can be made into a Typical Item, the shortcut menu includes a
Typicals option. This option is available if the Typical Item facility is enabled at project
level, and if the item has been labelled with the minimum mandatory data for the item
type. The option accesses a dialog box for the entry, deletion and modification of the
typical data. For example:

Existing typical labels are displayed in order number sequence.

3. To create a typical label, click where it says Click here to add new typical.... The new
label is placed at the bottom of the list of existing typical labels, if there are any.
4. Enter the required details in the fields provided.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:147 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

5. Validated fields are automatically completed with the value entered in the previous row.
Amend as required.
6. The Order field is complete automatically with the position of the label in the list of
typical labels. Order numbers are assigned in ascending order.
To change the position of a typical label in the order, select it, and move it up or down
the order using the Up and Dn buttons.
7. To delete a label, select it and press the Delete key.
8. Press the OK button to accept the typical data. Alternatively, press the Cancel button
to close the dialog box, losing all the currently entered data.

• Points to Note
• For instruments, SPP Items, Valves and Off-Sheet Connectors the number of typical
data records must match the number of typical pipes. An inconsistency in the number
of typical data records is considered an error, and no typical data is output for the pipe
in question.
• Typical data must be unique on a drawing.
• The uniqueness of Typical SPP Items is checked, provided that the Labels to be
Unique checkbox on the Miscellaneous - Labels Sub-Category of the AVEVA P&ID
Project Administration program is checked.
• Branches of Typical pipes will automatically become Typical, with the same Typical
data set as their owner pipe.
• If a Typical pipe is connected to the nozzle of an Equipment item then both the Nozzle
and the Equipment must also be Typical.
• If a Typical pipe has an Off-Sheet Connection flag on either or both ends, the
connection label must also be Typical.
• If a Typical pipe has Valves, inline or process connected Instruments then these must
also be Typical.
• Inconsistencies in the number of Typical data records for the pipe and the number of
associated Typical items and any associated drawings are considered as errors, and
no Typical data is output for that pipe.
• If a pipe label of a Typical pipe is set as the "main pipe label" (see 8.6.27: Setting a
Pipe Label as the Main Label), all of the items that it represents also have that label set
to be the main label.

8.6.26 Replacing Tags with Tags in the Automatic Tag Format

• Description
If the automatic tagging facility is in use, the Valve Tag field and the number fields of Pipes,
Instruments and Equipment on the Properties Dialogs are automatically completed when an
item is labelled.
Existing items that were not automatically tagged may be re-tagged with tags in the
automatic tag format using this procedure.
Note that items that were automatically labelled and then manually changed are not re-
labelled by this procedure by default.
For details of the use of this procedure in the context of drawing P&IDs, see 6.10.25:
Automatic Tagging.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:148 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

• Associated Project File Configuration Options

• Automatic tagging is switched on, and the format of automatic valve tags defined using
the Pipes - Automatic Tag Format Sub-Category, Instruments - Automatic Tag Format
Sub-Category, Equipment - Automatic Tag Format Sub-Category, Valves - Automatic
Tag Format Sub-Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program.

• Instructions
1. Start the procedure by selecting as appropriate the Assign Tags Pipes, Assign Tags
Instruments, Assign Tags Equipment or Assign Tags Valves option in Symbol
Group of the Home Tab.
2. For pipes, instruments and equipment, the Command Prompt will then display (for
example):

Specify which Pipe tags should be reassign Unset Or All:

Select Unassign if only unassigned tags or tag components are to be replaced. Select
All if all tags or tag components are to be replaced.
3. For valves the Command Prompt will then display:

Specify which valve tags should be reassign Unset, Manual, Auto

Or All:

Select Unassign if only unassigned tags or tag components are to be replaced.

Select Manual if only valve tags with the manual tag flag set are to be replaced.
Select Auto if only valve tags with the manual tag flag NOT set are to be replaced.
Select All if all tags or tag components are to be replaced.
For the type of item in question, tags or tag components (i.e. number fields) are then
replaced with automatically generated tags in accordance with the selected option. Tag
labels on the drawing are changed automatically changed to reflect this.

Note: Items that were automatically labelled and then manually changed are not re-labelled
by this procedure.

8.6.27 Setting a Pipe Label as the Main Label

• Description
This procedure is used, in the case of pipes that have multiple labels, to set one of these
labels as the "main pipe label". By default, the properties of the pipe at the start node are
presented as the "main" properties of the pipe on export. This option sets the label of
another part of the pipe, which may be more representative of the properties of the pipe as a
whole, to be the "main" properties.
The main pipe label is displayed in a different colour on the P&ID, and the part of the pipe
that has been labelled as the "main" pipe label is displayed at the top of the hierarchy of a
pipe and its branches in the Engineering Explorer. If no main pipe label has been set, the
pipe start node properties assume this position by default.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:149 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

If a pipe label of a typical pipe is set as the main label, all of the items that it represents also
have that label set to be the main label.
For details of the use of this procedure in the context of drawing P&IDs, see 6.11: Labelling
Pipes.

• Example
No pipe label set as "main":

The pipe node properties are regarded as main properties of the pipe, as shown in the
Engineering Explorer:

A label has now been set as the main label. It is displayed in a different colour from the other
pipe labels:

The properties of the main pipe label are now regarded as main properties of the pipe:

• Associated Project Configuration Options

The colour of main pipe labels is set using the Main Pipe Label field on the Pipes - Labels
Sub-Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:150 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

• Instructions
Complete the procedure by selecting the pipe label on The Drawing Page, then selecting
Set As Main from the shortcut menu.

To reset the properties of the pipe node to be main properties of the pipe, select the pipe
node and then select Set As Main from the shortcut menu.

8.6.28 Changing the Association of a Pipe Label

• Description
This procedure is used to change the pipe with which a pipe label is associated, i.e. so that
it displays the properties of a different pipe.
For details of the use of this procedure in the context of drawing P&IDs, see 6.11: Labelling
Pipes.

• Instructions
1. Start the procedure by selecting the pipe label on the drawing page, then selecting
Associate from the shortcut menu.
2. The Command Prompt will then display:

Select the pipe segment to associate the label:

Select the pipe with which the label is to be associated.

3. The association of the pipe label then changes. The label will now display the
properties of the selected pipe instead of the properties of the pipe it was previously
associated with.
The pipe label should then be moved manually so that it is correctly positioned near the
selected pipe.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:151 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

8.6.29 Adding Notes to Items

• Description
This procedure is used to add notes to items that are displayed alongside them on the
drawing.
A maximum of 132 characters can be used, which automatically adopt the colour of the item
to which the note relates. They are included in the output files when an export is carried out.
Notes cannot be added to clouds, as clouds are not part of the data output. Notes are edited
by using the labelling procedure (see 8.6.1: Labelling - General Information), but notes
should not be confused with labels.
For details of the use of this procedure in the context of drawing P&IDs, see 6.17: General
Editing, Notes and Revision Clouds.

• Example

• Instructions
1. Start the procedure by selecting the Note option in Symbol Group of the Home Tab.
2. The Command prompt will display:

Indicate Item for note:

Select the item to attach the note to. The chosen item is highlighted.
3. The Command prompt will then display:

Position Note:

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:152 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

Enter the note text, either at the Command prompt or at the cursor on the drawing.
Press Enter. The note is positioned.
4. The Command prompt will then display:

Indicate Item for Note:

Pick another item or press Ctrl-C or select Cancel to end the command.

8.6.30 Globally Editing Labels

• Description
This procedure is used to globally edit of the labels of all items other than pipes.
Take care while carrying out this procedure as it is possible to change many labels with a
single use.
The following label fields can be edited using this procedure:
Instruments, Equipment and Line Fittings:
Prefix, Suffix, Type, Loop/Number
Valves:
Tag, Closure, Code, SPP Prefix, Suffix, Type and Number
Nozzles:
Number and Size
Off-Sheet Pipe Connectors:
Item Label
For details of the use of this procedure in the context of drawing P&IDs, see 6.11: Labelling
Pipes.

• Instructions
1. Start the procedure by either
• entering Ctrl+F on the keyboard, or
• selecting the Find and Replace option in Modify Group of the Home Tab.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:153 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

2. The Find And Replace dialog will be displayed:

3. Enter the label field text to find in the Find What in Labels field.
4. Enter the text to replace it with in the Replace With field.
5. Check the Find whole words only and/or Match case checkboxes as required.
6. To restrict the Find and Replace to a category of item instead of all items, select the
required category from the Item Type Filter list:

The number of items in the drawing to be searched is then displayed to the right of the
list.
7. Select the Find button.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:154 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

Details of the first item label with fields that include text that match the search criteria
are then displayed. If there are no such items, a message is displayed to inform the
user of this.

Note: This facility searches only within label fields for matches. It does not search across
fields within labels; therefore a match that consists of parts of different fields within a
label will not be found.

The drawing will focus on and zoom in closer to the item in question.
The dialog displays the current label values, and what these values will be changed to
if replaced by the text entered in the Replace with field.
8. To search for the next item that meets to search criteria without changing the current
item label, select the Find Next button.
9. Select the Replace button to carry out the replacement for the current item only. Then
select the Find Next button to search for the next item that meets the search criteria
and repeat the procedure.
10. Select the Replace All button to carry out the replacement for all items that meet the
search criteria.
11. Select the Close button to close the dialog.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:155 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

12. Changes to labels are validated. If it is detected that a change to a label would be
invalid, e.g. if it would result in duplicate labels, or labels with invalid values, an error
message is displayed, and the replacement does not take place.

8.6.31 Setting Symbols to Inherit Label Data from a Manually Selected Pipe

• Description
This procedure is used to set an instrument, inline equipment item, valve or line fitting to
inherit label data from a selected pipe.
For details of the use of this procedure in the context of drawing P&IDs, see 6.10.4: Label
Inheritance from Owning Pipes.

• Associated Project Configuration Options

Pipe label data inheritance is configured on the Instruments - Settings Sub-Category,
Equipment - Settings Sub-Category, Valves - Settings Sub-Category and Line Fittings
Configuration Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program.

• Instructions
1. Start the procedure by selecting the Inherit Owner Pipe Data option in Symbol Group
of the Home Tab.
2. The Command prompt will display:

Select Item:

Select the item (instrument, inline equipment item, valve or line fitting).

Note: Only one item may be selected at a time, in order to reduce the chance of the wrong
owning pipe being assigned to multiple items.

3. The Command prompt will then display:

Indicate Owner Pipe Label:

Select the label of the pipe that the item is to inherit label data from. This pipe is
subsequently identified as the owner of the selected item.
4. The command ends automatically.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:156 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

8.6.32 Switching off Label Data Inheritance from Pipes

• Description
This procedure is used to turn off the inheritance of pipe label data for valves and
instruments.
For details of the use of this procedure in the context of drawing P&IDs, see 6.10.4: Label
Inheritance from Owning Pipes.

• Associated Project Configuration Options

Pipe label data inheritance is configured on the Instruments - Settings Sub-Category,
Equipment - Settings Sub-Category, Valves - Settings Sub-Category and Line Fittings
Configuration Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program.

• Instructions
1. Start the procedure by selecting the Remove Inherit Data option in Symbol Group of
the Home Tab.
2. Select the items you wish to remove the inheritance from and press Enter.

8.6.33 Labelling Items with UDAs

• Description
This procedure is used to label items on a drawing with their User-Defined Attribute (UDA)
values, including DataSet UDAs.
UDA values are entered on the Properties dialogs of items which have UDAs defined for
them. When UDA values in Properties dialogs (see 4.8: Properties Dialogs) are changed,
UDA labels on the drawing are automatically changed to reflect this.
For details of the use of this procedure in the context of drawing P&IDs, see 6.12: Adding
User-Defined Attributes.

• Associated Project File Configuration Options

User Defined Attributes are set up using the User Defined Attributes - UDA List of Values
Sub-Category and the User Defined Attributes - DataSet Sub-Category of the AVEVA P&ID
Project Administration program.

• Instructions
1. Start the procedure by selecting the Insert UDAs option in Symbol Group of the Home
Tab.
2. The Command prompt will display:

Select objects:

Select the objects to which UDAs labels are to be added.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:157 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

3. The User Defined Data dialog is then displayed:

This displays a list of UDA label designators and values for the selected item.
If the positions of label designators relative to the insertion point and each other is to be
fixed, check the Fix position of designators checkbox and enter the relative position
in the X Offset and Y Offset fields.
The value in the X Offset field controls the horizontal distance between each label
designator and its value. The value in the Y-Offset field controls the vertical distance
between each line of label designators and values when multiple labels are selected for
insertion.
4. Select data to label the item with by checking the checkboxes adjacent to the label
designators and values. It is possible to add a value to a drawing without the
associated label designator, but a label designator may not be placed without the
associated value.
Click OK.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:158 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

5. The Command prompt will then display:

Pick insertion point:

Pick the required point on the drawing for the first UDA label that was selected in the
dialog. The first label designator will then be added to the drawing. Repeat for all
selected label designators and their values.
If the Fix position of designators checkbox was checked, all label designators and
values are added in one go, their positions determined by the values in the X Offset
and Y Offset fields.

8.6.34 Removing UDAs from Symbols

• Description
User-Defined Attributes (UDAs) can be defined for symbol types using the Symbol Editor.
This procedure is used to remove all such User-Defined Attributes from selected symbols
on a drawing.
DataSet UDAs are not removed by this procedure.
For details of the use of this procedure in the context of drawing P&IDs, see 6.12: Adding
User-Defined Attributes.

• Instructions
1. Start the procedure by entering REMOVEUDAS at the command prompt.
2. The Command prompt will display:

Select objects:

Select the objects from which UDAs are to be removed.

If all UDAs are to be removed from all objects, enter "all" at the command prompt.
3. Press Enter. UDAs are then removed from all the objects on the drawing that have the
same symbols as the selected objects. For example, if a Ball Valve symbol is selected,
UDAs are removed from all objects on the drawing that are represented with that
symbol.
A message is displayed indicating the number of UDAs removed.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:159 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

4. The Command prompt will then display:

Select objects:

Select more objects to remove UDAs from, or select Cancel from the drawing page
menu or press Ctrl-C to end the command.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:160 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

8.7 Modifying Drawings

8.7.1 Copying Drawing Objects and Labels

• Description
This procedure is used to copy items and, optionally, associated labels.

Note: Nozzles copied from one vessel to another are automatically associated with the new
vessel.

For details of the use of this procedure in the context of drawing P&IDs, see 6.17: General
Editing, Notes and Revision Clouds.

Note: Valves and reducer symbols may be restricted so that they can only be inserted into
pipes with specific codes and sizes. These are specified using the Spec Driven
Configuration Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program. When a
symbol is moved onto a pipe, the system checks that it is valid for the code and size
of the pipe. If it is not, the move may be prevented, or a warning displayed,
depending on the project setup.

• Instructions
Before copying and pasting, a user should be familiar with Notes on Copying and Pasting.
1. Start the procedure by either:
• selecting the object(s) and/or label(s) to be copied on The Drawing Page, then:
• selecting Copy from the shortcut menu, or
• entering VPECOPYCLIP at the Command prompt
Continue at step 2.
or:
• selecting the Copy option in Modify Group of the Home Tab, or
• entering VPECOPYPASTE at the Command prompt.
Continue at step 4.
or:
• selecting the object to be copied in the Engineering Explorer, then selecting Copy
from the shortcut menu (only pipes may be copied using this method),
Continue at step 6.
2. If the first method is selected, and multiple items were selected, the command prompt
will display:

Pick a base point:

Select the logical base point from which the items are to be copied.
If a single item was copied, the above prompt is not displayed.
If copying a single item of type NOZ, EQE, ICD or LCK, see Copying a Single Owned
Item for further instructions. If not proceed as described below.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:161 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

3. If copying to another drawing, open that drawing. Proceed by:

• selecting Paste from The Drawing Page shortcut menu, or
• entering VPEPASTECLIP at the command prompt.
The command prompt will display:

Pick a point to paste:

Select the point on the drawing that the selected item or items are to be pasted to. The
copy than takes place.
4. If the second method is selected, the command prompt will display:

Pick a base point:

Select the logical base point from which the items are to be copied.
If a single item was copied, the above prompt is not displayed.
If copying to another drawing, open that drawing.
5. The Command prompt will then display:

Pick a point to paste:

Select the point on the drawing that the selected item or items are to be pasted to. The
copy than takes place.
6. If the third method is selected, the command prompt will then display:

Pick a base point:

Select the logical base point from which the pipe is to be copied.
7. The Command prompt will then display:

Pick a point to paste:

Pick the point for the item to be copied to. The copy then takes place.

Note: If the Engineering Explorer copy method is used to copy a pipe, all inline items will
also be copied. Off line items will not be copied.

• Notes on Copying and Pasting

• All or part of copied labels will be replaced by the project null character (e.g.?), so that
they do not duplicate the original label and preserve the label uniqueness. For labels
that contain multiple fields the Number field is nulled in this way.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:162 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

• If a pipe is copied, the user will be prompted to specify on pasting whether the copy of
the pipe is a new pipe, a branch pipe or a trim pipe, i.e.:

Indicate owner Pipe for Branch, or \n Trim Label for Trim pipe
(<ret> for new pipe):

If the copy is a branch or a trim pipe, the owner pipe or vessel trim must be selected.
• Inline items such as valves and reducers may only be copied from one pipe to another,
which will be broken correctly by the pasted items.
• If more than one inline item is copied, the complete pipe group (i.e. all the pipe
segments, branches and all other inline items) and associated labels will be copied as
well.
• If one or more pipe segments, or the either the start or end node of a pipe is copied, the
complete pipe group and associated labels will be copied as well.
• If equipment is copied, all of the equipment nozzles and associated labels are copied
as well.
• Nozzles copied from one vessel to another are automatically associated with the new
vessel. Nozzle labels are copied as well.
• If a pipe label is copied, the entire pipe group is also copied as well. Labels of other
items can be copied without copying the associated symbols.
• If a leader line or label balloon is copied, the owning item (i.e. the valve or flow element)
is also copied.
• If a spec break is copied, any associated labels will NOT be copied.
• If a cloud is copied, associated symbols will also be copied.
• If an instrument that is in an instrument loop is copied, the copy of the instrument is not
assigned to the instrument loop of the original instrument. It is placed into the default
UNNAMED instrument group in the Engineering Explorer, indicating that it is not in an
instrument loop.

• Copying a Single Owned Item

Items of types NOZ, EQE, ICD, or LCK must be "owned", i.e. associated on a P&ID with an
owner item. If a single instance of one of these types was selected when the copy procedure
is initiated using the first method of starting the copy procedure (as listed above), once the
paste command is selected the procedure is different from other item types, as described
below:

- Instructions
• Nozzles (NOZ) - if the Labels Checkbox is Unchecked
• Nozzles (NOZ) - if the Labels Checkbox is Checked
• Electrical Equipment (EQE)
• Interlocks and Conditioners (LCK, ICD)

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:163 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

- Nozzles (NOZ) - if the Labels Checkbox is Unchecked

1. The following sequence of command prompts will be displayed:

<Base point or displacement>/Multiple:

Hit <ESC> to cancel, Second Point of Displacement:
Indicate point to show angle of

Pick a logical base point on or off the item, or enter 'M' if multiple copies are required.
Then select a destination point on a valid owner item (EQU or EQV item type), and
indicate the rotation angle. The copy will then take place.
2. If the selected destination point does not coincide with an owner item the application
will prompt for valid owner to be selected.

Select Owner Item:

If the Multiple Copy option was not selected then the command will be terminated.
Otherwise the [Second point of displacement:] prompt will be repeated enabling
placement of the required number of copies.
3. If an invalid item is selected as the owner and the Multiple Copy option was not
selected, an error message will be displayed, and the application will return to the
command prompt:

ERROR: 231 Invalid AVEVA P&ID type selected.

Command:

4. If the Multiple Copy option was selected, the following is displayed:

ERROR: 231 Invalid AVEVA P&ID type selected.

Hit <ESC> to cancel, Second Point of Displacement:

Select a valid owner item or select <Esc> to end the command.

- Nozzles (NOZ) - if the Labels Checkbox is Checked

Note: If nozzle does not have any labels then the procedure will be the same as if the
checkbox was not checked. See above.

1. The following command prompts will be displayed:

<Base point or displacement>/Multiple:

Hit <ESC> to cancel, Second Point of Displacement:

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:164 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

Pick a logical base point on or off the item, or enter 'M' if multiple copies are required.
Then select a destination point on a valid owner item (EQU or EQV item type). The
rotation angle will be identical to source entity, and therefore will not be prompted for.
The copy will then take place. Nozzle tag and size labels will be copied as well.
2. If the selected destination point does not coincide with an owner item the application
will prompt for valid owner to be selected.

Select Owner Item:

If the Multiple Copy option was not selected then the command will be terminated.
Otherwise the [Second point of displacement:] prompt will be repeated enabling
placement of the required number of copies.
3. If an invalid item is selected as the owner and the Multiple Copy option was not
selected, an error message will be displayed, and the application will return to the
command prompt:

ERROR: 231 Invalid AVEVA P&ID type selected.

Command:

4. If the Multiple Copy option was selected, the following is displayed:

ERROR: 231 Invalid AVEVA P&ID type selected.

Hit <ESC> to cancel, Second Point of Displacement:

Select a valid owner item or select <Esc> to end the command.

- Electrical Equipment (EQE)

Note: If the Labels checkbox is checked, the equipment label will be copied along with the
equipment. However, the procedure the user follows is the same regardless of
whether or not the Labels checkbox is checked.

1. The following command prompts will be displayed:

<Base point or displacement>/Multiple:

Hit <ESC> to cancel, Second Point of Displacement:
________________________________________
Pick a logical base point on or off the item, or enter 'M' if multiple copies are required.
Then select a destination point on a valid owner item (EQU or EQV item type).
The copy will then take place. If the Labels checkbox is checked, the equipment tag
label will be copied as well.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:165 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

2. If the selected destination point does not coincide with an owner item the application
will prompt for valid owner to be selected.

Select Owner Item:

If the Multiple Copy option was not selected then the command will be terminated.
Otherwise the [Second point of displacement:] prompt will be repeated enabling
placement of the required number of copies.
3. If an invalid item is selected as the owner and the Multiple Copy option was not
selected, an error message will be displayed, and the application will return to the
command prompt:

ERROR: 231 Invalid AVEVA P&ID type selected.

Command:

4. If the Multiple Copy option was selected, the following is displayed:

ERROR: 231 Invalid AVEVA P&ID type selected.

Hit <ESC> to cancel, Second Point of Displacement:

Select a valid owner item or select <Esc> to end the command.

- Interlocks and Conditioners (LCK, ICD)

Note: Neither of these item types has labels, so the procedure is the same regardless of
whether or not the Labels checkbox is checked.

1. The following command prompts will be displayed:

<Base point or displacement>/Multiple:

Hit <ESC> to cancel, Second Point of Displacement:

Pick a logical base point on or off the item, or enter 'M' if multiple copies are required.
Then select a destination point on a valid owner item (INS or ILB item type). The
rotation angle will be identical to source entity, and therefore will not be prompted for.
The copy will then take place. The equipment tag label will be copied as well.
2. If the selected destination point does not coincide with an owner item the application
will prompt for valid owner to be selected.

Select Owner Item:

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:166 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

If the Multiple Copy option was not selected then the command will be terminated.
Otherwise the [Second point of displacement:] prompt will be repeated enabling
placement of the required number of copies.
3. If an invalid item is selected as the owner and the Multiple Copy option was not
selected, an error message will be displayed, and the application will return to the
command prompt:

ERROR: 231 Invalid AVEVA P&ID type selected.

Command:

4. If the Multiple Copy option was selected, the following is displayed:

ERROR: 231 Invalid AVEVA P&ID type selected.

Hit <ESC> to cancel, Second Point of Displacement:

Select a valid owner item or select <Esc> to end the command.

8.7.2 Moving Drawing Objects

• Description
This procedure is used to move objects and their labels around the drawing. Multiple objects
can be moved with one use of this procedure. Nozzles may be moved around on the vessel
with which they are associated with, but not between vessels.
Labels are moved automatically with their associated objects.
For details of the use of this procedure in the context of drawing P&IDs, see 6.17: General
Editing, Notes and Revision Clouds.

Note: Valves and reducer symbols may be restricted so that they can only be inserted into
pipes with specific codes and sizes. These are specified using the Spec Driven
Configuration Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program. When a
symbol is moved onto a pipe, the system checks that it is valid for the code and size
of the pipe. If it is not, the move may be prevented, or a warning displayed,
depending on the project setup.

Note: If pipe flags (i.e. page connector) and associated labels are selected and then the
"Move" command is selected (i.e. using the first method described below), the
"Stretch" command is activated instead, i.e. in the case of pipe flags and pipe flag
labels this procedure is used to stretch them instead of move them. See 8.7.4:
Stretching Drawing Objects.

• Instructions
1. Start the procedure by either:
• selecting the object(s) to be copied on The Drawing Page, then selecting:
• Cut from the shortcut menu, or
• Ctrl+X on the keyboard.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:167 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

or:
• selecting the object(s) to be copied in the Engineering Explorer, then selecting
Move from the shortcut menu, or
• selecting the Move option in Modify Group of the Home Tab.
2. If the first method of starting the procedure is selected, proceed by:
• selecting Paste from The Drawing Page shortcut menu, or
• entering Ctrl+V on the keyboard.
If this method is used, inline items such as valves and reducers may be moved from
one pipe to another, which will be broken correctly by the pasted item.
3. The command prompt will display:

Indicate point for <Item name>:

Click on the point that the object is to be moved to. The object(s) will then be pasted at
the point.
4. If the second (Engineering Explorer) method of starting the procedure is selected, the
command prompt will then display:

Base point:

Pick a logical basepoint on or off the item(s).

5. The Command prompt will then display:

Second point of displacement:

Pick the point for the item(s) to be moved to. All the selected objects are then
repositioned and the command ends then automatically.
6. If either of the other two methods of starting the procedure is selected, the command
prompt will display:

Select objects:

Select each object to be moved.

Press or select Enter to end object selection.
7. The Command prompt will then display:

Base point:

Pick a logical basepoint on or off the item(s).

8. The Command prompt will then display:

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:168 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

Second point of displacement:

Pick the point for the item(s) to be moved to.

All the selected objects are repositioned.
The command then ends automatically.

8.7.3 Mirroring Drawing Objects

• Description
This procedure enables mirroring of a selected item. Text is not affected. Mirroring operates
almost identically to the AutoCAD command, the difference being that there is no choice of
retaining original items.
Do not mirror angled valves, as this will cause validation errors.
For details of the use of this procedure in the context of drawing P&IDs, see 6.17: General
Editing, Notes and Revision Clouds.

• Example

• Instructions
1. Start the procedure by selecting the Mirror option in Modify Group of the Home Tab.
2. The Command prompt will display:

Select objects:

Press Enter to end object selection.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:169 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

3. The Command prompt will then display:

First point of mirror line:

Pick one end of the mirror line; a 'ghost' of the reflected image appears.
4. The Command prompt will then display:

Second point of mirror line:

Pick the other end of the line. The command performs the reflection, deletes the old
object and ends automatically.

8.7.4 Stretching Drawing Objects

• Description
This procedure is used to stretch items and groups of items. There are two methods:
Grips can be used. These operate much like standard AutoCAD grips.
If grips are not used, the procedure is similar to the Moving Drawing Objects procedure
except that the items retain connections with other objects.
Because connections between items are maintained as stretching occurs, ensure that all
items to be stretched are selected, or the stretch may have unexpected results.
For details of the use of this procedure in the context of drawing P&IDs, see 6.17: General
Editing, Notes and Revision Clouds.

Note: Pipe flags (i.e. page connectors) and their labels can also be stretched using the
Moving Drawing Objects procedure. See 8.7.2: Moving Drawing Objects.

• Instructions
• Using Grips
• Grips Not Used

- Using Grips
1. Start the procedure by selecting the items that are to be stretched. The grips of the
selected items are then displayed as blue squares.
2. From the grips of the selected items, select a base grip or grips. To select multiple
grips, hold down Shift while selecting. The selected grips are displayed as red squares.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:170 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

3. Click on the point towards which the selected items are to be stretched.

The items stretch to this point while retaining their connections. The command then
ends automatically (unlike in AutoCAD, it is not necessary to press Esc).

Note: Only the Stretch grip mode is available in AVEVA P&ID. Other AutoCAD grips
modes, such as Move and Rotate, are not currently available.

- Grips Not Used

1. Start the procedure by selecting the Stretch option in Modify Group of the Home Tab.
An automatic 'crossing' selection is activated.
2. The Command prompt will display:

First corner:

Pick first corner.

3. The Command prompt will then display:

Other corner:

Pick second corner.

The chosen entities are highlighted.
4. The Command prompt will then display:

Remove objects:

Remove any items which have been selected by mistake by picking them now.
Press or select Enter when finished.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:171 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

5. The Command prompt will then display:

Base point:

Pick a logical base point to move.

6. The Command prompt will then display:

Second point of displacement:

Pick a point for the base point to move to.

The items move while retaining their connections. The command then ends
automatically.

8.7.5 Rotating Drawing Objects

• Description
This procedure is used to rotate items.
For details of the use of this procedure in the context of drawing P&IDs, see 6.17: General
Editing, Notes and Revision Clouds.

• Instructions
1. Start the procedure by either:
• selecting Rotate from the shortcut menu without selecting any objects, or
• selecting the Rotate option in Modify Group of the Home Tab without selecting any
objects, or
• selecting the object(s) to be rotated on The Drawing Page, then selecting Rotate
from the shortcut menu, or
• selecting the object(s) to be rotated on the drawing page, then selecting the Rotate
option in Modify Group of the Home Tab, or
• selecting the object(s) to be rotated on The Drawing Page, then pressing either
Ctrl+R or Ctrl+L on the keyboard.
2. If the first or second methods of starting the procedure are followed, the command
prompt will display:

Select objects for Rotating (Select using Crossing[C] or

Crossing Polygon[CP]):

Select the object or objects to be rotated.

If the third, fourth or fifth methods of starting the procedure were selected, the objects
will already have been selected.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:172 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

3. If multiple items were selected, the command prompt will display:

Pick rotation base point:

Pick a point around which the selected objects are to be rotated. If a single object was
selected, this prompt is not displayed. The single object is rotated around its insertion
point.
4. If one of the first four methods of starting the procedure was selected, the command
prompt will then display:

Pick a point to specify the rotation angle:

Select a point on the drawing to indicate the angle at which the selected object or
objects are to be rotated. The rotation then takes place.
If the fifth method of starting the procedure was selected, this prompt is not displayed. If
Ctrl+R was pressed, the object is rotated 90o to the right. If Ctrl+L was pressed, the
object is rotated 90o to the left.

8.7.6 Deleting Drawing Objects

• Description
This procedure is used to delete items and groups of items as one entity. The consequences
of using this procedure vary according to the situation and the types of items being deleted,
e.g. associated items are deleted as one entity, prompts are given for a size to be retained if
a labelled reducer is deleted, etc.

Note: If a reducer is deleted, the pipe segment that the reducer was inserted into adopts
the size of the segment that was upstream of the deleted reducer.

For details of the use of this procedure in the context of drawing P&IDs, see 6.18: Deleting
Items.

• Instructions
1. Start the procedure by either:
• selecting the object(s) to be deleted on The Drawing Page, then selecting Delete
from the shortcut menu, or
• selecting the object(s) to be deleted on The Drawing Page, then pressing Delete on
the keyboard, or
• selecting the object(s) to be deleted in the Engineering Explorer, then selecting
Delete from the shortcut menu, or
• selecting the Delete option in Modify Group of the Home Tab.
2. If one of the first three methods of starting the procedure is followed, the deletion Is
carried out immediately on the selected objects.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:173 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

If the last method is followed, the Command prompt will display:

Select objects:

Selected objects will indicated by dashed lines.

Press or select Enter and the highlighted entities are deleted.
3. By whatever method objects are selected, if you pick, for example, a vessel, then all its
associated nozzles, trim pipe labelling and electrical equipment become highlighted as
well.

8.7.7 Exchanging Individual Symbols

• Description
This procedure exchanges symbols individually (exchanges one symbol for another). The
symbol with which a symbol is to be exchanged must be already in existence and be of the
same AVEVA P&ID type. For example, a CL (column) could be exchanged with a HDT
(head tank) because they are both of the EQV item type in AVEVA P&ID. If the new symbol
is a different size, AVEVA P&ID will make adjustments to allow for this. All labelling
(including balloons) is retained.
For details of the use of this procedure in the context of drawing P&IDs, see 6.17: General
Editing, Notes and Revision Clouds.
See also 8.7.8: Exchanging Symbols Globally.

Note: Valves and reducer symbols may be restricted so that they can only be inserted into
pipes with specific codes and sizes. These are specified using the Spec Driven
Configuration Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program. When a
symbol is exchanged, the system checks that the symbol selected to replace the old
symbol is valid for the code and size of the pipe. If it is not, the exchange may be
prevented, or a warning displayed, depending on the project setup.

Note: Line Termination (LTS) symbols cannot be exchanged.

• Instructions
1. Start the procedure by selecting the Exchange Symbol option in Symbol Group of the
Home Tab.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:174 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

2. The AVEVA P&ID Symbol List dialog appears:

Select the category of symbol from the left-hand window, and then the name of the
symbol from the left-hand window. If the name of the symbol is known, but not its
category, enter the name of the symbol in the Find field, and click on the Find button. To
select a symbol, click on it in the right-hand window. An image of it is displayed in the
lower half of the dialog box, along with the symbol name and description. Press the OK
button.
3. The Command prompt will display:

Select Item:

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:175 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

Pick an item on the P&ID to exchange for the new item. Subsequent prompts vary here
depending on the item being inserted; for example, you may be prompted for scale and
rotation of equipment etc. Once the symbol exchange has taken place, you will be
prompted to select another item for exchange. Proceed as above or select Cancel from
The Drawing Page shortcut menu, or enter Ctrl-C to cancel the command.

8.7.8 Exchanging Symbols Globally

• Description
This procedure is used to globally exchange similar groups of AVEVA P&ID symbols. Client
symbols may be converted using this procedure.
For details of the use of this procedure in the context of drawing P&IDs, see 6.17: General
Editing, Notes and Revision Clouds.
See also 8.7.7: Exchanging Individual Symbols.

Note: Valves and reducer symbols may be restricted so that they can only be inserted into
pipes with specific codes and sizes. These are specified using the Spec Driven
Configuration Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program. When a
symbol is exchanged, the system checks that the symbol selected to replace the old
symbol is valid for the code and size of the pipe. If it is not, the exchange may be
prevented, or a warning displayed, depending on the project setup.

Note: Line Termination (LTS) symbols cannot be exchanged.

• Errors
An error message occurs when the AVEVA P&ID mapping file is in the wrong directory. In
this case, move the PID.BEX file in which the mappings are stored into the working directory
where the drawings reside.

• Instructions
1. Start the procedure by selecting the Global Symbol Exchange option in Symbol
Group of the Home Tab.
AVEVA P&ID then performs a Zoom All. The symbols change dynamically on the
drawing as the exchange proceeds.

8.7.9 Moving Items to the Non-Plot Layer

• Description
This procedure is used to move item(s) to the non-plotting layer (toggles items between the
non-plotting layer/level and their original layer/level). If items are subsequently selected
again using the same procedure, they will move back to the layer that they originally came
from.
For details of the use of this procedure in the context of drawing P&IDs, see 6.17: General
Editing, Notes and Revision Clouds.

• Associated Project Configuration Options

• The non-plot layer is selected on the Miscellaneous - Settings Sub-Category of the
AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:176 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

• Layers are configured using the Drawing - Layers Sub-Category.

• Instructions
1. Start the procedure by selecting the Change to Non-Plot Layer option in Modify Group
of the Home Tab.
2. The Command prompt will display:

Select objects:

Pick the item(s) to be moved to the non-plotting layer, either individually or by window,
crossing etc.
3. Press Enter, and the command will end automatically after the entities have moved.
Note that the items will not change to the colour of the non-plotting layer.

8.7.10 Drawing Revision Clouds

• Description
This procedure is used to highlight changes from a previous revision of a drawing by adding
a cloud of any size around the desired area. Clouds can only be deleted as a complete
entity using the AVEVA P&ID delete facilities and cannot be copied or broken. Clouds
should always be drawn in a clockwise direction.
For details of the use of this procedure in the context of drawing P&IDs, see 6.17: General
Editing, Notes and Revision Clouds.

• Example

• Instructions
1. Start the procedure by selecting the Revision Cloud option in Symbol Group of the
Home Tab.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:177 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

2. The Command prompt will display:

Indicate point for cloud (Enter 'C' to close):

Pick points in a clockwise direction until the cloud is large enough and then enter 'C' to
close it.

8.7.11 Changing the Colours of Multiple Items

• Description
This procedure is used to change the colours of multiple items on multiple drawings within a
project, based on their AVEVA P&ID properties or based on the VPE Workbench labels that
the items are labelled with (see 8.8.10: Labelling with VPE Workbench Data), and the
association of VPE Workbench values in tables of such values on the drawings.
Such tables are generated using Design Data Templates (DDT) and the Inserting
Assemblies procedure (see 8.4.11: Inserting Assemblies).
The process creates copies of the selected drawings and applies the re-colouring procedure
to them. The original drawings are not changed.
The selection of drawings, the item selection criteria and the re-colouring process itself is
carried out using the AVEVA P&ID Colouring Utility application.
For details of the use of this procedure in the context of drawing P&IDs, see 6.17: General
Editing, Notes and Revision Clouds.

• Instructions

- Preliminary Requirements
If colours are to be changed using criteria based on VPE Workbench labels that items are
labelled with, all drawings that are to be subject to the procedure must:
• be synchronised and their output files available.
• include a table of VPE Workbench values generated using a DDT which maps VPE
Workbench values as described below.

- Overview
In the AVEVA P&ID Colouring Utility application, an AVEVA P&ID project is selected, from
which drawings to be subject to the procedure are then selected.
If colours are to be changed based on the AVEVA P&ID properties of item, the procedure is
relatively simple. The user may simply specify, for example, that all Instruments with a tag
prefix value of "ABC" will be changed to a selected colour.
If colours are to be changed using criteria based on VPE Workbench labels that items are
labelled with, the user may specify whether colouring changing rules are to be based on the
mappings of VPE Workbench values in tables in the individual drawings, or on those within
a selected template drawing.
The user must then specify the criteria for changing the colours of items based on their VPE
Workbench labels and the mappings of the label values in the VPE Workbench value
table(s), plus the colour that items are to be changed to.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:178 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

Multiple criteria for applying colour changes may be specified. For example, that all
Instruments with a tag prefix value of "ABC" and / or of a specified item type.
Multiple criteria must be specified when changing the colour of items based on UDA values
(including Dataset UDAs) or VPE Workbench designator values, because in addition to a
value needing to be specified, the name of a Dataset, UDA or designator must also be
specified.
Refer to 6.12: Adding User-Defined Attributes for more information on UDAs, including
Dataset UDAs. Refer to 6.16: Dynamic Labelling for more information on labelling with
values from VPE Workbench.

- Examples:
Example 1: It is required that all items labelled with a specific design area "A" are to be
re-coloured. The design area is in the VPE Workbench value table(s). It is therefore
sufficient to specify in the Colouring Utility project settings items that all items labelled
design "A" area are to be changed to the specified colour, and to set up the column
mapping as explained below.
Example 2: It is required that all items with a specific safety class are to be re-
coloured. Items on the drawings are not labelled with their safety class. However they
are labelled, using a VPE Workbench label, with their design area. Every design area
and safety class is mapped on the table(s) of VPE Workbench values. For example,
safety class SC1 is mapped to design area A1 (i.e. they are in the same row in the
table).
Therefore, in order to change the colour of all the items with a specific safety class of
SC1, it is necessary to specify in the Colouring Utility project settings that items with a
safety class of SC1 are to be subject to the procedure and to specify that the safety
class column in the VPE Workbench value table(s) is mapped to the design area
column.
When the procedure is implemented, the utility will refer to the VPE Workbench value
table(s). It will find all entries in the safety class column with a value of SC1. It will then
refer to the design area column to find all the design areas that are mapped to that
safety class, i.e. in the same row in the table. It will then refer to the drawing to find all
the items that are labelled with those design areas, and change them to the specified
colour.
• Example 3: A project includes a Dataset called “PRESSURE”, which is assigned to
pipes in the project, i.e. all pipes may be assigned a pressure value as a property. It is
required that all pipes with a pressure value of 200 are changed to a specified colour.
Therefore, in the Colouring Utility project settings it must be specified that all items
assigned the PRESSURE dataset, and with a pressure value of 200, are changed to
the specified colour. This requires two colouring criteria rules to be specified (see
Specifying Multiple Colouring Criteria Rules).
See also Re-colouring Drawing Items Based on their Dataset Attributes - Full Example.
Colouring Utility project settings may be saved for future use.

- Opening the AVEVA P&ID Colouring Utility

Select AVEVA > P&ID > AVEVA P&ID Colour Utility > AVEVA P&ID Colour Utility from the
Programs menu.
The Create or Open Setting Project dialog is then displayed (see below).

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:179 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

- Creating and Opening Colouring Settings Projects

To create a new settings project:
1. In the Create or Open Setting Project dialog, select the Create a New Setting option.

2. Enter the name if the project in the Project Name field.

3. Enter the location of the project in the Setting File field, or press this button and
browse for the required file.
4. Select the Create Project button. The AVEVA Colouring Utility dialog is then displayed
(see below).
To open an existing settings project:
1. Select the Open an Existing Setting option.

2. Enter the location and file name of the settings project file in the Setting File field, or

press this button and browse for the file.

Settings project files are .XML files. Their file names will be the same as the project
names that were entered when they were created, as described above.
3. Select the Open Project button. The AVEVA Colouring Utility dialog is then displayed
(see below).

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:180 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

- Specifying Colouring Project Data and Selecting Drawings

1. In the Select Input Folder field, enter the folder in which the source drawings are
located, or press the Browse button and browse for the location. Alternatively leave as
the default location, which will be the project location folder selected in the Setting File
field (see above), plus "\input".

The full location and file name of each AVEVA P&ID drawing in the selected input folder
is the listed in the dialog.
2. In the Select P&ID Project File field, enter the location and file name of the
configuration file (.PRJ) of the P&ID project associated with the source drawings, or
press the Browse button and browse for the file. Alternatively leave as the default
location and file name, which will be the default input folder location (see above), plus
"\PID.PRJ".
3. In the Select Output Folder field, enter the folder in which the re-coloured drawings
are to be placed, or press the Browse button and browse for the location. Alternatively
leave as the default location, which will be the project location folder selected in the
Setting File field (see above), plus "\output".
4. If colours are to be changed using criteria based on VPE Workbench labels that items
are labelled with, in the Select Template Drawing field, enter the location and file
name of the drawing file (.DWG) which is to serve as the template file for the project.
The template file must contain a VPE Workbench value table of all the values that are
used when specifying which items are to be re-coloured.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:181 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

It is from this drawing that the lists of property names and column names are derived
which are used when specifying colouring criteria (see below).
5. If re-colouring rules are to be applied based on the relationships between VPE
Workbench values in the table on the template file, check the Change According to
Template checkbox. If they are to be applied based on the relationships found in each
drawing, uncheck this checkbox.
For instance, if in the template drawing Safety Area SC3 matching design area G, A
and B, but in your target drawing safety area SC3 matches only design area G, when
the checkbox is checked, all pipes, equipment, and off-line instruments with design
areas A,B and G will be coloured. If it is unchecked, only those items with design area
G will be coloured.
6. If all the P&ID drawings found in the input folder are to be subject to the procedure,
select the Select All checkbox. If only certain drawings are to be re-coloured, check or
uncheck the Select File checkboxes for the individual drawings as required.
7. To specify which items on the drawings are to be re-coloured, select the Settings
button. The Colouring Criteria dialog is then displayed (see below).

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:182 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

- Specifying Colouring Criteria

This dialog is used to set up the criteria for re-colouring items. These criteria consist of one
or more rules.

To set up a simple rule to change the colour of items based on their AVEVA P&ID properties:
1. From the Item Type field, select either Equipment, Instrument or Pipe, depending on
the type of items to be re-coloured.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:183 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

2. In the Matching Criteria window, select the AVEVA P&ID property of the items to be
re-coloured from the list in the Property Name field.

As well as basic item properties, the list also includes As well as basic item properties,
the list also includes Dataset, User-Defined Attribute (i.e. non-Dataset UDA) and VPE
Workbench name and value options. and VPE Workbench name and value options.
A user may therefore, for example, choose to re-colour items based on their
association with a specific dataset value, as described in Example 3 (above). In this
case however, multiple rules must be set up, as both the dataset name and a value
must be specified. See Specifying Multiple Colouring Criteria Rules below for details.
3. Select the “Equals” condition from the Condition field.
4. In the Value field, enter the value of the selected property that the selected condition is
to be applied to.
5. Select the Pick Colour button and from the dialog that is then displayed, choose the
colour that items will be re-coloured in.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:184 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

6. Select the Add Rule button. The rule is then added to the rules in the Rule set window

If colours are to be changed using criteria based on VPE Workbench labels that items are
labelled with, to set up a simple rule like that in Example 1 (above):
1. In the Matching Criteria window, select the VPE Workbench property of the items to
be re-coloured from the list in the Property Name field (see above).
2. Select the “Equals” condition from the Condition field.
3. In the Value field, enter the value of the selected property that the selected condition is
to be applied to.
4. Select the Pick Colour button and from the dialog that is then displayed, choose the
colour that items will be re-coloured in.
5. Select the Add Rule button. The rule is then added to the rules in the Rule set window.
6. Set up the mapping by selecting the Define Alias Field button. The Field Mapping
Settings dialog is then displayed.

Note: Lists of values for the fields in this dialog will be available if a template drawing has
been specified (see above). Otherwise fields must be completed by manual entry.

Note: It is always necessary to specify a mapped column and a mapped field name, even if
one column is not being mapped to another. In such a case, the same column and
field details must be specified in both sets of fields.

7. In the Primary Column Name field, select the identifier of the column on the template
drawing in which the selected property is located.
8. The adjacent Field Name field displays the alias of the selected column, i.e. the name
by which is known on the drawing.
9. In the Mapped Column Name field, enter the same identifier as entered on the
Primary Column Name field

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:185 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

10. In the adjacent Mapped Field Name field enter same alias as entered in the Field
Name field.
11. Select the Save button to save the mapping and close the dialog.
Therefore in order to set up the criteria for applying the re-colouring of items with a specific
design area, as described in Example 1 (above):
• Select "Design Area" from the list in the Property Name field.
• Select "Equals" in the Condition field.
• Select "A" in the Value field.
• In the Field Mapping Settings dialog, select the identifier of the design area column in
the Primary Column Name field.
• Enter "Design Area" in the Field Name field.
• Select the identifier of the design area column in the Mapped Column Name field.
• Enter "Design Area" in the Mapped Field Name field.
Note: The Item Name field is not currently used.

If colours are to be changed using criteria based on VPE Workbench labels that items are
labelled with, to set up a more complex rule like that in Example 2 (above):
1. Proceed as above, but in the Property Name field, select the property on the VPE
Workbench values table that is to be mapped to the property labelling the items.
2. Set up the mapping by selecting the Define Alias Field button. The Field Mapping
Settings dialog is then displayed.

Note: The settings shown in the image above are the default settings for this dialog.

3. In the Primary Column Name field, select the identifier of the column on the template
drawing in which the selected property is located.
4. The adjacent Field Name field displays the alias of the selected column, i.e. the name
by which is known on the drawing.
5. In the Mapped Column Name field, select the column containing the properties that
are to be mapped to.
6. In the adjacent Mapped Field Name field enter the alias of this column.
7. Select the Save button to save the mapping and close the dialog.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:186 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

Note: The identifier of a column can be found on the drawing by selecting the column and
using the List Item Details procedure. The identifier will be listed in a line that will look
something like this:

*Code 1000, Designator: $Pid System.1.Text Field Value

...where "$Pid System.1.Text Field Value" is the identifier.

Therefore in order to set up the criteria for applying the re-colouring of items with a specific
safety class, as described in Example 2 (above):
• Select "Safety Class" from the list in the Property Name field.
• Select "Equals" in the Condition field.
• Select "SC1" in the Value field.
• In the Field Mapping Settings dialog, select the identifier of the safety class column.
• Enter "Safety Class" in the Field Name field
• Select the identifier of the design area column in the Mapped Column Name field.
• Enter "Design Area" in the Mapped Field Name field.

- Specifying Multiple Colouring Criteria Rules

The colouring criteria may consist of multiple rules. Once the basic details of the first rule
are completed by specifying a value in the Value field, another row of fields is then displayed
underneath the first in the Matching Criteria window, which can be used for specifying
another rule.
Set up this rule as described above. In addition, in the Join Criteria field, select “And” or
“Or” as required.
Add any additional rules using the same procedure.

- Performing the Colour Changing Operation

On the Colouring Criteria dialog save the rule settings and close the dialog by selecting the
Save Settings button.
On the AVEVA Colouring Utility dialog, select the Process button. The colour changing
operation then takes place.
When a drawing has been processed successfully, a green tick is displayed in its Progress
field. A red cross is displayed if the drawing is processed with errors.

To stop the operation, select the Cancel button.

Once a drawing has been processed, details of errors and warnings can be viewed by
selecting its View Log File button.

- Resetting and Saving Settings

To reset the Colouring Utility project settings to those last saved, select the Reset button.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:187 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

To save the settings, select the Save button.

Close the AVEVA P&ID Colouring Utility by selecting the Exit button.

• Re-colouring Drawing Items Based on their Dataset Attributes - Full Example

As described in Example 3 (above), it is required that all pipes with a pressure value of 200
are changed to a specified colour.
The project includes a Dataset called “PRESSURE”, which is assigned to pipes in the
project (Item Group = Pipes). Datasets are defined using the User Defined Attributes -
DataSet Sub-Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program:

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:188 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

When pipes are labelled, they can be assigned a pressure value by entering it into their
Properties dialogs (see 4.8: Properties Dialogs):

In the AVEVA Colouring Utility, access the Colouring Criteria dialog from the Settings
button, and set the criteria as follows:
• Select “Pipe” from the Item Name field.
• Select "dataset name" from the list in the Property Name field.
• Select "Equals" in the Condition field.
• Enter "PRESSURE" in the Value field.
• In the next row, select “And” from the Join Condition field.
• Select "dataset value" from the list in the Property Name field.
• Select "Equals" in the Condition field.
• Enter "200" in the Value field.
• Select the Pick Colour button and choose the colour that pipes are to be changed to.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:189 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

i.e.:

Select the Add Rule button. The rule is added to the Rule set window as follows:

Save the rule settings and close the dialog by selecting the Save Settings button.
On the AVEVA Colouring Utility dialog, select the Process button. All drawings selected on
the AVEVA Colouring Utility dialog are then copied to the specified output folder and re-
coloured.
For example (note the pipes in the darker blue colour):

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:190 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

8.8 Data Transfer

8.8.1 Checking for Corrupted Items

• Description
This procedure is used to check the drawing for corrupted items.

• Instructions
1. Start the procedure by selecting the Audit option in Project Configuration Group of the
Utilities Tab.
2. All "intelligent" items on the drawing, both pipes and symbols, are then checked. If any
are found to be corrupted, an error balloon is placed at item insertion point, displaying
the following message:

ERROR: 381 Entity is Corrupted, Please Delete it from Drawing. -

Handle: [item handle]

8.8.2 Exporting Data to a P&ID Reports and/or AVEVA Engineering Database

• Description
This procedure is used to:
• Validate a drawing.
• Export data from drawings in unconsolidated form to an intermediate "raw" database,
from where it must subsequently be consolidated using AVEVA P&ID Reports facilities.
• Export data to a number of output files, from where it must subsequently be
consolidated using AVEVA P&ID Reports facilities.
• Export consolidated drawing data directly into an AVEVA P&ID Reports database.
• Export consolidated drawing data directly into an AVEVA Engineering database.
Note: Data can be exported to a VPE Workbench database at the same time at the same
time as it is exported to an AVEVA P&ID Reports or AVEVA Engineering database.
See 8.8.6: Synchronising Data with a VPE Workbench Database for details.

A P&ID Reports database must be logged into with either Admin or Import rights before it
can be exported to. See 8.8.3: Connecting to a P&ID Reports Database.
See also 7.1: Integration with an AVEVA P&ID Reports Database and 7.3.2: Integration with
AVEVA Engineering for further details of the interfaces.
Details of the output files can be found in 10.2: Output File Format

• Associated Project Configuration Options

- For AVEVA P&ID Reports Exports

• The directory into which output files are exported is set in the Save Path field on the
Project Configuration Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:191 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

• The P&ID Reports database to which data is exported are specified on the P&ID
Reports Configuration Category.
• UDA values are displayed in AVEVA P&ID Reports on the UDA tab. Whether or not
UDA values are also to be displayed on the same tabs as the items they are associated
with is controlled by the setting of the Merge UDA Values checkbox on the P&ID
Reports - Settings Sub-Category.
• The default settings of the Export to P&ID Reports and Export & Consolidate Database
checkboxes on the Synchronise dialog box are controlled by the settings of the Update
P&ID Reports after Synchronize and Update and Consolidate P&ID Reports Database
after Synchronize checkboxes on the P&ID Reports - Settings Sub-Category.
• Whether or not comments regarding the export entered in the Description dialog (see
below) are added to the P&ID Reports database is controlled by the setting of the Add
P&ID Drawing Details to Database checkbox on the P&ID Reports - Settings Sub-
Category.
• The line properties to be compared when attempting to consolidate lines present on
multiple P&IDs in the P&ID Reports database are selected on the P&ID Reports -
Settings Sub-Category.
• If the process owners of components on pipes are to be recorded in AVEVA P&ID
Reports as the pipe segments to which they belong, the Pipe Size Connection Output
checkbox on the Pipes - Settings Sub-Category must be checked. If it is not checked,
the process owners of components on pipes will be recorded as the main pipes they
belong to, instead of one of their segments.

- For AVEVA Engineering Exports

• The installation of PDMS that the AVEVA P&ID project is integrated with is selected on
the PDMS Integration Category Pane of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration
program.
• A default project and database can be selected PDMS Integration - Engineering Sub-
Category.
Note: For the project configuration options related to drawing validation, exporting the VPE
Workbench and other miscellaneous options, see the Synchronising Data with a VPE
Workbench Database procedure.

• Instructions
1. Start the procedure by either:
• selecting Synchronise from the drawing shortcut menu of the Engineering
Explorer, or
• pressing F12 on the keyboard, or
• selecting the Synchronise option in AVEVA Integration Group of the Data
Management Tab.
2. The Synchronise dialog box will then be displayed:

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:192 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

3. The Export Data to Publishing Area checkbox is only relevant to the Synchronising
Data with a VPE Workbench Database procedure.
4. If data in unconsolidated form is to be exported to an intermediate or "raw" database,
check the Export to P&ID Reports checkbox. This checkbox is greyed out if the
Export & Consolidate Database checkbox (see below) is checked.
5. If an AVEVA P&ID Reports or AVEVA Engineering database is to be populated with the
exported data in consolidated form, check the Export & Consolidate Database
checkbox. Note that if this option is selected the synchronisation procedure may take
longer to complete.
Note: This option must be selected if the export is for an AVEVA Engineering database.

6. If data is to be exported to a number of output files, uncheck both checkboxes.

7. To enter a description or comments regarding this synchronisation process select the
Add/Edit Description button. The Description dialog is then displayed:

Enter the required description and select the OK button.

Note: If a description is not entered before the synchronisation process is started, the
Description dialog may be displayed automatically during the process depending on
the project configuration (see above).

8. To initiate the synchronisation procedure, select the Synchronise button.

The progress of the procedure is displayed using a progress bar, and a count of the
number of tasks successfully completed or failed.
While synchronisation is in progress the label of Synchronise button changes to
Cancel. Select this button to abort the procedure.
9. If the Export & Consolidate Database checkbox is checked, and if a P&ID Reports
database has not already been logged into, a dialog is displayed into which the
password for the P&ID Reports database must be entered. See 8.8.3: Connecting to a
P&ID Reports Database. A P&ID Reports database must be logged into with either
Admin or Import rights before it can be exported to.
10. If a description of the export was not entered before the synchronisation process was
started (see above), the Description dialog may be displayed automatically during the
process (depending on the project configuration). Enter a description as required and
select the OK button.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:193 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

11. Select the Details >> button to view further details. The Details pane is then displayed.

Connection details are also displayed in this pane, at bottom of the dialog.
12. The Details pane consists of two tabs, Tasks and Details.
The Tasks tab displays the list of synchronisation tasks and the status of these tasks:
Processing , Complete , Fail , or Pending.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:194 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

13. The Details tab displays processing details of each engineering item, i.e. error ,
warning and success messages.

14. If only error and warning messages are to be displayed, check the Show error and
warning messages only checkbox.
15. Double-click on a message to select the item on the drawing. Any errors and warnings
associated with the item can then be fixed. For details of errors and warning, and
suggested solutions, see Error and Warning Messages.
Note: Error and warning messages are also added to the drawing. These can be deleted
individually as required, or all them can be deleted at once using the Deleting Error
Blocks procedure.

16. The Synchronise dialog box remains open so that further items can be selected and
problems resolved.
17. A monitor file is generated by the synchronisation procedure, which lists the messages
displayed in the Details tab. Select the View button to open this file in Notepad.
18. When synchronisation is complete the label of Cancel button changes to Close. Select
this button to close dialog.
19. A redraw may be required at the end of the process to remove the highlighting which
appeared during the pipe validation.

8.8.3 Connecting to a P&ID Reports Database

• Description
This procedure is used to login to an AVEVA P&ID Reports database. A P&ID Reports
database must be logged into before it can be opened from AVEVA P&ID, and must be
logged into with either Admin or Import rights before it can be exported to.
See 7.1: Integration with an AVEVA P&ID Reports Database for details of the interface with
P&ID Reports.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:195 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

• Associated Project Configuration Options

The name and location of the P&ID Reports database to which the connection is made is
specified on the P&ID Reports Configuration Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project
Administration program.

• Instructions
1. If the P&ID Reports database has not already been logged into, this procedure starts
automatically (i.e. the PID Reports Login dialog is then displayed), when data is
exported to a P&ID Reports database (see 8.8.2: Exporting Data to a P&ID Reports
and/or AVEVA Engineering Database), or when a P&ID Reports database is opened
(see 8.8.4: Opening a P&ID Reports Database).
To start the procedure "manually" select the Login option in P&ID Reports Group of the
Data Management Tab.
The P&ID Reports Login dialog is then displayed:

Note: If no database is specified in the Project Administration program, the connection will
automatically be to the default database (PidReports.mdw) supplied with the product.

2. Enter the password for the P&ID Reports database and press the OK button.

8.8.4 Opening a P&ID Reports Database

• Description
This procedure is used to open and view an AVEVA P&ID Reports database.
See 7.1: Integration with an AVEVA P&ID Reports Database for details of the interface with
P&ID Reports.

• Associated Project Configuration Options

The name and location of the P&ID Reports database which is opened is specified on the
P&ID Reports Configuration Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program.

• Instructions
1. Start the procedure by selecting the P&ID Reports Launch option in P&ID Reports
Group of the Data Management Tab.
2. If the P&ID Reports database has not been logged into, a dialog is displayed into which
the password for the P&ID Reports database must be entered. See 8.8.3: Connecting
to a P&ID Reports Database.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:196 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

3. AVEVA P&ID Reports is then launched, and the appropriate database opened. See
AVEVA P&ID Reports documentation for details.
Note: If no database is specified in the Project Administration program, an Open dialog is
displayed AVEVA P&ID Reports is opened from which the required database can be
selected.

8.8.5 Issuing Drawings for Document Manager

• Description
The AVEVA P&ID Document Manager is used to view and compare revisions of AVEVA
P&ID drawings which have been saved to the project database.
Drawings may be automatically saved to the project database when they are saved or
synchronized.
However, they may also be manually saved ("issued") to the database at any time using this
procedure.

• Instructions
1. Start the procedure by selecting the Issue option in Compare Group of the Data
Management Tab.
2. The Add Issue revision details dialog is then displayed:

Enter any notes or comments on the issue in the Description field.

The other fields are completed automatically and cannot be changed. The Major
Revision number is inherited from the revision number of the drawing (as displayed
Properties dialog of the drawing - see 4.8: Properties Dialogs).
The Minor Revision number is automatically incremented from the last minor revision
number issued for the current major revision of the drawing.
3. Select OK button to complete the issue.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:197 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

8.8.6 Synchronising Data with a VPE Workbench Database

• Description
This procedure is used to:
• Validate a drawing
• Synchronise drawing data with plant model data in a VPE Workbench project
database.
• Transfer data to an SQL database for label uniqueness validation purposes (data may
also be transferred to an SQL database if, for example, a VPE Workbench database is
not available).
Note: Data can be exported to an AVEVA P&ID Reports and/or AVEVA Engineering
database at the same time as it is exported to VPE Workbench. See 7.1: Integration
with an AVEVA P&ID Reports Database and 7.3.2: Integration with AVEVA
Engineering for details.

This procedure generates a number of output files. These may optionally be automatically
copied to a specified publishing area, from where they are automatically imported into a
specified VPE Workbench project.
Optionally, the output files may be transferred (or re-transferred) to the publishing area using
facilities on the VPE Workbench pane of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program.
Details of the output files and the monitor file can be found in 10.2: Output File Format.

Note: The output files can also be transferred to a VPE Workbench database using
facilities on the VPE Workbench Configuration Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project
Administration program.

The validation initiated using this procedure should not be confused with online data
validation, which takes place during labelling.
For more details on the use of this procedure, see 7.5: Exporting Data to a VPE Workbench
Database.

Note: If labels are validated against an SQL database, most label data is transferred to the
database automatically on editing. However, some label data is only transferred
when synchronisation takes place, i.e. data can be copied to the SQL database at
the same time as it is being transferred to a VPE Workbench database. See 6.13.4:
Label Validation across all Project P&IDs for details.

Note: If it is required to generate a simple line list from AVEVA P&ID using the Synchronise
facility, line lists can be generated from "semi-intelligent" drawings, only partially
upgraded from AutoCAD drawings (see 5: Upgrading AutoCAD Drawings), in which
only the lines themselves are "intelligent" and any inline symbols are "dumb"
AutoCAD blocks

• Associated Project Configuration Options

• The directory into which output files are exported is set on the Project Configuration
Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program.
• During synchronisation, a copy of the drawing data can be made available for AVEVA
Model Management, AVEVA Instrumentation and AVEVA Electrical. In order for this to
happen, the Save Copy checkbox on the Project Configuration Category must be
checked.
• The SQL database location is specified on the Project Configuration Category.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:198 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

• The text colours of error and warning messages that may be displayed on drawings
when they are synchronized are specified using the Colour for warning and Colour for
errors fields on the Miscellaneous – Settings Sub-Category.
• The service component that will handle the transfer of data to VPE Workbench is
specified on the VPE Workbench Configuration Category.
• The VPE Workbench project with which the AVEVA P&ID project is to interface is
specified on the VPE Workbench Configuration Category.
• The folder into which drawings are published when loading to the selected VPE
Workbench project is specified on the VPE Workbench Configuration Category.
• The default setting of the Export & Consolidate Database checkbox on the Synchronise
dialog box is set using the Export to VPE Workbench checkbox on the VPE Workbench
Configuration Category.
• If when drawing data is to be loaded into the VPE Workbench project, users of that
project are to receive e-mail messages to inform them of this, the project users are
selected on the VPE Workbench Configuration Category.
• If the synchronisation process is to check that nozzle and pipe sizes match and to
report any mismatches as errors, ensure that the Enforce Nozzle and Pipe Size Match
checkbox on the Pipes - Settings Sub-Category is checked.
If this checkbox is checked, any such mismatches must be corrected before the
nozzles and pipes in question can be successfully synchronised
• If specification attributes of items are to be output, ensure the Populate in Database
instead of Drawing checkbox on the Pipes - Settings Sub-Category is checked.
• If a warning message is to be displayed on the drawing for “unconnected” items, i.e.
items for which owner details are not available, ensure that the Display owner warning
checkbox on the Pipes – Settings Sub-Category is checked.
• If unlabelled nozzles are to result in a warning being displayed, ensure that the Nozzle
Error-Balloon Placement checkbox on the Label Types Configuration Category is
checked.
• If unlabelled reducers are to result in a warning being displayed, ensure that the
"Reducer Not Labelled' Error-Balloon Placement checkbox on the Label Types
Configuration Category is checked.
• If the Description dialog is to be displayed automatically during the synchronisation
process, the Show Drawing History dialog box on the Drawing - Settings Sub-Category
must be checked.
• Whether or not the Synchronise dialog box is displayed is controlled by the Show
Synchronize Dialog Box checkbox on the Miscellaneous – Settings Sub-Category.
• The text colours of error and warning messages that may be displayed on drawings
when they are synchronized are specified using the Colour for warning and Colour for
errors fields on the Miscellaneous – Settings Sub-Category.
• Whether or not instruments and lines exported to P&ID Reports with no numbers are to
be automatically assigned unique incremented numbers if controlled by the setting of
the USER_ASSIGNINSNUMBERS and USER_ASSIGNLINENUMBERS user-defined
directives on the Miscellaneous – Settings Sub-Category.
• If when a drawing is synchronised the minor revision number of the drawing record is to
be increased in the AVEVA P&ID Document Manager, the Add P&ID Drawing Details
to Database checkbox on the P&ID Reports - Settings Sub-Category and the Increase
Revision number every time the drawing is synchronised checkbox on the Document
Manager Configuration Category must be checked.
Note: See also 10.8: Setting up AVEVA P&ID to Connect with VPE Workbench.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:199 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

• Instructions
1. Start the procedure by either:
• selecting Synchronise from the drawing shortcut menu of the Engineering
Explorer, or
• pressing F12 on the keyboard, or
• selecting the Synchronise option in AVEVA Integration Group of the Data
Management Tab, or
• entering NETOUTPUTBATCH at the Command prompt.
2. Unless that last option was selected, the Synchronise dialog box will appear:

Note: The dialog box will not be displayed is the Show Synchronize Dialog Box checkbox
on the Miscellaneous – Settings Sub-Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project
Administration program is unchecked. In this case, synchronization will proceed
immediately.

3. If the VPE Workbench project is version 5.8 or later, data can be exported immediately
into the VPE Workbench database. If this is required, check the Export Data to
Publishing Area checkbox.
If checkbox is checked, the output files will automatically be copied into the publishing
area as part of the synchronisation procedure, from where they will automatically be
imported into the VPE Workbench database.

Note: If the checkbox is greyed out this indicates that project configuration settings relating
to the interface are invalid or have not been specified.

4. If it is not required to export directly to a VPE Workbench 5.8 project, or if the project is
a VPE Workbench 5.6 or 5.7 project, data can instead be loaded into the VPE
Workbench project using facilities on the VPE Workbench Configuration Category of
the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program.
These facilities enable users to "manually" copy the output files generated by the
synchronisation procedure into the publishing area, from where they will automatically
be imported into the VPE Workbench database. Data from multiple drawings may be
transferred using this procedure.
5. If it is only required to transfer data to an SQL database, data is automatically
transferred to the SQL database specified in the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration
program during synchronisation.
6. The Export to P&ID Reports checkbox and the Export & Consolidate Database
checkbox are only relevant to the Exporting Data to a P&ID Reports and/or AVEVA
Engineering Database procedure.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:200 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

7. To enter a description or comments regarding this synchronisation process select the

Add/Edit Description button. The Description dialog is then displayed:

Enter the required description and select the OK button.

Note: If a description is not entered before the synchronisation process is started, the
Description dialog may be displayed automatically during the process depending on
the project configuration (see above).

8. To initiate the synchronisation procedure, select the Synchronise button.

The progress of the procedure is displayed using a progress bar, and a count of the
number of tasks successfully completed or failed.
While synchronisation is in progress the label of Synchronise button changes to
Cancel. Select this button to abort the procedure.
9. If a description of the export was not entered before the synchronisation process was
started (see above), the Description dialog may be displayed automatically during the
process (depending on the project configuration). Enter a description as required and
select the OK button.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:201 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

10. Select the Details >> button to view further details. The Details pane is then displayed.

11. The Details pane consists of two tabs, Tasks and Details.
The Tasks tab displays the list of synchronisation tasks and the status of these tasks:
Processing , Complete , Fail , or Pending.
12. The Details tab displays processing details of each engineering item, i.e. error ,
warning and success messages.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:202 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

13. If only error and warning messages are to be displayed, check the Show error and
warning messages only checkbox.
14. Double-click on a message to select the item on the drawing. Any errors and warnings
associated with the item can then be fixed. For details of errors and warning, and
suggested solutions, see Error and Warning Messages.
Note: Error and warning messages are also added to the drawing. These can be deleted
individually as required, or all them can be deleted at once using the Deleting Error
Blocks procedure.

15. The Synchronise dialog box remains open so that further items can be selected and
problems resolved.
16. A monitor file is generated by the synchronisation procedure, which lists the messages
displayed in the Details tab. Select the View button to open this file in Notepad.
17. When synchronisation is complete the label of Cancel button changes to Close. Select
this button to close dialog.
18. If NETOUTPUTBATCH was entered at the Command prompt, the synchronisation
process is carried out but the he Synchronise dialog box is not displayed. The progress
of the procedure is displayed at the Command prompt.
19. Whichever method is selected, a redraw may be required at the end of the process to
remove the highlighting which appeared during the pipe validation.

• Error and Warning Messages

• Errors
• Warnings

- Errors
ERROR: 144 Too many routes away from point
Problem:
A pipe component is connected to more than multiple components that could be valid
routes for the pipe.
A valid pipe consists of a collection of in-line components and pipe segments that are
graphically connected to each other from its source, represented by the start node
symbol, to its destination, represented by the end node symbol. Each of the
components must be connected to each other at their connections points and there
must only be one possible graphical route from source to destination.
Solutions:
Check if the entity or connection point flag indicated by the error mark contains more
than one possible valid route for a pipe. For instance, a pipe tee is detected where the
other pipe has not been labelled.
Label the unlabelled pipe and try again.
Check for overlapping pipe segments.
Delete one of the pipe segments.
Check for pipe segments or pipe items belonging to different pipes that are too close to
each other.
This error can also occur on rare occasions in extremely crowded drawings where it is
not possible to distinguish whether the items are connected to each other or not.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:203 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

Stretch the pipes away from each other as much as possible.

Try not to use symbols with very small lengths. For instance, double flanges. Try to
keep symbol lengths to at least 2 millimetres minimum for metric projects, or 0.004
inches for imperial projects.
ERROR: 145 No routes away from point
Problem:
The synchronise routine cannot find a valid graphical route from the pipe source to the
pipe destination.
A valid pipe consists of a collection of in-line components and pipe segments that are
graphically connected to each other from its source, represented by the start node
symbol, to its destination, represented by the end node symbol. Each of the
components must be connected to each other at their connections points.
Solutions:
Check that all the components and pipe segments are connected to each other.
Edit the component to ensure it physically touches the other line components at their
connection points.
Check that the angles of the start nodes (pipe source) and end nodes (pipe destination)
coincide with the angles of the first elements connected to them.
Use rotate command to align the node with the connecting pipe elements.
ERROR: 153 Drawing Number missing from drawing - Validation Aborted
Problem:
The drawing has not been assigned a drawing name.
Solution:
Access the item Properties dialog and complete the drawing name field.
ERROR: 155 Reducer with NO Label
Problem:
The line reducer has not been assigned a tag.
Solution:
Access the item Properties dialog and complete the mandatory label fields.
Note that this error can be downgraded to a warning by unchecking the "Reducer not
Labelled" Error-Balloon Placement checkbox on the Label Types Configuration
Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program.
ERROR: 309 Amount of Typical data does not match owner
ERROR: 321 Amount of Typical data does not match connected pipe
ERROR: 396 Amount of typical Data does not match branch source or Destination
Problem:
The number of typical records allocated to an engineering item (equipment, valve,
instrument, branch, on/off dialog connector or line fitting) does not match with the
number of typical records allocated to the engineering items that are graphically
connected to it.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:204 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

Solution:
Check that the number of typical records allocated to the engineering items graphically
connected to each other match, and correct is necessary.
ERROR: 332 Unable to connect to database
Problem:
The system cannot transfer the drawing data to the project database, because of a
database connection problem.
Solutions:
Check that the target database is working.
Check that the database Middle tier is working.
Check that the network connection is working.
ERROR: 343 Duplicate instruments, fix drawing
Problem:
A duplicated instrument exists in the active drawing
Solution:
Find the pair of duplicated instrument and change the tag number of one of them. The
Detail list can be use to search for the duplicate instrument tags. See 8.9.6: List Item
Details.
ERROR: 398 Unable to transfer Data to Workbench, please contact system
administrator
Problem:
The system is not able to transfer the data to the oracle database.
Solutions:
The Oracle Client might not be properly installed or configured on the client machine.
Ensure the Oracle client has been installed on the local machine
Oracle OLE DB drivers must also be installed from the official Oracle CD.
Oracle OLE DB drivers can be found on the Oracle 9i or Oracle 10g CD.
The Oracle version installed must be compatible with the target project database
The project database selected during the installation of AVEVA P&ID patch 14 must
match that of target project database.

- Warnings
WARNING: 8 Nozzle without Label
Problem:
The nozzle has not been assigned a tag.
Solution:
Access the item Properties dialog and complete the mandatory label fields.
WARNING: 9 Nozzle without Size

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:205 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

Problem:
An equipment nozzle has not been sized.
Solution:
Access the item Properties dialog and complete the size field.
WARNING: 21 Pipe Flag with no labels
Problem:
An off dialog connector does not have a label.
Solution:
Access the item Properties dialog and add a label to the off dialog connector.
WARNING: 35 Branch id NOT assigned for item
Problem:
The system cannot find the owner pipe of an engineering item, such as a valve or an
instrument measurement balloon.
Solutions:
Make sure the item is graphically connected to the pipe network via a process link.
If item is connected to a vessel, use trim pipes to link the item to the trim pipe data.
Avoid complicated arrangements with process links whenever possible. Try using
tagged pipes instead.
WARNING: 51 Reducer has no label. Downstream item sizes will be affected
Problem:
The line reducer has not been assigned a tag.
Solution:
Access the item Properties dialog and complete the mandatory label fields.
Note that this warning can be upgraded to a warning by checking the "Reducer not
Labelled" Error-Balloon Placement checkbox on the Label Types Configuration
Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program.
WARNING: 74 Port without Size
Problem:
A valve port has not been assigned a tag.
Solution:
Access the item Properties dialog and complete the mandatory label fields.
WARNING: 78 Reducer Label Associated to the wrong Label set
Problem:
The wrong pipe label set has been selected to label a reducer.
Solution:
Delete the reducer.
Select the correct pipe segment size to retain when prompted.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:206 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

Insert the reducer symbol again. This time select the nearest label upstream of the
reducer from the correct pipe label set. If there are no upstream labels, then the pipe
start node should be selected instead.
WARNING 80: Could not validate TEE connection, Fix drawing
Problem:
The lengths of one or more pipe segments connected to a TEE are too small.
Solutions:
Join any pipe segment that is too small to the contiguous one that belongs to the same
branch.
If it is an extremely crowded drawing, try stretching the TEE one snap away from its
position.
WARNING: 82 Size mismatch at Joint
Problem:
Two joined branches are different sizes at the join.
Solution:
Change the size of one of the branches to match the other using the Properties dialog
of the appropriate reducer or pipe segment.
WARNING: 83 Equipment item without tag letters
Problem:
The equipment has not been assigned a tag, or tag includes the null project character.
Solution:
Access the item Properties dialog and complete the mandatory label fields.
WARNING: 84 Nozzle connection size mismatch
Problem:
A nozzle is connected to a pipe which has a different size at the connection point
Solution:
Change the size either of the pipe or the nozzle, whichever is applicable, or delete the
nozzle size label. The unlabelled nozzle will then automatically inherit its size from the
connected pipe.

8.8.7 Synchronising Multiple Drawing Data with VPE Workbench

• Description
This procedure is used to generate output files from a batch of drawings, which can
subsequently be transferred to a batch of drawings.
The transfer itself is carried out using facilities on the VPE Workbench Configuration
Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:207 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

• Instructions
1. Start the procedure by creating the SaveToModel.bat batch file. Running this file
initiates the synchronisation procedure for all the drawings in the folder specified in the
batch file.
The batch file is generated using the "MakeSaveToModelBatch" routine.
2. Before running the routine some editing may be required to the "UserStartUp" routine.
If the second method listed below is used to generate the batch file, the
"MakeSaveToModelBatch" routine may also require editing. For details, see 2.9.9:
Running AVEVA P&ID in "Save To Model Mode".
3. Create the batch file by either:
• selecting the Make Synch Batch File option in AVEVA Integration Group of the
Data Management Tab, or
• running the "MakeSaveToModelBatch" routine from the VBA Editor.
4. If the first method is selected, the Select files to process Batch Synchronise dialog is
then displayed.

Select the drawings that data is to be exported from by checking the checkboxes next
to their names. If all drawings in a folder are to be exported from, check the checkbox
next to the folder name. Select OK to create the batch file.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:208 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

5. If the second method is selected, the batch file is generated using the settings specified
by editing the "MakeSaveToModelBatch" routine, as described above.
6. The batch file can then run using standard Windows facilities, e.g. from Windows
Explorer.
The synchronisation procedure is then carried out for all the drawings in the folder
specified in the batch file. For further details see 8.8.6: Synchronising Data with a VPE
Workbench Database.
7. After the routine ends the batch file will be automatically deleted.
8. The output files generated by the routine can be transferred a VPE Workbench
Database using facilities on the VPE Workbench Configuration Category of the AVEVA
P&ID Project Administration program.

8.8.8 Connecting to a VPE Workbench Database

• Description
This procedure is used to connect to a VPE Workbench project database. Once connected
to the database, data can be transferred to VPE Workbench using the facilities on the VPE
Workbench Configuration Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program, or
placed on the drawing using Labelling with VPE Workbench Data and Exporting Data to ISO
15926 Files procedures
For details of the use of this procedure in the context of drawing P&IDs, see 6.16: Dynamic
Labelling.
See also 7.5: Exporting Data to a VPE Workbench Database.

• Instructions
1. Start the procedure by either:
• selecting VPE Logon from the drawing shortcut menu of the Engineering Explorer,
or
• selecting the Login option in AVEVA Integration Group of the Data Management
Tab.
2. The VPE Workbench Login dialog box is then displayed:

Complete the Username and Password fields, and select the required project from the
drop-down list in the Project field.
Click OK.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:209 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

3. The command ends automatically.

8.8.9 Disconnecting from a VPE Workbench Database

• Description
This procedure is used to disconnect from a VPE Workbench project database.
For details of the use of this procedure in the context of drawing P&IDs, see 6.16: Dynamic
Labelling.
See also 7.5: Exporting Data to a VPE Workbench Database.

• Instructions
1. Start the procedure by either:
• selecting VPE Logoff from the drawing shortcut menu of the Engineering Explorer,
or
• selecting the Logout option in AVEVA Integration Group of the Data Management
Tab.

8.8.10 Labelling with VPE Workbench Data

• Description
This procedure is used to label equipment, instruments and lines with detail data from a
VPE Workbench project database. These labels can subsequently be automatically updated
with current VPE Workbench data, or manually using the Exporting Data to ISO 15926 Files
procedure. An item must exist in VPE Workbench for it to be labelled in this way.
A connection to the VPE Workbench database in question must first be established by
following the Connecting to a VPE Workbench Database procedure.
For details of the use of this procedure in the context of drawing P&IDs, see 6.16: Dynamic
Labelling.

• Example

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:210 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

• Associated Project Configuration Options

If VPE Workbench data is to be automatically refreshed whenever a connection to VPE
Workbench is made, the Auto-Refresh VPE Workbench Data checkbox on the
Miscellaneous - Settings Sub-Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program
must be checked.

• Instructions
1. Start the procedure by selecting the Properties option in AVEVA Integration Group of
the Data Management Tab.
2. The Command prompt will then display:

Select Entity or Branch Label

Select the item that is be labelled with VPE Workbench data. In the case of equipment
or instruments, select the body of the item itself. In the case of a line, select the label.
3. The Designator Form is then displayed:

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:211 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

This displays a list of relevant VPE Workbench detail data designators that may be
placed on the drawing. Use the + boxes to expand the entries on the list to display the
values associated with the designators.
By default, the dialog only displays those designators that have values defined against
them. In order to have the dialog display all designators, check the Display All
Designators checkbox. Designators without values display a placeholder in the value
column, for example:
<INS Altitude value>
Where "INS" indicates the relevant entity type (in this example instrument) and
"Altitude" is the designator name. Other entity types are EQU for equipment, PIP for
piping and DWG for drawing.
4. Select VPE Workbench data to place on the drawing by checking the checkboxes
adjacent to the designators and values or value placeholders. It is possible to add a
value or value placeholder to a drawing without the associated designator, but a
designator may not be placed without the associated value or value placeholder.
As required, select further items to label and repeat the process.
Click OK.
5. The Command prompt will then display:

Indicate insertion point for VPE Workbench data field

Indicate the required position on the drawing for the first VPE Workbench data that was
selected. Repeat for each selected VPE Workbench data.
The command then ends automatically.

• Viewing VPE Workbench Properties

To view all the current VPE Workbench properties associated with an item labelled in this
way, select the item and access the VPE Workbench dialog as described above. This
enables a user to assess whether or not a refresh of the label data is required. Additional
data may also be selected to label the item.
If a drawing number, placed on the drawing using the Adding a Title to a Drawing and
entering Drawing Sheet Attributes, is associated with a VPE Workbench project, details of
that project may be viewed using this method. The association between a P&ID drawing
number label and Workbench project data takes place automatically.

8.8.11 Inserting Tables of VPE Workbench Data

• Description
This procedure is used to insert tables on a drawing which are populated with data from a
VPE Workbench project database. This data can be updated with current VPE Workbench
as described below.
A connection to the VPE Workbench database in question must be established before
placing/refreshing the tables by following the by following the Connecting to a VPE
Workbench Database procedure.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:212 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

For details of the use of this procedure in the context of drawing P&IDs, see 6.16: Dynamic
Labelling.

• Example

• Associated Project Configuration Options

• The appearance, position and content of tables are defined using the VPE Workbench
- Tables Sub-Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program.
• If VPE Workbench data is to be automatically refreshed whenever a connection to VPE
Workbench is made, the Auto-Refresh VPE Workbench Data checkbox on the
Miscellaneous - Settings Sub-Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration
program must be checked.

• Instructions
1. Start the procedure by selecting the Insert Tables option in AVEVA Integration Group
of the Data Management Tab.
2. All tables defined in the Administration program are then placed on the drawing in the
specified positions. They may then be repositioned if necessary.
If any of the tables are not required on the drawing, they may be deleted.

• Refreshing Table Data

To manually refresh table data with current data from VPE Workbench, select the Insert
Tables option as described above. All table data is then refreshed. Also, any new tables
defined in the Administration program since the last occasion that tables were inserted or
refreshed are placed on the drawing.
Tables that have been moved or deleted will reappear in the positions specified by the
Administration program when table data is refreshed.

8.8.12 Refreshing VPE Workbench Data

• Description
This procedure is used to manually refresh VPE Workbench data displayed on the drawing,
with the latest data from the project database. Before this procedure is initiated, a

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:213 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

connection with the database must be established using the Connecting to a VPE
Workbench Database procedure.
For details of the use of this procedure in the context of drawing P&IDs, see 6.16: Dynamic
Labelling.

• Associated Project Configuration Options

If VPE Workbench data is to be manually refreshed using this procedure, rather then
automatically refreshed whenever a connection to VPE Workbench is made, the Auto-
Refresh VPE Workbench Data checkbox on the Miscellaneous - Settings Sub-Category of
the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program must not be checked.

• Instructions
1. Start the procedure by selecting the Refresh option in AVEVA Integration Group of the
Data Management Tab.
2. Data that has been changed in the project database since it was placed or last
refreshed on the drawing is then refreshed.
Where value placeholders were placed on a drawing for designators without defined
values, these placeholders are replaced if values have since been entered against
those designators in the database.
The command then ends automatically.

8.8.13 Transferring Data from AVEVA Instrumentation and AVEVA Electrical

• Description
This procedure is used to transfer instrument and electrical equipment data from AVEVA
Instrumentation and AVEVA Electrical by placing instruments from AVEVA Instrumentation
and electrical equipment from AVEVA Electrical onto project drawings.
For further information see 7.2: Transferring Data to and from AVEVA Instrumentation and
AVEVA Electrical.

• Associated Project Configuration Options

• Whether or not the AVEVA Instrumentation and AVEVA Electrical nodes in the P&ID
Data Grid are displayed is controlled on the AI Integration Configuration Category and
the AE Integration Configuration Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration
program.
• If required, one of the AVEVA P&ID tag fields of transferred instrument and equipment
may be automatically populated with the Area properties of the items in AVEVA
Instrumentation or AVEVA Electrical. The tag fields are selected using the Derive
Instrument AREA From and the Derive Equipment AREA From fields on the AI
Integration Configuration Category and the AE Integration Configuration Category.

• Instructions
1. Start the procedure by opening the P&ID Data Grid and logging on to the required
AVEVA Instrumentation or AVEVA Electrical project. See P&ID Data Grid - 4.5.5:
Viewing and Assigning AVEVA Instrumentation and AVEVA Electrical Data for details.
2. Under the AVEVA Instrumentation node in the P&ID Data Grid, the Unassigned
Instruments node lists each instrument type. Under the AVEVA Electrical node in the
P&ID Data Grid, the Unassigned Electrical Equipment node lists each electrical

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:214 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

equipment type. Select an instrument or electrical equipment type. Details of each item
of the selected type in the AVEVA Instrumentation or AVEVA Electrical project that has
not been added to a drawing in the AVEVA P&ID project are then displayed in the grid
in the right-hand window.

3. From the grid, select the item to be assigned and drag and drop it into the drawing
window.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:215 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

4. The Symbol List dialog is then displayed.

Select the AVEVA P&ID symbol type for the instrument or electrical equipment and
click OK.
5. A 'ghosted' image of the selected instrument or electrical equipment symbol appears
on the crosshairs and the Command prompt will then display:

Insertion point:

Place the symbol on the drawing as required.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:216 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

6. The item is moved from the Unassigned Instruments or Unassigned Electrical

Equipment list in the P&ID Data Grid to the Assigned Instruments or Assigned
Electrical Equipment list.

Imported instruments are added to the UNNAMED node in the Instrument Loops
section of the Engineering Explorer.

8.8.14 Transferring Data to PDMS Schematic Databases

• Description
This procedure is used to transfer data from an AVEVA P&ID drawing into a PDMS
Schematic database. Data from the current drawing is transferred.
For further information see 7.3.1: Integration with PDMS Schematics.

Note: Data can also be exported from single or multiple drawings to XML files in ISO 15928
format. This data can subsequently be imported into a Schematic database using the
AVEVA PDMS or AVEVA Marine Schematic Model Manager module. See 8.8.16:
Exporting Data to ISO 15926 Files.

• Associated Project Configuration Options

The installation of PDMS that the AVEVA P&ID project is integrated with is selected on the
PDMS Integration Category Pane of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program.
Whether or not the AVEVA Schematic Database node in the P&ID Data Grid is displayed is
controlled on the PDMS Integration - Schematics Sub-Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project
Administration program.
A default project and database can be selected PDMS Integration - Schematics Sub-
Category.

• Instructions
1. Start the procedure by opening the P&ID Data Grid and logging on to the required
PDMS Schematic database See P&ID Data Grid - Viewing and Exporting to a PDMS
Schematic Database for details.
2. Start the data transfer by either:
• selecting the Save Work option in AVEVA Integration Group of the Data
Management Tab, or

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:217 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

• right-clicking on the AVEVA Schematic Database node in the P&ID Data Grid and
selecting the Save Work option from the menu that is then displayed.
3. The Save Work Progress dialog is then displayed and the transfer of data started.

The progress of the transfer procedure is displayed in the Save Work Progress bar.
Details of the transfer are displayed in the Summary tab.
If the transfer is completed with errors or warnings, a message informing the user of
this is displayed at the bottom of the dialog. Details of errors and warnings are
displayed on the Errors tab.
To open a log file of the transfer summary and the errors/warnings, select the View
button.
To hide the Summary and Errors tabs, select the Details button. Select the button
again to display them again.

8.8.15 Publishing Data to AVEVA NET

• Description
This procedure is used to export data from a drawing into files that can subsequently be
imported into AVEVA NET Portal.

Note: Facilities to export data from multiple drawings, and to export drawing data a remote
AVEVA NET server are available in the AVEVA NET - Advanced Options Sub-
Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:218 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

For further information see 7.6: Exporting Data to AVEVA NET.

• Associated Project Configuration Options

The export is configured using the AVEVA NET - Configurations Sub-Category, AVEVA NET
- Mappings Sub-Category and AVEVA NET - Setting Sub-Category of the AVEVA P&ID
Project Administration program.

• Instructions
1. Start the procedure by selecting the Publish to AVEVA NET option in AVEVA
Integration Group of the Data Management Tab.
2. The export then takes place and the drawing data is exported to the staging area
specified in the project configuration. A progress dialog is displayed:

3. When the export is complete, if a log file has been specified in the project configuration,
a message is displayed:

Click on the link to view the log file.

8.8.16 Exporting Data to ISO 15926 Files

• Description
This procedure is used to export data from drawings to XML files in ISO 15928 format. This
data can subsequently be imported into a Schematic database using the AVEVA PDMS or
AVEVA Marine Schematic Model Manager module.
Data can be exported from a single drawing or from multiple drawings.

Note: Data can also be exported to XML files in ISO 15928 format using the AVEVA P&ID
Upgrade Utility. See 2.1: Upgrading Pipes and Symbols from old Projects for details.

Note: Data can also be exported directly from a single drawing into a PDMS Schematic
database. See 8.8.14: Transferring Data to PDMS Schematic Databases.

• Associated Project Configuration Options

• The folder into which the XML files and export log files are placed is specified in the
VPE Data Path field of the Project Configuration Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project
Administration program.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:219 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

• The default folder from which drawings are selected is specified in the Save Path field
of the Project Configuration Category.
• The XML schema used, and the appearance of the SVG files used to display drawings
in P&ID Manager/PDMS, and the Presentation mapping used, are specified using user
defined directives set up in the User Defined Directives section of the Miscellaneous -
Settings Sub-Category.
• The “Piping Network System Format”, i.e. the format of pipe labels output to ISO 15926
format XML files, is set using the USER_PIPINGNETWORKSYSTEMFORMAT user-
defined directive on the Miscellaneous - Settings Sub-Category.

• Instructions
• Exporting from a Single Drawing
• Exporting from Multiple Drawings

- Exporting from a Single Drawing

1. Start the procedure by selecting the ISO 15926 option in AVEVA Integration Group of
the Data Management Tab.
2. The export will then take place. The progress of the export will be indicated in a
progress bar at the bottom of the application window.
3. A log file displaying details of the export, including any error and warnings, is then
automatically displayed in Notepad.
The exported XML file and the log file are located in the VPE Data Path field (see
Associated Project Configuration Options above).

- Exporting from Multiple Drawings

1. Start the procedure by selecting the ISO 15926 Batch option in AVEVA Integration
Group of the Data Management Tab.
2. The Browse For Folder dialog is then displayed:

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:220 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

Select the folder in which the drawings are located. By default, the drawing save folder
is selected. Note that if this has not been specified in the AVEVA P&ID Project
Administration program (see above), the batch import will not function.
Data will be exported from all drawings in the selected folder.
3. Press the OK button.
The export will then take place. The progress of the export will be indicated in a
progress bar at the bottom of the application window, and in the command prompt, for
example:

1 of 7 905675.dwg Drawing file exported successfully

2 of 7 905676.dwg Drawing file exported successfully

4. When the export is complete, a message is displayed (for example):

The exported XML files and the export log files are located in the VPE Data Path field
(see Associated Project Configuration Options above).

8.8.17 Exporting Data to Excel

• Description
This procedure is used to export item and drawing data to Microsoft Excel spreadsheets.
The data can then be edited in the spreadsheet and imported back into AVEVA P&ID using
separate procedures. See 8.8.18: Editing P&ID Data in an Excel Spreadsheet and 8.8.19:
Importing Data from Excel.
Data can be exported from a single drawing or from a batch of drawings. A spreadsheet is
generated for each drawing that data is exported from.
For more details on the use of this procedure, see 7.8: Transferring Data to and from Excel.

• Associated Project Configuration Options

• Exported items can either be grouped by item types or item groups on the spreadsheet.
This setting is made on the Excel Interface Configuration Category pane of the AVEVA
P&ID Project Administration program.
• The default item type filter, i.e. the default list of type of items for which data is to be
exported, is also set on the Excel Interface Configuration Category pane. A different set
of type of item to be exported can be selected for an export if required (see below).
• The location of the Excel spreadsheets is also set on the Excel Interface Configuration
Category pane.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:221 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

• Designators and values from other databases may included in the export depending on
the settings of the USER_EXPORTDESIGNATORS and
USER_EXPORTDESIGNATORVALUES user-defined directives on the Miscellaneous -
Settings Sub-Category.

• Instructions
• Filtering the Export
• Exporting from a Single Drawing
• Exporting from Multiple Drawings

- Filtering the Export

The default item type filter for exports, i.e. the default list of type of items for which data is to
be exported, is set on the Excel Interface Configuration Category of the AVEVA P&ID
Project Administration program.
To specify a different set of item types to be exported for an individual export, select the
Excel Filter option in Import/Export Group of the Data Management Tab
The Excel Filter menu is then displayed:

It initially displays the default filter settings as set up in the Administration program. Change
the filter settings for subsequent exports during the current session by checking and
unchecking the checkboxes as required.

- Exporting from a Single Drawing

1. Start the procedure selecting the Excel Export option in Import/Export Group of the
Data Management Tab.
2. A spreadsheet is then generated with the same name as the drawing, in the following
location:
C:\AVEVA\P&ID\PROJECT\name of project\Vantage\name of the drawing.xls

Note: The spreadsheet will overwrite a previous spreadsheet exported from the drawing.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:222 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

A message is also displayed. For example:

The spreadsheet can then be edited using the Editing P&ID Data in an Excel
Spreadsheet procedure.
For details of the layout and contents of the spreadsheet, see 10.7: Format of the Excel
Interface Spreadsheet.

- Exporting from Multiple Drawings

This procedure is used to generate a spreadsheet for every drawing in a selected folder by
creating and running a batch file.
1. Start the procedure by selecting the Make Excel Export Batch File option in Import/
Export Group of the Data Management Tab.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:223 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

2. The Select files to process Excelout dialog is then displayed.

Select the drawings that data is to be exported from by checking the checkboxes next
to their names. If all drawings in a folder are to be exported from, check the checkbox
next to the folder name. Select OK.
3. The batch file is then created in the same folder as the folder containing the selected
drawings:

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:224 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

4. The batch file can then run using standard Windows facilities, e.g. from Windows
Explorer. All the AutoCAD sessions must be closed when running the batch file.

5. Spreadsheets are then generated with the same names as the drawings, in the
following location:
C:\AVEVA\P&ID\PROJECT\name of project\Vantage

Note: The spreadsheets will overwrite a previous spreadsheets exported from the
drawings.

Spreadsheets can then be edited using the Editing P&ID Data in an Excel Spreadsheet
procedure.
For details of the layout and contents of the spreadsheets, see 10.7: Format of the
Excel Interface Spreadsheet.

8.8.18 Editing P&ID Data in an Excel Spreadsheet

• Description
This procedure used to:
• edit data exported from AVEVA P&ID to a spreadsheet (see 8.8.17: Exporting Data to
Excel)
• after this data has been imported back into AVEVA P&ID (see 8.8.19: Importing Data
from Excel), correct any errors such as invalid values detected in the spreadsheet
before re-importing.
For more details on the use of this procedure, see 7.8: Transferring Data to and from Excel.

• Associated Project Configuration Options

• The lists of valid values against which imported item values are checked are stored in
the location specified Project Configuration Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project
Administration program.
• The valid values themselves are set up using the List of Values Configuration Category
pane.
• For each item group, e.g. drawing attributes, equipment, pipes etc, the column that
data is imported from, i.e. NEW or not, is selected on the Excel Interface Configuration
Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program.
• The location of the Excel spreadsheets is also set on the Excel Interface Configuration
Category pane.

• Instructions
1. Start the procedure by:
• selecting the Excel Open option in Import/Export Group of the Data Management
Tab, or

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:225 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

• clicking on the link in the message that is displayed when the export procedure is
complete. For example:

The spreadsheet containing the exported drawing data will then open.
For details of the layout and contents of the spreadsheet, see 10.7: Format of the Excel
Interface Spreadsheet.
2. Edit details of items and the drawing as required. This can be done in two ways:
• Editing the existing values in the spreadsheet.
• Each column containing values that can be edited has a corresponding NEW
column in which new values can be entered. For example, in a worksheet
containing a TAG column, there will also be a NEW TAG column.
The NEW fields are provided to enable users to compare the original attributes with the
modified ones. Which columns are to be used for each item group is set by project
configuration (see above).

• Points to Note when Editing Data:

• The following fields are validated:
• Area
• Line size in imperial units
• Line size in metric units
• Insulation index
• Insulation condition
• Insulation table
• Paint Code
• Fluid Service
• Specification
• Tracing number
• Tracing size
• Tracing type
• Instrument type
• Action when valve fail
• Valve code
During the import process, validated fields are checked against lists of valid values set
up using the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program. They must not be left blank.
• Some fields are insertable, others are only updateable (assuming they are not read-
only). Updateable fields can only be amended in a spreadsheet. In other words, if they
do not already exist on a drawing (and therefore can be exported to a spreadsheet),
they can only be changed in a spreadsheet, not added.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:226 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

• Insertable fields are label fields that can be added as new labels for items. When the
spreadsheet is imported, these new labels will be place on the drawing. Columns in
which insertable labels can entered can be identified on a spreadsheet as the
subsequent columns will columns used to add the offset and rotation properties of any
new labels. For example:

• If offset values for labels are not entered for new labels, the labels will be placed
directly on top of the items they are labelling.
• If offset values for labels are not entered for valve and inline fitting labels, the labels will
be placed directly on top of the items they are labelling.
• If an item group is set by project configuration to import from the NEW columns, all
validated NEW fields for that item group must be populated. If any validated NEW fields
are left blank, these will be regarded as invalid by the import process as they do not
contain valid values.
• NEW fields can quickly be populated by copying and pasting values from columns
containing current values.
• The Tracing No, Tracing Size, Tracing Type, Insulation Tab, Insulation Ind, Insulation
Con and Paint Code values of Pipes are validated and therefore should not be left
blank. However, <none> is a valid value, signifying that no value has been set for these
attributes.
• Fields of attributes that are not validated may be left blank if not value has been
assigned to these attributes.
• If an off-sheet connector or drawing data attribute is changed to an empty field, this will
result in an error on import, i.e. the row in question will be flagged as invalid.
• The drawing number of the P&ID can only be changed by editing using the Drawing
Data worksheet. Changes to the drawing number made on other worksheets will be
ignored by the import.
• Although the spreadsheets include columns for both the upstream and the downstream
size values of reducers, only changes made to the downstream values will result in
changes to the drawing. Changes made to upstream values will be ignored.
• Values in the HANDLE columns must NOT be edited. If handles are edited, this will
result in an error on import.
• During the import process, the tags of items will be checked to ensure that they
correspond to the formatting and uniqueness rules set up using the Pipes
Configuration Category, Instruments Configuration Category, Equipment Configuration
Category, Valves Configuration Category and Miscellaneous Configuration Category of
the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program.
• The performance of the import procedure can be improved by deleting worksheets that
do not contain changes.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:227 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

• After the import has taken place, rows in the spreadsheet containing errors are
displayed in red, and are not imported. In this example, the value in the SIZE field of
the first item row is invalid:

• During the import:, any errors and inconsistencies are written to a file, ErrorLog.html, in
the following location:
C:\AVEVA\P&ID\PROJECT\name of project\Vantage\
For example:

The file can be opened by double-clicking on a row in the spreadsheet containing an

error.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:228 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

• Rows in the spreadsheet containing valid changes displayed in green:

8.8.19 Importing Data from Excel

• Description
This procedure is used to import item and drawing data from Microsoft Excel spreadsheets.
This data is exported to the spreadsheet and edited using separate procedures. See 8.8.17:
Exporting Data to Excel and 8.8.18: Editing P&ID Data in an Excel Spreadsheet.
Data can be imported into a single drawing or into a batch of drawings from which data was
previously exported to a spreadsheet.

Note: Once an import is complete, the drawing must be refreshed in order to be updated by
the imported data. See 8.9.3: Regenerating the Drawing.

For more details on the use of this procedure, see 7.8: Transferring Data to and from Excel.

• Associated Project Configuration Options

• For each item group, e.g. drawing attributes, equipment, pipes etc, the column that
data is imported from, i.e. NEW or not, is selected on the Excel Interface Configuration
Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program.
• The location of the Excel spreadsheets is also set on the Excel Interface Configuration
Category pane.
• The lists of valid values against which imported item values are checked are stored in
the location specified Project Configuration Category.
• The valid values themselves are set up using the List of Values Configuration
Category.

• Instructions
• Importing to a Single Drawing
• Importing to Multiple Drawings

- Importing to a Single Drawing

1. Start the procedure selecting the Excel Import option in Import/Export Group of the
Data Management Tab.
2. The data is validated on import against the valid values set up for the project using the
Project Administration program.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:229 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

Details of the import process are displayed in a window, eg. its progress and any errors
and warning. For example:

Any errors and inconsistencies are written to a file, ErrorLog.html, in the following
location:
C:\AVEVA\P&ID\PROJECT\name of project\Vantage\

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:230 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

For example:

Rows in the spreadsheet containing valid changes displayed in green. Rows in the
spreadsheet containing errors are displayed in red.
Data in rows containing errors is not imported. To correct errors, use the Editing P&ID
Data in an Excel Spreadsheet procedure, and carry out the import procedure again to
import the corrected data.
For details of the layout and contents of the spreadsheet, see 10.7: Format of the Excel
Interface Spreadsheet.

- Importing to Multiple Drawings

This procedure is used to import data into every drawing in a selected folder (from which
data has previously been exported to a spreadsheet) by creating and running a batch file.
1. Start the procedure by selecting the Make Excel Import Batch File option in Import/
Export Group of the Data Management Tab.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:231 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

2. The Select files to process Excelin dialog is then displayed.

Select the drawings that data is to be imported to by checking the checkboxes next to
their names. If all drawings in a folder are to be imported to, check the checkbox next to
the folder name. Select OK.
3. The batch file is then created in the same folder as the folder containing the selected
drawings:

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:232 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

4. The batch file can then run using standard Windows facilities, e.g. from Windows
Explorer. All the AutoCAD sessions must be closed when running the batch file.

5. The data is validated on import against the valid values set up for the project using the
Project Administration program. Any errors and inconsistencies are written to a file,
ErrorLog.html, in the following location:
C:\AVEVA\P&ID\PROJECT\name of project\Vantage
For example:

Rows in spreadsheets containing valid changes displayed in green. Rows in

spreadsheets containing errors are displayed in red.
Data in rows containing errors is not imported. To correct errors, use the Editing P&ID
Data in an Excel Spreadsheet procedure, and carry out the import procedure again to
import the corrected data.
For details of the layout and contents of the spreadsheets, see 10.7: Format of the
Excel Interface Spreadsheet.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:233 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

8.8.20 Exporting Symbols

• Description
This procedure is used to export the symbols on a drawing. It copies all the symbols on a
drawing to the ExportSymbols folder of the project. From there they may be edited, or
manually copied elsewhere, e.g. to another project.

• Instructions
1. Start the procedure by selecting the Upgrade Utility Commands > Export Symbols
option from The Drawing Page shortcut menu or by selecting the Export Symbols
option in Non-Intelligent Entities Upgrade Group of the Utilities Tab.
2. The Symbol List dialog is then displayed:

The dialog lists all the symbols on the drawing.

To select a symbol for export, check its Include checkbox. To check all Include
checkboxes, select the Select All button. The Select All button then changes to the
UnSelect All button, used to uncheck all Include checkboxes.
3. Once all required symbols have been selected for export, select the Process button.
The selected symbols are then exported.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:234 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

They are processed one at a time. A dialog is opened which displays each symbol as it
is processed:

4. Once the process is converted, a message displays the number of symbols

successfully export.

The selected symbols are copied to ExportSymbols folder of the project, as displayed
in the message. They can be viewed by clicking on this folder in the Symbol Explorer.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:235 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

8.9 Utilities

8.9.1 Creating Assemblies

• Description
This procedure is used to group to together drawing objects to create assemblies.
Three types of assembly may be created:
• Graphical Assemblies - pipes and symbols collected together into an AutoCAD block to
act as templates, retaining the item associations
• Design Data Templates - collections of VPE Workbench or P&ID Data Grid designators
and values used to label items.
• Annotation Assemblies - there are two sub-types of Annotation Assemblies:
• Pipe: collections of pipe labels and symbols used to annotate pipes
• UDA: collections of user-defined attribute labels and symbols used to annotate
pipes, instruments and equipment.
Existing assemblies may only be removed by the AVEVA P&ID administrator.
For details of the use of this procedure in the context of drawing P&IDs, see and 6.14:
Assemblies.

• Example

• Associated Project Configuration Options

When an assembly is created, all tag values of the items that were selected to form that
assembly that are checked for project uniqueness are "nulled". Enter Yes as the setting of
the USER_PRESERVEASMTAGS user-defined directives on the Miscellaneous - Settings

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:236 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

Sub-Category if this is not required. Such values will then be placed every time assemblies
are placed. Note that this will have implications for the uniqueness of tags in the project.

• Errors
To prevent redefinitions that may have project wide implications, users cannot redefine
existing blocks. Only an administrator may do this. If a user attempts this, an error message
is displayed.

• Instructions
1. Start the procedure by selecting the Assembly option in Symbol Group of the Home
Tab.
2. The following option is then displayed:

Select either DDT (for Design Data Templates), GRA (for Graphical Assemblies) or
ANN (for Annotation Assemblies) as required.
3. If ANN was selected, the following is then displayed:

Select either Pipe or UDA, depending on the type of Annotation Assembly required.
4. If UDA was selected, the following is then displayed:

Select the category of item which the UDA assembly will be used to annotate.
5. Once the assembly type is selected, the Command prompt will then display:

Select objects to create assembly (Select using Crossing[C],

Crossing Polygon[CP]:

Graphically select entities (including any required labels or designators) using the
selection methods listed at the prompt.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:237 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

6. The Command prompt will then display:

Pick a base point:

Pick a logical insertion point.

7. The Command prompt will then display (for example):

Specify the Assembly name:

Enter the name of the assembly and press Enter.

8. The Command prompt will then display (for example):

Specify the Assembly description:

Enter a description of the assembly and press Enter. The assembly is then created.
As users cannot delete assemblies, they must be properly managed on a project. All
assembly names and descriptions should be logical and follow any conventions
already in use.
The assembly is added to the Assemblies symbol folder of the project. There is a sub-
folder for each assembly type. In addition, the Annotation Assembly sub-folder contains
sub-folders for each Annotation Assembly sub-type, and the UDA sub-type folder
contains further sub-folders for each type of UDA assembly.

Note: The Assemblies folder in the Symbol Explorer or the appropriate assembly type sub-
folder, must be refreshed before a new assembly will appear in the Symbol Explorer.

Note: This procedure differs from the AutoCAD block command in that the entities selected
to form an assembly remain on the drawing after the assembly has been created.

Assemblies are inserted in the same way as other symbols. See 8.4.11: Inserting
Assemblies.

8.9.2 Resetting Label Text to its Default Width

• Description
This procedure is used to reset the width of selected label text to the default width.

• Associated Project Configuration Options

The default text width of a label depends on the text style applied to its label type. Label
types are defined using the Label Types Configuration Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project
Administration program. Text styles are defined using the Text Styles Configuration
Category.

• Instructions
1. Start the procedure by entering AVVCHTXTWIDTH at the Command prompt.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:238 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

2. The Command prompt will then display:

Select objects or <select all>:

Select the required text.

3. The selected text is then set to the default width specified for its label type/text type.

8.9.3 Regenerating the Drawing

• Description
This procedure is used to "redraw" the drawing in order to remove unwanted highlighting,
which may occasionally persist on a drawing longer then it is required.

• Instructions
1. Start the procedure by either:
• selecting Regen from The Drawing Page menu of the drawing, or
• selecting Refresh from the Engineering Explorer menu of the drawing.
2. The drawing is then redrawn and all unwanted highlighting is removed.

8.9.4 Creating Item Associations

• Description
This procedure is primarily used to associate I/O rockets with instruments. It can also be
used re-create associations between nozzles, conditioners or instrument handwheels
should they be lost.

• Instructions
1. Start the procedure by entering ASASSOC at the Command prompt.
2. The Command prompt will display:

Select Nozzle, Conditioner or Instrument Handwheel for

association with owner

Pick the item to be associated, e.g., nozzle.

3. The Command prompt will then display:

Indicate Equipment item for association:

Pick the item to be associated, e.g. vessel.

Both items "flash" to show that association has taken place.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:239 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

4. The Command prompt will then display:

Select Nozzle, Conditioner or Instrument Handwheel for

association with owner:

Select another item if required or press Enter to execute the command.

8.9.5 Show Associations between Items

• Description
This procedure is used to show the association between items, for example, between a
vessel and its nozzles.
For details of the use of this procedure in the context of drawing P&IDs, see 6.5: Inserting
Symbols and 6.8: Drawing Pipes and Connections.

• Example

• Instructions
1. Start the procedure by selecting the Show Object Association option in Properties
Group of the Home Tab.
2. The Command prompt will display:

Select Item:

Pick an item.
3. All associated items are then highlighted, and the Command prompt will then display,
for example:

Number of Associated Objects - 12, Hit <Return> to continue:

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:240 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

In this example there are 12 items associated with the selected item.
Press Enter to end the command.

8.9.6 List Item Details

• Description
This procedure is used when validating a drawing to check information regarding a selected
item, e.g., its sequence ID, item type, owning pipe etc.
For details of the use of this procedure in the context of drawing P&IDs, see 6.11.4:
Labelling Pipes with Reducers and Reducing Valves and 6.10.4: Label Inheritance from
Owning Pipes.

Note: The sequence IDs of all entities in a pipe can be viewed and if necessary edited
using the Viewing and Editing Pipe Entity Sequences procedure.

• Instructions
1. Start the procedure by selecting the List AVEVA P&ID attributes option in Properties
Group of the Home Tab
2. The Command prompt will display:

Select entity:

Pick the item, e.g. a pipe.

3. The Command prompt will then display something similar to this:

*Item Handle: 8DC

*Registered application name: AVEVA P&ID-07058MU04269U42VFK7
*Code 1000, ASCII string: PSU

The ASCII string PSU shown above is the item type.

4. If a pipe label is picked, Sequence ID information will be displayed:

*Code 1070, Branch id: 2

*Code 1070, Sequence id: 1

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:241 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

5. If a start node is picked, the following type of information about that pipe or line will be
displayed:

Item Handle: 1B9B

*Registered application name: AVEVA P&ID-07058MU04269U42VFK7
*Code 1000, ASCII string: PSN
* Code 1070, Branch Id: 17
* Code 1005, Associated Handle: 1B9C
* Code 1005, Associated Handle: 1B9D
* Code 1000, Pipe Label field 1: 1/2"
* Code 1000, Pipe Label field 2: SW
* Code 1000, Pipe Label field 3: 20
* Code 1000, Pipe Label field 4: 2323
* Code 1000, Pipe Label field 5: S1A
* Code 1000, Pipe Label field 6: <NONE>
* Code 1000, Pipe Label field 7: <NONE>
* Code 1000, Pipe Label field 8: <NONE>
* Code 1000, Pipe Label field 9: <NONE>
* Code 1000, Pipe Label field 10: <NONE>
* Code 1000, Pipe Label field 11: <NONE>
* Code 1000, Pipe Label field 12: <NONE>

6. To identify the pipe that owns an item, carry out this procedure for an item. The owner
is identified as follows:

*Code 1070, Branch id: 2

In this example, the owner of the item is the pipe with the branch id of 2.
If the branch id is not set, the item has no owner, and no attempt has been made to
assign one. If the branch id is set to -1, an attempt has been made to graphically assign
an owner to the item, but this has failed.
7. The command ends automatically.

8.9.7 Assigning a New Branch Id to a Pipe

• Description
This procedure is used assign a new Branch Id to a pipe. This may be required if, during
drawing validation or when data is being transferred to a database (see 8.8.6: Synchronising
Data with a VPE Workbench Database), it is reported that there are pipes with duplicate
Branch Id's.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:242 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

Note: The Branch Id of a pipe can be viewed using the List Item Details procedure.

• Instructions
1. Start the procedure by selecting the Find Start Node using Branch Id option in
Project Configuration Group of the Utilities Tab.
2. The Command prompt will display:

Please Select Pipe Start Node (PSN/BSN)

Select either the start or end node of the pipe in question. The pipe will then
automatically be assigned a new, unique, Branch Id.

8.9.8 Viewing and Editing Pipe Entity Sequences

• Description
This procedure is used to view the sequence of the entities that make up a pipe, and to
change this sequence if required.
The procedure can also be used to add and remove entities to and from a pipe.

Note: The sequence number of individual entities in a pipe can be viewed using the List
Item Details procedure.

• Instructions
1. Start the procedure by selecting the Piping Sequence option in AVEVA Integration
Group of the Data Management Tab.
2. The Piping Sequence grid is then displayed:

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:243 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

3. Select any entity in a pipe. The sequence of entities in that pipe is then displayed in the
grid:

4. The grid shows the entity type and handle of each entity in the selected pipe.
5. The identity of the pipe and the total number of entities in it are displayed beneath the
grid.
6. The Current Sequence column displays the current sequence number of each entity.
7. If an entity is selected in the grid, it is highlighted in the drawing with a coloured box.
For example, the pipe segment below:

8. The current highlight colour is displayed beneath the grid in the Highlight entity with:
field. If required, a different highlight colour can be selected from the list accessible
from the Highlight entity with: field.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:244 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

9. To change the sequence of entities in the pipe, select the new sequence numbers in
the Required Sequence column.

10. When the new sequence numbers have been selected, select the Update button, or
right-click on the grid and select the Update option from the menu that is then
displayed.

11. The changes are then implemented and grid is updated to reflect this.
12. To add an entity to a pipe, right-click on the grid and select the Add Entity option from
the menu that is then displayed, then select the entity from the drawing. The selected
entity is then added to the pipe and to the grid.
The selected entity is added to the grid after the entity that was selected when the grid
was right-clicked on. The added entity is allocated the sequence number of the
selected entity plus one, and the sequence numbers of entities after the added entity
are increased by one.
13. To remove an entity from a pipe, right-click on the entity in the grid and select the
Remove Entity option from the menu that is then displayed. The entity is then
removed from the pipe and the grid. The sequence numbers of the remaining entities
are updated to reflect this, i.e. the sequence numbers of entities after the removed
entity are reduced by one.

8.9.9 Deleting Error Blocks

• Description
This procedure is used to delete all error and warning messages from a drawing.
Various AVEVA P&ID procedures may result in error and warning messages being placed
on a drawing, for example, the Synchronising Data with a VPE Workbench Database
procedure. The message blocks can be deleted individually as required, using the standard
Deleting Drawing Objects procedure, or all of them can be deleted in one go using this
procedure.
It is recommended that error and warning messages are not deleted until the problems they
are referring to are resolved.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:245 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

• Instructions
1. Start the procedure by selecting the Delete Error Blocks option in AVEVA Integration
Group of the Data Management Tab.
2. All error and warning message blocks will then be deleted from the drawing.

8.9.10 Clearing Duplicate Values with Null Drawing IDs

• Description
This procedure is used to delete duplicated drawing data that has a “null” drawing id, i.e.
data that was generated for a drawing before a drawing number was specified.

• Instructions
1. Start the procedure by entering DELETEDATAWITHNULLDRAWINGID at the
Command prompt.
2. All drawing data with a “null” drawing id is then deleted.

8.9.11 Clearing Duplicate Values with Specified Drawing IDs

• Description
This procedure is used to delete duplicated drawing data with a specific drawing id, i.e. data
associated with a specific drawing number.

• Instructions
1. Start the procedure by entering DELETEDATAWITHDRAWINGID at the Command
prompt.
2. In the dialog that is then displayed, enter the required drawing id as prompted and
select the OK button.
3. All drawing data with the entered drawing id is then deleted.

8.9.12 Viewing a Drawing’s History

• Description
This procedure is used to view the history of the current drawing, i.e. details of drawing
saves, batch synchronize operations and batch Excel import and exports.

• Instructions
1. Start the procedure by selecting the Drawing History option in Project Configuration
Group of the Utilities Tab.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:246 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

2. The Drawing History window is then displayed, on which the historical records are
listed:

8.9.13 Running a Command for a Batch of Drawings

• Description
This procedure is used to run a command for a batch of selected project drawings.
For example, the user may perform the Global Symbol Exchange procedure on every
project drawing at once, or on a set of selected drawings.

• Associated Project Configuration Options

The name of the command that is to be run on batches of drawings is set using the
USER_COMMANDNAME user-defined directive on the Miscellaneous – Settings Sub-
Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program.

• Instructions
1. Start the procedure by entering BATCHDRAWINGUPDATE at the Command prompt.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:247 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Procedures

2. The following dialog is then displayed:

3. Select the drawings that are to be updated by the procedure by checking the
checkboxes next to their names. If all drawings in a folder are to be updated, check the
checkbox next to the folder name.
4. Select OK. A batch file is then created called “UpdateDrawing.bat”.
To update the selected drawings with the command specified by the directive, run the
batch file. The batch file will be located in the main project folder.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 8:248 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Document Manager

9 AVEVA P&ID Document Manager

The AVEVA P&ID Document Manager is used to view and compare revisions of AVEVA
P&ID drawings and reports (generated using AVEVA P&ID Reports), which have been
saved to the project database.
Drawing revisions may be manually be saved (“issued”) to the project database at any time.
Refer to 8.8.5: Issuing Drawings for Document Manager for details.
They may also be saved to the database automatically when a drawing is saved or
synchronized.

Note: Drawing records are only automatically saved to the database when saving or
synchronizing if the Add P&ID Drawing Details to Database checkbox in the P&ID
Reports Configuration Category is checked.

Reports generated using AVEVA P&ID Reports are issued manually to the database using
facilities in AVEVA P&ID Reports.

9.1 Opening the AVEVA P&ID Document Manager

To open AVEVA P&ID Document Manager either:
• Select the Open Document Manager button on the Document Manager Configuration
Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program.
Note: Settings on the Document Manager Configuration Category also control when and
how drawing revisions in the Document Manager are created and updated.

• Or, click the Document Manager option in Compare Group of the Data Management
Tab.
Note: The Document Manager can also be opened via the Compare With option in
Compare Group of the Data Management Tab. See 9.5: Comparing Revisions.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 9:1 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Document Manager

The AVEVA P&ID Document Manager is then displayed with details of the drawing records
for the current project displayed.

• Or, open the AVEVA P&ID Document Manager from the desktop icon or by selecting
AVEVA Plant > Engineer > P&ID 12.1.SP1 > P&ID Document Manager from the
Programs menu.
The AVEVA P&ID Document Manager is then displayed. Open a project as described
below.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 9:2 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Document Manager

9.1.1 Opening a Project

To open a project, select the Open option from the Home tab or the File tab.

The Open option is also displayed by default on the Quick Access toolbar.
The standard Windows Open dialog is then displayed. Select the .PRJ file of the required
project and select the Open button. Details of the drawing records for the selected project
displayed.

9.2 Settings
The display of drawings and the colours used when comparing drawings and reports may
be configured.
Select the Settings option from the Home tab. The Settings tab is then displayed in the
middle section of the Document Manager. Select either the Graphics, Report Compare of
P&ID Compare sub-tab as required.

9.2.1 Graphics Tab

As required, select the display driver that the drawing viewer is to used.
Press Save to save the selection.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 9:3 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Document Manager

9.2.2 Report Compare Tab

Excel reports can be compared using the Document Manager. Select the colours used to
highlight differences using this tab.
Press the appropriate Background button and select the required colour from the colour
selection dialog that is then displayed. The selected colours are displayed under the Cell
preview heading, and on the Background button.
Press Save to save the selections.

9.2.3 P&ID Compare Tab

Drawing revisions can be compared using the Document Manager. Select the colours used
to highlight differences using this tab.
Press the appropriate button and select the required colour from the colour selection dialog
that is then displayed. The selected colours are displayed in the preview fields next to the
buttons, and on the buttons.
Press Save to save the selections.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 9:4 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Document Manager

9.3 Viewing Revision Details

Details of drawing and reports revisions are displayed in the lower section of the Document
Manager.
Drawing revisions are listed under the Drawing Id heading in the Synchronisation data tab,
report revisions under the ExcelReportName heading in the Excel Reports tab.

There will be a heading displayed for each revision that has had a revision added to the
Document Manager. Select the + button next to the drawing number or report name to
display the revision records.
Each revision record has a unique sequential ID, which is displayed in the first column.
Subsequent columns display the details of each revision.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 9:5 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Document Manager

9.3.1 Refreshing Records

New revisions of drawings or reports may be created while the Document Manager is open.
To refresh the Document Manager to display the current revision records, select the Reload
option from either the Home tab or the File tab.
The Reload option is also displayed by default on the Quick Access toolbar.

9.4 Viewing Revisions

To view a revision, right-click on it in the list of revisions and select View from the menu that
is then displayed. The drawing or report is then displayed in the middle section of the
Document Manager.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 9:6 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Document Manager

A number of standard navigation options (zoom, pan etc) are available by right-clicking on a
drawing or report, and from the Home tab.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 9:7 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Document Manager

9.5 Comparing Revisions

To compare multiple revisions of the same drawing or report either:
• Select them from the list of revision records, and then right-click and select the
Compare option from the menu that is then displayed, or from the Home tab.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 9:8 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Document Manager

• Or, select a revision from the list, right-click and select Compare > Set as Source
Drawing / Set as Source Report from the menu that is then displayed. Then right-click
on another drawing and select Compare > Set as Target Drawing / Set as Target
Report.

• Select the revision to compare the current drawing with from the list of revisions in the
Compare Group of the Data Management Tab, then click the Compare With option.
The Document Manager then opens with the current drawing compared to the selected
revision as described below.
Note: If the Document Manager is already open, it must first be closed in order for this
option to work. A message will be displayed which will request that the Document
Manager be shut.
If the user selects the Yes button, the Document Manager will close and then re-
open with the current drawing compared to the selected revision as described below.
If the user selects the No button, the command is cancelled.

Note: If the drawing has no revisions, the Compare With option is disabled.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 9:9 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Document Manager

The selected drawing or report revisions are then displayed side-by-side in the middle
section of the Document Manager.

Differences are highlighted in the colours selected in the Settings tabs (see 9.2: Settings).
Hover the mouse over a highlighted difference to displayed details in a tooltip.

9.5.1 Simultaneous Navigation

If required, the opened revisions may be navigated around simultaneously, i.e. so that the
same areas on both revisions are viewed at the same time and at the same zoom level. To
enable this feature, select the Simultaneous Navigation option from the Home tab.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 9:10 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Document Manager

9.6 Exporting Revisions

9.6.1 Exporting Drawing Revisions

To export a drawing revision to PDF, SVG or DWF format, select the Export option from the
Home tab, then select the required export format from the menu that is then displayed:

A standard Save As dialog is then displayed. Select the required location. The file name
defaults to the drawing name. Change this as required.
Press the Save button to complete the export.

9.6.2 Exporting Report Revisions

To export a report revision to an Excel spreadsheet, right-click on the revision and select
ExcelOut from the menu that is then displayed:

A standard Save As dialog is then displayed. Select the required location. The file name
defaults to the report name. Change this as required.
Press the Save button to complete the export.

9.7 Restoring Drawing Revisions

Previous revisions of drawings may be restored from the Document Manager. This feature
does not overwrite the current revision of a drawing, it makes the drawing file of an older
revision available to users to open and view.
To restore a drawing revision, right-click on its record and select the Restore option from the
menu that is then displayed. A message is then displayed saying that the drawing has been
restored.
Restored drawing files (.dwg files) are placed in the project Drawing Location folder (as set
on the Project Configuration Category of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program)
in a sub-folder called RestoredDrawings.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 9:11 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
AVEVA P&ID Document Manager

9.8 Deleting Revisions

To delete a revision, right-click on it and select Delete from the menu that is then displayed.
A message is then displayed requesting that the deletion be confirmed. Click Yes to
continue. The revision record is then deleted from the list of records.
Note that the project must be saved using the Save option on the Home tab for the deletion
to be finalized. Otherwise the record will reappear the next time the project is opened.

9.9 Closing Projects and Exiting

To close a project, select the Close option from the Home tab or the File tab. The project is
then closed. The Document Manager remains open. Another project may be opened using
the Open option (see above).
To exit the Document Manager, select the Exit option from the File tab.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 9:12 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

10 Appendices

10.1 AVEVA P&ID Files

The majority of AVEVA P&ID setup and configuration files should be edited using the
AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program. However, the PID.MLN file must be edited
directly using a standard text editor.

10.1.1 PID.MLN
Pipe styles may consist of multiple lines, as indicated by the definition of each pipe style,
accessible from the List of Values pane of the AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program.
The PID.MLN file, in the Install>AutoCAD>Bin directory, contains definitions of the style of
multiple lines, for example the number of lines and the distances between them. Any line
style that is defined as a multiple line must have its multiple line properties defined in the
PID.MLN file.

By default, the PID.MLN file contains definitions of Standard, Main Pipe, Sub Pipe and Link
styles. For each of these there separate entries for both metric and imperial measurements.
Modify this file as required to edit the style of the existing multi-lines and to define the style
of new ones.
For details on how to edit the PID.MLN file, refer to the appropriate AutoCAD
documentation.

• PID.MLN File Example

MLSTYLE
2
STANDARD
70
0
3

62
256

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:1 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

51
90.00000000000000
52
90.00000000000000
71
2
49
0.5000000000000000
62
6
6
BYLAYER
49
-0.5000000000000000
62
6
6
BYLAYER
0
MLSTYLE
2
MULTI-MAIN
70
0
3

62
6
51
90.00000000000000
52
90.00000000000000
71
2
49
1.5000000000000000
62
6
6
BYLAYER
49
-1.5000000000000000

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:2 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

62
6
6
BYLAYER
0
MLSTYLE
2
MULTI-SUBS
70
0
3

62
5
51
90.00000000000000
52
90.00000000000000
71
2
49
1.0000000000000000
62
5
6
BYLAYER
49
-1.0000000000000000
62
5
6
BYLAYER
0
MLSTYLE
2
MULTI-LINK
70
0
3

62
7

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:3 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

51
90.00000000000000
52
90.00000000000000
71
2
49
0.5000000000000000
62
7
6
BYLAYER
49
-0.5000000000000000
62
7
6
BYLAYER
0
MLSTYLE
2
STDIMP
70
0
3

62
256
51
90.00000000000000
52
90.00000000000000
71
2
49
0.5000000000000000
62
6
6
BYLAYER
49
-0.5000000000000000

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:4 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

62
6
6
BYLAYER
0
MLSTYLE
2
MULTI-MAIN-IMP
70
0
3

62
6
51
90.00000000000000
52
90.00000000000000
71
2
49
0.04000000000000000
62
6
6
BYLAYER
49
-0.04000000000000000
62
6
6
BYLAYER
0
MLSTYLE
2
MULTI-SUBS-IMP
70
0
3

62
5

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:5 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

51
90.00000000000000
52
90.00000000000000
71
2
49
0.02000000000000000
62
5
6
BYLAYER
49
-0.02000000000000000
62
5
6
BYLAYER
0
MLSTYLE
2
MULTI-LINK-IMP
70
0
3

62
7
51
90.00000000000000
52
90.00000000000000
71
2
49
0.01000000000000000
62
7
6
BYLAYER
49
-0.01000000000000000

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:6 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

62
7
6
BYLAYER
0

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:7 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

10.2 Output File Format

The AVEVA P&ID output file formats are detailed below.

Note: The file delimiter is the I character.

• Drawing Details - .drg file

• Equipment Information - .equ file
• Nozzle Information - .noz file
• Instrument Loops - .ilp file
• In-Line Non-Valves - .inv file
• Process Connected Instrument Information - .ipc file
• Remote Instrument Information - .irm file
• In-Line Valves Information - .ivl file
• System Output Information - .isy file
• Pipe Information - .pip file
• Pipe Item Information - .pit file
• Notes Information - .nte file
• Link Connectivities Information - .con file
• User-Defined Attributes Information - .usd file
• Valve Port Information - .por file
• Monitor File - .mon file

10.2.1 Drawing Details - .drg file

Project number, char 32
Drawing number, char 32
Sheet number, char 10
Revision, char 32
Title[1], char 132
Title[2], char 132
Title[3], char 132
Title[4], char 132
Title[5], char 132
Client number, char 32
Des area, char 32
Line no1 min, char 32
Line no1 max, char 32
Line no1 used, char 32
Line no1 cancelled, char 32
Line no2 min, char 32
Line no2 max, char 32

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:8 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

Line no2 used, char 32

Line no2 cancelled, char 32
Line no3 min, char 32
Line no3 max, char 32
Line no3 used, char 32
Line no3 cancelled, char 32
Line no4 min, char 32
Line no4 max, char 32
Line no4 used, char 32
Line no4 cancelled, char 32
Loop no1 min, char 32
Loop no1 max, char 32
Loop no1 used, char 32
Loop no1 cancelled, char 32
Loop no2 min, char 32
Loop no2 max, char 32
Loop no2 used, char 32
Loop no2 cancelled, char 32
Output Counter, number 3

10.2.2 Equipment Information - .equ file

Equip handle, char 32
Owner handle (for electrical equipment items), char 32
Equip Block, char 16
Equip Function, char 16
Equip Prefix, char 16
Equip Letters, char 16
Equip Numbers, char 16
Equip Suffix, char 16
Description, char 80
AVEVA P&ID type (EQU,EQV or EQE), char 4
Grid reference, char 8
Interlock (y/n), char 4
Typical Item, char 4 ('*' if typical)
Symbol name (no character restriction)

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:9 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

10.2.3 Nozzle Information - .noz file

Nozzle handle, char 32
Nozzle label handle, char 32
Nozzle size handle, char 32
Equipment Owner handle, char 32
Nozzle label, char 32
Nozzle size, char 32
Description, char 80
Grid ref, char 8
Typical Item, char 4 ('*' if typical)
Connected Item Handle, char 32
Connected Item Type, char 4

10.2.4 Instrument Loops - .ilp file

Handle, char 32
Loop Number (Tag), char 16
Block, char 16
Function, char 16
Prefix, char 16
Type, char 16
Number, char 16
Suffix, char 16

10.2.5 In-Line Non-Valves - .inv file

Inst handle, char 32
Label balloon handle, char 32
Link line handle, char 32
Prefix label handle, char 32
Letters label handle, char 32
Loop label handle, char 32
Suffix label handle, char 32
Panel ref prefix handle, char 32
Panel ref letters handle, char 32
Panel ref loop handle, char 32
Panel ref suffix handle, char 32
Symbol name, char 32

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:10 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

Prefix label, char 32

Letters label, char 32
Loop label, char 32
Suffix label, char 32
Panel ref prefix label, char 32
Panel ref letters label, char 32
Panel ref loop label, char 32
Panel ref suffix label, char 32
Descriptor label, char 80
Tag Description, char 80
Branch id, number
Sequence, number
Inlet Size, char 10
Outlet Size, char 10
Specification, char 10
Area, char 10
Paintcode, char 10
Insulation(Table), char 10
Insulation(Index), char 10
Insulation(Condition), char 10
Tracing (No of Tracers), char 10
Tracing (Size), char 10
Tracing (Type), char 10
Graphical tracing, char 10
AVEVA P&ID type, char 4
Symbol Description, char 80
Location, char 32
Signal Type connected, char 32
Grid ref, char 8
Units, char 4
PDMS type, char 4
PDMS Sub-type, char 4
Interlock (Y/N), char 4
Pattern Item, char 4 ('*' if pattern)
Panel Type, char 4 (I or E)
Typical Item, char 4 ('*' if typical)

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:11 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

10.2.6 Process Connected Instrument Information - .ipc file

Item Handle, char 32
Prefix Handle, char 32
Type Handle, char 32
Loop Handle, char 32
Suffix Handle, char 32
Alarm Handles (multiple possible separated by commas) */, char 8, char 8 etc
Panel Prefix Handle, char 32
Panel Type Handle, char 32
Panel Loop Handle, char 32
Panel Suffix Handle, char 32
Symbol Name, char 32
Block Label, char 16
Function Label, char 16
Prefix Label, char 32
Type Label, char 32
Loop Label, char 32
Suffix Label, char 32
Alarm Labels (multiple possible separated by commas) */, char 8, char 8 etc
Panel Prefix Label, char 32
Panel Type Label, char 32
Panel Loop Label, char 32
Panel Suffix Label, char 32
Instrument Description, char 80
Signal Styles (multiple possible separated by commas) */,char 32,char 32 etc
Number of signals, number
Conditioner/Descriptor, char 80
Location, char 32
Process Owner , char 132
Owner Handle , char 32
Owner Atype, char 10
Owner Id, number
Size, char 10
Specification, char 10
Area, char 10
Paintcode, char 10

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:12 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

Insulation (Table), char 10

Insulation (Index ), char 10
Insulation (Condition), char 10
Tracing (No of Tracers), char 10
Tracing (Size), char 10
Tracing (Type), char 10
Graphical tracing, char 10
Grid Reference, char 8
Units, char 4
Interlock, char 4
Pattern Item, char 4 ('*' if pattern)
Panel Type, char 4 (I or E)
Typical Item, char 4 ('*' if typical)

10.2.7 Remote Instrument Information - .irm file

Item Handle, char 32
Prefix Handle, char 32
Type Handle, char 32
Loop Handle, char 32
Suffix Handle, char 32
Alarm Handles (multiple possible separated by commas) */, char 8, char 8 etc
Panel Prefix Handle, char 32
Panel Type Handle, char 32
Panel Loop Handle, char 32
Panel Suffix Handle, char 32
Symbol Name, char 32
Block Label, char 16
Function Label, char 16
Prefix Label, char 32
Type Label, char 32
Loop Label, char 32
Suffix Label, char 32
Alarm Labels (multiple possible separated by commas) */, char 8, char 8 etc
Panel Prefix Label, char 32
Panel Type Label, char 32
Panel Loop Label, char 32

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:13 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

Panel Suffix Label, char 32

Instrument Description, char 80
Signal Styles (multiple possible separated by commas) */,char 32,char 32 etc
Number of signals, number
Conditioner/Descriptor, char 80
Location, char 32
Grid Reference, char 8
Interlock, char 4
Pattern Item, char 4 ('*' if pattern)
Panel Type, char 4 (I or E)
Typical Item, char 4 ('*' if typical)

10.2.8 In-Line Valves Information - .ivl file

Inst valve handle, char 32
Label balloon handle, char 32
Link line handle, char 32
Prefix label handle, char 32
Letters label handle, char 32
Loop label handle, char 32
Suffix label handle, char 32
Panel ref prefix handle, char 32
Panel ref letters handle, char 32
Panel ref loop handle, char 32
Panel ref suffix handle, char 32
Symbol name, char 32
Prefix label, char 32
Letters label, char 32
Loop label, char 32
Suffix label, char 32
Panel ref prefix label, char 32
Panel ref letters label, char 32
Panel ref loop label, char 32
Panel ref suffix label, char 32
Descriptor label, char 80
Tag Description, char 80
Branch id, number

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:14 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

Sequence, number
Inlet Size, char 10
Outlet Size, char 10
Specification, char 10
Area, char 10
Paintcode, char 10
Insulation(Table), char 10
Insulation(Index), char 10
Insulation(Condition), char 10
Tracing (No of Tracers), char 10
Tracing (Size), char 10
Tracing (Type), char 10
Graphical tracing, char 10
AVEVA P&ID type, char 4
Symbol Description, char 80
Valve body, char 32
Actuator type, char 32
Signal Type connected, char 32
Handwheel (Y/N), char 4
Valve tag, char 32
Closure, char 32
Grid ref, char 8
Units, char 4
PDMS type, char 4
PDMS Sub-type, char 4
Interlock (Y/N), char 4
Pattern Item, char 4 ('*' if pattern)
Panel Type, char 4 (I or E)
Typical Item, char 4 ('*' if typical)

10.2.9 System Output Information - .isy file

Item handle, char 32
Label handle, char 32
Label, char 32
Grid ref, char 8

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:15 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

10.2.10 Pipe Information - .pip file

Branch id, number
Owner branch id, number
Size, char 10
Fluid/Service, char 10
Number, char 10
Area, char 10
Specification, char 10
Insulation (Table), char 10
Insulation (Index), char 10
Insulation (Condition), char 10
Paint Code, char 10
Tracing (No of Tracers), char 10
Tracing (Size, char 10)
Tracing (Type), char 10
Project1 (Project definable), char 10
Project2 (Project definable), char 10
Project3 (Project definable), char 10
Graphical Tracing type, char 10
From, char 132
To, char 132
Connected PDMS type (From), char 10
Connected PDMS type (To), char 10
Pipe route error flag, char 4
Connected Handle (From), char 32
Connected Handle (To), char 32
Typical Item, char 4 ('*' if typical)

10.2.11 Pipe Item Information - .pit file

Item handle, char 32
Branch id, number
Sequence, number
AVEVA P&ID type, char 4
Inlet Size, char 10
Outlet Size, char 10
Spec, char 10

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:16 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

Area, char 10
Paint code, char 10
Insulation (Table), char 10
Insulation (Index), char 10
Insulation (Condition), char 10
Tracing (No of Tracers), char 10
Tracing (Size), char 10
Tracing (Type), char 10
Graphical tracing, char 10
Description, char 80
Valve tag, char 32
Closure tag, char 32
Spp Prefix, char 16
Spp Letters, char 16
Spp Numbers, char 16
Spp Suffix, char 16
Valve Code, char 32
Valve Body, char 32
Grid ref, char 8
PDMS type, char 4
PDMS Sub-type, char 4
Typical Item, char 4 ('*' if typical)
Symbol name (no character restriction)

10.2.12 Notes Information - .nte file

Label handle, char 32
Owner handle, char 32
Label, char 132

10.2.13 Link Connectivities Information - .con file

Item Handle, char 32
Connected Item Handle, char 32

10.2.14 User-Defined Attributes Information - .usd file

Owner Handle, char 32
Attribute Name, char 200
Attribute Value, char 256

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:17 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

Owner Type, char 4

Drawing Units, char 32

10.2.15 Valve Port Information - .por file

Owner Handle, char 32
Port Identifier, char 32
Port Size, char 10
Connected Item Handle, char 32
Connected Item Type, char 4

10.2.16 Monitor File - .mon file

A Monitor File is created each an export takes place. This file may be examined in any
standard text editor, and lists any problems found during the process, for example, nozzles
without labels or pipes incorrectly routed. If an export is carried out more than once from the
same flow diagram, the previously created monitor file is overwritten. The monitor file is
created in the working directory, as set in the project configuration file. Other output files are
created in the data directory.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:18 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

10.3 AVEVA P&ID Item Types and Label Types

Item Types are listed below under the following headings:
• Pipes, Trim and Process Links Item Types
• Signal Line Item Types
• Tracing Item Types
• Symbol Item Types
• Label Types

10.3.1 Pipes, Trim and Process Links Item Types

PMA - Main Pipe (and Process Link post AVEVA VPE P&ID 7.2 SP3)
PSU - Subsidiary Pipe
PLK - Process Link (pre AVEVA VPE P&ID 7.2 SP3)
BSN - Branch Start Node
BEN - Branch End Node

10.3.2 Signal Line Item Types

SHY - Signal Line (Hydraulic)
SDL - Signal Line (Datalink)
SPN - Signal Line (Pneumatic)
SEL - Signal Line (Electric)
SUD - Signal Line (Undefined)
SCT - Signal Line (Capillary Tube)
SSO - Signal Line (Sonic)
SFL - Signal Line Flag - **System Generated

10.3.3 Tracing Item Types

GTR - Graphical Tracing
GTA - Graphical Trace Around - **System Generated

10.3.4 Symbol Item Types

ACT - Actuator
BEI - In-Line Equipment Label Symbol
BEQ - Equipment Label Symbol
BPI - Pipe Label Symbol
CHC - Change Cloud
EDL - Equipment Data Location
EI3 - In-line Equipment (Three-Way)
EI4 - In-line Equipment (Four-Way)

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:19 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

EIA - In-line Equipment (Angle)

EIN - In-line Equipment
EQE - Electrical Equipment
EQU - Equipment Item
EQV - Equipment Vessel
GRP - Assembly - **System Generated
IBD - Instrument Bursting Disc
IC3 - Instrument Control Valve Three-Way
IC4 - Instrument Control Valve Four-Way
ICA - Instrument Control Valve Angled
ICD - Instrument Conditioning Device
ICV - Instrument Control Valve
IDC - DCS Instrument
IFE - Instrument Flow Element
IHW - Instrument Handwheel
IIO - Instrument I/O Device (I/O Rocket)
ILB - Instrument Label Balloon - **System Generated
ILL - Instrument Label Link Line - **System Generated
INS - Instrument
IPO - Instrument Port Valve
IR3 - Instrument Relief Valve Three-Way
IR4 - Instrument Relief Valve Four-Way
IRA - Instrument Relief Valve Angled
IRV - Instrument Relief Valve
ISO - System I/O Boxes
IV3 - Instrument Valve Three-Way
IV4 - Instrument Valve Four-Way
IVA - Instrument Valve Angled
IVL - Instrument Valve
LCK - Interlock
LF3 - Line Fitting 3 Way
LF4 - Line Fitting 4 Way
LFA - Line Fitting Angle
LFI - Line Fitting
LIG - Line Fitting Ignored by Router
LIN - Insulation Line Fitting Ignored by Router

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:20 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

LSP - Spec Break

LST - Line Stream Diamond
LTS - Line Termination Symbol
MIS - Miscellaneous
NOZ - Nozzle
PDF - Pipe Destination Fitting
PEN - Pipe End Node
PFA - Pipe Flow Arrows
PFL - Pipe On/Off Connection Flag
POR - Ports
PSN - Pipe Start Node
RDC - Concentric Reducer
RDE - Eccentric Reducer
RPB - Error Report Cell
RTR - Revision Triangles
VL3 - Three Way Valve
VL4 - Four Way Valve
VLA - Angle Valve
VLV - Pipe Valve
VPO - Piping Port Valve

10.3.5 Label Types

X01 - Title Minimum Line Number
X02 - Title Maximum Line Number
X03 - Title Last Line Number Used
X04 - Title Minimum Line Number
X05 - Title Maximum Line Number
X06 - Title Last Line Number Used
X07 - Title Minimum Line Number
X08 - Title Maximum Line Number
X09 - Title Last Line Number Used
X10 - Title Minimum Line Number
X11 - Title Maximum Line Number
X12 - Title Last Line Number Used
X13 - Title Minimum Loop Number
X14 - Title Maximum Loop Number

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:21 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

X15 - Title Last Used Loop Number

X16 - Title Minimum Loop Number
X17 - Title Maximum Loop Number
X18 - Title Last Used Loop Number
X19 - Title Cancelled Line Number
X20 - Title Cancelled Line Number
X21 - Title Cancelled Line Number
X22 - Title Cancelled Line Number
X23 - Title Cancelled Loop Number
X24 - Title Cancelled Loop Number
XAI - Area Field on Spec Breaks
XAP - Revision Approved Label
XAR - Title Design Area
XBI - Branch Identifier
XCH - Revision Checked Label
XCI - Paint Code on Spec Break
XCN - Client Number
XD1 - Revision Description Label 1
XD2 - Revision Description Label 2
XDA - Revision Date Label
XDL - Equipment Data Location
XDN - Drawing Number
XDR - Drawing Revision
XDS - Drawing Sheet
XDT - Drawing Title
XEN - Equipment Number (not used if fixed equipment label formatting is on)
XEP - Equipment Prefix (not used if fixed equipment label formatting is on)
XEQ - Equipment (Entire label if fixed equipment label formatting is on, Equipment Letter
only if off)
XES - Equipment Suffix (not used if fixed equipment label formatting is on)
XGR - Revision Grid Reference
XI1 - Insulation on Spec Break
XI2 - Insulation on Spec Break
XI3 - Insulation on Spec Break
XIA - Instrument Alarm
XID - Instrument Descriptor

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:22 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

XIL - Instrument Loop

XIO - System I/O Ident
XIP - Instrument Prefix
XIS - Instrument Suffix
XIT - Instrument Tag
XL1 - Insulation Line Fitting Label (Table)
XL2 - Insulation Line Fitting Label (Index)
XL3 - Insulation Line Fitting Label (Cond)
XLB - Inline Insulation Label (Table)
XLC - Inline Insulation Label (Cond)
XLI - Inline Insulation Label (Index)
XLL - Panel Loop Label
XLP - Panel Prefix Label
XLS - Panel Suffix Label
XLT - Panel Tag Label
XNE - Note
XNS - Nozzle Size
XNT - Nozzle Tag
XP1, XP2, XP3 - Project Defined Labels 1 to 3
XPD - Pipe Destination Text
XPF - Pipe Flag
XPI - Pipe
XPJ - Revision Project Label
XPN - Project Number
XPP -Port Valve Port Size
XPR - Pattern Label
XR1 - Revision Number Label (in triangle)
XR2 - Revision Number Label (title block)
XR3 - Revision Number (see XGR)
XRA - I/O Address
XRC - I/O Card Type
XRI - Reducer
XRP - Error Report Cell Label
XRR - I/O Remark
XRS - I/O Signal Type/Area Code
XRV - Revision Revised Label

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:23 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

XSF - Signal Line Flag

XSI - Spec Break
XSL - Special Piping Item Letters
XSN - Special Piping Item Numbers
XSP - Special Piping Item Prefix
XSS - Special Piping Item Suffix
XST - Stream
XT1 - Tracing on Spec Break
XT2 - Tracing on Spec Break
XT3 - Tracing on Spec Break
XTB - Trim Size
XTR - Trim
XVC - Valve Closure
XVD - Valve Code
XVR - VPE Workbench Field Designator
XVS - Valve Size
XVT - Valve Tag
XVV - VPE Workbench Field Value

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:24 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

10.4 AutoCAD Defaults set by AVEVA P&ID

When AVEVA P&ID is loaded, a number of AutoCAD settings and variables are
automatically set.
Ortho and Osnap modes are switched On by default.
Several changes have been made to the range of normal AutoCAD commands which may
be used when AVEVA P&ID is loaded.
AutoCAD variables should not be set before loading AVEVA P&ID, as the latter sets certain
of these to its own values on start-up. The following AutoCAD variables are set to the values
shown when AVEVA P&ID is loaded:

Variable Value
APERTURE 3
ATTDIA 1
BLIPMODE 0
COORDS 2
DRAGMODE 2
EXPERT 1
FILEDIA 1
HIGHLIGHT 1
LIMCHECK 0
MIRRTEXT 0
ORTHOMODE 1
OSMODE 0
PDMODE 0
PDSIZE 0
PICKBOX 3
REGENMODE 0
SNAPMODE 1
SNAPSTYL 0
UCSICON 0

For explanations of the effects of changing these variables, consult an AutoCAD Reference
Manual.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:25 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

10.5 The ISO15926 (Version 3.2.0) Schema Specification

10.5.1 Introduction
This version of the schema must be used when exporting data to the 12.0 SP4 version of
PDMS or earlier.
If exporting data that is to be imported by the 12.0 SP5 version of PDMS or later, the 3.3.3
version of the schema may be used. See 10.6: The ISO15926 (Version 3.3.3) Schema
Specification.

• Notation
Where the notation ‘…’ is used in examples it implies content that has been omitted due to it
not being relevant for the example.
Elements in examples have been abbreviated to <Tag … /> to show structure but limit
content.

10.5.2 XML Model Details

• XML File Document Structure

The document structure is defined in the XML schema for the P&ID profile (See below). An
output file that conforms to this document must validate against the profile schema.
The first line of the file must be an XML declaration, for example:

<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8" ?>

The document is to be encoded using UTF-8.

The root node of an XML file is a PlantModel element. See below for the definitions of its
attribute and element contents.
XML elements are not defined within an XML namespace and so are not namespace
qualified.
The following class model provides an overview of the significant structural elements
contained within an AVEVA P&ID XML profile file. The bi-directional arrows indicate and

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:26 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

parent/child element relationship in the XML file. The elements and their attributes are
defined in the Element Definitions section below.

Each structural element may contain geometric and text elements to represent the drawing
contents.

• XML Topology
A PipingNetworkSegment, as its upstream reference (PipingNetworkSegment/Connection/
@FromID), will reference a Nozzle, splitting component (such as a Tee, Wye or Cross),
Reducer or SpecificationBreak that it doesn't contain or it will reference a PipeConnector
that it contains.
A PipingNetworkSegment, as its downstream reference (PipingNetworkSegment/
Connection/@ToID), will reference a Nozzle, merging component (such as a Tee, Wye or
Cross) or SpecificationBreak that it doesn't contain or it will reference a splitting component
(such as a Tee, Wye or Cross), Reducer or PipeConnector that it contains. Nb All
PipingNetworkSegment elements are split where there is splitting component ( such as a
Tee, Wye or Cross) or a Reducer.
Contained components, with the exception of PipeConnectors require a ToNode attribute
which references the downstream ConnectionPoint of the component (i.e. the main flow out
of the segment).
Components contained by other segments must be referenced using a ToNode or
FromNode attribute as appropriate.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:27 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

References to Nozzle, PipeConnector and SpecificationBreak elements do not require

ToNode/FromNode attributes..

• Geometries (Axis and Reference)

All geometries in an XMpLant file are accompanied by Axis and Reference elements.
These define rotations around 3 dimensional axis that define how to map the coordinates
defined for the item into the target environment. For most 2D drawing work the following
values give the expected behaviour (i.e. the coordinates are defined in the 2D drawing
plane).
<Axis X="0" Y="0" Z="1"/>
<Reference X="1" Y="0" Z="0"/>
Some curve primitives such as ellipses in XMpLant require more complex use of Axis and
Reference in order to define the 2D forms.
The <Axis> value defines a unit vector in 3D space about which an object should rotate. For
2D diagrams nearly all geometries will define this element as <Axis X="0" Y="0" Z="1"/>
which denotes a vector aligned with the Z-axis.
The <Reference> element defines what is effectively the rotation about the <Axis> element.
When you see the value written as <Reference X="1" Y="0" Z="0"/> it indicates that the X-
Axis with which the object's points are defined use the same X-Axis on the output surface/
window with which to orientate - in other words no rotation is required when you have the
following paired elements;
<Axis X="0" Y="0" Z="1"/>
<Reference X="1" Y="0" Z="0"/>

• Character Encoding
XML is encoded using UTF-8. This means that most characters used in western languages
are encoded using a single byte representation, more complex characters are encoded

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:28 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

using either a 2 byte encoding or a substitution mechanism. Where the export capabilities
are limited to a single byte representation or software is developed with limited knowledge of
UTF-8 it is common practice to output the 2 byte characters using a numerical substitution
syntax of &#nnn; where nnn denotes the character code.
P&ID Manager is very limited in the way that characters are supported because the base
storage has fixed length text types (120 characters) and limited character support. If two
byte characters are provided to P&ID Manager then they will be substituted numerically
when stored so that the database character constraints can be met. This substitution
compromises the amount of text stored as a single character will be converted to ~5
characters to complete the substitution. When exporting to XML bear in mind that the string
data contents loaded into P&ID Manager will be constrained to 120 characters in length
after two byte characters have been substituted numerically and XML substitutions have
been reversed (such as ‘?’ -> ‘&#FEA6;’, ‘&amp;’ ->’&’, ‘&lt;’ -> ‘<’ etc).

• Tag Referencing
Tag attributes may be used to reference elements instead of referencing by the ID attribute.
The XML profile prefers the use of ID referencing as it gives a consistent referencing
mechanism that can be used regardless of the presence of a Tag attribute.
If Tags are used then there is a special case for referencing Nozzle elements. In this
instance the Tag is only unique within the scope of the containing Equipment element so the
Equipment Tag must also be included in the reference. The reference must have the form
<EquipmentTag>-<NozzleTag> and can only be used where the <NozzleTag> component
doesn’t contain a ‘-‘ character.
For Example:
Where:
Equipment/@Tag = ‘VP-1234-DNJ09’
Equipment/Nozzle/@Tag = ‘N1’
The reference would be:
VP-1234-DNJ09-N1

• PersistentId Referencing
As long as the context attribute used to scope PersistentID elements is at least equal in
scope to the file scope then PersistentId attributes may be used for cross referencing
elements. The PersistentID/@Identifier value is supported I any ItemId attribute.

10.5.3 Shared Attribute Definitions

• ID
The ID attributes of XML elements has the form ‘XMP_<n>’ where n is a sequential number
within the XML file. These id values may be used for cross referencing elements and are
transient. i.e. these ids are generated for each version of the file and cannot be used to
match file contents between two different exports of the same drawing.
For example :-

<PipingNetworkSegment ID=”XMP_23” … >

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:29 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

• Tag
This should contain the full Tag for an item without additional text. This is an xsd:string
attribute with no specific validation (see Character encoding for character constraints)

• Specification
This is a free text field that has no clearly defined semantics. Specification information may
be best represented in GenericAttributes.

• StockNumber
This is defined as:
‘A code that will identify a purchasable plant item
‘The StockNumber attribute contains the unique name of this component that can be
used to relate to the complete set of information that is contained in the vendor
catalogue for the component. This attribute taken with the Specification and
NominalDiameter will identify a specific item, fully defining its parameters size and
optionally material and all other information available for it.’
This attribute is an xsd:string attribute and has no specific validation or constraints other
than those defined in the ‘Character encoding’ section of this document.

• ComponentName
If present on a component that is inside a ShapeCatalogue element then this is the unique
id for the symbol within the XML file.
If present on a component that is not inside a ShapeCatalogue element then this is the
reference to the geometry of the components symbol. The component may have additional
annotation defined within it (See also Scale).

• ComponentClass
The format of the ComponentClass attribute is documented in the XML Model Overview
section. The attribute is the RDL Designation field from the ISO 15926 RDL specification.
The value of this field is converted to Camel Case with all spaces removed. Notes : some
fields contain characters that must be substituted when written in XML (e.g. ‘&’ characters
must be substituted with &amp;). For example:
GATE VALVE -> GateValve
CENTRIFUGAL PUMP -> CentrifugalPump

• ComponentType
Permitted values :-
‘Normal’
‘Explicit’
‘Parametric’

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:30 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

• Revision
If known this attribute should contain the revision or version of the item. This has the type of
xsd:string and therefore has no specific syntax or format constraints other than those
detailed in Character encoding.

• Status
One of the following values :-
‘Current’ – This implies this is the latest version of an item
‘Deleted’ – This item has been superseded or removed from the drawing.
‘Modified’ – The last change to this item was a modification.
‘New’ – This is the first version of the item in the drawing.
If the item has a status of ‘Deleted’ then the item will be ignored by P&ID Manager.
Items will be deleted by Manager if they have a status of Deleted or if they do not appear in
the new version of a file and used to exist.

• Units
The Units attribute is to be taken from the ISO15926 RDL catalogue using the name from
the catalogue converted to camel-case. All measurement values such as distances and
pressures are either accompanied by their units of measure or defaulted to the value
provided on the PlantInformation/UnitsOfMeasure element. The unit of measure for the
coordinate geometry is stipulated in the PlantInformation/@Units attribute. The permitted
values are as follows:
Angles:
Degree, Radian, deg, rad
Area :
SquareMillimetre, SquareCentimetre, SquareMetre, SquareKilometre, SquareInch,
SquareFoot, SquareYard, SquareMile, sq mm, sq cm, sq m, sq km
Distances:
Micron, Millimetre, Centimetre, Decimetre, Metre, Kilometre, Inch, Foot, Yard, Mile,
mm, cm, m, km, in, ft, yd
Pressures:
MillinewtonMetreSquared, NewtonMetreSquared, KilonewtonMetreSquared,
Picopascal, Micropascal, Millipascal, Pascal, Kilopascal, Megapascal, Gigapascal,
Bar, Bara, Barg
Temperatures:
DegreeKelvin, DegreeCelsius, DegreeRankine, DegreeFahrenheit, degC, degF, degK
Volume :
CubicMillimetre, CubicCentimetre, CubicMetre, CubicInch, CubicFeet, CubicYard, cc,
litres, gallons, USGallons, barrels

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:31 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

Weight:
Microgram, Milligram, Gram, Kilogram, Megagram, PoundMass, OunceMass, mg, Kg,
lb, oz

Note: All values are case sensitive.

10.5.4 Element Definitions

• PlantModel
• Association
• Axis
• BsplineCurve
• CenterLine
• Circle
• Component
• CompositeCurve
• Connection
• ConnectionPoints
• ConnectionType
• ControlPoints
• ControlPointWeight
• Coordinate
• CrossPageConnection
• Description
• Discipline
• Drawing
• DrawingBorder
• Ellipse
• EndDiameter
• Equipment
• Extent
• FabricationCategory
• GenericAttributes
• GeometricPrimitives
• Height
• History
• Identifier
• IdentifierElement
• InsideDiameter
• InstrumentLoop
• KnotMultiplicities
• Knot
• Knots
• Line
• Location

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:32 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

• Manufacturer
• Material
• MaterialDescription
• Max
• MaximumDesignPressure
• MaximumDesignTemperature
• MaximumOperatingPressure
• MaximumOperatingTemperature
• Min
• MinimumDesignPressure
• MinimumDesignTemperature
• MinimumOperatingPressure
• MinimumOperatingTemperature
• ModelNumber
• Multiplicity
• NominalDiameter
• NormalDesignPressure
• NormalDesignTemperature
• NormalOperatingPressure
• NormalOperatingTemperature
• Nozzle
• NozzleType
• OperatorType
• OutsideDiameter
• PConnectionPoints
• PersistentID
• PipeConnector
• PipeFlowArrow
• PipingNetworkSystem
• PipingComponent
• PipingNetworkSegment
• PlantArea
• PlantInformation
• PlantItem
• Point
• PolyLine
• Position
• Presentation
• ProcessInstrument
• Rating
• Reference
• Remark
• Scale

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:33 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

• Shape
• ShapeCatalogue
• SignalConnectorSymbol
• SignalLine
• SpecificationBreak
• StartDiameter
• String
• Supplier
• Surface
• TestPressure
• Text
• Transaction
• TrimmedCurve
• UnitsOfMeasure
• WallThickness
• Weight
• WeightsData

• PlantModel
This is the root node of an XML document and only exists as the root node of an XML file.
Other than the first two child elements, PlantInformation and Extent, the ordering of child
elements within a PlantModel element is not significant.
There shouldn’t be any need to place graphical elements into a PlantModel element as all
drawing annotation such as borders and floating text should be child elements of the
drawing element.
While a Position element may be provided is has no attached semantics and is often
defaulted to 0,0,0.
Child Elements:

Element Name Cardinality Description

PlantInformation 1 The properties of a plant model
This includes properties like its name,
modification date, editing system etc.
The PlantInformation element must be the
first child element of a PlantModel element.
Extent 1 The minimum bounding rectangle that
encloses the full graphical contents of the
PlantModel instance.
The Extent element must be the second
child element of a PlantModel element
BsplineCurve 0..* A geometric primitive
Circle 0..* A geometric primitive
CompositeCurve 0..* A composite geometry

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:34 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

Element Name Cardinality Description

Drawing 1 Metadata and graphical annotation related
to the P&ID drawing being represented
Ellipse 0..* A geometric primitive
Equipment 0..* The representation of a piece of plant
equipment.
GenericAttributes 0..* Source system properties that relate to the
XML file and plant model. These
properties may be grouped into many
GenericAttributes elements.
GeometricPrimitives 0..* A collection of geometric primitives.
InstrumentLoop 0..* A grouped set of instrument detail
Line 0..* A geometric primitive
PipingNetworkSystem 0..* An Engineering PipingNetworkSystem
element
PipeLine 0..* An Engineering PipeLine element
PlantArea 0..* A place holder for Area information
Point 0..* A geometric primitive
PolyLine 0..* A geometric Primitive
Position 0..1 Usually defaulted to 0,0,0 if output.
Presentation 0..* Style information for this object. In this
context it has no meaning and should be
omitted.
ProcessInstrument 0..* An Engineering Instrument object
Shape 0..* A geometric primitive
ShapeCatalogue 0..* A catalogue of Equipment and
PipingComponent symbols.
SignalLine 0..* A connection between instruments.
Text 0..* Label primitives
TrimmedCurve 0..* A geometric primitive

Example:
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8" ?>
<PlantModel xmlns:xsi=http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema-
instance
xsi:noNamespaceSchemaLocation=".\XMLSchema.xsd">
<PlantInformation … />
<Extent … />
<Drawing … />
<ShapeCatalogue … />

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:35 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

<Equipment … />
…
</PlantModel>

• Association
The Association element is used to relate engineering items to other resources.
One documented use of this is to relate in-line ProcessInstrument elements with
InstrumentLoop elements. In this case each in-line ProcessInstrument element has an
Association child element which details the relationship using the Type attribute with a value
of ‘is a part of’.
Child elements :
None
Attributes:

Attribute Name Required Description

Type Y The meaning/semantics of the
relationship.
ItemID N The ID or PersistentID/@Identifier attribute
value of the item being referenced.
Tag N The Tag attribute value of the item being
referenced. (See Tag Referencing)
Name N The Name attribute value of the item being
referenced.
URI N A URI identifying an associated resource
Context N If omitted then the resource is assumed to
be part of the model in the same file. If you
want to state the context as the current
model then use the value ‘XML’.

Example:
<ProcessInstrument ...>
<Association Type="is a part of" ItemID="XMP_235"/>
...
</ProcessInstrument>

• Axis
See Geometries (Axis and Reference).
Child elements :
None

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:36 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

Attributes :

Attribute Name Required Description

X Y
Y Y
Z Y

Example:
<Axis X="0" Y="0" Z="1" />

• BsplineCurve
Geometric curve primitive detailing a Bspline.
Child elements:

Element Name Cardinality Description

Presentation 0..1 The style to use when drawing the Bspline.
The drawing behaviour is undefined if the
Presentation element is missing.
Extent 1 The minimum bounding geometry of this
element and its descendants
ControlPoints 1
KnotMultiplicities 0..1
Knots 0..1
WeightsData 0..1
GenericAttributes 0..1 Any application specific attributes relating
to the Bspline

Attributes:

Attribute Name Required Description

Degree Y
CurveType Y One of the following : 'BsplineCurve',
'BsplineCurveWithKnots' or
'RationalBsplineCurve'.
CurveForm N One of the following : 'PolyLine',
'CircularArc', 'EllipticArc', 'ParabolicArc' or
'HyperbolicArc'
NumControlPoints Y x
NumKnots N x
Closed N 'true' or 'false'
SelfIntersect N 'true' or 'false'

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:37 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

Example:
BsplineCurve Degree="3" CurveType="BsplineCurveWithKnots"
NumControlPoints="4" NumKnots="8">
<Presentation Layer="" Color="-32363" LineType="0"
LineWeight="1" R="0.67" G="0.38" B="0"/>
<Extent>
<Min X="10241.64" Y="10283.399"
Z="40.9999850090838"/>
<Max X="10241.64" Y="10283.399"
Z="41.0000151701423"/>
</Extent>
<ControlPoints>
<Coordinate X="10241.64" Y="10283.399" Z="41.0"/>
<Coordinate X="10241.64" Y="10283.399" Z="41.0"/>
<Coordinate X="10241.64" Y="10283.399" Z="41.0"/>
<Coordinate X="10241.64" Y="10283.399" Z="41.0"/>
</ControlPoints>
<Knots>
<Knot>0</Knot>
<Knot>1</Knot>
</Knots>
<KnotMultiplicities>
<Multiplicity>4</Multiplicity>
<Multiplicity>4</Multiplicity>
</KnotMultiplicities>
<WeightsData>
<ControlPointWeight>1</ControlPointWeight>
<ControlPointWeight>1</ControlPointWeight>
<ControlPointWeight>1</ControlPointWeight>
<ControlPointWeight>1</ControlPointWeight>
</WeightsData>
</BsplineCurve>

• CenterLine
Geometric curve primitive detailing the line geometry between the components of a
PipingNetworkSegment. A CenterLine element is used to imply the presence of tubing.
The interpolation between each coordinate is linear.
Child elements:

Element Name Cardinality Description

Presentation 0..1 The style to use when drawing the line.
The drawing behaviour is undefined if the
Presentation element is missing.
Extent 1 The minimum bounding geometry of the
CenterLine element and its descendants

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:38 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

Element Name Cardinality Description

Coordinate 1..* The coordinates defining the line primitive
GenericAttributes 0..* Any application specific attributes relating
to the tube/CenterLine

Attributes:

Attribute Name Required Description

NumPoints Y The number of child Coordinate elements.

Example:
<CenterLine NumPoints="2">
<Presentation LineType="Solid" LineWeight="1"
Color="7" R="1" G="1" B="1" />
<Extent>
<Min X="77" Y="463" Z="0" />
<Max X="646" Y="463" Z="0" />
</Extent>
<Coordinate X="77" Y="463" Z="0" />
<Coordinate X="646" Y="463" Z="0" />
</CenterLine>

• Circle
A geometric primitive describing a circle.
Child elements:

Element Name Cardinality Description

Presentation 1 The style to use when drawing the circle
Extent 1 The minimum bounding geometry of the
circle
Position 1 The location of the circles centre
GenericAttributes 0..* Any application attributes relating to the
circle

Attributes:

Attribute Name Required Description

Radius Y The radius of the circle to draw
Filled N One of ‘Solid’ or ‘Hatch’. If not present the
circle is not filled.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:39 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

Example:
<Circle Radius="8">
<Presentation LineType="Solid" LineWeight="1"
Color="22"
R="0.79" G="0.239" B="0.087" />
<Extent>
<Min X="710" Y="258" Z="0" />
<Max X="726" Y="274" Z="0" />
</Extent>
<Position>
<Location X="718" Y="266" Z="0" />
<Axis X="0" Y="0" Z="1" />
<Reference X="1" Y="0" Z="0" />
</Position>
</Circle>

• Component
Used to group geometric and text primitives within a Drawing element. This inherits all
elements and attributes from the base type ‘PlantItem’. See ‘PlantItem’ for the definitions of
the inherited contents..
Child elements:
See ‘PlantItem’, no additional elements are defined.
Attiribute :
See ‘PlantItem’, no additional attributes are defined.
Example:
<Component ID="XMP_12" Tag>
<Extent>
<Min X="199.6153088" Y="155.02299606" Z="0" />
<Max X="236.78321894" Y="194.01149803" Z="0" />
</Extent>
<Position>
<Location X="221" Y="182" Z="0" />
<Axis X="0" Y="0" Z="1" />
<Reference X="1" Y="0" Z="0" />
</Position>
…
<Text … />
</Component>

• CompositeCurve
A collection of geometric curve primitives.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:40 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

Child elements:

Element Name Cardinality Description

Presentation 0..1 The Presentation element has no purpose
in this context.
Extent 1 The minimum bounding geometry of the
geometric contents of the Drawing element
and its descendants.
BsplineCurve 0..* A geometric primitive
Circle 0..* A geometric primitive
CompositeCurve 0..* A geometric primitive
Ellipse 0..* A geometric primitive
Line 0..* A geometric primitive
Polyline 0..* A geometric primitive
Shape 0..* A geometric primitive
TrimmedCurve 0..* A geometric primitive
GenericAttributes 0..* Any application specific properties relating
to the Drawing.

Attributes:
None
Example:
<CompositeCurve>
<Presentation LineType="Solid" LineWeight="1"
Color="22"
R="0.79" G="0.239" B="0.087" />
<Extent>
<Min X="714.38797635" Y="260.50328515" Z="0" />
<Max X="720.62485791" Y="263.00328515" Z="0" />
</Extent>
<Circle ... />
<Circle ... />
<PolyLine ... />
</CompositeCurve>

• Connection
This element is used to describe the flow connectivity between elements. The source of the
flow is defined using the attributes FromID and FromNode while the flow destination is
defined using ToID and ToNode. A connection element and its attributes are not mandatory
but must be present to represent the topology of a network. If the FromID/ToID attributes
reference a Nozzle, PipeConnector or SpecificationBreak element then the FromNode/
ToNode attributes are not required.
See ConnectionPoints for details on what is being referenced.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:41 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

Child elements:
None
Attributes:

Attribute Name Required Description

ToID N The ID, PersistentID/@Identifier or Tag of
the referenced item that is the flow
destination for the parent of the Connection
element.
ToNode N The index of the ConnectionPoints Node
element within the ConnectionPoints
element of the destination element. Nb
this is a 0 based index and is only required
if the destination is not a Nozzle,
PipeConnector or SpecificationBreak.
FromID N The ID, PersistentID/@Identifier or Tag of
the referenced item that is the flow source
for the parent of the Connection element.
See Tag Referencing
FromNode N The index of the ConnectionPoints Node
element within the ConnectionPoints
element of the source element. Nb this is a
0 based index and is only required if the
source is not a Nozzle, PipeConnector or
SpecificationBreak.

Example:
<PipingNetworkSegment … >
…
<Connection FromID="XMP_73" ToID="XMP_4" ToNode="2" />
…
</PipingNetworkSegment>

• ConnectionPoints
This element is used to describe the potential flow connections from and to the parent of this
element. Each potential connection location is represented as a Node element. Nodes are
ordered and positioned on the drawing. Each Node element may be referenced by at most
one Connection element.
The first node (known as Node 0) represents the geometric origin of the parent of the
ConnectionPoints element.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:42 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

Child elements:

Element Name Cardinality Description

Presentation 0..1 The Presentation element has no purpose
in this context.
Extent 0..1 The minimum bounding geometry of the
geometric contents of the
ConnectionPoints element and its
descendants.
Node 1..* The first node (Node 0) represents the
geometric location of the parent element.
Nodes 1..n represent the locations that
other elements may connect to.
GenericAttributes 0..* Any Application attributes related to
connectivity

Attributes:

Attribute Name Required Description

NumPoints Y The number of Node elements in this
ConnectionPoints element.
FlowIn N The index of the Node that is used for the
primary flow into the parent of the
ConnectionPoints element. This Defaults to
1 if not present.
FlowOut N The index of the Node that is used for the
primary flow from the parent of the
ConnectionPoints element. This defaults
to 2 if not present.

Example:
<ConnectionPoints NumPoints="4" FlowIn="1" FlowOut="2">
<!-- Node 0 : Geometric origin of the component -->
<Node>
<Position>
<Location X="337" Y="211" Z="0" />
<Axis X="0" Y="0" Z="1" />
<Reference X="1" Y="0" Z="0" />
</Position>
</Node>
<!-- Node 1 : FlowIn default -->
<Node>
<Position>
<Location X="337" Y="211" Z="0" />
<Axis X="0" Y="0" Z="1" />
<Reference X="1" Y="0" Z="0" />
</Position>

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:43 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

<NominalDiameter Value="4" />

</Node>
<!-- Node 2 : FlowOut default -->
<Node>
<Position>
<Location X="337" Y="211" Z="0" />
<Axis X="0" Y="0" Z="1" />
<Reference X="1" Y="0" Z="0" />
</Position>
<NominalDiameter Value="4" />
</Node>
<!-- Node 3 : Secondary flow, direction not stated -->
<Node>
<Position>
<Location X="337" Y="211" Z="0" />
<Axis X="0" Y="0" Z="1" />
<Reference X="1" Y="0" Z="0" />
</Position>
<NominalDiameter Value="4" />
</Node>
</ConnectionPoints>

• ConnectionType
This is a free form string element that may be unit qualified.
Child elements:
None
Attributes:

Attribute Name Required Description

Units N This may contain any of the permitted units
types See Units.

Example:
<ConnectionType>Welded</ConnectionType>

• ControlPoints
Child elements :

Element Name Cardinality Description

Coordinate 1..*

Attributes:
None

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:44 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

Example:
<ControlPoints>
<Coordinate X="10241.64" Y="10283.399" Z="41.0"/>
<Coordinate X="10241.64" Y="10283.399" Z="41.0"/>
<Coordinate X="10241.64" Y="10283.399" Z="41.0"/>
<Coordinate X="10241.64" Y="10283.399" Z="41.0"/>
</ControlPoints>

• ControlPointWeight
This is defined as an any but should be considered to be of type xsd:integer.
Child elements:
None
Attributes :
None
Example:
<ControlPointWeight>1</ControlPointWeight>

• Coordinate
A Coordinate element is a Tuple of ordinates denoting a location in the drawing plane. For
2D drawings the Z ordinates should always be 0.
Child elements:
None
Attributes:

Attribute Name Required Description

X Y The X Axis ordinate as a double
Y Y The Y Axis ordinate as a double
Z N The Z Axis ordinate as a double, If not
present this defaults to 0.0

Example:
<Coordinate X="112" Y="106" Z="0" />
<Coordinate X="112" Y="110" />

• CrossPageConnection
An element describing how to match PipeConnector elements to represent cross page
connectivity on a P&ID.
Child elements:
None

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:45 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

Attributes:

Attribute Name Required Description

DrawingName N The Name attribute of the Drawing that the
matching PipeConnector is on. Depending
on whether the attribute for matching is
unique to a drawing or the entire project
this may be required.
AttributeName Y The attribute name on the PipeConnector
to use to match the connectors together.
This could be an ItemAttribute such as the
Tag or ID, or a member of a
GenericAttributes element.
AttributeValue Y The value of the attribute to match on.
Wildcards are not supported.
Set N If referencing an attribute inside a
GenericAttributes element then the Set of
the attribute should be provided.
If referencing a PersistentID attribute then
the Context attribute value of the
PersistentID should be provided here

Example:
<CrossPageConnection DrawingName="A1-51-2003-1"
AttributeName="PersistentID" AttributeValue="{SOME_ID_1}"
Context="http://www.aveva.com/example/P&amp;ID"/>

• Description
A textual description of an item
Child elements:
None
Attributes:
None
Example:
<Description>some piece of plant equipment</Description>

• Discipline
This is a simple element with no attributes containing one of the following values to classify
an element:
Electrical
Mechanical
Process
HVAC

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:46 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

Telecomms
Example:
<Discipline>Mechanical</Discipline>

• Drawing
This contains metadata about the drawing and graphical annotation for the drawing that the
XML file contains.
Child elements:

Element Name Cardinality Description

Presentation 1 The R, G and B values of this element
define the background colour for the
drawing. This is in contrast to the normal
use of the Presentation element that
defines foreground style information.
Extent 1 The minimum bounding geometry of the
geometric contents of the Drawing element
and its descendants.
Component 0..* A PlantItem used to group annotation.
BsplineCurve 0..* A geometric primitive
Circle 0..* A geometric primitive
CompositeCurve 0..* A geometric primitive
Ellipse 0..* A geometric primitive
Line 0..* A geometric primitive
Polyline 0..* A geometric primitive
Shape 0..* A geometric primitive
TrimmedCurve 0..* A geometric primitive
Text 0..* Textual annotation on the drawing
DrawingBorder 0..* This element may be used to store the
drawing border/outline but this is at the
discretion of the export tool.
GenericAttributes 0..* Any application specific properties relating
to the Drawing.

Attributes:

Attribute Name Required Description

Name Y Identity for the drawing, this must be
unique in the project.
Type Y Fixed value of ‘PID’

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:47 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

Attribute Name Required Description

Revision N Free form string value. See Character
encoding
Title Y The drawing title
Size N This is a free text string and has no defined
syntax. See Character encoding.

Example:
<Drawing Name="A1-51-2003-1" Type="PID" Size="A0"
Title="Sample Project drawing" Revision="A">
<Presentation R="0" G="0" B="0" />
<Extent>
<Min X="0" Y="-2" Z="0" />
<Max X="850.0" Y="620.25" Z="0" />
</Extent>
<PolyLine NumPoints="4">…</PolyLine>
…
</Drawing>

• DrawingBorder
This element may be used to separate the drawing frame and borders from the drawing
annotation.
Child elements:

Element Name Cardinality Description

Presentation 0..1 The Presentation element has no purpose
in this context.
Extent 1 The minimum bounding geometry of the
geometric contents of the Drawing element
and its descendants.
BsplineCurve 0..* A geometric primitive
Circle 0..* A geometric primitive
CompositeCurve 0..* A geometric primitive
Ellipse 0..* A geometric primitive
Line 0..* A geometric primitive
Polyline 0..* A geometric primitive
Shape 0..* A geometric primitive
TrimmedCurve 0..* A geometric primitive
Text 0..*

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:48 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

Element Name Cardinality Description

DrawingBorder 0..* This element may be used to store the
drawing border/outline but this is at the
discretion of the export tool.
GenericAttributes 0..* Any application specific properties relating
to the Drawing.

Attributes:

Attribute Name Required Description

Name N Identity for the drawing border
Size N This is a free text string and has no defined
syntax. See Character encoding.

Example:
<DrawingBorder Name="Top" Size="A0-Portrait">
<Presentation R="0" G="0" B="0" />
<Extent>
<Min X="0" Y="-2" Z="0" />
<Max X="850.0" Y="620.25" Z="0" />
</Extent>
<PolyLine NumPoints="4">…</PolyLine>
…
</DrawingBorder>

• Ellipse
A geometric primitive used to describe an ellipse.
Child elements:

Element Name Cardinality Description

Presentation 1 This defines the drawing style to be used
for the ellipse.
Extent 1 The minimum bounding geometry of the
geometric contents of the Drawing element
and its descendants.
Position 1 The centre/origin of the ellipse to draw
GenericAttributes 0..* A geometric primitive

Attributes:

Attribute Name Required Description

PrimaryAxis Y Double describing the primary axis

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:49 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

Attribute Name Required Description

SecondaryAxis Y double describing the secondary axis
Filled N A value of ‘Solid’ or ‘Hatch’. If not present
the ellipse is not filled.

Example:
<Ellipse PrimaryAxis="7.62" SecondaryAxis="3.83916">
<Presentation Layer="Default" LineType="Solid"
LineWeight="0.13 mm" Color="Red" R="1" G="0" B="0"/>
<Extent>
<Min X="184.52505999" Y="425.32167093" Z="0"/>
<Max X="199.76504821" Y="429.16757932" Z="0"/>
</Extent>
<Position>
<Location X="192.145059987" Y="425.328421759"
Z="0"/>
<Axis X="0" Y="0" Z="1"/>
<Reference X="1" Y="0" Z="0"/>
</Position>
</Ellipse>

• EndDiameter
This is the internal bore for a segment or a PipingNetworkSystem at its destination.
Child elements:
None
Attributes:

Attribute Name Required Description

Value Y The bore size
Units N This may be any of the distance units
permitted. See Units for permitted values
and semantics if not present.

Example:
<EndDiameter Value="4" />

<EndDiameter Value="200" Units="mm" />

• Equipment
An Equipment element inherits elements and attributes from the base type ‘PlantItem’. See
‘PlantItem’ for the definitions of the inherited contents.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:50 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

Child elements:

Element Name Cardinality Description

Discipline 0..1 Functional domain of Equipment
NormalOperatingPressure 0..1
MinimumDesignPressure 0..1
MaximumDesignPressure 0..1
MinimumDesignTemperatu 0..1
re
MaximumDesignTemperat 0..1
ure
Equipment 0..* Equipment considered part of this
equipment
Nozzle 0..* Potential pipe connection to this equipment

Attributes:

Attribute Name Required Description

ProcessArea N A free form string identifying, if required,
the process area that this equipment
resides in (See Character encoding).
Purpose N A free form string describing the function of
this equipment in the process (see
Character encoding).

Example:
<Equipment ID="XMP_12" Tag="P-1502B"
ComponentClass="VerticalPump"
ComponentName="VPump" StockNumber="puv1">
<Extent>
<Min X="199.6153088" Y="155.02299606" Z="0" />
<Max X="236.78321894" Y="194.01149803" Z="0" />
</Extent>
<Position>
<Location X="221" Y="182" Z="0" />
<Axis X="0" Y="0" Z="1" />
<Reference X="1" Y="0" Z="0" />
</Position>
<PersistentID Identifier="{A1-51-2003-1_Topology-EQUIPMENT-
2}"
Context="http://www.aveva.com/example/P&amp;ID" />
…
<Nozzle ID="XMP_14" Tag="N2" ComponentClass="FlangedNozzle"
StockNumber="flnn1">
…

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:51 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

</Nozzle>
</Equipment>

• Extent
A minimum bounding geometry describing the minimum and maximum coordinates of the
descendants of this elements parent.
Child elements:

Element Name Cardinality Description

Min 1 Minimum values for all geometric
descendants of the Extent elements
parent.
Max 1 Maximum values for all geometric
descendants of the Extent elements parent

Attributes:
None
Example:
<Extent>
<Min X="199.6153088" Y="155.02299606" Z="0" />
<Max X="236.78321894" Y="194.01149803" Z="0" />
</Extent>

• FabricationCategory
This is a free form string element that may be unit qualified.
Child elements:
None
Attributes:

Attribute Name Required Description

Units N This may contain any of the permitted units
types See Units.

Example:
None

• GenericAttributes
This element permits application specific attributes/properties to be output into an XML file.
The properties themselves must adhere to the following complex type definition:
<complexType name="GenericAttributeType" mixed="true">
<attribute name="Format" type="xsd:string"/>
<attribute name="Value" type="xsd:string"/>
</complexType>

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:52 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

Child elements:

Element Name Cardinality Description

Xsd:any @Number The contents of a GenericAttributes
element are not validated and may be any
valid XML content. However the XML
applications will expect the contents to
conform to the schema fragment provided
above.

Attributes:

Attribute Name Required Description

Number Y The number of GenericAttributes inside
this set.
Set N A name for this grouping of attributes.

Example:
<GenericAttributes Number="6" Set="Instrument">
<TagSuffix Format="string" Value=" "/>
<LoopTagSuffix Format="string" Value=" "/>
<MeasuredVariableCode Format="string" Value="F"/>
<Description0 Format="string" Value="155"/>
<InstrumentTypeModifier Format="string" Value="CV"/>
<TagSequenceNo Format="string" Value="001"/>
</GenericAttributes>

• GeometricPrimitives
A collection of geometric elements.
Child elements:

Element Name Cardinality Description

Extent 1 The minimum bounding geometry of the
geometric contents of the Drawing element
and its descendants.
Surface 0..* A geometric primitive
BsplineCurve 0..* A geometric primitive
Circle 0..* A geometric primitive
CompositeCurve 0..* A geometric primitive
Ellipse 0..* A geometric primitive
Line 0..* A geometric primitive
Polyline 0..* A geometric primitive

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:53 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

Element Name Cardinality Description

Shape 0..* A geometric primitive
TrimmedCurve 0..* A geometric primitive

Attributes:

Attribute Name Required Description

NumPrimitives N The number of primitives inside this set. (=
number of child elements -1)

Example:
<GeometricPrimitives NumPrimitives="3">
<Extent>
<Min X="53" Y="125" Z="0"/>
<Max X="89" Y="130" Z="0"/>
</Extent>
<Circle ... />
<Circle ... />
<Surface ... />
</GeometricPrimitives>

• Height
This is the height of the Nozzle origin on it’s parent Equipment, measured from the origin of
the Equipment.
Child elements:
None
Attributes:

Attribute Name Required Description

Value Y The height value
Units N This may be any of the distance units
permitted. See Units for permitted values
and semantics if not present.

Example:
<Height Value="1.3" Units="m"/>

• History
This is provided to contain an audit trail of the changes to an item.
Child elements:

Element Name Cardinality Description

Transaction 0..* An entry in the audit trail

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:54 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

Attributes:

Attribute Name Required Description

NumTransactions Y The number of Transaction child elements

Example:
<History NumTransaction="3">
<Transaction ... />
<Transaction ... />
<Transaction ... />
</History>

• Identifier
This element is used to capture the structure of an identifier such as a Tag. Not usually
used.
Child elements:

Element Name Cardinality Description

IdentifierElement 0..* A structural component of an identifier.

Attributes:

Attribute Name Required Description

Purpose N A string describing the purpose of this
element.

Example:
<Identifier Purpose="Tag breakdown">
<IdentifierElement Name="start" Value="AB-"/>
<IdentifierElement Name="middle" ItemID="XMP_24"
DependantAttribute="[Prefix]-[Number]"/>
</Identifier>

• IdentifierElement
A structural element describing part of the structure of an identifier.
Child elements:
None
Attributes:

Attribute Name Required Description

Name Y The name of this part of the identifier
Value N Only required if dependantAttribute is not
provided.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:55 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

Attribute Name Required Description

ItemID N Only required if an attribute is referenced
on another item.
DependantAttribute N References an attribute from which this
part of the identifier is derived. See Textfor
a description of how this attribute is
defined.

Example:
<IdentifierElement Name="start" Value="AB-"/>

<IdentifierElement Name="middle" ItemID="XMP_24"

DependantAttribute="[Prefix]-[Number]"/>

• InsideDiameter
This is the internal bore for an item at its source end.
Child elements:
None
Attributes:

Attribute Name Required Description

Value Y The bore size
Units N This may be any of the distance units
permitted. See Units for permitted values
and semantics if not present.

Example:
<InsideDiameter Value="4" />

<InsideDiameter Value="200" Units="mm" />

• InstrumentLoop
A collection of related instruments. This element inherits elements and attributes from the
base type ‘PlantItem’. See ‘PlantItem’ for the definitions of the inherited contents. Inline
instruments are associated to instrument loops by using the Association element.
Child elements:

Element Name Cardinality Description

ProcessInstrument 0..* An off-line instrument that is part of this set.
SignalLine 0..*
SignalConnectorSymbol 0..*
Connection 0..*

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:56 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

Attributes:
See ‘PlantItem’, no additional attributes are defined.
Example:
<InstrumentLoop ID="XMP_123">
<Extent>
<Min X="355" Y="339" Z="0" />
<Max X="481" Y="355" Z="0" />
</Extent>
<SignalLine ... />
<SignalLine ... />
<SignalLine ... />
<ProcessInstrument ... />
<ProcessInstrument ... />
</InstrumentLoop>

• KnotMultiplicities
Child elements:

Element Name Cardinality Description

Multiplicity 1..*

Attributes:
None
Example:
<KnotMultiplicities>
<Multiplicity>4</Multiplicity>
<Multiplicity>4</Multiplicity>
</KnotMultiplicities>

• Knot
This is defined as an any but should be considered to be of type xsd:integer.
Child elements :
None
Attributes:
None
Example:
<Knot>1</Knot>

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:57 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

• Knots
Child elements:

Element Name Cardinality Description

Knot 1..*

• Line
A linear geometry defined by two points.
Child elements:

Element Name Cardinality Description

Presentation 1 This defines the drawing style to be used
for the ellipse.
Extent 1 The minimum bounding geometry of the
geometric contents of the Drawing element
and its descendants.
Coordinate 2 The coordinates defining the start and end
of the line.
GenericAttributes 0..* A geometric primitive

Attributes:
None
Example:
<Line>
<Presentation LineWeight="1" LineType="Solid"
Color="red"
R="1" G="0" B="0" />
<Extent>
<Min X="831" Y="502.6" Z="0" />
<Max X="841" Y="502.6" Z="0" />
</Extent>
<Coordinate X="841" Y="502.6" Z="0" />
<Coordinate X="831" Y="502.6" Z="0" />
</Line>

• Location
A Location element matches the definition of a Coordinated, it is a Tuple of ordinates
denoting a location in the drawing plane. For 2D drawings the Z ordinates should always be
0.
Child elements:
None

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:58 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

Attributes:

Attribute Name Required Description

X Y The X Axis ordinate as a double
Y Y The Y Axis ordinate as a double
Z N The Z Axis ordinate as a double, If not
present this defaults to 0.0

Example:
<Location X="112" Y="106" Z="0" />
<Location X="112" Y="110" />

• Manufacturer
The manufacturer responsible for producing the item
Child elements:
None
Attributes:
None
Example:
<Manufacturer>My company</Manufacturer>

• Material
The name of the Material used to construct the item
Child elements:
None
Attributes:
None
Example:
<Material>Copper</Material>

• MaterialDescription
A description of the material relating to an item
Child elements:
None
Attributes:
None
Example:
<MaterialDescription>Some descriptive text
</MaterialDescription>

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:59 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

• Max
Maximum coordinates for an Extent element
Child elements:
None
Attributes:

Attribute Name Required Description

X Y X axis value denoting the maximum X
value for all geometric descendants of ../..
Y Y Y axis value denoting the maximum Y
value for all geometric descendants of ../..
Z Y Z axis value denoting the maximum Z
value for all geometric descendants of ../..
For 2D drawings this should always be 0

Example:
<Max X="236.78321894" Y="194.01149803" Z="0" />

• MaximumDesignPressure
The maximum design pressure for an item.
Child elements:
None
Attributes:

Attribute Name Required Description

Value Y The maximum design pressure
Units N This may be any of the pressure units
permitted. See Units for permitted values
and semantics if not present.

Example:
<MaximumDesignPressure Value="12" />

<MaximumDesignPressure Value="35" Units="bar" />

• MaximumDesignTemperature
The maximum design temperature for an item.
Child elements:
None

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:60 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

Attributes:

Attribute Name Required Description

Value Y The maximum design temperature
Units N This may be any of the temperature units
permitted. See Units for permitted values
and semantics if not present.

Example:
<MaximumDesignTemperature Value="12" />

<MaximumDesignTemperature Value="35" Units="DegreeCelsius" />

• MaximumOperatingPressure
The maximum operating pressure for an item.
Child elements:
None
Attributes:

Attribute Name Required Description

Value Y The maximum pressure
Units N This may be any of the pressure units
permitted. See Units for permitted values
and semantics if not present.

Example:
<MaximumOperatingPressure Value="12" />
<MaximumOperatingPressure Value="35" Units="bar" />

• MaximumOperatingTemperature
The maximum operating temperature for an item.
Child elements:
None
Attributes:

Attribute Name Required Description

Value Y The maximum temperature
Units N This may be any of the temperature units
permitted. See Units for permitted values
and semantics if not present.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:61 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

Example:
<MaximumOperatingTemperature Value="12" />
<MaximumOperatingTemperature Value="35" Units="DegreeCelsius"
/>

• Min
Child elements:
None
Attributes:

Attribute Name Required Description

X Y X axis value denoting the minimum X value
for all geometric descendants of ../… This
is a double
Y Y Y axis value denoting the minimum Y value
for all geometric descendants of ../.. This
is a double
Z Y Z axis value denoting the minimum Z value
for all geometric descendants of ../.. This
is a double.
For 2D drawings this should always be 0.

Example:
<Min X="199.6153088" Y="155.02299606" Z="0" />

• MinimumDesignPressure
This is the minimum design pressure for an item.
Child elements:
None
Attributes:

Attribute Name Required Description

Value Y The minimum design pressure as a double.
Units N This may be any of the pressure units
permitted. See Units for permitted values
and semantics if not present.

Example:
<MinimumDesignPressure Value="12" />
<MinimumDesignPressure Value="35" Units="bar" />

• MinimumDesignTemperature
This is the minimum design temperature for an item.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:62 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

Child elements:
None
Attributes:

Attribute Name Required Description

Value Y The minimum design temperature as a
double.
Units N This may be any of the temperature units
permitted. See Units for permitted values
and semantics if not present.

Example:
<MinimumDesignTemperature Value="12" />
<MinimumDesignTemperature Value="35" Units="DegreeCelsius" />

• MinimumOperatingPressure
This is the minimum operating pressure for an item.
Child elements:
None
Attributes:

Attribute Name Required Description

Value Y The minimum pressure as a double.
Units N This may be any of the pressure units
permitted. See Units for permitted values
and semantics if not present.

Example:
<MinimumOperatingPressure Value="12" />
<MinimumOperatingPressure Value="35" Units="bar" />

• MinimumOperatingTemperature
This is the minimum operating temperature for an item.
Child elements:
None
Attributes:

Attribute Name Required Description

Value Y The minimum temperature as a double.
Units N This may be any of the temperature units
permitted. See Units for permitted values
and semantics if not present.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:63 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

Example:
<MinimumOperatingTemperature Value="12" />

<MinimumOperatingTemperature Value="35" Units="DegreeCelsius"

/>

• ModelNumber
String element detailing the model number for a component.
Child elements:
None
Attributes:
None
Example:
<ModelNumber>A485798347-BjiOM-9347</ModelNumber>

• Multiplicity
This is defined as an any but should be considered to be of type xsd:integer.
Child elements:
None
Attributes:
None
Example:
<Multiplicity>4</Multiplicity>

• NominalDiameter
This is the internal bore for an item.
Child elements:
None
Attributes:

Attribute Name Required Description

Value Y The bore size as a double
Units N This may be any of the distance units
permitted. See Units for permitted values
and semantics if not present.

Example:
<NominalDiameter Value="4" />
<NominalDiameter Value="200" Units="mm" />

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:64 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

• NormalDesignPressure
Design pressure of an item under normal conditions.
Child elements:
None
Attributes:

Attribute Name Required Description

Value Y The pressure value as a double
Units N This may be any of the pressure units
permitted. See Units for permitted values
and semantics if not present.

Example:
<NormalDesignPressure Value="4" />
<NormalDesignPressure Value="3" Units="barg" />

• NormalDesignTemperature
Design temperature of an item under normal conditions.
Child elements:
None
Attributes:

Attribute Name Required Description

Value Y The temperature value as a double
Units N This may be any of the temperature units
permitted. See Units for permitted values
and semantics if not present.

Example:
<NormalDesignTemperature Value="52" />
<NormalDesignTemperature Value="80" Units="DegreeCelsius" />

• NormalOperatingPressure
Operating pressure of an item under normal conditions.
Child elements:
None

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:65 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

Attributes:

Attribute Name Required Description

Value Y The pressure value as a double
Units N This may be any of the pressure units
permitted. See Units for permitted values
and semantics if not present.

Example:
<NormalOperatingPressure Value="4" />
<NormalOperatingPressure Value="3" Units="barg" />

• NormalOperatingTemperature
Operating temperature of an item under normal conditions
Child elements:
None
Attributes:

Attribute Name Required Description

Value Y The temperature value as a double
Units N This may be any of the temperature units
permitted. See Units for permitted values
and semantics if not present.

Example:
<NormalOperatingTemperature Value="52" />
<NormalOperatingTemperature Value="80" Units="DegreeCelsius"
/>

• Nozzle
A Nozzle element inherits elements and attributes from the base type ‘PlantItem’. See
‘PlantItem’ for the definitions of the inherited contents.
Child elements:

Element Name Cardinality Description

NozzleType 0..1
NominalDiameter 0..1 Internal nominal bore of nozzle
Height 0..1 Height of Nozzle on the Equipment

Attributes:
See ‘PlantItem’, no additional attributes

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:66 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

Example:
<Nozzle ID="XMP_10" Tag="N1" ComponentClass="FlangedNozzle">
<Extent>
<Min X="205.47371879" Y="245.5" Z="0" />
<Max X="215" Y="263" Z="0" />
</Extent>
<Position>
<Location X="215" Y="255" Z="0" />
<Axis X="0" Y="0" Z="1" />
<Reference X="-1" Y="0" Z="0" />
</Position>
<PersistentID Identifier="{A1-51-2003-1_Topology-
NOZZLE-1}"
Context="http://www.aveva.com/example/P&amp;ID" /
>
<Line>
<Presentation LineType="Solid" LineWeight="1"
R="0.25" G="0.82" B="0.15" />
<Extent>
<Min X="211" Y="255" Z="0" />
<Max X="215" Y="255" Z="0" />
</Extent>
<Coordinate X="211" Y="255" Z="0" />
<Coordinate X="215" Y="255" Z="0" />
</Line>
…
<NominalDiameter Value="4" />
</Nozzle>

• NozzleType
This is a simple element with one attribute and no contents
Child elements:
None
Attributes:

Attribute Name Required Description

Value N One of ‘Welded’, ‘Flanged’ or ‘Elbow’.
This defaults to ‘Flanged’ if the Value
attribute isn’t present.

Example:
<NozzleType Value="Flanged"/>

• OperatorType
This is a free form string element that may be unit qualified.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:67 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

Child elements:
None
Attributes:

Attribute Name Required Description

Units N This may contain any of the permitted units
types See Units.

Example:
None

• OutsideDiameter
This is the external diameter of an item.
Child elements:
None
Attributes:

Attribute Name Required Description

Value Y The external diameter measurement as a
double
Units N This may be any of the distance units
permitted. See Units for permitted values
and semantics if not present.

Example:
<OutsideDiameter Value="4" />
<OutsideDiameter Value="200" Units="mm" />

• PConnectionPoints
See Issues.

• PersistentID
The PersistentID element contains a source system identifier for an object that remains
consistent between exports of a drawing. A PersistentID is made up of two components the
identifier and its scope.
A PersistentID should be the same for an object that appears on multiple drawings where it
is practicable to do this. If this cannot be achieved the T, if present, will be used by P&ID
Manager for rationalising objects.
Child elements:
None

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:68 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

Attributes:

Attribute Name Required Description

Identifier Y The persistent identifier for an XML
element.
The Identifier must be unique within the set
of XML files that may interact directly or
indirectly with this drawing for the stated
context.
This a free form string type, see Character
encoding.
Context N This scopes a persistent identifier.
In this way an item may have different
Identifiers for different systems/contexts
and each identifier may be represented.
Ideally this would be encoded as a URI.
For example http://www.aveva.com/P&ID
Designer/ProjectName.

Example:
<PersistentID
Identifier="{A1-51-2003-1_Topology-NOZZLE-1}"
Context="http://www.aveva.com/example/P&amp;ID" />

• PipeConnector
An on or off page connector that represents the connectivity of a PipingNetworkSegment
across a page boundary. These are contained by the PipingNetworkSegment elements and
reference as the segment source or destination.
A PipeConnector element inherits elements and attributes from the base type ‘PlantItem’.
See ‘PlantItem’ for the definitions of the inherited contents.
Child elements:

Element Name Cardinality Description

CrossPageConnection 0..1 Information describing the matching criteria
for the PipeConnector that is connected to
this one.

Attributes:
See ‘PlantItem’, no Additional attributes
Example:
<PipeConnector ID="XMP_92" Tag="A1-51-2003-3"
StockNumber="flag1">
<Presentation LineType="Solid" LineWeight="1"
Color="7" R="1" G="1" B="1" />
<Extent … />
<Position … />
<PersistentID … />

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:69 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

<PolyLine … />
<Text … />
<CrossPageConnection … />
</PipeConnector>

• PipeFlowArrow
This element is an annotation primitive to represent the direction of flow of a
PipingNetworkSegment.
A PipeFlowArrow element inherits elements and attributes from the base type ‘PlantItem’.
See ‘PlantItem’ for the definitions of the inherited contents.
Child elements:
See ‘PlantItem’, no additional elements
Attributes:
See ‘PlantItem’, no additional attributes
Example:
<PipeFlowArrow ID="XMP_29" >
<Presentation LineType="Solid" LineWeight="1"
Color="7" R="1" G="1" B="1" />
<Extent>
<Min X="671" Y="148" Z="0" />
<Max X="673" Y="152" Z="0" />
</Extent>
<Position>
<Location X="672" Y="148" Z="0" />
<Axis X="0" Y="0" Z="1" />
<Reference X="0" Y="1" Z="0" />
</Position>
<PolyLine NumPoints="42">
<Presentation LineType="Solid" LineWeight="1"
Color="7" R="1" G="1" B="1" />
<Extent>
<Min X="671" Y="148" Z="0" />
<Max X="673" Y="152" Z="0" />
</Extent>
<Coordinate X="671" Y="152" Z="0" />
<Coordinate X="672" Y="148" Z="0" />
<Coordinate X="673" Y="152" Z="0" />
<Coordinate X="671" Y="152" Z="0" />
</PolyLine>
</PipeFlowArrow>

• PipingNetworkSystem
A PipingNetworkSystem contains the information for a physical PipingNetworkSystem in the
plant or a section thereof as contained within a module. The PipingNetworkSystem contains
all of the PlantItems that belong to it. A PipingNetworkSystem may have multiple sources
and multiple destinations.'

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:70 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

A PipingNetworkSystem element inherits elements and attributes from the base type
‘PlantItem’. See ‘PlantItem’ for the definitions of the inherited contents.
Child elements:

Element Name Cardinality Description

NominalDiameter 0..1
InsideDiameter 0..1
OutsideDiameter 0..1
StartDiameter 0..1
EndDiameter 0..1
NormalDesignPressure 0..1
MinimumDesignPressure 0..1
MaximumDesignPressure 0..1
NormalDesignTemperature 0..1
MinimumDesignTemperatu 0..1
re
MaximumDesignTemperat 0..1
ure
NormalOperatingPressure 0..1
MinimumOperatingPressur 0..1
e
MaximumOperatingPressu 0..1
re
TestPressure 0..1
NormalOperatingTemperat 0..1
ure
MiniumumOperatingTemp 0..1
erature
MaximumOperatingTempe 0..1
rature
WallThickness 0..1
Connection 0..* Not used as connectivity should be
represented by each contained
PipingNetworkSegment.
PipingNetworkSegment 0..* The segments that make up the
PipingNetworkSystem
SpecificationBreak 0..* Points at which changes occur in the pipe
specification. This causes a break in the
segment.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:71 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

Attributes:
See ‘PlantItem’, no additional attributes
Example:
<PipingNetworkSystem ID="PLINE_1">
<Extent ... />
<PersistentID ... />
<NominalDiameter ... />
<MinimumDesignPressure ... />
<MaximumDesignPressure ... />
<PipingNetworkSegment ... />
<PipingNetworkSegment ... />
<PipingNetworkSegment ... />
<SpecificationBreak ... />
</PipingNetworkSystem>

• PipingComponent
This represents a physical component that is common to piping systems.
A PipingComponent element inherits elements and attributes from the base type ‘PlantItem’.
See ‘PlantItem’ for the definitions of the inherited contents.
Child elements:

Element Name Cardinality Description

PipingComponent 0..* Contained PipingComponent.
ConnectionType 0..1
NominalDiameter 0..1
InsideDiameter 0..1
None 0..1
Outside Diameter
OperatorType 0..1
WallThickness 0..1
FabricationCategory 0..1

Attributes:

Attribute Name Required Description

ConnectionType N This is a free text string and has no defined
syntax. See Character encoding
Rating N This is a free text string and has no defined
syntax. See Character encoding

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:72 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

Attribute Name Required Description

Standard N This is a free text string and has no defined
syntax. See Character encoding
ISOSymbol N This is a free text string and has no defined
syntax. See Character encoding

Example:
<PipingComponent ID="PipeTee_5" ComponentClass="PipeTee">
<Presentation LineType="Solid" LineWeight="1"
Color="7" R="1" G="1" B="1" />
<Extent>
<Min X="112" Y="182" Z="0" />
<Max X="112" Y="182" Z="0" />
</Extent>
<Position>
<Location X="112" Y="182" Z="0" />
<Axis X="0" Y="0" Z="1" />
<Reference X="1" Y="0" Z="0" />
</Position>
<PersistentID … />
<ConnectionPoints NumPoints="4" FlowIn="1" FlowOut="2"
… />
</PipingComponent>

• PipingNetworkSegment
A PipingNetworkSegment is a subsection of a PipingNetworkSystem where the engineering
parameters are common. A PipingNetworkSegment will start at a Nozzle,
SpecificationBreak or the downstream end of a Reducer or Tee and end at a Nozzle,
SpecificationBreak, Reducer, Tee or an open pipe. For a P&ID it can also start or end with a
PipeConnector. It will contain one or more CenterLine, PipingComponent, Equipment and
ProcessInstrument elements. For a P&ID it is the CenterLines that join the successive
components together and these should be considered in the same way as the other
symbols and all must occur in the order head to tail.
A PipingNetworkSegment element inherits elements and attributes from the base type
‘PlantItem’. See ‘PlantItem’ for the definitions of the inherited contents.
PipeConnectors representing on and off page connectivity are contained by the
PipingNetworkSegment. See for details of PipingNetworkSegment connectivity.
Child Elements:

Element Name Cardinality Description

NominalDiameter 0..1
InsideDiameter 0..1
None 0..1
Outside Diameter
StartDiameter 0..1

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:73 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

Element Name Cardinality Description

EndDiameter 0..1
NormalDesignPressure 0..1
MinimumDesignPressure 0..1
MaximumDesignPressure 0..1
NormalDesignTemperature 0..1
MinimumDesignTemperatu 0..1
re
MaximumDesignTemperat 0..1
ure
NormalOperatingPressure 0..1
MinimumOperatingPressur 0..1
e
MaximumOperatingPressu 0..1
re
TestPressure 0..1
NormalOperatingTemperat 0..1
ure
MinimumOperating 0..1
Temperature
MaximumOperatingTempe 0..1
rature
WallThickness 0..1
Connection 0..* This states the head and tail connectivity of
this segment.
PipingNetworkSegment 0..* The segments that make up the
PipingNetworkSystem
SpecificationBreak 0..* Points at which changes occur in the pipe
specification. This causes a break in the
segment.
CenterLine 0..*
Equipment 0..*
PipingComponent 0..*
ProcessInstrument 0..*
PipeConnector 0..*
PipeFlowArrow 0..*

Attributes:
See ‘PlantItem’, no additional attributes

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:74 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

Example:
<PipingNetworkSegment ID="XMP_86" Tag="B-902"
Specification="A3B">
<Extent>
<Min X="227" Y="118" Z="0" />
<Max X="337" Y="211" Z="0" />
</Extent>
<PersistentID Identifier="{A1-51-2003-1_Topology-
SEGMENT-1}"
Context="http://www.aveva.com/example/P&amp;ID" /
>
<Connection FromID="XMP_73" ToID="XMP_87" ToNode="2" />
<NominalDiameter Value="4" />
<PipeFlowArrow ID="XMP_78" … />
<CenterLine NumPoints="3">
<Presentation LineType="Solid" LineWeight="1"
Color="7" R="1" G="1" B="1" />
<Extent>
<Min X="227" Y="118" Z="0" />
<Max X="227" Y="132" Z="0" />
</Extent>
<Coordinate X="227" Y="118" Z="0" />
<Coordinate X="227" Y="132" Z="0" />
<Coordinate X="291" Y="132" Z="0" />
</CenterLine>
<PipingComponent ID="XMP_87" ComponentClass="PipeTee" …
/>
</PipingNetworkSegment>

• PlantArea
In the P&ID content of an XML file this is just an object that may be used to represent the
name and attributes of named part(area) of a plant. A plant Area is not permitted to contain
model elements but may be referenced to associated segments, Equipment etc with a
named PlantArea.
A PlantArea element inherits elements and attributes from the base type ‘PlantItem’. See
‘PlantItem’ for the definitions of the inherited contents.
Child elements:
See ‘PlantItem’, no additional elements
Attributes:

Attribute Name Required Description

Name N A string representing the name of the area.
See Character encoding.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:75 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

Example:
<PlantArea Name="Area-42">
<Extent .. />
<Association ../>
<Association ../>
<Association ../>
</PlantArea>

• PlantInformation
This element collects the metadata for a PlantModel. The Date and Time attributes should
be the Date and Time of the XML file creation.
Child elements:

Element Name Cardinality Description

UnitsOfMeasure 1 Defines the default units of measure for the
file.

Attributes:

Attribute Name Required Description

SchemaVersion Y Fixed value of ‘3.1.2’
OriginatingSystem Y Free form string. See Character encoding
ModelName N Free form string. See Character encoding
Date Y XML date of the format YYYY-MM-DD
ProjectName N Free form string. See Character encoding
ProjectCode N Free form string. See Character encoding
ProjectDescription N Free form string. See Character encoding
CompanyName N Free form string. See Character encoding
Time Y XML time type, assumed UTC unless zone
qualified
Is3D Y Fixed value of ‘no’
Units Y The distance units of measure for the
geometry in the file.
Discipline Y Fixed value of ‘PID’

Example:
<PlantInformation SchemaVersion="3.1.2"
OriginatingSystem="VPEPID"
ModelName="http://www.aveva.com/P&amp;ID/example"
Date="2006-12-12" Time="16:43:23"
Is3D="no" Units="Millimetre" Discipline="PID">
<UnitsOfMeasure Distance="Inch" />

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:76 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

</PlantInformation>

• PlantItem
This element is a base abstract type of many elements within an XML file, it defines the
common elements and attributes for these items.
Child elements:

Element Name Cardinality Description

Presentation 0..1
Extent 1
PersistentID 0..*
Position 1
Scale 0..1
Surface 0..*
Circle 0..*
CompositeCurve 0..*
Ellipse 0..*
Line 0..*
Polyline 0..*
Shape 0..*
TrimmedCurve 0..*
BsplineCurve 0..*
GeometricPrimitives 0..*
ConnectionPoints 0..1
PConnectionPoints 0..1
Text 0..*
Identifier 0..*
Description 0..1
Weight 0..1
Material 0..1
MaterialDescription 0..1
ModelNumber 0..1
Supplier 0..1
Manufacturer 0..1
GenericAttributes 0..*

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:77 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

Element Name Cardinality Description

Association 0..*
History 0..1

Attributes:

Attribute Name Required Description

ID Y The sequential ID if the item in the file. Of
the form ‘XMP_nnn’ where n is the
sequential number as an integer. E.g.
XMP_22. See ID
Tag N See Tag
Specification N See Specification
StockNumber N See StockNumber
ComponentClass N See ComponentClass
ComponentName N See ComponentName
ComponentType N See ComponentType
Revision N See Revision
Status N See Status

Example:
N/A since the type is abstract

• Point
A geometric primitive representing a one dimensional geometry.
Child elements:

Element Name Cardinality Description

Presentation 1 The style used to draw the point.
Location 1 The point coordinate
GenericAttributes 0..* Any application attributes for this point

Attributes:

Attribute Name Required Description

IsVisible N Valid values: ‘true’, ‘false’, ‘1’ or ‘0’.
Set to ‘false’ or ‘0’ if this point should not be
drawn.

Example:
<Point>

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:78 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

<Presentation LineType="Solid" LineWeight="1"

Color="22" R="0.79" G="0.239" B="0.087" />
<Location X="714.387976347" Y="261.753285151" Z="0" />
</Point>

• PolyLine
Geometric curve primitive detailing a polyline. The interpolation between each coordinate is
linear.
Child elements:

Element Name Cardinality Description

Presentation 0..1 The style to use when drawing the line.
The drawing behaviour is undefined if the
Presentation element is missing.
Extent 1 The minimum bounding geometry of the
element and its descendants
Coordinate 1..* The coordinates defining the line primitive

Attributes:

Attribute Name Required Description

NumPoints Y The number of child Coordinate elements.

Example:
<PolyLine NumPoints="2">
<Presentation LineType="Solid" LineWeight="1"
Color="7" R="1" G="1" B="1" />
<Extent>
<Min X="77" Y="463" Z="0" />
<Max X="646" Y="463" Z="0" />
</Extent>
<Coordinate X="77" Y="463" Z="0" />
<Coordinate X="646" Y="463" Z="0" />
</PolyLine>

• Position
This defines the place where an items origin is on a P&ID drawing. This is in effect the
location of the items symbol. The Axis and Reference attributes are used to define the
coordinate orientation in 3D space. The drawing is considered to be on the plane of Z=0.
Child elements:
Attributes:
None

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:79 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

Example:
<Position>
<Location X="716.06" Y="268.76" Z="0" />
<Axis X="0" Y="0" Z="1" />
<Reference X="1" Y="0" Z="0" />
</Position>

• Presentation
The element defines a styles used to draw geometric and textual content. Whle all
attributes are defined as optional in the schema the R, G, B, LineWeight and LineType
attributes are expected for all geometric primitives, otherwise the behaviour is undefined.
Child elements:
None
Attributes:

Attribute Name Required Description

Layer N Name of the layer in which the graphical
elements resides. This has no functional
semantics associated with it.
Color N A lookup in a color index. This isn’t to be
used for P&ID Manager P&ID files.
LineType N One of the numbers or names from the
following (Object Model document v2.2):-
0 Solid
1 Dotted
2 Dashed
3 Long Dash
4 Long Dash + Short Dash,
CenterLine
5 Short Dash
6 Long Dash + Short Dash + Short
Dash
7 Dash + Short Dash
LineWeight N <real>
or
<real><units>
or
<real><space><units>
Where:-
<real> is an real value.
<space> is a space character (&#20;)
<units> is a distance units from Units
If the value isn’t qualified with units
then the behaviour is undefined.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:80 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

Attribute Name Required Description

R N 0 to 1 (double) 1 = maximum intensity of
Red component.
G N 0 to 1 (double) 1 = maximum intensity of
Green component.
B N 0 to 1 (double) 1 = maximum intensity of
blue component.

Example:
<Presentation LineType="Solid" LineWeight="2mm"
Color="22" R="0.8" G="0.25" B="0.1" />

• ProcessInstrument
This represents a physical instrument that is common to piping systems.
A ProcessInstrument element inherits elements and attributes from the base type
‘PlantItem’. See ‘PlantItem’ for the definitions of the inherited contents.
Child elements:

Element Name Cardinality Description

PlantItem 0..* Contained PipingComponent.
NominalDiameter 0..1
InsideDiameter 0..1
None 0..1
Outside Diameter
OperatorType 0..1
WallThickness 0..1

Attributes:
See ‘PlantItem’, no additional attributes
Example:
<ProcessInstrument ID="XMP_33" Tag="LT-117"
ComponentClass="LevelTransmitter">
<Extent>
<Min X="710" Y="258" Z="0" />
<Max X="726" Y="274" Z="0" />
</Extent>
<Position>
<Location X="718" Y="266" Z="0" />
<Axis X="0" Y="0" Z="1" />
<Reference X="1" Y="0" Z="0" />
</Position>
<Circle Radius="8" … />
<Text … />

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:81 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

</ProcessInstrument>

• Rating
This is a unit qualified string value to describe the rating of an item.
Child elements:
None
Attributes:

Attribute Name Required Description

Value Y Maximum safe load
Units N This may be any of the units permitted
since the type of measurement isn’t
specified. See Units for permitted values,
the semantics if Units are not present are
unclear.

Example:
<Rating Value="5" Units="bar"/>

• Reference
See Geometries (Axis and Reference).
Child elements:
None
Attributes:

Attribute Name Required Description

X Y Double
Y Y Double
Z Y Double

Example:
<Reference X="1" Y="0" Z="0" />

• Remark
A string comment element
Child elements:
None
Attributes:
None
Example:
<Remark>WP2134</Remark>

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:82 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

• Scale
The scale element is used when symbols are drawn from a shape catalogue. The Scale
element enables symbols to be rescaled when positioned in a drawing.
Child elements:
None
Attributes:

Attribute Name Required Description

X Y X scale factor
Y Y Y scale factor
Z N Z scale factor

Example:
<Scale X="2" Y="2" />

• Shape
The Shape element defines a closed curve. The interpolation between each coordinate is
linear.
Child elements:

Element Name Cardinality Description

Presentation 0..1 The style to use when drawing the line.
The drawing behaviour is undefined if the
Presentation element is missing.
Extent 1 The minimum bounding geometry of the
element and its descendants
Coordinate 4..* The coordinates defining the primitive. The
first coordinate should match the last to
complete a closed form.
GenericAttributes 0..* Any application specific attributes

Attributes:

Attribute Name Required Description

NumPoints Y The number of child Coordinate elements.
Filled N One of ‘Solid’ or ‘Hatch’ used to specify a
fill technique

Example:
<Shape NumPoints="4" Filled="Solid" >
<Presentation LineType="Solid" LineWeight="1"
Color="7" R="1" G="1" B="1" />
<Extent>

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:83 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

<Min X="77" Y="463" Z="0" />

<Max X="646" Y="534" Z="0" />
</Extent>
<Coordinate X="77" Y="463" Z="0" />
<Coordinate X="77" Y="534" Z="0" />
<Coordinate X="646" Y="463" Z="0" />
<Coordinate X="77" Y="463" Z="0" />
</Shape>

• ShapeCatalogue
A Shape Catalogue defines a symbol library for a file. The elements for which the symbols
can be defined are currently limited to Equipment and PipingComponent elements only.
See ComponentName for how to reference and name a symbol in the catalogue.
See Scale for how to scale symbols when drawn.
Child elements:

Element Name Cardinality Description

Equipment 0..* Equipment symbols
PipingComponent 0..* PipingComponent symbols
Nozzle 0..* Nozzle symbols
ProcessInstrument 0..* ProcessInstrument symbols
Component 0..* Component symbols
PipeConnector 0..* PipeConnector symbols
SignalConnectorSymbol 0..* SignalConnector symbols

Attributes:

Attribute Name Required Description

Name Y The name of the symbol catalogue, this is a
string attribute.
Version N The version of the symbol set.
Units N The distance units that the symbols are
defined in. This affects the size of the
symbol with respect to the units defined by
the PlantInformation/UnitsOfMeasure/
@Distance attribute. i.e if Units is different
to the PlantInformation default then the
symbol is scaled.
See the distance section of Units for valid
values.
Date N The date the symbol library was created/
modified.

Example:

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:84 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

<ShapeCatalogue Name="Symbols">
<Equipment ID="XMP_22" ComponentClass="VerticalPump"
ComponentName="VPump">
<Extent … />
<Position … />
<PersistentID … />
<Circle … />
…
</Equipment>
<ShapeCatalogue>

• SignalConnectorSymbol
An on or off page connector that represents the connectivity of a SignalLine across a page
boundary.
A SignalConnectorSymbol element inherits elements and attributes from the base type
‘PlantItem’. See ‘PlantItem’ for the definitions of the inherited contents.
Child elements:

Element Name Cardinality Description

CrossPageConnection 0..1 Information describing the matching criteria
for the SignalConnector that is connected
to this one.

Attributes:
See ‘PlantItem’, no additional attributes
Example:
<SignalConnectorSymbol ID="XMP_92">
<Presentation LineType="Solid" LineWeight="1"
Color="7" R="1" G="1" B="1" />
<Extent … />
<Position … />
<PersistentID … />
<PolyLine … />
<Text … />
<CrossPageConnection … />
</SignalConnectorSymbol>

• SignalLine
A connection between two instruments carrying instrumentation signals.
A SignalLine element inherits elements and attributes from the base type ‘PlantItem’. See
‘PlantItem’ for the definitions of the inherited contents.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:85 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

Child elements:

Element Name Cardinality Description

CenterLine 0..* The graphical representation of the
connectivity.
ProcessInstrument 0..* Instruments contained in this signal line.
Connection 0..1 The connectivity details of this SignalLine
SignalConnectorSymbol 0..* An off/on page connector for signal lines.

Attributes:
See ‘PlantItem’, no additional attributes
Example:
<SignalLine ID="XMP_86" Tag="B-902" >
<Extent>
<Min X="227" Y="118" Z="0" />
<Max X="337" Y="211" Z="0" />
</Extent>
<PersistentID Identifier="{A1-51-2003-1_Topology-
SIGNALLINE-1}"
Context="http://www.aveva.com/example/P&amp;ID" /
>
<Connection FromID="XMP_73" ToID="XMP_87" ToNode="2" />
<NominalDiameter Value="4" />
<CenterLine NumPoints="3">
<Presentation LineType="Solid" LineWeight="1"
Color="7" R="1" G="1" B="1" />
<Extent>
<Min X="227" Y="118" Z="0" />
<Max X="227" Y="132" Z="0" />
</Extent>
<Coordinate X="227" Y="118" Z="0" />
<Coordinate X="227" Y="132" Z="0" />
<Coordinate X="291" Y="132" Z="0" />
</CenterLine>
<ProcessInstrument ID="XMP_87" … />
</SignalLine>

• SpecificationBreak
This represents the point at which there is a change in specification of the piping. See
Issues.
A SpecificationBreak element inherits elements and attributes from the base type
‘PlantItem’. See ‘PlantItem’ for the definitions of the inherited contents.
A SpecificationBreak may only be contained by a PipingNetworkSystem element.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:86 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

Child elements :
(See ‘PlantItem’) No Additional elements
Attributes :
(See ‘PlantItem’) No Additional attributes
Example :
<SpecificationBreak ID="XMP_34">
<Description>Change in Insulation</Description>
</SpecificationBreak>

• StartDiameter
This is the internal bore for a segment or a PipingNetworkSystem at its source.
Child elements:
None
Attributes:

Attribute Name Required Description

Value Y The bore size
Units N This may be any of the distance units
permitted. See Units for permitted values
and semantics if not present.

Example:
<StartDiameter Value="4" />
<StartDiameter Value="200" Units="mm" />

• String
A string value used to annotate a drawing. Each element represents a single line of text.
Child elements:
None
Attributes:

Attribute Name Required Description

Value Y The string value
Units N Any units associated with the string value, not
sure how to use this.

Example:
<String Value="1. my text annotation"/>
<String Value="2. a second line of text"/>

• Supplier
This is the name of the supplier for an item.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:87 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

Child elements:
None
Attributes:
None
Example:
<Supplier>My supplier</Supplier>

• Surface
See Issues.

• TestPressure
The pressure that should be used to test an item
Child elements:
None
Attributes:

Attribute Name Required Description

Value Y The pressure
Units N This may be any of the pressure units
permitted. See Units for permitted values
and semantics if not present.

Example:
<TestPressure Value="60" Units="bar"/>

• Text
This defines the textual annotation for a drawing. The text may be provided in an attribute,
referenced using attributes on this item, referenced on attributes of another item or provided
as a set of String elements.
Child elements:

Element Name Cardinality Description

Presentation 1 The style to use to draw the text.
Extent 1 The minimum bounding rectangle around
the text.
Position 1 The position of the text
String 0..* Used when the text contains a line break.
GenericAttributes 0..* Any application specific attributes, this
could include attributes that contain the text
content to write.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:88 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

Attributes:

Attribute Name Required Description

NumLines N The number of text lines being
represented. If not present then a value of
1 is assumed.
String N If present this is the text to be drawn. If the
text contains a line break then it should be
split into the String child elements instead
of being in the attribute or the line break
character replaced with an appropriate
character reference.
Font Y The font family name to use.
Justification The location of Position within the Text to
be written. Where the text is on multiple
lines then Justification denotes the location
of Position for the first line of text.
One of the following:
LeftTop
LeftCenter
LeftBottom
CenterTop
CenterCenter
CenterBottom
RightTop
RightCenter
RightBottom
Defaults to LeftBottom if not provided.
Width Y The full width of the Text string once
rendered
Height Y The full height of the Text string once
rendered
TextAngle This is the angle that the base line of the
text string makes with the positive X axis
measured anticlockwise in degrees.
SlantAngle This is the angle, in degrees, of slant of the
text characters measured clockwise from
the positive Y axis. E.g. for the character I it
is the angle that the vertical stroke makes
with the positive Y axis.
ItemID If provided then the text string is to be
constructed from the attributes of another
element. The ID may be provided as the
ID of the element, the PersistentID/
@Identifier or the Tag of the element. See
Tag Referencing.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:89 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

Attribute Name Required Description

Set If the text is to be obtained from a child of a
GenericAttributes element then the set
name for the GenericAttributes element
may be provided to avoid ambiguity.
DependantAttribute The template for the textual contents if
obtaining the text from referenced
attributes.
The value of the DependantAttribute can
contain a single attribute or a list of
Attributes and explicit text. IF a single
attribute is referenced it may appear just as
the attribute name. Where multiple
attributes or explicit text is used the
attribute names are contained in square
brackets. E.g “[Tagprefix]-
[Tagnumber][Tagsuffix]”.
The search order will be the Attributes of
the PlantItem, ItemAttributes then
GenericAttributes of the Text followed by
the GenericAttributes of the parent or the
object explicitly identified by the ItemID.
The first occurrence of the named Attribute
will be used, there is no mechanism for
handling multiple attributes of the same
name.

Example:
<Text String="4&quot;-B-902-A3B" Font="romans"
Justification="CenterCenter" Width="19.2"
Height="2.5" TextAngle="90" SlantAngle="0">
<Presentation LineType="Solid" LineWeight="1"
Color="160" R="0" G="0.4" B="1" />
<Extent>
<Min X="331.98850197" Y="154.37335742" Z="0" />
<Max X="334.48850197" Y="182.19944438" Z="0" />
</Extent>
<Position>
<Location X="333.238501971" Y="154.373357424"
Z="0" />
<Axis X="0" Y="0" Z="1" />
<Reference X="1" Y="0" Z="0" />
</Position>
</Text>
<Text Font="Arial" Justification="LeftBottom" Width="17.2678"

Height="2.032" TextAngle="90"
DependantAttribute="[FluidSystem][OperFluidCode]">

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:90 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

<Presentation Layer="HiddenObjects" LineType="0"

LineWeight="0"
Color="Black" R="0" G="0" B="0"/>
<Extent>
<Min X="262.83575736" Y="344.08495775" Z="0"/>
<Max X="264.86775736" Y="369.5594541" Z="0"/>
</Extent>
<Position>
<Location X="264.867757356" Y="344.08495775"
Z="0"/>
<Axis X="0" Y="0" Z="1"/>
<Reference X="1" Y="0" Z="0"/>
</Position>
</Text>

• Transaction
A record of a change to an item
Child elements:

Element Name Cardinality Description

Remark 0..* A comment describing the change.
GenericAttributes 0..* Any application specific attributes

Attributes:

Attribute Name Required Description

Type N One of the following;
to approve
to check
to copy
to create
to modify
to request
to release
Date N A date type (YYYY-MM-DD)
Time N A time type (HH:MM:SS) (See http://www/
w3.org for full details including time zones)
CompanyName N A free form string (see Character
encoding)
Person N A free form string (see Character
encoding)

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:91 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

Example:
<Transaction Type="to modify" Date="2007-06-10"
Time="10:30:32" CompanyName="My company" Person="Me">
<Remark>Amended Nozzle parameters for new
specification</Remark>
<Remark>WP2134</Remark>
</Transaction>

• TrimmedCurve
An arc based on a circle or ellipse definition
Child elements:

Element Name Cardinality Description

Circle 0..1 Only present if Ellipse isn’t present. The
base Circle used to define the arc.
Ellipse 0..1 Only present if Circle isn’t present. The
base ellipse used to define the arc.
GenericAttributes 0..* Any application specific attributes

Attributes:

Attribute Name Required Description

StartAngle Y The rotation around the circle/ellipse to
start the arc from. 0 = up.
The direction of the rotation is governed by
the Z axis specifier on the geometry.
Angle specified in degrees (0-360).
EndAngle Y The rotation around the circle/ellipse to end
the arc at. 0 = up.
The direction of the rotation is governed by
the Z axis specifier on the geometry.
Angle specified in degrees (0-360).

Example:
<TrimmedCurve StartAngle="0" EndAngle="56.251">
<Circle Radius="3.175">
<Presentation LineType="Solid" LineWeight="1"
R="0.25" G="0.82" B="0.15" />
<Extent>
<Min X="690.58888896" Y="480.00947926"
Z="0" />
<Max X="692" Y="482.64942637" Z="0" />
</Extent>
<Position>
<Location X="688.825" Y="480.009479262"
Z="0" />

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:92 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

<Axis X="0" Y="0" Z="1" />

<Reference X="1" Y="0" Z="0" />
</Position>
</Circle>
</TrimmedCurve>

• UnitsOfMeasure
This element specifies the default units of measure for the file for each type of measured
value.
Child Elements:
None
Attributes:

Attribute Name Required Description

Distance N See Units for permitted distance values.
Default value is ‘Millimetre’.
Angle N See Units for permitted angle values.
Default value is ‘Degree’.
Temperature N See Units for permitted temperature
values. Default value is ‘DegreeCelsius’.
Pressure N See Units for permitted pressure values.
Default value is ‘Bar’.
Weight N See Units for permitted weight values.
Default value is ‘Kilogram’.

Example:
<UnitsOfMeasure Distance="Inch" />

• WallThickness
The thickness of the element construction.
Child elements:
None
Attributes:

Attribute Name Required Description

Value N The thickness value. Nb this is a string
type and so could be represented in many
ways.
Units N The units of measure (See Units for
permitted values). If not present then this
defaults to the units specified by
PlantInformation/UnitsOfMeasure.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:93 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

Example:
<WallThickness Value="4" Units="mm"/>

• Weight
The weight of the item.
Child elements:
None
Attributes:

Attribute Name Required Description

Value N The weight value.
Units N The units of measure (See Units for
permitted values). If not present then this
defaults to the units specified by
PlantInformation/UnitsOfMeasure.

Example:
<Weight Value="6" Units="oz"/>

• WeightsData
Child elements:

Element Name Cardinality Description

ControlPointWeight 0..*

Attributes:
None
Example:
<WeightsData>
<ControlPointWeight>1</ControlPointWeight>
<ControlPointWeight>1</ControlPointWeight>
<ControlPointWeight>1</ControlPointWeight>
<ControlPointWeight>1</ControlPointWeight>
</WeightsData>

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:94 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

10.6 The ISO15926 (Version 3.3.3) Schema Specification

10.6.1 Introduction
The 3.3.3 version of the ISO15926 schema can only be used to export data that is to be
imported by the 12.0 SP5 version of PDMS or later.
If exporting data to previous versions of PDMS (e.g. 12.0 SP4), the 3.2.0 version of the
ISO15926 schema must be used. See 10.5: The ISO15926 (Version 3.2.0) Schema
Specification.

• Notation
Where the notation ‘…’ is used in examples it implies content that has been omitted due to it
not being relevant for the example.
Elements in examples have been abbreviated to <Tag … /> to show structure but limit
content.

10.6.2 Model Details

• XML File Document Structure

The document structure is defined in the XML schema for the P&ID profile (See below). An
output file that conforms to this document must validate against the profile schema.
The first line of the file must be an XML declaration, for example:

<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8" ?>

The document is to be encoded using UTF-8.

The root node of a file is a PlantModel element. See the Element Definitions (below) for the
definitions of its attribute and element contents.
XML elements are not defined within an XML namespace and so are not namespace
qualified.
Elements are not defined within an XML namespace and so are not namespace qualified.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:95 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

The following class model provides an overview of the significant structural elements
contained within a P&ID profile. The arrows indicate and parent/child element relationship
in the file. The elements and their attributes are defined in section 4 of this document. Child
elements of the ShapeCatalogue element have been omitted for clarity. Geometric and
annotation elements have also been omitted.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:96 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

• Topology
Two elements within the file format are used to represent explicit connectivity between
engineering components. These elements are:
• Connection - on the PipingNetworkSegment and SignalLine elements
• CrossPageConnection - on the PipeConnectorSymbol and SignalConnectorSymbol
elements

- PipingNetworkSegment Topology (Connection element)

Components within a PipingNetworkSegment are considered to be implicitly connected, by
their main flow in and flow out connections points, in the order that they are represented in
the PipingNetworkSegment. This ordering may differ between a P&ID and 3D model.
Each PipingNetworkSegment is a collection of Components with common engineering
properties that define a single process flow. Where there is a junction in the flow or a
change of specification the PipingNetworkSegment will terminate and be connected to
PipingNetworkSegments for each subsequent flow. Subsidiary flows or connections for the
purposes of instrumentation are not considered as terminating conditions for a
PipingNetworkSegment
A PipingNetworkSegment, as its upstream or head reference (PipingNetworkSegment/
Connection/@FromID), will reference a Nozzle, InstrumentConnection, splitting component
(such as a Tee, Wye, Cross, Three Way Valve etc), Reducer, ProcessInstrument or
PropertyBreak that it doesn't contain or it will reference a PipeConnectorSymbol that it
contains as its first engineering component for connections to other drawings

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:97 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

A PipingNetworkSegment, as its downstream or tail reference (PipingNetworkSegment/

Connection/@ToID), will reference a Nozzle, InstrumentConnection, merging component
(such as a Tee, Wye or Cross), ProcessInstrument or PropertyBreak that it doesn't contain
or it will reference a splitting component (such as a Tee, Wye or Cross), Reducer or
PipeConnectorSymbol that it contains as its last engineering component.

References to contained components by the Connection element, with the exception of

PipeConnectorSymbol elements, require a ToNode attribute which references the
downstream ConnectionPoint of the component (i.e. the main flow out of the segment).
Components contained by other segments must be referenced using a ToNode or
FromNode attribute as appropriate.
References to Nozzle, PipeConnectorSymbol, PropertyBreak and ProcessInstrument
elements do not require a ToNode/FromNode attribute.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:98 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

The following diagrams demonstrates all permissible PipingNetworkSegment relationships

expressed via the Connection element:

- SignalLine Topology (Connection element)

This part of the overall specification has not been clarified.

- Connections across drawings

Connections across drawings are managed by the CrossPageConnection element that is
present on PipeConnectorSymbol and SignalConnectorSymbol elements. The connection
is expressed by the following:
• DrawingName - Identifying the drawing that the connection is to (optional)
• LinkLabel - A unique key used to match with another Connector Symbol (optional)
• LinkedPersistentID - The PersistentID of the connected Connector Symbol (optional)
Connections are only valid if:
• The matching criteria are met in both directions
• The connection elements are of the same type e.g. PipeConnectorSymbol ->
PipeConnectorSymbol

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:99 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

For Example, the following would be matched if in the appropriate drawing files:

<PipeConnectorSymbol ID="id_49" … >

<CrossPageConnection DrawingName="905681"
LinkLabel="RV90010" />
</PipeConnectorSymbol>

<PipeConnectorSymbol ID="id_52" … >

<CrossPageConnection DrawingName="905675"
LinkLabel="RV90010" />
</PipeConnectorSymbol>

See the Element Definitions for further information.

• Geometries (Axis and Reference)

All geometries in a P&ID file are accompanied by Axis and Reference elements. These
define rotations around 3 dimensional axis that define how to map the coordinates defined
for the item into the target environment. For most 2D drawing work the following values give
the expected behaviour (i.e. the coordinates are defined in the 2D drawing plane).
<Axis X="0" Y="0" Z="1"/>
<Reference X="1" Y="0" Z="0"/>
Some curve primitives such as ellipses in XMpLant require more complex use of Axis and
Reference in order to define the 2D forms.
The <Axis> value defines a unit vector in 3D space about which an object should rotate. For
2D diagrams nearly all geometries will define this element as <Axis X="0" Y="0" Z="1"/>
which denotes a vector aligned with the Z-axis.
The <Reference> element defines what is effectively the rotation about the <Axis> element.
When you see the value written as <Reference X="1" Y="0" Z="0"/> it indicates that the X-
Axis with which the object's points are defined use the same X-Axis on the output surface/
window with which to orientate - in other words no rotation is required when you have the
following paired elements;
<Axis X="0" Y="0" Z="1"/>
<Reference X="1" Y="0" Z="0"/>
Common variations include:
Inverted z axis (flip around y axis) : <Axis X="0" Y="0" Z="-1"/>
Rotation about the origin : <Reference X="[cosØ]" Y="[sinØ]" Z="0" />
Where:
[sinØ] - is the sine of the rotation angle
[cosØ] - is the cosine of the rotation angle
The rotation is measured anti-clockwise

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:100 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

• Character Encoding
XMpLant is encoded using UTF-8. This means that most characters used in western
languages are encoded using a single byte representation, more complex characters are
encoded using either a 2 byte encoding or a numerical substitution.

• TagName Referencing
TagName attributes may be used to reference elements instead of referencing by the ID
attribute. The P&ID profile prefers the use of ID referencing as it gives a consistent
referencing mechanism that can be used regardless of the presence of a Tag attribute.
If TagName attributes are used then there is a special case for referencing Nozzle elements.
In this instance the TagName is only unique within the scope of the containing Equipment
element so the Equipment TagName must also be included in the reference. The reference
must have the form <EquipmentTagName>-<NozzleTagName> and can only be used where
the <NozzleTagName> component doesn't contain a '-' character.

For Example:
Where:
Equipment/@TagName = ‘VP-1234-DNJ09’
Equipment/Nozzle/@TagName = ‘N1’
The reference would be:
VP-1234-DNJ09-N1

• PersistentID Referencing
As long as the context attribute used to scope PersistentID elements is at least equal in
scope to the file scope then PersistentID attributes may be used for cross referencing
elements. The PersistentID/@Identifier value is supported in any ItemId attribute. The
PersistentID/@Context is not specified when referencing by PersistentID.

10.6.3 Shared Attribute Definitions

• ID
The ID attributes of the elements must conform to XML identity constraints. See http://
www.w3.org/TR/2006/REC-xml-20060816/#id for more details. These id values may be
used for cross referencing elements and are transient. i.e. these ids are generated for each
version of the file and cannot be used to match file contents between two different exports of
the same drawing.
For example:

<PipingNetworkSegment ID=”_23” … >

• TagName
This should contain the full TagName for an item without additional text. This is an
xsd:string attribute with no specific validation (see Character encoding for character
constraints)

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:101 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

• Specification
This is to be the name of the relevant pipe specification for the component. This is a free
text field but should only contain the name of the specification.

• StockNumber
This is defined as:
‘A code that will identify a purchasable plant item
‘The StockNumber attribute contains the unique name of this component that can be
used to relate to the complete set of information that is contained in the vendor
catalogue for the component. This attribute taken with the Specification and
NominalDiameter will identify a specific item, fully defining its parameters size and
optionally material and all other information available for it.’
This attribute is an xsd:string attribute and has no specific validation or constraints other
than those defined in the ‘Character encoding’ section of this document.

• ComponentName
If present on a component that is inside a ShapeCatalogue element then this is the unique
id for the symbol within the file.
If present on a component that is not inside a ShapeCatalogue element then this is the
reference to the geometry of the components symbol. The component may have additional
annotation defined within it. The symbol referenced may be scaled (See Scale) or rotated
(See Geometries (Axis and Reference)) by the Position element.

• ComponentClass
This attribute is the RDL Designation field from the ISO 15926 RDL specification. The value
of this field is converted to Camel Case with all spaces removed. Notes : some fields contain
characters that must be substituted when written in XML (e.g. ‘&’ characters must be
substituted with &amp;). For example:
GATE VALVE -> GateValve
CENTRIFUGAL PUMP -> CentrifugalPump

• ComponentType
To be defined.

• Revision
If known this attribute should contain the revision or version of the item. This has the type of
xsd:string and therefore has no specific syntax or format constraints other than those
detailed in Character encoding.

• Status
One of the following values :-
‘Current’ – This implies this is the latest version of an item
‘Deleted’ – This item has been superseded or removed from the drawing.
‘Modified’ – The last change to this item was a modification.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:102 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

‘New’ – This is the first version of the item in the drawing.

Items marked as 'Deleted' may be ignored by an import.

• Units
The Units attribute is to be taken from the ISO15926 RDL catalogue using the name from
the catalogue converted to camel-case. All measurement values such as distances and
pressures are either accompanied by their units of measure or defaulted to the value
provided on the PlantInformation/UnitsOfMeasure element. The unit of measure for the
coordinate geometry is stipulated in the PlantInformation/@Units attribute. The permitted
values are as follows:
Angles:
Degree, Radian, deg, rad
Area :
SquareMillimetre, SquareCentimetre, SquareMetre, SquareKilometre, SquareInch,
SquareFoot, SquareYard, SquareMile, sq mm, sq cm, sq m, sq km
Distances:
Micron, Millimetre, Centimetre, Decimetre, Metre, Kilometre, Inch, Foot, Yard, Mile,
mm, cm, m, km, in, ft, yd
Pressures:
MillinewtonMetreSquared, NewtonMetreSquared, KilonewtonMetreSquared,
Picopascal, Micropascal, Millipascal, Pascal, Kilopascal, Megapascal, Gigapascal,
Bar, Bara, Barg
Temperatures:
DegreeKelvin, DegreeCelsius, DegreeRankine, DegreeFahrenheit, degC, degF, degK
Volume :
CubicMillimetre, CubicCentimetre, CubicMetre, CubicInch, CubicFeet, CubicYard, cc,
litres, gallons, USGallons, barrels
Weight:
Microgram, Milligram, Gram, Kilogram, Megagram, PoundMass, OunceMass, mg, Kg,
lb, oz

Note: All values are case sensitive.

10.6.4 Element Definitions

• PlantModel
• AnnotationItem
• Association
• Axis
• BsplineCurve
• CenterLine
• Circle
• Component
• CompositeCurve

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:103 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

• Connection
• ConnectionPoints
• ConnectionType
• ControlPoints
• ControlPointWeight
• Coordinate
• CrossPageConnection
• Description
• Discipline
• Drawing
• DrawingBorder
• Ellipse
• EndDiameter
• Equipment
• Extent
• FabricationCategory
• GenericAttribute
• GenericAttributes
• Height
• History
• Identifier
• IdentifierElement
• InsideDiameter
• InstrumentComponent
• InstrumentConnection
• InstrumentLoop
• InsulationSymbol
• KnotMultiplicities
• Knot
• Knots
• Label
• Line
• LinkedPersistentID
• Location
• Manufacturer
• Material
• MaterialDescription
• Max
• MaximumDesignPressure
• MaximumDesignTemperature
• MaximumOperatingPressure
• MaximumOperatingTemperature
• Min

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:104 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

• MinimumDesignPressure
• MinimumDesignTemperature
• MinimumOperatingPressure
• MinimumOperatingTemperature
• ModelNumber
• Multiplicity
• NominalDiameter
• NormalDesignPressure
• NormalDesignTemperature
• NormalOperatingPressure
• NormalOperatingTemperature
• Nozzle
• NozzleType
• OperatorType
• OutsideDiameter
• PConnectionPoints
• PersistentID
• PipeConnectorSymbol
• PipeFlowArrow
• PipingComponent
• PipingNetworkSegment
• PipingNetworkSystem
• PipingSystem
• PlantArea
• PlantInformation
• PlantItem
• PolyLine
• Position
• Presentation
• ProcessInstrument
• PropertyBreak
• Rating
• Reference
• Remark
• Scale
• ScopeBubble
• Shape
• ShapeCatalogue
• SignalConnectorSymbol
• SignalLine
• StartDiameter
• String
• Supplier

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:105 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

• Surface
• System
• TestPressure
• Text
• Transaction
• TrimmedCurve
• UnitsOfMeasure
• WallThickness
• Weight
• WeightsData

• PlantModel
This is the root node of an XML document and only exists as the root node of an XML file.
Other than the first two child elements, PlantInformation and Extent, the ordering of child
elements within a PlantModel element is not significant.
There shouldn’t be any need to place graphical elements into a PlantModel element as all
drawing annotation such as borders and floating text should be child elements of the
drawing element.
While a Position element may be provided is has no attached semantics and is often
defaulted to 0,0,0.
Child Elements:

Element Name Cardinality Description

PlantInformation 1 The properties of a plant model
This includes properties like its name,
modification date, editing system etc.
The PlantInformation element must be the
first child element of a PlantModel element.
Extent 1 The minimum bounding rectangle that
encloses the full graphical contents of the
PlantModel instance.
The Extent element must be the second
child element of a PlantModel element
BsplineCurve 0..* A geometric primitive
Circle 0..* A geometric primitive
CompositeCurve 0..* A composite geometry
Drawing 1 Metadata and graphical annotation related
to the P&ID drawing being represented
Ellipse 0..* A geometric primitive
Equipment 0..* The representation of a piece of plant
equipment.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:106 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

Element Name Cardinality Description

GenericAttributes 0..* Source system properties that relate to the
XML file and plant model. These
properties may be grouped into many
GenericAttributes elements.
InstrumentComponent 0..* An offline instrument
InstrumentLoop 0..* A grouped set of instrument detail
Line 0..* A geometric primitive
PipingNetworkSystem 0..* An Engineering PipingNetworkSystem
element
PipingSystem 0..*
PipeLine 0..* An Engineering PipeLine element
PlantArea 0..* A place holder for Area information
PolyLine 0..* A geometric Primitive
Position 0..1 Usually defaulted to 0,0,0 if output.
Presentation 0..* Style information for this object. In this
context it has no meaning and should be
omitted.
ProcessInstrument 0..* Offline instruments connected to the
process line.
Shape 0..* A geometric primitive
ShapeCatalogue 0..* A catalogue of Equipment and
PipingComponent symbols.
SignalConnectorSymbol 0..* A connection between drawings for signals
SignalLine 0..* A connection between instruments.
System 0..*
Text 0..* Label primitives
TrimmedCurve 0..* A geometric primitive

Example:
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8" ?>
<PlantModel xmlns:xsi=http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema-
instance
xsi:noNamespaceSchemaLocation=".\XMLSchema.xsd">
<PlantInformation … />
<Extent … />
<Drawing … />
<ShapeCatalogue … />
<Equipment … />
…
</PlantModel>

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:107 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

• AnnotationItem
This element is a base abstract type of many elements within an XMpLant file, it defines the
common elements and attributes for these items.
Child elements:

Element Name Cardinality Description

Presentation 0..1
Extent 1
PersistentID 0..*
Position 1
Scale 0..1
Circle 0..*
CompositeCurve 0..*
ConnectionPoints 0..*
Ellipse 0..*
Line 0..*
PolyLine 0..*
Shape 0..*
TrimmedCurve 0..*
BsplineCurve 0..*
Text 0..*
Description 0..1
GenericAttributes 0..*
History 0..1
Association 0..*

Attributes:

Attribute Name Required Description

ID Y The unique identity for the item in the file.
See ID
ComponentClass N See ComponentClass
ComponentName N See ComponentName
ComponentType N See ComponentType
Revision N See Revision
Status N See Status

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:108 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

Example:
N/A since the type is abstract.

• Association
The Association element is used to relate engineering items to other resources.
One documented use of this is to relate in-line ProcessInstrument elements with
InstrumentLoop elements. In this case each in-line ProcessInstrument element has an
Association child element which details the relationship using the Type attribute with a value
of ‘is a part of’.
Child elements :
None
Attributes:

Attribute Name Required Description

Type Y The meaning/semantics of the
relationship.
ItemID N The ID or PersistentID/@Identifier attribute
value of the item being referenced.
TagName N The TagName attribute value of the item
being referenced.
(See TagName Referencing)
Name N The Name attribute value of the item being
referenced.
URI N A URI identifying an associated resource
Context N If omitted then the resource is assumed to
be part of the model in the same file. If you
want to state the context as the current
model then use the value ‘XML’.

Example:
<ProcessInstrument ...>
<Association Type="is a part of" ItemID="235"/>
...
</ProcessInstrument>

• Axis
See Geometries (Axis and Reference).
Child elements :
None

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:109 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

Attributes :

Attribute Name Required Description

X Y
Y Y
Z Y

Example:
<Axis X="0" Y="0" Z="1" />

• BsplineCurve
Geometric curve primitive detailing a B spline.
Child elements:

Element Name Cardinality Description

Presentation 0..1 The style to use when drawing the Bspline.
The drawing behaviour is undefined if the
Presentation element is missing.
Extent 1 The minimum bounding geometry of this
element and its descendants
ControlPoints 1
KnotMultiplicities 0..1
Knots 0..1
WeightsData 0..1
GenericAttributes 0..1 Any application specific attributes relating
to the Bspline

Attributes:

Attribute Name Required Description

Degree Y
CurveType Y One of the following : 'BsplineCurve',
'BsplineCurveWithKnots' or
'RationalBsplineCurve'.
CurveForm N One of the following : 'PolyLine',
'CircularArc', 'EllipticArc', 'ParabolicArc' or
'HyperbolicArc'
NumControlPoints Y x
NumKnots N x
Closed N 'true' or 'false'
SelfIntersect N 'true' or 'false'

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:110 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

Example:
BsplineCurve Degree="3" CurveType="BsplineCurveWithKnots"
NumControlPoints="4" NumKnots="8">
<Presentation Layer="" Color="-32363" LineType="0"
LineWeight="1" R="0.67" G="0.38" B="0"/>
<Extent>
<Min X="10241.64" Y="10283.399"
Z="40.9999850090838"/>
<Max X="10241.64" Y="10283.399"
Z="41.0000151701423"/>
</Extent>
<ControlPoints>
<Coordinate X="10241.64" Y="10283.399" Z="41.0"/>
<Coordinate X="10241.64" Y="10283.399" Z="41.0"/>
<Coordinate X="10241.64" Y="10283.399" Z="41.0"/>
<Coordinate X="10241.64" Y="10283.399" Z="41.0"/>
</ControlPoints>
<Knots>
<Knot>0</Knot>
<Knot>1</Knot>
</Knots>
<KnotMultiplicities>
<Multiplicity>4</Multiplicity>
<Multiplicity>4</Multiplicity>
</KnotMultiplicities>
<WeightsData>
<ControlPointWeight>1</ControlPointWeight>
<ControlPointWeight>1</ControlPointWeight>
<ControlPointWeight>1</ControlPointWeight>
<ControlPointWeight>1</ControlPointWeight>
</WeightsData>
</BsplineCurve>

• CenterLine
Geometric curve primitive detailing the line geometry between the components of a
PipingNetworkSegment. A CenterLine element is used to imply the presence of tubing.
The interpolation between each coordinate is linear.
Child elements:

Element Name Cardinality Description

Presentation 0..1 The style to use when drawing the line.
The drawing behaviour is undefined if the
Presentation element is missing.
Extent 1 The minimum bounding geometry of the
CenterLine element and its descendants
Coordinate 1..* The coordinates defining the line primitive

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:111 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

Element Name Cardinality Description

PersistentID 0..*
GenericAttributes 0..* Any application specific attributes relating
to the tube/CenterLine

Attributes:

Attribute Name Required Description

NumPoints Y The number of child Coordinate elements.
ID N The unique identity of the item in the file.
See ID

Example:
<CenterLine NumPoints="2" ID="ID_12345">
<Presentation LineType="Solid" LineWeight="1"
Color="7" R="1" G="1" B="1" />
<Extent>
<Min X="77" Y="463" Z="0" />
<Max X="646" Y="463" Z="0" />
</Extent>
<Coordinate X="77" Y="463" Z="0" />
<Coordinate X="646" Y="463" Z="0" />
</CenterLine>

• Circle
A geometric primitive describing a circle.
Child elements:

Element Name Cardinality Description

Presentation 1 The style to use when drawing the circle
Extent 1 The minimum bounding geometry of the
circle
Position 1 The location of the circles centre
GenericAttributes 0..* Any application attributes relating to the
circle

Attributes:

Attribute Name Required Description

Radius Y The radius of the circle to draw
Filled N One of ‘Solid’ or ‘Hatch’. If not present the
circle is not filled.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:112 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

Example:
<Circle Radius="8">
<Presentation LineType="Solid" LineWeight="1"
Color="22"
R="0.79" G="0.239" B="0.087" />
<Extent>
<Min X="710" Y="258" Z="0" />
<Max X="726" Y="274" Z="0" />
</Extent>
<Position>
<Location X="718" Y="266" Z="0" />
<Axis X="0" Y="0" Z="1" />
<Reference X="1" Y="0" Z="0" />
</Position>
</Circle>

• Component
Used to group geometric and text primitives within a Drawing element. This inherits all
elements and attributes from the base type ‘PlantItem’. See ‘PlantItem’ for the definitions of
the inherited contents..
Child elements:

Element Name Cardinality Description

Component 0..*

Attiribute :
See ‘PlantItem’, no additional attributes are defined.
Example:
<Component ID="ID_12">
<Extent>
<Min X="199.6153088" Y="155.02299606" Z="0" />
<Max X="236.78321894" Y="194.01149803" Z="0" />
</Extent>
<Position>
<Location X="221" Y="182" Z="0" />
<Axis X="0" Y="0" Z="1" />
<Reference X="1" Y="0" Z="0" />
</Position>
…
<Text … />
</Component>

• CompositeCurve
A collection of geometric curve primitives.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:113 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

Child elements:

Element Name Cardinality Description

Presentation 0..1 The Presentation element has no purpose
in this context.
Extent 1 The minimum bounding geometry of the
geometric contents of the Drawing element
and its descendants.
BsplineCurve 0..* A geometric primitive
Circle 0..* A geometric primitive
CompositeCurve 0..* A geometric primitive
Ellipse 0..* A geometric primitive
Line 0..* A geometric primitive
Polyline 0..* A geometric primitive
Shape 0..* A geometric primitive
TrimmedCurve 0..* A geometric primitive
GenericAttributes 0..* Any application specific properties relating
to the Drawing.

Attributes:
None
Example:
<CompositeCurve>
<Presentation LineType="Solid" LineWeight="1"
Color="22"
R="0.79" G="0.239" B="0.087" />
<Extent>
<Min X="714.38797635" Y="260.50328515" Z="0" />
<Max X="720.62485791" Y="263.00328515" Z="0" />
</Extent>
<Circle ... />
<Circle ... />
<PolyLine ... />
</CompositeCurve>

• Connection
This element is used to describe the flow connectivity between elements. The source of the
flow is defined using the attributes FromID and FromNode while the flow destination is
defined using ToID and ToNode. A connection element and its attributes are not mandatory
but must be present to represent the topology of a network. If the FromID/ToID attributes
reference a Nozzle, PipeConnectorSymbol or PropertyBreak element then the FromNode/
ToNode attributes are not required.
See ConnectionPoints for details on what is being referenced.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:114 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

Child elements:
None
Attributes:

Attribute Name Required Description

ToID N The ID, PersistentID/@Identifier or
TagName of the referenced item that is the
flow destination for the parent of the
Connection element. See TagName
Referencing.
ToNode N The index of the ConnectionPoints Node
element within the ConnectionPoints
element of the destination element. Nb
this is a 0 based index and is only required
if the destination is not a Nozzle,
PipeConnectorSymbol or PropertyBreak.
FromID N The ID, PersistentID/@Identifier or
TagName of the referenced item that is the
flow source for the parent of the
Connection element.
See TagName Referencing.
FromNode N The index of the ConnectionPoints Node
element within the ConnectionPoints
element of the source element. Nb this is a
0 based index and is only required if the
source is not a Nozzle,
PipeConnectorSymbol or PropertyBreak.

Example:
<PipingNetworkSegment … >
…
<Connection FromID="ID_73" ToID="ID_4" ToNode="2" />
…
</PipingNetworkSegment>

• ConnectionPoints
This element is used to describe the potential flow connections from and to the parent of this
element. Each potential connection location is represented as a Node element. Nodes are
ordered and positioned on the drawing. Each Node element may be referenced by at most
one Connection element.
The first node (known as Node 0) represents the geometric origin of the parent of the
ConnectionPoints element.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:115 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

Child elements:

Element Name Cardinality Description

Presentation 0..1 The Presentation element has no purpose
in this context.
Extent 0..1 The minimum bounding geometry of the
geometric contents of the
ConnectionPoints element and its
descendants.
Node 1..* The first node (Node 0) represents the
geometric location of the parent element.
Nodes 1..n represent the locations that
other elements may connect to.
GenericAttributes 0..* Any Application attributes related to
connectivity

Attributes:

Attribute Name Required Description

NumPoints Y The number of Node elements in this
ConnectionPoints element.
FlowIn N The index of the Node that is used for the
primary flow into the parent of the
ConnectionPoints element. This Defaults to
1 if not present.
FlowOut N The index of the Node that is used for the
primary flow from the parent of the
ConnectionPoints element. This defaults
to 2 if not present.

Example:
<ConnectionPoints NumPoints="4" FlowIn="1" FlowOut="2">
<!-- Node 0 : Geometric origin of the component -->
<Node>
<Position>
<Location X="337" Y="211" Z="0" />
<Axis X="0" Y="0" Z="1" />
<Reference X="1" Y="0" Z="0" />
</Position>
</Node>
<!-- Node 1 : FlowIn default -->
<Node>
<Position>
<Location X="337" Y="211" Z="0" />
<Axis X="0" Y="0" Z="1" />
<Reference X="1" Y="0" Z="0" />
</Position>

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:116 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

<NominalDiameter Value="4" />

</Node>
<!-- Node 2 : FlowOut default -->
<Node>
<Position>
<Location X="337" Y="211" Z="0" />
<Axis X="0" Y="0" Z="1" />
<Reference X="1" Y="0" Z="0" />
</Position>
<NominalDiameter Value="4" />
</Node>
<!-- Node 3 : Secondary flow, direction not stated -->
<Node>
<Position>
<Location X="337" Y="211" Z="0" />
<Axis X="0" Y="0" Z="1" />
<Reference X="1" Y="0" Z="0" />
</Position>
<NominalDiameter Value="4" />
</Node>
</ConnectionPoints>

• ConnectionType
This is a free form string element that may be unit qualified.
Child elements:
None
Attributes:

Attribute Name Required Description

Units N This may contain any of the permitted units
types See Units.

Example:
<ConnectionType>Welded</ConnectionType>

• ControlPoints
Child elements :

Element Name Cardinality Description

Coordinate 1..*

Attributes:
None

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:117 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

Example:
<ControlPoints>
<Coordinate X="10241.64" Y="10283.399" Z="41.0"/>
<Coordinate X="10241.64" Y="10283.399" Z="41.0"/>
<Coordinate X="10241.64" Y="10283.399" Z="41.0"/>
<Coordinate X="10241.64" Y="10283.399" Z="41.0"/>
</ControlPoints>

• ControlPointWeight
This is defined as an any but should be considered to be of type xsd:integer.
Child elements:
None
Attributes :
None
Example:
<ControlPointWeight>1</ControlPointWeight>

• Coordinate
A Coordinate element is a Tuple of ordinates denoting a location in the drawing plane. For
2D drawings the Z ordinates should always be 0.
Child elements:
None
Attributes:

Attribute Name Required Description

X Y The X Axis ordinate as a double
Y Y The Y Axis ordinate as a double
Z N The Z Axis ordinate as a double, If not
present this defaults to 0.0

Example:
<Coordinate X="112" Y="106" Z="0" />
<Coordinate X="112" Y="110" />

• CrossPageConnection
An element describing how to match PipeConnectorSymbol and SignalConnectorSymbol to
represent cross page connectivity on a P&ID.
Child elements:

Element Name Cardinality Description

LinkedPersistentID 0..* The identities of the element that the
parent connector symbol connected to

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:118 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

Attributes:

Attribute Name Required Description

DrawingName N The Name attribute of the Drawing that the
matching ConnectorSymbol is on.
Depending on whether the attribute for
matching is unique to a drawing or the
entire project this may be required.
LinkLabel N The unique key used to match this
connector with its matching counterpart. If
DrawingName is provided this should be
unique to the referenced drawing,
otherwise this must be unique to the
project.

Example:
<CrossPageConnection DrawingName="A1-51-2003-1"
LinkLabel="RV00011"/>

<CrossPageConnection>
<LinkedPersistentID Identifier="ID" Context="AContext"/>
</CrossPageConnection>

• Description
A textual description of an item
Child elements:
None
Attributes:
None
Example:
<Description>some piece of plant equipment</Description>

• Discipline
This is a simple element with no attributes containing one of the following values to classify
an element:
Electrical
Mechanical
Process
HVAC
Telecomms
Example:
<Discipline>Mechanical</Discipline>

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:119 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

• Drawing
This contains metadata about the drawing and graphical annotation for the drawing that the
file contains.
Child elements:

Element Name Cardinality Description

Presentation 1 The R, G and B values of this element
define the background colour for the
drawing. This is in contrast to the normal
use of the Presentation element that
defines foreground style information.
Extent 1 The minimum bounding geometry of the
geometric contents of the Drawing element
and its descendants.
Component 0..* A PlantItem used to group annotation.
BsplineCurve 0..* A geometric primitive
Circle 0..* A geometric primitive
CompositeCurve 0..* A geometric primitive
Ellipse 0..* A geometric primitive
Line 0..* A geometric primitive
Polyline 0..* A geometric primitive
Shape 0..* A geometric primitive
TrimmedCurve 0..* A geometric primitive
Text 0..* Textual annotation on the drawing
DrawingBorder 0..* This element may be used to store the
drawing border/outline but this is at the
discretion of the export tool.
Label 0..*
InsulationSymbol 0..*
ScopeBubble 0..*
GenericAttributes 0..* Any application specific properties relating
to the Drawing.

Attributes:

Attribute Name Required Description

Name Y Identity for the drawing, this must be
unique in the project.
Type Y Fixed value of ‘PID’

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:120 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

Attribute Name Required Description

Revision N Free form string value. See Character
encoding
Title Y The drawing title
Size N This is a free text string and has no defined
syntax. See Character encoding.

Example:
<Drawing Name="A1-51-2003-1" Type="PID" Size="A0"
Title="Sample Project drawing" Revision="A">
<Presentation R="0" G="0" B="0" />
<Extent>
<Min X="0" Y="-2" Z="0" />
<Max X="850.0" Y="620.25" Z="0" />
</Extent>
<PolyLine NumPoints="4">…</PolyLine>
…
</Drawing>

• DrawingBorder
This element may be used to separate the drawing frame and borders from the drawing
annotation.
Child elements:

Element Name Cardinality Description

Presentation 0..1 The Presentation element has no purpose
in this context.
Extent 1 The minimum bounding geometry of the
geometric contents of the Drawing element
and its descendants.
BsplineCurve 0..* A geometric primitive
Circle 0..* A geometric primitive
CompositeCurve 0..* A geometric primitive
Ellipse 0..* A geometric primitive
Line 0..* A geometric primitive
Polyline 0..* A geometric primitive
Shape 0..* A geometric primitive
TrimmedCurve 0..* A geometric primitive
Text 0..*
GenericAttributes 0..* Any application specific properties relating
to the Drawing.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:121 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

Attributes:

Attribute Name Required Description

Name N Identity for the drawing border
Size N This is a free text string and has no defined
syntax. See Character encoding.

Example:
<DrawingBorder Name="Top" Size="A0-Portrait">
<Presentation R="0" G="0" B="0" />
<Extent>
<Min X="0" Y="-2" Z="0" />
<Max X="850.0" Y="620.25" Z="0" />
</Extent>
<PolyLine NumPoints="4">…</PolyLine>
…
</DrawingBorder>

• Ellipse
A geometric primitive used to describe an ellipse.
Child elements:

Element Name Cardinality Description

Presentation 1 This defines the drawing style to be used
for the ellipse.
Extent 1 The minimum bounding geometry of the
geometric contents of the Drawing element
and its descendants.
Position 1 The centre/origin of the ellipse to draw
GenericAttributes 0..* A geometric primitive

Attributes:

Attribute Name Required Description

PrimaryAxis Y Double describing the primary axis
SecondaryAxis Y double describing the secondary axis
Filled N A value of ‘Solid’ or ‘Hatch’. If not present
the ellipse is not filled.

Example:
<Ellipse PrimaryAxis="7.62" SecondaryAxis="3.83916">
<Presentation Layer="Default" LineType="Solid"
LineWeight="0.13 mm" Color="Red" R="1" G="0" B="0"/>
<Extent>

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:122 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

<Min X="184.52505999" Y="425.32167093" Z="0"/>

<Max X="199.76504821" Y="429.16757932" Z="0"/>
</Extent>
<Position>
<Location X="192.145059987" Y="425.328421759"
Z="0"/>
<Axis X="0" Y="0" Z="1"/>
<Reference X="1" Y="0" Z="0"/>
</Position>
</Ellipse>

• EndDiameter
This is the internal bore for a segment or a PipingNetworkSystem at its destination.
Child elements:
None
Attributes:

Attribute Name Required Description

Value Y The bore size
Units N This may be any of the distance units
permitted. See Units for permitted values
and semantics if not present.

Example:
<EndDiameter Value="4" />

<EndDiameter Value="200" Units="mm" />

• Equipment
An Equipment element inherits elements and attributes from the base type ‘PlantItem’. See
‘PlantItem’ for the definitions of the inherited contents.
Child elements:

Element Name Cardinality Description

Discipline 0..1 Functional domain of Equipment
NormalOperatingPressure 0..1
MinimumDesignPressure 0..1
MaximumDesignPressure 0..1
MinimumDesignTemperatu 0..1
re
MaximumDesignTemperat 0..1
ure

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:123 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

Element Name Cardinality Description

Equipment 0..* Equipment considered part of this
equipment
Nozzle 0..* Potential pipe connection to this equipment
Component 0..*

Attributes:

Attribute Name Required Description

ProcessArea N A free form string identifying, if required,
the process area that this equipment
resides in (See Character encoding).
Purpose N A free form string describing the function of
this equipment in the process (see
Character encoding).

Example:
<Equipment ID="ID_12" Tag="P-1502B"
ComponentClass="VerticalPump"
ComponentName="VPump" StockNumber="puv1">
<Extent>
<Min X="199.6153088" Y="155.02299606" Z="0" />
<Max X="236.78321894" Y="194.01149803" Z="0" />
</Extent>
<Position>
<Location X="221" Y="182" Z="0" />
<Axis X="0" Y="0" Z="1" />
<Reference X="1" Y="0" Z="0" />
</Position>
<PersistentID Identifier="{A1-51-2003-1_Topology-EQUIPMENT-
2}"
Context="http://www.aveva.com/example/P&amp;ID" />
…
<Nozzle ID="ID_14" Tag="N2" ComponentClass="FlangedNozzle"
StockNumber="flnn1">
…
</Nozzle>
</Equipment>

• Extent
A minimum bounding geometry describing the minimum and maximum coordinates of the
descendants of this elements parent.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:124 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

Child elements:

Element Name Cardinality Description

Min 1 Minimum values for all geometric
descendants of the Extent elements
parent.
Max 1 Maximum values for all geometric
descendants of the Extent elements parent

Attributes:
None
Example:
<Extent>
<Min X="199.6153088" Y="155.02299606" Z="0" />
<Max X="236.78321894" Y="194.01149803" Z="0" />
</Extent>

• FabricationCategory
This is a free form string element that may be unit qualified.
Child elements:
None
Attributes:

Attribute Name Required Description

Units N This may contain any of the permitted units
types See Units.

Example:
None

• GenericAttribute
An application specific attribute/property in the XMpLant file.
Child elements :
None
Attributes:

Attribute Name Required Description

Name Y The name of the attribute.
Value N If Value is not present this is equivalent to
null. This may not be equivalent to "".

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:125 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

Attribute Name Required Description

Units N The units of measure for the field if
relevant. If not present this defaults to the
values in PlantInformation. See
PlantInformation and Units.
Format N One of the following values (as per 32 bit
architecture):
string
byte
short
integer
long
ulong
float
double
URI N A URI to the RDL WIP qualifying the
attribute being represented.

Example:
<GenericAttributes Number="1" Set="Instrument">
<GenericAttribute Name="TagSuffix"
Format="string" Value="AB"/>
</GenericAttributes>

• GenericAttributes
This element groups application specific attributes/properties to be output into an XMpLant
file.
Child elements:

Element Name Cardinality Description

GenericAttribute @Number The contents of a GenericAttributes
element are not validated and may be any
valid XML content. However the XML
applications will expect the contents to
conform to the schema fragment provided
above.

Attributes:

Attribute Name Required Description

Number Y The number of GenericAttributes inside
this set.
Set N A name for this grouping of attributes.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:126 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

Example:
<GenericAttributes Number="1" Set="Instrument">
<GenericAttribute Name="TagSuffix"
Format="string" Value="AB"/>
</GenericAttributes>

• Height
This is the height of the Nozzle origin on it’s parent Equipment, measured from the origin of
the Equipment.
Child elements:
None
Attributes:

Attribute Name Required Description

Value Y The height value
Units N This may be any of the distance units
permitted. See Units for permitted values
and semantics if not present.

Example:
<Height Value="1.3" Units="m"/>

• History
This is provided to contain an audit trail of the changes to an item.
Child elements:

Element Name Cardinality Description

Transaction 0..* An entry in the audit trail

Attributes:

Attribute Name Required Description

NumTransactions Y The number of Transaction child elements

Example:
<History NumTransaction="3">
<Transaction ... />
<Transaction ... />
<Transaction ... />
</History>

• Identifier
This element is used to capture the structure of an identifier such as a TagName. Not
usually used.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:127 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

Child elements:

Element Name Cardinality Description

IdentifierElement 0..* A structural component of an identifier.

Attributes:

Attribute Name Required Description

Purpose N A string describing the purpose of this
element.

Example:
<Identifier Purpose="Tag breakdown">
<IdentifierElement Name="start" Value="AB-"/>
<IdentifierElement Name="middle" ItemID="ID_24"
DependantAttribute="[Prefix]-[Number]"/>
</Identifier>

• IdentifierElement
A structural element describing part of the structure of an identifier.
Child elements:
None
Attributes:

Attribute Name Required Description

Name Y The name of this part of the identifier
Value N Only required if dependantAttribute is not
provided.
ItemID N Only required if an attribute is referenced
on another item.
DependantAttribute N References an attribute from which this
part of the identifier is derived. See Textfor
a description of how this attribute is
defined.

Example:
<IdentifierElement Name="start" Value="AB-"/>

<IdentifierElement Name="middle" ItemID="ID_24"

DependantAttribute="[Prefix]-[Number]"/>

• InsideDiameter
This is the internal bore for an item at its source end.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:128 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

Child elements:
None
Attributes:

Attribute Name Required Description

Value Y The bore size
Units N This may be any of the distance units
permitted. See Units for permitted values
and semantics if not present.

Example:
<InsideDiameter Value="4" />

<InsideDiameter Value="200" Units="mm" />

• InstrumentComponent
This represents a physical instrument that is common to piping systems that is not part of
the process line.
An InstrumentComponent element inherits elements and attributes from the base type
'PlantItem'. See 'PlantItem' for the definitions of the inherited contents.
Child elements:

Element Name Cardinality Description

InstrumentComponent 0..* Contained Instrument.
NominalDiameter 0..1
InsideDiameter 0..1
None 0..1
OutsideDiameter
OperatorType 0..1
WallThickness 0..1
Component 0..*

Attributes:
(See 'PlantItem') No Additional elements
Examples:
<InstrumentComponent ID="ID_33" TagName="LT-117"
ComponentClass="LevelTransmitter">
<Extent>
<Min X="710" Y="258" Z="0" />
<Max X="726" Y="274" Z="0" />
</Extent>
<Position>

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:129 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

<Location X="718" Y="266" Z="0" />

<Axis X="0" Y="0" Z="1" />
<Reference X="1" Y="0" Z="0" />
</Position>
<Circle Radius="8" … />
<Text … />
</InstrumentComponent>

• InstrumentConnection
This represents a connection for purposes of instrumentation to a process line. Even
though this is a topological break this doesn't terminate the PipingNetworkSegment (see
PipingNetworkSegment Topology (Connection element))
An InstrumentConnection element inherits elements and attributes from the base type
'PlantItem'. See 'PlantItem' for the definitions of the inherited contents.
Child elements:
See 'PlantItem'.
Attributes:
(See 'PlantItem') No Additional elements
Examples:
<InstrumentConnection ID="ID_33" >
<Extent>
<Min X="710" Y="258" Z="0" />
<Max X="726" Y="274" Z="0" />
</Extent>
<Position>
<Location X="718" Y="266" Z="0" />
<Axis X="0" Y="0" Z="1" />
<Reference X="1" Y="0" Z="0" />
</Position>
…
</InstrumentConnection>

• InstrumentLoop
A collection of related instruments. This element inherits elements and attributes from the
base type ‘PlantItem’. See ‘PlantItem’ for the definitions of the inherited contents. Inline
instruments are associated to instrument loops by using the Association element.
Child elements:

Element Name Cardinality Description

ProcessInstrument 0..* An off-line instrument that is part of this set.
SignalLine 0..*
SignalConnectorSymbol 0..*

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:130 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

Attributes:
See ‘PlantItem’, no additional attributes are defined.
Example:
<InstrumentLoop ID="ID_123">
<Extent>
<Min X="355" Y="339" Z="0" />
<Max X="481" Y="355" Z="0" />
</Extent>
<SignalLine ... />
<SignalLine ... />
<SignalLine ... />
<ProcessInstrument ... />
<ProcessInstrument ... />
</InstrumentLoop>

• InsulationSymbol
This element is an annotation primitive to represent a label on a P&ID.
An InsulationSymbol element inherits elements and attributes from the base type
'AnnotationItem'. See 'AnnotationItem' for the definitions of the inherited contents.
Child elements :
See 'AnnotationItem') No Additional elements
Attributes :
See 'AnnotationItem') No Additional attributes
Example :
<InsulationSymbol ID="ID_29" ComponentName="Insulation" >
<Presentation LineType="Solid" LineWeight="1"
Color="7" R="1" G="1" B="1" />
<Extent>
<Min X="671" Y="148" Z="0" />
<Max X="673" Y="152" Z="0" />
</Extent>
<Position>
<Location X="672" Y="148" Z="0" />
<Axis X="0" Y="0" Z="1" />
<Reference X="0" Y="1" Z="0" />
</Position>
…
</InsulationSymbol>

• KnotMultiplicities
Child elements:

Element Name Cardinality Description

Multiplicity 1..*

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:131 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

Attributes:
None
Example:
<KnotMultiplicities>
<Multiplicity>4</Multiplicity>
<Multiplicity>4</Multiplicity>
</KnotMultiplicities>

• Knot
This is defined as an any but should be considered to be of type xsd:integer.
Child elements :
None
Attributes:
None
Example:
<Knot>1</Knot>

• Knots
Child elements:

Element Name Cardinality Description

Knot 1..*

• Label
This element is an annotation primitive to represent a label on a P&ID.
A Label element inherits elements and attributes from the base type 'AnnotationItem'. See
'AnnotationItem' for the definitions of the inherited contents.
Child elements:
(See 'AnnotationItem') No Additional elements
Attributes:
(See 'AnnotationItem') No Additional attributes
Example:
<Label ID="ID_29" ComponentName="LineLabel" >
<Presentation LineType="Solid" LineWeight="1"
Color="7" R="1" G="1" B="1" />
<Extent>
<Min X="671" Y="148" Z="0" />
<Max X="673" Y="152" Z="0" />
</Extent>
<Position>
<Location X="672" Y="148" Z="0" />

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:132 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

<Axis X="0" Y="0" Z="1" />

<Reference X="0" Y="1" Z="0" />
</Position>
…
</Label>

• Line
A linear geometry defined by two points.
Child elements:

Element Name Cardinality Description

Presentation 1 This defines the drawing style to be used
for the ellipse.
Extent 1 The minimum bounding geometry of the
geometric contents of the Drawing element
and its descendants.
Coordinate 2 The coordinates defining the start and end
of the line.
GenericAttributes 0..* A geometric primitive

Attributes:
None
Example:
<Line>
<Presentation LineWeight="1" LineType="Solid"
Color="red"
R="1" G="0" B="0" />
<Extent>
<Min X="831" Y="502.6" Z="0" />
<Max X="841" Y="502.6" Z="0" />
</Extent>
<Coordinate X="841" Y="502.6" Z="0" />
<Coordinate X="831" Y="502.6" Z="0" />
</Line>

• LinkedPersistentID
The LinkedPersistentID element contains a source system identifier for an for a
PipeConnectorSymbol or SignalConnectorSymbol that the containing connector element is
linked to. The Identifier and the Context must match the PersistentIdentifier attributes on
the reference element. See PersistentID.
Child elements:
None

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:133 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

Attributes:

Attribute Name Required Description

Identifier Y The persistent identifier for an XMpLant
element
Context N The scopes of the persistent identifier

Example:
<LinkedPersistentID
Identifier="{A1-51-2003-1_Topology-NOZZLE-1}"
Context="http://www.aveva.com/example/P&amp;ID" />

• Location
A Location element matches the definition of a Coordinated, it is a Tuple of ordinates
denoting a location in the drawing plane. For 2D drawings the Z ordinates should always be
0.
Child elements:
None
Attributes:

Attribute Name Required Description

X Y The X Axis ordinate as a double
Y Y The Y Axis ordinate as a double
Z N The Z Axis ordinate as a double, If not
present this defaults to 0.0

Example:
<Location X="112" Y="106" Z="0" />
<Location X="112" Y="110" />

• Manufacturer
The manufacturer responsible for producing the item.
Child elements:
None
Attributes:
None
Example:
<Manufacturer>My company</Manufacturer>

• Material
The name of the Material used to construct the item.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:134 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

Child elements:
None
Attributes:
None
Example:
<Material>Copper</Material>

• MaterialDescription
A description of the material relating to an item
Child elements:
None
Attributes:
None
Example:
<MaterialDescription>Some descriptive text</
MaterialDescription>

• Max
Maximum coordinates for an Extent element
Child elements:
None
Attributes:

Attribute Name Required Description

X Y X axis value denoting the maximum X
value for all geometric descendants of ../..
Y Y Y axis value denoting the maximum Y
value for all geometric descendants of ../..
Z Y Z axis value denoting the maximum Z
value for all geometric descendants of ../..
For 2D drawings this should always be 0

Example:
<Max X="236.78321894" Y="194.01149803" Z="0" />

• MaximumDesignPressure
The maximum design pressure for an item.
Child elements:
None

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:135 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

Attributes:

Attribute Name Required Description

Value Y The maximum design pressure
Units N This may be any of the pressure units
permitted. See Units for permitted values
and semantics if not present.

Example:
<MaximumDesignPressure Value="12" />

<MaximumDesignPressure Value="35" Units="bar" />

• MaximumDesignTemperature
The maximum design temperature for an item.
Child elements:
None
Attributes:

Attribute Name Required Description

Value Y The maximum design temperature
Units N This may be any of the temperature units
permitted. See Units for permitted values
and semantics if not present.

Example:
<MaximumDesignTemperature Value="12" />

<MaximumDesignTemperature Value="35" Units="DegreeCelsius" />

• MaximumOperatingPressure
The maximum operating pressure for an item.
Child elements:
None
Attributes:

Attribute Name Required Description

Value Y The maximum pressure
Units N This may be any of the pressure units
permitted. See Units for permitted values
and semantics if not present.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:136 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

Example:
<MaximumOperatingPressure Value="12" />
<MaximumOperatingPressure Value="35" Units="bar" />

• MaximumOperatingTemperature
The maximum operating temperature for an item.
Child elements:
None
Attributes:

Attribute Name Required Description

Value Y The maximum temperature
Units N This may be any of the temperature units
permitted. See Units for permitted values
and semantics if not present.

Example:
<MaximumOperatingTemperature Value="12" />
<MaximumOperatingTemperature Value="35" Units="DegreeCelsius"
/>

• Min
Child elements:
None
Attributes:

Attribute Name Required Description

X Y X axis value denoting the minimum X value
for all geometric descendants of ../… This
is a double
Y Y Y axis value denoting the minimum Y value
for all geometric descendants of ../.. This
is a double
Z Y Z axis value denoting the minimum Z value
for all geometric descendants of ../.. This
is a double.
For 2D drawings this should always be 0.

Example:
<Min X="199.6153088" Y="155.02299606" Z="0" />

• MinimumDesignPressure
This is the minimum design pressure for an item.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:137 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

Child elements:
None
Attributes:

Attribute Name Required Description

Value Y The minimum design pressure as a double.
Units N This may be any of the pressure units
permitted. See Units for permitted values
and semantics if not present.

Example:
<MinimumDesignPressure Value="12" />
<MinimumDesignPressure Value="35" Units="bar" />

• MinimumDesignTemperature
This is the minimum design temperature for an item.
Child elements:
None
Attributes:

Attribute Name Required Description

Value Y The minimum design temperature as a
double.
Units N This may be any of the temperature units
permitted. See Units for permitted values
and semantics if not present.

Example:
<MinimumDesignTemperature Value="12" />
<MinimumDesignTemperature Value="35" Units="DegreeCelsius" />

• MinimumOperatingPressure
This is the minimum operating pressure for an item.
Child elements:
None
Attributes:

Attribute Name Required Description

Value Y The minimum pressure as a double.
Units N This may be any of the pressure units
permitted. See Units for permitted values
and semantics if not present.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:138 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

Example:
<MinimumOperatingPressure Value="12" />
<MinimumOperatingPressure Value="35" Units="bar" />

• MinimumOperatingTemperature
This is the minimum operating temperature for an item.
Child elements:
None
Attributes:

Attribute Name Required Description

Value Y The minimum temperature as a double.
Units N This may be any of the temperature units
permitted. See Units for permitted values
and semantics if not present.

Example:
<MinimumOperatingTemperature Value="12" />

<MinimumOperatingTemperature Value="35" Units="DegreeCelsius"

/>

• ModelNumber
String element detailing the model number for a component.
Child elements:
None
Attributes:
None
Example:
<ModelNumber>A485798347-BjiOM-9347</ModelNumber>

• Multiplicity
This is defined as an any but should be considered to be of type xsd:integer.
Child elements:
None
Attributes:
None
Example:
<Multiplicity>4</Multiplicity>

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:139 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

• NominalDiameter
This is the internal bore for an item.
Child elements:
None
Attributes:

Attribute Name Required Description

Value Y The bore size as a double
Units N This may be any of the distance units
permitted. See Units for permitted values
and semantics if not present.

Example:
<NominalDiameter Value="4" />
<NominalDiameter Value="200" Units="mm" />

• NormalDesignPressure
Design pressure of an item under normal conditions.
Child elements:
None
Attributes:

Attribute Name Required Description

Value Y The pressure value as a double
Units N This may be any of the pressure units
permitted. See Units for permitted values
and semantics if not present.

Example:
<NormalDesignPressure Value="4" />
<NormalDesignPressure Value="3" Units="barg" />

• NormalDesignTemperature
Design temperature of an item under normal conditions.
Child elements:
None

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:140 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

Attributes:

Attribute Name Required Description

Value Y The temperature value as a double
Units N This may be any of the temperature units
permitted. See Units for permitted values
and semantics if not present.

Example:
<NormalDesignTemperature Value="52" />
<NormalDesignTemperature Value="80" Units="DegreeCelsius" />

• NormalOperatingPressure
Operating pressure of an item under normal conditions.
Child elements:
None
Attributes:

Attribute Name Required Description

Value Y The pressure value as a double
Units N This may be any of the pressure units
permitted. See Units for permitted values
and semantics if not present.

Example:
<NormalOperatingPressure Value="4" />
<NormalOperatingPressure Value="3" Units="barg" />

• NormalOperatingTemperature
Operating temperature of an item under normal conditions
Child elements:
None
Attributes:

Attribute Name Required Description

Value Y The temperature value as a double
Units N This may be any of the temperature units
permitted. See Units for permitted values
and semantics if not present.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:141 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

Example:
<NormalOperatingTemperature Value="52" />
<NormalOperatingTemperature Value="80" Units="DegreeCelsius"
/>

• Nozzle
A Nozzle element inherits elements and attributes from the base type ‘PlantItem’. See
‘PlantItem’ for the definitions of the inherited contents.
Child elements:

Element Name Cardinality Description

NozzleType 0..1
NominalDiameter 0..1 Internal nominal bore of nozzle
Height 0..1 Height of Nozzle on the Equipment

Attributes:
See ‘PlantItem’, no additional attributes
Example:
<Nozzle ID="ID_10" Tag="N1" ComponentClass="FlangedNozzle">
<Extent>
<Min X="205.47371879" Y="245.5" Z="0" />
<Max X="215" Y="263" Z="0" />
</Extent>
<Position>
<Location X="215" Y="255" Z="0" />
<Axis X="0" Y="0" Z="1" />
<Reference X="-1" Y="0" Z="0" />
</Position>
<PersistentID Identifier="{A1-51-2003-1_Topology-
NOZZLE-1}"
Context="http://www.aveva.com/example/P&amp;ID" /
>
<Line>
<Presentation LineType="Solid" LineWeight="1"
R="0.25" G="0.82" B="0.15" />
<Extent>
<Min X="211" Y="255" Z="0" />
<Max X="215" Y="255" Z="0" />
</Extent>
<Coordinate X="211" Y="255" Z="0" />
<Coordinate X="215" Y="255" Z="0" />
</Line>
…
<NominalDiameter Value="4" />
</Nozzle>

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:142 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

• NozzleType
This is a simple element with one attribute and no contents
Child elements:
None
Attributes:

Attribute Name Required Description

Value N One of ‘Welded’, ‘Flanged’ or ‘Elbow’.
This defaults to ‘Flanged’ if the Value
attribute isn’t present.

Example:
<NozzleType Value="Flanged"/>

• OperatorType
This is a free form string element that may be unit qualified.
Child elements:
None
Attributes:

Attribute Name Required Description

Units N This may contain any of the permitted units
types See Units.

Example:
None

• OutsideDiameter
This is the external diameter of an item.
Child elements:
None
Attributes:

Attribute Name Required Description

Value Y The external diameter measurement as a
double
Units N This may be any of the distance units
permitted. See Units for permitted values
and semantics if not present.

Example:
<OutsideDiameter Value="4" />
<OutsideDiameter Value="200" Units="mm" />

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:143 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

• PConnectionPoints
To be defined.

• PersistentID
The PersistentID element contains a source system identifier for an object that remains
consistent between exports of a drawing. A PersistentID is made up of two components the
identifier and its scope.
A PersistentID should be the same for an object that appears on multiple drawings where it
is practicable to do this. If this cannot be achieved the TagName, if present, will be used by
P&ID Manager for rationalising objects.
Child elements:
None
Attributes:

Attribute Name Required Description

Identifier Y The persistent identifier for an XML
element.
The Identifier must be unique within the set
of XML files that may interact directly or
indirectly with this drawing for the stated
context.
This a free form string type, see Character
encoding.
Context N This scopes a persistent identifier.
In this way an item may have different
Identifiers for different systems/contexts
and each identifier may be represented.
Ideally this would be encoded as a URI.
For example http://www.aveva.com/P&ID
Designer/ProjectName.

Example:
<PersistentID
Identifier="{A1-51-2003-1_Topology-NOZZLE-1}"
Context="http://www.aveva.com/example/P&amp;ID" />

• PipeConnectorSymbol
An on or off page connector that represents the connectivity of a PipingNetworkSegment
across a page boundary. These are contained by the PipingNetworkSegment elements and
reference as the segment source or destination.
A PipeConnectorSymbol element inherits elements and attributes from the base type
‘PlantItem’. See ‘AnnotationItem’ for the definitions of the inherited contents.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:144 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

Child elements:

Element Name Cardinality Description

CrossPageConnection 0..1 Information describing the matching criteria
for the PipeConnectorSymbol that is
connected to this one.

Attributes:
See ‘AnnotationItem’, no Additional attributes
Example:
<PipeConnectorSymbol ID="ID_92" Tag="A1-51-2003-3"
StockNumber="flag1">
<Presentation LineType="Solid" LineWeight="1"
Color="7" R="1" G="1" B="1" />
<Extent … />
<Position … />
<PersistentID … />
<PolyLine … />
<Text … />
<CrossPageConnection … />
</PipeConnectorSymbol>

• PipeFlowArrow
This element is an annotation primitive to represent the direction of flow of a
PipingNetworkSegment.
A PipeFlowArrow element inherits elements and attributes from the base type
‘AnnotationItem’. See ‘AnnotationItem’ for the definitions of the inherited contents.
Child elements:
See ‘AnnotationItem’, no additional elements
Attributes:
See ‘AnnotationItem, no additional attributes
Example:
<PipeFlowArrow ID="ID_29" >
<Presentation LineType="Solid" LineWeight="1"
Color="7" R="1" G="1" B="1" />
<Extent>
<Min X="671" Y="148" Z="0" />
<Max X="673" Y="152" Z="0" />
</Extent>
<Position>
<Location X="672" Y="148" Z="0" />
<Axis X="0" Y="0" Z="1" />
<Reference X="0" Y="1" Z="0" />
</Position>
<PolyLine NumPoints="42">

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:145 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

<Presentation LineType="Solid" LineWeight="1"

Color="7" R="1" G="1" B="1" />
<Extent>
<Min X="671" Y="148" Z="0" />
<Max X="673" Y="152" Z="0" />
</Extent>
<Coordinate X="671" Y="152" Z="0" />
<Coordinate X="672" Y="148" Z="0" />
<Coordinate X="673" Y="152" Z="0" />
<Coordinate X="671" Y="152" Z="0" />
</PolyLine>
</PipeFlowArrow>

• PipingComponent
This represents a physical component that is common to piping systems.
A PipingComponent element inherits elements and attributes from the base type ‘PlantItem’.
See ‘PlantItem’ for the definitions of the inherited contents.
Child elements:

Element Name Cardinality Description

PipingComponent 0..* Contained PipingComponent.
ConnectionType 0..1
NominalDiameter 0..1
InsideDiameter 0..1
None 0..1
Outside Diameter
OperatorType 0..1
WallThickness 0..1
FabricationCategory 0..1
PipingComponent 0..*
Component 0..*

Attributes:

Attribute Name Required Description

ConnectionType N This is a free text string and has no defined
syntax. See Character encoding
Rating N This is a free text string and has no defined
syntax. See Character encoding

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:146 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

Attribute Name Required Description

Standard N This is a free text string and has no defined
syntax. See Character encoding
ISOSymbol N This is a free text string and has no defined
syntax. See Character encoding

Example:
<PipingComponent ID="ID_5568" ComponentClass="PipeTee">
<Presentation LineType="Solid" LineWeight="1"
Color="7" R="1" G="1" B="1" />
<Extent>
<Min X="112" Y="182" Z="0" />
<Max X="112" Y="182" Z="0" />
</Extent>
<Position>
<Location X="112" Y="182" Z="0" />
<Axis X="0" Y="0" Z="1" />
<Reference X="1" Y="0" Z="0" />
</Position>
<PersistentID … />
<ConnectionPoints NumPoints="4" FlowIn="1" FlowOut="2"
… />
</PipingComponent>

• PipingNetworkSegment
See PipingNetworkSegment Topology (Connection element) for details on the use of
PipingNetworkSegments.
A PipingNetworkSegment element inherits elements and attributes from the base type
'PlantItem'. See 'PlantItem' for the definitions of the inherited contents.
PipeConnectorSymbol elements representing on and off page connectivity are contained by
the PipingNetworkSegment. See for details of PipingNetworkSegment connectivity.
If a PipingNetworkSegment represents the connectivity between an instrument and a
process line then the ComponentClass attribute will be given the value
'ProcessInstrumentConnection'
Child Elements:

Element Name Cardinality Description

NominalDiameter 0..1
InsideDiameter 0..1
None 0..1
Outside Diameter
StartDiameter 0..1
EndDiameter 0..1

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:147 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

Element Name Cardinality Description

NormalDesignPressure 0..1
MinimumDesignPressure 0..1
MaximumDesignPressure 0..1
NormalDesignTemperature 0..1
MinimumDesignTemperatu 0..1
re
MaximumDesignTemperat 0..1
ure
NormalOperatingPressure 0..1
MinimumOperatingPressur 0..1
e
MaximumOperatingPressu 0..1
re
TestPressure 0..1
NormalOperatingTemperat 0..1
ure
MinimumOperating 0..1
Temperature
MaximumOperatingTempe 0..1
rature
WallThickness 0..1
Connection 0..* This states the head and tail connectivity of
this segment.
SpecificationBreak 0..* Points at which changes occur in the pipe
specification. This causes a break in the
segment.
CenterLine 0..*
Component 0..*
InstrumentComponent 0..*
Equipment 0..*
InstrumentConnection 0..*
PipingComponent 0..*
ProcessInstrument 0..*
PipeConnectorSymbol 0..*
PipeFlowArrow 0..*

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:148 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

Element Name Cardinality Description

Label 0..*
InsulationSymbol 0..*

Attributes:

Attribute Name Required Description

DualFlow N Defaults to 'false', indicates that the
segment supports reversible flow.

Example:
<PipingNetworkSegment ID="ID_86" Tag="B-902"
Specification="A3B">
<Extent>
<Min X="227" Y="118" Z="0" />
<Max X="337" Y="211" Z="0" />
</Extent>
<PersistentID Identifier="{A1-51-2003-1_Topology-
SEGMENT-1}"
Context="http://www.aveva.com/example/P&amp;ID" /
>
<Connection FromID="ID_73" ToID="ID_87" ToNode="2" />
<NominalDiameter Value="4" />
<PipeFlowArrow ID="ID_78" … />
<CenterLine NumPoints="3">
<Presentation LineType="Solid" LineWeight="1"
Color="7" R="1" G="1" B="1" />
<Extent>
<Min X="227" Y="118" Z="0" />
<Max X="227" Y="132" Z="0" />
</Extent>
<Coordinate X="227" Y="118" Z="0" />
<Coordinate X="227" Y="132" Z="0" />
<Coordinate X="291" Y="132" Z="0" />
</CenterLine>
<PipingComponent ID="ID_87" ComponentClass="PipeTee" …
/>
</PipingNetworkSegment>

• PipingNetworkSystem
'A PipingNetworkSystem contains the information for a physical PipingNetworkSystem in
the plant or a section thereof as contained within a module. The PipingNetworkSystem
contains all of the PlantItems that belong to it. A PipingNetworkSystem may have multiple
sources and multiple destinations.'
A PipingNetworkSystem element inherits elements and attributes from the base type
'PlantItem'. See 'PlantItem' for the definitions of the inherited contents.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:149 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

Child elements:

Element Name Cardinality Description

NominalDiameter 0..1
InsideDiameter 0..1
OutsideDiameter 0..1
StartDiameter 0..1
EndDiameter 0..1
NormalDesignPressure 0..1
MinimumDesignPressure 0..1
MaximumDesignPressure 0..1
NormalDesignTemperature 0..1
MinimumDesignTemperature 0..1
MaximumDesignTemperature 0..1
NormalOperatingPressure 0..1
MinimumOperatingPressure 0..1
MaximumOperatingPressure 0..1
TestPressure 0..1
NormalOperatingTemperature 0..1
MinimumOperatingTemperature 0..1
MaximumOperatingTemperature 0..1
WallThickness 0..1
PipingNetworkSegment 0..* The segments that make up the
PipingNetworkSystem
PropertyBreak 0..* Points at which changes occur in the
pipe specification. This causes a
break in the segment.

Attributes :
(See 'PlantItem') No Additional attributes
Example :
<PipingNetworkSystem ID="ID_1256">
<Extent ... />
<PersistentID ... />
<NominalDiameter ... />
<MinimumDesignPressure ... />
<MaximumDesignPressure ... />
<PipingNetworkSegment ... />
<PipingNetworkSegment ... />

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:150 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

<PipingNetworkSegment ... />

<PropertyBreak ... />
</PipingNetworkSystem>

• PipingSystem
To be defined.

• PlantArea
In the P&ID content of an XML file this is just an object that may be used to represent the
name and attributes of named part(area) of a plant. A plant Area is not permitted to contain
model elements but may be referenced to associated segments, Equipment etc with a
named PlantArea.
A PlantArea element inherits elements and attributes from the base type ‘PlantItem’. See
‘PlantItem’ for the definitions of the inherited contents.
Child elements:

Element Name Cardinality Description

Component 0..*

Attributes:

Attribute Name Required Description

Name N A string representing the name of the area.
See Character encoding.

Example:
<PlantArea Name="Area-42">
<Extent .. />
<Association ../>
<Association ../>
<Association ../>
</PlantArea>

• PlantInformation
This element collects the metadata for a PlantModel. The Date and Time attributes should
be the Date and Time of the XML file creation.
Child elements:

Element Name Cardinality Description

UnitsOfMeasure 1 Defines the default units of measure for the
file.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:151 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

Attributes:

Attribute Name Required Description

SchemaVersion Y Fixed value of ‘3.3.3’
OriginatingSystem Y Free form string. See Character encoding
ModelName N Free form string. See Character encoding
Date Y XML date of the format YYYY-MM-DD
ProjectName N Free form string. See Character encoding
ProjectCode N Free form string. See Character encoding
ProjectDescription N Free form string. See Character encoding
CompanyName N Free form string. See Character encoding
Time Y XML time type, assumed UTC unless zone
qualified
Is3D Y Fixed value of ‘no’
Units Y The distance units of measure for the
geometry in the file.
Discipline Y Fixed value of ‘PID’

Example:
<PlantInformation SchemaVersion="3.3.3"
OriginatingSystem="VPEPID"
ModelName="http://www.aveva.com/P&amp;ID/example"
Date="2006-12-12" Time="16:43:23"
Is3D="no" Units="Millimetre" Discipline="PID">
<UnitsOfMeasure Distance="Inch" />
</PlantInformation>

• PlantItem
This element is a base abstract type of many elements within an XML file, it defines the
common elements and attributes for these items.
Child elements:

Element Name Cardinality Description

Presentation 0..1
Extent 1
PersistentID 0..*
Position 1
Scale 0..1
Surface 0..*

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:152 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

Element Name Cardinality Description

Circle 0..*
CompositeCurve 0..*
Ellipse 0..*
Line 0..*
Polyline 0..*
Shape 0..*
TrimmedCurve 0..*
BsplineCurve 0..*
ConnectionPoints 0..1
PConnectionPoints 0..1
Text 0..*
Identifier 0..*
Description 0..1
Weight 0..1
Material 0..1
MaterialDescription 0..1
ModelNumber 0..1
Supplier 0..1
Manufacturer 0..1
GenericAttributes 0..*
Association 0..*
History 0..1

Attributes:

Attribute Name Required Description

ID Y The unique identity of the item in the file.
See ID.
TagName N See Tag
Specification N See Specification
StockNumber N See StockNumber
ComponentClass N See ComponentClass
ComponentName N See ComponentName
ComponentType N See ComponentType

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:153 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

Attribute Name Required Description

Revision N See Revision
Status N See Status

Example:
N/A since the type is abstract

• PolyLine
Geometric curve primitive detailing a polyline. The interpolation between each coordinate is
linear.
Child elements:

Element Name Cardinality Description

Presentation 0..1 The style to use when drawing the line.
The drawing behaviour is undefined if the
Presentation element is missing.
Extent 1 The minimum bounding geometry of the
element and its descendants
Coordinate 1..* The coordinates defining the line primitive

Attributes:

Attribute Name Required Description

NumPoints Y The number of child Coordinate elements.

Example:
<PolyLine NumPoints="2">
<Presentation LineType="Solid" LineWeight="1"
Color="7" R="1" G="1" B="1" />
<Extent>
<Min X="77" Y="463" Z="0" />
<Max X="646" Y="463" Z="0" />
</Extent>
<Coordinate X="77" Y="463" Z="0" />
<Coordinate X="646" Y="463" Z="0" />
</PolyLine>

• Position
This defines the place where an items origin is on a P&ID drawing. This is in effect the
location of the items symbol. The Axis and Reference attributes are used to define the
coordinate orientation in 3D space (see Geometries (Axis and Reference)). The drawing is
considered to be on the plane of Z=0.
Child elements:

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:154 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

Attributes:
None
Example:
<Position>
<Location X="716.06" Y="268.76" Z="0" />
<Axis X="0" Y="0" Z="1" />
<Reference X="1" Y="0" Z="0" />
</Position>

• Presentation
The element defines a styles used to draw geometric and textual content. Whle all
attributes are defined as optional in the schema the R, G, B, LineWeight and LineType
attributes are expected for all geometric primitives, otherwise the behaviour is undefined.
Child elements:
None
Attributes:

Attribute Name Required Description

Layer N Name of the layer in which the graphical
elements resides. This has no functional
semantics associated with it.
Color N A lookup in a color index. This is not used
by AVEVA software.
LineType N One of the numbers or names from the
following (Object Model document v2.2):-
0 Solid
1 Dotted
2 Dashed
3 Long Dash
4 Long Dash + Short Dash,
CenterLine
5 Short Dash
6 Long Dash + Short Dash + Short
Dash
7 Dash + Short Dash

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:155 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

Attribute Name Required Description

LineWeight N <real>
or
<real><units>
or
<real><space><units>
Where:-
<real> is an real value.
<space> is a space character (&#20;)
<units> is a distance units from Units
If the value isn’t qualified with units
then the behaviour is undefined.
R N 0 to 1 (double) 1 = maximum intensity of
Red component.
G N 0 to 1 (double) 1 = maximum intensity of
Green component.
B N 0 to 1 (double) 1 = maximum intensity of
blue component.

Example:
<Presentation LineType="Solid" LineWeight="2mm"
Color="22" R="0.8" G="0.25" B="0.1" />

• ProcessInstrument
This represents a physical instrument that is common to piping systems.
A ProcessInstrument element inherits elements and attributes from the base type
‘PlantItem’. See ‘PlantItem’ for the definitions of the inherited contents.
Child elements:

Element Name Cardinality Description

PlantItem 0..* Contained ProcessInstrument.
NominalDiameter 0..1
InsideDiameter 0..1
None 0..1
Outside Diameter
OperatorType 0..1
WallThickness 0..1
Component 0..*

Attributes:
See ‘PlantItem’, no additional attributes

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:156 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

Example:
<ProcessInstrument ID="ID_33" Tag="LT-117"
ComponentClass="LevelTransmitter">
<Extent>
<Min X="710" Y="258" Z="0" />
<Max X="726" Y="274" Z="0" />
</Extent>
<Position>
<Location X="718" Y="266" Z="0" />
<Axis X="0" Y="0" Z="1" />
<Reference X="1" Y="0" Z="0" />
</Position>
<Circle Radius="8" … />
<Text … />
</ProcessInstrument>

• PropertyBreak
This represents the point at which there is a change in specification of the piping. See Error!
Reference source not found.
A PropertyBreak element inherits elements and attributes from the base type 'PlantItem'.
See 'AnnotationItem' for the definitions of the inherited contents.
A PropertyBreak may be contained by a PipingNetworkSystem or PipingNetworkSegment
element. PropertyBreak elements inside a PipingNetworkSystem are those associated with
components such as Tees and Angled Relief Valves. PropertyBreak elements inside a
PipingNetworkSegment are involved in the segment topology.
Child elements:
(See 'AnnotationItem') No Additional elements
Attributes:
(See 'AnnotationItem') No Additional attributes
Example:
<PropertyBreak ID="ID_34">
<Description>Change in Insulation</Description>
</PropertyBreak>

• Rating
This is a unit qualified string value to describe the rating of an item.
Child elements:
None

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:157 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

Attributes:

Attribute Name Required Description

Value Y Maximum safe load
Units N This may be any of the units permitted
since the type of measurement isn’t
specified. See Units for permitted values,
the semantics if Units are not present are
unclear.

Example:
<Rating Value="5" Units="bar"/>

• Reference
See Geometries (Axis and Reference).
Child elements:
None
Attributes:

Attribute Name Required Description

X Y Double
Y Y Double
Z Y Double

Example:
<Reference X="1" Y="0" Z="0" />

• Remark
A string comment element
Child elements:
None
Attributes:
None
Example:
<Remark>WP2134</Remark>

• Scale
The scale element is used when symbols are drawn from a shape catalogue. The Scale
element enables symbols to be rescaled when positioned in a drawing.
Child elements:
None

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:158 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

Attributes:

Attribute Name Required Description

X Y X scale factor
Y Y Y scale factor
Z N Z scale factor

Example:
<Scale X="2" Y="2" />

• ScopeBubble
This element is an annotation primitive to represent a scoped bubble or cloud on a P&ID.
A ScopeBubble element inherits elements and attributes from the base type
'AnnotationItem'. See 'AnnotationItem' for the definitions of the inherited contents.
Child elements:
See 'AnnotationItem') No Additional elements
Attributes:
(See 'AnnotationItem') No Additional attributes
Example:
<ScopeBubble ID="ID_29" >
<Presentation LineType="Solid" LineWeight="1"
Color="7" R="1" G="1" B="1" />
<Extent>
<Min X="671" Y="148" Z="0" />
<Max X="673" Y="152" Z="0" />
</Extent>
<Position>
<Location X="672" Y="148" Z="0" />
<Axis X="0" Y="0" Z="1" />
<Reference X="0" Y="1" Z="0" />
</Position>
…
</ScopeBubble>

• Shape
The Shape element defines a closed curve. The interpolation between each coordinate is
linear.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:159 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

Child elements:

Element Name Cardinality Description

Presentation 0..1 The style to use when drawing the line.
The drawing behaviour is undefined if the
Presentation element is missing.
Extent 1 The minimum bounding geometry of the
element and its descendants
Coordinate 4..* The coordinates defining the primitive. The
first coordinate should match the last to
complete a closed form.
GenericAttributes 0..* Any application specific attributes

Attributes:

Attribute Name Required Description

NumPoints Y The number of child Coordinate elements.
Filled N One of ‘Solid’ or ‘Hatch’ used to specify a
fill technique

Example:
<Shape NumPoints="4" Filled="Solid" >
<Presentation LineType="Solid" LineWeight="1"
Color="7" R="1" G="1" B="1" />
<Extent>
<Min X="77" Y="463" Z="0" />
<Max X="646" Y="534" Z="0" />
</Extent>
<Coordinate X="77" Y="463" Z="0" />
<Coordinate X="77" Y="534" Z="0" />
<Coordinate X="646" Y="463" Z="0" />
<Coordinate X="77" Y="463" Z="0" />
</Shape>

• ShapeCatalogue
A Shape Catalogue defines a symbol library for a file. See ComponentName for how to
reference and name a symbol in the catalogue. See Scale for how to scale symbols when
drawn. See Position for how to rotate a symbol.
Child elements:

Element Name Cardinality Description

Equipment 0..* Equipment symbols
PipingComponent 0..* PipingComponent symbols
Nozzle 0..* Nozzle symbols

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:160 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

Element Name Cardinality Description

ProcessInstrument 0..* ProcessInstrument symbols
ImstrumentComponent 0..*
Component 0..* Component symbols
PipeConnector 0..* PipeConnectorSymbol
SignalConnectorSymbol 0..* SignalConnectorSymbol
InsulationSymbol 0..*
PropertyBreak 0..*
Label 0..*
PipeFlowArrow 0..*

Attributes:

Attribute Name Required Description

Name Y The name of the symbol catalogue, this is a
string attribute.
Version N The version of the symbol set.
Units N The distance units that the symbols are
defined in. This affects the size of the
symbol with respect to the units defined by
the PlantInformation/UnitsOfMeasure/
@Distance attribute. i.e if Units is different
to the PlantInformation default then the
symbol is scaled.
See the distance section of Units for valid
values.
Date N The date the symbol library was created/
modified.

Example:
<ShapeCatalogue Name="Symbols">
<Equipment ID="ID_22" ComponentClass="VerticalPump"
ComponentName="VPump">
<Extent … />
<Position … />
<PersistentID … />
<Circle … />
…
</Equipment>
<ShapeCatalogue>

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:161 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

• SignalConnectorSymbol
An on or off page connector that represents the connectivity of a SignalLine across a page
boundary.
A SignalConnectorSymbol element inherits elements and attributes from the base type
‘AnnotationItem’. See ‘AnnotationItem’ for the definitions of the inherited contents.
Child elements:

Element Name Cardinality Description

CrossPageConnection 0..1 Information describing the matching criteria
for the SignalConnectorSymbol that is
connected to this one.

Attributes:
See ‘AnnotationItem’, no additional attributes
Example:
<SignalConnectorSymbol ID="ID_92">
<Presentation LineType="Solid" LineWeight="1"
Color="7" R="1" G="1" B="1" />
<Extent … />
<Position … />
<PersistentID … />
<PolyLine … />
<Text … />
<CrossPageConnection … />
</SignalConnectorSymbol>

• SignalLine
A connection between two instruments carrying instrumentation signals.
A SignalLine element inherits elements and attributes from the base type ‘PlantItem’. See
‘PlantItem’ for the definitions of the inherited contents.
Child elements:

Element Name Cardinality Description

Connection 0..1 The connectivity details of this SignalLine
Component 0..*

Attributes:
See ‘PlantItem’, no additional attributes
Example:
<SignalLine ID="ID_86" TagName="B-902" >
<Extent>
<Min X="227" Y="118" Z="0" />
<Max X="337" Y="211" Z="0" />
</Extent>

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:162 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

<PersistentID Identifier="{A1-51-2003-1_Topology-
SIGNALLINE-1}"
Context="http://www.aveva.com/example/P&amp;ID" /
>
<Connection FromID="ID_73" ToID="ID_87" ToNode="2" />
</SignalLine>

• StartDiameter
This is the internal bore for a segment or a PipingNetworkSystem at its source.
Child elements:
None
Attributes:

Attribute Name Required Description

Value Y The bore size
Units N This may be any of the distance units
permitted. See Units for permitted values
and semantics if not present.

Example:
<StartDiameter Value="4" />
<StartDiameter Value="200" Units="mm" />

• String
A string value used to annotate a drawing. Each element represents a single line of text.
Child elements:
None
Attributes:

Attribute Name Required Description

Value Y The string value
Units N Any units associated with the string value, not
sure how to use this.

Example:
<String Value="1. my text annotation"/>
<String Value="2. a second line of text"/>

• Supplier
This is the name of the supplier for an item.
Child elements:
None

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:163 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

Attributes:
None
Example:
<Supplier>My supplier</Supplier>

• Surface
To be defined.

• System
To be defined.

• TestPressure
The pressure that should be used to test an item
Child elements:
None
Attributes:

Attribute Name Required Description

Value Y The pressure
Units N This may be any of the pressure units
permitted. See Units for permitted values
and semantics if not present.

Example:
<TestPressure Value="60" Units="bar"/>

• Text
This defines the textual annotation for a drawing. The text may be provided in an attribute,
referenced using attributes on this item, referenced on attributes of another item or provided
as a set of String elements. The text itself can be marked up using <b>text</b>, <i>text</i>
and <u>text</u> for bold, italic and underlined styles. The '<' and '>' characters have to be
escaped in this case.
Child elements:

Element Name Cardinality Description

Presentation 1 The style to use to draw the text.
Extent 1 The minimum bounding rectangle around
the text.
Position 1 The position of the text

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:164 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

Element Name Cardinality Description

String 0..* Used when the text contains a line break.
GenericAttributes 0..* Any application specific attributes, this
could include attributes that contain the text
content to write.

Attributes:

Attribute Name Required Description

NumLines N The number of text lines being
represented. If not present then a value of
1 is assumed.
String N If present this is the text to be drawn. If the
text contains a line break then it should be
split into the String child elements instead
of being in the attribute or the line break
character replaced with an appropriate
character reference.
Font Y The font family name to use.
Justification The location of Position within the Text to
be written. Where the text is on multiple
lines then Justification denotes the location
of Position for the first line of text.
One of the following:
LeftTop
LeftCenter
LeftBottom
CenterTop
CenterCenter
CenterBottom
RightTop
RightCenter
RightBottom
Defaults to LeftBottom if not provided.
Width Y The full width of the Text string once
rendered
Height Y The full height of the Text string once
rendered
TextAngle This is the angle that the base line of the
text string makes with the positive X axis
measured anticlockwise in degrees.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:165 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

Attribute Name Required Description

SlantAngle This is the angle, in degrees, of slant of the
text characters measured clockwise from
the positive Y axis. E.g. for the character I it
is the angle that the vertical stroke makes
with the positive Y axis.
ItemID If provided then the text string is to be
constructed from the attributes of another
element. The ID may be provided as the ID
of the element, the PersistentID/@Identifier
or the TagName of the element. See
TagName Referencing.
Set If the text is to be obtained from a child of a
GenericAttributes element then the set
name for the GenericAttributes element
may be provided to avoid ambiguity.
DependantAttribute The template for the textual contents if
obtaining the text from referenced
attributes.
The value of the DependantAttribute can
contain a single attribute or a list of
Attributes and explicit text. IF a single
attribute is referenced it may appear just as
the attribute name. Where multiple
attributes or explicit text is used the
attribute names are contained in square
brackets. E.g “[Tagprefix]-
[Tagnumber][Tagsuffix]”.
The search order will be the Attributes of
the PlantItem, ItemAttributes then
GenericAttributes of the Text followed by
the GenericAttributes of the parent or the
object explicitly identified by the ItemID.
The first occurrence of the named Attribute
will be used, there is no mechanism for
handling multiple attributes of the same
name.

Example:
<Text String="4&quot;-B-902-A3B" Font="romans"
Justification="CenterCenter" Width="19.2"
Height="2.5" TextAngle="90" SlantAngle="0">
<Presentation LineType="Solid" LineWeight="1"
Color="160" R="0" G="0.4" B="1" />
<Extent>
<Min X="331.98850197" Y="154.37335742" Z="0" />
<Max X="334.48850197" Y="182.19944438" Z="0" />
</Extent>

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:166 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

<Position>
<Location X="333.238501971" Y="154.373357424"
Z="0" />
<Axis X="0" Y="0" Z="1" />
<Reference X="1" Y="0" Z="0" />
</Position>
</Text>
<Text Font="Arial" Justification="LeftBottom" Width="17.2678"

Height="2.032" TextAngle="90"
DependantAttribute="[FluidSystem][OperFluidCode]">
<Presentation Layer="HiddenObjects" LineType="0"
LineWeight="0"
Color="Black" R="0" G="0" B="0"/>
<Extent>
<Min X="262.83575736" Y="344.08495775" Z="0"/>
<Max X="264.86775736" Y="369.5594541" Z="0"/>
</Extent>
<Position>
<Location X="264.867757356" Y="344.08495775"
Z="0"/>
<Axis X="0" Y="0" Z="1"/>
<Reference X="1" Y="0" Z="0"/>
</Position>
</Text>

<Text Font="Arial" Justification="LeftBottom" Width="17.2678"

Height="2.032" TextAngle="90"
DependantAttribute="[FluidSystem][OperFluidCode]">
<Presentation Layer="HiddenObjects" LineType="0"
LineWeight="0"
Color="Black" R="0" G="0" B="0"/>
<Extent>
<Min X="262.83575736" Y="344.08495775" Z="0"/>
<Max X="264.86775736" Y="369.5594541" Z="0"/>
</Extent>
<Position>
<Location X="264.867757356" Y="344.08495775"
Z="0"/>
<Axis X="0" Y="0" Z="1"/>
<Reference X="1" Y="0" Z="0"/>
</Position>
</Text>

<Text String="&lt;u&gt;V-3504&lt;/u&gt;" Font="Arial"

Justification="LeftBottom" Width="16.9333"
Height="3.52778" TextAngle="0" SlantAngle="0" >

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:167 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

<Presentation Layer="Labels" LineType="0"

LineWeight="0"
Color="White" R="1" G="1" B="1" />
<Extent>
<Min X="510.90356225" Y="169.95252717" Z="0" />
<Max X="544.24108325" Y="173.48030717" Z="0" />
</Extent>
<Position>
<Location X="510.903562254" Y="169.952527166"
Z="0" />
<Axis X="0" Y="0" Z="1" />
<Reference X="1" Y="0" Z="0" />
</Position>
</Text>

• Transaction
A record of a change to an item
Child elements:

Element Name Cardinality Description

Remark 0..* A comment describing the change.
GenericAttributes 0..* Any application specific attributes

Attributes:

Attribute Name Required Description

Type N One of the following;
to approve
to check
to copy
to create
to modify
to request
to release
Date N A date type (YYYY-MM-DD)
Time N A time type (HH:MM:SS) (See http://www/
w3.org for full details including time zones)
CompanyName N A free form string (see Character
encoding)
Person N A free form string (see Character
encoding)

Example:
<Transaction Type="to modify" Date="2007-06-10"
Time="10:30:32" CompanyName="My company" Person="Me">

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:168 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

<Remark>Amended Nozzle parameters for new

specification</Remark>
<Remark>WP2134</Remark>
</Transaction>

• TrimmedCurve
An arc based on a circle or ellipse definition
Child elements:

Element Name Cardinality Description

Circle 0..1 Only present if Ellipse isn’t present. The
base Circle used to define the arc.
Ellipse 0..1 Only present if Circle isn’t present. The
base ellipse used to define the arc.
GenericAttributes 0..* Any application specific attributes

Attributes:

Attribute Name Required Description

StartAngle Y The rotation around the circle/ellipse to
start the arc from. 0 = east.
The angle is specified in degrees (0-360)
measured anti-clockwise.
EndAngle Y The rotation around the circle/ellipse to end
the arc at. 0 = east.
The angle is specified in degrees (0-360)
measured anti-clockwise.

Example 0-90:

<Circle Radius="2">
<Presentation Layer="1" LineType="Solid" LineWeight="0.3 mm"
Color="Grey" R="0.7" G="0.7" B="0.7" />
<Extent>
<Min X="-0.94858965624" Y="-1.8918151853" Z="0" />
<Max X="0.95634162094" Y="1.9180157898" Z="0" />
</Extent>

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:169 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

<Position>
<Location X="0" Y="1" Z="0" />
<Axis X="0" Y="0" Z="1" />
<Reference X="1" Y="0" Z="0" />
</Position>
</Circle>
<TrimmedCurve StartAngle="0" EndAngle="90">
<Circle Radius="2">
<Presentation Layer="1" LineType="Solid"
LineWeight="0.2 mm" Color="Red" R="1" G="0" B="0" />
<Extent>
<Min X="-0.94858965624" Y="-1.8918151853" Z="0" /
>
<Max X="0.95634162094" Y="1.9180157898" Z="0" />
</Extent>
<Position>
<Location X="0" Y="1" Z="0" />
<Axis X="0" Y="0" Z="1" />
<Reference X="1" Y="0" Z="0" />
</Position>
</Circle>
</TrimmedCurve>
Example 0-90 with a 90 degree rotation:

<Ellipse PrimaryAxis="2" SecondaryAxis="1">

<Presentation Layer="1" LineType="Solid" LineWeight="0.3 mm"
Color="Grey" R="0.7" G="0.7" B="0.7" />
<Extent>
<Min X="-0.94858965624" Y="-1.8918151853" Z="0" />
<Max X="0.95634162094" Y="1.9180157898" Z="0" />
</Extent>
<Position>
<Location X="5" Y="11" Z="0" />
<Axis X="0" Y="0" Z="1" />
<Reference X="0" Y="1" Z="0" />
</Position>
</Ellipse>
<TrimmedCurve StartAngle="0" EndAngle="90">
<Ellipse PrimaryAxis="2" SecondaryAxis="1">

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:170 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

<Presentation Layer="1" LineType="Solid"

LineWeight="0.2 mm" Color="Red" R="1" G="0" B="0" />
<Extent>
<Min X="-0.94858965624" Y="-1.8918151853" Z="0" /
>
<Max X="0.95634162094" Y="1.9180157898" Z="0" />
</Extent>
<Position>
<Location X="5" Y="11" Z="0" />
<Axis X="0" Y="0" Z="1" />
<Reference X="0" Y="1" Z="0" />
</Position>
</Ellipse>
</TrimmedCurve>
Example 0-90 with an inverted z-axis:

<Ellipse PrimaryAxis="2" SecondaryAxis="1">

<Presentation Layer="1" LineType="Solid" LineWeight="0.3 mm"
Color="Grey" R="0.7" G="0.7" B="0.7" />
<Extent>
<Min X="-0.94858965624" Y="-1.8918151853" Z="0" />
<Max X="0.95634162094" Y="1.9180157898" Z="0" />
</Extent>
<Position>
<Location X="0" Y="16" Z="0" />
<Axis X="0" Y="0" Z="-1" />
<Reference X="1" Y="0" Z="0" />
</Position>
</Ellipse>
<TrimmedCurve StartAngle="0" EndAngle="90">
<Ellipse PrimaryAxis="2" SecondaryAxis="1">
<Presentation Layer="1" LineType="Solid"
LineWeight="0.2 mm" Color="Red" R="1" G="0" B="0" />
<Extent>
<Min X="-0.94858965624" Y="-1.8918151853" Z="0" /
>
<Max X="0.95634162094" Y="1.9180157898" Z="0" />
</Extent>
<Position>
<Location X="0" Y="16" Z="0" />
<Axis X="0" Y="0" Z="-1" />

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:171 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

<Reference X="1" Y="0" Z="0" />

</Position>
</Ellipse>
</TrimmedCurve>

• UnitsOfMeasure
This element specifies the default units of measure for the file for each type of measured
value.
Child Elements:
None
Attributes:

Attribute Name Required Description

Distance N See Units for permitted distance values.
Default value is ‘Millimetre’.
Area N See Units for permitted distance values.
Default value is 'SquareMetres'.
Angle N See Units for permitted angle values.
Default value is ‘Degree’.
Temperature N See Units for permitted temperature
values. Default value is ‘DegreeCelsius’.
Pressure N See Units for permitted pressure values.
Default value is ‘Bar’.
Volume N See Units for permitted volume values.
Default value is 'CubicMetres'.
Weight N See Units for permitted weight values.
Default value is ‘Kilogram’.

Example:
<UnitsOfMeasure Distance="Inch" />

• WallThickness
The thickness of the element construction.
Child elements:
None

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:172 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

Attributes:

Attribute Name Required Description

Value N The thickness value. Nb this is a string
type and so could be represented in many
ways.
Units N The units of measure (See Units for
permitted values). If not present then this
defaults to the units specified by
PlantInformation/UnitsOfMeasure.

Example:
<WallThickness Value="4" Units="mm"/>

• Weight
The weight of the item.
Child elements:
None
Attributes:

Attribute Name Required Description

Value N The weight value.
Units N The units of measure (See Units for
permitted values). If not present then this
defaults to the units specified by
PlantInformation/UnitsOfMeasure.

Example:
<Weight Value="6" Units="oz"/>

• WeightsData
Child elements:

Element Name Cardinality Description

ControlPointWeight 0..*

Attributes:
None

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:173 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

Example:
<WeightsData>
<ControlPointWeight>1</ControlPointWeight>
<ControlPointWeight>1</ControlPointWeight>
<ControlPointWeight>1</ControlPointWeight>
<ControlPointWeight>1</ControlPointWeight>
</WeightsData>

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:174 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

10.7 Format of the Excel Interface Spreadsheet

10.7.1 The Spreadsheet Formats

The Excel Interface spreadsheet can be generated in two formats: Item Type and Item
Group. Each format has a different set of worksheets:
• If a spreadsheet is in the Item Type format, data for each item type that was exported is
displayed on its own worksheet.

• If a spreadsheet is in the Item Group format, item type data is grouped into item
categories: pipes, instruments, equipment, valves, line fittings, reducers, nozzles and
off-sheet connectors. There is a worksheet for each category.

In both formats, there is also a worksheet for drawing data.

The format is selected on the Excel Interface Configuration Category of the AVEVA P&ID
Project Administration program.

10.7.2 Item Worksheets

The first column of every item worksheet is the HANDLE column. This displays the unique
identifier of each item on the worksheet. This must not be edited.
Typical items are listed after the item that is typical of them. They will have the same handle
as that of the representative item, followed by a #. The first typical item handle will be
followed by a # only. Further items will be followed by a # and a number, i.e. #1, #2 etc.
The second column of every item worksheet is the DRAWING column. This displays the
number of the drawing on which each item is located. Changes made in this column are
ignored.

Subsequent columns display item data for editing. For guidance on editing item data, refer
to the Editing P&ID Data in an Excel Spreadsheet procedure.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:175 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

The third column displays the drawing grid in which each item is located. The next three
columns, if applicable to the category of item, display coordinates of the item and its angle of
rotation.
For tagged items, the item tag numbers are displayed in the next column or columns,
followed where applicable by the offset from the item and angle of rotation of the label.
Other columns include item types, the parent tags of nozzles, the upstream and
downstream sizes of reducers, the drawing number that off-sheet connectors reference,
pipe attributes such insulation and paint codes, and instrument loop and alarm details.

10.7.3 Drawing Data Worksheets

The Drawing Data worksheet displays the drawing number, revision, client drawing number
and the drawing title/description text. Changes to the drawing number can be made using
this worksheet.

10.7.4 NEW Fields

Each column in a worksheet containing values that can be edited has a corresponding NEW
column in which new values can be entered instead of editing the current values.
For example, in a worksheet containing a TAG column, there will also be a NEW TAG
column. The NEW fields are provided to enable users to compare the original values with
the modified ones.
Whether or not data is to be imported from NEW columns is specified by project
configuration for each item group.
Note that if an item type is set by project configuration to import from the NEW columns, all
validated NEW fields for that item type must be populated. If any validated NEW fields are
left blank, these will be regarded as invalid by the import process as they do not contain
valid values.

10.7.5 Insertable and Updateable Fields

Some worksheet fields are insertable, others are only updateable (assuming they are not
read-only). Updateable fields can only be amended in a spreadsheet. In other words, if they
do not already exist on a drawing (and therefore can be exported to a spreadsheet), they
can only be changed in a spreadsheet, not added.
Insertable fields are label fields that can be added as new labels for items. When the
spreadsheet is imported, these new labels will be place on the drawing. Columns in which

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:176 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

insertable labels can entered can be identified on a spreadsheet as the subsequent

columns will columns used to add the offset and rotation properties of any new labels. For
example:

10.7.6 Validated Rows

When changed data is imported back into a AVEVA P&ID drawing it is validated. After
validation, rows in the spreadsheet containing errors are displayed in red. In this example,
the value in the SIZE field of the first item row is invalid:

Rows in the spreadsheet containing valid changes displayed in green:

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:177 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

10.8 Setting up AVEVA P&ID to Connect with VPE

Workbench
The following configuration is required in AVEVA P&ID in order to set up the interface
between AVEVA P&ID and AVEVA VPE Workbench (see 7.5: Exporting Data to a VPE
Workbench Database).

10.8.1 Installing the VPE Middle Tier

During the installation of AVEVA P&ID, Workbench Components should be installed on
Middle Tier:

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:178 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

• Configuring the Windows service for EngAPI

- Checking the Windows status of the EngAPI Service

Run “%SystemRoot%\system32\services.msc /s” to open services running on the machine:

Check that the service status of “AVEVA PID ENGAPIService” is "Started".

- Changing Ports
Run “C:\Aveva\P&ID\Aveva EngAPI Service\ ServiceEditor.exe”.
Using the dialog that is then displayed, as required, change the port used by the service and
restart the service.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:179 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

• Starting the EngAPI Service

To start up the service successfully, users must enter the same user name and password
used during the installation of the service, because the settings for the service are saved at
the local machine level in the registry.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:180 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

10.8.2 Configuring the AVEVA P&ID Client

This procedure is carried out using the VPE Workbench Configuration Category of the
AVEVA P&ID Project Administration program.

The VPE.ini file identified in the VPE Config File field provides a list of the available VPE
Workbench projects. This file is provided by VPE Workbench. Users may copy this file to
their local machines.
The VPE Service Path is the http path used to connect to the EngAPI service. After creating
a new project, the user is expected to change the server “WBServer” and port “8080”
settings to the middle tier server name and port.
The Test button is provided to check whether the service is ready to use. This test button
will check whether the service:
• exists at path provided by VPE Service Path
• is started on VPE Middle Tier
• can connect to VPE Workbench
The Publisher Folder is the location to which synchronized files from the AVEVA P&ID
project's output folder are copied. This folder will be continuously watched by the Publisher,
and when synchronized files are copied to this folder; it will publish them to the Subscriber.
The Publisher folder name should match with that of the Publisher configuration file.
The user can select the Database Project from available list. The project list will be
populated with those listed in the VPE.ini file.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:181 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

The Export to VPE Workbench check box controls the default setting of the Export Data
to Publishing Area checkbox on the Synchronise dialog.

After loading data into VPE Workbench, Subscriber will send e-mails reporting the status of
load process. The e-mail addresses will depend on machine user ids of P&ID users. If a
user id is not in the e-mail address table then e-mail will be sent to the
USERNAME_DEFAULT e-mail address. Typically, the format of these e-mails will be as
below:

10.8.3 Synchronising
The Synchronise procedure (see 8.8.6: Synchronising Data with a VPE Workbench
Database) will copy the files from the AVEVA P&ID project's output folder to Publisher folder
if the Export Data to Publishing Area checkbox is checked on the Synchronise dialog. On
successfully copying the files, the Publisher service will export these files to the Subscriber.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:182 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

10.8.4 Batch Loading data to VPE Workbench

The Select Drawings to Publish window lists the drawings in the "Vantage" folder. Users
can select drawings from list and click on the > button to copy these drawings to Publisher
folder. They will be displayed in the Publishing Area list.
The >> button will copy all the listed drawings into the Published folder.
On successfully copying the files, the Publisher service will export these files to the
Subscriber.
If middle tier has older VPE Workbench versions like 5.6 or 5.7 installed on it, and Publisher
is not installed on the machine, drawings can be loaded to VPE Workbench from the
Publisher folder by:
1. Checking the Using Workbench Legacy Version (5.6/5.7) checkbox. This will enable
the Login button.
2. Selecting the files to be loaded as described above, using the > and >> buttons (the
Clear button will delete selected files from Publishing Area list).
3. Logging in. After a successful login, the Load button will be enabled.
4. Clicking the Load button to load the drawings to VPE Workbench (5.6/5.7). The load
progress will be shown in the progress bar, and status messages will be displayed in
the text box below.
5. The View Log button will open a log file containing the status messages from VPE
Workbench load process.
6. The files successfully loaded to VPE Workbench will be removed from the Publishing
area.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:183 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

10.9 Setting up PDMS Schematics to Connect with P&ID

The following configuration is required in PDMS in order to set up the interface between
AVEVA P&ID and PDMS Schematics (see 7.3.1: Integration with PDMS Schematics).
• In the Admin module, ensure the “Toolbox” module is defined and that it is set to open
Schematic type databases in RW mode (as defined in the supplied file MODMAC.MAC,
with the standard PDMS install).
To define the TOOLBOX module if it does not already exist, enter the following at the
command prompt:
MODULE 95 TOOLBOX
M DESI RW
M NSEQ RW
M ISOD R
M SCHE RW
M CATA R
M PROP R
M DICT R
M MANU R
M DESI DEFAULT
M TRAN RW
BUFFER 12800000
If the Toolbox module already exists but the Schematic DB is not set to open in RW
mode, then enter:
edit module 95 mode SCHE RW
• The Schematic Model database and the Catalogue Data database should be set to
multi-write implicit, to allow the loading PDMS and P&ID at the same time.
For instance, in the SAM project the following databases must be set to multi-write:
- SAMPLE/DESI
- ADMIN/REFDATA

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:184 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

10.10 Setting up AVEVA P&ID to Connect with AVEVA

Engineering
The following setup procedures are in addition to the configuration required in the AVEVA
P&ID Administration program (see 2.3.26: PDMS Integration Configuration Category) and in
AVEVA Engineering (see 10.11: Integration with AVEVA Engineering: Setup and Import
Procedures in AVEVA Engineering):
• Mandatory: Integration between AVEVA P&ID projects and AVEVA Engineering is set
up using the AVEVA Reports Service. The AVEVA Reports Service may be installed
with a Middle tier build. Continue at 10.10.1: AVEVA Reports Service Configuration for
details.
• Optional: The data that is transferred into AVEVA Engineering is taken from the results
of a set of pre-defined SQL queries, rather than directly from the database tables.
These may be edited by the user if required. Continue at 10.10.2: Integration Data
Source Queries for details.

10.10.1 AVEVA Reports Service Configuration

Start the AVEVA Reports Service by running ServiceEditor.exe.
The PIDReportDataWinService Settings dialog is then displayed:

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:185 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

To add P&ID projects, add their .prj files to the list of projects using the Add button. Multiple
projects can be added.

In the project grid, the project name, .prj file path, dataset name (PID report dataset), and
Windows authentication details are displayed.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:186 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

If the P&ID server is to be logged into using Windows Integrated security, in the Windows
Authentication column 'YES' will be displayed and the user name and password will be
blank.
If the P&ID server is to be logged into using SQL server security, in the Windows
Authentication column 'NO' will be displayed. The appropriate user name and password
must be entered (the password will be encrypted).
Use the Delete button to remove projects from the list.
The Refresh All button refreshes the listed data with changes made to the listed P&ID
projects.
The Save All button saves the P&ID project related data to the config file.
The PIDReportDataWinService file is in the same folder as the application.

To add more projects, stop and the restart the service using the Stop Service and Start
Service buttons.
Before starting the service, the Port number can be changed if required.

10.10.2 Integration Data Source Queries

The data that is transferred into AVEVA Engineering is taken from the results the following
pre-defined SQL queries if they are available, rather than directly from the database tables:

SR# Item Type Query Name

1 Lines EXCEL_LINELIST
2 Instruments EXCEL_INSTLIST
3 Equipment EXCEL_EQULIST
4 Line Fittings EXCEL_INLNLIST

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:187 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

SR# Item Type Query Name

5 Nozzles EXCEL_NOZLIST
6 Valves EXCEL_VLVLIST

These queries are supplied by default with the AVEVA P&ID database and can be viewed,
and if required edited using facilities provided by AVEVA P&ID Reports (refer to the
“Creating Reports using User Defined Queries” topic in the AVEVA P&ID Reports
documentation for details).
The queries include the following columns: Name, Drawing No + Sheet No, and Branch Id
(for the Lines query) or Handle (for the other queries). These are required by the interface
and must not be deleted if the queries are edited.
If the queries are not available, the tables will be used by the interface instead.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:188 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

10.11 Integration with AVEVA Engineering: Setup and

Import Procedures in AVEVA Engineering
Refer to:
• Basic Configuration
• Connecting to AVEVA P&ID
• Importing from AVEVA P&ID

10.11.1 Basic Configuration

Configuration is required in the Lexicon and Tags modules of Engineering in order to set up
the interface between AVEVA P&ID and AVEVA Engineering (see 7.3.2: Integration with
AVEVA Engineering).

Note: This is in addition to the configuration required in the AVEVA P&ID Administration
program (see 2.3.26: PDMS Integration Configuration Category), and the AVEVA
Reports Service (see 10.10: Setting up AVEVA P&ID to Connect with AVEVA
Engineering).

• Lexicon Module Configuration

In order for the interface between Engineering and P&ID to function, the following element
must be present in Lexicon, with attributes as shown below:

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:189 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

The selected Element types attribute must be set as shown below:

See also Points to Note.

• Tags Module
1. In the Tags module, access the Compare/Update facility from the Data Management
tab and select AVEVA P&ID from the upper list in the Source Selection group of the
Actions tab that is then displayed:

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:190 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

2. Select Options from the Configuration group to display the following Options dialog:

3. Press the Configure P&ID button. In the dialog that is then displayed, enter the address
of the appropriate AVEVA Reports Service:

Press the Test Connection button to test that a valid address has been entered. Press
OK to close the dialog.
4. .Different configurations may be set up for the interface. For example, one for importing
lines, one for importing instrument, and so on. Each configuration may include its own
mapping between AVEVA P&ID and Engineering attributes, its own filters etc.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:191 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

To set up a configuration, select the Manage Configuration button. The Compare/

Update Configuration wizard is then displayed:

5. To create a new configuration, select the Create new configuration option and click
Next > to continue.
To view or edit and existing configuration, select the Edit existing configuration option,
and select it from the list that is then displayed. Click Next > to continue.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:192 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

6. Enter the name of the configuration in the Display Name field and select the element
type that the configuration is concerned with from the Element Type list.

From the Name Attribute list, select the attribute of the selected element type which is
to serve as the name attribute of imported items in Engineering.
From the Unique Attribute list, select the attribute which is to serve as the unique key
attribute of imported items.
For lines, this must be Branch Id. For other types of element it must be handle.
Click Next > to continue.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:193 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

7. In the next step, select the Engineering element type to which the AVEVA P&ID
element type is to be mapped:

Click Next > to continue.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:194 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

8. In the next step, set up any required filters for the export.

Refer to the Compare/Update User Guide for details of this procedure. Click Next > to
continue.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:195 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

9. Finally, set up the mappings between AVEVA P&ID attributes and Engineering
attributes.

Refer to the Compare/Update User Guide for details of this procedure.

Click Finish to save the configuration and exit the wizard.

• Points to Note
• The PMGEngiPID attribute (see Lexicon Module Configuration) is used to uniquely
identify imported AVEVA P&ID elements during the import process. It must therefore be
unique for each imported element, or else an error will occur.
The attribute is formed from a concatenation of the Project Id, unique attribute (as set in
the Configuration Wizard) and the drawing number + sheet number of each element.
It must not be edited in Engineering.
• Name attributes in Engineering must be unique and must not contain spaces.
Therefore the values of AVEVA P&ID attributes mapped to the Engineering Name
attribute must also be unique and must not contain spaces.
• If branches are imported they are likely to be assigned the same Name attributes
(derived from their line numbers) as their main pipes. Branches should therefore be
excluded from imports by means of a filter set up in the Configuration Wizard, or using
the Filters facility accessed from the Actions tab.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:196 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

• If the AVEVA P&ID Line Size attribute is mapped to the Engineering UDA Line Size
attribute, the UDA Type of the Engineering UDA Line Size attribute must be set to Text
instead of Real.

10.11.2 Connecting to AVEVA P&ID

As described above, access the Compare/Update facility in the Tags module and select
AVEVA P&ID in the Source Selection group of the Actions tab.
Select Login from the Source group of the Actions tab. A list of available AVEVA P&ID
projects is then displayed:

Click on the required project a press the Select button to connect to it.
If attribute mappings and filters have previously been set up the compare process will then
start automatically. If attribute mappings and/or filters have not been set up, the user will be
prompted to set these up. Refer to the Compare/Update User Guide for details.

10.11.3 Importing from AVEVA P&ID

1. After a connection with an AVEVA P&ID project has been established (see above),
select a configuration from the lower list in the Source Selection group:

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:197 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

2. The Compare process in then initiated. Data from the selected source is compared to
that in the Engineering database. The results are displayed in the Compare/Update
window:

Note: Only drawing data that has been exported and consolidated using the Exporting Data
to a P&ID Reports and/or AVEVA Engineering Database procedure can be imported.

3. To refresh the imported data with changes made since the connection to the P&ID
project was established, select Refresh from the Source group.
4. To view comparison process statistics and options, and to apply updates to
Engineering database data, select Update Database from the Destination group of the
tab.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:198 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

The Update Engineering Database dialog is then displayed:

Refer to the Compare/Update User Guide for further details of this dialog.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:199 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

5. Press the Update button to update the Engineering database. The updates are then
applied and the results of the process are displayed:

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:200 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

10.12 Copying Project Databases and Datasets from

Project to Project
In SQL Server, there are three databases per project. For example, where IPE is the project
name:
• IPE
• ADMIN_ IPE
• PIDREPORTS_ IPE
This appendix describes how to:
• Exporting and Importing tables from one Database to another (for Datasets)
• Copy a Project from one site to another

10.12.1 Exporting and Importing tables from one Database to another (for
Datasets)
Continue at:
• Exporting Tables
• Importing Tables

• Exporting Tables
If drawings have any datasets, export them as Excel files (these tables can be used in
another project).
Open the main database (e.g.-IPE). All the datasets have 'DATA_SET_' in their names, as
shown below:

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:201 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

Right-click on the project and select Export Data.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:202 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

The SQL Server Import and Export Wizard is then displayed:

Click Next.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:203 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

Click Next.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:204 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

Select 'Microsoft Excel' in the Destination field. Specify the Excel file path in the field
provided.

Click Next.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:205 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

Select Copy data from one or more tables or views.

Click Next.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:206 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

Select the required Datasets.

Click Next.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:207 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

Select Run immediately.

Click Next.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:208 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

Click Finish.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:209 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

The selected datasets are then copied as specified.

When the process is complete, close the Wizard dialog.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:210 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

• Importing Tables
To import tables into another database, right-click on the project and select Import Data.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:211 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

The SQL Server Import and Export Wizard is then displayed:

Click Next.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:212 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

Select 'Microsoft Excel' in the Data source field. Specify the Excel file path in the field
provided.

Click Next.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:213 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

Ensure that the Server name and Database name are correct.

Click Next.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:214 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

Select Copy data from one or more tables or views.

Click Next.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:215 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

Select the source tables. Only select those that do not have a $ at the end of their names.

Click Next.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:216 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

Click Next.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:217 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

Select Run immediately.

Click Next, then click Finish to complete the procedure.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:218 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

The tables are then copied from the source to the destination project. For example:

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:219 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

10.12.2 Copy a Project from one site to another

Take backup files of all three databases from the SQL server. i.e. the Project database,
Admin database and PIDreport database.
To take a backup of project databases open the Microsoft SQL Server management Studio.
Right-click on the database and select Back Up.

The user has to select individual database to take the backup.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:220 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

Select the database to be backed up. Select the path for the backup.

Click OK.
Copy the whole project folder and all three database .bak files to another site.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:221 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

Restore all database backups to the client SQL server.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:222 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

Select From device and provide the path for .bak file. Select the required database. Now
select the database from the To database dropdown.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:223 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

10.13 SQL Server Roles for AVEVA P&ID Users

• AVEVA P&ID SQL Server User Configuration
• Procedure to Assign Permissions/Roles in SQL Server
• Project Setup - Sequence of Activities
• System Administrator
• Project Administrator
• PID Power User
• PID User

10.13.1 AVEVA P&ID SQL Server User Configuration

P&ID users and administrators that will configure or connect to a P&ID project Database
should have configured privileges in Microsoft SQL Server Management Studio according to
their roles. Please see the pictures below.
Project groups can be created according to user role in the project
• System Administrator
• Project Administrator
• PID Power User
• PID User

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:224 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

See the table below for the roles required for different activities in AVEVA P&ID.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:225 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

10.13.2 Procedure to Assign Permissions/Roles in SQL Server

In SQL Server Roles can be granted from the Logins tab of Microsoft SQL Server
Management Studio.

Clicking New Login will open the below Screen where System Administrator can create user
logins and assign permissions/rights.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:226 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

Users can be of either Windows Authentication or SQL Authentication.

Once user is created, access permissions for the particular user can be granted using:
1. Server Roles.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:227 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

Server-wide security Privileges.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:228 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

2. User Mapping
Database level security privileges.

10.13.3 Project Setup - Sequence of Activities

1. User with SQL Administrator rights creates a user with PID Administrator rights.
2. The SQL Administrator or PID Administrator creates a new AVEVA P&ID project.
3. Once the project is created, SQL Administrator creates a PID Power user and a PID
User.
4. The SQL Administrator gives access permission to the PID Power User and the PID
User.
5. The PID Administrator changes/modifies the Project Administrator Settings.
6. The PID User works in the P&ID Application.

10.13.4 System Administrator

Typically this role is assigned to a DBA type person in the organization who is in responsible
for database maintenance and administration. This user might not necessary be familiar
with AVEVA P&ID
Restrictions in AVEVA P&ID: None.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:229 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

This user can have following server roles.

With these access rights the System Administrator:

• Can act as in a typical DBA role.
• Can perform any activity in SQL Server.
• Has all admin rights for handling the other login rights for other users.
• Has all permissions in the database.

10.13.5 Project Administrator

This role is assigned to the AVEVA P&ID project administrator. Typically this user will be
responsible for setting up the projects using the project wizard and project administrator.
Restrictions in AVEVA P&ID: Cannot assign roles to other users in SQL Server.
This user can have following server roles.

With these access rights the Project Administrator can:

• Using project wizard, create new projects, upgrade projects, and create shortcuts.
• Change/modify Project Administrator settings.
• Import and consolidate data in P&ID Reports.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:230 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

10.13.6 PID Power User

Power users are typically P&ID reports users or users that are allow consolidating
P&ID changes to P&ID reports databases using synchronize.
Restrictions in AVEVA P&ID:
• Cannot create projects using project wizard.
• Cannot create new databases using project administrator.
This user should have following server roles:

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:231 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

The database role in User Mapping for Admin database, project database and PID Report
database should have following access.

With these access rights the PID Power User can:

• Using project wizard, create a project shortcut.
• Using project wizard, upgrade a project.
• Open the Project administrator and modify settings.
• Create drawings, add entities and apply properties in the P&ID application.
• Consolidate databases and create new columns in P&ID Reports.
• Add/modify datasets in project administrator.

10.13.7 PID User

This role is assigned to the P&ID draftsman; they can work with the core application but they
will be restricted in their use of admin tools and the P&ID Reports database.
Restrictions in AVEVA P&ID:
• Cannot create projects using the project wizard.
• Cannot upgrade a project using the project wizard.
• Cannot create new databases using the project administrator.
• Cannot consolidate databases using the synchronize facility.
• Cannot create new columns in the P&ID Reports database schema.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:232 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

These users can have the following server role:

The database role in User Mapping for project database and PID Report database should
have following access:

With these access rights the PID User can:

• Using project wizard, create Project shortcuts.
• Create drawings, add entities and apply properties in the P&ID application.
• Synchronize with the "Export to PID Report" option selected.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:233 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide
Appendices

• Synchronize but cannot consolidate as the process will fail to create new columns in
the database if required in the case of Dataset's/UDAs.
Note: The PID User can be restricted to change Administrator settings by giving only Public
access in the User Mappings.

© Copyright 1994 to current year. 10:234 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide

Index

A Auto Save Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:221

AutoCAD Defaults set by AVEVA P&ID 10:25
About this User Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:1 AutoCAD Design Centre . . . . . . . . . . . 4:44
Adding a Title to a Drawing and entering Drawing AutoCAD Drafting Guidelines . . . . . . . . . 5:3
Sheet Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:2 Auto-Labelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:165
Adding Custom Lisp Routines to AVEVA P&ID Automatic Drawing Configuration . . . . . . 3:2
2:218 Automatic Suffix Assignment for Duplicate In-
Adding Elbows to a Line . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:66 strument Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:18
Adding Equipment Headers . . . . . . . . . 8:85 Automatic Tagging 2:137, 2:189, 6:24, 6:33,
Adding new multi line styles in AVEVA P&ID 8:148
2:218 Automatic Valve Tagging . . . . . . . . . . . 2:41
Adding Notes to Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:152 AVEVA Electrical 2:200, 4:23, 4:26, 7:3, 8:214
Adding Pipe and Signal Line Segments 8:63 AVEVA Engineering 4:30, 7:4, 8:191, 10:185,
Adding Pipe Destination Text . . 6:31, 8:139 10:189
Adding User-Defined Attributes . . . . . . 6:34 AVEVA Instrumentation 2:194, 4:23, 4:26, 7:3,
Administration of Assemblies . . . . . . . 2:213 8:214
AE Integration Configuration Category 2:200 AVEVA NET . . . . . . . . . . 2:195, 7:10, 8:218
AI Integration Configuration Category . 2:194 AVEVA NET Configuration Category . 2:195
AlphaNumeric/Numeric equivalent Size 2:64 AVEVA P&ID Colouring Utility . . . . . . 8:178
Annotation Assemblies . . . 6:40, 8:41, 8:236 AVEVA P&ID Document Manager . . . . . 9:1
Applying Tracing to Inline Items . . . . . . 8:57 AVEVA P&ID Drawing Upgrade Utility . . 5:4
Applying Tracing to Pipes . . . . . . . . . . . 8:56 Assigning P&ID Item Types and Symbol
Assemblies . . . . . . . 6:21, 6:40, 8:41, 8:236 Data to AutoCAD Blocks . . . 5:6
Assigning a New Branch Id to a Pipe . 8:242 Assigning P&ID Pipe Types to AutoCAD
Assigning P&ID Item Types and Symbol Data to Line Types . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:11
AutoCAD Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:6 Assigning P&ID Signal Line Types to Auto-
Assigning P&ID Pipe Types to AutoCAD Line CAD Line Types . . . . . . . . 5:11
Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:11 Assigning P&ID Symbol Names to AutoCAD
Assigning P&ID Signal Line Types to AutoCAD Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:8
Line Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:11 Starting the AVEVA P&ID Drawing Upgrade
Assigning P&ID Symbol Names to AutoCAD Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:4
Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:8 AVEVA P&ID Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:1
Assigning Unassigned Items to a Drawing 4:25 AVEVA P&ID Item Types and Label Types .
Associations between Items . . . . . . . . 8:240 10:19
Auto Save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:164

© Copyright 1994 to current year. Index page i 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide

AVEVA P&ID Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:1 Connecting to a P&ID Reports Database 8:195

AVEVA P&ID Tool Palette 2:223, 4:44, 8:17 Connecting to a VPE Workbench Database
AVEVA P&ID Upgrade Utility . . . . . . . . . 2:2 8:209
AVEVA Reports Service . . . . . . . . . . 10:185 Connector Label Settings . . . . . . . . . . 2:155
Avoiding Problems when using Client Symbolo- Context Sensitive Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:8
gy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:203 Convert Project Label Units . . . . . . . . . 8:10
AVVCLDATA . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:13, 5:19, 5:21 Copying a Single Owned Item . . . . . . 8:163
Copying and Pasting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:17
B Copying Drawing Objects and Labels 8:161
Copying Project Databases and Datasets from
Balloons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:33 Project to Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:201
Batch Load to Workbench . . . . . . . . . . . 2:19 Corrupted Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:46, 8:191
BATCHDRAWINGUPDATE . . . . . . . . 8:247 Creating a New Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:4
Bi-Directional Flow . . . . . . . . . . 2:72, 8:125 Creating a New Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . 2:203
Branch Id . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:242 Creating a New Symbol, Editing a Symbol 4:15
Branches . . . . . . .6:8, 8:48, 8:61, 8:68, 8:69 Creating Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:236
Breaking Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:58 Creating Instrument Loops . . . . . . . . . 8:103
Breaking Signal Lines and Process Links 8:59 Creating Item Associations . . . . . . . . 8:239
Breaks . . 2:71, 4:18, 6:30, 8:13, 8:30, 8:136 Creating New Signal Line Styles . . . . . 2:90
Creating Pipe Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:119
C Creating User-Defined Lists of Values . 2:66
Custom Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:127
Cascading Changes Through a Pipe Run 2:75, Customisation Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:213
6:31 Customising the AVEVA P&ID Tool Palette
Changing AVEVA P&ID Settings . . . . . 8:12 2:223
Changing Branches to Pipes . . . . . . . . 8:69
Changing Inherited Values . . . . . . . . . . 6:33
D
Changing Pipe Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:56
Changing Pipes to Branches . . . . . . . . 8:68 Data Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:1
Changing Pipes to Branches and Branches to DataSets (User Defined Attributes) . . 2:184
Pipes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:68 DataSets (User-Defined Attributes) . . . 6:34
Changing Signal Line Styles . . . . . . . . . 8:58 Default OSnap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:164
Changing the Association of a Pipe Label 8:151 Define Split labels and offset for symbol 2:85
Changing the Colours of Multiple Items 8:178 Defining a New Pipe Style . . . . . . . . . 2:207
Changing the Length of Lines . . . . . . . . 8:65 Defining a New Signal Line Type . . . . 2:207
Changing the Owning Pipes of Branches 8:69 Defining a New Tracing Style . . . . . . . 2:213
Changing Units on a Project . . . . . . . . 2:202 Deleting Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . 8:245
Character Encoding . . . . . . . 10:28, 10:101 Deleting Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:45
Checking for Corrupted Items . . . . . . . 8:191 Deleting Pipe and Signal Line Segments 8:65
Clearing Duplicate Values with Null Drawing IDs Deleting Validation Error and Warning Messages
8:246 8:209
Clearing Duplicate Values with Specified Draw- Descriptors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:18
ing IDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:246 Design Data Templates 6:40, 6:44, 8:41, 8:178,
Client Symbology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:203 8:236
Clouds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:21, 6:44, 8:177 Detecting Corrupted Items . . . . . . . . . . 6:46
Code Offset from Symbol Origins . . . . 2:134 Dialog Box Field Labels . . . . . . 2:134, 2:167
Code Settings Section . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:148 Dialog Box Field Labels and List of Values .
Colouring Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:178 2:116
Compare With . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:8 Disconnecting from a VPE Workbench Database
Complex Linetypes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:222 8:210
con file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:17 Disconnecting Pipe Flags . . . . . . . . . . 8:132
Connecting Pipe Flags . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:127 Disconnecting Pipes from Nozzles and Equip-
Connecting Pipes to Nozzles and Equipment ment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:71
8:70 Display Instrument Labels at Pipe Destination

© Copyright 1994 to current year. Index page ii 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide

2:85 Equipment Configuration Category . . 2:113

Display Label Format 2:81, 2:134, 2:153, 8:8 Labels Sub-Configuration Category 2:120
Displaying the Symbol Explorer . . . . . . 4:10 Settings Sub-Category . . . . . . . . . 2:114
Document Manager . . . . . . . . . . 2:201, 9:1 Validation Sub-Category . . . . . . . 2:125
Comparing Revisions . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:8 Equipment Data from VPE Workbench 2:115
Deleting Revisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:12 Equipment Design Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:6
Exporting Revisions . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:11 Equipment Information - .equ file . . . . . 10:9
Restoring Drawing Revisions . . . . . 9:11 Equipment Label Format . . . . . . . . . . 2:122
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:3 Equipment Label Position . . . . . . . . . 2:121
Viewing Revision Details . . . . . . . . . 9:5 Equipment Label Symbol . . . . . . . . . . 2:123
Viewing Revisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:6 Equipment With Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:14
Document Manager Configuration Category Error and Warning Messages . 8:203, 8:245
2:201 Excel . . . . . . . . . .7:11, 8:221, 8:225, 8:229
Drawing Configuration Category . . . . . . 2:31 Excel Interface Configuration Category 2:170
Grid Sub-Category . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:32 Existing Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:105
Labels Sub-Category . . . . . . . . . . . 2:34 Existing Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:21
Layers Sub-Category . . . . . . . . . . . 2:36 Exiting AVEVA P&ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:4
Settings Sub-Category . . . . . . . . . . 2:38 Explorer Display Options . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:1
Validation Sub-Category . . . . . . . . 2:40 Export to Excel - excelout . . . . . . . . . 2:171
Drawing Details - .drg file . . . . . . . . . . . 10:8 Exporting Data to a VPE Workbench Database
Drawing Frame Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:32 7:7
Drawing History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:246 Exporting Data to an AVEVA P&ID Reports Da-
Drawing Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:34 tabase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:1, 8:191
Drawing Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:8 Exporting Data to AVEVA NET . . . . . . 7:10
Drawing P&IDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:1 Exporting Data to Excel . . . . . . . . . . . 8:221
Drawing Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:45 Exporting Data to ISO 15926 Files 7:10, 8:219
Drawing Pipes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:48 Exporting to AVEVA Electrical . . . . . . . . 7:3
Drawing Pipes and Connections . . 6:8, 8:48 Exporting to AVEVA Instrumentation . . . 7:3
Drawing Pipes and Process Links . . . . . 6:8
Drawing Process Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:51 F
Drawing Revision Clouds . . . . . . . . . . 8:177
Drawing Sheet Attributes . . . 6:23, 6:32, 8:2 Features of AVEVA P&ID . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:3
Drawing Signal Lines . . . . . . . . . 6:10, 8:57 File Document Structure . . . . . . . . . . 10:95
Drawing Upgrade Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:4 Filtering Unassigned Items . . . . . . . . . . . 4:8
drg file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:8 Flow Arrows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:72, 8:12
Dual Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:72, 8:125 Flow Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:18, 8:36
Dynamic Labelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:43
Dynamic Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:12, 6:26 G
General Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:44
E
General Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:17
Editing Non-AVEVA P&ID Text . 6:13, 8:145 General Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:15, 8:90
Editing P&ID Data in an Excel Spreadsheet Generating a Mapping File . . . . . . . . . . . 8:2
8:225 Geometries (Axis and Reference) 10:28, 10:100
Editing Pipe Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:65 Get Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:29, 4:31
Electrical Equipment . . . . . . 6:14, 8:20, 8:81 Globally Editing non-Pipe Labels . . . . 8:153
Element Definitions . . . . . . . . 10:32, 10:103 Good Drawing Practice . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:1
Engineering Explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:3 Graphical Assemblies . . . 6:40, 8:41, 8:236
Entering Pattern Labels . . . . . . . . . . . 2:106 Graphical User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:1
Entering Symbol Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:55 Grid Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:33
equ file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:9 Grid Sub-Category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:32
Equipment 2:113, 6:14, 8:7, 8:18, 8:70, 8:71, Guidelines for Drawing Process Links . 8:53
8:76, 8:81, 8:85
Equipment Classification . . . . . . . . . . . 2:115

© Copyright 1994 to current year. Index page iii 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide

I Instrument Panel Dialog Labels . . . . . . 2:96

Instrument Panel Label Position . . . . 2:104
I/O Address Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:7 Instrument Tag/Loop Numbers . . . . . . . 7:5
I/O Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:20 Instrument Valves (Control Valves) 6:16, 8:26
I/O Label Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:104 Instruments . . . . . . .2:94, 6:17, 8:33, 8:104
I/O Rockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:20, 8:112 Instruments (Balloons) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:33
Implementing Configuration Changes . . . 8:6 Instruments Configuration Category . . 2:94
Import Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:53 Labels Sub-Category . . . . . . . . . . 2:101
Import to P&ID - excelin . . . . . . . . . . . 2:171 Patterns Sub-Category . . . . . . . . 2:104
Imported I/O Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:20 Settings Sub-Category . . . . . . . . . . 2:95
Importing Data from Excel . . . . . . . . . 8:229 Validation Sub-Category . . . . . . . 2:110
Importing Equipment Design Data . . . . . 7:6 Integration with AVEVA Engineering . . . 7:4
Importing from AVEVA Electrical . . . . . . 7:3 Integration with PDMS Schematics . . . . 7:4
Importing from AVEVA Instrumentation . 7:3 inv file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:10
Importing I/O Address Data . . . . . . . . . . 7:7 ipc file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:12
Importing Instrument Tag/Loop Numbers 7:5 irm file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:13
Importing VPE Workbench Data . . . . . . . 7:1 ISO15926 . . . . . . .7:10, 8:219, 10:26, 10:95
Indicating Pipe Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:11 ISO15926 (Version 3.2.0) Schema . . 10:26
Inheritance 2:73, 2:97, 2:117, 2:131, 2:147, 6:13 ISO15926 (Version 3.3.3) Schema . . 10:95
Inherited Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:23 isy file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:15
Inline Breaks . . . . . . 4:18, 6:30, 8:30, 8:136 Item Associations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:239
Inline Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:16 Item Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:241
In-Line Equipment Label Position . . . . 2:124 Item Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:19
In-Line Equipment Label Symbol . . . . 2:124 Item Types Configuration Category . . . 2:43
Inline Fittings . . . . . . 2:145, 6:16, 8:30, 8:98 Signal Sub-Category . . . . . . . . . . . 2:45
In-Line Non-Valves - .inv file . . . . . . . . 10:10 Standard Sub-Category . . . . . . . . . 2:43
In-Line Valves Information - .ivl file . . . 10:14 ivl file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:14
Inserting 1-point & 2-point symbols . . . . 8:16
Inserting Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:41
Inserting Electrical Equipment . . . . . . . 8:20
J
Inserting Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:18 Joining Co-linear Pipes . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:72
Inserting Flow Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:36
Inserting Inline Fittings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:30
L
Inserting Instrument Valves (Control Valves)
8:26 Label Balloon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:102
Inserting Instruments (Balloons) . . . . . . 8:33 Label Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:47
Inserting Miscellaneous Symbols . . . . . 8:38 Label Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:121, 6:17
Inserting Nozzles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:22 Label Format Validation . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:37
Inserting Symbols . . . . . . . . . . 3:4, 6:6, 8:16 Label Inheritance from Owning Pipes . 6:13
Inserting Symbols with Labels . . 6:24, 6:33 Label Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:102
Inserting Tables of VPE Workbench Data 8:212 Label Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:17, 6:20
Inserting Unassigned P&ID Database Items 6:7 Label Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:19
Inserting Unassigned P&ID Database Pipes Label Types Configuration Category . . 2:47
8:49 Label Types Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:48
Inserting Unassigned P&ID Database Symbols Label Uniqueness . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:18, 6:27
8:43 Label Uniqueness Validation . . . . . . . . 6:37
Inserting Unassigned VPE Workbench Items Label Validation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:35
6:7, 8:44 Label Validation across all Project P&IDs 6:37
Inserting Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:24 Label Validation Across P&IDs . 2:73, 2:99,
Insertion Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:17 2:117, 2:131, 2:164
Instrument Dialog Labels and List of Values Label Validation Across P&IDs Section 2:148
2:96 Label Validation against Lists of Valid Values
Instrument Label Position . . . . . . . . . . 2:102 6:36
Instrument Loops . . . 2:99, 4:4, 6:19, 8:103 Label Validation against Specifications 6:40

© Copyright 1994 to current year. Index page iv 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide

Labelling Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:21 M

Labelling Clouds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:21
Labelling Electrical Equipment . . . . . . . 8:81 Main Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:149
Labelling Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:14 Main Pipe Label Colour . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:77
Labelling Equipment (with or without Trim) 8:76 Main Pipe Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:26
Labelling General Instruments . 6:17, 8:104 Merging Pipe Segments . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:64
Labelling General Instruments - Using Pattern Merging Pipes, Branches and Signal Lines 8:59
Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:19 Mirroring Drawing Objects . . . . . . . . . 8:169
Labelling General Valves . . . . . . 6:15, 8:90 Miscellaneous Configuration Category 2:156
Labelling I/O Rockets . . . . . . . . 6:20, 8:112 Labels Sub-Category . . . . . . . . . . 2:165
Labelling Inline Fittings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:98 Settings Sub-Category . . . . . . . . . 2:157
Labelling Inline Fittings (Special Piping Items) Validation Sub-Category . . . . . . . 2:168
6:16 Miscellaneous Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:21
Labelling Instrument Valves (Control Valves) Miscellaneous Settings . . . . . . . . . . . 2:162
6:16 Miscellaneous Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:38
Labelling Instruments with I/P Convertors 6:18 Modal Properties Dialogs . . . . . . . . . . . 4:51
Labelling Miscellaneous Items . . . . . . . 6:21 Model Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:95
Labelling Nozzles . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:21, 8:86 Modifying Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:161
Labelling Pipe Destination Fittings 6:16, 8:101 Modifying Pipe Label Fields and Cascading
Labelling Pipe Flags . . . . . . . . . 6:21, 8:127 Changes Through a Pipe Run . . . . . . . 6:31
Labelling Pipes . . . . . . . . . 6:25, 6:29, 8:121 mon file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:18
Labelling Pipes with Breaks and Inline Breaks Monitor File - .mon file . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:18
6:30 Moving Drawing Objects . . . . . . . . . . 8:167
Labelling Pipes with Reducers and Reducing Multi line styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:218, 10:1
Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:30
Labelling Port Valves . . . . . . . . . 6:16, 8:96 N
Labelling Reducers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:132
Labelling Revision Triangles . . . 6:22, 8:115 Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:26
Labelling Stream Diamonds . . . 6:16, 8:101 Non-AVEVA P&ID Text . . . . . . . . . . . 8:145
Labelling Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:11 Non-Modal Properties Dialog . . . . . . . . 4:56
Labelling Symbols and Pipes . . . . . . . . 8:72 Non-Standard Label Format . . . . . . . . . 6:27
Labelling System I/O Connections, Interlocks Notation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:26, 10:95
and Logic Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:20, 8:110 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:44, 8:152
Labelling Typical Items . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:146 Notes Information - .nte file . . . . . . . . 10:17
Labelling with Data from the P&ID Data Grid noz file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:10
8:142 Nozzle and Special Piping Items Label Field Val-
Labelling with VPE Workbench Data . 8:210 idation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:168
Labelling/Editing Non-AVEVA P&ID Text 6:13 Nozzle Information - .noz file . . . . . . . 10:10
Labels Sub-Category 2:76, 2:101, 2:120, 2:133, Nozzles 2:149, 6:21, 8:22, 8:70, 8:71, 8:86
2:165 Nozzles Configuration Category . . . . 2:149
Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:36 nte file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:17
Layers Sub-Category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:36 Null Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:29
Legacy Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:75 Number of TAG fields . . . . . . . . . 2:96, 2:115
Line Fittings . . . . . . . 2:145, 6:16, 8:30, 8:98
Line Fittings Configuration Category . . 2:145 O
Line Fittings Label Position . . . . . . . . . 2:147
Line Fittings Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:147 Offsheet Connector Configuration Category
Line Termination Symbols . . . . . . . . . . 8:39 2:152
Link Connectivities Information - .con file 10:17 Off-Sheet Connectors 2:152, 4:26, 6:21, 8:127
Linking Unassigned P&ID Data Grid Items with Opening a P&ID Reports Database . . 8:196
Unlabelled Drawing Items . . . . . . . . . . 8:142 Output File Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:8
List Item Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:241 Overview of AVEVA VPE P&ID . . . . . . . 1:2
List of Values Configuration Category . 2:63

© Copyright 1994 to current year. Index page v 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide

P Project Catalogue Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:8

Project Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:1
P&ID Data Grid . . . . . . . . 4:23, 8:142, 8:145 Project Database Configuration Category 2:26
P&ID Reports . . . . 7:1, 8:191, 8:195, 8:196 Project Definable Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:84
P&ID Reports Configuration Category . 2:28 Project Drawing Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:202
Page Connectors . . . . . . . 4:26, 6:21, 8:127 Project Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:13
Panel Reference Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:20 Project Options Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:5
Pattern Labels 2:104, 2:141, 6:19, 8:90, 8:104 Project Paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:14
Patterns Components . . . . . . . 2:106, 2:143 Project Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:222
Patterns Sub-Category . . . . . . 2:104, 2:141 Project Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:203
PDMS 2:192, 8:191, 10:184, 10:185, 10:189 Project Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:14, 8:10
PDMS Cats and Specs Import . . . . . . 2:176 Project Upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:2
PDMS Integration Configuration Category 2:192 Propagating Changes to Pipe Properties 8:132
PDMS Schematic Database . 8:217, 10:184 Properties Dialogs . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:51, 4:56
PDMS Schematics . . . . . . 4:29, 7:4, 10:184 Publishing Data to AVEVA NET . . . . . 8:218
PersistentId Referencing . . . . 10:29, 10:101
PID.MAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:1
PID.MLN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:1
Q
pip file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:16 Queries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:187
Pipe Creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:3 Quick Guide to Drawing P&IDs . . . . . . . 6:1
Pipe Destination Fittings . . . . . . 6:16, 8:101
Pipe Destination Text . . . . . . . . 6:31, 8:139
R
Pipe End Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:155
Pipe Flags . . . . . . . 2:152, 4:26, 6:21, 8:127 Reducer Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:74
Pipe Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:11, 8:62, 8:125 Reducers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:30, 8:132
Pipe Groups . . . . . . 2:190, 4:5, 6:30, 8:119 Reducing Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:94
Pipe Information - .pip file . . . . . . . . . . 10:16 Reducing Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:30
Pipe Item Information - .pit file . . . . . . 10:16 Reformatting Existing Pipe Labels . . . . 6:25
Pipe Label Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:25 Refreshing P&ID Data Grid Labels . . 8:145
Pipe Label Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:79 Refreshing VPE Workbench Data . . . 8:219
Pipe Label Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:86 Regenerating the Drawing . . . . . . . . . 8:239
Pipe Styles . . . . . . . 2:207, 8:10, 8:14, 8:56 Remote Instrument Information - .irm file 10:13
Pipe Tag Assemblies . . . . 6:40, 8:41, 8:236 REMOVEUDAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:159
Pipes 2:1, 2:68, 3:2, 3:3, 6:8, 6:25, 8:8, 8:48, Removing UDAs from Symbols . . . . . 8:159
8:56, 8:58, 8:59, 8:60, 8:62, 8:63, 8:64, 8:65, Resetting Label Text to its Default Width 8:238
8:66, 8:68, 8:69, 8:70, 8:71, 8:121, 8:149, 8:151, Reversing Pipe and Signal Line Flows . 8:62
8:156, 8:157, 8:242, 8:243 Revision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:44
Pipes and Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:2 Revision Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:165
Pipes Configuration Category . . . . . . . . 2:68 Revision Triangles . . . . . . . . . . . 6:22, 8:115
Labels Sub-Category . . . . . . . . . . . 2:76 Rotating Drawing Objects . . . . . . . . . 8:172
Settings Sub-Category . . . . . . . . . . 2:69 Running a Command for a Batch of Drawings
Validation Sub-Category . . . . . . . . 2:87 8:247
Piping Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:243 Running AVEVA P&ID in "Save To Model Mode"
pit file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:16 2:219
Populate Specification in Database . . . 2:73
por file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:18 S
Port Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:16, 8:96
Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:18, 8:14 Save Drawing Copy After Output . . . . . 2:15
Preliminary Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:1 Save to database on Update . . . . . . . . 2:27
Principles and Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:1 Save To Model Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:219
Process Connected Instrument Information - .ipc Save Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:30, 8:218
file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:12 Saving Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:46
Process Links 2:68, 6:8, 8:51, 8:56, 8:65, 8:66 Selecting Multiple Objects . . . . . . 2:38, 6:11
Project Administration Program . . . . . . . 2:6 Selecting the Style of New Pipes . . . . . 8:14

© Copyright 1994 to current year. Index page vi 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide

Selecting the Style of New Signal Lines 8:15 Standard Sub-Category . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:43
Selecting the Tracing Style of New Pipes 8:15 Starting and Exiting AVEVA P&ID . . 6:4, 6:5
Setting a Pipe Label as the Main Label 8:149 Starting the AVEVA P&ID Drawing Upgrade Util-
Setting Labels to Inherit Values from Drawing ity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:4
Sheet Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:32 Start-up Routines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:213
Setting Properties Sheet fields to inherit previ- Stretching Drawing Objects . . . . . . . . 8:170
ously entered values . . . . . . . . . . 6:22, 6:32 Switching off Label Data Inheritance from Pipes
Setting Symbols to Inherit Label Data from a 8:157
Manually Selected Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . 8:156 Symbol Editor . . . . . . . . . . 2:54, 2:203, 4:15
Setting Symbols to Inherit Label Data from Auto- Symbol Explorer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:10, 8:17
matically Selected Pipes . . . . . . . . . . . 8:157 Symbol Explorer Pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:10
Setting Text Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:12 Symbol Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:54
Setting up AVEVA P&ID to Connect with AVEVA Symbol Search Priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:15
Engineering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:185 Symbol Utility Programs . . . . . . . . . . . 2:204
Setting up AVEVA P&ID to Connect with VPE Symbol Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:53
Workbench . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:178 Symbols Configuration Category . . . . . 2:52
Setting up PDMS to Connect with P&ID 10:184 Symbols with Labels . . . . . . . . . . 6:24, 6:33
Settings Sub-Category 2:69, 2:95, 2:114, 2:129, Synchronisation . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:198, 8:207
2:157 Synchronising Data with a VPE Workbench Da-
Shared Attribute Definitions . 10:29, 10:101 tabase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:198
ComponentClass . . . . . . 10:30, 10:102 Synchronising Multiple Drawing Data with VPE
ComponentName . . . . . . 10:30, 10:102 Workbench . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:19, 8:207
ComponentType . . . . . . . 10:30, 10:102 System I/O Connections, Interlocks and Logic
ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:29, 10:101 Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:20, 8:110
Revision . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:31, 10:102 System Output Information - .isy file . 10:15
Specification . . . . . . . . . . 10:30, 10:102
Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:31, 10:102 T
StockNumber . . . . . . . . . 10:30, 10:102
Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:30 Table Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:22
TagName . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:101 Tag Referencing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:29
Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:31, 10:103 Tag Validation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:170
Sheet Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:38 TagName Referencing . . . . . . . . . . . 10:101
Show Associations between Items . . . 8:240 Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:2
Show Unassigned Items in Explorer . . . 2:18 Text Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:12
Signal Line Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:15, 8:58 Text Position from Origin . . . . . . . . . . 2:163
Signal Line Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:207 Text Styles Configuration Category . . . 2:51
Signal Lines 2:90, 2:207, 6:10, 8:57, 8:58, 8:59, Titling a Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:5
8:60, 8:62, 8:63, 8:65, 8:66 Topology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:97
Signal Styles Configuration Category . . 2:90 Tracing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:213, 8:12, 8:56
Signal Sub-Category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:45 Tracing Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:10
Single Property Label Format . . . . . . . . 6:27 Tracing Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:213, 8:15
Size Consistency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:73 Transferring Data from AVEVA Instrumentation
Spec Breaks . . . . . . 4:18, 6:30, 8:30, 8:136 and AVEVA Electrical . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:214
Spec Driven Configuration Category . 2:172 Transferring Data to and from Excel . . 7:11
Special Piping Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:16 Transferring Data to PDMS Schematic Databas-
Split Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:85 es . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:217
Split Label Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:28 Trim Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:81
Splitting off Branches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:61 Turning Automatic Breaks On and Off . 8:13
Splitting Pipes and Signal Lines . . . . . . 8:60 Turning Automatic Flow Arrows On and Off
SQL Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:38, 8:198 8:12
SQL Server Roles for AVEVA P&ID Users . Turning Automatic Tracing On and Off 8:12
10:224 Turning Fixed Pipe Label Formatting On and Off
SQL Server Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:26 8:14
Standard Pipe Label Format . . . . . . . . . 6:27 Turning the Display of Ports On and Off 8:14

© Copyright 1994 to current year. Index page vii 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 AVEVA P&ID 12.1.SP1 User Guide

Typical Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:41, 8:146 Validation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:4, 6:35, 8:198

Typical Labelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:166 Validation and Data Transfer . . . . . . . 8:191
Validation Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:36
U Validation Sub-Category .2:40, 2:87, 2:110,
2:125, 2:135, 2:168
UDA Assemblies . . . . . . . . 6:40, 8:41, 8:236 Validation using a VPE Workbench Database
Unassigned Items 4:6, 4:25, 6:7, 8:43, 8:44, 6:38
8:49 Validation using an Access Database . 6:38
Unassigned Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:9 Values to Remember from Last Equipment Edit
Unassigned P&ID Database Items 6:7, 8:43, 2:116
8:49 Values to Remember from Last In-Line Equip-
Unassigned VPE Workbench Items 6:7, 8:44 ment Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:117
Unique Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:102, 2:123 Values to Remember from Last Instrument Edit
Updating Edited Symbols on Drawings . 4:22 2:96
Updating Equipment Tags . . . . . . . . . . . 8:7 Values to Remember from Last Nozzle Edit
Updating Pipe Style Colours . . . . . . . . . 8:10 2:163
Updating PipeTags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:8 Values to Remember from Last Pipe Edit 2:72
Updating Spec Driven Data . . . . . . . . . . 8:9 Values to Remember from Last Valve Edit .
Updating UDAs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:60 2:131
Upgrade Procedures in AVEVA P&ID . . 5:13 Valve Label Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:134
Upgrading Blocks to Symbols . . . . 5:18 Valve Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:133
Upgrading Lines to Pipes and Signal Lines Valve Port Information - .por file . . . . . 10:18
5:13 Valve Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:130, 2:134
Upgrading Text to Labels . . . . . . . . 5:21 Valve Size Offset from Symbol Location 2:134
Viewing Upgraded Entities . . . . . . . 5:25 Valve Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:41, 2:189, 8:90
Upgrade Specdriven Database Schema 2:27 Valve Tag Offset from Symbol Location 2:130
Upgrading AutoCAD Drawings . . . . . . . . 5:1 Valves 2:128, 6:15, 6:16, 6:30, 8:24, 8:26, 8:90,
AutoCAD Drafting Guidelines . . . . . . 5:3 8:96
AVEVA P&ID Drawing Upgrade Utility 5:4 Valves Configuration Category . . . . . 2:128
Upgrade Procedures in AVEVA P&ID 5:13 Labels Sub-Category . . . . . . . . . . 2:133
Upgrading Blocks to Symbols . . . . . . . . 5:18 Settings Sub-Category . . . . . . . . . 2:129
Upgrading Lines to Pipes and Signal Lines 5:13 Validation Sub-Category . . . . . . . 2:135
Upgrading Pipes and Symbols from old Projects Vessel Jackets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:40
2:1 Viewing a Drawing’s History . . . . . . . . 8:246
Upgrading Text to Labels . . . . . . . . . . . 5:21 Viewing and Editing Pipe Entity Sequences
usd file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:17 8:243
User Access Configuration Category . 2:191 Viewing and Exporting to a PDMS Schematic
User Defined Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:183 Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:29, 4:30
User Defined Attributes Configuration Category Viewing Upgraded Entities . . . . . . . . . . 5:25
2:183 VPE Drawing Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:35
User Defined Directives . . . . . . . . . . . 2:158 VPE Workbench 2:16, 6:38, 7:5, 7:7, 8:198,
User Defined Sheet Attribute . . . . . . . . 2:38 8:207, 8:209, 8:210, 8:212, 8:213, 10:178
User Start-up Routines . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:213 VPE Workbench Configuration Category 2:16
USER_COMMANDNAME . . . . . . . . . . 8:247
User-Defined Attributes 2:54, 2:60, 6:34, 8:159 X
User-Defined Attributes Information - .usd file
10:17 XML File Document Structure . . . . . . 10:26
User-Defined Lists of Values . . . . . . . . 2:66 XML Model Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:26
Using the Symbol Explorer . . . . . . . . . . 4:11 XML Topology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:27
Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:236

V
Validating Pipes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:34

© Copyright 1994 to current year. Index page viii 12.1.SP1

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.